Pan Africa &

World Review
Second Quarter 2010

PDF processed with CutePDF evaluation edition www.CutePDF.com

2
 The Art of Universality
Pan Africa & World Review
Second Quarter 2010
ISBN# 978-33666-1-0

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, trans-

mitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or transcribed into literal
or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, magnetic,
chemical, thermal, manual or otherwise, without the express consent in
writing of:

Spheres Publishers & Producers™

Spheres Publishers & Producers™

Abuja, Nigeria
E-Mail: spherespp@gmail.com

An Affiliate of Spheres Associates Limited

Suite D10/11, Danziyal Plaza,

Olusegun Obasanjo Way
Central Business District
Abuja, Nigeria

3
 Africa, the World and You
Quarterly Review of Global Africa and World History in the Making

337 pages 444 pages

• Pan Africa & World Review is a picturesque book of quarterly articles commenting on and
condensing issues in the news. It is sectionalized by continent and also by feature sections
which include arts, automobiles, education, entertainment, environment, fashions, health,
information media, science & technology and sports. The International section contains
commodity and financial market data, in addition to global political economy, personalities
and multinational corporation events and issues for the quarter

• Subscribers can write the publisher specifying particular events or issues they would like to
be featured.

4
 Africa the World and You
Quarterly Review of Global Africa and World History in the Making

T he mission of Spheres Pan Africa & World Review is to present a

balanced, fair and constructive perspective of Africa and world his-
tory in the making, particularly for Africa’s professional elite and stu-
dents.
Our vision is that Pan Africa & World Review with its cosmopolitan
perspective become an integral part of African political and intellectual
culture, both on the continent and in the Diaspora; and that through our
academia and library subscribers people other than Africans have an
opportunity to share in Spheres’ Pan Africa & World Review outreach.
Our goal, common to the mainstream African elite, is to advance
Africa’s political and social culture of appreciative engagement with the world at large.
For advertisers of products and services of interest to our target audiences this is a unique
opportunity, as Pan African & World Review is not simply a periodical, but a hard cover refer-
ence book for homes, businesses and institutions, which means in effect that each advert has
indefinite long term exposure.
This opportunity is equally valuable for those marketing capital and high-tech goods and
services, such as mineral extraction products, satellites, banking, insurance and consultancy, as
for consumer offerings such as travel & tourism, sports equipment, fashion, automobiles and
real estate.

Muhammed Kamil,
Publisher/Editor-in-Chief

Advertising Rates
All rates are exclusive of VAT as charged by country

Full Page =N=600,000 US$4,000

Double Spread =N=1,200.000 US$8,000
Centre Spread =N=1,300,000 US$8,667
Half Page =N=480,000 US$3,200
Inside Front and Back Cover =N=700,000 US$4,667
Back Cover =N=750,000 US$5,000
Quarter Page =N=350,000 US$2,334
Promotional Features =N=2,400,000 US$16,000
5
From the Publisher’s Desk

Enlightened 21st century vision haunted by dark delusions

S econd Quarter 2010 was a season of summits. The G-8

and G-20s Summits, of which the former is expected to
be the last; the Brazil, Russia, India and China (BRIC) Summit
and the India, Brazil and South Africa (IBSA) Dialogue Forum
Summit. Surge of the Global South and waning of the age of
North Atlantic global dominance is both implicit and evident
in the fact, substance and significance of the new summitry
formation. Significantly, expansion of the UN Security Coun-
cil’s permanent and non-permanent membership was a ma-
jor point in the final communiqués of both the BRIC and IBA
Summits. However, the European Union, Latin America, Car-
ibbean Summit, the 6th of which was held in May, is particu-
larly interesting because from it we shall see how an inter-
The Art of Universality national cooperation group comprised of the world’s
wealthiest and poorest countries progresses. The challenge
is on the table for the three participating regions. If they can
work constructively, progressively, together it could be a
guiding light and fresh hope for mankind. Verily the age of
imperialism is moribund but the question is how softly or
hard it dies.
Focusing on international peace and security were sev-
eral nuclear summits and conferences, with the Nuclear Non
-Proliferation Treaty Review Confab running from May 3rd
to 28th at the United Nations Headquarters in New York. It
followed on the heels of President Obama’s April 12th and
13th Nuclear Security Summit in Washington and the Tehran
Nuclear Summit on April 18th. On April 8th in Prague, Czech
Republic, U.S. President Barack Obama and his Russian
counterpart Dmitry Medvedev signed a Strategic Arms Re-
duction Treaty (START) that committed them to each re-
duce their nuclear stockpiles to not more than 1,550 war-
heads over the next seven years. START also reduces the
number of permissible nuclear warhead carrying missiles
and war planes.
6 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
From the Publisher’s Desk Enlightened 21st century vision haunted by dark delusions
President Obama advocates a nuclear weapons
free world but the large nuclear weapons stockpiles
that would still remain in Russia and the United
States upon expiration of the current treaty, which
in Washington needs ratification by two-thirds of
the Senate, indicates that this is a century long goal.
Apparently yielding to Israeli pressure the U.S.
backtracked on its initial support for a conference
next year on making the Middle East a nuclear
weapons free zone. Deepti Choubey, attending the
Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty Review Confab on
behalf of the Carnegie Endowment for International
Peace argued, "If you are concerned about Iran's
nuclear ambitions, then a conference on a nuclear-
free Middle East can be another tool or framework The young presidents of former Cold War foes the United
for trying to curb their ambitions. Critics of the con- States and Russia, Barack Obama and Dmitry Medvdeev,
ference need to get past the reflexive view that this discussing amicably in Washington, June 2010
is just an attempt to criticize the Israelis." Mean-
while, revelations surfaced on nuclear technology
transfer discussions between Israel and the apart-
heid regime in South Africa during the 1970s. Excus-
ing Israel from transparency on its nuclear weapons
situation obviously only hardens the resolve of the
Iranians to scorn international concern about the
intentions of its nuclear power program, which
could either lead to Iran provoking a pre-emptive
attack on its nuclear facilities by either Israel or the
U.S. or an eventual nuclear face off between Israel
and Iran. Either way it’s war.
As long as Washington clings to its carte
blanche Israel support policy its global leadership
credibility and profile will continue diminishing; talk Principal Middle East hawks Iran and Israel, currently charac-
of the apartheid character of Israel’s political behav- terized by the uncompromising politics of President Mahmoud
ior is now open and heard increasingly from Europe- Ahmadinejad (left) and Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu
ans, not to mention the indignation with which (right)
Global South leaders regard extreme right led Is-
rael. It’s time for the world to be unequivocal to the
Israeli electorate that support for right wing extrem-
ist leaders makes Israeli a pariah state.
Poland’s presidential jet crashed in Russia, kill-
ing all 96 people on board; including the president,
first lady, cabinet ministers and top military brass. It
was the biggest political transport accident of our
times. Initial findings by the investigating team set
up by the Russian government affirmed that the
pilot had ignored instructions by flight engineers on
the ground not to try and land at Smolensk-North
Air-port owing to inclement weather. The late Presi-
dent Lech Kaczyński’s identical twin brother Jaro-
slaw, a former prime minister and chairman of the
Law & Justice Party to which they both belong, con-
tested Poland’s presidential election on June 20th, U.S. Secretary of State Hilary Clinton trying to balance support
for obdurate Israel with friendly Arab relations
coming second in the first round of voting with
7 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 From the Publisher’s Desk Enlightened 21st century vision haunted by dark delusions
36.46%, behind Acting President Bronislaw Ko-
morowaski’ s 41.54%. The runoff is scheduled for
July 4th.
Another tragedy was the death of Nigeria’s
President Umaru Musa Yar’Adua in early May; four
months shy of his 59th birthday. Yar’Adua had been
on medical leave since last November. He was suc-
ceeded by his Vice President Goodluck Jonathan.
Both men previously served as governors of their
home states. As acting president, Jonathan met with
U.S. President Barack Obama at the White House,
while in Washington representing Nigeria at the mid
-April Nuclear Security Summit.
As president Jonathan took on the Ministry of
Power portfolio promising to finally end Nigeria’s
incessant blackouts. Towards the end of June came
news of a deal to be signed between Nigeria and
the Swiss Addax Group for supply of 100million
standard cubic feet of gas per day for the firing of
one the power plants under the National Integrated
Power Plant, NIPP.
Several other countries changed leaders during
the quarter. Japan’s Prime Minister Yukio Hatoyama
resigned on June 1st after only eight months in of-
fice, citing his broken campaign promise to remove
the American military base from Okinawa Island. In
nobly blaming himself for an inadequate perform-
ance as Prime Minister, Hatoyama also cited a po-
litical funding scandal, in which two of his aides Nigeria’s late President Umaru Musa Yar’Adua at the 2009
were convicted of falsifying political contribution Davos World Economic Forum
reports and sentenced to suspended prison terms.
Hatoyama, 63, whose grandfather had been Japan’s
Prime Minister, was succeeded by his finance minis-
ter Naoto Kan, also 63.
Australia’s Prime Minister Kevin Rudd was sud-
denly dumped by his Labor Party on June 24th,
opening the way for his deputy United Kingdom
born Julia Gillard to become the country’s first fe-
male prime minister. In April we saw the dramatic
fall of the United Kingdom’s Labor Party when a
hung Parliament was resolved by a team up of the
Liberal Party and the Conservatives. The Conserva-
tives won the most votes and Parliamentary seats
but fell short of a majority. With Liberal Party leader
Nick Clegg as Deputy Prime Minister to the Conser-
vatives’ David Cameron the Tories led a majority Julia Gillard (seated left) in 2007 taking office as Deputy
coalition into 10 Downing Street. Prime Minister to Kevin Rudd (standing right in dark suit); on
The Philippines’ June 2 presidential election June 24th she replaced her former boss as Prime Minister
nd
following a party leadership vote.
was won by Noynoy Aquino, son of the late Presi-
dent Corazon Aquino. On June 30th he took the
reigns of power from his former university econom-
ics professor, incumbent President Gloria Arroyo. In
Columbia former defense minister Juan Manuel
8 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 From the Publisher’s Desk Enlightened 21st century vision haunted by dark delusions
th
Santos, 59, prevailed in the June 20 run off to suc-
ceed his mentor retiring President Alvaro Uribe. His
inauguration is scheduled for August 7.
April elections in Sudan largely boycotted by
the opposition gave President Omar Al Bashir an-
other 4 years in power, on top of the 21 he has al-
ready, despite an International Criminal Court in-
dictment against him. Neither international nor na-
tional monitors raised any doubts about the legiti-
macy of the outcome. Following the elections the
Sudan People’s Liberation Movement (SPLM) which
scored a landslide victory in semiautonomous
Southern Sudan began informing the world that it
would encourage Southerners to vote for self- Internally Displaced Persons in Darfur on their way to a
determination in the referendum scheduled for next polling station during Sudan’s April elections. (Below) UN
sponsored Radio Miraya broadcaster Lubna Lasu whose
January. Government of Southern Sudan President
program based in Juba, Southern Sudan’s capital, focused
Salva Kirr, who won with over 90% of the vote,
during the election season on women rights and voter turn
cited the refusal of Al Bashir’s National Congress out.
Party (NCP) to turn over to Southern authorities the
Sudan Armed Forces officers who committed atroci-
ties in the South following the January 2005 peace
deal. SPLM Secretary General Pagan Amum told a
conference at the African Union headquarters in
Addis Ababa with NCP present that Al Bashir’s gov-
ernment had failed to make unity attractive as
agreed in the 2005 Comprehensive Peace Agree-
ment that ended 22 years of civil war between
North and South Sudan.
The governing Ethiopian People’s Revolution-
ary Democratic Front (EPRDF), led by Prime Minister
Meles Zenawi won a landslide victory in the Horn of
Africa country’s June general elections. While Euro-
pean Union observers faulted the campaigning, with accusations of corruption and nepotism, his
which was peaceful, as were the elections, they did home constituency in the southern part of the coun-
not dispute the results. try rallied behind him; violence erupted resulting in
Guinea on June 27th held its first democratic dozens of deaths and thousands displaced. An in-
elections since independence 52 years ago, with 27 terim government headed by former foreign minis-
candidates contesting the presidency. Results for ter Madam Roza Otunbayeva was set up after Baki-
the first round are expected in early July and with so yev fled the capital, Bishkek.
many presidential contenders a second round of Speaking of women leaders, Washington was
voting is quite likely. While observers praised the all praises for Liberia’s President Ellen Johnson-
fairness and peacefulness of the exercise from the Sirleaf when she visited in early June. She was gra-
campaign stage up to the voting, following the elec- ciously hosted by both House Speaker Nancy Pelosi
tions 20 participating parties alleged massive fraud. and President Obama. The American president said
In Burundi incumbent Pierre Nkurunziza was he had been an extraordinary admirer of Madam
the sole presidential candidate after all opposition Sirleaf for many years.
parties pulled out of the polls citing lack of confi- Helping Africa sustain growth, China continued
dence in the process. to expand its economic involvement with a $23 bil-
The most tumultuous leadership change oc- lion Memorandum of Understanding to build three
curred in the former Soviet republic of Kyrgyzstan 250,000 barrel a day oil refineries and a gas to plas-
where President Kurmanbek Bakiyev was toppled in tic petrochemical complex in Nigeria. China in 2009
a bloody uprising during April and fled the country. stayed ahead of the United States of America as
Although he was widely unpopular and assailed Africa’s largest trading partner, attaining a trade .
9 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 From the Publisher’s Desk Enlightened 21st century vision haunted by dark delusions
volume of $90 billion, exceeding
the U.S. by $4bn.
The World Cup in South
Africa kicked off on June 11th
living up to its promise to be the
single most exciting and atten-
tion drawing event of 2010. Si-
phiwe Tshabalala playing for
host South Africa’s Bafana
Bafana scored the first goal of
the first ever World Cup played
in Africa as his team drew 1-1
with Mexico. However, by the
end of the first round Ghana was
the only African team left in the
competition. Group winners were Argentina, Brazil, Brazil players Kaka (10) and Luis Fabiano (9) savor the lat-
ter’s goal in their 3-0 victory over Chile as the 5 time World
Uruguay, USA, Germany, Netherlands, Paraguay and
Cup champions on June 29th became the first team to
Spain, with Argentina and Netherlands ahead on qualify for the quarter finals.
points with 9 each. However, Brazil whose players
say they are desperate for a 6th World Cup title be-
came [on June 29th] the first team to advance to the
quarter-finals, mauling Chile 3-0.
Despite football being Africa’s most popular
sport, African athletes and their Caribbean cousins
continue to drive home the fact that Track & Field is
the sport in which Africans have massively excelled
on the world stage. Kenya’s David Rudisha has been
unbeatable at 800m, with Sudan’s Abubaker Kaki
close on his heels. South Africa’s Mbulaeni Mulaudzi
won the 800m at New York’s Adidas Grand Prix in
the absence of Rudisha and Kaki. The Kenyans and
Ethiopians are dominating distance races from
1,500 meters up to 10,000 meters, while Bot-
swana’s female entrant Amantle Monsho won the
Adidas Grand Prix 400 meters and the Jamaicans
continue dominance of both male and female
sprints. Jamaica’s Usain Bolt anchored his country’s
4 x100m relay team at the at Penn Relays, beating
the Americans who are accustomed to dominating
the event.
Natural disasters and mine accidents never
abate, with China frequently in the news for both,
but now employee suicides are becoming another
source of tragedy in China. Increasingly world lead-
ers are accusing the financial and corporate commu-
nities of a culture of greed; nowhere was this more
evident than in the U.S. Congressional hearing with
BP’s CEO, where he stone walled questions about Kenya’s indomitable 800m runner David Rudisha at 21 is
the technically unsuitable cost saving measures his already the African record holder. Behind him in this photo
country adopted that led to the tragic explosion of is perennial challenger Sudan’s 21 year old Abubaker Kaki.
its deep water oil rig in the Gulf of Mexico. Presi-
dent Obama accused the U.S. government oversight
agency of being in cahoots with the oil companies in
10 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 From the Publisher’s Desk Enlightened 21st century vision haunted by dark delusions
bypassing regulations. The resulting unstoppable oil
spill is probably the worst corporate caused environ-
mental disaster in history.
The darkest side of the contemporary human
story remains manic terrorism, but while efforts are
being made to de-radicalize Islamic fascist elements
largely responsible for this global scourge more con-
sideration needs to be given to the historical and lin-
gering factors that inspire sectarian and political ex-
tremism. Personally I think even handed intolerance
of both Hamas and Israel’s hawkish right wing is nec-
essary in tandem with an externally imposed just
settlement to the Middle East crisis. It seems to me
that the plan proffered by King Abdallah of Saudi
Arabia is the just way forward, whereby all Arab stats
would recognize Israel in return for Arab lands cap-
tured in the 1967 war and a Palestinian state with
East Jerusalem as its capital, all of which the United
Nations General Assembly resolutions already call
for. Rumors have circulated in the media that both
the European Union and Washington are considering
imposing a solution on the parties in the Middle East
crisis. I wish that Saudi King Abdallah’s late June visit South Korea, currently led by President Lee Myung-Bak, has
to Washington will yield fruit in that direction. become a major contributor to global progress in many
Meanwhile nuclear armed pariah North Korea is fields, but is today threatened with war from nuclear
bullying the world, threatening war if it is blamed for armed, fascist North Korea. Meanwhile, the response of the
sinking of a South Korean naval vessel, as an interna- rest of the world is timid compared to the belligerent
tional investigatory team concluded. That China and threats from Pyongyang.
Russia were left out of the investigatory team has
not only made the two countries having the most
influence over North Korea reluctant to recognize
the team’s finding, it further demonstrates the inep-
titude in dealing with the contemporary geopolitical
challenges of those presently assuming world leader-
ship.
Finally, farewell to my old friend film actor and
director Dennis Hopper. We became friends in 1971
while staying in neighboring hotel rooms during the
Cannes Film Festival. Ours was a group of young Paris
resident African, African American and Caribbean
guys and gals, all long time friends, packed in one
room and Hopper, who was then famous for his co-
staring and directing roles in the acclaimed film Easy
Rider, introduced himself and thenceforth appeared
to spend most of his free evenings with us. Reading
some of the media reports about his spiky tempera-
ment I recalled that old psychology adage about how
environment effects your disposition and personal-
ity. With us Hopper was a big brother (more than 10
years our senior), perfectly at home. Everyone in our
little group was ebullient and we all loved and en-
joyed each other, including our new friend Dennis. Dennis Hopper May 17, 1936 – May 29, 2010

11 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Second Quarter 2010
Table of Contents
International
BRIC Summit/IBSA Dialogue Forum 19
European Union, Latin America, Caribbean Summit 42
G-8 & G-20 Summits 43
NGO Responses to the G-20 Summit 50
America and Russia’s START 52
Nuclear Security Summit 53
Iran Nuclear Summit 54
Nuclear Non-Proliferation Confab 55
UN Security Council Sanctions on Iran 60
Currency Exchange Rates & Market Reports 62

Africa
East Africa Community Agricultural Produce Standardization 70
ECOWAS Council of Ministers Adopts Regional Industrial Policy 71
World Economic Forum on Africa 73
Fourth Annual Corporate Council on Africa (CCA) 78
Mid-Year Review of African Stock Market Performance 80
Sub-Sahara Stocks 81
West Africa Regional Stock Exchange (BVRM) 82
Franco-African Summit 83
Franco-African Summit, French President Sarkozy interview 85
Franco-African Summit: South African President on Peace & Security 89
Africa leads world in Christian-Muslim cohabitation 92
Congo, Others in Africa Celebrate 50th Independence Anniversary 96
Congo at 50 99
Ethiopia’s Elections 2010 101

12 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Pan Africa & World Review Table of Contents Second Quarter 2010
Ethiopia-Turkish Industrial Zone 105

Ethiopia gets $125.6m AFDB loan for Addis-Mombasa Road 106

Ghana Central Bank report on first quarter 2010 economic performance 107

Ghana’s revenue loss on gold exports 108

Ghana Stock Exchange 110

Guinea’s June Elections 111

Liberia-U.S. Joint Drug Bust 113

Liberia Millennium Challenge Corp. $15m grant 117

Liberia’s Priority Infrastructure 117

Liberia joins campaign to eradicate polio in West Africa 118

Liberia receives $40 million education grant 118

Liberia debt burden reduced by $4.9 billion 119

Liberia President’s Brazil Visit 120

Liberia President’s U.S.A. Visit 122

Liberia’s post-conflict recovery– the role of agriculture 124

Liberia: AllAfrican.com Interview President Sirleaf 127

Liberia’s investment from China reaches $9.9 billion 133

Mali Development Initiatives Lauded by UN 135

Nigeria Stock Exchange 136

Nigeria signs $23bn refinery construction MOU with China 137

Nigeria National Petroleum Corporation CEO change 137

Nigerian Journalist Union protest colleagues’ murders 137

World Bank to finance Nigerian film distribution technology 138

Nigeria: Calling Shell’s $40 billion bluff 140

Nigeria’s New Cabinet 141

Nigerian Journalist Killings 143

Nigeria’s President Jonathan talks to CNN 144

Nigerian Leader Gets Attention in America 147

Nigeria’s President Yar’Adua Dies 149

Nigeria’s new Vice President 153

13 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Pan Africa & World Review Table of Contents Second Quarter 2010
Nigeria Voice From the People 154

South Africa Strategic Plan 2010-2013 155

South African Banking Confidence Recovers 156

South Africa’s Johannesburg Stock Exchange (JSE) 157
South Africa’s Eugene Terreblanche Slain 158
South Africa’s Dilemma 159
South Africa Finances Youth Development 161
South Africa to Spend $2.15bn on Housing 162
South Africa President Zuma’s India Visit 163
South Africa’s Gautrain comes on stream 166
Sudan’s Presidential Election Won by Al Bashir 167
Sudan’s Key Post Referendum Issues 170
Sudan: Oil Consortium implicated in War Crimes 171

Asia
Afghanistan’s trillions in mineral wealth 174
China leads global economic recovery 175
China-Taiwan Trade Pact 176
Chinese President calls for universal health care 177
Chinese VP’s four nation regional tour 178
China Hosts French President Nicolas Sarkozy 179
China News Briefs 180
China: World Expo 2010 in Shanghai 183
China Auto Show 2010, Beijing 188
Japan’s Prime Minister Yukio Hatoyama resigns 203
Japan’s new Prime Minister Naoto Kan 204
Kyrgyzstan Democracy 205
North Korea dares the world 209
Pakistan Constitutional Reform 216
Philippines Chooses Another President Aquino 218
Philippines: Benigno Aquino III’s Inauguration 221
Thailand’s Political Crisis 222
Middle East/Israel-Palestine: Holding Peace Hostage 226

14 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarte 2010

Pan Africa & World Review Table of Contents Second Quarter 2010
Hisballah, Israel Prepare for War 229

Australia
Australia’s Leadership Change 232

Caribbean & Central America

Haiti’s Challenges 235

Haiti’s Women Demand Role in Reconstruction 237

Haiti’s Most Vulnerable: Women and Girls 238

Jamaica Dimensions 239

Jamaica Stock Exchange 242

Europe
Helping Greece, Saving the Euro 244

Belgium’s Schism 247

Greece and Turkey Rapprochement 248

Polish President, First Lady and entire entourage die in jet crash 250

Poland’s Kacynski Twins 251

U.K. Elections: Generation Gang Up in Britain 252

David Miliband favored to lead Labor 255

Farewell Gordon Brown 259

Veiling Common Sense 260

North America
Mexican President visits U.S. 264

Mexico’s fight against drug cartels 265

Companies news 266

The Obama Chronicle 268

Obama and African America 278

Millionaire Obama 285

15 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Pan Africa & World Review Table of Contents Second Quarter 2010
U.S. Supreme Court Firearms Ruling 286

South America
Brazil’s Workers Party candidate leads pre-election polls 289
Columbia elects rebel nemesis president 290

Arts
South Africa’s Art Heritage Gallery 295

Automobiles
Daimler-Benz Bribery Scandal 305
New York International Automobile Show 306

Education
African Leadership Academy 336
University of Ghana 338

Entertainment
World Cup 2010 Music Stars 347
Lena Horne Obituary 352

Environment
Iceland’s Volcano Stops Europe’s Air Traffic 356
Global Volcanoes in 2010 362
Gulf of Mexico Oil Spill 365

Fashion
African Vibes Magazine “I Wear African” 367
Mataano Collection 370
Abuja Style 376
Accra Style 383
Johannesburg Style 384
Khartoum Style 385

16 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Pan Africa & World Review Table of Contents Second Quarter 2010
Paris Style 387
Washington Style 390

Health & Medicine

Countering Counterfeit Medicine 393

Information Media
Right Wing Media Blitz 397
Essay: Constitutional and State Institutional Theory 400

Science & Technology

Computers: Apple iPad launched 408
Biotechnology: Artificial Life Breakthrough 409
Particle Physics: Matter versus Anti-matter 411
Space Travel: Atlantis final launch 412

Sports
Basketball: Lakers NBA Champions Again 415
Boxing: Haye beats Ruiz 418
Golf: Mickelson wins Masters, Woods still #1 419
Soccer: World Cup 2010 South Africa 420
Tennis: Rafael Nadal #1 Again 434
Track & Field Diamond League 435

17 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Group photo of the 2010 G-20 Toronto summit family photo — Delegates from left to right (front row): Argentine
President Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner, Mexican President Felipe Calderón, Indonesia President Susilo Bambang
Yudhoyono, Chinese President Hu Jintao, Korean President Lee Myung-bak, Canadian Prime Minister Stephen
Harper, American President Barack Obama, Saudi Arabian King Abdullah, French President Nicolas Sarkozy; (middle
row): African Union Chairman and Malawi President Bingu wa Mutharika, Italian Prime Minister Silvio Berlusconi,
German Chancellor Angela Merkel, Spanish Prime Minister José Luis Rodríguez Zapatero, Dutch Prime Minister Jan
Peter Balkenende, South African President Jacob Zuma, Russian President Dmitry Medvedev, NEPAD Chairman and
Ethiopian Prime Minister Meles Zenawi, Turkish Prime Minister Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, Indian Prime Minister Man-
mohan Singh, ASEAN Chairman Nguyễn Tan Dung, British Prime Minister David Cameron; (top row): WTO Director
General Pascal Lamy, IMF Managing Director Dominique Strauss-Kahn, UN Secretary General Ban Ki-moon, Euro-
pean Union President Herman Van Rompuy, Australian Deputy Prime Minister Wayne Swan, Japanese Prime Minis-
ter Naoto Kan, Brazilian Finance Minister Guido Mantega, European Commission President José Barroso, World
Bank President Robert Zoellick.

18
 International/BRIC

BRIC Summit
Report

(left to right) Brazil’s President Luiz Inácio da Silva, Russia’s Present Dmitry Medvedev, India’s Prime Minister Manmo-
han Singh and China’s President Hu Jintao

T he Second BRIC (Brazil, Russia, India and

China) Summit was held on April 16, 2010 in
Brazil’s capital, Brasilia. During the period 2003 to
2007 these emerging economies accounted for
65% of global economic expansion and trade be-
tween the four expanded by 382% during the pe-
riod 2003 to 2008, from $10.7 to $51.7 billion.
The day before the BRIC Summit commenced
Brasilia hosted the IBSA Summit (India, Brazil and
South Africa).
in combating the crisis through unprecedented
levels of coordinated action. We welcome the fact
that the G-20 was confirmed as the premier forum
for international economic coordination and coop-
eration of all its member states. Compared to pre-
vious arrangements, the G-20 is broader, more
inclusive, diverse, representative and effective.
We call upon all its member states to undertake
further efforts to implement jointly the decisions
adopted at the three G-20 Summits.

BRIC Summit Communiqué 4. We advocate the need for the G-20 to be proac-
tive and formulate a coherent strategy for the
We, the leaders of the Federative Republic of Bra-
post-crisis period. We stand ready to make a joint
zil, the Russian Federation, the Republic of India
contribution to this effort.
and the People's Republic of China, met in Brasilia
on 15 April 2010 to discuss major issues of the in-
5. We express our strong commitment to multilat-
ternational agenda as well as concrete steps to
eral diplomacy with the United Nations playing
move forward the cooperation and coordination
the central role in dealing with global challenges
within BRIC.
and threats. In this respect, we reaffirm the need
We have agreed on the following:
for a comprehensive reform of the UN, with a
Common Vision and Global Governance
view to making it more effective, efficient and rep-
1. We share the perception that the world is un-
resentative, so that it can deal with today's global
dergoing major and swift changes that highlight
challenges more effectively. We reiterate the im-
the need for corresponding transformations in
portance we attach to the status of India and Bra-
global governance in all relevant areas.
zil in international affairs, and understand and
support their aspirations to play a greater role in
2. We underline our support for a multi-polar, eq-
the United Nations.
uitable and democratic world order, based on in-
ternational law, equality, mutual respect, coopera-
5. We believe the deepened and broadened dia-
tion, coordinated action and collective decision-
logue and cooperation of the BRIC countries is
making of all States.
conducive not only to serving common interests of
emerging market economies and developing coun-
3. We stress the central role played by the G-20
19 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/BRIC Summit
tries, but also to building a harmonious world of
lasting peace and common prosperity. We have
agreed upon steps to promote dialogue and coop-
eration among our countries in an incremental,
proactive, pragmatic, open and transparent way.
International Economic and Financial Issues
6. The world economic situation has improved
since our first meeting in June 2009, in Ekaterin-
burg. We welcome the resumption of economic
growth, in which emerging market economies are
playing a very important role. However, we recog-
nize that the foundation of world economic recov-
ery is not yet solid, with uncertainties remaining.
We call upon all states to strengthen macroeco-
nomic cooperation, jointly secure world economic
recovery and achieve a strong, sustainable and
balanced growth. We reiterate our determination
to make positive efforts in maintaining domestic
economic recovery and promoting development in
our own countries and worldwide.
7. We underline the importance of maintaining
relative stability of major reserve currencies and
sustainability of fiscal policies in order to achieve a
strong, long-term balanced economic growth.
8. We are convinced that emerging market econo-
mies and developing countries have the potential
to play an even larger and active role as engines of
economic growth and prosperity, while at the
same time commit to work together with other
countries towards reducing imbalances in global
economic development and fostering social inclu-
sion.
9. G-20 members, with a significant contribution
from BRIC countries, have greatly increased re-
sources available to the IMF. We support the in-
crease of capital, under the principle of fair burden
-sharing, of the International Bank for Reconstruc-
tion and Development and of the International
Finance Corporation, in addition to more robust,
flexible and agile client-driven support for devel-
oping economies from multilateral development
banks.
10. Despite promising positive signs, much re-
mains to be done. We believe that the world
needs today a reformed and more stable financial
architecture that will make the global economy
less prone and more resilient to future crises, and
20
that there is a greater need for a more stable, pre-
dictable and diversified international monetary
system.
11. We will strive to achieve an ambitious conclu-
sion to the ongoing and long overdue reforms of
the Bretton Woods institutions. The IMF and the
World Bank urgently need to address their legiti-
macy deficits. Reforming these institutions' gov-
ernance structures requires first and foremost a
substantial shift in voting power in favor of emerg-
ing market economies and developing countries to
bring their participation in decision making in line
with their relative weight in the world economy.
We call for the voting power reform of the World
Bank to be fulfilled in the upcoming Spring Meet-
ings, and expect the quota reform of the IMF to be
concluded by the G-20 Summit in November this
year. We do also agree on the need for an open
and merit based selection method, irrespective of
nationality, for the heading positions of the IMF
and the World Bank. Moreover, staff of these in-
stitutions needs to better reflect the diversity of
their membership. There is a special need to in-
crease participation of developing countries. The
international community must deliver a result
worthy of the expectations we all share for these
institutions within the agreed timeframe or run
the risk of seeing them fade into obsolescence.
IBSA Dialogue Forum
The IBSA Dialogue Forum (India, Brazil, South Af-
rica) is an international tripartite grouping for pro-
moting international cooperation among these
countries. It represents three important poles for
galvanizing South-South cooperation and greater
understanding between three important conti-
nents of the developing world namely, Africa, Asia
and South America. The forum provides the three
countries with a platform to engage in discussions
for cooperation in the field of agriculture, trade,
culture, and defence among others.
The 2010 IBSA summit took place in Brasilia,
Brazil on April 15, 2010. The meeting took place
between the three heads of government from the
IBSA states. This was the fourth such meeting.
Palestinian Authority Foreign Minister Riad
Malki was in Brasilia to confer with the IBSA lead-
ers, who issued a Joint Communiqué on the Mid-
dle East situation.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum
India-Brazil-South Africa Dialogue Forum
Fourth Summit of Heads of State/Government
Brasília Declaration
IBSA leaders in Brasilia (left to right) India’s Prime Minister Manmohan Singh, Brazil’s President Luiz
Inácio Lula da Silva and South Africa’s President Jacob Zuma
15 April 2010
The Prime Minister of the Republic of India, H.E.
Dr. Manmohan Singh, the President of the Federa-
tive Republic of Brazil, H.E. Mr. Luiz Inácio Lula da
Silva, and the President of the Republic of South
Africa, H.E. Mr. Jacob Gedleyihlekisa Zuma
(hereinafter referred to as “the Leaders”) met in
Brasília, Brazil, on 15 April 2010 for the 4th Sum-
mit of the India-Brazil-South Africa (IBSA) Dialogue
Forum.
2. The Leaders highlighted that the three coun-
tries’ commitment to democratic values, inclusive
social development and multilateralism consti-
tutes the basis for their growing cooperation and
close coordination on global issues. They noted
that a first round of IBSA Summits of Heads of
State/Government (Brasilia, 2006; Tshwane, 2007;
New Delhi, 2008) has strengthened the three
countries resolve to continue to work for enhance-
21
ing the role of developing countries, increasing the
interchanges amongst themselves with the partici-
pation of their peoples, and for implementing con-
crete projects in partnership with other develop-
ing countries.
3. Recalling the Declarations and Communiqués
issued during the previous Summits, they took the
opportunity to deliberate on the topics hereunder.
Global Governance
4. The Leaders reaffirmed their commitment to
increase participation of developing countries in
the decision-making bodies of multilateral institu-
tions. They also reiterated the urgent need for
the reform of the United Nations (UN) to render
it more democratic and consistent with the priori-
ties of developing countries. They particularly
emphasized that no reform of the United Nations
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Brasília Declaration
will be complete without a reform of the UN Secu-
rity Council (UNSC), including an expansion in both
permanent and nonpermanent categories of its
membership, with increased participation of de-
veloping countries in both. Such reform is of the
utmost importance for the UNSC to reflect geopo-
litical realities and to have the representativeness
and legitimacy it needs to face contemporary chal-
lenges. They committed to keep close coordina-
tion amongst the three countries and the broader
UN membership to achieve substantial progress in
the intergovernmental negotiations on UNSC re-
form presently underway in New York. They re-
called that an overwhelming majority of the UN
member states agreed to proceed with a fifth
round of intergovernmental negotiations based on
a negotiating text.
5. The Leaders stressed the need to reform the
Bretton Woods Institutions in order to increase
their effectiveness and enhance their accountabil-
ity, credibility and legitimacy. They stressed the
importance of increasing the role of developing
countries in these institutions.
The social dimensions of globalization
6. The Leaders reaffirmed that people must come
first in the formulation and implementation of
public policies, allowing for fair, equitable and sus-
tainable development. They considered this issue
a relevant priority in the context of an increasingly
globalized world, in which the economic and finan-
cial crisis, and the restructuring of the interna-
tional financial architecture that ensued, directly
affect the welfare of people, particularly of vulner-
able groups. In this regard, they stressed the need
to strengthen social policies and to fight hunger
and poverty, especially in times of global economic
crisis.
7. The Leaders also reiterated the need to pro-
mote a job-intensive recovery from the downturn
and create a framework for sustainable growth. In
this context, they underlined their support for the
global jobs pact, adopted by the 98th session of
the international labour conference, which, while
22
demonstrating the linkages between social pro-
gress, economic development and recovery from
the crisis, offers policy options adaptable to na-
tional needs and circumstances. The Leaders also
reaffirmed that their actions in response to the
crisis are guided by the International Labour Or-
ganization (ILO) decent work agenda and the 2008
declaration on social justice for a fair globalization.
Gender
8. The Leaders stressed the importance of empow-
ering women, increasing their participation in eco-
nomic activities and addressing the negative im-
pact of the international financial crisis on their
situation. They received with satisfaction a letter
from the IBSA Women’s Forum and instructed all
areas of government involved in IBSA cooperation
to pay due attention to its recommendations. In
addition, the Leaders reiterated their support for
the full implementation of UN Resolution 1325
(2000). They also recalled the importance of for-
mulating and implementing appropriate policies
and programs in accordance with the Convention
on the Elimination of all Forms of Discrimination
Against Women (CEDAW) and the Beijing Platform
of Action.
Human Rights
9. The Leaders attached the highest priority to hu-
man rights issues and acknowledged the positive
advance represented by the creation and function-
ing of the Human Rights Council. They noted the
importance of their close collaboration therein.
They expressed their hope that the 2011 review
will result in a further strengthening of the Coun-
cil.
10. They also emphasized the need to continue to
strengthen international human rights law, norms
and standards, particularly in the area of racism,
racial discrimination, xenophobia and related in-
tolerance, in accordance with the International
Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Ra-
cial Discrimination.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Brasília Declaration
11. The Leaders welcomed the adoption of an IBSA
proposal in the Human Rights Council related to
the importance of access to medicine (A/HRC/
RES/12/24).
Internet Governance
15. The Leaders reaffirmed their commitment to
working together towards a people-centered, in-
clusive and development-oriented Information
Society and their agreement to continue to coordi-
nate positions for the World Summit on Informa-
tion Society (WSIS) follow-up mechanisms, as well
as in the other fora and organizations related to
the Information Society and Information and Com-
munication Technologies (ICTs).
16. The Leaders highlighted the importance of
building a wide political conservation at interna-
tional level for making the global internet govern-
ance regime as multilateral, democratic and trans-
parent as provided by the WSIS. They recognized
the advances reached by the multi-stakeholders
participants in the international dialogue on inter-
net governance in the last five years. They re-
called, with satisfaction, the fruitful coordination
amongst IBSA countries and the efforts of Brazil
and India for hosting the second and third editions
of the Internet Governance Forum, held in Rio
2007 and Hyderabad 2008, respectively.
Climate Change
17. The Leaders reiterated the importance of a
positive result for the current climate change ne-
gotiations at the 16th Conference of the Parties to
the United Nations Framework Convention on Cli-
mate Change (UNFCCC) and the 6th Conference of
the Parties serving as the meeting of the Parties to
the Kyoto Protocol, in Mexico. They stressed that
the result should be reached in an inclusive and
transparent manner, and should effectively ad-
dress the challenge of climate change, in accor-
dance with the principles of the UNFCCC, espe-
cially the principles of equity and common but dif-
ferentiated responsibilities and respective capa-
bilities. They urged developed countries to take
23
ambitious action to reduce their greenhouse gas
emissions, and to provide adequate international
financing and transfer of technology to support
the efforts of developing countries to mitigate and
adapt the impacts of climate change.
Sustainable Development
18. The Leaders stressed the importance of pro-
moting sustainable development. They welcomed
the resolution of the UN General Assembly to con-
vene a Conference on Sustainable Development
(Rio+20) in Rio de Janeiro, in 2012. They called for
a comprehensive preparatory process, to ensure
that the Rio+20 Conference can adequately ad-
dress existing implementation deficits and emerg-
ing issues in sustainable development, with a view
to further strengthening international cooperation
in this field.
Trade
19. The Leaders stated that a positive outcome of
the Doha Round of trade talks within the World
Trade Organization would be instrumental in eco-
nomic recovery, particularly in job creation, as
international trade experiences its sharpest de-
cline in many decades. A development oriented,
balanced and successful conclusion of the Round
at an early date would bolster the credibility of
the multilateral trading system in the face of in-
creased protectionist pressures. In this respect,
they expressed their concern over the excessive
demands made on some developing countries
without any indication of adequate additional con-
cessions in favour of developing countries.
20. They recalled, with satisfaction, the First Trilat-
eral MERCOSUR-SACU-India Ministerial Meeting
held in Geneva on November 30th, 2009 and ex-
pressed their confidence that trade agreements
and ongoing negotiations between MERCOSUR
and India, MERCOSUR and SACU and SACU and
India will lead to a future Trilateral Trade Arrange-
ment which would form the largest trade agree-
ment in the developing world.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Brasília Declaration
Global financial and economic crisis
21. The Leaders welcomed signs of recovery from
the global financial and economic crisis. They
however remained concerned over the conse-
quences of the crisis for the achievement of the
Millennium Development Goals. They recalled the
vital contribution made by developing countries to
the global recovery. The Leaders underlined that
developed and developing countries should con-
tinue to coordinate approaches and responses to
the crisis in order to achieve sustainable and bal-
anced recovery. They stressed that global eco-
nomic efforts have to respond to the needs of de-
veloping and low income countries, particularly in
Africa. The Leaders recognized that the impact of
the crisis has been severe in many developing and
low income countries. They welcomed pledges to
increase IMF resources and Multilateral Develop-
ment Bank (MDB) lending, and called for the ur-
gent implementation of all commitments in meet-
ing the needs of low income countries, including
the Gleneagles commitment to double aid to Af-
rica to $50 billion by 2010. They called for a sub-
stantial increase in the capital base of the World
Bank, so that it could sustain enhanced levels of
lending. They agreed to enhance cooperation be-
tween India, Brazil and South Africa in relevant
international fora where recovery efforts are being
considered.
Disarmament and Non-Proliferation
22. The Leaders reaffirmed their commitment to
the goal of complete elimination of nuclear weap-
ons in a comprehensive, universal, non-
discriminatory and verifiable manner, and ex-
pressed concern over the lack of progress in the
realization of that goal. They underlined the need
for reducing the role of nuclear weapons in strate-
gic doctrines and expressed their support for ef-
fective international agreements to assure non-
nuclear weapon States against the use or threat of
use of nuclear weapons. The Leaders expressed
support for an International Convention Prohibit-
ing the Development, Production, Stockpiling and
Use of Nuclear Weapons, leading to their destruct-
24
tion. They reiterated that nuclear disarmament
and nuclear non-proliferation are mutually rein-
forcing processes, requiring continuous irreversi-
ble progress on both fronts.
Terrorism
23. The Leaders condemned terrorism in all its
forms and manifestations, committed by whom-
ever, wherever and for whatever purposes, as it
constitutes one of the most serious threats to in-
ternational peace and security. They regretted and
condemned the recent attacks in India that re-
sulted in the loss of innocent lives. The Leaders of
Brazil and South Africa offered condolences to the
government and the people of India. The three
Leaders also encouraged cooperation among
States and regional organizations. In this regard,
they emphasized the urgent need to finalize the
Comprehensive Convention on International Ter-
rorism and called upon all states to cooperate in
resolving outstanding issues with the objective of
an expeditious conclusion of negotiations and
adoption of this Convention. They note that the
fight against international terrorism must be done
with full respect to the UN Charter and Interna-
tional Law.
Peace-building Commission Review
24. The Leaders recognized the central role played
by the United Nations Peace-building Commission
(PBC) in the establishment of the foundations for
sustainable peace in countries that are on the
verge of or emerging from conflict and express
their intention to join efforts and coordinate posi-
tions in the context of the PBC review process.
South-South Cooperation
25. Welcoming the outcome of the UN High-Level
Conference on South-South Cooperation (Nairobi,
December 2009), the Leaders concurred that
South-South cooperation is a particular and essen-
tial instrument for development. Developing
countries tend to share common views on na-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Brasília Declaration
tional development strategies and priorities
when faced with similar development chal-
lenges. In the three decades since the adoption
of the Buenos Aires Plan of Action, technical
cooperation amongst developing countries has
evolved to embrace all forms of development
cooperation. In this context, developing coun-
tries have designed and implemented technical
cooperation projects, based on their own capa-
bilities, aimed at the promotion of effective ac-
tions and policies for social and economic pro-
gress. These include the sharing of knowledge
and experiences, training, technology transfer,
financial and monetary cooperation and in-kind
contributions.
26. The Leaders recalled that South-South coop-
eration is a common endeavour of peoples and
countries of the South, a partnership among
equals, and must be guided by the principles of
respect for national sovereignty, national own-
ership and independence, equality, non-
conditionality, non-interference in domestic
affairs and mutual benefit. Therefore South-
South Cooperation should not be seen as aid,
nor should developing countries engaged in
South-South cooperation be perceived as do-
nors and recipients. They expressed the view
that the United Nations system needs to better
adapt to support the growth of South-South
cooperation.
The IBSA Facility Fund
27. They noted with appreciation that people
and authorities of Haiti, Palestine, Guinea-
Bissau, Cape Verde, Burundi and Cambodia are
benefiting from projects being undertaken un-
der the IBSA Facility Fund. They reiterated the
continued commitment of India, Brazil and
South Africa to each contribute with at least
US$ 1 million per year to the Fund. They also
concurred that cooperation through the IBSA
Fund is a concrete gesture reflecting their politi-
cal determination to contribute to the develop-
ment of other developing countries in the spirit
of South-South Cooperation.
25
Regional Issues
Haiti
28. They reaffirmed their solidarity with the Hai-
tian people and with the Government of Haiti at
these most trying times. They called upon inter-
national community to unite and coordinate,
under the Leadership of the United Nations and
of the United Nations Stabilization Mission in
Haiti (MINUSTAH), to align strong international
support to the national priorities set forth by
the Government of Haiti. They commended MI-
NUSTAH for ensuring a secure and stable envi-
ronment in Haiti and effectively coordinating
international aid. They recognized that MI-
NUSTAH has a critical role to play in the recon-
struction phase and reaffirmed their full support
for the Mission and the United Nations agen-
cies. They also commended the UN Develop-
ment Programme (UNDP) for the results
achieved so far in implementing “cash for work”
programs.
29. The Leaders recalled the IBSA resolve to
contribute additional US$ 2 million to the recon-
struction of Haiti. They agreed that the solid
waste management project in Carrefour
Feuilles, a successful initiative supported by
IBSA, in partnership with local authorities and
UNDP, should be expanded to other areas in
Haiti, deepening on the expertise accrued since
2006. They also noted with appreciation that
the Haitians involved in the project got back to
work soon after the tragedy, testifying that the
dedication of the people of Haiti will be at the
core of the reconstruction effort.
Chile
30. The Leaders expressed their condolences to
the Government and people of Chile for the
tragedy caused by the earthquake that struck
South-Central Chile on February 27, 2010, and
expressed their willingness to support the Chil-
ean efforts for overcoming the effects of the
tragedy.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Brasília Declaration
Iran
31. The Leaders recognized the right of Iran to de-
velop nuclear programs for peaceful purposes in
keeping with its international obligations. They
called upon Iran to fully cooperate with the Inter-
national Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) and comply
with the relevant UNSC resolutions. They reiter-
ated the need for a peaceful and diplomatic solu-
tion of the issue.
Afghanistan
32. The Leaders expressed concern at the continu-
ing deterioration of the military and political situa-
tion in Afghanistan, the growth of terrorism, in-
cluding cross-border terrorism promoted by Tali-
ban and al Qaeda, and its links with international
terrorism. They reiterated, in this context, that a
coherent and a united international commitment,
both in its developmental and security/military
aspects, remained of paramount importance. In
this context, they also emphasized the need to
strengthen the Afghan National Security Forces.
They agreed to continue to cooperate and coordi-
nate their efforts to impart greater strength to the
process. They reaffirmed their commitment to a
democratic, pluralistic and stable Afghanistan.
They underlined the centrality of the regional as-
pect in the reconstruction and development proc-
ess in Afghanistan. The Leaders condemned the
terrorist attack targeting Indian humanitarian and
development workers in Kabul on February 26,
2010.
NEPAD/AU structure
33. The Leaders welcomed the 2010 decision of
the AU Assembly to further integrate the New
Partnership for Africa's Development (NEPAD) into
the AU structures and the re-naming of the NEPAD
Secretariat to the NEPAD Planning and Coordinat-
ing Agency (NPCA). The Leaders took note that the
NPCA will focus on taking further the programmes
of the AU by translating decisions of the AU As-
sembly and the AU Executive Council into tangible
projects and programmes for the Regional Eco-
26
nomic Communities (RECs) to implement. They
further took note that the NPCA’s mandate now
includes the coordination and monitoring of such
programmes and projects amongst the RECs and
member states.
34. The Leaders recognized that the further inte-
gration of NEPAD as well as the augmented man-
date of the NPCA will promote a more holistic and
coordinated approach to infrastructural develop-
ment and in the growth and development of Af-
rica, which will benefit the attainment of NEPAD's
identified priorities in such sectors as ICT, energy,
water and sanitation and transport.
Guinea-Bissau
35. The Leaders expressed their concern about the
recent military incidents in Guinea-Bissau. They
urge the military and political leadership to uphold
the constitutional order and resolve differences
through peaceful dialogue in order to ensure the
progress recently achieved by Guinea-Bissau in
the ongoing process of consolidation of peace and
democracy. The Leaders hope that these events
do not jeopardize the engagement of international
partners in the International Donor Conference
expected to take place in 2010. They highlighted
the role of the United Nations Peace-building
Commission, and confirmed their commitment to
continue to support, through concrete actions of
cooperation, the efforts of the Guinean Govern-
ment to consolidate the political and institutional
stability, building the basis for sustainable socio-
economic development. In this context, they took
note with satisfaction that the IBSA Project in
Guinea-Bissau has entered its second phase, dis-
tributing tools for farmers and organizing literacy
classes for women living in rural areas, in coordi-
nation with national authorities.
Republic of Guinea
36. The Leaders acknowledged progress made by
the Republic of Guinea in its efforts towards nor-
malization of the political environment since the
signing of the Ouagadougou Accord on 15 January
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Brasília Declaration
2010. They welcomed the appointment of the
Transitional Authority led by a civilian Prime Minis-
ter. The Leaders encouraged the Transitional Au-
thority to hold the Presidential elections, as stipu-
lated in the Ouagadougou Accord, scheduled for
27 June 2010 to be followed by the second round
of the Presidential elections on18 July 2010.
Madagascar
37. They noted with concern the current stalemate
in the negotiation process to return Madagascar
to constitutionality and endorsed the continuance
of the SADC Mediator in his efforts towards the
restoration of constitutional order and good gov-
ernance in Madagascar, through an inclusive,
transparent and credible dialogue. The Leaders
called for the establishment of a Transitional Gov-
ernment and the holding of all inclusive, transpar-
ent, free and fair elections as envisaged by the
Maputo and Addis Ababa Agreements.
Sectoral cooperation and People-to-People
Fora
38. The Leaders noted that besides promoting in-
creased consultation and coordination on global
issues among the three countries, IBSA also pro-
vides for important sectoral cooperation and pro-
motion of people-to-people contacts. The Leaders
welcomed the effective interaction among special-
ists from the three countries, within the working
groups on Agriculture, Environment & Climate
Change, Culture, Defence, Education, Energy,
Health, Human Settlements, Information Society,
Public Administration, Revenue Administration,
Science & Technology, Social Issues, Tourism,
Trade & Investment, and Transport. Their activities
have already resulted in the signing of a number of
Memoranda of Understanding. Furthermore,
seminars and workshops have been regularly un-
dertaken and proven beneficial.
39. The Leaders noted with appreciation the or-
ganization and the outcome of the Women’s Fo-
rum, the Parliamentary Forum, the Business Fo-
rum, the Editor’s Forum, the Academic Forum and
27
the Round Table on Inter-governmental Rela-
tions and Local Government Dialogue, which lay
roots in the three societies. The Leaders also
noted the cooperation among the three coun-
tries in the format of the Tri-Nations Summit of
Small, Micro and Medium Enterprises.
40. The Leaders welcomed the signing of
Memoranda of Understanding on Science and
Technology and Solar Energy. They noted with
appreciation the adoption of the “IBSA Social
Development Strategies” and of the “Future of
Agriculture Cooperation in IBSA”.
IBSA Satellites
41. The Leaders decided to the early develop-
ment of satellites in the areas of space weather,
climate and earth observation. These satellites
will address common challenges in climate stud-
ies, agriculture and food security. The IBSA mi-
cro satellites aim to promote and strengthen
space programs amongst the three countries.
Final remarks
42. They affirmed the importance of encourag-
ing the dialogue among civilizations, cultures,
religions and peoples. In this respect, they sup-
ported the “Alliance of Civilizations”, a United
Nations’ initiative aimed at building bridges,
mutual knowledge and understanding around
the world. They commended the Brazilian deci-
sion to host, in Rio de Janeiro, on May 2010, the
3rd Global Forum and confirmed their intention
to be represented at an appropriate high level.
43. The Leaders expressed confidence in the
success of the FIFA 2010 World Cup in South
Africa, of the 2010 Commonwealth Games in
New Delhi, of the FIFA 2014 World Cup in Brazil
and of the 2016 Olympic and Paralympic Games
in Rio de Janeiro. They recognized that hosting
these events reflects the positive momentum of
developing countries, and of the three countries
in particular, and that they are potentially a tool
for their social and economic development.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Brasília Declaration
44. They decided that the VII Trilateral Commis-
sion will be held in India by the end of 2010. They
also decided that South Africa will host the VIII
Trilateral Commission and the V IBSA Summit of
Heads of State/Government towards the end of
2011.
45. The Prime Minister of India and the President
of South Africa expressed their gratitude to the
President and the people of Brazil for successfully
convening the 4th IBSA Summit.
Social Development
Strategies
A paper from the India-Brazil-South Africa Dia-
logue Forum
The post-colonial era has seen a number of coun-
tries acknowledging the principle of enhancing the
standard of living of their people as an objective of
state policy. Although it is becoming clear that
economic growth is important and can be attained
by different means, growth is unlikely to be sus-
tainable in the long term unless all sections of soci-
ety derive benefits from and develop a stake in the
growth process. To date, strategies aimed solely at
promoting the enhancement of productive capac-
ity have not been fully effective in creating ade-
quate numbers of jobs or in supporting social de-
velopment for the majorities in India, Brazil, or
South Africa. The three countries have thus con-
cluded that what is needed is not solely growth in
productive capacity, but also social development.
Social development is critical for sustaining
the long-term viability, not only of economic
growth, but also of democracy itself. This under-
standing has underpinned political developments
in recent times in these three major democracies.
Social development does not simply involve quan-
titative advances but also incorporates critical nor-
mative elements. On the one hand, it includes a
focus on addressing problems of poverty, and ex-
panding access to quality education, and health-
care and, on the other hand, it also involves ad-
dressing issues of social exclusion such as discrimi-
nation and lack of voice in social and economic
28
Social Development Strategies
processes. What is at stake is quality of life with a
sense of dignity. According to the 1995 United
Nations' World Summit for Social Development,
"the ultimate goal of social development is to im-
prove and enhance the quality of life of all peo-
ple." India, Brazil and South Africa have a number
of striking similarities, such as sharing a commit-
ment to democratic values and the building of eq-
uitable and culturally heterogeneous societies.
They also face common challenges such as high
levels of poverty and inequality, unemployment
and underemployment, and exclusion of the ma-
jority from the benefits of social and economic
development. The limited participation of civil so-
ciety, particularly community-based organizations,
in development processes is also a challenge. In
many instances, this factor is to be changed not to
hinder the IBSA countries` achievement of partici-
patory democracy and effective governance at the
local level.
Some conclusions on how to tackle these
challenges have already begun to emerge from
the interchanges that have been taking place.
Firstly, there is the recognition that inequality and
structural poverty are inter-connected and pose
obstacles for the advancement of social develop-
ment. Secondly, there is a need for a critical in-
volvement of the state, because it is only the state
which can marshal the necessary resources and
coverage to reach the weakest elements of our
societies. Related to this, there is also a clear
sense that we must consider some of the basic
principles underlying a welfare state as being ap-
plicable to our societies. Thirdly, effective social
development policies must be participatory in
character and must involve all elements of socie-
ties, from private sector to civil society, groups
and communities.
Fourthly, given the diversity of objectives and
institutions involved in effective social develop-
ment policy, it is necessary that any strategy for
social development take advantage of both com-
plementarities and synergy across different poli-
cies. It is important that each one of the agencies
involved in the formulation of these policies be
aware of their integrative character and function
accordingly. Integrated service delivery must be
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Social Development Strategies
promoted to tackle the multiple causes of social
problems and advance the human development
agenda. Integrated efforts are required to pro-
mote inclusion of the poor and vulnerable includ-
ing those made poor due to spatial/geographic
segregation and migration status. Fifthly, the con-
cept of social development also underlines the
importance of acting directly at the bottom of the
social pyramid, where hunger, disintegration of
families and lack of opportunities are prevalent. A
comprehensive social protection network could
provide the basis for integration of the families
that are most vulnerable - e.g., through policies
directed at income guarantee, food and nutrition
security, and social assistance so that all families
have access to opportunities of inclusion and de-
velopment. There is also a special need to reform
education, health and housing policies in order to
broaden access and provide for the development
of adequate social infrastructure and delivery of
quality services.
Finally, social policies are not formed in vac-
uum, nor do they emerge as fully developed at the
time of their initial formulation. Effective policy
development can be characterized as involving a
process of interaction between key participants
and as a process of iteration based on learning and
feedback from pilot/on-going implementation. In
this context we recognize the importance of utiliz-
ing research based evidence in the formulation,
reform and implementation, and in the establish-
ment of linkages between different elements of
social development strategies.
Elements for Integrated IBSA Strategies
Despite their similarities, India, Brazil and South
Africa have different cultures, histories and social
compositions. The ongoing process of discussing
and exchanging experiences has brought out inno-
vative approaches that each of us has adopted in
dealing with the issues of social development, so-
cial protection, public health, employment, pov-
erty alleviation from which very important lessons
can be drawn. Drawing on the experiences and
innovations taking place in the three countries –
some of which are highlighted below, the follow-
29
ing can be identified as common pillars of the so-
cial development strategies of the IBSA countries:
• Moving from flagships to comprehensive so-
cial protection
Increasingly, the three countries are moving to-
wards providing social protection throughout the
life cycle through a combination of social insur-
ance, social assistance policies and access to social
services. Such commitment is exemplified by large
scale programmes for non-contributory social
pensions and benefits for the elderly and the dis-
abled such as the Old Age Pension and disability
grant in South Africa, the Programa de Benefício
de Prestação Continuada (BPC) in Brazil and the
National Old Age Pension Scheme (NOAPs) in In-
dia. Similarly, cash transfer schemes to protect
children in vulnerable households like Bolsa
Família in Brazil, the Child Support Grant in South
Africa, and support through the Integrated Child
Development Services Scheme in India are also
important policy tools to help the future genera-
tions to achieve better human and developmental
outcomes. While comprehensive social protection
is recognized as a key element for a more inclusive
society, at present, the three countries are more
effective in some areas of support as opposed to
others and the challenge for each country is to
strengthen synergies between its major flagship
programmes and to address gaps in coverage and
focus.
•Addressing Vulnerabilities and Fostering Social
and Economic Inclusion
The countries are also engaged in promoting liveli-
hood and economic opportunities to vulnerable
groups. Policies to promote and support people`s
initiatives like microcredit, financial inclusion, skill-
building programmes and, more recently, govern-
ment initiatives that recognize the need to focus
on provision of jobs have become important ele-
ments of social development strategies in the
three countries. Moreover, in some of the coun-
tries, these policies are being implemented in a
way that guarantees that segments of the popula-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Social Development Strategies
tion who face extra vulnerability due to gender,
ethnicity and economic distress receive special
attention in the design and implementation of
such programmes. The National Rural Employment
Guarantee Programme (NREGp) in India is an ex-
ample of this trend. The programme recognizes
the right to work and has embedded in its design
measures to make sure that disadvantaged seg-
ments (including women) in society fully benefit
from the programme. Moreover, NREG pro-
grammes also help to build infrastructure at the
community level that will provide a second round
of benefits to both the direct beneficiaries as well
as non-beneficiaries of the programme. The Ex-
panded Public Works Programme (EPWP) has
helped South Africa to tackle the high unemploy-
ment rates and has been innovative in the way it
goes beyond physical infrastructure to also focus
on social services and care economy (e.g. Home
Community Based Care (HCBC) and Early Child-
hood Development (ECD). In its second phase, the
EPWP is expected to further expand ECD and HCBC
services and to move into other activities such as
school nutrition, voluntary counselling and testing
(VCT), school caretakers, etc. as well as explicitly
employing and assisting low-income women in
tasks which are currently undertaken as unpaid
work). In Brazil, credit to small business has
boomed recently specially in the poorest areas,
and the integration of the job opportunities cre-
ated by the Accelerating Growth Plan (PAC) and
the adult population in beneficiaries families of
Bolsa Familia, through training and job placement
(PLANSEQ), hint at a promising area of integration
of both social protection and economic inclusion
programmes.
• Investing in human capital and ensuring access
to basic services
The three countries are committed to broadening
access to education, health, housing, water and
sanitation. The countries recognize that these di-
mensions are correlated with income, but cannot
be simply tackled only with growth. There is need
for a strong state-led investment policy to guaran-
tee supply, inclusive access and the quality of
30
these services. Important innovations are taking
place in the health education and health sectors of
the three countries. In the health sector, there is
Brazilian experience in ensuring affordable access
and provision of HIV/AIDS drugs`; India`s initia-
tives in the context of education and health in-
clude the Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan Scheme (SSA) - a
national flagship programme which aims to pro-
vide useful and relevant elementary education for
all children in the 6-14 age groups by 2010 - and
The National Rural Health Mission (NRHM), which
is a government scheme that aims at providing
valuable healthcare services to rural households.
The latter programme includes a focus on provid-
ing every village in the country with a trained fe-
male community health activist - `ASHA` or Ac-
credited Social Health Activist - who is selected
from the village itself and accountable to it and is
trained to work as an interface between the com-
munity and the public health system.
Ensuring Food Security
The countries recognize that food security is a pre-
requisite for social development, a fact that was
brought home by the recent trends involving dra-
matic food price rises and price variations. Food
security is a major policy and political issue in all
three countries. In India, current food security
measures include a targeted food support pro-
gramme, the TPDS, which provides for different
levels of subsidy according to the following three
categories of households: APL (above poverty
line), BPL (below poverty line) and Antodaya (ultra
poor) households, and the National Programme of
Nutritional Support to Primary Education
(NPNSPE) commonly known as the Mid Day Meal
Scheme. A draft Food Security Bill is under discus-
sion; in South Africa, the school feeding pro-
grammes constitute an important initiative. In Bra-
zil the Hunger Zero strategy, an umbrella under
which several programmes generate synergies to
guarantee food security has brought to the front
stage the discussion on food security. It is also
worth mentioning the potential links that can be
generated between food security programmes
and purchase of the produce of small landowners,
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Social Development Strategies
an integration that has the potential to support
social and economic inclusion, e.g. see Brazil`s Na-
tional Program for Strengthening Family Agricul-
ture (PRONAF) coupled with the Purchase of Food
from Family Agriculture (PAA) program where the
food purchased is sent to food insecure people
and used in food programs (such as School Meals)
so that the program addresses security of small
farmers, food provision and nutrition security in
tandem.
Promoting Civil Society Participation and Deepen-
ing Democracy
The countries are conscious of the need to ensure
effective partnerships with civil society in policy
development and strengthen accountability in im-
plementation for effective service delivery through
institutionalization of civil society forums. They
commit to participatory democracy and effective
governance at local levels through identification
and implementation of policy innovations such as
the Right to Information, institutionalized social
audits and local participatory planning in relation
to NREGP in India; and strengthening the institu-
tional capacity of community based organizations
to act, as in South Africa`s newly launched Com-
munity Works Program (CWP), which uses com-
munity participation to identify `useful work` and
priorities which are multi-sectoral and contribute
to public/community goods and services. Also Bra-
zil`s participatory budget experiences and the Self
Help Groups (SHGs) - Banks linkage Programme in
India which aims at providing a cost effective
mechanism for providing financial services to the
'unreached poor' are examples of this commit-
ment. This process seeks to improve participation
of Community Based Organizations in decision
making and ensure that voices of the poor are
heard, access to information is improved
(including language access) and that bridges are
built between macro level initiatives and local eco-
nomic and social development priorities.
•Working towards sustainable development
Over the past few years there has been growing
awareness about the need to address issues at the
31
intersection of poverty and the environment. Risks
posed to local communities by global warming are
also attracting attention as is the need to explore
alternative sources of energy. Facilitating adapta-
tion and mitigation through social protection, and
identifying opportunities for strengthening liveli-
hood diversification are emerging as priorities in
many areas. India`s National Rural Employment
Guarantee Act (NREGA) and South Africa`s Ex-
panded Public Works Program (EPWP) both have
strong natural resource management components
with a view to either complementing the focus of
rural development strategies (e.g. increasing agri-
cultural productivity and livelihood creation in In-
dia) or addressing various environmental and
MDG-related issues. In the context of emerging
environmental conservation and climate change
concerns, job creation at the intersection of the
environmental conservation, natural resource
management, and poverty reduction are an im-
portant emerging area of focus (i.e., as green jobs
and economy) for the three countries to explore.
In the context of alternative bio-energy options,
the focus is often on the adoption of large-scale
mechanized farming practices but such ap-
proaches often exclude small-scale farmers from
participating in the emerging bio fuels markets,
thus potentially exacerbating their poverty and
social exclusion. Brazil`s Social Fuel Stamp pro-
gramme, which attempts to address the question
of social sustainability` of bio fuels by providing
tax incentives for biodiesel producers to purchase
feed-stocks from small family farms in poorer re-
gions of the country, is an example of policy that
takes this issue into account.
• Embracing local knowledge and culture
Another relevant pillar deals with the promotion
and integration of local knowledge and culture in
the strategies for eradication of poverty and hun-
ger, as well as in strategies to address climate
change and biodiversity issues. The importance of
incorporating local culture and knowledge in sec-
tor-specific programmes on education, health,
agriculture practices and water management -
both for the benefit of local communities and as
valuation of their contribution to continued global
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
Social Development Strategies
cultural diversity - is being explored in the three
countries.
The programmes highlighted under these
seven pillars as well as other programmes not
mentioned here have been offering a great oppor-
tunity for each of the countries to strengthen the
development of integrated strategies through a
comparative learning and exchange process. This
learning process encompass a better understand-
ing of the functioning of specific programmes in
the particular country context and identifying the
challenges they face in linking supply (programme
delivery and quality) and demand components.
Most important, it offers a platform to reflect on
how some programme components developed in
a specific country context could be adapted to
other countries context to improve service deliv-
ery and the effectiveness of social development
programmes in mitigating poverty and inequality.
This process is to benefit not only the three coun-
tries, but also third countries interacting with IBSA
countries through development cooperation pro-
jects. The promotion of social equity and inclusive
growth through effective implementation of gov-
ernment strategies is a goal for IBSA that must be
taken into account in all occasions.
Future of Agriculture Co-
Operation in India, Brazil and
South Africa (IBSA)
1. Background
Market liberalization and globalization have led to
significant changes in agriculture and agri-food
markets in developing countries including India,
Brazil and South Africa. The food basket is chang-
ing rapidly, away from staple food grains towards
high-value fresh and processed food commodities
with increasing demand for safe and quality food.
In response, the agricultural production portfolio
too is changing rapidly, with a higher growth in
production of high-value processed food products.
The changing consumption and production pat-
terns are being accompanied by changes in agri-
cultural marketing systems. The traditional mar-
keting sys-
IBSA Agriculture Cooperation Prospects
tems dominated by ad hoc transactions are being
replaced by coordinated, integrated marketing
systems such as supermarkets, retail chains and
contract production. Further, with unfolding of
globalization a shift is taking place in agricultural
exports, with increasing share of high-value and
processed food products.
Though expanding market is an opportunity
for farmers to switch from subsistence towards
commercial/industrialized agriculture, the transi-
tion is unlikely to be smooth. Increasing demand
for food safety and quality is compelling retailers
and exporters to enforce grades and standards
right from genetics to end users. Farmers will be
exposed to more global competition; access to
global technology will be more difficult than in the
past because of increasing privatization of agricul-
tural research and stringent intellectual property
regime. The population in developing countries
continues to grow, though at a decelerating rate.
Most of this growth will occur in urban popula-
tion, implying an increasing demand for land and
water for non-agricultural uses.
The changing economic environment – driven
by both internal and external forces, suggest that
the agricultural sector in developing countries is
likely to come under significant adjustment pres-
sure. In a fast changing scenario, there is an in-
creasing concern about the likely changes in the
livelihoods of farmers especially small-scale farm-
ers who earn their livelihoods by cultivating tiny
pieces of land.
In 2008, agriculture in India, Brazil and South
Africa was at different stages of development. The
agricultural sector contributes about 18 percent to
the Gross Domestic Product (GDP) in India, 5.5%
percent in Brazil and 3 percent in South Africa.
Though consistent with the theory of economic
development, share of agriculture in GDP has
been declining in these countries, agriculture re-
mains an economic sector from the perspective of
employment especially in India. About 52 percent
of the total population in India, 14 percent in Bra-
zil and 13 percent in South Africa depends on agri-
culture for livelihood. The per capita arable land
per agricultural person is the lowest (0.28ha) in
India, followed by Brazil (2.2ha) and South Africa
32 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
IBSA Agriculture Cooperation Prospects
(2.5ha). In Brazil about 50 percent [of the] farms
are of less than 10ha in size (as against average
farm size of 68ha) sharing about 3 percent of the
land. On the other hand, in India farms of above
10 ha are rare. Over 86 percent of the farms in
India are of less than 2 ha in size, controlling 45
percent of the land. Also, there is considerable
difference in per capita income across these coun-
tries. Per capita income in South Africa is
about three times more and in Brazil bout two
times more than in India. The head-count poverty
is about 22 percent of the population in India and
Brazil, and around 40 percent in South Africa.
Despite its declining importance in economy,
agricultural sector’s performance has been satis-
factory in India and Brazil, where it grew at an an-
nual rate of 3 and 4.1 percent respectively during
1991-2004. In South Africa the growth was 2.7
percent. Growth in agricultural sector in Brazil
seems to be export-led. Brazil’s share in global ag-
ricultural trade has increased from 2.3 percent in
1991 to 4.8 percent in 2005. India has also consoli-
dated its position by increasing its export share
form 0.9 to 1.2 percent during this period, while
the share of South Africa has remained almost un-
changed at 0.7 percent. As such agricultural ex-
ports comprise 32 percent of the merchandise ex-
ports in Brazil, 12 percent in India and 8 percent in
South Africa.
2. Potential Areas for future Agriculture Coopera-
tion in IBSA
This backdrop highlights the importance of agricul-
tural co-operation to reduce poverty within IBSA.
There are significant synergies between these
countries for agricultural co-operation as they
have developed substantial capabilities in agricul-
tural sector. IBSA countries can reinforce their
strength in agricultural sector by synergizing their
complementarities. To exactly pinpoint the areas
of future co-operation among IBSA countries, a
detailed empirical study would be required. The
study can highlight the synergies, complementari-
ties and comparative advantages of each country.
It can also highlight the common concerns for agri-
cultural sector at global level, especially trade and
food safety aspects. However, the future of agri-
33
cultural co-operation in some of the important
areas has been tentatively indicated in the follow-
ing areas.
2.1 Food Processing: There is a tremendous poten-
tial for cooperation in the food processing sector.
Brazil has distinct mileage in the food processing
sector and known for its capabilities in the food
processing. Brazil developed a wide variety of
value added products from root crops like cassava
and other horticultural crops. South Africa also
has a highly developed agribusiness and food
processing experience and expertise in a wide
range of sectors. IBSA members need to share
these capabilities.
2.2 Food Safety Measures: IBSA countries need to
share their expertise, capabilities and experiences
in complying with Sanitary and Phyto-sanitary
(SPS) measures applicable to food products par-
ticularly in the developed country market. They
could from a common strategy for compliance
with SPS internationally agreed measures for
greater access to global food markets. Joint strate-
gies should be developed to resist the often im-
posed import restrictions on export from IBSA on
the ground of fictitious SPS issues.
Further, India, Brazil and South Africa have
their own import regulatory measures based on
standard and conformity assessment procedures
including the health and safety. Mutual recogni-
tion arrangements for standards and conformity
assessment procedures between these countries
may facilitate reduction of non-tariff barriers to
trade. This calls for assessment of the present
situation with respect to the compatibility of each
other’s standards and conformity assessment ac-
tivities. The export inspection bodies need to work
together. A study on the possibility of harmoniza-
tion and mutual recognition of conformity assess-
ment procedures may be undertaken.
2.3 Promoting Joint Agricultural R&D: India, Brazil
and South Africa have developed significant tech-
nological capabilities in different fields of agricul-
tural research. Joint research on products of com-
mon interest and exchange of their genetic re-
sources could be attempted. IBSA co-operation
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
IBSA Agriculture Cooperation Prospects
should facilitate in taking these capabilities to
new heights for the benefit of the farming com-
munity in these countries. New issues are emerg-
ing (for instance climate change, emergence of
GMO crops, increasing role of biotechnology and
nano-technology), which may have far reaching
implications in the agricultural sector. A common
strategy for tackling such issues may be devel-
oped. An IBSA fund for promoting joint Agricul-
tural R&D could be set up to initiate such activi-
ties. For smooth flow of agricultural technology
between IBSA, an Agricultural Technology Transfer
network could be set up, which can pool informa-
tion on the availability of agricultural technologies
in the region.
2.4 ICTs for agricultural development: ICTs are be-
coming important for transmission of agricultural
technologies to the farmers’ field. India, Brazil and
South Africa witnessed different experiences and
developed different capabilities in this area. For
harnessing the full potential of ICTs for sustainable
agricultural development, a forum of different
stakeholders like private sector, civil society or-
ganizations and government for sharing experi-
ences/expertise and strengthening capabilities in
this area should be created.
2.5 Capacity building and exchange of human re-
sources: The strategies for enhancing human re-
source capabilities among these countries should
also get priority attention. These countries have
developed capabilities in different fields of agricul-
ture. The exchange of their expertise and experi-
ences will help in sustainable agricultural develop-
ment in these countries. In this context specific
need- based training programs, organization of
seminars/workshops on topical issues would be of
great help in strengthening the human resource
development for agriculture sector.
The above listed areas for future agricultural
cooperation are only indicative and actual areas
along with possible mechanisms would emerge
from the proposed study. In the light of the impor-
tance of the agriculture sector and the potential
for agricultural cooperation in different areas
among these countries, the study is proposed with
the following objectives.
34
3. Objectives:
3.1 Examine the status, past trends and the fac-
tors underlying growth of agriculture includ-
ing livestock in IBSA.
3.2 Map possible futures for agriculture in IBSA
through scenario analysis in terms of its likely out-
comes for poverty, equity, trade and sustainabil-
ity.
3.3 Draw implications of the possible agricultural
futures for agricultural research and development,
domestic market and trade policies, institutional
developments, etc.
3.4 Identify the areas for mutual cooperation for
sustainable agricultural development in IBSA
countries.
4. Approach:
Strategic intervention for improving efficiency,
equity and sustainability in agricultural production
systems needs a holistic approach considering ag-
riculture as a portfolio rather than its sub-
components or activities independently. This ap-
proach coupled with some assessment of the ma-
jor driving forces and anticipated changes, e.g.
increasing energy demand and water scarcity, and
underlying uncertainties like climate change and
impact of international trade and other agree-
ments will determine the likely shape of agricul-
ture in future. These forces can be captured
through scenario planning analysis which will pro-
vide broad futures for agriculture over the next 25
years or so. What will be the shape of agriculture
and how the developments in the countries like
India, Brazil and South Africa may influence each
other’s agriculture and thereby economic devel-
opment?
The scenarios are not intended to predict fu-
ture, but to vision the possible shapes of agricul-
ture in the long-run. The scenarios are based on
past drivers of agricultural growth, economic and
social change and on subjective assessment on the
emerging social, economic, institutional and tech-
nological trends and uncertain events like climate
change. An exploration in the future thus can con-
tribute towards planning for the future at present.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum 4th Summit of Heads of State/Government
The India-Brazil-South Africa Dialogue Forum
Established in June 2003, IBSA is a coordinating
mechanism amongst three emerging countries,
three multiethnic and multicultural democracies,
which are determined to contribute to the con-
struction of a new international architecture, to
bring their voice together on global issues and to
deepen their ties in various areas. IBSA also opens
itself to concrete projects of cooperation and part-
nership with less developed countries
The establishment of IBSA was formalized by
the Brasilia Declaration, which mentions India,
Brazil and South Africa democratic credentials,
their condition as developing nations and their
capacity of acting on a global scale as the main
reasons for the three countries to come to-
gether. Their status as middle powers, their com-
mon need to address social inequalities within
their borders and the existence of consolidated
industrial areas in the three countries are often
mentioned as additional elements that bring con-
vergence amongst the members of the Forum.
IBSA concluded its first round of Summits of
Heads of State and Government Summits in
2008. Over the years, IBSA has become an um-
brella for various initiatives, both in the diplomatic
field and in Public Administration sectors. Thus,
the Group has also become an instrument for con-
necting India, Brazil and South Africa at all levels,
aiming not only to increase these countries’ pro-
jection on the international scenario but to
strengthen the relations amongst themselves.
IBSA keeps an open and flexible structure. It
does not have a headquarter nor a permanent ex-
ecutive secretariat. At the highest level, it counts
on the Summits of Heads of State and Govern-
ment, whose last edition occurred on April 15th,
2010, in Brasília. Additionally, Foreign Ministers
meet about once a year to preside the Joint Com-
missions of the Forum. Six have taken place up to
this date:
- 1st: March 5th, 2004, in New Delhi;
- 2nd: March 3rd, 2005, in Cape Town;
- 3rd: March 30th, 2006, in Rio de Janeiro;
- 4th: July 16th and 17th, 2007, in New Delhi;
- 5th: May 11th, 2008,in Somerset West; and
- 6th: August 31st to September 1st, 2009, in
Brasília.
35
Communiqués and declarations that con-
solidate common positions about global issues
have been issued at the Summits and at the
Joint Commissions, as well as in occasions when
Foreign Ministers meet at the margins of the
UN General Assembly.
The work of monitoring and coordinating
the IBSA activities is a responsibility of Senior
Officials of the Foreign Ministers, known as Fo-
cal Points.
In summary, the progress of the activities
can be divided into four tracks:
I. Political Coordination
II. Sectoral Cooperation, through 16 Working
Groups
III. IBSA Fund for Alleviation of Poverty and
Hunger
IV. Involvement of other actors beyond the
Executive, e.g. :parliamentarians, Constitution
courts, civil society, businessmen and opinion
makers.
I. Political Coordination
The IBSA Forum has achieved important results
in terms of political cooperation. So far, three
declarations of Heads of State and Government
and thirteen Ministerial Communiqués (six of
the Joint Commissions and other seven from ad
hoc meetings), have been issued. They consti-
tute a repository of common positions about a
wide range of global issues.
Meetings amongst IBSA representatives have
also been held at the margins of multilateral
forums (e.g. Human Rights Council, WTO, WIPO,
Antarctic Treaty, Conference for the Recon-
struction of Palestine), as a means to reinforce
the positions of mutual interest.
II. Sectoral Cooperation
The following Working Groups were established
with the objective of deepening the mutual
knowledge and exploring common points of
interest on sectoral areas:
- Public Administration;
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum

The India-Brazil-South Africa Dialogue Forum

- Revenue Administration; *To promote South-South dialogue, cooperation
- Agriculture; and common positions on issues of international
- Human Settlements; importance;
- Science and Technology (includes Antarctic *To promote trade and investment opportunities
Research); between the three regions of which they are part;
- Trade and Investment; *To promote international poverty alleviation and
- Culture; social development;
- Defense; *To promote the trilateral exchange of informa-
- Information Society; tion, international best practices, technologies and
- Social Development; skills, as well as to compliment each others com-
- Education; petitive strengths into collective synergies
- Energy; *To promote cooperation in a broad range of ar-
- Environment and Climate Change; eas, namely agriculture, climate change, culture,
- Health; defence, education, energy, health, information
- -Transport; and society, science and technology, social develop-
- Tourism. ment, trade and investment, tourism and trans-
port.
Within the Working Groups, agreements
and Memoranda of Understandings were Origin: Brasilia Declaration
signed, in order to legally support the coopera- The birth of IBSA officially known as IBSA Dialogue
tion. As of 2010, twelve of such documents Forum was a sequel of Brasilia Declaration,
were in force: adopted by Ministers Nkosazana Dlamini Zuma
- Public Administration and Governance; from South Africa, Celso Amorim from Brazil and
- Revenue Administration; Yashwant Sinha from India in 2003. The three lead-
- Biofuels; ers had met on June 6, 2003, following ongoing
- Cultural Cooperation; consultations and after the respective Heads of
- Superior Education; State and/or Government of their countries held
- Social Issues; conversations during the G-8 meeting, in Evian.
- Eolic Energy;
- Health and Medicine; New Delhi Agenda for Cooperation
- Human Settlements; First Meeting of the Trilateral Commission of the
- Environment; IBSA Dialogue Forum was held in New Delhi on 4th
- Civil Aviation; and and 5th March 2004. It is known as New Delhi
- Woman Development and Gender Equality. Agenda for Cooperation.

Furthermore, further five Memoranda Cape Town Ministerial Communiqué

were signed and are currently subject to ratifi- Second Meeting of the Trilateral Commission of the
cation: IBSA Dialogue Forum was held at Cape Town from
- Merchant Shipping and other Maritime Trans- 10-11 March 2005. This was Cape Town Ministerial
port; Communiqué.
-Trade;
- Information Society; Rio de Janeiro Ministerial Communiqué
- Agriculture; Third Meeting of the Trilateral Commission of the
- Tourism. IBSA Dialogue Forum was held in Rio de Janeiro on
30 March 2006. This was Rio de Janeiro Ministerial
Objectives: Communiqué.
The main objectives of the IBSA Dialogue Forum
are as follows:
36 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
-
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum

Summits: Pan Africa & World Review

♦ 1st IBSA summit was held in September, 2006
at Brasilia, Brazil. Quarterly Review of Global Africa and
♦ 2nd IBSA summit was held in October, 2007
at Pretoria, South Africa World History in the Making
♦ 3rd IBSA summit was held in October, 2008 at
New Delhi, India Africa, the World and You
♦ 4th IBSA summit was held on April 15, 2010 at
Brasília, Brazil.

Trade Volume:
Trade between IBSA members amounted to
around US$11.9 billion in 2009

Discussions :
Discussions were held on various global issues viz.
Iran and nuclear weapons, the Middle East con-
flict, the furtherance of IBSA, reconstruction of
Haiti through the IBSA Fund for Alleviation of Pov-
erty and Hunger, and cooperation in science and
technology.

Leaders highlighted that the three countries’ com-

mitment to democratic values, inclusive social de-
velopment and multilateralism constitutes the ba-
sis for their growing cooperation and close coordi-
nation on global issues

IBSA Satellite:
India, Brazil and South Africa will explore the feasi-
bility of launching an IBSA satellite. IBSA satellite
was on the agenda of the Grouping of these coun-
tries. The data to be supplied by this satellite will
be very useful for all the three countries as they
are fastest developing and emerging economies.

The IBSA Facility Fund:

The leaders of the IBSA reiterated the continued
commitment of India, Brazil and South Africa to
each contribute with at least US$ 1 million per
year to the Fund. The people and authorities of
Haiti, Palestine, Guinea-Bissau, Cape Verde, Bu-
rundi and Cambodia are benefiting from projects
being undertaken under the IBSA Facility Fund.

Next IBSA Summit:

South Africa will host the VIII Trilateral Commis-
sion and the V IBSA Summit of Heads of State/
Government towards the end of 2011.
37 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum

IBSA Ministers Joint Communiqué on the Situation in

the Middle East
On the occasion of the Fourth IBSA Summit,
in Brasilia, on April 15th 2010, the Ministers
of Brazil, India and South Africa met with the
Palestinian Foreign Minister Riad Malki.

2. The Ministers indicated that India, Brazil

and South Africa, as members of the IBSA
Forum, are convinced that a comprehensive
peace in the Middle East is crucial, not only
for the peoples and countries of the region,
but also for the international peace and se-
curity.

3. In line with the relevant UN Resolutions,

the Madrid principles, the Road Map and
the Arab Peace Initiative, the IBSA countries
call for the urgent resumption of negotia-
tions that will lead to a two-state solution,
with the creation of a sovereign, democratic, inde- Palestinian Authority Foreign Minister Riad Malki was in Brasi-
pendent, united and viable Palestinian State, coex- lia to meet IBSA leaders and ministerial delegations
isting peacefully alongside Israel, within secure, in the West Bank. In addition, they expressed
pre-1967 borders, with East Jerusalem as its capi- deep concern at the issuance by Israel of Military
tal. Order 1650.

4. They note that a comprehensive Arab-Israeli
peace process, including between Israel and Pales-
tine, must reach concrete progress on all tracks
and reiterate their support to efforts aimed at re-
activating talks between Israel, Syria and Lebanon.
An enlarged participation of the international
community in this endeavour, including develop-
ing countries with good relations with all parties,
could bring a fresh perspective to the peace proc-
ess, and IBSA countries will actively support this
process.
5. The IBSA countries strongly urge the Israeli gov-
ernment to freeze all settlement activity in the
occupied Palestinian territories, including “natural
growth”, and to reverse its decision to advance
planning for new housing units in East Jerusalem.
Concerned by the continuing deterioration of the
humanitarian situation in Gaza, they also call on
Israel to alleviate circulation restrictions on the
movement of people and goods, both in Gaza and
38
6. Conflicts in the Middle East remain essentially
political in nature and cannot be resolved by
force. The IBSA countries therefore call upon all
actors not to pursue policies, measures and ac-
tions that inflict damage and suffering, particularly
to civilians.
7. They express support for mediation efforts with
a view to reaching domestic Palestinian reconcilia-
tion and urge all interested parties to contribute
to that purpose. They call on the international
community to contribute, on a sustained, concrete
and urgent basis, to the state-building efforts un-
dertaken by the Palestinian National Authority,
recalling the IBSA readiness to continue its com-
mitments in this regard.
8. IBSA countries will continue consultations on
the matter.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum
Statement by President Jacob Zuma
to media briefing at the conclusion of the 4th IBSA Summit
15 April 2010, Brasilia, Brazil
Your Excellency, President Lula da Silva,
Your Excellency, Prime Minister Singh,
Members of the delegations of Brazil, India and
South Africa,
Members of the media,
Ladies and Gentleman,
I wish to extend my sincere gratitude to President
Lula da Silva for graciously hosting this 4th Summit
of the Heads of State and Government of Brazil,
India and South Africa.
This summit has proven the value of this forum for
cooperation among our three countries.
It is clear from the discussions today that this fo-
rum is rapidly developing into an effective vehicle
for engagement and collaboration.
While we can already point to a number of
achievements, including the agreements that have
been signed here today, it is becoming ever more
obvious that we have yet to fully explore the po-
tential of this trilateral relationship.
The working groups that have been established
are making progress in a number of areas, using
our collective insights, experiences and resources
39
to improve the lives of our people.
We have had an opportunity today to review
the work being done, and to indicate areas
where we need to place additional effort.
All three governments are committed to do
what is necessary to advance this work, and
ensure that it makes a real difference to the
development of our three countries.
South Africa is particularly excited about the
proposal for an IBSA satellite project. It of-
fers an opportunity to expand our coopera-
tion into advanced technology, increasing
our collective scientific and engineering ca-
pacity. We see this initiative as an opportu-
nity to reinforce our shared developmental
objectives. A joint satellite could lend support to
areas like agriculture, education, energy, health,
information and communications, trade and trans-
port.
Ladies and Gentlemen,
We also had an opportunity to discuss various
multilateral issues.
We have seen in recent times the importance of
IBSA as a forum within the broader international
community.
Brazil, India and South Africa each occupy an influ-
ential position within their respective regions, and
hold similar views on key global issues.
We are therefore in a position to make a signifi-
cant contribution to global debate and engage-
ment. This was clearly demonstrated at the Co-
penhagen Summit on Climate Change in Decem-
ber last year, where the IBSA countries, together
with China, played an important role in reaching
agreement on the Copenhagen Accord. We have
been able to effectively represent the interests of
the developing world in such multilateral forums.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum
Statement by President Jacob Zuma
to media briefing at the conclusion of the 4th IBSA Summit
In this context, we had a useful discussion about
the reform of multilateral institutions, specifically
the UN Security Council. We can no longer accept
a situation in which the majority of the world’s
people remain inadequately represented in such
bodies. As the IBSA countries, we have resolved to
work together and with other countries to ad-
vance the reform of the UN Security Council and
other institutions to make them more representa-
tive, more democratic and more responsive to the
needs of the poor.
We will also continue our collective efforts to com-
bat climate change.
This includes further collaboration around efforts
to address environmental challenges in our re-
spective countries.
We each have significant natural resources that
need to be used sustainably and significant poten-
tial to develop renewable energy capacity. We will
also continue to engage in the broader global ef-
fort to achieve a legally-binding agreement on cli-
mate change.
We will once again work together, within the BA-
SIC group and with like-minded countries, towards
a successful outcome to the next COP meeting in
Mexico in December.
We reiterate that climate change negotiations
need to continue under the two-track processes
set out in the Bali Roadmap, upholding the princi-
ple of common but differentiated responsibilities.
Ladies and Gentlemen,
South Africa looks forward to hosting the 5th IBSA
Summit in October 2011.
There is a lot of work that needs to be done before
then.
As South Africa we are firmly committed to do
everything we can to implement the agreements
that we have made here, and in previous summits
40
and meetings.
Lastly, I wish to thank Prime Minister Singh and
President Lula da Silva for a highly successful and
productive summit.
It has done much to justify the confidence that our
people have in this important initiative. We now
have a responsibility to ensure that the work we
have done here does indeed bring about a signifi-
cant improvement in the lives of our people.
By working together we can build a better world
and achieve a better future for the people of Bra-
zil, India and South Africa.
I thank you.
South African technology key to
IBSA satellite programme
By: Keith Campbell
30th April 2010
South Africa will provide the satellite bus for the
first – indeed, probably for both – of the satellites
in the recently announced India Brazil South Africa
Dialogue Forum (IBSA) satellite programme. The
bus is the term given to the basic spacecraft – that
is, the structure and the control, navigation, com-
munications and power systems – on which the
actual observation imagers and systems, experi-
ments, transponders, and so on (depending on the
type of satellite) are mounted.
“Brazil sees South Africa as an expert in mi-
crosatellites,” reveals Stellenbosch University elec-
tronic engineering professor and South African
IBSA satellite working group member Herman
Steyn. “India has big satellites and satellite launch
vehicles (SLVs – satellite launching rockets). In
principle, it has been agreed that IBSA satellites
will be smaller and cheaper and so more afford-
able.”
Brazilian experience is also with larger satel-
lites and the country is still seeking to develop its
own SLV.
The first of the two satellites will be a sci-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/IBSA Dialogue Forum

South African technology key to IBSA satellite programme

entific craft, aimed at studying space weather,
while the second will be an earth observation sat-
ellite. The aim is to launch the space weather craft
two years from now, followed by the earth obser-
vation craft two years after that, or four years
from now. Both will be launched by India.
“The IBSA programme will not get in the way
of our own satellite programme,” assures South
African National Space Agency acting CEO Dr.
Sandile Malinga. “This [IBSA programme will be
run in parallel with our programme.” Over the
next few years, South Africa is planning at least
one earth observation microsatellite as part of the
African resource management constellation pro-
gramme, now being developed with several other Precursor for IBSA? South Africa’s Sumbandila satellite
African countries, in addition to the IBSA satellites. Picture by: SunSpace
Space weather is the term given to processes
and conditions existing in space which can affect
(MSMI), developed by Stellenbosch-based Sun
the near-earth environment. These include fluc-
Space & Information Systems (SunSpace) in coop-
tuations in the solar wind, solar flares, coronal
eration with the Catholic University of Leuven, in
mass ejections (from the sun’s corona), changes in
Belgium.
the interplanetary magnetic field and perturba-
“This is a combination of a hyperspectral
tions in the earth’s magnetic field.
(very narrow band) camera and a multispectral
“Space weather influences earth weather as
(broad band) camera,” explains Steyn, who is also
well as affecting satellites,” points out Steyn. “The
a consultant to SunSpace. “It has a higher resolu-
space weather satellite will especially study space
tion than the imager carried on SumbandilaSat.”
weather over the South Atlantic. There is a region
“The use of the MSMI is not guaranteed yet, but it
there which experiences high levels of solar radia-
is a strong possibility,” adds Malinga.
tion.”
The creation of the IBSA satellite programme
Although South Africa will build the bus, most
was announced at the conclusion of the fourth
of the instruments which it will carry will come
IBSA summit in Brasília on April 15 by the leaders
from Brazil, which is driving this part of the pro-
of the three countries – South African President
gramme. Still, developing and building this satel-
Jacob Zuma, Indian Prime Minister Manmohan
lite will benefit human capital development and
Singh and Brazilian President Luiz Inácio Lula da
technological development in South Africa.
Silva. Speaking on behalf of the three leaders, Lula
Further, this country is already involved in
da Silva remarked: “[The satellites] will benefit the
space weather observation and research, the Her-
IBSA countries and other friendly countries, pro-
manus Magnetic Observatory being this country’s
viding more effect in matters of agriculture, trans-
space weather warning centre. “The planned
port and telecommunications. It is a project sym-
space weather satellite will greatly strengthen our
bolic of the new stage in our partnership.”
position regarding space weather and will greatly
Zuma enthused: “South Africa is especially
increase our scientific knowledge,” affirms Ma-
excited with the IBSA proposal.”
linga.
However, South Africa is more interested in
Edited by: Martin Zhuwakinyu
the earth observation satellite. This is in part be-
cause the country hopes that this will be fitted
with the multispectral microsatellite imager

41 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 International/EU-LAC Summit
EU, Latin America, Caribbean Summit
Report
Leaders who met in Madrid, May 18th for the 6th European Union, Latin America, Caribbean Summit
L eaders of the European Union member
states, Latin America and the Caribbean con-
gregated in Madrid, Spain, on May 18 with a view
to strengthening their bi-regional strategic part-
nership. In was their sixth summit. The first was in
Rio de Janeiro in 1999.
On international issues the three regions
agreed on support for United Nations standards
and initiatives on human rights and arms reduc-
tion and control, particularly non-proliferation of
nuclear weapons. They also acknowledged the
role of the International Criminal Court in counter-
ing impunity for crimes against humanity, war
crimes and genocide.
The Summit participants were unanimous in
their support of free trade, stating in their final
communiqué:
“We firmly reject all coercive measures of
unilateral character with extraterritorial
effect that are contrary to international law
and the commonly accepted rules of free
trade. We agree that this type of practice
poses a serious threat to multilateralism.”
On dealing with the global economic crisis
and its impact on developing countries the sum-
mit’s final communiqué asserted:
“We are determined to intensify our coop-
eration in order to address the global
consequences of the economic and financial
crisis and to prevent such crises from
unfolding again, in line with the outcomes
of the UN Conference on the World Finan-
cial and Economic Crisis and its impact on
Development (June 22nd-23rd, 2009), and
also taking into account the goals set by
42
the G-20 and appropriate regional fora. We
will continue to strive to apply macroeco-
nomic and financial policies designed to pre-
vent future financial crises with their atten-
dant economic and social consequences;
foster balanced and sustainable global eco-
nomic growth; restore confidence; and sta-
bilize world financial markets. We underline
the importance to devote special attention
to the social and economic impact of the
crisis notably in developing countries. We
emphasize the need to reinforce support for
vulnerable and poor people.”
Additionally, they pledged working to-
gether towards a new international financial
architecture, that would among other reforms
increase the voice and voting power of under-
represented developing and transition coun-
tries, while also delivering on non-quota gov-
ernance reforms in international financial insti-
tution, alluding to the Bretton Woods institu-
tions.
Social issues the EU-LAC Group took a
common stance on were gender equality and
gender based violence, plus achievement of
the Millennium Development Goals.
On the environment, the leaders regarded
development of alternative energy sources as
essential, calling for “diversification and com-
plementarity of the energy matrix,” specifically
mentioning renewable sources of energy. In
this context they agreed to exchange experi-
ences on bio-fuel technologies. They also
agreed in principle to reduce carbon emissions.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy
G8 & G20 Summits
Report
World leaders at the Group of 20 Summit in Toronto, Canada
F rom Pittsburg in September 2009 the Group
of 20 Summit moved to Toronto in June
2010 with the theme Recovery and New Begin-
ning; but this time preceded by a summit of the
traditional Group of 8 Industrialized Nations,
which as it turns out is not yet defunct but alive
and well as the core of the 20 nation grouping;
though unconfirmed reports maintained Canada
2010 was the G-8’s final parley.
The focus of this 38th G-8 Summit, held on
the 25th and 26th of June, was discussion of pro-
posals on how to increase child health care in the
world’s poorest nations and an outreach meeting
with leaders of seven African nations. Algeria’s
President Abulaziz Bouteflkika, Egypt’s President
Hosni Mubarak, New Partnership for African De-
velopment (NEPAD) Chairman and Ethiopian
Prime Minister Meles Zenawi, Malawi’ President
and African Union Chairman Bingu wa Mutharika,
Nigeria’s President Goodluck Jonathan, Senegal’s
President Abdoulaye Wade and South Africa’s
President Jacob Zuma were the seven invited to
represent Africa. Invited from the Caribbean were
Haiti’s President René Préval and Jamaica’s Prime
Minister Bruce Golding, along with Columbia’s
outgoing President Alvaro Uribe from South
43
America.
According to the Henry J. Kaiser website,
Canada was particularly keen that donor countries
make good their commitments to developing
countries and also that the Group of 8 focus on
Haiti’s reconstruction efforts. As the Summit
opened there was an $18 billion shortfall on the
$50 billion pledge made to developing countries
in 2005 at Gleneagles, Scotland. Tied into the
shortfalls on pledges is the issue of Global South
countries meeting the 2015 Millennium Develop-
ment Goals (MDGs).
"At the ... summit, I will join my fellow G8
leaders to take action on some of the world's
most pressing problems," Canada’s Prime Minister
Stephan Harper said in a message to delegates
[reported by Agence-France-Presse], promising,
“We will make a real difference and deliver re-
sults.”
Equal concern that G-8 pledges to developing
countries be honored was voiced by U.S. Presi-
dent Barack Obama who proclaimed it was time
for "a new era of engagement that yields real re-
sults for our people – an era when nations live up
to their responsibilities and act on behalf of our
shared security and prosperity."
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy
The G-8/G-20 Youth Summit held
at Simon Fraser University in Van-
couver, from May 9th to 15th,
brought together young people
from the countries comprising the
Summits to discuss international
affairs, promote cross cultural un-
derstanding and build global
friendships. Ecotourism student at
Tshwane University of Technology,
Tribute Mboweni (above right) was
chosen by the G-8/G-20 Youth
Summit team to represent South Africa. Tribute in 2009
won the grand prize at the Bayer Young Environmental En-
voys competition in Germany. She was given the Youth
Summit post of Environment Minister.
Ahead of the Summit U.N. World Food Pro-
gram (WFP) policy director David Stevenson re-
marked, "The food crisis hasn't gone away, it's
been compounded." Stevenson in addressing the
Vancouver G-8/G-20 Youth Summit in May called
for G-8 leaders to stay the course in financing the
$22 billion food security initiative.
Pressing the commitments honoring issue,
Oxfam Canada’s G-8/G-20 Coordinator Victoria
Harnett drew attention to the plight of women in
the poor countries, reminding us, “There are a
thousand women around the world who die every
day in pregnancy and childbirth. ... The message
we want to get across today is that it is absolutely
essential that G8 leaders start keeping their prom-
ises"
As the Toronto Summit neared African civil
society intensified advocacy for increased health
spending, to at least 15% of annual national budg-
ets as per an earlier commitment in Abuja, and
campaigned for fulfillment of the G-8 commit-
ments made in 1995 at Gleneagles. During April
trade unions across Africa marched to, visited or
wrote to Canadian embassies calling on Prime
Minister Harper to ensure that Gleneagles prom-
ises were kept. South Africa’s three major trade
union federations linked up with civil society or-
ganizations such as World AIDS Campaign and
religious leaders, sending a large delegation to the
Canadian embassy in Pretoria. At the World Eco-
nomic Forum on Africa in Tanzania during May
civil society again demonstrated. On June 17th the
Congress of South African Trade Unions (COSATU)
teamed up with Word AIDS Campaign, Treatment
Action Campaign, Doctors Without Borders, and
other civil society organizations, including the Re-
gional African AIDS NGOS forum, to march on the
44
Canada’s Prime Minister Stephan Harper (right) welcomes
Nigeria’s President Goodluck Jonathan to the G-8 where
Nigeria was one of 7 African countries invited in an out-
reach.
American embassy consulate in Johannesburg.
The US Government and President Obama were
called upon not to abandon Africa after years of
slow HIV and health gains.
The G8 announced a new initiative focused
on Maternal Health, the "Muskoka Initiative", so
dubbed in deference to the Summit’s location.
According to Bond for International Develop-
ment, “The initiative aims to mobilize up to
$10billion to support health care systems in de-
veloping countries over the next five years, with
additional contributions from The Bill and
Melinda Gates and UN bodies.” However, Bond
noted that the G8 did not make clear whether
this initiative would be undertaken within the
$18 billion unpaid on the Gleneagles commit-
ment or would be additional funding. Bond also
noted that the Muskoka Accountability Report,
as mandated by the 2009 L'Aquila G8 Summit,
was the first documenting for public consump-
tion progress made on G-8 commitments. Para-
doxically, it acknowledged that Gleneagles com-
mitments had not been entirely fulfilled without
giving figures.
NGO responses were varied but the general
impression was that nothing new on fighting
poverty emerged from the Summit, though some
commended the efforts towards economic and
banking reforms. World Vision applauded the
cancellation of Haiti’s debt. Oxfam maintained
the G20 ought to have placed a tax on the finan-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy
United States President Barack Obama jokes with colleagues during the G-8 Summit in Muskoka, Ontario
cial sector (Financial Transaction Tax-FTT) to at
least partially compensate the 64 million people
forced into poverty by the economic crisis. Make
Poverty History voiced concern that austerity
measures to reduce budget deficits would end
up hurting the poor. The One Campaign, noting
that Africa with over 900 million consumers
could contribute to global economic recovery
through trade and investment, advised accom-
modation of African voices in the G20 would
have to increase if a new partnership is to be
built with Africa.
At Summit’s end, African Development Bank
Group expressed its appreciation for the G-20’s
promise to replenish its concessional lending
window. “We will fulfill our commitment to en-
sure an ambitious replenishment for the conces-
sional lending facilities of the MDB (multilateral
development banks), especially the International
Development Association and the African Devel-
opment Fund,” the Summit’s Final Communiqué
read.
The G-8 also discussed Iran’s nuclear pro-
gram and the issue of new sanctions on North
Korea in the wake of a South Korean warship
having been sunk by a torpedo assessed by an
international investigating team to be from the
North. In their Final Communiqué the G-8
(comprised of Canada, France, Germany, Italy,
Japan, Russia, United Kingdom and the United
45
States of America) condemned North Korea
over the torpedo sinking of South Korea’s war-
ship, Cheonan, and criticized both North Korea
and Iran over their nuclear power programs.
The Final Communiqué also called on Israel to
change its current blockade policy against Gaza,
deeming it “unsustainable.”
Disagreements over whether to cut spend-
ing which runs the risk of double dip recession,
or keep up stimulus, which is pushing national
debts perilously high, were stressed in much of
the media but the fact is that the world’s lead-
ers find themselves caught between the devil
and the deep blue sea. As always, each one is
betting on policies believed to keep them on a
safe middle ground; and while each knows that
political and economic circumstances in every
country have their own peculiarities, they also
know that a critical mistake anywhere could
adversely affect the global economic situation
and possibly bring everybody down as it hap-
pened in the last quarter 2008. Both Obama
and Britain’s new Prime Minister David Cam-
eron stressed the importance of making the
right policy decisions. “This period we are in is
going to be critical,” cautioned Obama. “Making
progress this year, putting everything we have
into getting it right this year is vitally impor-
tant,” Cameron said.
While Britain’s Conservative led coalition
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy
with the Liberal Democrats is
pushing national debt reduc-
tion and budgeting spending
cuts, U.S. President Barack
Obama is urging caution
against focus on deficit cut-
ting while economic recovery
is yet fragile. Republicans in
the United States, intent on
regaining control of Congress
in this coming November’s
elections, as a prelude to win-
ning back the presidency in
2012 are predictably arguing
for reduced spending and
lower taxes, somewhat in line
with their Conservative coun-
terparts in the United King-
dom. Germany, France and
Japan have also unveiled defi-
cit cutting budgets and Canadian Prime Minister Metro Toronto Convention Center where the G-20 Summit
Stephen Harper in a pre summit letter urged lead- was held
ers to agree on concrete deficit reduction goals
with a view to restoring investor confidence fol- no use to anyone.”
lowing the recessionary crisis, leaving Mr. Obama Greece’s debt crisis brought as much panic
alone banking on stimulating sufficient medium to European markets as the 2008 banking crisis
term growth to afford deficit reduction. Prior to did globally; while the uncomforting debt to GDP
the Summit, President Obama sent a letter to ratio in Spain has shifted Euro-zone attention
leaders warning that shifting out of stimulus away from the tenuously overcome recession to
mode too swiftly could result in a replay of the avoiding further debt and monetary crises, the
mistakes that prolonged the Great Depression of mere 0.2% Euro zone first quarter 2010 GDP
the 1930s. Perhaps alluding to the fact that the growth highlighted the risk of double dip reces-
2008 financial crisis started and was most devas- sion.
tating in the U.S., Canada’s Finance Minister Jim
Flaherty remarked, “One size doesn’t fit all.” After G-20 Issues
the Summit President Obama conceded that The ongoing global recession was the primary
countries had to proceed at their own pace in ei- issue at the G-20 Summit at Metro Toronto Con-
ther emphasizing growth or budget austerity and vention Center. In respect of previous develop-
said he was satisfied with the Summit’s outcome. ments, the focus agenda included evaluation of
Mr. Obama should by now be wise to ditch financial reforms progress, developing sustain-
Washington’s long held habit of complaining to able stimulus measures, exchanging ideas on the
countries like Japan and Germany that their trade proposition of a global bank tax and promoting
surpluses are excessive, even as such complaints open markets. Within the context of this focus
are now modified with urging to increase domes- agenda each leader brought his specific agenda
tic consumption; unlike in the past when Bill Clin- to the Summit. In addition to the representatives
ton went to Japan telling them to buy more of the Group of 20 major economies, leaders of
American goods. German Chancellor Angela twelve other invited nations and eight intergov-
Merkel in a recent interview published in the Wall ernmental organizations participated.
Street Journal sharply responded to the Ameri- The divide between the Europeans, who
cans in the premises, “German export successes confronted with the disturbing market reaction
reflect the high competiveness and innovation to the Greek debt crisis are wary of more coun-
strength of our companies,” adding, “Artificially tries falling into debt trouble, and the United
reducing Germany’s competitiveness would be of States which is leery of double dip recession was
46 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy

World leaders pose for the family photo with African Outreach Leaders and extended Outreach Leaders at the G8
Summit at the Deerhurst Resort in Muskoka, Canada June 25, 2010. From the left (front row): Russian President
Dmitry Medvedev, Haitian President René Préval, Columbian President Alvaro Uribe, Algerian President Abdelaziz
Bouteflika, Canadian Prime Minister Stephen Harper, Senegalese President Abdoulaye Wade, African Union Chairman
and Malawi President Bingu wa Mutharika, French Nicolas Sarkozy, American President Barack Obama; (second row)
European Union President Herman Van Rompuy, British Prime Minister David Cameron, Jamaican Prime Minister
Bruce Golding, Nigerian President Goodluck Jonathan, South African President Jacob Zuma, Ethiopian Prime Minister
Meles Zenawi, German Chancellor Angela Merkel, Italian Prime Minister Silvio Berlusconi, Japanese Prime Minister
Naoto Kan, European Commission President José Manuel Barroso.

carried over into the G-20 Summit with China and
India disposed to the U.S. view that the recovery
was yet too tenuous to withstand austerity meas-
ures. Also, the bank tax and Robin Hood taxes
[that would take from the rich and give to the
poor] supported by the European Union but re-
garded cautiously by the American and Canadian
administrations, were discussed. Both China and
India are well out of recession; India registering
6.5% GDP growth for 2009 and China above 10%,
but they are nevertheless concerned that the
countries to which they export and increasingly
invest in do not slump.
In their Final Communiqué G-20 leaders
pledged richer countries (Group of 8) would cut
the ratios of their budget deficits to Gross Domes-
tic Product in half by 2013. Balancing that, the
Communiqué also called for following through on
existing stimulus plans. Acknowledging that
“serious challenges remain,” the G-20 Summit’s
Final Communiqué noted that “while growth is
returning in many countries, the recovery is un-
even and fragile, and unemployment remains at -
47
unacceptable levels.”
Last year America’s $1.42 trillion deficit
amounted to 10% of GDP and President Obama
appointed a commission to work on trimming the
country’s budget deficit to 3% of GDP, a level
economists generally agree is sustainable. Brit-
ain’s budget deficit is also 10% of GDP, but recov-
ering growth has lagged behind other leading
countries. U.K. growth was negative by 2.0% for
2009. First quarter 2010 growth was a meager
0.2%, equivalent to the Euro Zone average.
South Africa’s President Jacob Zuma, the only
African leader at the G-20 roundtable, reiterated
his persistent call for International Monetary Fund
(IMF) reform to give developing countries a
greater say. Noting that the IMF is a quota based
institution wherein quotas determined the
amount of funds that could be made available to a
borrowing country, Mr. Zuma pointed to the on-
going process of Worlds Bank reform arguing,
"Our reform of the World Bank shows that the
slow movement on IMF reform is not necessary.
As leaders, we need to demonstrate political will
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy
Protestors at the Toronto Summit were peaceful until a group of black clad radicals started destroying things
by ensuring that the necessary compromises are
reached for us to deliver on our Pittsburgh com-
mitments." At the Pittsburg G-20 Summit last Sep-
tember it was agreed that a more equitable global
economic order was in everybody’s interest. Mr.
Zuma warned that failure to move on IMF reform
could endanger the goodwill [between developing
and developed countries] earned by the IMF’s
effective action during the 2008-2009 global eco-
nomic crisis. However, he was emphatic about
the essentiality of international cooperation, tell-
ing the world from Toronto, "As Africa we bring to
the G20 Summit the key message that we must,
together as the developing and developed worlds,
promote stronger and more effective and equal
international partnerships for growth and devel-
opment."
On the fundamental changes South Africa
would like made, Mr. Zuma explained, "Our
strongly held view is that quotas must shift to de-
veloping economies as their need for the IMF re-
sources is higher. The shift must essentially be
from developed countries to developing coun-
tries. We must ensure that no emerging and low-
income countries lose quotas as a result of these
reforms," he said.
Karima Brown writing in South Africa’s Busi-
ness Day (June 29) explained the background
48
against which President Zuma is pressing this
point, noting that Zuma’s leftist allies are critical
of the tendency of the Brentton Wood’s institu-
tions’ to give advice and stipulate lending condi-
tions that involve social spending reduction,
which is untenable for South Africa in its quest to
bridge the wealth gap between the beneficiary
class of apartheid and its victims.
Predictably, the Toronto Summits attracted
protestors. Initially non-violent, then black clad
protestors on Saturday, July 26, broke off from a
larger crowd and torched police vehicles and
smashed windows with baseball bats and ham-
mers. Prime Minister Harper blamed thugs for the
violence, pointing out that the $900 million his
government had spent on Summit security was
justified.
Obama’s Summit Rounds
President Obama while in Toronto invited China’s
President Hu Jintao for a state visit to the United
States, but no date was immediately set. At a post
-summit press conference Mr. Obama said he
welcomed China’s [recent] decision to let its cur-
rency appreciate in response to market forces.
After his meting with South Korea’s President Lee,
President Obama announced his administration
would resume talks aimed at resolving issues
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy

(Photo left) Canada’s Prime Minister Stephan Harper (right) with Argentina’s President Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner, one
of two female leaders at the G-20 Summit– Germany’s Chancellor Angela Merkel was the other. (Photo Right) South Afri-
can President Jacob Zuma and his daughter Phumzile are greeted by Royal Canadian Mounted Police as they arrive in ad-
vance of the G8 and G20 Summits, Thursday, June 24, 2010, at Pearson International Airport in Toronto.

blocking completion of a free trade agreement quences.”

with South Korea, stalled since 2007. According to
White House Press Secretary Robert Gibbs auto-
mobiles and beef are the principal outstanding
issues to be addressed before sending the agree-
ment to the United States Congress.
Obama and Cameron endorsed the Afghan
government’s five year exit strategy for foreign
troops. The United States and United Kingdom,
the countries that have had the most troops in
Afghanistan since the 2001 invasion to oust the
Taliban government following its refusal to turn
over Osama bin Laden and other Al Qaeda leaders
for attacks on New York and the Pentagon, have
sustained an increasing number of casualties in
recent months.
On the BP oil spill, the American and British
leaders agreed that it was important that BP re-
main a strong company. Prior to depreciation of
its stock owing to the oil spill crisis BP was Brit-
ain’s largest company. The oil spill, the biggest
and most environmentally devastating in history,
was also considered by the G-20 Summit, which in
its final statement noted regarding offshore hy-
drocarbon production “the need to share best
practices to protect the marine environment, pre-
vent accidents…and to deal with their conse-
49
Summit’s Institutionalization
Asked if summits were necessary, French Presi-
dent Nicolas Sarkozy admitted that they can be
exhausting. "We end these summits depleted,
tired, but we are obligated to participate," he
said. The idea of leading industrial nations con-
stituting a regularly meeting group was intro-
duced by France in 1975, involving six countries:
France, Germany, Italy, Japan, United Kingdom
and United States. Canada was brought in the fol-
lowing year and the forum became known as the
G-7. Russia was brought into the fold in 1997, thus
making it the G-8. South Africa was first invited to
the Summit in 2000 and when China, India, Brazil
and Mexico became part of the Summit in 2003
the forum adopted the official designation G8+5.
The G-20 Summit held June 26th and 27th in To-
ronto was the 4th to discuss the global financial
system and world economy.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy
NGO Responses to the G20 Summit
The Sherpa Sunday, 27 June 2010 13:32
T he NGOs attending the G20 in Toronto have
issued their responses to the Summit. The
NGOs seem to be unsure what to make of the
G20 so as a result their reactions are more about
future G20 agenda items or the gap left by the
G8 from yesterday. Most welcomed the decision
by the G20 to expand into the development sec-
tor.
The Global Campaign for Education expressed
disappointment that the G20 did not progress
further on a financial transaction tax (FTT) that
could go someway to filling the gap in funding
left by the G8. The campaign welcomed the crea-
tion of a Working Group on Development and
their action plans for the Seoul Summit. GCE said
education should be the foundation of any long-
term sustainable plan for development.
(See website release).
Save the Children called on the G20 [member
states] to broaden their impact as a forum. The
agency said that global progress depends on the
G20 leaders working to support the MDGs on
child and maternal survival and urged the G20 to
support the UN Joint Action Plan on Maternal
and Child Health. Save said emerging donors
such as South Korea and Saudi Arabia have an
important role to play while India and China
must do better at home and in their interna-
tional commitments.
(See Save International website for press release)
Save the Children US said the G-20 isn’t moving
quickly enough to offer the kind of global eco-
nomic leadership that ensures balanced growth
and stability by improving the resilience of the
world’s poor. The agency saw some encouraging
language on narrowing the development gap,
but it took no major, new action at this summit
beyond establishing a working group and reaf-
firming the importance of food security. Save US
echoed Save International in urging the G20 to
support the G8 initiative in child and maternal
health and thought the G20 Summit was a
missed opportunity for the larger group to get on
board. (See Save US website for press release)
50
Oxfam says the G20 has drawn a blank on poverty.
The organization said that the G20 missed a golden
opportunity to tackle poverty when it could only
agree to disagree over how to make the banks re-
pay the cost of the economic crisis. According to
Oxfam, the G20 ought to have placed a tax on the
financial sector to offer a significant hand up to the
64 million people forced into poverty by the eco-
nomic crisis. The agency called the G20's decision to
take a more active role in promoting development a
'highpoint' of the meeting.
WWF warned that sustainable economic recovery
needs more than brief platitudes from the G20 on
green recovery than what it delivered in Toronto.
The agency said that the world leaders were still
painting the economy in black and white but it must
include green. Instead of being a summit of real ac-
tion, it recycled and reused earlier commitments on
fossil fuels. WWF did welcome India's announce-
ment earlier in the week to phase out fossil fuel
subsidies on petrol and review the subsidies on die-
sel and other fuels. The agency was disappointed
that the G20 did not agree on any initiatives like the
FTT, to raise additional funds for climate adaptation.
Actionaid UK said the G20 was bankrupt as the
leaders lacked ideas and any willingness to compro-
mise. The organization said the communiqué would
be forgotten before the day was over. Actionaid
International concluded that the G20 has not of-
fered any solid solutions to address a still vulnerable
economy and is disappointed that G20 did not ad-
vance on the FTT. Actionaid worries that a fad-
ing capacity to collaborate will mean the poor suffer
the most.
World Vision applauded and welcomed the cancel-
lation of Haiti's IFI debt and the creation of G20
Working Group on development. The organization
did express concern that the development agenda is
taking a back seat to economic growth.
Tearfund said the G20 was a missed opportunity to
show leadership on climate justice and to set a path
to get back on track for a global deal post 2012.
Tearfund are calling for at least $200 billion per year
of new and additional public finance by 2020 but
saw little progress on agreeing new sources such as
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/G-20 Summit of Financial Markets & World Economy
NGO Responses to the G20 Summit
The Sherpa Sunday, 27 June 2010 13:32
an FTT and levies on aviation and shipping fuel
emissions. The organization welcomed the G20's
support of the United Nations Convention
Against Corruption but were disappointed that
there was no review mechanism. Tearfund also
welcomed the inclusion of development on the
next G20 agenda and hoped the G20 could do a
better job than the G8 which, according to the
organization, "just repackaged old commitments
and missed the opportunity... to take us forward
in tackling poverty and injustice."
Greenpeace said "important progress was made
today in ending fossil fuels". The G20 had taken
uneven steps on the Pittsburgh summit's com-
mitment to implement country specific strategies
on fossil fuel phase out. According to the agency,
some nations deserve more credit than others
such as the US. Others, like Canada and Australia
failed to take their commitments seriously. How-
ever, the Toronto G20 suffered a complete lack
of vision on climate financing stating that the
funds saved from fuels subsidies could have been
diverted to help the climate.
Make Poverty History expressed concern that
the G20 dealing with budget deficits through cut-
ting back on government services will end up
hurting the poor. The coalition felt that govern-
ment's reliance on austerity measures alone to
tackle deficits risked increasing unemployment
and poverty in the developed world as well as
the developing world. Make Poverty History said
the G20's not adopting an FTT to make the bank-
ing sector pay their fair share was 'a kind of anti-
tax madness'. The organization took some com-
fort in the creation of a Working Group on Devel-
opment as they felt the G20 may be able to do a
better job of addressing the poverty crisis than
the G8.
The ONE Campaign issued a statement at the
end of the G20 Summit stating that the two
working groups created in Toronto on develop-
ment and on anti-corruption needed to focus on
improving governance and mutual accountabil-
ity. The ONE Campaign said that Africa repre-
sents 900 million potential producers and con-
sumers and so can contribute to the global eco-
51
nomic recovery through trade and investment.
However, the organization warned that the G20
must formally accommodate the voices of the coun-
tries and people it fails to represent if it is to build a
new partnership with Africa.
The Global Call to Action Against Poverty (GCAP)
said the G20 summit showed an unfortunate lack of
political will to fight poverty by delaying key actions
such as the Robin Hood Tax and investing in clean
energy and ending fossil fuel subsidies. The group
also said the G20 needs to include Africa as a regu-
lar member. The group welcomed the establish-
ment of a Working Group on Development but
added that the previous commitments to double
ODA to $50 billion must be added to the plan. GCAP
welcomed the agreement of Haiti's debt as a
'breath of fresh air' but warned that the G20 must
now write off the debts of all impoverished coun-
tries. GCAP said the violence following the mass
rally was caused by small groups and should not
overshadow the legitimate demands being made to
[sic] a better world.
(See website for the press release)
The ITUC said the G20 was failing to meet the jobs
challenge and was contradicting itself by speaking
of cutting deficits but welcoming recommendations
from their Labour Ministers that say jobs should be
a priority. It was the wrong communiqué at the
wrong time according to the unions. They were
heartened by the German government's support for
referencing the recent G20 Labour Minister meeting
in Washington and called for the G20 to give the ILO
the tasks of writing the recommendations on em-
ployment and social protection. The unions were
also critical that the G20 chose to 'rub shoulders'
with the B20 business group at the Summit.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/Nuclear Disarmament
America and Russia’s START
O n April 8th U.S. President Barack
Obama and his Russian counterpart
Dmitry Medvedev met in the Czech Repub-
lic capital, Prague, to sign the first nuclear
treaty between the two countries in nearly
20 years. START, Strategic Arms Reduction
Treaty, shall be the successor to SALT 2,
Strategic Arms Limitation Treaty, signed in
1991 and expired last December, provided
the legislatures of the two countries ratify
it. UN Secretary General Ban Ki-moon, re-
sponding to the announcement that the
two Presidents would be signing START in U.S.A. President Barack Obama and his Russian counterpart Dmitry
Prague, called the new treaty an Medvedev signing Strategic Arms Reduction Treaty in Prague, Czech
“important milestone” which he believed Republic, April 8, 2010
would “add a significant impetus” to the
UN’s conference scheduled for May this year to
review the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty.
President Obama needs a two thirds Senate
majority (67 out of 100) endorsement of START
for it to become effective from the American
side. Observers wondered whether in the current
partisan mood prevailing in Washington Presi-
dent Obama would be able to get the 8 Republi-
can Senate votes needed to ratify START, assum-
ing 100% support from Senate Democrats. Some
Republicans were already complaining that too
many concessions to Moscow could limit the
flexibility of future presidents; but Indiana’s
Senator Richard Lugar, a member of the Senate
Foreign Relations Committee, welcomed an-
nouncement of START, saying he looked forward
to receiving the treaty document so that commit-
tee hearings could be held and ratification
quickly achieved. Secretary of State Hilary Clin-
ton noted, “National Security has always pro-
duced large bipartisan majorities and I see no
reason why this should be any different. I believe
that the vast majority of the Senate, at the end
of the day, will see that this is in America’s inter-
est.”
Joint Chiefs of Staff Chairman Admiral Mike
Mullen said U.S. commanders around the world
“stand solidly behind the treaty. “
Upon hearing that Washington and Moscow
had finally agreed the terms of START, European
Commission President José Manuel Barroso af-
firmed the EU’s support for non-proliferation
efforts, adding, “There could not be a more posi-
52
tive signal to our efforts than the news today.”
Under the agreement both sides would re-
duce their nuclear warheads from the previously
permitted 2,200 to 1,550 over seven years. The
treaty also reduces the number of allowable mis-
siles and bomber jets capable of carrying nuclear
war-heads to targets.
“With this agreement, the United States and
Russia− the two largest nuclear powers in the
world− also send a clear signal that we intend to
lead,” President Obama said.
President Medvedev’s spokeswoman Nata-
lya Timakova said ahead of the signing, “This
treaty reflects the balance of interest of both
nations.”
The treaty does not restrict America from
moving ahead on deployment of a missile de-
fense system in Europe and Russia reserves the
right to withdraw from START if it determines it
can no longer protect its security because of a
U.S. missile defense buildup. Russia’s foreign
minister Sergey Lavrov affirmed, “The existence
of strategic defensive systems capable of neu-
tralizing offensive weapons will be taken into
account.”
Secretary of State Clinton emphasized the
importance of START’s verification mechanism,
saying, “It will reduce the chance for misunder-
standings and miscalculations.” In defense of
STARTs raison d’étre she said, “We do not need
such large arsenals to protect our nation.”
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/Peace & Security

Nuclear Security Summit

A gainst the backdrop of a testimony by his nu-
clear security advisor John Bernnan that Al
Qaeda has for the past 15 years been trying to buy
nuclear materials, U.S. President Barack Obama
warned at the beginning of the mid April Nuclear
Security Summit that a terrorist group in possession
of plutonium no bigger than an apple could deto-
nate a device capable of inflicting hundreds of
thousands of casualties. Specifying the dangers at
the outset of the Summit no doubt aimed to
enlighten skeptics who felt Washington was exag-
gerating the nuclear threat from terrorists in reac-
tion to the September 9, 2001 Al Qaeda assault on
New York and the Pentagon.
Iran and North Korea, the two states facing
international sanctions over their nuclear energy
programs were not invited. Israel, which is com-
monly believed to have a nuclear arsenal but has
neither confirmed this nor signed the nuclear non-
proliferation treaty sent its deputy foreign minister
to sit among the heads of state and government
U.S. President Barack Obama and UN Security Council col-
from the 46 other countries represented. league, Chinese President Hu Jintao at the Washington Nu-
The United States and Russia, the two coun- clear Security Summit
tries with the largest stock of nuclear weapons,
went into the summit fresh from signing a new Addressing the Washington Summit Pakistan’s
treaty in Prague to reduce their nuclear arsenals by Prime Minister Yusuf Raza Gilani rebutted the Har-
a third. The April 8th Strategic Arms Reduction vard findings, saying: "Islamabad has taken effec-
Treaty (START) signed in Prague between the for- tive steps for nuclear safety, security and nonprolif-
mer Cold War antagonists came a year after Presi- eration through extensive legislative, regulatory
dent Obama had in the same city called for a nu- and administrative framework." Adding to the as-
clear weapons free world. surances, Pakistan’s foreign minister Shah Mah-
In respect of the focus of the Summit on secur- mood Qureshi said, "We are confident our system
ing nuclear material from terrorists, Ukraine, a for- is second to none. We have world-class measures
mer Soviet Republic, committed to transferring its in place."
nuclear stocks to Russia for safekeeping. Chile The Harvard reports acknowledges the secu-
shipped its highly enriched uranium to the United rity arrangement improvements Pakistan and its
and Canada agreed to do likewise. nuclear armed neighbor India have made in the last
The United States and Russia committed to few years, but maintains that danger persists from
dispose of a quantity of plutonium that could be nuclear insiders with extremist sympathies, Taliban
used for approximately 17,000 nuclear weapons, in or Al Qaeda outsider attacks and a weak state.
a deal that had been stalled since 2000. Pakistani physicist Pervez Hoodbhoy, who at-
A new report released on the eve of the Nu- tended a parallel, unofficial conference of more
clear Security Summit by Belfer Center for Science than 200 international nuclear experts seemed to
and International Affairs at America’s prestigious agree with the Harvard study, saying,
Harvard University maintained that Pakistan's nu- “Unfortunately, I do not see this concern either in
clear stockpile faces "immense" threats and is the Pakistan or India about nuclear terrorism."
world's least secure from theft or attack.

53 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 International/Peace & Security

Iran lashes out at U.S. during Tehran nuclear summit

By Borzou Daragahi and Ramin Mostaghim,
Reporting from Tehran and Beirut
Source: Los Angeles Times
April 18, 2010

I ran’s top political and religious authority lashed

out at the United States at a nuclear disarmament
conference Saturday in Tehran meant to counter a
nonproliferation summit in Washington earlier in the
week.
Iran’s supreme leader, Ayatollah Ali Khamenei,
described the United States as the world’s “only nu-
clear scofflaw.” He called Washington hypocritical
for advocating arms control while retaining a huge
nuclear weapons stockpile, and for accepting the
atomic arsenal of Israel. Israel, which has never for-
mally acknowledged itself to be a nuclear power but
is widely held to be, is not a signatory to the interna-
tional treaty requiring transparency for its nuclear
program.
“The deceptive policy by the only nuclear scoff-
law, which falsely claims to be advocating the non-
proliferation of nuclear arms while doing nothing
substantive for this cause, will never succeed,”
Khamenei said in comments read by one of his clos-
est advisors, former minister Ali Akbar Velayati.
Iran has faced international pressure over its
nuclear technology and research program, which the
West alleges is aimed at developing atomic weap-
ons. Iran contends that it is meant only for civilian
ends.
Iranians are incensed over the Obama admini-
stration’s recent rewriting of the U.S. policy on nu-
clear weapons, which ruled out using such arms
against nonnuclear countries that comply with the
Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty, of which Iran is a
signatory. The U.S. says the Islamic Republic has vio-
lated the treaty; Iran says it is in compliance.
“Threats to use weapons, especially nuclear
weapons, are made by those who have no clear logic
and human thinking,” Iranian President Mahmoud
Ahmadinejad said in a speech.
Tehran also condemned the recent nuclear
nonproliferation conference in Washington, which
was partly a precursor to seeking new sanctions
against Iran within the U.N. Security Council.
Iran has striven hard to bolster its diplomatic
position ahead of anticipated maneuvers at the Se-
curity Council and a conference next month in New
Iran’s Supreme Leader Grand Ayatollah Ali Khamenei calls
the U.S. the world’s only nuclear scofflaw’ for its advocat-
ing arms control while having a huge stockpile and for
accepting Israel’s atomic arsenal. He castigated the U.S. in
an address to the Tehran nuclear summit that was read by
his close advisor Ali Akbar Velayati.
York to reexamine the Nuclear Non-Proliferation
Treaty.
State-controlled media said 24 nations sent
ministers or deputy ministers to Iran’s first Interna-
tional Conference on Disarmament and Non-
Proliferation, which continues Sunday.
China and Russia, strategic allies that have ap-
peared to back away from Tehran under Western
pressure, sent deputy foreign ministers. Iraq, Turkey,
Lebanon, Oman and Syria, Iran’s main strategic ally,
sent foreign ministers, and Pakistan’s ambassador to
Tehran attended.
There was no sign of any Western delegates.
Khamenei reiterated his long-standing position
that the use of nuclear weapons was religiously for-
bidden, a violation of humanitarian law and a war
crime. In an echo of the message made by President
Obama at the Washington summit, he called for
“sensible and practical ways and solutions to
counter the threat of nuclear weapons.”
In the lounge outside the main hall where invit-
ees delivered long speeches in favor of nuclear disar-
mament, pictures of victims of the 1945 U.S. nuclear
attack on Hiroshima and Nagasaki were on display.

54 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 International/Peace & Security

Nuclear Non-Proliferation
Review Confab
Report

E very 5 years signatories to the Nuclear Non-

Proliferation Treaty (NPT) meet under the
auspices of the International Atomic Energy Agency
(IAEA) to review progress. This year representa-
tives of the 189 signatory countries met for the
month long conference in New York. The NPT, first
signed in 1968, aims at disarming nuclear states,
ensuring nonproliferation among nonnuclear states
and to encouraging the safe use of civilian nuclear
technology. At the 2010 review conference a series Nuclear Bombs While nuclear weapons are the most
of additional concrete actions that states must take powerful and destructive war devices thus far developed,
to work toward those three goals were agreed the direct destructive capacity of the most powerful bomb
(10 kilotons) accounts for only about 20% of its direct in-
upon.
cendiary impact, limited to less than 50 square miles; the
Although the Non-aligned Movement of non- rest comes from burning of electrical short circuits and
nuclear states did not get their wish that major nu- inflammable materials caught up in the bomb’s blast
clear powers Britain, China, France, Russia and the wave, the ferocious winds it leaves behind and blast de-
United States agree to dismantle all their nuclear bris. However radioactive fallout, which is produced by
arsenals by 2025, there was sufficient agreement nuclear fission and the activation of soil, air and water
among participants for the conference to have and other materials in the vicinity of the detonation, is the
been considered a success. The nuclear powers did worst effect of nuclear weapons and given the volume of
commit to "further efforts to ultimately eliminate nuclear warheads stocked by major powers a nuclear
all types of nuclear weapons." holocaust could cause the destruction of human civiliza-
tion. The neutron bomb, alternatively referred to as the
Washington showed good faith when the De-
clean bomb or tactical nuclear weapon, relies more on
fense Department released, as Secretary of State non-radioactive fusion, rather than radioactive fission for
Hilary Clinton promised on the opening day, the explosion, whereby its radioactive impact on water and
long held secret of America’s nuclear arsenal inven- soil resulting from the thermonuclear reactions of neu-
tory. The U.S. confirmed an arsenal of 5,113 nuclear trons is limited to the area around the explosion.
warheads. Britain admitted having 225 and pledged
to review the conditions under which it would be
having clandestine nuclear weapons programs.
prepared to use them. .
The United States had initially opposed inclu-
Significantly, North Koreas withdrew from the
sion in the final document urging Israel to join the
NPT in 2003; India, Israel and Pakistan are not sig-
NPT, but apparently realizing the unreasonableness
natories and Israel refuses to confirm its nuclear
of its stance ultimately agreed that the document
status despite a prevailing assumption that it has
note "the importance of Israel's accession to the
long been a nuclear power. During May documents
NPT." The U.S. was at odds with other signatories
entered the public domain revealing that apartheid
once again when Egypt and other non-nuclear
South Africa had in the 1970s asked Israel for nu-
states pushed for a conference in 2012 on making
clear weapons technology. At that time opponents
the Middle East a nuclear weapons free zone.
of apartheid were claiming that West Germany,
When Israel heard that the U.S. withdrew its objec-
Israel and South Africa were involved in nuclear
tions to the conference, Israel immediately an-
weapons development cooperation. Presently, Iran,
nounced it would not attend; after which Washing-
Miramar and Syria are widely held in suspicion of
55 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/Peace & Security
ton reversed its support, contending that there
should be "comprehensive peace in the region
first."
Deepti Choubey, who attended the conference
in her capacity as deputy director of the nuclear-
policy program at the Carnegie Endowment for In-
ternational Peace, argued that a conference on a
nuclear weapons free Middle East could be useful
for the United States, pointing out, "If you are con-
cerned about Iran's nuclear ambitions, then a con-
ference on a nuclear-free Middle East can be an-
other tool or framework for trying to curb their am-
bitions,” adding, “Critics of the conference need to
get past the reflexive view that this is just an at-
tempt to criticize the Israelis."
Nonetheless, Choubey considered the confer-
ence was a success compared to the 2005 confab at
which the U.S. under President George W. Bush and
other nuclear armed states showed no remorse
about not meeting their nuclear disarmament obli-
gations. The 2010 treaty review was held against
the backdrop of April signing by Russia and the U.S.
of a new Strategic Arms Reduction Treaty (START)
and President Obama telling the world in a speech
in Prague last year that America would "work to-
ward a world free of nuclear weapons." According
to Choubey, "States were so eager to get an out-
come in part because Obama has created a lot of
political capital. The Prague speech created the at-
mosphere to achieve this outcome."
When a last minute agreement was reached in
New York on May 28th the 2,000 delegates gave
themselves a round of applause. Ending on a con-
ciliatory note marked great progress from the
opening day, May 3rd, when the session was domi-
nated by the face off between Iran and the U.S.
over the intentions of the former’s nuclear energy
program. Although Iran’s President Mahmoud
Ahmaddinejad, as the first speaker, focused on
what he described as an inherent right of security
threatened by the United States, UN Secretary Gen-
eral Ban Ki-moon put Iran on the spot for its non-
compliance with the International Atomic Energy
Agency (IAEA) and the UN Security Council and not
accepting the Security Council’s nuclear fuel ex-
change plan.
Nuclear Non-Proliferation Review Confab
Statement to 2010 Review
Conference of Parties to the Treaty
on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear
Weapons (NPT)
by IAEA Director General Yukiya Amano
Mr. President, Ladies
and Gentlemen,
The IAEA works to pre-
vent the proliferation of
nuclear weapons and to
promote the use of nu-
clear energy for peaceful
purposes and technical
cooperation. The IAEA
also has a role to play in
verifying nuclear disar-
mament. As all of these
activities are relevant to
the work of the NPT Re-
view Conference, I would
like to provide you with
a brief overview of re-
cent developments.
As you know, reliable supplies of energy are
vital to ensure continued prosperity and sustained
development. Nuclear power is enjoying growing
acceptance as a stable and clean source of energy
that can help to mitigate the impact of climate
change. More than 60 countries are considering
introducing nuclear power to generate electricity. It
is expected that between 10 and 25 new countries
will bring their first nuclear power plants online by
2030.
Certainly, it is for each sovereign State to de-
cide whether or not to use nuclear power, but the
IAEA assists interested countries in establishing a
reliable nuclear infrastructure. Nuclear power must
be accessible not only for developed countries but
also for developing countries. Nuclear power needs
to be efficient, sustainable and profitable. Any ex-
pansion in its use must be done safely and securely,
and without increasing the proliferation risk.
In March this year, with the approval of the
IAEA Board of Governors, I signed an agreement
with Russia to establish a low enriched uranium
reserve to help assure supplies of nuclear fuel to
Member States. Other possible assurance of supply
mechanisms are under discussion.
56 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/Peace & Security
Nuclear technologies provide unique tools to
meet the basic needs of human beings. To take one
example, nuclear medicine and radiotherapy are
very effective in the diagnosis and treatment of
cancer. The IAEA is now helping developing coun-
tries to fight cancer through our Programme of Ac-
tion for Cancer Therapy (PACT).
The application of nuclear technology in plant
breeding, food irradiation, animal health and pest
control is making valuable contributions to enhanc-
ing global food security. Nuclear technology is also
useful in water management and environmental
monitoring.
In any use of nuclear technology, safety and
security must always be ensured. While the primary
responsibility lies with Member States, the Agency
has an important role to play in these areas.
Nuclear safety has improved considerably
since the Chernobyl disaster in 1986. However, we
can never be complacent and need to remain vigi-
lant. The IAEA is the custodian of the relevant inter-
national safety conventions and standards and pro-
vides practical assistance to Member States. For
example, IAEA peer review missions bring experts
together to study individual countries´ nuclear
safety systems and make recommendations on how
to remedy possible weaknesses.
Great progress has also been made in making
nuclear and radioactive materials more secure. This
has helped States to counter the risk of nuclear ter-
rorism, which remains a real and immediate threat
to international security. The IAEA is widely recog-
nized as the focal point for strengthening efforts in
this area. The support expressed for our work by
many heads of state and government at the recent
Nuclear Security Summit in Washington was very
encouraging.
The Final Document of the 2000 NPT Review
Conference called for expanded use of the Agency´s
Technical Co-operation Programme. The pro-
gramme has grown since then, and the annual re-
sources of the Technical Cooperation programme
now amount to more than $100 million. We imple-
ment projects in more than 120 countries and terri-
tories. However, more efforts are needed to
achieve sufficient, assured and predictable funding
of technical cooperation.
In the 2000 Final Document, States party to
the NPT recognized that IAEA safeguards are a fun-
damental pillar of the nuclear non-proliferation re-
gime, play an indispensable role in the implementa-
tion of the Treaty and help to create an environ-
ment conducive to nuclear disarmament and nu-
Nuclear Non-Proliferation Review Confab
clear cooperation. At present, the Agency is work-
ing to resolve important safeguards implementa-
tion issues in three States.
The Democratic People´s Republic of Korea
(DPRK) has not allowed the Agency to implement
safeguards since 2002 and, therefore, the Agency
cannot draw any safeguards conclusion for the
DPRK. In April 2009, the DPRK ceased all coopera-
tion with the IAEA in the implementation of the ad
hoc monitoring and verification arrangement pur-
suant to the Six-Party Talks process.
In the case of Iran, the Agency continues to
verify the non-diversion of declared nuclear mate-
rial, but remains unable to confirm that all nuclear
material is in peaceful activities because Iran has
not provided the necessary cooperation. I continue
to request Iran to take steps towards the full imple-
mentation of its Comprehensive Safeguards Agree-
ment and relevant resolutions of the IAEA Board of
Governors and the United Nations Security Council,
and to clarify activities with a possible military di-
mension.
As far as Syria is concerned, the Agency has
not been able to make progress towards resolving
questions related to the nature of the Dair Alzour
site destroyed by Israel and other locations. Syria
has not cooperated with the Agency since June
2008 in this regard. I continue to request Syria to
engage with the Agency on all outstanding issues.
Adherence to IAEA comprehensive safeguards
agreements (CSAs) and additional protocols (APs)
has been increasing, but more should be done.
At present, 20 NPT parties have still not
brought comprehensive safeguards agreements
into force. I strongly encourage all remaining NPT
parties to conclude and implement CSAs.
Thirty-two States have brought additional pro-
tocols into force since 2005, bringing the total
number now in force to 98. The additional informa-
tion and broader access for IAEA inspectors pro-
vided for in the AP are essential for the IAEA to ob-
tain a much fuller picture of existing and planned
nuclear programmes and nuclear material holdings
of States with comprehensive safeguards agree-
ments. The AP is of vital importance for the Agency
to be able to provide credible assurance not only
that declared nuclear material is not being diverted
from peaceful uses, but also that there are no un-
declared nuclear material and activities in a State. I
urge all States to bring APs into force.
Nuclear-weapon-free zones make an impor-
tant contribution to achieving a nuclear-weapon-
57 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/Peace & Security
free world. Since the last Review Conference, the
Central Asian Nuclear Weapon-Free Zone Treaty
and the African Nuclear Weapon Free Zone Treaty
have entered into force.
I would like to recall that the IAEA General
Conference has adopted resolutions in recent years
on the establishment of a nuclear-weapon-free
zone in the Middle East. Last year´s General Confer-
ence also adopted a resolution on Israel´s nuclear
capabilities. I am following up on these resolutions
as requested by the General Conference.
Finally, nuclear disarmament is an area of
great interest for the IAEA and the Agency has a
role to play through verification activities. Progress
in nuclear disarmament has a positive impact on
non-proliferation efforts and vice versa.
Nuclear Non-Proliferation Review Confab
Against this background, I welcome the new
START Treaty concluded between the Russian
Federation and the United States last month as a
step forward in nuclear disarmament.
Mr. President,
A successful NPT Review Conference is indispensa-
ble because it will enhance confidence in the non-
proliferation regime, which in turn will provide
the Agency with a stronger basis for our work in
all areas.
I wish you every success in the coming weeks.

Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty Review Conference

White House Final Document Review
Office of the Spokesman
Washington, DC
May 28, 2010
The consensus Final Document adopted today at the
Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty Review Conference
advances the President’s vision for the peace and
security of a world without nuclear weapons and a
realistic path to achieve that goal. It includes calls
for substantive measures to strengthen the nonpro-
liferation regime and establishes benchmarks for
future progress. This Final Document reaffirms the
strong support of the international community for
the Treaty as the cornerstone of the international
nonproliferation regime.
Specific text adopted in the Final Document in-
cludes:
Non-Proliferation:
• For the first time in an NPT document, endorses
the Additional Protocol, together with a compre-
hensive IAEA safeguards agreement, as the en-
hanced standard for verification of the NPT.
Paragraph 19 and 25 in the President’s State-
ment
• Encourages all parties to conclude and bring into
force additional protocols. Action 28
• Emphasizes resolving all cases of noncompliance
with safeguards obligations in full conformity
with the IAEA statute. (Only one state party in
58
attendance has been found to be in noncompli-
ance with its safeguards obligations.) Action 27
• Underscores the importance of the IAEA exercis-
ing fully its mandate and authority to verify
states’ nuclear activities, including the absence
of undeclared activities. Paragraph 24
• Supports strengthening the IAEA and assuring it
has sufficient resources to effectively meet its
safeguards responsibilities, a key priority of the
United States. Paragraphs 24 and 25 and Action
33
• Calls for strengthened export controls, including
whether a recipient has brought into force IAEA
safeguards obligations when making decisions
on exports of nuclear technology. Actions 35-37
• Urges parties to improve standards to combat
illicit trafficking in nuclear materials and become
parties to the International Convention for the
Suppression of Acts of Nuclear Terrorism. Action
45
Compliance:
• Underscores the importance of addressing com-
pliance matters in order to uphold the integrity
of the NPT and IAEA safeguards system. Action
26
• Reinforces the role of the UN Security Council to
take appropriate measures in cases of violations
reported to it. Paragraph 11 in the President’s
Statement
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/Peace & Security
• For the first time in any NPT final document,
the Review Conference has addressed abuse of
the Treaty’s withdrawal provisions, a major
stated U.S. objective, recognizing the view that
withdrawing parties are responsible for viola-
tions committed while a party to the treaty and
that nuclear suppliers should incorporate dis-
mantling and/or return clauses in the event of
withdrawal. Paragraphs 118-122 in the Presi-
dent’s Statement
Disarmament:
• Supports the President’s vision of working for a
world without nuclear weapons. Action 3 “…to
undertake further efforts to reduce and ulti-
mately eliminate all types of nuclear weap-
ons….”
• Applauds the achievement of the U.S.-Russian
New START agreement and the goal of pursuing
deeper reductions of all types of nuclear weap-
ons. Paragraph 90 and Action 4
• Supports the start of negotiations, without de-
lay, of a fissile material cutoff treaty – a top
U.S. priority. Paragraph E.i and Action 15
• Reaffirms the importance of the early entry
into force of the Comprehensive Nuclear Test
Ban Treaty, calls upon all states to refrain from
nuclear weapon test explosions in the mean-
while, and supports the full development of the
CTBTO’s verification regime. Actions 10- 14
Peaceful Uses of Nuclear Technology:
• Emphasizes that peaceful uses of nuclear en-
ergy should be made available to all Parties in
conformity with the NPT’s nonproliferation pro-
visions. Action 57
• Encourages all to contribute to the U.S. Peace-
ful Uses Initiative, a Presidential initiative an-
nounced by Secretary Clinton in the U.S. open-
ing statement at the Review Conference Gen-
eral Debate on May 3. Action 55
• Supports efforts to pursue agreement on inter-
national fuel banks and related multilateral
mechanisms for assurance of nuclear supply
and related nuclear fuel services. Action 58
Nuclear Security:
Acknowledges the Nuclear Security Summit and
carries forward its recommendations, including rec-
ognition of the IAEA’s role in promoting nuclear
security cooperation and best practices and the
need to minimize the use of highly enriched ura-
nium in the civilian sector. Paragraphs 66-70 and
Action 61
Nuclear Non-Proliferation Review Confab
U.N. Security Council votes to
impose new sanctions on Iran
The U.N. Security Council on Wednesday, June 9th
voted 12 to 2 to impose a fourth round of sanctions
on Iran, bringing to a close months of diplomatic ef-
forts by the Obama administration to penalize Te-
hran for building a covert nuclear facility and accel-
erating its enrichment of uranium.
Brazil and Turkey voted against the measure,
while Lebanon abstained. The measure modestly
reinforces a range of economic, high-technology and
military sanctions against Iran, and targets more
than 40 Iranian elites and companies linked to the
nation's nuclear program with a travel ban and an
asset freeze.
The measures imposed are not expected to
have the crippling impact Washington would have
liked, but having Russia and China on board along
with Britain and France was a major achievement
for the Obama administration.
Brazilian President Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva said
the resolution's supporters "threw out an historic
opportunity to peacefully negotiate the Iranian nu-
clear program," and he called the new sanctions "a
mistake" implemented "just for spite," according to
the state-run Agencia Brasil news agency.
In mid May Brazil’s president and Turkey’s
prime minister brokered a deal with the Iranians in
Tehran whereby Iran would send its uranium to Tur-
key for enrichment. However, Washington and its
European allies snubbed the deal, insisting that Iran
should abide by the Security Council offer that its
uranium be enriched in France and Russia.
However, the uranium swap deal with Turkey
brokered by Turkish Prime Minister Erdoğan and Da
Silva did not impress China and Russia, apart from
being flatly rejected by the NATO allies on the Secu-
rity Council.
United States UN Ambassador Susan Rice com-
mended the vote as a “decisive move against Iran’s
nuclear program”, which she described as ‘a grave
threat to international security.”
Iran’s President Mahmoud Ahmaddinejad said
the sanctions would have little effect on Iran, dis-
missing them as “pesky flies.”
Iranian Parliament National Security Committee
head Allaedin Boroujerdi said his country would re-
view the level of cooperation with the International
Atomic Energy Agency.
59 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International Affairs/ UN Security Council/Nuclear Security
Department of Public Information • News and Media Division
New York
Security Council
Security Council Imposes Additional
SC/9948 Sanctions on Iran,
Voting 12 in Favour to 2 Against, with 1 Abstention
Brazil, Turkey, Lebanon Say Tehran Declaration Could
Boost Diplomatic Efforts, While Sanctions Represent Failure of Diplomacy
E xpressing deep concern about Iran’s lack of
compliance with its previous resolutions on
ensuring the peaceful nature of its nuclear pro-
gramme, the Security Council imposed additional
sanctions on the country today, expanding an
arms embargo and tightening restrictions on finan-
cial and shipping enterprises related to
“proliferation-sensitive activities”.
Adopting resolution 1929 (2010) by a vote of 12 in
favour to 2 against (Brazil, Turkey), with
1 abstention (Lebanon), the Council also re-
quested the Secretary-General to create a panel of
experts to monitor implementation of the sanc-
tions. Annexed to the text containing the fourth
round of sanctions imposed on Iran were meas-
ures directed against 41 new named entities and
individuals, including one scientist and enterprises
linked to the Islamic Revolutionary Guard and the
defence industry, as well as banks and the national
shipping line.
By other terms of the resolution, the Council de-
cided that Iran should not acquire interests in any
commercial activity relating to uranium enrich-
ment and other nuclear materials or technology in
other States, and that all States should prevent the
transfer to Iran of any tanks, armoured combat
vehicles, large-calibre artillery systems, attack heli-
copters, or missiles and related systems or
parts. It also called upon all States to report to the
relevant Sanctions Committee, within 60 days, on
the steps they had taken to implement the neces-
sary measures.
Emphasizing the importance of diplomatic efforts
to find a negotiated solution guaranteeing the
60
June 9, 2010
peaceful nature of Iran’s nuclear programme, the
Council noted in that regard the efforts by Turkey
and Brazil for an agreement on the Tehran Re-
search Reactor, which “could serve as a confi-
dence-building measure”. It also stressed the will-
ingness of the so-called E3+3 — China, France,
Germany, Russian Federation, United Kingdom
and the United States — to further enhance diplo-
matic efforts to promote dialogue and consulta-
tions towards a negotiated solution.
The Council affirmed that it would suspend the
sanctions if, and so long as, Iran suspended all
enrichment-related and reprocessing activities, as
verified by the International Atomic Energy
Agency (IAEA), to allow for good-faith negotia-
tions. It also affirmed its determination to apply
further measures if Iran continued to defy the just
-adopted text as well as previous resolutions.
Speaking before the vote, the representatives of
Brazil and Turkey said they had voted against the
text because it ran against their efforts to bring
about a negotiated solution through the agree-
ment on the Tehran Research Reactor and the
related Tehran Declaration of 17 May, which pro-
vided a new opportunity for diplomacy.
Following the vote, Lebanon’s representative said
Iran had a right to the peaceful use of nuclear en-
ergy as well as an obligation to adhere to the safe-
guards regime, adding that the fuel swap deal it
had negotiated with Brazil and Turkey provided a
way towards a resolution of the problems that
had arisen. The sanctions regime, on the other
hand, represented a painful failure of diplomatic
efforts, he added.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International Affairs/ UN Security Council/Nuclear Security
Security Council Imposes Additional Sanctions on Iran

Security Council
SC/9948

June 9, 2010

(L-R) British Ambassador to the U.N. Mark Lyall Grant , Chinese Ambassador to the U.N. Li Baodong, Rus-
sian Ambassador to the U.N. Vitaly Churkin and U.S. Ambassador to the U.N. Susan Rice chat before the
start of a U.N. Security Council meeting on Iran June 9, 2010 in New York City. The Security Council is ex-
pected to vote today for new sanctions against Iran for its suspect nuclear program.

Speaking on behalf of the Foreign Ministers of the
E3+3 countries, the representative of the United
Kingdom said today’s action affirmed both the in-
ternational community’s concern about Iran’s nu-
clear programme and the need for the country to
comply with the requirements of the Security Coun-
cil and the IAEA Board of Governors, while also
keeping the door open for continued engagement
between the E3+3 and Iran. The Ministers wel-
comed and commended all diplomatic efforts in
that regard, especially those recently made by Bra-
zil and Turkey on the specific issue of the Tehran
Research Reactor. “We expect Iran to demonstrate
a pragmatic attitude and to respond positively to
our openness towards dialogue and negotiations,”
he said.
Iran’s representative, however, placed the resolu-
tion within the context of pressures exerted on his
country over many decades by some of the same
Powers supporting today’s resolution. Those pres-
sures included suits to prevent Iran’s nationaliza-
tion of its own oil, and the military coup that had
reinstalled the Shah. The clear message was that
no one should be allowed to endanger the vital in-
terests of the capitalist world, he said.
Iran was more powerful today and would not bow
to such pressures, he asserted, emphasizing his
country’s right to use nuclear technology for
peaceful purposes, and stressing that it had car-
ried out “robust” cooperation with IAEA. The
Council was showing its political biases by its reac-
tion to the deal on the Tehran Research Reactor,
and its lack of action on Israeli violations of the
Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weap-
ons and the threats made against Iran by that
country and the United States, he said.
In their national statements, Council members
and E3+3 countries all paid tribute to the efforts
of Turkey and Brazil, which had resulted in the
Tehran Declaration, but noted that the agreement
did not deal with core issues such as compliance
with IAEA, uranium enrichment in defiance of the
Council and the revelation of the previously unde-
clared facility at Qom.
Also speaking today were the representatives of
the United States, France, Uganda, Russian Fed-
eration, Japan, Austria, China, Nigeria, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, and Mexico.
The meeting began at 11:15 a.m. and ended at
12:59 p.m.

61 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 International/Economy/ Exchange Rates
♦ Gold closed June 30, at $1,242 per oz
with exchange stocks of 10.925 million
ounces.
♦ Sliver closed June 30 at $18.32 a Troy
ounce with exchange stocks of 114.055
million Troy ounces
♦ Platinum June 10 sold at $1,530 a Troy
ounce
♦ China’s high priced aluminum was selling
at $2,3000 per ton
♦ Copper June 10 sold at $2.94 a pound
62
Wednesday, June 30, 2010
The August futures price for a
barrel of crude oil fell by 31
cents Wednesday after a gov-
ernment report revealed that
the U.S. supply of oil remains
high in a weak demand envi-
ronment.
Oil settled at $75.63 a barrel
after trading from $74.39 to
$76.83 Wednesday. The U.S.
Department of Energy's En-
ergy Information Administra-
tion (EIA) reported that the
country's total crude oil stock-
pile was 363.1 million barrels
as of June 25, down 2 million
barrels from the preceding
Friday. Also, concerns about
ongoing financial problems in
Europe, an economic growth
slowdown in China, and fears
of another recession in the
U.S. continue to have a dulling
effect on oil demand expecta-
tions.
♦ Arabica coffee futures closed on Tues-
day, June 29, at $1.6150 a pound ($3,230
a ton) on ICE Futures U.S
♦ Cocoa closed June 30 selling at $3,755mt.
♦ Live Cattle June 10 sold for $91.25
♦ Corn June 10 sold for $354.25 a bushel
♦ Soybeans June 10 sold for $948.50 a
bushel
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/Economy/ Exchange Rates

Wednesday, June 30, 2010

Natural gas benefited from

forecasts of a hot U.S. Fourth
of July week. The front-month
natural gas contract price in-
creased by 7 cents Wednes-
day, settling at $4.62.

Weather forecasts indicate

above-average temperatures
throughout the eastern half of
the U.S., which would trans-
late into greater demand for
electricity. The intraday range
for natural gas was $4.48 to
$4.63.

The July futures price for a

gallon of gasoline settled a
penny lower at $2.06. Gaso-
line ranged from $2.03 to
$2.08 during Wednesday's
trading session.

African Minerals News Briefs

♦ Burkina Faso has projected gold production for 2010 to be 20 MT and
is seeking foreign mining investors
♦ Ghana on April 5, 2010 reported that gold production reached 2.9 mil-
lion ounces in 2009, up 12% over 2008. Revenue from gold rose from
$2.2 billion to $2.8 billion
♦ Ghana Bauxite Company revenue fell from $19.8 million in 2008 to
$10.9 in 2009
♦ Ghana Manganese Company revenues increased from $62.3m to
$64.9m despite a 7% drop in output

63 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 International/Economy/ Exchange Rates

Wednesday, June 30, 2010

Quarterly performance tal-

lies started to trickle in as
the last trading day of the
month got underway this
morning. Commodities tabu-
lated their worst quarter
since late 2008/early 2009 as
a 10% decline in the complex
was affected by Chinese
growth contraction fears and
investor sentiment about the
fate of the rest of the world’s
economies. Gold posted a
third-best showing with a
12% gain, right behind natu-
ral gas and coffee (which
rose 20%).

Meanwhile, silver turned up

in fourth place with a 6.5%
appreciation percentage.
What did not do well? Indus-
trial metals, for the most
part. Consider zinc’s 25%
plunge, or nickel’s 23% fall.
Bellwether copper fell 16%
on the quarter and black
gold dropped more than 9%
Daily Forex Analysis (June 30, 2010) since the end of March. Bad
By Finexo as the quarter was for com-
modities, the index of world
GBP/USD equities showed a 13% de-
cline in values for the trimes-
The Pound has been a big winner this week, as it continues to appreciate ter.
against the Dollar. However waning risk appetite may affect the GBP/USD
should the pair fall below the $1.50 level. UK Gilts have been sold off as a
result of comments that the recent rise in inflation may force the Bank of
England to tighten its monetary policy earlier than it had originally intended;
however this remains a minority view on the MPC, and generally sentiments
are towards a medium-term drop in inflation. According to some analysts,
this morning’s unexpected fall in the UK housing price index could indicate
that the UK housing market is headed for another dip - an event that would
weigh heavily on the British currency.

64 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 International/Economy/ Exchange Rates

Wednesday, June 30, 2010

Then again, one could have

bought the Shanghai stock
market –whose SCI barometer
fell 27% in the current year.
Such dismal performance has
prompted more than one con-
trarian call for a giant rally.
Morgan Stanley analysts envi-
sion something on the order
of a 65% rally in the Shanghai
index, give or take one year.
Yesterday however, that mar-
ket fell 4.3% after the Confer-
ence Board revised its leading
economic index for the coun-
try.

The Dow, in turn, lost 268

points (2.7%) and dipped be-
neath the 10K level as the
same Conference Board’s
consumer confidence gauge
US stock market daily report (June 30, 2010, Wednesday)
crumbled on economic fears.
Translation: what will happen
Despite good news that European banks won't need as many loans as first an- if the US consumer is in no
ticipated, stocks fell on disappointing news from today's ADP report. Today's mood to consume at a time
report showed that the job market gained less than expected. ADP reported when the slack in the econ-
the U.S. economy gained 13,000 jobs in June; in April there was a rise by
omy is nearly as wide as any
57,000. Today's report was rather disappointing; analysts' were looking for an worn by the zoot suit rioters
increase by 61,000. Investors took today's news as a warning for what's to in 1943 in Los Angeles? The
come; the government is set to release this week's big job report on Friday.
economic pattern letter that
Analysts' are predicting a loss of 130,000 jobs in tomorrow's report. In other
comes to mind is just two al-
news; Chicago Purchasing Managers Index fell to 59.1% this month. In May, the phabet positions ahead the
index showed a reading of 59.7%, anything over 50% indicates business
letter "Z" according to some…
growth. This month's results were relatively the same as analysts' expectations.
In Europe; investors were happy to hear that the European Central Bank had to
lend less money to fewer banks than originally expected. 171 banks borrowed a
total of 131.9 billion from the Central Bank, instead of the 210 billion they ex-
pected. News from the European Central Bank may mean that banks in Europe
aren't as bad off as investors were thinking. Today, the euro rose against the
dollar after the positive news was released. Asian markets continued to fall to-
day; the Nikkei fell 2% as the Shanghai Composite fell 1.1%. Stocks were
choppy today after the ADP report; the Dow was down over 40 points with less
than a half hour left in the session. Commodity prices fell today; gold rose
$3.50 to $1,245.50 and crude oil fell $0.31 to $75.63 per barrel.
65 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 International/Economy/ Exchange Rates

Wednesday, June 30, 2010

The euro regained some of

the ground it lost on Tues-
day this morning (it rose to
above 1.2275 against the
greenback), as the ECB an-
nounced that loan demand
by the region’s banks was
some 30 billion euros
lower than anticipated.
Such lessened need for
funding may signal a better
state of health among
European banks than some
market participants are
seen as perceiving. How-
ever, the carry trade may
continue its drunken orgy
in various assets and still
be able to tap into essen-
tially free money until the
last quarter of 2010 ac-
cording to analysts.

Daily Forex Analysis (June 30, 2010)

By Finexo
Uncertainty flooded the markets yesterday, as concerns escalated over the global economic recovery follow-
ing a disappointing release in U.S. consumer confidence, a downward revision to China's leading indicator in-
dex and an unanticipated rise in the Japanese unemployment rate.

Adding to market jitters is the Thursday’s upcoming deadline for the European Banks to repay 442 billion Euros
to the ECB. On Thursday, time runs out for the ECB financing program which investors fear could result in a
potential liquidity shortfall of over 100 billion Euros in the financial system. Banks across the Euro Zone, Spain
in particular, have been finding it extremely difficult to obtain liquid funding in the commercial markets, espe-
cially with inter-bank funding practically non-existent. Spanish banks have been petitioning the ECB to take ac-
tion to ease the systemic fallout from the expiry of funding program.

USD/CAD
The Canadian Dollar touched on its lowest level in three weeks as concerns escalated over the European debt
crisis and signs of a global economic slowdown pushed traders out of higher- yielding assets such as stocks and
commodities. The Loonie slipped 2.1% to C$1.0575 per U.S Dollar yesterday, its lowest level since June
8th. Later today, Stats Canada is set to release the nation’s GDP for the month of April. Canada’s GDP grew by
0.6% in March and by 6.1% in the 1st quarter of this year. This time around, the market expects the growth to
continue with a 0.2% expansion.
66 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
International/Economy/ Exchange Rates

Wednesday, June 30, 2010

Gold prices opened with

modest losses this morning
after an overnight range
that remained on the nar-
row side (between $1,238
and $1,245). Spot gold bul-
lion fell by $3.30 to the
$1,237.50 level on the bid
side. The rest of the com-
plex showed declines
across the board, with the
exception of silver which
added $0.07 to rise to
$18.58 mark the ounce.
The summer lull could be
upon the markets follow-
ing the Independence Day
holiday. Trading desks we
tang up overnight already
show neatly arranged
workstations and clean (!)
coffee mugs on the cafete-
ria racks.

No change was reported in

rhodium at $2,440.00 per
ounce. Carmaker Ford is
reported to be ready to
pay some $4 billion in debt
with the aim of bolstering
its balance sheet. Its shares
surged nearly 4% on the
news.

67 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 International/Economy/ Exchange Rates

Wednesday, June 30, 2010

This morning’s ADP report

indicated that 13,000 jobs
were added to the US econ-
omy’s private sector in June
–less than the expected fig-
ure of circa 60,000 and one
of the catalysts to a drop in
US stock index futures just
half an hour prior to their
opening.

Indian buyers remained side-

lined as gold at near 19,000
rupees per ten grams contin-
ued to weigh on their minds
instead of the bazaar own-
ers’ scales when ringing up a
sale.

In fact, Indian market partici-

pants and analysts are zero-
ing in on the same discon-
certing signs that show a
European stock market, economy and companies update gold market totally depend-
(June 25, 2010) ent on ETFs and derivative
speculation vehiles’ (futures/
European equities opened the session flat to marginally higher, following options) off-take. As such,
the sharp losses seen on yesterday's session. In terms of specific sectors, they see potential declines in
today's losses are being led by resource related companies, and financials value that might not be of
are trading mixed. Factors weighing on markets include concerns about the the minor variety.
global recovery, the widening of Greece's CDS spreads to new record levels
and concerns related to Eastern Europe

Euro/US Dollar Forex Analysis June 30, 2010

The Euro edged up against the Dollar this morning, after a report
showed that Americans were becoming increasingly distressed over the
outlook of for their jobs and income. The EUR/USD touched on $1.2223
as the market reacted to yesterday’s unexpected drop in CB confidence
index.

Yesterday, the Euro hit a 2-week low against the Dollar, as market con-
cerns escalated over Thursday’s expiration of a European Central Bank
refinancing program. The Euro touched on $1.2135, its lowest level
since June 14th.
68 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
DAR ES SALAAM/TANZANIA, 5MAY10 - Kanayo Nwanze President, International Fund for Agriculture Development
(IFAD), Rome, Jakaya M. Kikwete, President of Tanzania and Cassandra Waldon, Director Communications IFAD
captured at the World Economic Forum on Africa held in Dar Es Salaam, Tanzania, May 5, 2010.

69
 Africa/East Africa Community
EAC Develops Standards for Cassava, Potato Products
Kampala — Standards for cassava and potato prod-
ucts in the five East African Community (EAC) coun-
tries have been developed, harmonized and recom-
mended for approval for implementation.
The process towards regional root crops stan-
dards (focusing on cassava and sweet potato) was
spearheaded by the Uganda National Bureau of
Standards (UNBS) in 2006.
UNBS compiled a list of 14 standards, and us-
ing the EAC template, formally sent the proposed
standards to the other four countries as zero drafts
for consideration and adoption as regional stan-
dards.
The project comes into force with the approval
of the EAC Standards technical sub-committee after
a meeting held in November 2009 in Arusha, Tanza-
nia.
The Association for Strengthening Agricultural
Research in Eastern and Central Africa (ASARECA), a
sub-regional research organization supported tech-
nical departments of the EAC states' national stan-
dard bodies to convene national consultative work-
shops to discuss the zero drafts.
Dr. Michael Waithaka, a programme manager
in charge of policy analysis and advocacy at ASAR-
ECA, said 11 draft standards were presented to the
Eastern Africa Standards technical sub-committee
at a meeting held in Arusha recently.
"The committee recommended the adoption
of the standards by the EAC Council of Ministers in
their next session," Waithaka said in a statement.
According to the statement, UNBS collated the
comments and prepared them for discussion at a
regional forum held in March this year in Kigali.
The forum drew participants from the national
standards technical committees, International Insti-
tute for Tropical Agriculture (IITA), the International
Institute for Potato Research, cassava and potato
researchers, and the vice chairperson of Uganda's
parliamentary committee on agriculture and envi-
ronment, Lastus Serunjogi.
The module on root crops was aligned with
ASARECA's cassava mega-project that was devel-
oped in 2008, titled "Unlocking the potential of cas-
sava in ECA," which pursues interventions along the
whole cassava value-chain.
Waithaka was happy that regional research on
food was intensifying efforts, saying the New Part-
nership for Africa's Development (NEPAD) had, for
70
2 June 2010
instance, launched a Pan African Cassava Initiative
that seeks to tap the enormous potential of the crop
for food security and income generation.
Consequently, cassava has been prioritized as a
strategic commodity in the Comprehensive African
Agricultural Development Programme Pillar III and IV
as a means to increasing food supply, reducing hunger
and improving responses to emergency food crises.
The regional body's statement however, indicates
that some of the factors constraining realization of the
potential of root crops, including cassava and potato,
include market failures.
"This is manifested in lack of key institutions and
frameworks to enhance efficient marketing along the
commodity value-chain. Most countries in ECA lack
standards necessary for commercial utilization of cas-
sava and potato," reads the statement in parts
In addition, value-addition technologies are still
under-utilized due to a lack of clear guidelines on stan-
dards and supportive policies.
"Efforts by key stakeholders in the value-chain
are disintegrated with no clear partnership structures
crucial to a well-functioning producer to market value-
chain," says Waithaka.
Adding that most root crops are perishable, high-
volume, low-value commodities in their raw state,
thus the need for processing standards to ensure a
reduction in post-harvest losses and the procurement
of surplus quantities for processing and marketing.
Improved storability, reducing unit marketing
costs and ultimately stabilizing prices received by
farmers for their food produce, value addition through
product development were proposed as remedies that
can enable smallholders to access different niche mar-
kets.
Cassava and potato, despite their strategic role in
reducing hunger in Africa, also hold high industrial po-
tential for food, feed and industrial raw materials
though their value-chain is not fully developed.
Meetings held in the interest of the food im-
provement projects recommended that in order to
enhance the value of the crops, conducive policy
frameworks that support commercialization of these
crops is necessary.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Economic Community of West African States (ECOWAS)

ECOWAS Council of Ministers Adopts

Regional Industrial Policy, Calls for Speedy
Action Plan Implementation

SPONSOR WIRE/June 3, 2010

Abuja - Nigeria — The ECOWAS
Council of Ministers has adopted
the West African Common Indus-
trial Policy (WACIP), its action plan
and supplementary acts and called
on the ECOWAS Commission to
take all necessary steps to ensure
their speedy implementation.
The three documents are
based on a global vision that will
enable Member States benefit
from their comparative advantages
and complementarities. WACIP, in
particular, seeks to diversify and
broaden the region's industrial pro-
duction base by progressively raising the local con-
tent of such products to an average of 30 per cent
by 2030 through support for the creation of new
industrial production capacities and the develop-
ment and upgrading of the existing ones. It is also
aimed at progressively increasing the manufactur-
ing industry's contribution to the regional gross do-
mestic product (GDP) to an average of over 20 per
cent in 2030, from its current average of between
six and seven per cent.
The policy is designed to help improve intra-
Community trade from the present 13 per cent to
40 per cent by 2030 and increase the volume of
exports of manufactured goods from West Africa to
the global market from the current 0.1 per cent to
one per cent by 2030. This will be done through the
enhancement and development of skills, industrial
competitiveness and quality infrastructure, particu-
larly in the areas of information, communication
and transport. The Council, which ended its three-
day mid-year meeting late on Wednesday, 2nd June
2010 in Abuja after reviewing various programmes
and activities of the institutions of the Community,
also adopted the reports of the President of the
ECOWAS Commission, the Financial Controller, the
preceding meeting of the Administration and Fi-
nance Committee, the 8th Ad Hoc Ministerial Com-
mittee on GIABA and the meeting of the Ministers
71
ECOWAS Commission Headquarters, Abuja
in charge of Defence and Security, among others.
The 2010 Interim Report of the Commission's
President gave an overview of recent economic
developments in the world economy and their im-
plications for Africa, particularly West Africa, the
regional economic performance, a progress report
on the implementation of Community work pro-
grammes between November 2009 and May 2010,
the challenges and the way forward in 2010 and
beyond. The Council, which is an organ of the Com-
munity and composed of ministers responsible for
ECOWAS affairs in Member States, also adopted
the recommendations of the Administration and
Finance Committee (AFC). These included the sup-
plementary budgets for ECOWAS disaster response
in Member States, the GIABA anti-money launder-
ing projects, the ECOWAS Commission's pro-
grammes in education, labour and employment,
the rehabilitation of the Commission's headquar-
ters and the 10th anniversary celebration of the
Community Court of Justice which comes up later
in 2010. Furthermore, the Council endorsed the
report of the 11th Ordinary Assembly of Health
Ministers of ECOWAS, which include a resolution
on the prevention and control of non-
communicable diseases, the harmonization of cur-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Economic Community of West African States (ECOWAS)
ricula for the training of nurses and midwives, the
integration of primary eye care into primary health
care, the road map for universal access to malaria
control products and the regional framework to
accelerate the reduction of maternal and child mor-
tality in ECOWAS Member States.
The ministers also endorsed the recommenda-
tion of the Ministerial Monitoring Committee
(MMC) on the negotiation of the Economic Partner-
ship Agreement (EPA) for the creation of a free
trade area between West Africa and Europe. The
Council urged the West African negotiators to pro-
tect the interest of the region to enable the EPA
function as a tool for development in accordance
with the directives of regional leaders. The MMC's
report and recommendations highlighted out-
standing issues such as the EPA Development Pro-
gramme, the rules of origin and protocol on mutual
administrative assistance, Community levies, Most
ECOWAS Commission President James Victor Gbeho
Favoured Nation and Non- execution clauses, mar-
ket access offer and the determination of net fiscal gion's mediatory efforts in Guinea Bissau and
impact, the ECOWAS Common External Tariff, hub Guinea. While stating that the West African region
and capacity building project and the Aid-for-Trade is facing serious food, energy and financial crises,
issue. The Council set up a three-member ad hoc he said it was only through concerted action and
committee composed of Cape Verde, Cote d'Ivoire collaboration that these problems could be solved
and Nigeria to propose a mechanism for the rota- by re-energizing the integration process in the re-
tion of the positions of President, Vice President, gion.
Commissioners of the ECOWAS Commission, the Through ECOWAS, he said, the region has re-
Financial Controller, the Speaker of the ECOWAS corded some measure of success in the area of im-
Parliament and Judges of the Community Court of plementation of Community programmes which
Justice. The committee is also mandated to make will fast-track regional integration in virtually all the
recommendations for the posts and draw up a key areas. He argued that it is only through this
schedule of rotation of the Chairmanship of the rapid socio-economic transformation that our sub-
Authority of Heads of State and Government. They regional organization would be able to realize its
also agreed on a draft agenda for the 38th ordinary dream and aspirations of transforming it from an
session of the Authority of Heads of State and Gov- ECOWAS of States to an ECOWAS of peoples by the
ernment which will take place on 3rd July 2010 on year 2020. In his opening remarks, the President of
the Island of Sal in Cape Verde. the Commission, Ambassador James Victor Gbeho,
The summit will be followed by a special who was attending his first meeting of the Council
ECOWAS-Brazil Summit of Heads of State in June since assuming duty three months ago, expressed
2010 also in Cape Verde. In his welcome address at optimism that consistent with a 35- year tradition,
the opening of the Council meeting on Monday, both old and new members of the Council would
31st May 2010, Nigeria's Minister of State for For- work together as a coherent team towards the at-
eign Affairs, Dr. Aliyu Idi Hong, hailed the impres- tainment of Community objectives and the
sive turn-out of ministers as "a clear indication of achievement of the Strategic Vision 2020 of
our unflinching commitment to carry our regional ECOWAS. Ambassador Gbeho also called for a one-
organization to an enviable height that could ad- minute silence to be observed in honour of the late
dress the myriad of challenges facing ECOWAS re- President of Nigeria and last Chairman of the
gion at this time". He stated that under the Chair- ECOWAS Authority of Heads of State and Govern-
manship of Nigeria, the region had recorded some ment, Alhaji Umaru Musa Yar'Adua who died ear-
measure of success in the areas of peace and stabil- lier in the year.
ity as well as economic development in virtually all
spheres within the region, as testified by the re-
72 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/World Economic Forum

20th World Economic Forum on Africa

By Muhammed Kamil

Report

T anzanian President Jakaya M. Kikwete

hosted African colleagues and members of
the World Economic Forum for its 2010 Africa
session from May 5th to 7th at the Mlimani City
Conference Centre on the outskirts of Dar Es Sa-
laam. Twelve African heads of state and govern-
ment took part along with over 1,000 participants
from 85 countries. Rethinking Africa’s Growth
Strategy was the theme of this 20th World Eco-
nomic Forum on Africa, which set out to examine
the changing global landscape and identify the
opportunities that can unlock Africa's growth po-
tential and remove the barriers to social and eco- Host Tanzanian President Jakaya M. Kikwete was emphatic
nomic progress in the coming years. Regional in- about Africa partnering with the world at large, but also
tegration and growth expansion, growth opportu- uncompromising on the importance of foreign investors giv-
nities and risks, and education were key issues on ing Africans the opportunity to become shareholders in their
the agenda. Discussions also addressed how a companies.
more conducive business climate and regulatory
bring together their knowledge and experience
reforms can encourage both local and interna-
to build the next Africa.
tional investments; and equally important, how
Host President Kikwete stressed agricul-
can low-carbon, sustainable development plans
ture as the foundation of African economy but
be designed for Africa's economic drivers, includ-
was also emphatic about the imperative of
ing its natural resources, agriculture and tourism.
partnerships with the outside world, noting
Millennium Development Goals to be achieved by
how small African economies are compared
2015 were also discussed.
not only to those of developed countries but
Mozambique’s President Armando Guebuza
also next to mega corporations. President Kik-
assured the world that Africa is lacking in neither
wete called for partnerships at local, bilateral
direction nor strategies, asserting at the May 6th
and international levels to help overcome the
plenary session: "We know what we want.., we
many obstacles faced by African nations.
know how to get it." However, a replay of the
“Africa’s potential is immense in terms of hu-
friction between business and government lead-
man and natural resources. It is a contradiction
ers that has been mounting worldwide as govern-
that Africa remains poor,” he said. “Poor as we
ments adopt popular policies and regulatory re-
are, our capacities are limited. We need part-
gimes aimed at reducing risk of another global
nerships with the private sector to invest in the
financial crisis was evident in the discussions.
development of the continent; we need ODA
Significantly however, the CEOs of South African
[Official Development Assistance], infrastruc-
and Indian based companies expressed perspec-
ture and services. We badly need FDI [foreign
tives in line with the vision and aspirations es-
direct investment].”
poused by African leaders. For example, Mr. Ajai
Advocating trade barrier removal, Kikwete
Chowdhry, founder and chairman of the HCL In-
told his audience at the May 5th plenary ses-
forsystems of India, in presenting his thoughts
sion, “Africa needs trade and market access.
and expectations for the meeting, said his expec-
The biggest [barrier] is supply side constraints.
tations are on how all participants can collectively
73 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/20th World Economic Forum on Africa
We need partnership and investment to develop
goods and services to sell to these markets. We
have a comparative advantage on the agricultural
side, but the trade distorting subsidies in devel-
oped countries are crippling Africa’s agriculture.”
The Tanzanian president reminded partici-
pants that East Africa gets “the least share of FDI
flows in the world,” which he said was only 0.35%
of the global aggregate, but cautioned that in-
vestments cannot be made without active partici-
pation of the local private sector. He acknowl-
edged that Africa would have to formulate politi-
cal and economic policies to enable the conti-
nent’s human and material resources to be opti-
mally utilized. "Africa remains poor because
these resources are underexploited. There is a
need to unlock this potential for the benefit of
Africans," he said, adding that improved skills and
technology profiles were crucial to optimal po-
tential fulfillment.
Session Co-Chairs, Infosystems India’s Ajai
Chowdhry and Pat Davies, Chief Executive, Sasol,
South Africa, argued that Africa possessed rich
human capital that needed to be made more pro-
ductive. Noting that Africa’s population was now
over one billion, Davis maintained, “You’ve got
the people, the market and the resources. It is a
huge opportunity for Africa to become an engine
of growth globally.”
Looking at Africa from a continental perspec-
tive, Chowdhry observed, "India has a billion peo-
ple; so does Africa. We have very similar prob-
lems; therefore we could have similar solutions
which we in India can bring into Africa. In this
connection Chowdhry stressed the importance of
building effective institutions that are transparent
and deliver good governance. He also spoke of
technology transfer from India to Africa. He gave
the example of India’s electronic voting machines
which with 700 million people voting allows re-
sults to come out the following day. He moreover
pointed out that technology is crucial in combat-
ing poverty, in providing information as well as in
solutions, noting that information now available
to people at the village level is dramatically
changing their lives.
Mr. Chowdhry also spoke of mindset em-
powerment; a subject that was from him taken
up by Old Mutual South Africa CEO Mr. Kuseni
Dlamini, who pointed out that Africa has suffered
from a historical legacy of Afro pessimism.
Dlamini said one of the things he expected out of
the WEF confab was that it would produce in-
Pat Davies, CEO,of Sasol, South Africa and Co-Chair of the
World Economic Forum on Africa, speaks during a news confer-
ence at Mlimani City Conference Centre in Dar Es Salaam, Tan-
zania, Wednesday, May 5, 2010, ahead of the opening session
of 20th World Economic Forum on Africa. AP photo
formed and concrete conversations that contrib-
ute to Africa turning the corner away from nega-
tive perceptions. Dlamini agreed with Chowdhry
on the importance of institutions that can deliver
Africa’s needs, noting that there must be focus on
capacity building to this end.
Stressing the role of entrepreneurship,
Dlamini, one of South Africa most distinguished
young business executives, said, "We also need to
ensure that we’ve got the right capabilities to
enable Africans start and run companies that can
succeed not just in Africa but also on the world
stage,” adding, "If we educate our young people
and women, they stand better chances of unlock-
ing the continent's potential." Assessing Africa’s
global potential in food supply, the Old Mutual
South Africa CEO pointed to the continent’s vast
endowment of arable land, which in his view, if
effectively and collectively utilized would be able
to curb the crisis of food shortages not just for
Africans but also make the continent “the bread-
basket of the world.”
Joergen Ole Haslestad, President and Chief
Executive Officer, Yara International, Norway
spoke in similar vein: “Unlocking Africa’s potential
in the agriculture sector involves addressing the
challenges of infrastructure and red tape, as well
as someone ready to take the risk to invest. Suc-
cess is generating successes and one has to do
that in close partnership,” he said. “We see huge
changes in most countries in the willingness to
open up. This is the place to develop agricul-
ture,” Haslestad concluded.
74 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/20th World Economic Forum on Africa
Mozambique’s President Armando Guebuza,
speaking at the May 6 plenary session, echoed Kik-
wete, stressing the importance of agriculture and
inviting foreign investment in his country’s agricul-
ture and tourism sectors. While calling for invest-
ment partnerships, President Guebuza also
stressed reducing reliance on foreign aid.

Foreign Companies Accused of Tax Evasion

South African Finance Minister Pravin Gordhan,
speaking at the plenary session on May 6, main-
tained that Africa loses between $200 million and
$400 million annually to tax evasion by multina-
tional corporations that repatriate fraudulently Mozambique President Armando Guebuza assured the world
earned profits. "Businesses have the responsibility that Africa knows what it wants and how to get it
to pay taxes, to pay fair taxes," said the South Afri-
can Finance Minister, adding that Africa remained
the most competitive continent in which to do
business. In support of Pravin Gordhan’s asser-
tions, President Armando Guebuza was joined by
African Development Bank President Donald
Kaberuka in arguing that Africa lagged way behind
other parts of the world in revenue collection as a
percentage of gross domestic product. "Tax to GDP
percentage in Africa is still the lowest [in the world]
at only 7 per cent," said Dr Kaberuka.
Dr. Kaberuka, a former Rwandan Finance Min-
ister, pointed out that although Africa needed to
attract more foreign investments to boost its
economies, revenue collection remained an impor-
tant area for governments to finance its operations
and development programmes.
ArcelorMittal South Africa's Chief Executive
Officer, Ms Nku Nyembezi-Heita took exception to ArcelorMittal South Africa's Chief Executive Officer, Ms Nku
Mr. Gorhan’s claims, saying, “I find the Minister of Nyembezi-Heita berated Africa’s investment environment. Brit-
Finance’s views on taxation really strange.” Com- ish based ArcelorMittal is the world’s largest steel maker.
plaining about African business policy regimes, Ms
Nku Nyembezi-Heita, whose UK based steelmaker
is the world’s largest, criticized most African gov-
ernments and especially Pretoria for what she de-
scribed as inconsistent fiscal policies. She said in-
consistent policies made it difficult to decide on
investment plans, where one could not easily pre-
dict returns. She singled out Pretoria's recent
change in mining tax, saying it sent negative mes-
sages to investors who already view the continent
as too risky to invest. She argued that apart from
unreliable regulations which change overnight, the
continent has numerous problems including short-
age of reliable and affordable power supply. Mr.
Gordhan dismissed international investors who South African Finance Minister Pravin Gordhan defended
describe Africa as a risky place to do business as Africa’s investment climate
people out of touch with the reality.
75 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/20th World Economic Forum on Africa
The Tanzania Daily News report on the ple-
nary session noted, “Currently, there has been
growing resistance against government policies
and regulatory reforms by multinational mining
and telecommunication companies which have
made super-profits in the two sectors over the past
decade.” The newspaper mentioned in this con-
nection that mining companies are through the
Chamber of Mines contesting a proposed law
passed by Parliament recently that seeks to give
the country more benefits including taxes, from its
mineral resources. Also, foreign owned mobile
telecommunications companies which are listed at
their home country stock exchange markets are WEF on Africa venue Mlimani City Conference Centre on the
opposing mandatory listing at the Dar Es Salaam outskirts of Dar Es Salaam, Tanzania
Stock Exchange after three years of operations in
the country.
Sasol’s Pat Davies cautioned against dwelling
on things that were not exactly to some companies
liking and focusing on successful experiences and
evident opportunities. “Let’s focus on the suc-
cesses and grow more successes instead of spend-
ing energy on the barriers. It is critical that we
work together,” he said. Chowdhry added that
highly successful public and private partnerships in
India involving the ICT sector could serve as models
for Africa. Davies’ Sasol has had successful partner-
ships with the governments of Mozambique and
South Africa on a US$ 2 billion natural gas project
which have shown that given political and business
will, technology and innovation, barriers started
disappearing.
Co-Chair Prof. Anna Tibaijuka, Undersecretary
-General and Executive Director, United Nations
Human Settlements Programme (UN-HABITAT),
Nairobi, emphasized that within the framework of
globalization, Africa needs a level playing field. “To
realize Africa’s potential requires an environment
within which that potential can be realized. This
will require international solidarity, partnership Prof. Anna Tibaijuka, Undersecretary-General and Executive
Director, United Nations Human Settlements Programme (UN-
and a level playing field,” she said. Tibaijuka
HABITAT) said Africa must be developed for Africans
warned African leaders that they must better man-
age rapid urbanization which she described as constitute 51% of the continent’s population did
presently “chaotic”. not have equal access to the means of production.
"This (urbanization) is taking place, I am Pointing out that urbanization in Africa has now
afraid, in a very rapid and chaotic manner. So Af- reached 70% and many people are living in squat-
rica has to catch up with this scourge of rapid and ter settlements without access to safe water and
chaotic urbanization for the continent to be secure sanitation, "indeed to call a spade a spade without
for business and economic activities," she cau- dignity," she lamented.
tioned. Tibaijuka said that in the ongoing demo- Prof. Tibaijuka, who is from Tanzania, said that
graphic transition it is the women and children with WEF coming to Dar Es Salaam and East Africa
who normally bear the worse effects of inadequate generally, participants not familiar with the region
facilities and services. She said that women who
76 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/20th World Economic Forum on Africa

One of South Africa’s most distinguished young corporate executives Old Mutual CEO Kuseni Dlamini said it was time to
leave behind Afro pessimism and focus on capacity building in tandem with institutional efficiency

have to explore the environment of the African

continent, not only from the traditional re-
source perspective of Africa such as in extractive
resources, but with a view of developing Africa
for Africans. "Sustainable development in Africa
will have to pick a social perspective in order to
secure the interests of the people because then
and only then could we flourish," she advised.
Klaus Schwab, Founder and Executive
Chairman, World Economic Forum, noted that
this year’s meeting on Africa, the Forum’s 20th
and its largest to date, is a demonstration of
what multi-stakeholders can achieve together.
Yara International, Norway, President and CEO Joergen Ole
“We will work hard to make sure that this meet- Haslestad said there are evident huge changes in Africa which
ing makes a concrete contribution to the eco- is now the place to invest in agriculture.
nomic and social development of this great con-
tinent,” he said.

77 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/International Cooperation/Trade & Investment
Harnessing Continent's Potential
through Infrastructure Development
5 May 2010 and Entrepreneurship
U.S. Assistant Secretary of State for African Affairs Johnnie Carson
T he recent Fourth Annual Corporate Council
on Africa (CCA) U.S.-Africa Infrastructure
Conference brought together industry leaders
from all sectors and policymakers from the
United States and Africa to shape the continent's
economic future through foreign investment and
enterprise.
U.S. Assistant Secretary of State Johnnie Car-
son spoke to the April 28 conference about Af-
rica's challenges.
"Africa cannot hope to close its development
gap or to achieve middle-income status without
addressing infrastructure as a fundamental im-
pediment to trade, investment and growth," he
said. "Poor road, rail and harbor infrastructure
adds 30 to 40 percent to the cost of goods traded
among African countries."
Katherine Sierra, the World Bank's vice presi-
dent for sustainable development, talked about
the bank’s efforts and pointed to the Africa Infra-
structure Diagnostic – a set of data to determine
the status of infrastructure in African countries
and to help diagnose where development is most
needed.
78
African entrepreneur, philanthropist Mo Ibrahim
She said the lack of large-scale economies,
the high costs of electric power and a lack of
competition contribute to the high cost of infra-
structure in Africa. "Thin markets in Africa are
often characterized by monopolies or cartels
leading to high profit margins for a limited num-
ber of service providers, inefficiencies and there-
fore high prices,” she said.
A luncheon on day two of the conference,
titled “Africa's Got Talent: Entrepreneurs in Ac-
tion,” focused on getting investment capital to
African businesses and on new ways to boost the
continent’s economic growth.
Dr. Mohammed Ibrahim, founder of a major
mobile network, Celtel International, which he
sold in 2005, talked about the high cost of mov-
ing goods across borders and the lack of infra-
structure. Ibrahim, who now heads a foundation
that bears his name, appealed for investors to
get involved in Africa.
Many African countries have markets that
are sub-scale, he said, making market integration
a necessity for success. “We have 53 African
-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/International Cooperation/Trade & Investment
Harnessing Continent's Potential through Infrastructure Development & Entrepreneurship
countries,” he said. “It's too many.”
He decried the flow of capital out of Africa,
particularly, most recently into Asian markets.
“We go out of our way not to trade with each
other,” he said. Only eight percent of Africa's
trading occurs within its borders, Ibrahim said.
“We have to go out and compete,” he urged.
“Nobody owes us a free lunch.”
Another panel at the luncheon focused on
several Africans who took part in the Presidential
Summit on Entrepreneurship hosted by President
Barack Obama the pervious week. Kojo Benjamin
Taylor, who heads a health care innovation com-
pany, MicroClinic, argued that investment can be
a boon to the health care sector. He said Africa
needs public and private sector collaboration as
well as U.S.$35-40 billion to plug all the holes in
service delivery in the health sector.
"We have started to adopt some of the
Western lifestyle in our eating habits. We are
driving more instead of walking, we are beginning
to eat more canned food, so diseases are moving
from contagious [illnesses] to diseases that re-
quire more medical technology for us to do more
testing,” he said.
Julian Rotich, a founder of the web-based
mapping site Ushahidi, agreed with Ibrahim that
regional integration is paramount. “In the inter-
connected world we live in, sometimes the geo-
graphical division that we have doesn’t matter as
much anymore,” she said.
She challenged investors to seek out
“regional integration already happening on the
Internet and within Africa," which she said helps
entrepreneurs connect to capital and ideas
around the world.
Rotich called on African governments to put
in place policies that are conducive to entrepre-
neurs within Africa. She said a mobile developer
has to pay 50,000 Kenyan shillings for a license.
"If you're starting out and you don't really have
money, that's not money you can easily come
by,” Rotich said.
Ronald Mutebi, president and CEO of
Uganda-based Tek Consults Group, said American
and European investors are more likely to benefit
from an improved business environment than
locals in most African countries. Organizations
like USAID and the World Bank don't usually
make funds available to African entrepreneurs,
he said.
79
Salim Amin, chairman of Camerapix and
A24 Media in Nairobi, praised the gathering,
saying that it gave him the chance to meet
with innovators outside his industry and said
he hoped to share ideas with fellow attendees
in the future.
The fourth annual CCA conference was
attended by over 400 investors, government
officials and stakeholders from across all busi-
ness sectors.
United Nations Summary of Africa’s
2009 Economic Performance
At the sub-regional level, Southern Africa con-
tracted by 1.7 per cent in 2009, the worst re-
gional performance on the continent. South Af-
rica recorded its first recession since the collapse
of the apartheid regime. This slowdown also
spilled over to its neighbours, particularly Leso-
tho, Swaziland and Namibia. West Africa grew by
2.4 per cent in 2009. Nigeria, the second-largest
sub-Saharan economy, grew by 1.9 per cent, as
declines in the industrial sector and crude oil pro-
duction were offset by increases in agriculture.
Meanwhile, other food exporters of the region
proved to be quite resilient as the demand and
prices for commodities like cocoa, coffee and
bananas remained robust. North Africa, with an
average growth of 3.5 per cent in 2009, was also
more resilient, owing to robust domestic con-
sumption and excellent harvests in Algeria and
Morocco. In Morocco, the unemployment rate
even decreased from 9.6 to 8.0 per cent between
the first and second quarters of 2009. East Africa
recorded the highest sub-regional growth rate in
2009: owing to the dynamism in Ethiopia and in
the five member countries of the East African
Community, it expanded by 3.8 per cent. How-
ever, the significance of such a positive headline
figure appears questionable in view of severe
problems in satisfying the basic needs of a large
number of those countries' citizens.
More specifically, prolonged droughts and
variations in rainfall, accentuated in some cases
by conflicts and political turmoil, continue to
have a devastating impact on a region where
more than 20 million people are affected by se-
vere hunger.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Economy/Capital Markets

AfriBiz™ AfriStock May-June 2010:

Mid-Year Review of African Stock Market Performance
By Harmut Sieper
June 30, 2010 Comparing African Stock Market Performance
Over the last few weeks, the world capital mar- to World Markets
kets have shown increased volatility. Market par-
ticipants are becoming nervous. There are many
negative factors right now:
• The Euro currency crisis
• The sovereign debt crisis of European na-
tions, starting with Greece, continuing with Spain,
Portugal, and Hungary (new!)
• The months from May to November usually
experience more setbacks, corrections and
crashes than the first half of the year. “Sell in May
and go away” suggests that equity investors
should lighten their stock portfolios in early sum-
mer and re-enter in early winter.
• Mixed economic data in U.S. on Friday, June
4, indicating recovery remains slow
But is this true for Africa as well? Given the
fact that African stock markets have low correla-
tion to Western stock markets, one can assume
that shifting from Western stocks to African
stocks should be a better idea than moving to
cash or treasury bonds.

African stock market performance compared

to world markets this year paints a clear, positive
picture.
• African markets performed considerably bet-
ter than the big stock exchanges in New York,
London, and Tokyo. While all the big markets
are in the red, only a few African markets are
negative.
• Many markets show huge performances with
double-digit returns, crowned by Uganda (+
40 %), Kenya (+ 30 %), Ghana (+ 27 %), and
Nigeria (+ 24 %).
Africa also performed much better than the
MSCI Emerging Markets Index, which is down by
6.5 %. China (Shanghai Composite Index: – 22 %)
has already entered a bear market.
Comparing Corrections in Indices
When comparing the S&P 500 Index, the FTSE/JSE
All Shares Index, Egypt 30 Index, and Nigeria
Stock Exchange All Shares Index, this is what we
find:
Surprisingly, the U.S. and South African mar-
kets are very closely correlated. Global portfolio
investors cannot reduce their risk by adding
South African stocks.
• Egypt and Nigeria behaved very different to
the S&P 500 and the Johannesburg Stock Ex-
change Index, as well as to each other.
• Egypt and Nigeria experienced some hefty
short-term corrections. Egypt experienced
them in the second week of March, and then
again in the whole month of May. Nigeria
experienced them in the third week of
March, the second half of April, and the sec-
ond half of May.
• The correction of the Egyptian stock market,
as well as the subsequent rebound was heav-
ier than in the U.S. markets.
Nigeria consolidates within a well-defined
trading range, while the other markets are head-
ing lower.

80 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Economy/Capital Markets

Sub-Saharan Africa Stocks: Dangote,

Kapchorua Tea, Williamson Are Active
By Eric Ombok and Vincent Nwanma - Jun 30, 2010

Vincent Nwanma in Lagos via Johannesburg on

vnwanma@bloomberg.net

Nairobi Stock Exchange

As of July 1, 2010

Market Capitalization in KShs, billions

Mauritius’s SEMDEX Index gained for a sixth day, 1,107,899

rising 0.1 percent to 1,654.16. The measure rose
0.9 percent in the three months through June. Total Shares Traded
Kenya’s All-Share Index retreated 0.3 per-
cent to 74.40 at the close in Nairobi. The East Af- 9,980,500
rican nation’s index rose 7.5 percent in the sec-
ond quarter, a third of gains. The Nigerian Stock Equity Turnover in KShs
Exchange’s All Share Index increased 0.1 percent
to 25,384.14, according to its website. 173,402,749
Namibia’s FTSE/Namibia Overall Index
dropped 2 percent to 719.50, while the Ghana Total Deals
Stock Exchange All-Share Index retreated 0.7 per-
cent to 6,548.59, a fourth day of declines. 1,902
The following shares rose or fell in sub-
Saharan Africa, excluding South Africa. Stock sym-
bols are in parentheses.
Dangote Sugar Refinery Plc (DANGSUGA NL),
Egypt Stock Exchange
a Nigerian processor of the sweetener, rallied the As of July 1, 2010
highest in almost three months, advancing 10
Market Digest 01Jul 15:58GMT
kobo, or 0.5 percent, to 20.3 naira. The company
announced plans to pay a dividend of 1 naira per Total Market Cap USD 69,650,084,076
share for the year through December 2009.
Total Market Cap USD
Kapchorua Tea Co. (KPTC KN), a Kenyan pro- (Primary Listings)
69,479,544,805
ducer of the leaves, rose to the highest level in
more than three months, climbing 5 shillings, or Volume 102,104,823
3.5 percent, to 150 shillings. The industry regula-
tor said first-half tea output in the East African Value Traded USD * 149,340,482

nation grew 15 percent from a year earlier.

Transactions 31,537
George Williamson Kenya Ltd. (GWKL KN), which
also grows tea, gained for the first time this
Traded / Listed Stocks 163 / 218
week, rising 5 shillings, or 2.5 percent, to 218 shil-
lings.
Stocks Movement 0 Up - 0 Down - 163 Unchanged
To contact the reporters on this story: Eric
Ombok in Nairobi at eombok@bloomberg.net;

81 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/Economy/Capital Markets

West Africa Regional Stock Exchange

PRESS RELEASE/TRADING/124/2010

Note: 1 US Dollar = CFA 443.67

The BRVM closed its fixing session on Wednesday June 30, 2010, lower than the
previous one. The BRVM Composite index lost 0.58%, dropping from 143.59 to
142.76 points. The BRVM 10 index closed at 162.89 points down 0.86%.

1. The value of the transactions was 346.72 million CFA francs, compared to the
69.09 million CFA francs reported last Session.

2. Trading involved 16 of the 38 companies listed on the stock exchange. The

number of securities traded climbed to 17,639.

3. 17 of the 21 accredited brokerage firms, including 9 from outside Côte

d'Ivoire, took part in the market.

4. Stock market capitalization was 3,103,972,181,419 CFA francs. That for the
bond market rose to 437,903,547,480 CFA francs.

5. On the bond market, 5,164 bonds were traded for a total value 51,64 million
CFA francs, not counting accrued coupons.

We would like to thank everyone involved in the BRVM and inform you that the
next session will be, Thursday July 1st, 2010.

Prepared in Abidjan, June 30, 2010.

For the General Manager,
Market Operation Manager,
Interim officer
Emmanuel ZAMBLE BI

E-mail : brvm@brvm.org
Website: www.brvm.org

Member Country Contacts

BENIN BURKINA FASO COTE D’IVOIRE GUINEE BISSAU MALI

Tél : 229 312126 Tél : 226 308773 Tél : 225 20326685 Tél :225 20326686 Tél : 223 232354

NIGER SENEGAL TOGO

Tél : 227 736692 Tél : 221 8211518 Tél : 228 212305

82 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Franco-African Relations
Franco-African Summit
French President Nicolas Sarkozy, foreground left,
AU Chairman and Malawian President Bingu wa
Mutharika, foreground right, Mali's President
Amadou Toumani Toure, left at rear, and Senegalese
President Abdoulaye Wade, rear center, during the
25th Africa-France Summit, in Nice, southeastern
France, 31 May 2010
F rench President Nicolas Sarkozy opened the
Franco-African Summit in Nice, France with
the prediction that Africa would fuel global eco-
nomic growth in the coming decades and a con-
comitant pledge to advocate a stronger voice for
Africa in world affairs. "I am deeply convinced
that it is no longer possible to discuss major
world issues without the presence of Africa,"
Sarkozy told the 38 African leaders gathered in
the French Riviera city of Nice.
According to Radio France International,
President Sarkozy sought to renew France’s rela-
tionship to Africa at the Nice summit. In his char-
acteristic emphatic style, France’s first post Sec-
ond World War born president acknowledged,
"None of the problems, absolutely none of the
problems that the world faces today can be re-
solved without the active participation of the Af-
rican continent." Accordingly, President Sarkozy
committed himself to back UN reforms to give
more say to African nations, including Africa’s
representation on the Security Council.
Speaking before the Summit Congo-
Brazzaville President Denis Sousou Nguesso
83
Report
raised the issue of African marginalization in
global decision making. "When there is a serious
economic crisis in the world, we cannot continue
to hold meetings without Africa and make deci-
sions without Africa on behalf of the entire
world," said the Congolese leader.
Summit Co-Chair President Hosni Mubarak
of Egypt echoed his French counterpart’s con-
cerns, saying, “We want to end at all cost the
marginalization of the African continent, so that it
can participate with a clear and strong voice in
political and economic decision-making at the
international level."
Nigeria’s President Goodluck Jonathan
seized the opportunity to press his country’s long-
standing case for a permanent seat on the United
Nations Security Council.
President Sarkozy prior to the Summit told
the weekly news magazine Les Afriques that nei-
ther French nor Africans would at this point in
history, 50 years after independence and in an
era of globalization, understand the notion of a
privileged French presence in Africa. “…I am going
to be very frank: personally, I think it's very good
that France and her African partners no longer
have exclusive relations. The concepts of exclu-
sive partnership, private domains no longer exist
and this is very good,” Sarkozy told Les Afriques in
the interview published by the French Foreign
Ministry. He said that the interest being shown in
Africa by China, the Americans and others is good
because Africa’s development and investment
needs are great and it also shows that the there is
a broader global consensus on the continent’s
prospects.
President Sarkozy pointed out that the lon-
gevity of Franco-African relations is a historical
reality which could not be erased by looser ties
because of the common interests France and Af-
rica have in the international community. In this
regard, President Sarkozy noted that over the
past ten years, French imports from Africa had
rose by 40% and exports by 30%.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Franco-African Relations
Gabon’s President Ali Bongo with French President Nicolas Sarkozy at the Franco-African Summit
held from May 31 to June 2 in the French Riviera city, Nice.
Apart from the increasing trade between
France and Africa, President Sarkozy maintained
that the two domains are partners in confronting
global challenges such as climate change, point-
ing out that the $10 billion a year funding for de-
veloping countries until 2012, to be raised to
$100 billion annually thereafter to 2020 was
achieved through collaborative efforts of Africa,
France and other members of the European Un-
ion.
South African President Jacob Zuma said af-
ter the Summit that it had provided his country
an opportunity to strengthen relations based on
shared interests and mutual trusts. Speaking at
the close of the Summit on Jun 1, President Zuma
Presidents Sarkozy and Zuma
84
Franco-African Summit
stressed the need to settle conflicts on the conti-
nent, as they were the biggest obstacle to devel-
opment. He acknowledged France as one of Af-
rica’s strategic partners in conflict resolution.
Responding to media questions President Zuma
said there is a convergence of views between
South Africa and France on the need to support
the work of the Southern African Development
Community (SADC) in assisting the parties to re-
solve the political impasse in Madagascar.
President Zuma agreed with other heads of
state and government attending the summit that
to be effective the multilateral system must be
representative of today's world, based on a
strong and reformed United Nations. In this con-
nection President Zuma said reform of the
United Nations Security Council is urgent. Presi-
dent Zuma, who departed France for a state visit
to India, had bilateral discussions with French
President Sarkozy and Nigerian President Good-
luck Jonathan on the sidelines of the Summit.
At the end of the summit, France committed
to set up a US$120 million fund to help Africa's
farming and food distribution sectors. Media re-
ports indicated the fund will start at US$120 mil-
lion and could increase to as much as US$300
million. Leaders also agreed to deal with their
common challenges with coordination and soli-
darity.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Franco-African Summit

France Diplomatie (Paris)

Interview Given by Nicolas Sarkozy, President of the Republic,

to the Weekly News Magazine, 'Les Afriques' (Excerpts)
DOCUMENT
Paris — Business will have "pride of place" at this
week's France-Africa summit, the first to be open to
non-state players, French President Nicolas Sarkozy
told Les Afriques, according to a transcript of excerpts
of the interview published by the French foreign minis-
try:

When it comes to Africa, France is criticized simul-

taneously for her involvement and non-
involvement. But isn't France herself torn between
a sincere desire to establish a looser relationship
with Africa and a temptation, or even necessity, to
maintain know-how and experience she has gained.

THE PRESIDENT - (…) I reject the idea of a need to

choose between a looser and a preferential relation-
ship. My ambition has always been to reconcile the
two. This is why, ever since my election, I have pro-
posed to our African partners placing our special
bond on a new footing, with no taboos. South African President Jacob Zuma (left) with French
President Nicolas Sarkozy at the 25th Franco African
I firmly believe that the fact that our relationship Summit in the French Riviera city, Nice
goes back a long way and the strength of the bonds
THE PRESIDENT - You talk to me about a perception,
between our countries and peoples are not obsta-
I'd like to talk to you about concrete facts. And the
cles to a looser relationship, quite the contrary. On
reality is that the ties between Africa and France
one condition: that this special bond, what you call
aren't only not decreasing, but have been growing
the "know-how and experience we have gained"
stronger for ten years. Take trade: over the past ten
does not simply reflect a legacy, and even less an
years, our exports to Africa have risen by nearly 30%
unwarranted and outmoded privilege. Fifty years
and our imports by nearly 40%.
after gaining independence and against a back-
ground of globalization, no one, neither Africans nor
But the economy isn't the only thing. More than ever,
French, would understand it.
for France, Africa is a partner in globalization, an ally
when it comes to confronting the challenges of the
The fact is that today France and Africa have very
21st century. Remember Copenhagen! Admittedly,
many common interests and objective reasons for
the summit's results did not live up to all our expecta-
placing our special bond on a new footing. This is
tions, but we achieved some absolutely huge ad-
what we are together, Africans and French, in the
vances, particularly with respect to short and long-
process of doing.
term funding. What is this funding going to be used
for? To help the countries in most need of it, particu-
FRANCE/AFRICA/TRADE/COPENHAGEN/COMPETITION larly in Africa, address the challenge of climate
At a time when emerging countries such as China, change. And we're talking about gigantic sums: $10
Brazil, India and Korea are markedly developing billion a year until 2012, then the amounts will in-
their relations with Africa, France is often criticized crease, rising to $100 billion from 2020. And the alli-
for doing the reverse. Do you think this feeling is ance between Africa and France and, through her,
justified? And if not, how do you explain this per- Europe, played an absolutely crucial role in achieving
ception? this.

85 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/Franco-African Summit
France Diplomatie (Paris)

Interview Given by Nicolas Sarkozy, President of the Republic, to the Weekly

News Magazine, 'Les Afriques' (Excerpts)
So why this impression of a lower commitment?
Because, as you said, today more and more coun-
tries are taking an interest in Africa. The arrival of
these new players can give the impression - a false
one - of a lower commitment on the part of those
there before. It's often like that, the last to arrive
attracts the most notice.

But I am going to be very frank: personally, I think

it's very good that France and her African partners
no longer have exclusive relations. The concepts of
exclusive partnership, private domains no longer
exist and this is very good.

Admittedly, for a long time France opted for Africa.
Our companies were often the first to come and
work on your continent at a time when few people
took an interest in Africa. But the fact that others
are coming - Americans, Chinese, Indians and so on
- doesn't bother me at all. On the contrary. It's a
very good thing that more and more countries are
taking an interest in Africa, investing in Africa. The
needs are immense. And it's proof that there's a
future for your continent.
There is increased competition, so much the better!
Competition is good for Africa: it compels our com-
panies to put their best foot forward. I'd only add
that the competition playing field must be level.
And I'll say something else: we, the developed coun-
tries and particularly France, have done a lot to re-
duce Africa's debt. It's important for these new part-
ners not to increase it again, since that would cer-
tainly not be doing Africa a service. (…)
DEMOCRACY
Last year, Michel Rocard told our newspaper: "we
made the mistake of believing that democracy con-
sisted solely of multi-partyism and elections". Do
you share this mea culpa?
THE PRESIDENT - I totally share his view. It would be
a serious mistake to reduce democracy to multi-
partyism and elections. They are, of course, two
necessary conditions, but they are far from suffi-
cient. Elections must also be free, honest and trans-
parent. There also has to be a rule of law guarantee-
President Sarkozy with African leaders in Nice
ing respect for individual and collective fundamental
freedoms. And a neutral administration, independ-
ent judiciary and a free and responsible press.
So you see, for me, democracy is inseparable from
human rights. And I reject any idea of an African
exception on these issues. I reject the argument
reducing them to values imposed from outside on
African societies which Western arrogance has de-
scribed as universal. Democracy and human rights
are African values too because they are universal
values and reflect the aspirations of all mankind.
Moreover, democratization and the wave of multi-
partyism which swept through Africa in the 1990s in
the first place fulfilled an African aspiration. The cri-
ses of the past few months in several African coun-
tries have underlined the fragility of these achieve-
ments, but democracy isn't just a political system or a
culture, it's also a process. Moreover, even in these
crises, there are some positive signs. I'm thinking for
example of the very courageous stance of Niger's
Constitutional Court. (…)
FRANCE/AFRICAN STUDENTS/IMMIGRATION POLICY
Young Africans are less and less inclined to think of
France when planning their studies or careers. Do
you regard this reduction in France's attractiveness
as a success for your immigration policy?

86 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Franco-African Summit
France Diplomatie (Paris)
Interview Given by Nicolas Sarkozy, President of the Republic, to the
Weekly News Magazine, 'Les Afriques' (Excerpts)
France’s President Sarkozy with Nigeria’s President Goodluck Jonathan
THE PRESIDENT - Right away, I have to tell you that
the idea of there being fewer African students in
France is quite simply wrong. In actual fact there have
never been so many African students in France, over
100,000 and the number is continuing to rise every
year. They account for over half the foreign students
in our universities. And France remains the most
popular country for African students.
So there's no sense in believing that the aim of the
immigration policy we are implementing is to cut the
number of African students. Moreover, I have said
several times that we were ready to take in more
African students. Simply, we don't want this to hap-
pen at the expense of their countries of origin. Be-
cause African countries need their elites, their edu-
cated and trained young people for their develop-
ment. Africa has suffered too much from the brain
drain and I won't be complicit in it.
I am keen for us to continue encouraging African
students to come to France so that they can benefit
from our training courses and/or a first professional
experience; but once trained, they must return to
their countries of origin to contribute to their devel-
opment.
87
It is with this in mind that we have established an
immigration policy agreed with the countries of ori-
gin. We have already signed agreements of this
type, with Gabon, Senegal, Congo, Benin and also
Tunisia.
We want properly controlled, regulated and organ-
ized immigration, so that we can admit the people
who come to France in a dignified manner. This has
to entail, among other things, waging a merciless
battle against illegal immigration, and in particular
the Mafias which exploit destitution.
NICE AFRICA-FRANCE SUMMIT
This year the forthcoming Africa-France summit is
being opened up to private and particularly African
businesses. What can France expect today from
African entrepreneurs?
THE PRESIDENT - The forthcoming Africa-France
summit will indeed, and for the first time, be open
to non-State players, such as companies, civil socie-
ties, the world of the arts and voluntary sector. They
are what make relations between Africa and France
both substantive and distinctive.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Franco-African Summit
France Diplomatie (Paris)

Interview Given by Nicolas Sarkozy, President of the Republic, to the

Weekly News Magazine, 'Les Afriques' (Excerpts)
In Nice, businesses will have pride of place, since not
only over 200 French and African entrepreneurs, but
also representatives of trade union organizations will
be taking part in the discussions.

On your second question - what we are doing for

African entrepreneurs - France has made develop-
ment of the African private sector a priority of her
development policy. It's with this in mind that, in
February 2008, I launched the Cape Town initiative
whose objective is precisely to support development
of the African private sector. As a result of this initia-
tive, which is going to mobilize €2.5 billion over five
years, nearly 2,000 African businesses will be directly
or indirectly financed and eventually over 300,000
jobs created.

Concretely, the Cape Town initiative is based on three

instruments. Firstly, doubling of the activity of the
French Development Agency in support of the private
sector, with a €2 billion commitment over five years,
thanks in particular to the tripling of the capital of
Proparco, the private-sector investment arm of the
AFD. Secondly, creation of a €250 million fund to in-
vest either directly in businesses, or in other funds.
Finally, thirdly, establishment of a guarantee fund,
which will likewise have a €250 million endowment to
facilitate access to bank credit and capital for African
businesses, and particularly SMEs. (…)
AFRICAN FINANCIAL SECTOR/ODA
For some years we have been witnessing the emer-
gence of a dynamic and well-managed African
financial sector. How will this new situation
change French cooperation policy in Africa?
THE PRESIDENT - You are right. This isn't perhaps
said enough, but the emergence in the past few
years of diligent, efficient and reliable financial insti-
tutions in Africa is an absolutely major step forward
in the continent's development, because a sound
financial environment is an absolute requisite for the
growth of a dynamic private sector which is the key
to Africa's development.
You must understand me: I believe that official de-
velopment assistance (ODA) is necessary; this is why,
despite the unprecedented economic crisis
Nice, France
we are going though, France has decided to maintain
and even increase her development effort. Our ODA
rose from 0.38% of GDP in 2007 to 0.46% in 2009. But
I am convinced that Africa's development also - and
perhaps above all - requires the development of the
private sector, which creates more growth, more
wealth and more jobs. (…)
An expert from Goldman Sachs, Dambisa Moyo, is
currently enjoying huge international success by
maintaining, in her book "Dead Aid", that aid is
counterproductive for Africa's development.
What's your position in this debate which is resur-
facing?
THE PRESIDENT - The idea that aid actually harms
development is not only wrong, but dangerous. I
believe in international solidarity and am convinced
that aid is not just useful, but essential to enable a
number of countries in the world to address the de-
velopment challenge. Of course, official develop-
ment aid can't be enough, on its own, to ensure de-
velopment; only the emergence of a dynamic pri-
vate sector can give Africa the growth it needs. (…)
So it's a mistake to see development assistance as
standing in the way of the emergence of a strong pri-
vate sector. If the assistance is well designed, it will,
on the contrary, encourage the building of a solid
economy. (…).

88 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Franco-African Summit
South African Government (Pretoria)
Africa-France Summit -
Remarks by President Jacob Zuma to
Session on Strengthening Peace and Security
President Jacob Zuma at the Nice Franco Africa Summit
with host President Nicolas Sarkozy
Document
The following is the full text of a speech delivered by
South African President Jacob Zuma, who was
among the leaders at the Africa-France Summit in
Nice, France.
Your Excellency, President Sarkozy,
Your Excellencies, Heads of State and Government
on the African Continent;
Your Excellency, Mr Ban Ki-moon, UN Secretary
General,
Your Excellency, Dr Jean Ping; AU Commission
chairperson,
Ministers of Foreign Affairs;
Ladies and Gentlemen;
Allow me first of all to thank our host, President
Sarkozy, and the Government of the French Repub-
lic for hosting this important occasion and for ex-
tending such warm courtesies to us all, in this beau-
tiful city of Nice.
89
31 May 2010
Excellencies,
Through the collective efforts of the member coun-
tries of the African Union, we continue to prioritise
the attainment of peace and security in all parts of
Africa.
As we consider the work that lies ahead, we need to
reflect on the progress of operationalising our Afri-
can peace and security architecture.
This architecture was developed to support pro-
grammes aimed at the prevention, resolution and
management of conflicts in a multifaceted ap-
proach.
Such an approach would entail:
• The AU Peace and Security Council, which is the
standing decision-making organ for the preven-
tion, management and resolution of conflicts;
• An African Standby Force (ASF) that deploys
peace support missions on the continent;
• The Panel of the Wise to mediate in conflict
situations;
• A Continental Early Warning System that en-
ables the African Union to pre-empt and pre-
vent the occurrence of conflicts.
In its five years of existence, the Peace and Security
Council, supported by the Panel of the Wise and the
AU Commission, has demonstrated valuable dyna-
mism in dealing with crises and conflict situations.
However, we need to note that operationalisation
of the Continental Early Warning System and the
African Standby Force is progressing rather slowly.
Insufficient technical and financial resources, cou-
pled with skills shortages, remain the biggest im-
pediments to progress.
We should therefore consider increased coopera-
tion with development partners.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Franco-African Summit
South African Government (Pretoria)
Africa-France Summit - Remarks by President Jacob Zuma to
Session on Strengthening Peace and Security
Closer cooperation between the AU Peace and Se-
curity Council and the UN Security Council is an im-
portant element in promoting and maintaining
peace on the African Continent.
Presently, the AU Commission and the UN Secre-
tariat cooperate on a range of issues relevant to
peace and security in Africa.
Of particular significance is the AU UN hybrid mis-
sion in Darfur (UNAMID) and the two organisations
are cooperating through the Ten Year Capacity
Building Programme signed in 2006.
With regards to the UN Mission in Somalia
(AMISOM), the UN has agreed to provide a logistics
support package.
Despite these significant achievements, more
needs to be done to strengthen political dialogue,
expedite the operationalisation of the African
Standby Force, and increase support for Africa's
peace keeping missions.
While AU member states are committed to peace
mission deployment, reimbursement under UN
agreements is often very slow, making it difficult
for member states to increase their mission sup-
port to other crisis areas.
Excellencies,
As we strengthen our peace and security architec-
ture, we need to address the root causes of con-
flict.
We need to address the socio-economic needs of
the people of Africa.
In many instances conflict is a consequence of deep
-rooted imbalances within societies.
Lasting peace will only be sustainable once we have
addressed issues of social and economic depriva-
tion and inequality.
Excellencies,
African countries remain committed to addressing
90
31 May 2010
conflict and instability, including unconstitutional
changes of government.
We need to be encouraged that progress continues
to be made in our various mediation efforts.
Our Tripoli Plan of Action outlines specific commit-
ments aimed at accelerating the resolution of con-
flict, responding to crisis situations, and consolidat-
ing peace.
We need to acknowledge the strides being made in
strengthening democratic governance through the
various instruments adopted by the AU.
The holding of regular democratic elections is trans-
lating into sustained peace and economic develop-
ment in many countries on the continent.
Excellencies,
But we cannot ignore the emergence of new threats
to international peace and security.
These include the destabilising effects of wide-
spread poverty, large-scale migration, rapid urbani-
sation, environmental degradation, and competition
for scarce natural resources.
As a result, the paradigms of conflict prevention,
resolution and management need to be re-defined
so that we may respond to changing conditions.
Excellencies,
Africa is taking control of its own destiny.
There are fewer conflicts now than in much of the
last century.
There are more democratic countries today than
ever before.
The economy is growing at a pace which outstrips
most other regions of the world.
In order to continue on this trajectory, we need to
redouble our efforts to end war, conflict and insta-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Franco-African Summit
South African Government (Pretoria)
31 May 2010

Africa-France Summit - Remarks by

President Jacob Zuma to
Session on Strengthening
Peace and Security
bility.

In this effort, we are grateful for the support of

our partners, like France, who have pledged to
support Africa in bringing about peace and pros-
perity.

This Summit presents an opportune platform to

deepen our cooperation on many issues.

We are reminded, President Sarkozy, of your ad-

dress to the South African Parliament on 28 Feb-
ruary 2008, where you reiterated France's vision
of "placing its relations with Africa on a new foot-
ing premised on the recognition of and taking on
board the interests of Africa with a renewed im-
There is no more fantastic and rewarding
petus injected to this Partnership."
journey into African history
The injection of this new impetus would be in-
formed by the principle that "the security and the • See the 224 pyramids built by the Kushite Dynasties
prosperity of France and Europe are indissolubly
linked with the security and prosperity of Africa".
• Incredibly well preserved archaeological sites
• Visit the Kushite Royal Cities
Finally, Excellencies, • Museum of well preserved statues of Black Pharaohs
dating back to the 7th century B.C.
In this African Year of Peace and Security, we have
rightly committed ourselves to spare no effort to • Visit the 2400 B.C. Kingdom of Kerma
continue our onward march towards a peaceful • Well informed tour guides will carry you on the most
and prosperous Africa. fantastic journey into African history there is.
• Interactive sessions between guests and authorities on
As this Year of Peace and Security culminates on
ancient Kush
the International Day of Peace and Security on the
21st of September, Africa will be called upon to • Two Star, Four Star, Executive, VIP and Celebrity Group
prove to the world that peace is indeed possible. Tours of varying lengths from 5 to 15 days
E-Mail: spherespp@gmail.com
I am confident we can do so.

I thank you.

91 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Religion and Society

Africa leads world in

Christian-Muslim cohabitation
Perspective By Muhammed Kamil

A survey by the Pew Research Forum on Re-

ligion and Public Life revealed that most
Africans now identify as either Christian or Mus-
lim and quantitatively the two major world relig-
ions have more or less equal following on the
continent, though North Africa is predominately
Muslim, while Sub-Sahara Africa’s population has
a Christian majority of about 470 million, com-
pared to 234 million Muslims. Pew researchers
surveyed 25,000 people in 19 Sub-Sahara Africa
countries from December 2008 to April 2009. The
survey, titled "Tolerance and Tension: Islam and
Christianity in Sub-Saharan Africa," revealed that
though more than 90% of the people in Sub-
Sahara Africa identify as either Christian or Mus-
lim, traditional religions have not entirely disap-
peared but become part of the prevalent syncre-
tism, wherein they are assimilated into the book
based faiths. "It doesn't seem to be an either-or
for many people. They can describe themselves
primarily as Muslim or Christian and continue to
practice many of the traditions that are charac-
teristic of African traditional religion," Luis Lugo,
executive director of the Pew Forum, told AFP.
Lugo said Pew Forum conducted the survey be-
cause Africa is "the most important meeting place
between Christianity and Islam anywhere in the Ghana’s first president Dr. Kwame Nkrumah took an early
world, so if we are going to probe issues of inter- interest in Africa’s triple heritage of Animism, Christianity
religious understanding and inter-religious en- and Islam, writing Conscienism, in which he proposed neu-
gagement, this is as good place as any to begin." tralizing the potentially polarizing force of religion with phi-
At the beginning of the 20th century Islam losophical materialism.
was already widely spread in the savanna belt
Saint Frumentius was consecrated its first
that includes [from west to east] Senegal, Mauri-
bishop by Saint Anthanasiu, patriarch of Alex-
tania, Guinea, Mali, Niger, Northern Nigeria,
andria, Egypt. How long before that Christian-
Chad, Sudan, Somalia and Ethiopia, while Christi-
ity was practiced in Ethiopia is not clear but
anity had pockets of urban adherents along the
given that the Abyssinian Church was a branch
West Coast of Africa and in Southrn Africa. Chris-
of the Coptic Church until the mid 20th century,
tianity had been well established in Ethiopia and
we cannot rule out Christianity in Ethiopia dat-
Egypt for centuries. In Sudan Christianity was well
ing back to the beginning of the Christian era
established in Nubia by the 7th century A.D. be-
when the Apostle Mark is said to have
fore being displaced by Islam in the 13th century.
preached it in Egypt. The first Muslim ruler in
Historically, Ethiopia is one of the original homes
the world was not Prophet Muhammed in Me-
of both Christianity and Islam. The Abyssinian
dina; Negus in Ethiopia preceded him by a few
Church traces its history back to A.D. 330 when
years in the early 7th century.
92 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Religion and Society Africa leads world in Christian-Muslim cohabit
The Pew report says that the number of
Muslim south from the Sahara to the South Afri-
can Cape increased 20 fold since 1900, from
about 11 million to 234 million; but the spread of
Christianity has been far more phenomenal, with
its population growing from around 7 million to
470 million. Nigeria, according to the Pew report,
has the largest number of Christians and also the
largest number of Muslim of any country in Sub-
Sahara Africa. As the continent’s most populous
country it is also most prominently representa-
tive of Africa’s high rate of Christian-Muslim co-
habitation.
The Pew report says that 20% of the world’s
Christians reside in Sub-Sahara Africa, as well as
15% of the world’s Muslims; but the entire conti-
nental population of Muslims would be approxi-
mately 35% to 40% of the global total.
Fear of continued religious clashes and
bloodshed was expressed by 58% of those inter-
Ethiopian Coptic mural Ethiopia has a rich Christian cul-
viewed in Nigeria. The same 58% fear prevalence
tural heritage, dating back to the spread of the Coptic
of future inter-communal violence was expressed
Church into the Kingdom of Aksum in the early 4th cen-
by Rwandans despite the two clash prone ethnic tury. This painting, illustrating the story of Saint George
groups, the Tutsi and Hutu, being predominately, slaying the dragon, is part of a mural in the 12th-century
if not exclusively Christian. Likewise, confronta- Church of Saint George, in Lalibela, northern Ethiopia.
tional tendencies between white and black radi- Microsoft ® Encarta ® 2009. © 1993-2008 Microsoft Cor-
cals in predominately Christian Southern Africa poration. All rights reserved.
have no religious dimension. The massacres in
Sudan’s Darfur that have led to the country’s latter devour the former’s crops. All these fac-
President Omar Al Bashir being indicted at the tors present problem solving challenges that
International Criminal Court (ICC) for crimes will necessarily involve policies and legislation,
against humanity and war crimes is a case of Arab if not constitutional amendments.
mother tongue Muslims constituting an oligarchy A fundamental function of government is
terrorizing African mother tongues tribes on the to maintain social equilibrium and promote
margins demanding equality. Nigeria’s Yoruba, socio-economic economic progress, both of
who number upwards of 35 million have more or which are necessary to sustain political stability.
less equal proportions of Muslims and Christians Excesses in any area are destabilizing; but are
and inter-marriage between people of the two nonetheless a tendency of human nature. We
religions is not uncommon. While the Yoruba are seeing this with the banking sector in the
typically pride themselves for religious temper- West, resisting regulatory measures and insist-
ance, instances of zealotry are invariably polariz- ing on freedom to excess despite having thrown
ing. the global economy into crisis. For many of
Nigeria’s Acting President Goodluck Jona- those whose education and careers have been
than in an April 2010 interview with CNN’s Chris- in money making greed has become a philoso-
tine Amanpour explained that the inter- phy and a motivation elevated to a virtue. Eth-
communal violence chronic in Jos, Plateau State, nicity and religion are also frequently taken to
has multiple root causes: settler verses indigenes disruptive extremes and here too acculturation
factor, economic dominance of settlers, different often informs subjectivity and prejudices, not
ethnic groups [and languages], different religions to mention suspicions. For example if there are
and an attractive climate [that has brought Euro- more than one ethnic group working in an of-
pean settlers to the area as well as those from fice and people congregate in ethnic clusters,
other parts of Nigeria]. There is also a planters speaking ethnic languages, not only do we get
and herders factor wherein the animals of the fertile ground for suspicion but also inclinations
93 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Religion and Society Africa leads world in Christian-Muslim cohabit
to ethnocentrism with its subjective and preju-
diced dimensions. There could be exceptional
situations where other factors play a neutraliz-
ing role against ethnocentric tendencies. In
some African countries and societies there are
local lingua franca, as Swahili in much of East
Africa, Twi in Ghana, Wolof in Senegal, Bam-
bara in Mali and Hausa in Northern Nigeria. In
Ghana many people are multi-lingual. In Sierra
Leone Creole, a synthesis of local languages
and English is the lingua franca. It is up to gov-
ernments and the domestic intelligentsia to
study and analyze and monitor the social and
political scenes so as to proactively conceptual-
ize policies aimed at sustaining socio-political
stability and socio-economic progress.
Where the status quo is not deemed
problematic conventional wisdom is to leave
well enough alone, or not to argue with suc-
cess; though social stability monitoring and
Sankoré Mosque in Tombouctou The Sankoré mosque in
evaluation are necessary in any event. How-
Tombouctou, Mali, rose to prominence as a center for
ever, in crisis or crisis prone situations the in- Islamic scholars and their students during 16th century
telligentsia need be proactive to avoid prob- reign of Songhai emperor Askia Muhammed Touré. Now a
lems getting out of control. In socially and po- UNESCO protected cultural heritage site It is regarded as
litically managing Christian-Muslim cohabita- the first university in the Western Sudan. Using contem-
tion, whether or not we think the situation de- porary technology its many manuscripts, covering a vari-
mands application of freedom of conscience as ety of subjects, including philosophy and medicine, are
the guiding principle in lieu of religious free- being restored.
dom, it is important for us to at least academi-
cally study freedom of conscience and its pros- materialism.
pects as well as implications for our socio- Consciencism was popular with freedom
political management future. fighters and radical Pan Africanists but never
Freedom of conscience came to promi- became mainstream African ideology or phi-
nence in the West in the course of advancing losophy; rather, rituals and mysticism rooted
secularization of public life. It can be seen in in animism were widely synthesized into
proselytes going from door to door with their Christian and Islamic consciousness and in
religious literature rather than preaching in some cases gave rise to new religious sects
public transport and on street corners; in the and cults. Hence, the triple heritage that was
practice of a moment’s silence rather than a matter of interest and concern at the begin-
class prayer recitation in schools. Freedom of ning of the post-colonial era gradually stream-
conscience differs from the common concept lined into the Christian-Muslim dichotomy
of religious freedom in that it demands respect that the Pew Forum found in its recent sur-
for privacy of thought and belief; whereas reli- vey. The concept freedom of conscience is
gious freedom has become not merely the remote from the current African reality where
right to practice but also to proselyte without almost everyone is either a Christian or Mus-
restriction. During the wave of African inde- lim, and in some countries either almost en-
pendence that started in the 1950s pre- tirely, or absolutely one or the other.
empting the potential for religious conflict in- Inter-faith dialogue has not only gained
herent in what Prof. Ali Mazrui called the conti- traction in Africa but has been supported by
nent’s triple heritage of Animism, Christianity international NGOs such as Germany’s Konrad
and Isam, Ghana’s first leader Dr. Kwame Adenhauer Foundation. The inter-faith dia-
Nkrumah wrote and taught Consciencism, logue forums typically look for common coop-
based on Karl Marx’s historical and dialectical eration ground and need mutual respect pacts
94 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Religion and Society
to survive. Appreciation of freedom of con-
science could be useful in steering them away
from contentious if not futile theological de-
bates that undermine mutual respect pacts and
put religious leaders from the two sides at log-
gerheads. When we organized a Christian-
Muslim dialogue forum in Liberia during the
1980s with guidance and support from the Kon-
rad Adenhauer Foundation we did not specifi-
cally talk in terms of freedom of conscience but
our decision to avoid theological discussions,
though it was advocated by some Catholic
priests in spite of being opposed by Monrovia
Archbishop Michael Francis, was in effect estab-
lishing a freedom of conscience principle, leav-
ing us to concentrate on social problem coop-
eration such as support for the Information
Minister’s ban on school children in uniform
being admitted to cinema houses, as it was be-
ing opposed by cinema owners and others in
the business community who argued it was un-
due government interference in people’s free-
dom. Inter-faith dialogue and consultations
have since become a permanent social fixture in
Liberia.
Organized inter-faith cooperation is
strengthened by personal friendships across the
sectarian isle, patriotism, mutual commitment
to national development and, above all, com-
mon understanding that society does not need
radical religious polarization. Reflection on the
historical roots of both Christianity and Islam in
Africa, their roles in pre-colonial Africa civiliza-
tion building (Christianity mostly in the
East−Ethiopia, Sudan and Egypt; Islam primarily
in the Western Sudan−Senegal, Mali, Guinea,
Northern Côte d’Ivoire and Northern Nigeria)
lets us realize that it is preposterous to suppose
that either one of these world religions will ever
substantially replace the other in our continent,
interpretation of scriptures and neo-prophecies
to the contrary not withstanding.
Conversion from one religion to another is on-
going; thus proselytizing and religious debates
are important to both Christianity and Islam and
are traditionally considered part of religious
freedom; but this highlights the importance of
regulating proselytism to avoid clashes, unethi-
cal practices and fueling enmity . In respect of
the public order and national cohesion impera-
tives surveys such as Pew Forum has done are
necessary to monitor the dynamics of Africa’s
exceptionally high cohabitation rate of Chris-
Africa leads world in Christian-Muslim cohabit
Africa Hall, Addis Ababa Ethiopia was agreed upon by African
leaders in the early 1960s as headquarters of the Organization
of African Unity (now superseded by the African Union) mainly
because it was considered a middle ground between Arabized
North Africa and Sub-Sahara Africa
tians and Muslims. Just as the two religions
together hold a power balance within the Afri-
can Union in terms of population, balanced
cohabitation is essential to avoid aggravated
polarization and feuds, whether within polities
or at the continental institution levels. The
conflict in Darfur has shown that at the conti-
nental level as well as in the AU member poli-
ties ethnicity not religion is a fundamental
cause of crisis. The threat of Sudan, backed by
Egypt and Libya, to pull out of the AU if its
peace monitoring force gave way to UN peace-
keepers in Darfur where ethnic Arab Muslims
were massacring ethnic African Muslims exem-
plified this. Political sophistication and matur-
ity of the AU establishment and Sub-Sahara
African leaders, where then Commission Chair-
person Alpha Omar Konaré and Assembly of
Heads of State & Government Chairman Oluse-
gun Obasanjo, respectively, played leading
roles saved the AU from disintegration along
the Arab/Black Africa fault line. The entrance
of liberated South Africa into the continental
leadership ranks brings ethnic Europeans and
Asians into African Union citizenry along with
ethnic Arabs and ethnic Africans, which makes
Africa perforce cosmopolitan; a realty that
must be reflected in our political attitudes and
behavior if we are to effectively manage diver-
sity and progress. In the final analysis this
challenge is an opportunity for Africans to
grow ever increasingly sophisticated in political
management, socialization, diplomacy and
socio-economic development innovating.
95 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Congo
Reclaiming the Sword: 50 years later,
a brief account of Africa’s Road to Independence
By former Nigerian President Olusegun Obasanjo & Malik Dechambenoit, CEO Sankore Corp.
From left: Belgian King Albert II, Madam Olive Kabila, Queen Paola and Congo’s President Joseph Kabila
in Kinshasa, June 29, 2010, during the Belgian King’s 3 day official visit to Congo to join in celebrations of
the country’s 50th independence anniversary
O n June 30, in Kinshasa, in the Democratic Re-
public of Congo (DRC), Belgian King Albert II
stood alongside the 39 year old Congolese Presi-
dent, Joseph Kabila, to celebrate the country’s 50
years of independence from Belgium. The two men
watched in silence, as Congolese military paraded
along the city’s main avenue. The avenue had just
been renovated with the assistance of Africa’s new-
est “best friend”: China.
Fifty years earlier, on 30 June 1960, King Albert
II late brother, King Baudouin rode down Kinshasa’s
main boulevard in an open-top limousine. He had
come to Kinshasa to grant freedom to the Congo
and its people, after some 80 years of oppressive
colonial rule. Joseph Kasavubu, the Congo’s first
President sat next to him for the occasion. A large
crowd had gathered to witness the event and wel-
come the “Bwana Kitoko” (beautiful master), most
of them unaware of the true content and limits of
their eagerly anticipated independence. As the con-
96
voy made its way across the city, King Baudouin
dropped his usual reserve, laid his sword to rest
on the vehicle’s backseat and rose to salute the
expectant crowds. Suddenly, Ambroise Biombo, a
young Congolese, leaped out of nowhere and
seized the Belgian King’s sword! He had boldly
reclaimed for himself, and for millions of long-
suffering Congolese, the symbol of Belgian author-
ity!
For an ecstatic moment Biombo was allowed
to parade his “trophy” before the cheering crowd.
Soon enough, however, he was caught by a detail
of nervous policemen, and brutally beaten.
Stunned, onlookers failed to understand why
Biombo’s patriotic feat had been so forcefully re-
pressed by their “newly emancipated” security
forces. Three months later, in October 1960, a
young Nigerian officer by the name of Olusegun
Obasanjo, later to become, in 1999, the second
democratically elected President of Africa’s most
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/50 years later, a brief account of Africa’s Road to Independence
populous nation, Nigeria, arrived in the Congo as
part of an early United Nations Peacekeeping force,
which had been deployed to the Congo to put an
end to a secessionist rebellion that threatened the
integrity of this young African nation. Hence com-
menced the 50-year-long journey of Independent
Africa!
This year, 17 African countries are cele-
brating 50 years of independence from colonial
rule. Those countries include 12 former French
colonies from West and Central Africa, Madagascar,
the Democratic Republic of the Congo, Nigeria and
Somalia. For the majority of those countries, inde-
pendence was the result of a painstaking transfor-
mation process, accelerated by the new political
and social conditions that prevailed after World
War II, including the weakening of European colo-
nial powers, increased political awareness and de-
mands for emancipation by Africans who served in
the war and had returned home to find continued
oppression; and also the rising financial cost of co-
lonialism for declining European powers impover-
ished by the war and the ascendency of the United
States and Soviet Union as world powers. In the
context of the Cold War that emerged after the
Second World War European powers relinquishing Baudouin, King of Belgium from 1951-1993; owing to his
their African and other tropical colonies was a stra- youthful appearance Congolese nicknamed him Bwana
tegic American backed move aimed at blunting the Kitoki, which in Lingala literally means “beautiful Master”
increasing influence of Communists on nationalist
movements. had the same effect on black and white alike.
History often overlooks the fact that some After spending four years hunting white enemy
500,000 African soldiers served in World War II soldiers, the African never again regarded them
alongside French and British Troops. Those soldiers as gods”. He adds, “…the girls of England, France
were instrumental in spearheading the general and Italy who went out with African soldiers, did
movement that lead to self-determination and in- not help the preservation of the white myth”!
dependence in Africa. A 1948 British Commission Meanwhile, the superpowers that had
of Inquiry established in response to post war riots emerged out of WWII, the United States and the
in the Gold Coast (now Ghana) noted that Africans Soviet Union also voiced opposition to colonial-
soldiers “by reason of their contacts with other ism. The United States called for the “right of
peoples, including Europeans, had developed a po- people to self-determination”, with U.S. Secre-
litical and national consciousness. The fact that tary of State (1953-1959) John Foster Dulles
they were disappointed at conditions on their re- pragmatically pointing out to the Europeans that
turn…made them the natural focal point for any the example of Liberia under President William
general movement against authority.” This politici- V.S. Tubman showed that exploitation of miner-
zation during World War II was no doubt carried als and cash crops in Africa could best be man-
over into the independence era of African soldiers aged by a comprador; while the Soviet Union
and gives us a clue as to why they did not keep out decried the oppression and “exploitation of the
of politics. world’s masses”. These views were echoed by
A major psychological change had also oc- the newly established United Nations. In Europe,
curred amongst many of these returning soldiers; the influence of anti-colonial movements further
they no longer feared their colonial masters. This increased with the ascendency of Communists
shift of consciousness is succinctly described in the parties across the old continent, as well as the
following account by an African soldier: “The bullet vigorous activism of left-wing intellectuals like
97 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/50 years later, a brief account of Africa’s Road to Independence
Albert Camus, Franz Fanon and Aimé Césaire. For
their part, conservative economists expressed con-
cern at the growing economic cost of colonialism
for bankrupt European nations.
By the late1950s European powers could
no longer resist the tidal wave of emancipation that
swept across the world. In 1955, 4 already inde-
pendent African countries (Egypt, Ethiopia, Liberia
and Libya) joined some 20 Asian countries at a con-
ference in Bandung Indonesia to oppose colonial-
ism In his account of the meeting, African-American
author Richard Wright wrote: “…there was some-
thing … almost extra human about it, it smacked of
tidal waves… only brown, black and yellow men
who had been made agonizingly self-conscious of
the rigor of colonial rule could have felt the need
for such a conference”. The conference was a turn-
ing point in the march towards independences. Co-
lonial powers could no longer ignore the solidarity
of the colonized and their collective opposition to
colonial rule.
Faced with anti-colonial sentiment at home
and general discontent in the colonies, colonial
powers had little choice but to make concessions.
France for example, abolished forced labor
and consented to the establishment of semi-
autonomous local assemblies in its colonies. In
1946, the French Government agreed to the elec- Belgium’s Queen Paola visiting Congo’s National Institute
tion of African representatives to the French Na- for Professional Formation in Kinshasa, June 29
tional Assembly. This coincided with emergence of
organized nationalist political movements in the Gle party rule, short-lived economic booms for
French colonies of West and Central Africa. In some and recurrent crisis for others.
1946, several of those parties came together to Today, as we look back on our 50 years of
form an alliance, the African Democratic Rally independence, admittedly, the assessment is
(RDA). Its cadres were instrumental in negotiating mixed. Many challenges remain, and as one of
independence from France for their countries; sev- my friends likes to remind me, “hope is not a
eral of them became heads of state when their strategy” for those of us “global Africans”, born
countries eventually gained independence in 1960. after independence. We have a duty to coalesce
At Independence, many challenges confronted and harness our energies for a better African fu-
our countries: building a state apparatus with little ture. We have no choice but to infuse leadership,
human and financial capital, fostering unity out of commitment and forward thinking into our col-
ethnically divided societies, educating young and lective destiny if we are to make good of Africa’s
illiterate populations, providing basic services to promise of becoming “the next big thing”!
our impoverished masses and transforming a colo-
nial economy, based on the extraction of resources
for the colonial power, into modern economies that
would benefit our local populations. Those chal-
lenges were daunting and time showed that most
of our countries were ill prepared to meet them.
But surely there was no option for us but to regain
our freedom and dignity. Inevitably we fell prey to
cold war rivalries and began shaping our destinies
accordingly. Ensued, military coups, civil wars, sin-
98 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Congo Democratic Republic

Congo at 50

Perspective

E ven for a nation, 50 years is a substantial

chunk of history through which several gen-
erations live their primes, but for one like Congo,
2.345 million square kilometers (905,563 square
miles) of tropical forests, that started life with a
secessionist movement from mineral rich Katanga
Province, in the absence of the budgetary resources
to properly administer the entire country and pau-
city of educated citizens and skilled manpower, not
to mention the constitutional crisis involving con-
servative President Joseph Kasavubu and national-
ist Prime Minister Patrice Lumumba, 50 years have
been spent recycling crises. American President
Dwight D. Eisenhower (1953-1960) upon being told
that Lumumba was receiving military aid from the
Soviet Union gave thumbs down indicating he
should be assassinated, clearing the way for mili-
tary strongman Joseph Mobutu to dominate
Congo’s political scene for over 35 years. Mobutu
while a journalism student in Belgium was accused
of spying on other African students for the Belgian
authorities, including Congolese National Move-
ment leader Patrice Lumumba to whom he had be- Charismatic Congo nationalist hero and first Prime Minister
Patrice Lumumba (July 2, 1925-January 17, 1961) had a
come personal assistant; as a leader his personal-
rough political career that ended in his assassination
ization of income from his country’s mineral ex-
ports led to him frequently being branded in the la, Mobutu went into exile, dying in Rabat, Mo-
Western press a kleptomaniac. It is on record that rocco on May 16, 1997. Despite Kabila’s historical
Washington became particularly interested in association with Lumumba, his invading Alliance
Mobuto during the pre-independence negotiations des Forces Démocratiques pour la Libération du
in Brussels during the early part of 1960; and also Congo-Zaïre (AFDL) could not elude a Tutsi ethnic
that Fortune magazine in 1987 assessed President identity as apart from Kabila and the bulk of his
Mobutu’s personal fortune to have been $5 billion forces being Tutsi he was backed by Rwanda’s Tutsi
in 1984, including $4 billion cash in a Swiss bank Defence Minister Paul Kagame in the wake of a
account. Mobutu in 1971 had the country renamed Congolese army campaign against ethnic Tutsis in
‘Zaire”. Mobutu was once described in a West Af- Eastern Congo.
rica Magazine article as a dinosaur of the Cold War, Kabila installed himself as president in May
in reference to his eventually being politically aban- 1997 and three months later thanked all foreign
doned by his former Cold War backers in Western military forces for helping him while asking them to
capitals. return to their countries of origin. The Rwandan
Suffering from prostrate cancer and faced with troops reacted by moving to Eastern Congo and
advance on Kinshasa by the late Lumumba’s com- launching a rebellion, dubbed Rassemblement Con-
rades under the leadership of Laurent-Désiré Kabi- golais pour la Democratie (RCD), aiming to topple
99 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Congo Democratic Republic Congo at 50
Kabila’s regime. To counter the influence of
Rwanda, Uganda supported formation of another
rebel group, styled Movement for the Liberation of
Congo, led by Jean-Pierre Bemba, the warlord son
of Congolese billionaire Bemba Saolona. Hence,
Congo was back in the grip of civil war, whereby the
United Nations Security Council once again author-
ized an international peacekeeping force sent
there. Successive attempts to seal a peace deal
have ended in return to armed hostilities.
Laurent-Désiré Kabila was assassinated in 2001
whereupon his son Joseph Kabila assumed power.
On July 30, 2006, after approval of a new constitu-
tion, Congolese went to the polls to elect their
president in the country’s first post-independence
multiparty elections. Kabila’s victory over Jean-
Pierre Bemba resulted in two days of violent
clashes between their supporters. A new election
was held on October 29, 2009, in which Kabila won
70% of the vote. Bemba insisted the election was
marred by irregularities, although international ob-
servers gave it a pass mark.
In 2009 the UN estimated Congolese were dy-
ing from assaults by marauding combatants at the
rate 45,000 a month. Estimates of casualties since Mobutu Sese Seko (October 14, 1930-September 7, 1997),
1997 run as high as 5.4 million. Frequency of vio- journalist and soldier, President of Zaire from 1965 to 1997
lence against women in Eastern Congo has been
highlighted in the media and become a major sub-
ject of international concern. In 2008 Britain’s
Guardian newspaper documented the testimonies
of over 400 female rape victims and various civil
society organizations have been involved efforts to
help the surviving victims.
Historically, the 1960-’64 UN force in Congo
was the largest to date as is the current UN force.
Unfortunately UN troops, along with those of the
Congolese government, have been accused of rape
and many UN civilian personnel have been impli-
cated in sexual scandals involving the local popula-
tion.
The Congo crisis remains one of the most in-
tractable in the world. In March 2009, in an at-
tempt to contain rebels’ activities, the Congolese Laurent Desire Kabila (November 27, 1939-January 18,
government allowed the Rwandan army, with the 2001) seized power from Mobutu in May 1997 only to be
support of the United Nations, to collectively expel assassinated less than four years later. Kabila, who received
the Democratic Forces for the Liberation of Rwanda military training in China during the early 1960s was from
(FDLR) rebels from DRC. The FDLR is one of the that time a leading guerrilla fighter for the forces that took
to the bush in Eastern Congo after the arrest of Patrice Lu-
most prominent Hutu rebel groups, which allegedly
mumba. In 1963 Kabila formed the People’s Revolutionary
committed acts of genocide in Rwanda in the early- Party and in 1965 hosted Latin American revolutionary Che
1990s. Guevara when he spent 6 months in Congo fighting along-
side the late Lumumba’s comrades in their quest to over-
throw the compradors.

100 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Ethiopia

Ethiopia’s Elections 2010

Report

C ontroversy once again attended parliamen-

tary elections conducted under the reign of
Ethiopian People’s Revolutionary Democratic Front
(EPRDF), led by Prime Minister Melles Zenawi.
Complaints of pre-election intimidation were plen-
tiful, but the elections were conducted without vio-
lence. The turnout was large and Prime Minister
Zenawi’s EPRDF claimed a landslide victory. The
Prime Minister said he was willing to work with op-
position parties, while some opposition party lead-
ers acknowledged their organizational weakness
contributed to the whitewash. The opposition col-
lectively ended up with less than 15 seats in Ethio-
pia’s 547 seat Parliament, losing over 160 seats.
On May 31st 14 of the more than 60 political
parties that contested the May 25th elections ad-
dressed the press in Addis Ababa at Ghion Hotel,
congratulating EPRDF and affirming their accep-
tance of the results. Prominent among the 14 par-
ties were Coalition for Unity & Democracy (CUD),
All-Ethiopia Democratic Party (AEDP), and Ethiopian servers was that the playing field was skewed in
Democratic Party (EDUM). favor of the incumbent administration. The final
The parties in their 6 point resolution acknowl- report will not be released until approximately two
edged that the irregularities attending the election months after completion of the electoral process,
were not of a magnitude as to have affected the in which case it is expected to include any legal
results. While identifying problems and irregulari- challenges to the election process and results.
ties they encountered, they cautioned against vio- The EU preliminary report referred back to the
lence and urged all other parties to accept the removal of prominent opposition leaders from the
EPRDF victory. Observers of the African Union, the political scene in the aftermath of the more hotly
Coalition of Civic Associations and the European contested 2005 elections. In 2005, with elections
Union monitored the elections. drawing a 90% voter turnout, the EPRDF was de-
In its May 25th preliminary report the Euro- feated by the principal opposition in Addis Ababa.
pean Election Observation Mission-Ethiopia 2010 At that time the EU remarked on the "significantly
noted that while campaigning was low key up until enlarged freedoms for political campaigning in
the final days and the elections were peacefully comparison to previous elections." Political parties
conducted with large voter turnout, campaigning actively campaigned, the opposition was conspicu-
grew more intense in the final days leading up to ously active in the rural areas and the EU observer
election day and the EPRDF appeared to use state mission reported that the atmosphere "during the
resources for its campaign, particularly in the rural campaign was calm, culminating in two massive,
areas, which the opposition had no access to. How- peaceful rallies in Addis Ababa, one by the EPRDF
ever, campaigning did not degenerate into salient and one by the opposition." However, the opposi-
violence. The preliminary conclusion of the EU ob- tion complained of numerous incidents of intimida-
101 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Ethiopia Elections 2010
tion and arrests of its supporters, some of which
the EU observer mission said it investigated and
confirmed.
Prominent Ethiopian political personalities
removed from the political scene prior to the 2010
elections include former judge Birtukan Mideksa,
a charismatic young lady who was among those
sentenced to life in prison following the 2005
elections and later pardoned. She was rearrested
and ordered to serve out her life sentence after
saying she had not asked for pardon. Melaku Te-
ferra, a political associate of Birkutan, was among
40 people arrested in April 2009 accused of in-
volvement in a coup plot directed by Berhanu
Nega. Both Melaku and Berhanu were jailed for
life in the wake of the 2005 elections, but after
being pardoned Berhanu went into exile, becom-
ing an economics lecturer at the University of
Pennsylvania and heading a political group that
advocates overthrow of the EPRDF.
Merera Gudina, an opposition politician and MelesZenawi, born May 8, 1955, left his medical studies at
political science professor at the University of Addis Ababa University (then known as Haile Selassie Univer-
Addis Ababa says that EPRDF set the stage for a sity) in 1975 to join the Tigrayan Peoples’ Liberation Front and
landslide victory in 2010 by writing the rules of ended up leading its guerilla army into Addis Ababa in 1991,
chasing out the dictator, Colonel Mengistu Haliemariam.
the 2008 local and by elections in such a way that
While Prime Minister of Ethiopia, Zenawi earned a MBA
the ruling party and its affiliates won all but 3 of
(Master of Business Administration) from the Open University
the seats being contested nationwide. Going into of the United Kingdom (1995) and a M. Sc. Economics degree
the May 25, 2010 elections EPRDF controlled from Erasmus University, Netherlands. His professors rated
every local council in Ethiopia. He described the him a smart and gifted student and in a public speech at
2010 election as a struggle to prevent Ethiopia George Washington University in the American capital, the
from becoming a one party state, a mission which Vice Chancellor of U.K.’s Open University said, "President Me-
the results indicated has for all practical purposes les Zenawi was a brilliant student who achieved distinctions on
failed. every course he took.” Indeed, Meles Zenawi in his interviews
If the 2010 elections reflected sobriety, the conveys impressive intelligence and a sense of worldly sophis-
tication, as well as a firm grasp of his job as Ethiopia’s Prime
campaigns 5 years ago became vitriolic. As the
Minister. Meles also comes across, consistent with his record,
May 15, 2005 elections drew near, first Deputy
as a man with a sense of immense power which he knows how
Prime Minister Addisu Legesse and then the UEDF to use and has no qualms about using it full throttle. That is
opposition coalition began likening each other to nothing unusual in Africa; especially when one heads a party
the death squads that perpetrated the 1994 geno- of former guerrilla fighters who equally have that sense of
cide in Rwanda, with the opposition going so far as power and are apt to crave it. Meles has adroitly survived in-
to use the comparison in a TV add in which it ternal party challenges to his power.
showed footage of the motion picture Hotel By establishing an EPRDF business empire Meles has not
Rwanda– according to the EU. only presided over a very thorny constitution related ethical
In May 2005 early results showed the opposi- matter, but established a neo-oligarchy.
EPRDF chief of headquarters Muktar Kedir told Reuters
tion substantially leading; taking all seats con-
following the party’s annual congress in September 2009 that
tested in Addis Ababa in both parliamentary and
Zenawi had wanted to resign as party leader ahead of the
local government contests. The afternoon of May 2010 elections but the party had decided all its frontline lead-
16th the opposition claimed it was halfway towards ers should remain in place for another five years, after which
winning a majority in the national parliament, request for retirement would again be considered.
though only about a third of the constituencies Meles Zenawi, now 55, enters his third 5-year term as
had reported complete results. Later that day the Ethiopia’s Prime Minister having presided over significant in-
governing Ethiopian People's Revolutionary De- crease in farmers’ earnings and initiation of the Tekeze hydro-
mocratic Front (EPRDF) announced it had won electric power project which aims to make Ethiopia a net elec-
tric power exporter.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010 102
 Africa/Ethiopia Elections 2010
more than 317 of Parliament’s 547seats, while
conceding that opposition parties had won all 23
seats in the capital, Addis Ababa. The two major
opposition parties, the Coalition for Unity and De-
mocracy (CUD) and the United Ethiopian Democ-
ratic Forces (UEDF) claimed on that same day that
they had won 185 of the approximately 200 seats
for which the National Election Board of Ethiopia
(NEBE) had released preliminary results. The oppo-
sition had only 12 seats in the outgoing parlia-
ment.
Announcement of the final results was de-
layed past the June 8th legal deadline ostensibly
owing to the opposition claimed that the Addis
Ababa vote was rigged during the evening of May
16th. The Prime Minister declared a state of emer-
gency, outlawed any public gatherings, assumed
direct command of the security forces and re-
placed the capital city police with federal police
and special-forces drawn from elite army units.
The NEBE, simultaneously, ordered vote tallying to
stop; an order not rescinded for nearly a week.
The independent election monitors, as well as the
opposition objected to this. 188 meter long dam at Tekeze, Tigray Region, North Ethio-
On May 27 NEBE released a report that the pia, designed to generate 300 megawatts of electricity was
EPRDF had won 209 seats, its affiliated parties 12 inaugurated November 15, 2009. It was completely funded
and the opposition parties 142. "These results are by Ethiopia’s resources.
provisional, and these results could change be-
cause we are looking into complaints by some of United Ethiopian Democratic Forces (UEDF). The
the parties," said NEBE spokesman Getahun opposition parties decided to boycott the remain-
Amogne. While the EU observers "assessed the ing 31 constituency elections on August 21st. On
closing and counting processes negatively in al- September 5, 2005 NEBE released the final results,
most half of urban polling stations observed, a giving EPRDF 327 parliamentary seats and the op-
very high figure for international observers to re- position 174.
cord, and even worse in rural polling stations ob- That was not quite the end of the matter. On
served," students and others resorted to demon- October 18, 2006, the draft report of a 10-
strations, resulting in 36 persons dead and thou- member public inquiry into election-related un-
sands arrested. The crisis attracted global media rests was released to Associated Press (AP). It con-
and political attention, with Prime Minister Melles cluded that 199 people (193 civilians and six po-
Zenawi accused of a ruthless assault on opposi- licemen) were killed and 763 were injured, signifi-
tion. Commentaries on Washington’s support for cantly conflicting with the Zenawi government
its principal Horn of Africa ally, Melles Zenawi, claim that 61 civilians and seven policemen were
made the crisis somewhat of an international po- killed. The vice chairman of the inquiry, judge
litical scandal. Wolde-Michael Meshesha, fled Ethiopia a month
When official results for the May 15, 2005 prior to the report’s release, after receiving
elections were finally released by NEBE on August anonymous death threats. He accused the govern-
19th, after re-polling in some disputed constituen- ment of trying to intimidate members of the in-
cies, EPRDF was said to have won 296 seats, giving quiry after learning about its controversial find-
it a 54% majority and the right to form the next ings.
government. In addition, EPRDF allied parties ac- The opposition came out of the 2010 elec-
cording to NEBE won 22 seats. Leading opposition tions with only 13 parliamentary seats. Coalition
party Coalition for Unity & Democracy (CUD) came of Ethiopian Civic Society Organizations (CSOs)
out with 109 seats, followed by 52 seats for which participated in election monitoring rated
103 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Ethiopia Elections 2010
the elections free and fair by any standard. Brief-
ing local and foreign reporters in Addis Ababa on
May 24th Coalition Chairperson Tadele Yimer said
election observers of the coalition witnessed that
the process of the national elections was peaceful,
free, fair, democratic and up to international stan-
dards. According to Yimer, observers of the coali-
tion confirmed that the pre-election, balloting,
and post-election processes were carried out as
per international standards and norms. He cited
endorsement of relevant election guidelines and
laws, extension of voters’ registration period, gov-
ernment’s financial subsidy to contesting political
parties for the first time in the history of the na-
tion, provision of free airtime and newspaper col-
umns to parties as well as scheduling street-
canvassing close to the balloting day as indications
that Ethiopia’s 2010 elections were indeed credi-
ble.
While the Obama Administration praised the
peaceful conduct of the lections and the high
voter turnout, it observed that the incumbent ad-
ministration did not shy away from using re-
sources of the state in the PRDF campaign. In a
May 25 statement, U.S. National Security Council
spokesman Mike Hammer described limitations
placed on independent observers, such as pre-
venting U.S. Embassy officials from leaving the
capital to observe the vote and harassing inde-
pendent media representatives. He called such
actions "deeply troubling."
On the other hand, the EU Observation Mis-
sion deployed its 90 long term observers to all re-
gions of the country as early as April 24th, one
month before election- day.
Hammer’s charge that in recent years the
Ethiopian government "has taken steps to restrict
political space for the opposition through intimida-
tion and harassment," as well as by tightening its
control over civil society and curtailing the activi-
ties of independent media in the country, was not
inconsistent with the implications of the EU obser-
vation that since the 2005 elections narrowing of
the political operating space for opposition parties
has more deeply entrenched EPRDF in power. In
this regard, the preliminary EU report said: “The
fragmentation of the main opposition forces in the
aftermath of the 2005 elections, together with the
departure of important opposition figures from
the Ethiopian political scene, in conjunction with
changes to the legal framework have resulted in a
cumulative narrowing of the political space within
the country.”
104
Also, the EU report, in acknowledging that
Ethiopian media coverage of campaign events
generally was neutral and proportional, the Voice
of America's Amharic Service had been jammed
during the last two weeks of the campaign, which
"contributed to reduce the possibility for voters to
receive information from a wider range of
sources."
In summary, the critique of the EU found the
elections "fell short of certain international com-
mitments, notably regarding the transparency of
the process and the lack of a level playing field for
all contesting parties," though it acknowledged,
“Overall, the National Electoral Board of Ethiopia
(NEBE) administered the elections in a competent
and professional manner, overcoming significant
technical challenges.”
Ethiopia Broadcasting Authority, in address-
ing the issue of opposition political party media
access, noted in a June 21, 2010 release that in
accordance with the Amended Election Law of
Ethiopia, Proclamation No 532/2007 article 59(2),
which states “candidates shall be entitled to get
access to free airtime on the state owned media,
it prepared a directive of allocation of free airtime
and newspaper columns for political parties; and
also “conducted a participatory discussion on the
draft document of the directive with the political
parties and concerned bodies before its approval
and set into practice.” The Ethiopian Broadcasting
Authority has replaced the Ministry of Informa-
tion.
The rationale of former EPRDF military com-
mander Seeye Abraha Hagos, now a member of
the opposition coalition known as Forum, that
the most important thing for Ethiopia’s political
development is avoidance of violence, especially
in connection with elections, seems to reflect the
thinking of most Ethiopians inside the country
today. Pointing out that election related violence
was not a novelty for Ethiopia in 2005, Hagos ar-
gues, "There is always violent opposition in Ethio-
pia. So if we are ever going to control violence in
this country, the only way out is to chart a peace-
ful political transition. No peaceful elections, no
peaceful political transfer of power would mean
there will be continuous violence in this country,
and this can take this country down the drain
given our poverty."
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Ethiopia/Economy/Industrialization
Ethiopia in $2bn industrial zone deal with
Turkish company
Report
T he Ethiopian government announced on
April 6 that it would contribute 600 million
dollars towards the Turkish Industrial Zone to be
established in Ethiopia by AKGUN Construction
and Machinery, a Turkish company.
According to State Minister of Trade & In-
dustry Tadesse Haile negotiations were being fi-
nalized an agreement would be signed before
April ended.
The Ethiopian government contribution
would represent 30% of the total construction
cost of $2 billion and cover infrastructure devel-
opment, including electrical power installation,
road construction and water supply. Construction
could begin this year if the company, which runs
an investment zone in Turkey, begins operation
according to its plans, in mid-2010.
The industrial zone will be constructed in
Legetafo, in the Oromia Special Zone, on the out-
skirts of Addis Ababa. It will have a total area of
1,460 hectares where textiles, leather, pharma-
ceuticals packaging, metal, and food stuff proc-
essing industries from Turkey are expected to
take plots. A total of 60 companies are expected
to move to Ethiopia with the completion of the
zone.
There will also be a vocational training cen-
tre to train potential employees for the compa-
nies. There are also expected to be hospitals and
hotels.
The zone could create direct and indirect
employment for up to one million people, accord-
ing to Yusuf Akgun, AKGUN chairman.
When the industrial zone becomes fully opera-
tional, it is expected to lead to an estimated ex-
port of 15 billion dollars per year, according to
CASTA Consultancy, the firm conducting the fea-
sibility study.
Akgun Company is a family owned business
headed by Yusuf Akgun, working together with
his three sons. The company was established in
1968. He conceptualized and starting from 1984
105
built the Istanbul
Ikitelli Industrial
Zone which cov-
ers as an area of
7,000 square
miles and has
38,000 factories.
His idea was to
encourage in-
dustrialization
on the outskirts of the Istanbul metropolis rather
than within it.
His vision for the Ethio-Turkish Industrial Zone
in Legetafo, some 15 km on the outskirts of Addis
Ababa is that it will provide some 800,000 employ-
ment opportunities and generate exports of $5 to
$10 billion annually.
According to Yusug Akgun he started business
In Ethiopia in 2005 supplying construction materi-
als and when he met Prime Minister Meles Zenawi
the Ethiopian leader convinced him that an indus-
trial zone project like the one he started in Turkey
would work well in Ethiopia. “So with his support
and his vision we started to work on this project,”
he said in a recent interview with Somali based
Khilil5 Online.
Akgun subsequently invited Ato Aba Dulla
Gemeda, President of the Oromia regional state,
the Foreign Minister, the Minister of Trade & In-
dustry and the Defense Minister to visit Turkey’s
Ikitteli Industrial Zone and they came away enthu-
siastic to have such a project in Ethiopia. That was
in September 2009.
Aba Dulla jokingly said, “I am not leaving Tur-
key without signing a memorandum of under-
standing.” According to Yusuf Akgun, “So a memo-
randum came out of nowhere and with that we
started to think of the project and work on it.”
“Turkey has 260 organized industrial zones. In
my opinion, this plan is better than those in Turkey
and I believe it is better than those in Europe as
well.,” Yusuf Akgun said.
Ethiopia’s Minister of Foreign Affairs Ato Sey-
oum Mesfin referred to the plan of the Ethio-
Turkey Industrial Zone as exemplary and "Mother
of all Projects.”
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Ethiopia/Road Development

East African Business Week (Kampala)

African Development Bank's U.S.$125.6 Million

for Mombasa-Addis Road to Boost Trade
David Muwanga
June 14, 2010

Kampala — Completion of phase II of the construc-

tion of the Mombasa-Nairobi-Addis Ababa road is
expected to boost trade between Kenya and Ethio-
pia as it will reduce transport and shipping costs.
The African Development Bank (AfDB) has given a
loan of $125.6 million to the government of Ethio-
pia to finance the construction of the Mombasa-
Nairobi-Addis Ababa Road corridor project phase
II.
The loan for an amount of $125.6 million was
signed by Mr. Sufian Ahmed, Minister of Finance
and Economic Development, representing the gov-
ernment of Ethiopia and Mr. Lamin G. Barrow, the
bank's resident representative in the Ethiopia
Country Office.
The road is expected to boost trade be-
tween the countries since it will reduce transit
time for imports and exports and increase the
volume of Ethiopian goods transiting through
Mombasa port in Kenya.
The road corridor development program,
which is being implemented in three phases, will
also promote increased intra-regional trade and
regional integration in East Africa and the Horn
of Africa.
Mr. Sufian Ahmed highlighted the impor-
tance of this multinational project as another
clear indication of the bank's commitment to
support the development of Ethiopia.
The bank's resident representative under-
scored the significance of this New Partnership for
Africa Development (NEPAD) flagship project as it
will support the Ethiopian government's efforts to
diversify access to seaports and help redress the
apparent marginalization of the horn of Africa
countries from the recent boom witnessed in intra
-Common Market for Eastern and Southern Africa
(COMESA) trade.
In reaffirming the bank's commitment to provide
continued support to the two governments in de-
veloping this road corridor, Barrow also asked the
(Above) Addis
Ababa Mercato
(Market)
(Right) Port at
Mombasa, Kenya
through which
landlocked Ethio-
pia moves much
of its foreign
trade
government's to address the non-physical barri-
ers that are paramount to fostering increased
trade between the two countries.
On the Ethiopian side, this multinational
road project involves the rehabilitation to bitu-
men standard of the 193 km long Ageremariam-
Yabelo-Mega road section, construction of road-
side socio-economic infrastructure, construction
of a One-Stop-Border-Post at Moyale and drilling
of 12 community water wells within the project
area, which is located in the southern and south
western part of the country– mainly in Oromia
region.
The road is an important section of the Trans-
African Highway Network and aims at improving
transport links between Kenya and Ethiopia for
the benefit of both countries and the wider East
Africa and Horn of Africa regions.
106 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Ghana/ Economy
Ghana Business News Saturday, April 17, 2010
Ghana’s exports for first quarter of 2010 increase by 20.9%
Provisional data
on the external
sector indicate
that Ghana’s
total merchan-
dise exports for
the first quarter
of2010
amounted to 1.7
billion dollars, a
growth of 20.9 per cent on year-on-year basis.
Cocoa beans and products earned 704.1 mil-
lion dollars, an increase of 28.5 per cent and gold
earned 678.2 million dollars, an increase of 16.5
per cent.
These compared with 35.9 per cent in the
export of cocoa beans and products in 2009 and a
decline of 4.4 per cent in gold exports.
Addressing a press conference in Accra on
Friday, Mr Kwesi B. Amissah-Arthur, Governor of
Bank of Ghana, said, however, that concerns ex-
isted over the attainment of the 2009/2010 major
season target of 650,000 tonnes of cocoa pur-
chases.
By the first week of April 2010, only 518,304
tonnes had been purchased compared with
562,538 tonnes at the same time during the
2008/2009 crop season.
The crop size at the close of the 2008/2009 season
was 634,256 tonnes.
Mr Amissah-Arthur said other exports during
the review period improved by 17.6 per cent from
280.9 million dollars to 330.2 million dollars in the
first quarter of 2010, compared with 20.4 per cent
growth recorded in a similar period of 2009.
Total merchandise imports in the first quarter
of 2010 amounted to 2.2 billion dollars, 5.9 per
cent higher than the level recorded in the first
quarter of 2009.
Oil imports for the three-month period
amounted to 399.1 million dollars or 43.9 per cent
above the 277.4 million dollars recorded a year
ago.
Mr. Amissah-Arthur said the increase was
mainly due to a price effect, as the average real-
ized price recorded for crude oil imports was 64.1
per cent above the 47.9 dollars per barrel realized
a year ago.
107
He said volumes of crude and oil products
imported in the economy declined by 9.5 per cent
to 622,417 metric tonnes from 687,497 metric
tonnes a year ago.
The Governor said capital and intermediate
goods together accounted for 75.1 per cent of to-
tal non-oil imports at the end of the first quarter of
2010, compared with 69.5 per cent recorded in a
similar period of 2009.
The trade balance recorded a reduced deficit
of 487 million dollars in the first quarter of 2010,
which compares favourably with a deficit of 665.5
million dollars recorded in the corresponding pe-
riod of 2009.
The Gross International Reserves position of
the Bank of Ghana which had increased to 3.2 bil-
lion dollars in December 2009 grew further by 4.4
per cent in the first quarter of 2010 to 3.3 billion
dollars, translating into three months cover of im-
ports of goods and services.
This compares to gross reserves of 1.8 billion
dollars in March 2009 (or 1.8 months of import
cover).
Private inward transfers – received by NGOs,
embassies, service providers, individuals and oth-
ers – through the banks amounted to 1.6 billion
dollars in the first two months of 2010, represent-
ing 27 per cent increase over the amount of 1.3
billion dollars for the corresponding period in
2009.
The Governor said of the total transfers,
239.7 million dollars (15.1 per cent) accrued to
individuals, compared with 223.1 million dollars
(17.8 per cent) recorded for the same period in
2009.
He said the favourable external environment
continued to support the stability in the foreign
exchange market. The nominal exchange rate of
the cedi against the dollar, show that in the cedi
depreciated on year-on-year terms by only 2.5 per
cent compared with 29.2 per cent a year earlier.
For the period January – March 2010 how-
ever, the cedi appreciated by 0.7 per cent against
the dollar. This compares with a depreciation of
11.9 per cent over the same period in 2009.
Source: GNA
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Ghana/ Economy
Ghana Web Wednesday, June 2, 2010
Ghana lost €36 million of gold revenue in 2 years
G hana, between 2007 and 2009, lost approxi-
mately €36 million, in mining revenues that
have been repatriated without the necessary taxes
to government, a new report on mining has said..
This loss became possible as a result of al-
leged transfer mispricing and fixed low local reve-
nues in Ghana, which the report also says had af-
fected the fixing of royalties to the country by min-
ing firms.
The two Danish Non Governmental Organiza-
tions (NGOs) DanWatch and Concord who con-
ducted the research in Ghana released the report
in Copenhagen last week, under the heading: “
Golden Profits on Ghana's Expense- An example of
incoherence in EU policy"
“Money lost to tax evasion by African coun-
tries, indirectly plunged back to the European and
North American economy, is calculated to be ten
times more than money spent on development aid
for Africa. According to new research, in the pe-
riod 1970 to 2008, Africa lost $ 854 billion in cu-
mulative capital flight. From 2000 to 2008, illicit
outflows from Africa accelerated by 25% coincid-
ing with a boom in mineral prices,” it revealed.
The report went further to reveal how tax
evasion and capital flight from developing coun-
tries is outnumbering development aid by a factor
of one to ten, using the case study of how Ghana
sees little revenues from its immense gold riches.
It also demonstrated how multi-national com-
panies generate great revenues from Ghana's rich
gold resources without leaving sums worth men-
tioning in the country. “International tax havens
make it possible to dupe Ghanaian coffers,” it
added.
“Ghana is a major mining country, and export
of minerals and metals in 2007 made up 43% of
Ghana's total export revenue. Bauxite, manga-
nese, diamonds and gold are all extracted in
Ghana, the report stated, adding that in 2007,
Ghana produced 83.6 tonnes of gold. “But, less
than 10% of Ghana's total tax revenue came from
the mining industry and mining operations only
contributed an estimated five percent to the Gha-
naian GDP, according to the Ghana Minerals Com-
mission,” the report added.
The report quoted from a work by Charles
Ayamdoo and Thomas Akbzaa: “Towards a fair and
equitable taxation for sustainable development
108
Ghana gold bars
(2009) that from 1990 to 2007 Ghana had fore-
gone royalties corresponding to $388 million, if
mining companies had paid 6% rather than 3%.
And $1.163 billion if mining companies had paid 12
% rather than 3%, adding, “This sum by far ex-
ceeds the remission of debt Ghana has been
granted in the same period.” It also quoted Steve
Manteaw, Communicatins Director of ISODEC, and
one of Ghana's leading experts on national mining
operations, as having stated that studies had
shown that these operations also have a negative
effect on the environment that equals between
four and ten percent of the country's GDP. "Thus,
taking the mining operations' environmental con-
sequences into perspective, the economic effect
upon Ghana's GDP is in fact negative," the report
says.
Among the reasons for the low economic im-
pact of Ghana's massive mining industry is that,
like in most African countries, mining corporations
are offered significant tax advantages. "They are
exempted from duties, for example on fuel and
the import of machines, they pay a lower tax per-
centage, and they can reduce their tax base
through special deductions," the report says, add-
ing that "through aggressive tax planning, these
corporations further diminish their tax payments."
African countries typically collect between 30
and 35% in corporate taxes from the mining indus-
try. Ghana only collects 25% of the mining corpo-
rations' profits in corporate taxes.
"However, many corporations manipulate
their profits in Ghana so they appear lower than
they really are, sometimes even making them so
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Ghana/ Economy Ghana lost $36 million of gold revenue
low that they are exempted from paying any cor-
poration tax at all," the report says.
Labadi Beach Hotel
According to DanWatch and Concord Den- 1 Laby Pass, Labadi Beach, Trade Fair, Accra, Ghana
mark, this can easily be done by the way multi- Accra, Ghana
national companies are allowed to make their bal- Make booking through Hotel.com
ances. "Corporations can move their profits to Just a phone call away: +44 (0) 20 713 66 278
countries with low or even no taxation," the report
says. "The most commonly used method for mov-
ing profits is transfer mispricing."
In Ghana, the alleged transfer mispricing and
fixed low local revenues also influence royalties of
the value of extracted minerals, the other source
of revenue from mining companies. Ghana calcu-
lates the royalty rate to a minimum of three per-
cent, which is raised accordingly with the com-
pany's profits up to a maximum of six percent.
Low profits on paper will thus also ensure
lower royalty payments, the report holds. The loss
in royalty revenues could amount to hundreds of
millions of Euros during the last decade, mining
analysts have calculated.
"The current international tax regulation
framework makes it impossible to estimate
whether the corporations are paying a fair amount
of tax to the developing countries, because they
are only obliged to produce an annual report which
covers the entire corporation group."
The report also took issues with the European
Union, accusing it of double standards in taxation.
Many of the world's leading tax havens are on
European soil and the EU, in protection of its multi-
nationals, has done little to halt this development.
The report called for sanctions against tax ha-
vens in Europe and beyond. Further, Ghana and
other developing countries should be assisted in
capacity building to help them collect their rightful
taxes.
In his preliminary response, Minister for Lands
and Natural Resources, Collins Dauda, who had not
yet seen the report, said his outfit would like to
study the report and see what can be done to
maximize revenues for Ghana.
“Every government would like to maximize
revenue, so if there is a way of doing this, why not?
We would like to study and do it well,” Hon. Dauda
told the Financial Intelligence. He however added
that revenue generation and its maximization is
one thing while the utilization is another.
“We generate a lot of revenue in this country
but how well we have used it is my main concern,”
he stated.
Source: Financial Intelligence (www.fighana.com)
Justice Lee Adoboe
109 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Ghana/Economy

Ghana Stock Exchange

1
Ghana Stock Exchange: Market Report for the 1st Quarter 2010
Market Summary
• The GSE All Share Index closed at 6,014.34 points. On a YTD basis, the GSE All-Share
Index registered a positive return of 7.93% (442 points). The highest level for the
index during this 1st quarter was 6,027.28 points on March 30, 2010.
• Total equity market capitalization at the end of the 1st quarter 2010 reached GHC 17,
815.51 million (US$ 12.566 billion), a decrease of 1.25% compared to the same
period of 2009.
• The total value of shares traded for the 1st quarter 2010 reached GHC 19.13 million
(US$ 13.49 million), an increase of 38.82 % compared to the same period of 2009.
• The total volume of shares traded reached 26.58 million for the 1st quarter 2010
compared to 17.32 million shares traded during the 1st quarter of 2009, which is an
increase of 53.46 %.
• The number of trading days during 1st Q 2010 was 64 against 63 trading days during
1st quarter of 2009.

New Equity Listings

There was no new equity listing. The following additional equity listings were re-
corded:
1. 20,000,000 ordinary shares of Golden Star Resources Limited were listed in
February as a result of a public offer in the US and Canada.
2. 48,893,894 ordinary shares of SG-SSB Limited were listed in January as a
result of a rights issue.
3. 69,546,438 ordinary shares of CAL Bank Limited were listed in January as a
result of a rights issue.
4. 24,800,706 ordinary shares of HFC Bank (Ghana) Limited were listed in
March as a result of a placement.
1
The contents of this report complement the information provided by the Ghana Stock Exchange’s Mar-
ket Statistics for March 2010. The classification of sectors has been modified slightly for the current
analysis such that banks and insurance companies have been placed under the financial sector and the
two companies that do business in the printing industry have been added to the manufacturing sector.
All enquiries related to this report should be mailed to wamoa@gse.com.gh

110 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Guinea/General Elections

Guinea breaking the grip of dictatorship

Report

G uinea on June 27 held the first veritable

multiparty democratic elections in the 52
years since its independence from France. In
keeping with the transition plan announced in
January by General Sékouba Konaté, head of
Guinea's military junta, no member of the ruling
National Council for Democracy & Development
ran for office. More than 20 candidates stood for
the office of president, out of which former prime
minister (2004-2006) Cellou Dalein Diallo, 58,
candidate of the Union of Democratic Forces in
Guinea (UFDG) and veteran opposition leader,
dating back to the 1960s, Alpha Condé, 70, the
Rally of Guinean People (RPG) candidate, were as
leaders of the two largest parties the favored
candidates. It marked complete reversal of last Union of Democratic Forces in Guinea (UFDG) presidential can-
year’s trend of events when more than 150 peo- didate, Cellou Dalein Diallo, an economist and former prime
ple demonstrating at the national stadium in minister, speaking to the press following the launching of his
Conakry for democratic elections were killed campaign.
when soldiers opened fire on the crown. That
palpable sense of excitement and expectation
was followed by an assassination attempt last
among Guineans, who hope for a meaningful
December against the junta leader who seized
democratic transition and civilian government."
power upon the death of General Lansana Conté
Despite the commendations and optimism,
toward the end of 2008, Captain Moussa Dadis
on June 30th 20 of the 24 participating political
Camara. With Camara recuperating from gunshot
parties launched allegations of election fraud.
wounds to the head in Morocco, General Sék-
"We found massive fraud in Conakry (the capi-
ouba Konaté put together credible transition plan
tal) and its municipalities...and in Siguiri and
that was in January discussed with Captain
Kankan (major cities in the northern part of the
Camara and Burkina Faso President Blaise Com-
country)," said Zalikhatou Diallo, campaign di-
paoré in Ouagadougou. Upon that Ouagadougou
rector for Lansana Kouyaté, the leader of the
Agreement the historic elections in the world’s
Party of Hope for National Development (PEDN).
principal repository of bauxite were held of June
Lansana Kouyaté, a former prime minister under
27th.
the late President Lansana Conté, is best known
Prior to the election, America’s most active
for his leadership of the Economic Community
election observer organization in Africa issued
of West Africa States (ECOWAS), serving as its
the following statement: "The Carter Center ob-
Executive Secretary in the late 1990s.
servation mission in Guinea is encouraged by the
Ms Zalikhatou said her party had ap-
positive tone of the electoral campaign in Guinea,
proached the electoral commission about inci-
including candidates' messages promoting recon-
dents of stuffing ballot boxes and in some places
ciliation and transcending ethnic boundaries, and
in Kankan there were more voters than had
by the National Electoral Commission's (CENI)
been registered. In Sigiri she said there had
commitment to inclusive elections. There is a
been "fraud and ballot-stuffing as well as voter
111 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Guinea/General Elections Guinea breaking the grip of dictatorship
intimidation and multiple voting". The party of
presumed frontrunner, former prime minister
Cellou Dalein Diallo, alleged ballot boxes had
disappeared temporarily during the night fol-
lowing the voting.
Preliminary results were expected during
the first week of July. If no candidate get’s more
than 50% of the vote a run off would take place
on August 14th. Voter turnout was estimated at
77% of the electorate. The country of 10 million
inhabitants counted 4.2 million registered vot-
ers.
The Guinean president serves a five year
term and appoints a prime minister.
Ahmed Sékou Touré (bottom) who led Guinea to
independence from France in 1958 was a charis-
matic dictator whose biographer appropriately de-
scribed him as hero and tyrant. An ascetic, he was a
high profile anti-imperialist but also a shrewd, cun-
ning and ruthless political operator who ruled
Guinea from independence until his death from
heart failure in 1984.
Self taught, Touré rose to prominence as secre- Veteran opposition leader Alpha Condé speaking to press
tary general of the French West Africa Trade Union after June 27th election. Condé, 72, a professor of econom-
Syndicate during the colonial era, in which capacity ics, has opposed every leader of Guinea, all of whom were
he led an unprecedented 60 day strike against the dictators, since independence in 1958. He ran for president
French. Prior to assuming the presidency of Guinea against General Conté in 1993, 1998. Following his loss in
upon independence he was the elected mayor of the the 1998 election he was charged with attempting to recruit
country’s capital city, Conakry. A prolific author, forces to destabilize the government and subsequently sen-
Touré has over 20 titles to his credit, including, “The tenced to five years imprisonment. President Conté pardoned
United States of Africa,” based on a speech he made and released him in 2001 on condition that he be prohibited
at the Summit of the Organization of African Unity from engaging in political activities. After Conté’s death Al-
in 1976 calling for a single continental government. pha Condé fell out with head of the military junta that seized
He was a loquacious orator, ironically with a voice power Captain Moussa Dadis Camara.
tone reminiscent of Adolf Hitler’s.
Area: 94,926 square miles
(245,857 sq. km)

Population: 10, 057,975

Nominal GDP: $4.394 billion

Nominal Per Capita Income: $414

PPP GDP: $10.516 billion

PPP Per Capita Income: $991

UNDP Human Development ranking 2007: 160th

Currency: Guinea Franc

Principal Exports: bauxite, iron ore, gold, diamond,

pineapples, coffee, bananas, palm oil

112 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Liberia/ International Cooperation
United States Department of Justice (Washington, DC)
June 1, 2010
Manhattan U.S. Attorney Announces Unsealing of
Charges Arising from Historic Joint Undercover Operation
in The Republic of Liberia
DOCUMENT
The following report is on the result of the United
States Drug Enforcement Administration's
"Operation Relentless," which culminated in arrest
of eight defendants for conspiring to use Liberia as
staging area for distribution of more than $100
Million worth of cocaine. The son of the President
of Liberia acted under cover in the investigation.
Five defendants – Chigbo Peter Umeh , aka "
Emeka Okonkwo ," aka "Chigbogu Umehwunne,"
aka "Mike," aka "Chibue," aka "El Negro," Kon-
stantin Yaroshenko , Gilbrilla Kamara, aka " Gibril
Kamara ," aka " Anthony Smith ," aka "GK," aka
"Gibry," aka "Gee Wee," aka "River Stallon," Ali
Sesay , aka "Aliue Sesay," aka " Alie Sesay ," and
Gennor Jalloh, aka " Chernoh Nuhu Jalloh " – ar-
rived in the Southern District of New York from
Liberia on May 30, 2010 , to face charges of con-
spiring to import cocaine into the United States.
The defendants, who were arrested in coordi-
nation with Liberian authorities on May 28 and 29,
2010, were transferred by the Government of Li-
beria to the custody of the United States to face
narcotics trafficking charges in the U.S. District
Court for the Southern District of New York . This
marks the first defendant transfer by the Govern-
ment of Liberia to the United States in connection
with narcotics-related charges in over 30 years,
announced Preet Bharara, the U.S. Attorney for
the Southern District of New York , and Michele M.
Leonhart , the Acting Administrator of the U.S.
Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA).
Two additional defendants -- Nathaniel
French , aka "The Frenchman," aka "The Expert,"
and Kudufia Mawuko, aka "Marco" – were ar-
rested by Liberian authorities this morning. They
are expected to be transferred to United States
custody shortly. One additional defendant -- Jorge
Ivan Salazar Castano , aka "El Chavel" – was previ-
ously arrested in Spain , and remains in Spanish
custody.
113
The defendants have been charged in two
Indictments that were unsealed today. The first
indictment -- S8 09 Cr. 524 – charges five defen-
dants: Umeh, Yaroshenko, French, Mawuko and
Jorge Ivan Salazar Castano , aka "El Chavel." The
second indictment, which bears docket number
10 Cr. 457 , charges three defendants: Kamara,
Sesay and Jalloh. Also unsealed today was a com-
plaint -- 10 Mag. 1166 -- which charges one de-
fendant, Marcel Acevedo Sarmiento , aka "Jota,"
aka "JJ," aka " Juan Restrepo," who is alleged to
have been a co-conspirator of the conspiracy
charged in Indictment S8 09 Cr. 524. Acevedo
Sarmiento remains at large.
According to the Indictments and Complaint
unsealed today:
During the last decade, drug trafficking or-
ganizations based in South America have increas-
ingly used countries along or near the West Afri-
can coast as trans-shipment hubs for importing
massive quantities of cocaine to be later distrib-
uted in Europe or elsewhere within Africa.
Through a combination of privately owned aircraft
and maritime vessels, these organizations, pre-
dominantly based in Colombia and Venezuela,
have transported hundreds of tons of cocaine,
worth billions of dollars, to places such as Guinea
Bissau, Guinea Conakry, Sierra Leone, Togo, Mali,
Ghana, Nigeria, and Liberia. In so doing, represen-
tatives of these drug trafficking organizations have
often sought to bribe high-level public officials
with large cash payments and narcotics in order to
ensure the safe passage, storage, and distribution
of their cocaine shipments.
Since in or about 2007, the defendants have
attempted to bribe high-level officials in the Libe-
rian Government in order to protect shipments of
vast quantities of cocaine, and to use Liberia as a
trans-shipment point for further distribution of
the cocaine in Africa and Europe. In particular,
certain of the defendants met with two individuals
they knew to be Liberian government officials −
the Director and Deputy Director of the Republic
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Liberia/ International Cooperation
Manhattan U.S. Attorney-Republic of Liberia Historic Joint Undercover Operation
of Liberia National Security Agency ("RLNSA"),
both of whom (unbeknownst to the defendants) in
fact were working jointly with the DEA in an un-
dercover capacity ("UC-1" and "UC-
2",respectively).
The Director of the RLNSA is also the son of
the current President of Liberia. In a number of
the meetings involving these Liberian officials,
the defendants also met with a confidential
source working with DEA (the "CS"), who pur-
ported to be a business partner and confidante
of the Director of the RLNSA.
In seeking to ensure the safe passage of their
cocaine shipments, the defendants agreed to
make payments to the Director and the Deputy
Director of the RLNSA in cash and also in the form
of cocaine. The CS advised the defendants that a
portion of the cocaine paid to the CS would be
transported from Liberia to Ghana, from where it
would be imported into New York.
The S8 09 Cr. 524 Indictment
According to the S8 09 Cr. 524 Indictment, UMEH,
42, who is from Nigeria, was a broker who assisted
various international narcotics suppliers in ship-
ping numerous tons of cocaine from South Amer-
ica to West Africa, from where the cocaine was
transported to Europe or elsewhere within Africa.
SALAZAR CASTANO, 44, who is from Colombia,
was a cocaine supplier based in Colombia and
Spain, who, together with his co-conspirators, sent
large commercial aircraft containing cocaine from
South America to West Africa, as well as smaller,
private airplanes that departed from clandestine
airstrips in Venezuela. YAROSHENKO, 41, who is
from Russia, was an aircraft pilot and aviation
transport expert who transported thousand-
kilogram quantities of cocaine throughout South
America, Africa, and Europe. FRENCH, 51, who is
from Ghana, assisted drug suppliers by providing
logistical support and coordination for maritime
shipments of cocaine across the Atlantic Ocean.
MAWUKO, 57, who is also from Ghana, assisted
the drug suppliers through his extensive knowl-
edge of maritime navigation, including the devel-
opment of sea routes that could evade law en-
forcement radar.
The defendants participated in a series of
face-to-face meetings, phone conversations, and
telephone calls with the cooperating Liberian
114
officials and the CS in connection with at least
three different shipments of cocaine that they
were trying to transport through Liberia: (1) a
shipment of approximately 4,000 kilograms, which
was to be flown from Venezuela to Monrovia, Li-
beria, and the retail value of which was over $100
million; (2) a shipment of approximately 1,500
kilograms, which was to be flown from Venezuela
to Monrovia, Liberia, on an aircraft originating in
Panama; and (3) a shipment of approximately 500
kilograms of cocaine, which was to be transported
by a ship from Venezuela to a location off the
coast of Liberia. Through these meetings, the de-
fendants all understood that once the cocaine was
transported to Liberia, a portion of the shipment
(representing the payment to the CS) would be
transported into Ghana, from where it would be
placed on a commercial flight destined for the
United States.
During a meeting in Monrovia, UMEH stated
that the 4,000 kilograms of cocaine which the
conspiracy intended to import into Liberia had
been supplied and protected by the Fuerzas Ar-
madas Revolucionarias de Colombia (the
"FARC"). The FARC is an international terrorist
group dedicated to the violent overthrow of the
democratically elected Government of Colombia.
On May 28 and 29, 2010, defendants UMEH
and YAROSHENKO were arrested in Liberia. On
May 30, 2010, they were transferred to United
States custody and brought to the Southern Dis-
trict of New York, where they will make their first
court appearance latertoday. Defendants
FRENCH and MAWUKO were arrested in Liberia
this morning, June 1, 2010, and are expected to
be transferred to United States custody shortly.
Defendant SALAZAR CASTANO is presently incar-
cerated in Spain.
The S8 09 Cr. 524 Indictment has been as-
signed to United States District Judge JED S. RA-
KOFF for the Southern District of New York.
The 10 Cr. 457 Indictment
As set forth in Indictment 10 Cr. 457, since at least
in or about 2007, KAMARA, 40, who is from Sierra
Leone, has actively sought to recruit South Ameri-
can drug trafficking organizations to establish op-
erations in various West African countries, includ-
ing in Liberia, Guinea Conakry, Guinea Bissau, Si-
erra Leone, and Nigeria. KAMARA, JALLOH, and
SESAY exchanged a series of emails and telephone
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ International Cooperation
Manhattan U.S. Attorney-Republic of Liberia Historic Joint Undercover Operation
calls and held numerous meetings with the CS,
the cooperating Liberian officials, and a third Li-
berian government official who was also working
jointly with the DEA in an undercover capacity
("UC-3"), in order to negotiate prices and make
specific arrangements for the secure transporta-
tion of cocaine from South America through Libe-
ria, including, but not limited to, a 4,000 kilogram
shipment of cocaine from Colombia. The CS, who
was introduced as UC-1's "partner" and confi-
dante, was present for many of these meetings.
In the course of these meetings, the defendants
understood that the CS, who was to be paid by
the defendants in the form of cocaine, was going
to senda portion of his share of the cocaine to
Ghana, from where it would be imported into
New York aboard commercial flights.
In coordination with Liberian authorities,
KAMARA, JALLOH, and SESAY were arrested on
May 28, 2010. On May 30,2010, they were trans-
ferred to United States custody and brought to
the Southern District of New York, where they
will make their first court appearance later today.
The 10 Cr. 457 Indictment has been assigned to
United States District Judge WILLIAM H. PAULEY
for the Southern District of New York.
The 10 Mag. 1166 Complaint
As set forth in Complaint 10 Mag. 1166, ACEVEDO
SARMIENTO is a cocaine supplier based in Colom-
bia and Venezuela, capable of transporting thou-
sand-kilogram quantities of cocaine from South
America to various locations in West Africa, for
distribution within Africa and for further distribu-
tion to Europe and other markets. ACEVEDO SAR-
MIENTO worked in the international drug business
with members of the conspiracy charged in the S8
09Cr. 524 Indictment, including in connection with
the 4,000 kilogram shipment of cocaine refer-
enced therein.
In a series of recorded telephone conversa-
tions with the CS, ACEVEDO SARMIENTO, who
claimed to have been involved in the cocaine
trafficking business for over 20 years, coordi-
nated efforts to arrange what was ultimately
supposed to be a shipment of between 2,000 and
2,500 kilograms of cocaine on a plane from Vene-
zuela to Liberia. ACEVEDO SARMIENTO con-
firmed to the CS that the cocaine shipment had
been protected by the FARC.
115
On May 29, 2010, ACEVEDO SARMIENTO indi-
cated that Venezuelan authorities had seized his
plane, which he claimed was worth $35 million, as
well as the cocaine that it contained, and had di-
rected him to leave the country. After apprising
the CS of the seizure, ACEVEDO SARMIENTO in-
vited the CS to invest 500 kilograms in a new ship-
ment out of Bolivia, which ACEVEDO SARMIENTO
understood the CS intended to import into New
York. ACEVEDO SARMIENTO instructed the CS to
wire transfer a $100,000 payment to him, and pro-
vided the CS with the relevant bank account infor-
mation for the transfer.
The United States is coordinating with Co-
lombian authorities to locate and apprehend
ACEVEDO SARMIENTO.
***
All of the defendants are charged with one
count of conspiracy to distribute and possess
with intent to distribute cocaine, knowing or in-
tending that the cocaine would be imported into
the United States. This offense carries a mini-
mum sentence of ten years in prison and a maxi-
mum term of life imprisonment.
The arrests and transfers of the defendants
were the result of the close cooperative efforts of
the United States Attorney's Office for the South-
ern District of New York, the Special Operations
Division of the DEA, the DEA Lagos Country Office,
the DEA Warsaw Country Office, the DEA Bogota
Country Office, the DEA Rome Country Office, the
U.S. Department of Justice Office of International
Affairs, the U.S. State Department, the U.S. Em-
bassy in Liberia, the Republic of Liberia and its Na-
tional Security Agency, and the Security Services of
Ukraine.
United States Attorney PREET BHARARA
stated: "During the last decade, South American
narcotics traffickers have burrowed a growing
foothold in West Africa, sending hundreds of tons
of cocaine worth billions of dollars into the region.
They have done so by seeking to influence and
corrupt public officials with lucrative promises of
payoffs. As today's charges vividly show, the Gov-
ernment of Liberia has taken an aggressive and
emphatic stand in shutting its doors to drug traf-
fickers. Liberia's commitment to the rule of the
law and the international fight against the drug
trade merits strong commendation. For the Presi-
dent of Liberia, this effort has been a personal
one. Her own son, the Director of Liberia's Na-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ International Cooperation
Manhattan U.S. Attorney-Republic of Liberia
Historic Joint Undercover Operation
tional Security Agency, courageously served as an
undercover to make this investigation and prose-
cution possible. The transfer of these defendants
to American custody reflects the strong partner-
ship between the United States and Liberia in
combating the international drug trade, which
poses a serious threat to both countries."
DEA Acting Administrator MICHELE M. LEON-
HART stated:"Unprecedented cooperation from
the highest levels of government n Liberia helped
expose drug smuggling and corruption that led to
indictments of African, Colombian, and Russian
traffickers. Operation Relentless successfully bat-
tered the pipeline of cocaine flowing from South
America, through Africa, and into Europe. In this
case, ton quantities of FARC cocaine were seized
and the operations of several major traffickers
were disrupted."
The Honorable ELLEN JOHNSON SIRLEAF,
President of the Republic of Liberia, stated: "As
today's charges show, the Republic of Liberia is
officially closed for business to the narcotics
trade. We are strongly committed to combating
international drug organizations that seek to ex-
ploit our country for their own profit. We are
proud of our strong partnership with the United
States Drug Enforcement Administration and the
United States Department of Justice, and we look
forward to strengthening and deepening this re-
lationship in the years to come."
This prosecution is being handled by the Of-
fice's Terrorism and International Narcotics Unit.
Assistant United States Attorneys JENNA M.
DABBS, CHRISTOPHER LAVIGNE, and MICHAEL M.
ROSENSAFT are in charge of the prosecution.
The charges contained in the Indictments and
Complaint are merely accusations and the defen-
dants are presumed innocent unless and until
proven guilty.
116
United States Millennium Challenge Corporation
(Washington, DC)
MCC Approves $15m Grant for Liberia
PRESS RELEASE, MAY 27, 2010
The Millennium Challenge Corporation (MCC)
Board of Directors, chaired by U.S. Secretary of
State Hillary Rodham Clinton, today approved an
approximately $15 million threshold program
grant for Liberia to support the country’s ongoing
efforts at reform.
The grant, which is subject to a 15-day con-
gressional notification period, will focus on land
rights, girls’ education and trade policy. During
Liberian President Ellen Johnson Sirleaf’s visit to
Washington, D.C., MCC CEO Daniel Yohannes
joined Senator Jack Reed, Representative Jesse
Jackson Jr., and additional Members of Congress
at a reception on Capitol Hill honoring President
Johnson Sirleaf for her efforts to set a high stan-
dard for good governance, accountability, and sus-
tainable development.
“When President Johnson Sirleaf visited the
United States in 2008, she said Liberia was striving
to meet MCC benchmarks in hopes of joining the
MCC family. I am pleased to announce that MCC
plans to partner with Liberia to help deliver stabil-
ity and create the conditions for long-term eco-
nomic growth,” said Mr. Yohannes. “We are look-
ing forward to working with our colleagues in Con-
gress and moving toward an official ceremony to
sign the grant.”
Subject to congressional notification and con-
sultation, the United States Agency for Interna-
tional Development, the U.S. government agency
administering the program will sign an approxi-
mately $15 million, three-year MCC threshold pro-
gram agreement with the Government of Liberia,
investing in three areas: land rights and access,
girls’ education, and trade policy. These areas
were identified by Liberians themselves as part of
their national development strategy. The program
will:
•Help promote equitable access to land and in-
creased land security through increased under-
standing of property rights issues and improved
land administration and land registration capacity;
• Improve girls’ primary education enrollment and
retention through a scholarship program for girls,
grants to communities to improve the school
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ International Cooperation
Millennium Challenge Corporation
Approves $15m Grant for Liberia
environment, and grants supporting mentoring
programs and awareness campaigns; and;
• Support efforts to improve trade policy and prac-
tices, specifically in harmonizing tariffs, engaging
regional and global bodies, and strengthening the
regulatory environment.
“With vital support from Congress for MCC’s
budget and critical legislative fixes, we will con-
tinue to have the ability to partner with reform-
minded countries committed to wisely investing
American taxpayer resources in sustainable devel-
opment that benefits us all in our interconnected
global marketplace,” said Mr. Yohannes.
MCC’s threshold program is designed to as-
sist countries that are on the “threshold” of eligi-
bility for MCC compact assistance. Threshold
program assistance is used to help countries ad-
dress the specific policy areas for improvement
indicated by their scores on 17 policy indicators
in three categories —Ruling Justly, Investing in
People, and Encouraging Economic Free-
dom. These policy indicators are central to the
criteria and methodology for determining com-
pact eligibility and are products of respected in-
ternational institutions and national data. Each
indicator is selected based on its utility in remov-
ing impediments to growth and poverty reduc-
tion, the number of countries it covers, its trans-
parency and availability, and its analytical rigor.
The United States Agency for International
Development will administer the Liberia threshold
program and will be responsible for coordination,
contracting, and financial management. MCC will
maintain oversight of Liberia’s threshold program.
117
Infrastructure Liberia’s Priority
Adaptation of D. Kaihenneh Sengbeh’s June 1,
2010 article in the Informer (Monrovia)
In the wake of a $4.9 billion debt relief granted
Liberia by the World Bank and International
Monetary Fund (IMF) while she was Washington
during the last part of May and the beginning of
June, President Ellen Johnson-Sirleaf sees greater
prospect for her ongoing priority, infrastructure.
"Right now we are very concerned about our
primary roads...We have to try to pave
them...that's our major challenge now as a gov-
ernment," President Sirleaf declared yesterday
during a live phone-in talk show broadcast on
major radio stations in Monrovia, including the
UN radio which covers the country.
On the question of future loans Madam
President said that any new indebtedness would
be for infrastructure development, particularly
roads. Specifically, she identified major feeder
roads including the Gbarnga (Bong County)-
Voinjama (Lofa County) and the Fish Town (River
Gee)-Harper (Maryland County) routes. These are
all important rural commerce roads that during
the rainy season become virtually impassable.
Also, debt relief has offered a new window
of opportunity for building schools and health
facilities across the country.
Explaining the implications of the $4.9 billion
debt burden that had just been lifted off Liberia,
President Sirleaf pointed out, “Our budget for
2009-2010 is US$350 million. To settle that
US$4.9 billion debt, we would have had to pay
our creditors our entire budget for 28 years!"
Previous Liberian governments had bor-
rowed from the World Bank, the International
Monetary Fund (IMF), other countries, and com-
panies, and had not paid back any of the loans.
"Since the 1980 coup d'état, followed by our
14-year civil war, none of our loans were ser-
viced, and so the interest and the penalties grew
and grew," the President noted.
She attributed the award of debt relief to
"the way we tightened our belts and conducted
ourselves, by not borrowing from anybody and
spending only the revenues we collected, includ-
ing your taxes….
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ International Cooperation
May 28,2010 New Democrat (Monrovia) May 18, 2010
Liberia joins UN campaign to eradicate Liberia Wins U.S$ 40 Million
polio in West Africa
Education Grant
Liberia has been named beneficiary of a new
grant from the Education for All Fast Track
Initiative.
The initiative is a global partnership be-
tween low-income countries and donors to
ensure that children in developing countries
receive basic quality education.
As part of the initiative, Liberia will receive
a grant of forty million US dollars.
A World Bank release says the money
will be used to finance the construction of
four hundred fifty three new classrooms at
UN Polio eradication team in Ghana the primary school level.
Health workers fanned out across Liberia to- It will also provide one hundred thou-
sand text books to students and twenty one
day to vaccinate children against polio as the
thousand, five hundred sets of teachers'
third round of a synchronized regional immu-
guides.
nization campaign aimed at eradication the
paralyzing disease in West Africa began, the A school health component will finance
United Nations Children's Fund (UNICEF) re- the development of learning materials, train-
ported. ing of teachers and de-worming of primary
Vaccinators are aiming to reach 53 million school students.
children across West Africa during the five-day The grant is part of a total of three hun-
campaign. dred three million US dollars received from
In Liberia, the exercise is jointly supported nineteen donors including the World Bank,
UNICEF and UNESCO. Ethiopia, Malawi, Togo
by the health ministry, UNICEF, the UN World
and Lao PDR are among beneficiaries.
Health Organization (WHO) and the UN Mis-
sion in Liberia (UNMIL), as well as more than
700 social mobilizers.
UNMIL Radio and other community radio
stations are broadcasting jingles and polio-
related messages regularly, with UNICEF pro-
viding technical and financial support for com-
munications, and a supply of more than
900,000 doses of polio vaccine. WHO is provid-
ing technical support as well as funds for logis-
tics, monitoring, transportation and allow-
ances for vaccination teams.
"I would like to call on parents all across
the country to take their children for the polio
vaccine - not only for its importance but be-
cause it is their right," said Ibrahim Sesay, a UNI-
CEF child protection specialist in Liberia. "We
Liberian primary 1 school children
call on vaccinators and health workers in the
field to do their outmost in ensuring that every
child under five is reached and immunized
against this deadly disease," he added.
118 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Political Economy
New Democrat (Monrovia)
Heavy $4.9 Billion Burden Removed - Pres. Sirleaf
The country's success in reaching the HIPC com-
pletion has been declared as cause for celebration,
with President Ellen Johnson Sirleaf further declar-
ing that a heavy burden has been removed along
the path of development with the withering of
US$4.9 billion debt that would have taken 28 years
to repay if, she added, the country's entire fiscal
budget of US$350 went towards debt payment.
"Most of our debt is gone, erased; a huge
burden has been lifted. And you, the Liberian
people, had a hand in this success, and we say
thank you", the president said in a speech with
all the signs of optimism exuberance.
"Like someone who has toted a heavy load
for many miles, we can now cast it off, straighten
our backs and lift our eyes to the horizon where a
better day is breaking - a day when we will stand
on our own, unsupported, and proud. For I firmly
believe that in 10 years, if we stay on the path of
reform, and follow the roadmap of our national
agenda, our country should no longer depend on
foreign assistance. We should be able to self-
finance our own development," she assured, add-
ing:
"The big debt is off our head! For that, we
give thanks to God. May God bless Liberia and its
resilient and remarkable people for a job well
done!"
Acknowledging the harsh economic condi-
tions prevailing because leading financial institu-
tions and creditors have shunned Liberia since,
she clarified, the 1980 coup, she said hope is in
sight while warning against expectations of im-
mediate results.
In a prepared statement, she described the
World Bank's debt waiver as "a great day for Li-
beria!"
She further underlined the prevailing eco-
nomic difficulties in which many find themselves:
"Because of the way we tightened our belts
and conducted ourselves, by not borrowing from
anybody and spending only the revenues we col-
lected, including your taxes, the World Bank and
the IMF have just announced that we don't have
to pay them back.
"As of today, we are well on our way to
shedding the massive debt we owed. But it's not
119
President Sirleaf at Monrovia’s Vai Town Bridge
over just yet. Next month, we have to go before
another institution, the Paris Club, to ask them to
cancel the rest of our debt, she said."
But she offered some backgrounds of the
debts, blaming "previous governments" that
"borrowed from the World Bank, the International
Monetary Fund (IMF), other countries, and com-
panies, and had not paid back any of the loans.
Since the 1980 coup d'état, followed by our 14-
year civil war, none of our loans were serviced,
and so the interest and the penalties grew and
grew.
My Administration inherited this huge debt,
which has been hanging heavily around the
country's neck. From the day I came into office, I
promised to do everything in my power to put
our economic and financial house in order, and
to get this unbearable burden, which was hold-
ing back our recovery and development, off our
backs."
But she added that for today's conditions,
"our Government was forced to carry out diffi-
cult reforms. The two largest international insti-
tutions we owed money to - the World Bank and
the IMF - prescribed tough medicine which we
had to swallow, but which enabled us to better
manage our economy and our finances.
"As we look forward to marking our country's
163rd year of independence in July, we also
proudly celebrate a new dawn of freedom and
independence - freedom and independence from
a crushing debt burden."
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/Presidential Diplomacy
Monrovia, April 13, 2010
Liberia, Brazil Sign Joint Communiqué
President Lula Da Silva and President Sirleaf in handshake after signing the agreements
Photo by: Sando Moore
L iberia and Brazil have taken major steps to
jumpstart longstanding relations between the
two countries. Following bilateral discussions
Wednesday in Brasilia, President Ellen Johnson
Sirleaf and the President of Brazil, Luis Lula da
Silva, the two countries agreed to promote coop-
eration in the areas of energy and mining as well
as education.
According to an Executive Mansion dispatch,
the agreement calls for the training of teachers
and academicians in graduate and undergraduate
programs in Brazil and an alignment of teaching
programs between higher institutions of learning
in Liberia and Brazil. Both countries also agreed to
recognize the credentials issued by their respec-
tive institutions of higher learning.
An agreement on the 'Performance of Remu-
nerated Activities by Dependants of Diplomatic,
Consular, Military, Administrative and Technical
Staff' was also signed, thus relaxing restrictions on
employment for foreign embassy staff in Liberia
and Brazil.
The Executive Mansion dispatch also men-
120
tioned that under the Memoranda of Under-
standing, both countries would establish a Liberia
-Brazil Joint Commission that will coordinate and
monitor the execution of agreements reached
between the two countries.
President Sirleaf commended the leadership
role of Brazil on behalf of the Group of 77 and
developing nations in trade negotiations and fi-
nancial issues in international forums.
On Africa-Brazil relations, Madam Sirleaf
paid tribute to Mr. Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva for his
policy of forging strategic partnership between
Brazil and Africa and for expanding and deepen-
ing relations with African countries. The Liberian
leader noted that the Brazilian leader's policies
had helped to create a deeper and more pro-
found awareness and greater appreciation of the
close cultural and historical links between Brazil
and Africa and Afro-Brazilian culture.
Regarding Liberia-Brazil bilateral relations,
the two leaders noted the historic nature of the
summit visit which is the first official visit by a
Liberian Head of State since Brazil and Liberia
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/Presidential Diplomacy
signed a Treaty of Friendship and Commerce 158
years ago.
President Ellen Johnson Sirleaf briefed Presi-
dent Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva about Liberia's post-
conflict reconstruction program based on its Pov-
erty Reduction Strategy entitled Lift Liberia.
She indicated that two decades of conflict
has left the country devastated with a near col-
lapsed economy, crumbling infrastructure and
weak institutions. With limited financial resources
the success of the reconstruction program so far
has had to depend largely on the support of the
international community and friends like Brazil.
President Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva thanked
President Sirleaf for her relentless efforts to con-
solidate peace and stability and promote national
reconstruction and development in Liberia. He
noted the progress and strides Liberia has made
under her leadership and for the prudent and dis-
ciplined manner in which she has proceeded to
pull the country out of conflict and put her onto
the path to sustained development.
“Many challenges remain and the Liberian
leader deserves every support to finish the task
she has embarked upon,” the Brazilian President
noted.
He pledged Brazil's commitment to provide
within its best capacity, assistance that would
support Liberia's reconstruction.
The two Presidents agreed to increase
friendly exchanges at various levels, expand prac-
tical cooperation to further develop and acceler-
ate Liberia-Brazil relations and cooperation.
At the end of the visit, Agreements and
Memorandums of Understanding were signed
between the two governments as follows:
A. Agreement on Cooperation in the Field of Edu-
cation
B. Agreement on the Performance of Remuner-
ated Activities by Dependants of Diplomatic, Con-
sular, Military, Administrative, and Technical Staff
C. Memorandum of Understanding on the Estab-
lishment of a Liberia-Brazil Joint Commission
D. Memorandum of Understanding on the Estab-
lishment of a Mechanism for Political Consulta-
tions
121
Liberia, Brazil Sign Joint Communiqué
E. Memorandum of Understanding on Coopera-
tion in Sports
F. Memorandum of Understanding on Coopera-
tion in Energy and Mining
Foreign Minister Olubanke King-Akerele
signed on behalf of the Government of Liberia
while the Minister of External Relations of Brazil,
Celso Amorim, signed for his Government.
At a luncheon tendered in honor of the Libe-
rian President and delegation, President Ellen
Johnson Sirleaf lauded the progress Brazil has
made over the years. The Liberian leader ob-
served that Brazil, as an emergent global eco-
nomic power, now serves as an engine of growth
and expansion for the world economy.
The President praised Brazil's agenda for
social inclusion and poverty reduction, and the
country's 'Zero Hunger Initiative', describing it as
phenomenal.
Presidential Press Secretary Cyrus W. Badio
is quoted as saying that President Johnson Sirleaf
has extended an invitation to the Brazilian Presi-
dent to visit Liberia during the commemoration
of Liberia's 163rd Independence Anniversary or
at President Lula da Silva's convenience.
The Liberian leader, Wednesday last week,
paid courtesy calls on the leaders of the Brazilian
Senate, the House of Representatives and the
Chief Justice of Brazil. The President said Liberia
is prepared to draw from the success of Brazil to
improve the wellbeing of the country and its peo-
ple.
President Johnson Sirleaf and delegation
arrived in Brazil Wednesday, April 7, at the start
of a four-day state visit.
*Copyright Liberian Observer - All Rights Re-
served. This article cannot be re-published with-
out the expressed, written consent of the Liberian
Observer. Please contact us for more information
or to request publishing permission.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/Presidential Diplomacy
Washington Gracious to Ellen
Report
Liberian President Ellen Johnson-Sirleaf (center) addressing the press before her meetings
with U.S. House of Representatives Speaker Nancy Pelosi (right) and House Sub-Committee
on State & Foreign Operations Chair Nita Lowey (left)
U nited States President Barack Obama gra-
ciously welcomed his Liberian counterpart
Ellen Johnson-Sirleaf to the White House on May
28th, describing her efforts to reconstruct her civil
strife devastated country as heroic. President
Johnson-Sirleaf also met with U.S. House of Rep-
resentatives Speaker Nancy Pelosi who likewise
spoke laudably of her, saying the Liberian presi-
dent is “an inspiration to women everywhere,
men too.” Speaker Pelosi has praised President
Ellen Johnson-Sirleaf’s 2006 speech before a Joint
Session of the U.S. Congress as one of the best
ever heard by the august body. In 2007 Madam
Johnson-Sirleaf received America’s highest civilian
honor, the United States Presidential Medal of
Freedom from President George W. Bush.
Speaker Pelosi, noting that she has been fol-
lowing Ellen Johnson-Sirelaf’s career and admiring
her for many years, while she was at the World
Bank, Citicorp and UNDP, spoke about the
achievements of the Johnson-Sirleaf administra-
122
tion, especially the restoration of security and
electricity.
The Liberian president met with President
Obama, with whom she shares Harvard Univer-
sity as alma-mater, in the White House’s famed
Oval Office. The U.S.’ first African American presi-
dent and Africa’s first democratically elected
women president both acknowledged the chal-
lenges facing Liberia in its reconstruction quest.
Obama, like Pelosi, said he had been an admirer
of Madam Johnson-Sirleaf for many years, not-
ing, as did Speaker Pelosi, the longstanding ties
between Liberia and the United States.
"I have been an extraordinary admirer of her
work for many years now.... The United States
and Liberia are close friends, longstanding part-
ners, and Liberia is now emerging from a very
difficult period," the US President remarked.
The American president attributed the rapid
reconstruction strides Liberia has made under
Madam Johnson-Sirleaf to her commitment to
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/Presidential Diplomacy
Presidents Ellen Johnson-Sirleaf and Barack Obama discuss in the White House Oval Office
improving the lives of her people and good govern-
ance, commending her efforts to reform the judici-
ary and uphold the rule of law."In all these endeav-
ors I want to make sure the people of Liberia un-
derstand... that the United States is a constant
friend and partner," President Obama said.
On behalf of the Liberian people President
Johnson-Sirleaf welcomed Mr. Obama’s commen-
dation, noting that what he has observed about
Liberia would not have been possible without the
cooperation and assistance of the United States.
Madam Sirleaf said she was proud to have met
President Obama and exchanged ideas with him on
the progress made in Liberia as well as discuss bilat-
eral relations between the two countries.
She thanked the US government and people
for continuing to accommodate some 14,000 Liberi-
ans currently living in the US on Temporary Protec-
tive Status (TPS) and the Obama administration for
the extension of the TPS that has delayed enforced
departure for another year. The U.S. offered TPS to
Liberians during the civil war of the 1990s.
She also thanked America for the work the
U.S. African Command (AFRICOM) was doing in Li-
beria, noting that since UNMIL was withdrawing its
activities it is important that the country’s police
attain full capacity.
In addition to highlighting efforts her admini-
stration was making to strengthen the Liberian judi-
ciary, which she identified as one of her major
goals, President Sirleaf briefed Mr. Obama on the
work she and other African leaders are currently
doing to ensure that the continent’s democratic
process development stays on course.
123
Washington Gracious to Ellen
Madam President told her American counter-
part she looks forward to the continuing support
of the US, acknowledging that there are still many
challenges facing her country. She particularly
pointed out that she wants to count on the sup-
port of the US and other allies at the June 26
meeting of the IMF and World Bank when the is-
sue of the debt relief for Liberia comes up.
In discussing with the Liberian leader, Presi-
dent Obama assured her of the US’ commitment
to work with Liberia on food security, especially
through the Liberian Ministry of Agriculture’s Feed
the Future program.
In closing the meeting, President Obama ob-
served that President Sirleaf has a very good sense
of where Liberia is headed.
Earlier Secretary of State Hillary Clinton met
Madam Sirleaf. They discussed elections next year
and various other issues. According to Mrs. Clin-
ton, “…we discussed Liberia's preparations for na-
tional elections in 2011, progress on judicial and
police reforms, and efforts to fight against official
corruption."
The U.S. chief diplomat affirmed after their
talks that Washington is a partner with Monrovia
"in the promotion of democracy, the establish-
ment of good governance, and development of a
responsible security sector in Liberia." Mrs. Clinton
said she sought to assure Madam Sirleaf "of our
continued support and engagement as Liberia pro-
gresses towards full economic and political recov-
ery" after successive civil wars.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency

The Role of Agriculture in Post-Conflict

Recovery - The Case of Liberia
By Ellen Johnson-Sirleaf
May 20, 2010
DOCUMENT
Statement by
Her Excellency Ellen Johnson Sirleaf
President of the Republic of Liberia

"The Role of Agriculture in Post-Conflict

Recovery: The Case of Liberia"
Symposium on Global Agriculture and Food Secu-
rity; Global Agricultural Development Initiative
Mayflower Renaissance Hotel, Washington D.C.

Moderator (Dan Glickman, former Secretary of

Agriculture);
Honorable Thomas Vilsack (Secretary of Agricul-
ture);
Dr. Rajiv Shah (USAID Administrator);
Mr. Marshall Bouton (President Chicago Council
on Global Affairs)
Ms. Catherine Bertini (Symposium Co-Chair)
Members of Congress Present;
Development Partners;
Distinguished Guests; President Ellen Johnson addressing the World Health Organi-
Ladies and Gentlemen; zation (WHO) confab, May 18, 2010 in Geneva, Switzerland

Friends: peace and national security, reactivating our min-

I thank you, Mr. Mouton and Mr. Glickman and
the Chicago Council on Global Affairs, for the kind
invitation, and the opportunity to join so many of
you in this room and the several other key person-
alities to speak at this important Symposium on
the role of agriculture in the post-conflict recovery
of my country, Liberia. You will note that I am
wearing green symbolizing the agriculture poten-
tial of my country.
In 2006, Liberia started the long road back
from a civil conflict that decimated the country’s
infrastructure and institutions, a situation com-
pounded by a population that fled to the urban
areas leaving the land unproductive.
In the past four years, under the four pillars
of our Poverty Reduction or ‘Lift Liberia’ Strategy,
we have restored growth to an average annual 7
percent, tackled a $4.9 billion external debt over-
hang, made strong progress on consolidating
ing, agriculture and forestry sectors, promoted the
institutions of good governance and the rule of
law and rehabilitating infrastructure to extend ba-
sic services to our 3.5 million population.
Yet the challenges remain awesome and our
nation fragile in the face of raised expectations
and the several stumbling blocks, including the
2008/2009 global financial crisis, that have
slowed the pace of recovery and reform.
Poverty continues to be the most significant
determinant of food access in many parts of Libe-
ria although 70 percent of the population de-
pends on agriculture. Recognizing that agricul-
tural growth is more effective in reducing pov-
erty than any effort in any other sector, our Gov-
ernment is placing emphasis on this strategic sec-
tor both in terms of exports and food security at
home.
Our policy goal in the sector is to revitalize

124 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency Role of Agriculture in Post-Conflict Liberia’s Recovery
operations and activities
that contribute to sustain-
able economic growth and
development; to provide
food security and nutrition; and to increase farm-
ers’ employment and income – all aimed at meas-
urably reducing poverty.
While our commitment to agriculture is un-
equivocal, I must acknowledge that public financ-
ing of the sector is still woefully inadequate. The
share of our national budget allocated to agricul-
tural institutions and activities rose from US$3
million in 2006 to US$7 million in 2009 but this
still represents a mere 2 percent of our budget.
Moreover, I can say, quite candidly, that de-
spite the policies and strategies, our population is
still highly vulnerable to chronic food insecurity,
stemming from physical and human capital con-
straints, poor natural resource and farm manage-
ment practices, and poor health and nutrition
practices.
We are, nevertheless, intensifying our ef-
forts to achieve the desired results. To grow the
economy, we embarked upon a “Back to the Soil”
Campaign that resulted in significant increase in
food production, particularly of our staples as
rice and cassava. Rice production, for example,
increased from 85,000 metric tons in 2006 to
about 200,000 metric tons in 2009 - a 135 per-
cent increase. The increase in food production
has led the World Food Program (WFP), for the
first time, to purchase locally produced rice for
use in its school-feeding program.
The programs that supported the results
have also trained 30,397 farmers, providing them
with new farming methods, and provided 15,000
vulnerable farmers and 169 farmer groups with
seed rice. Our success would have been even
greater if more farmers had been able to use
lowland areas where yields in rice production is
highest compared to other ecologies, and where
rice could be cultivated two or three times per
year.
The reluctance of farmers to use fertile low-
lands is due to the health consequences resulting
from the prevalence of schistosomiasis and other
water-borne diseases which multiplied during the
long period of our civil unrest. We continue to
mobilize support from our partners to help clean
up these fertile lowlands for cultivation of rice to
ensure self-sufficiency.
It is very clear to us that agriculture has the
potential to become a major source of employ-
125
ment, most especially for the thousands of our
citizens, especially women and youth who, as
casualties of the war, lack essential skills, but
who can learn to farm the land. Our objective is
to consolidate them into a productive and dy-
namic entity for national development. Jobs in
the farming sector is one of the means of accom-
plishing that aim.
If Liberia can grow its own food and be self-
sufficient, and we have the potential to do so
due to the large territorial farmable soils, the
tropical climate and abundant water resources,
the country would then be insulated from the
effects of the soaring global food prices, which
we experienced in 2008.
This is why in 2009, we developed and vali-
dated the Liberia Agriculture Sector Investment
Program (LASIP), which is guiding our Ministry of
Agriculture and our development partners in bet-
ter coordinating activities aimed at Liberia’s agri-
cultural development.
This Program is in line with our development
agenda as well as the framework of the Compre-
hensive Africa Agriculture Development Program
(CAADP). It is encouraging that the major donor
agencies have committed their institutions to us-
ing this framework as a viable vehicle to provide
assistance to African countries in the development
of their agricultural sectors and to ensure food
security.
We believe that with consistency in efforts
and resources, our agriculture sector is transi-
tioning from “emergency” to “development”,
which includes sustainability and improved liveli-
hood. At the core of this transition is the trans-
formation of smallholder agriculture into a sus-
tainable diversified, income-generating sector
that is well integrated into markets – one in
which commercial agriculture provides support
and incentives to small farmers.
To achieve this objective, our public sector
agriculture investment priorities between 2010
and 2013 include food and nutrition security;
competitive value chains and market linkages;
institutional development; and land and water
development.
In an emerging market-driven economy like
Liberia’s, a large share of the actual development
of agriculture is carried out by the private sector
through their involvement in different facets of
production, processing, servicing and trade. Gov-
ernment’s role in this regard is to provide the ena-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency Role of Agriculture in Post-Conflict Liberia’s Recovery
bling environment for the
private sector to thrive.
My Government recognizes
the importance of private sec-
tor-led growth in the productive sectors, and has
therefore entered into concession agreements
with investors for development of the agriculture
sector. These agreements give agriculture inves-
tors the right to undertake productive activities in
areas of their choice, and to work with small-
holders through out-grower arrangements sup-
ported by the public sector.
Private-sector investment is picking up in
our country and various projects will produce a
stream of income for Liberia in the years to Washington D.C. Mayflower Renaissance Hotel
come. We are pleased to note that as of March
right time for Liberia.
2010, committed private sector investment in
Moreover, we applaud the initiatives of the
agriculture in Liberia totaled US$1.1 billion. This
Obama Administration presented here today by
includes US$847 million investment for the culti-
Dr. Rajiv Shah, the "Global Hunger and Food Se-
vation of rubber and oil palm by the Malaysian
curity Initiative" and the "Feed the Future Initia-
firm Sime Darby Borland. Investments from the
tive." What is most appealing from the Liberian
large plantation sector, which include out-grower
perspective about these U.S. initiatives is that
schemes will result in thousands of jobs and ex-
they encourage the participation of key groups,
ports, but it will take time to show results.
including farmers, civil society organizations, es-
We believe that once the private sector in-
pecially women, and they also promote strong
vestments in palm oil, rubber, rice and logging
regulatory policies, governance and accountabil-
come fully “on line,” our Government will be able
ity.
to receive more resources from the exportation of
We see this new initiative as a compliment to
products from these investments. This will enable
the Millennium Challenge Corporation, which re-
the Government to invest more in agriculture, al-
cently qualified Liberia as a threshold nation in
lowing us to move toward the Maputo Declaration
that it supports home-grown strategies and re-
promise of a minimum of 10 percent budget allo-
wards governments that invest in their own peo-
cation to the sector.
ple and govern responsibly.
We recognize that increased budgetary sup-
Liberia is pleased to have been selected as
port alone will not be sufficient to achieve and
one of 20 target countries and hope and will
sustain the required transformation of Liberia's
strive to achieve status as an investment plan
agriculture sector. Therefore, we continue to
country.
work with partners especially the United States
In closing, permit me to commend the excel-
to help Liberia to "kick start" the process of stabi-
lent work of your in-county representatives – the
lizing the country and the agriculture sector
U.S. Embassy and USAID – who support our goals
through the "Food for the Future" program,
in the development of Liberia's agriculture and
launched recently by USAID.
rural sector in promoting sustainable peace.
Of critical importance is investment in infra-
We strongly believe that with our commit-
structure, most critical, farm to market roads, in-
ment and hard work, together with your continu-
vestments in transportation, particularly the port.
ous support, we can indeed bring stability and
USAID/Liberia's Food and Enterprise Develop-
we can bring prosperity to the Liberian people, to
ment Project (FED) is a vehicle to support Libe-
a nation once characterized as a failed state. We
ria's agriculture development agenda focusing on
can become a post conflict success story building
improving rural infrastructure, primarily rural
upon our agriculture activities.
farm to market roads, and the MOA's capacity to
promote the dissemination and adoption of im-
I thank you.
proved agricultural technologies and prac-
tices. This is exactly the right program and the
126 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency

President Sirleaf Says Liberia Can Achieve

Self-Sufficiency in 10 Years

Interview

President Ellen Johnson Sirleaf is visiting

Washington this week for talks with Con-
gressional leaders and a White House meet-
ing on Thursday with President Barack
Obama and Secretary of State Hillary Clin-
ton. In an interview with All-Africa, she dis-
cussed her record and her priorities. Ex-
cerpts:

Development and poverty alleviation

have been the centerpiece of your
agenda - and the topic on ongoing inter-
national debate. The United Nations is
holding a summit on the Millennium De-
velopment Goals in September. A leaked U.S.
government study says developing countries
must have more ownership of development aid.
How do you think development can best be
achieved?
The best way to make development work is to
ensure that the priorities are established by the
people themselves. This is why our poverty re-
duction strategy came out of a rigorous process
of consultation and participation by people
across the country. They identified what became
our priority goals, and we've been moving in that
direction.
We've gone a long way in achieving the goals
established under four pillars - peace and secu-
rity, economic revitalization, governance and the
rule of law, infrastructure and basic services. Ba-
sically, the country is at peace, although it re-
mains fragile because we still haven't met all the
challenges.
Liberia’s President Ellen Johnson-Sirleaf at Washington
D.C.’s Georgetown University, on May 22nd, where she was
the keynote speaker at the commencement exercises of the
Edmund A. Walsh College of Foreign Service
debt overhang. We're coming to closure on that
in June.
Lots of roads, water and lights have been re-
stored in the capital city.
Schools, hospitals and clinics have been built all
over the country. We have a free society - some-
times we think too free! The media, free speech,
free association, freedom of religion - those are
all prospering.
Yet, no matter what we have accomplished, we
still have a long way to go. Two basic challenges
remain. One is employment for the thousands
and thousands of young people who don't have
skills and don't have the means whereby they
can become productive.

We are beginning to see our economy grow
again. We have had an average annual seven per-
cent growth rate over the last four years, despite
the global economic crisis in 2009. We've virtu-
ally done away with our U.S.$4.9 billion external
In the governance area, we continue to fight the
systemic corruption that's been part of the value
system over two-three decades. We're trying to
strengthen the pillars of integrity. We're exposing
corruption, and we're taking action against it.

127 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency Liberia Can Achieve Self-Sufficiency in 10 Years
Did your efforts to involve people
across the country in the poverty
reduction strategy result in a buy-in
from the Liberian people?
A definite buy-in. For the first time,
people from the villages could say
they sat in meetings and were asked
"what do you think you want your
government to do?" Three priorities
came out quite clearly - roads, educa-
tion and health.
And that influenced your strategy?
Absolutely. We were thinking education would be
number one. But they convinced us that roads was
number one because, as they said, they couldn't
take their produce to market, they couldn't take
their children to schools or the health centers if
there was no mobility, if there was no way to get
there. So our strategy has been to respond to
what we know the people want.
So what have you been able to do about roads?
Liberia has heavy rains for a good part of six
months every year, so the capital cost of building
roads is very high. And you can only work during
the dry season, so that makes it even higher. But
the three primary roads that lead into the rural
areas are now being made all-weather roads, and
we have plans to have them paved.
In the capital city, the main arteries are being
repaved right now.
Neighborhood roads are being constructed to
open new roads for vehicular traffic. Farm-to-
market roads are being built. It has taken a while
to mobilize the resources to do this, but finally
we're there. I am very pleased about our road de-
velopment.
128
Friends of Liberia Portland Fundraiser
In education, one of your priorities has been
opening opportunities for girls. What have you
been able to accomplish in this area?
What we did was to enforce compulsory pri-
mary education and made the schools free. As a
result, we've had 40 percent increase enroll-
ment in all the public schools, and most of them
have been girls. The girls were not going to
school. They were in the market and on the
farms. Our biggest problem as pertains to girls is
retention - keeping them in schools beyond pri-
mary level. We have a program to provide schol-
arships for young girls, and this has been helpful
as we work on this problem.
How can you create the jobs that are needed to
employ the youth?
The private sector is the key to the creation of
jobs, the ones that will absorb the young popula-
tion. As we open up the economy, we expect job
opportunities will open. In the meanwhile, we are
trying to give them a skill through vocational
training. We are introducing literacy programs,
sometimes in the marketplace, so that the
women are able to move up to higher levels. It is
still a big challenge, because investment in the
private sector - though it is taking place - takes
some time.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency Liberia Can Achieve Self-Sufficiency in 10 Years
To what do you attribute the success you
have had attracting investment, despite the
country's infrastructural insufficiencies and
the global recession?
My own experience, having worked in the pri-
vate sector for years, and also the public sector
in Liberia and the international system, has en-
abled me to talk with investors. I think they
have confidence in my integrity, my ability, my
commitment to do this. We have a very sound
development agenda. We've been able to mobi-
lize quite a few talented and committed people
who have been put in charge of this. We're very
focused in achieving the goals set forth in our
Poverty Reduction Strategy, and that has in-
stilled confidence in Liberia's future. The fact
that we have natural resources is also an asset,
as is our openness to a market economy.
The biggest handicap has been a lack of capac-
ity. Many of us are stretched thin trying to pro-
mote this. Also the lack of infrastructure.
We still don't have sufficient power and roads.
Our port systems need to be repaired and
made modern. However, the confidence in
Liberia's future and the confidence in the cur-
rent leadership have been the driving force
behind our ability to attract investment, de-
spite the restraints.
You've also attracted significant assistance
from international donors, including the
United States. How important is aid for Libe-
ria?
Without international assistance we would not
have been able to restore water and build the
roads and bring lights into our capital city for
the first time in 14 years. We would not have
been able to build schools and clinics on the $80
million budget we inherited. That's the budget
for a high school perhaps in the United States!
We're now up to $350 million, but that's small
for the massive needs of a country that was vir-
tually broken.
129
Children at Liberia’s Johnny Ford Orphanage
Foreign assistance has played a very major role
in these early years, and our partners have
made tremendous contributions to the pro-
gress we've been able to achieve. We know
that will not last forever, and we must prepare
ourselves to be able to takeover fully the re-
sponsibility for our development.
Based upon what we have done and the path
we are now on, Liberia can move from de-
pendency to self-sufficiency in 10 years. We
should not have to ask for international assis-
tance. We should be able, on the basis of our
own natural resources, to finance our own
development effort. We should see the total
transformation of Liberia in 10 years, and all
those who have been with us will be able to
say, truly, that this is a post-conflict success
story of which we can all be proud.
The latest U.S. State Department Human
Rights Report says corruption remains
"systemic throughout the government" and
refers to a "culture of impunity" in the coun-
try. What will it take for your 'zero tolerance'
policy to have its intended effect?
This government inherited the value system
which could be characterized as one of de-
pendency and dishonesty. It was a means of
survival for many of the people who did not
have jobs, were conscripted into warring fac-
tions, who had no skills and had never been to
school. And they were placed into the civil ser-
vice. That's what we inherited.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency Liberia Can Achieve Self-Sufficiency in 10 Years
We know it's systemic. It's not
just government. It's societal.
It's been a means of survival
for the past several decades.
We have to attack it on several
fronts. First, compensation - to
reduce people's vulnerabilities.
Secondly, systems - to make
institutions function again.
That's why we did so much to
reorganize and to recruit good
people for the General Audit-
ing Commission, and the Anti-Corruption Com-
mission. We are a member of the Extractive In-
dustry Transparency Initiative and were one of
the first African countries to get results under
that program.
The weakest link in our fight against corruption is
our judicial system, which is part of the same so-
cietal problem. We've got to be able to punish
people, and to punish people we've got to go to
the courts. We've got to win cases in the courts. I
have suspended people. I have fired people. But I
cannot jail anybody unless they are sentenced by
the court. And our court system remains weak
and vulnerable.
We're trying to address that. We've brought new
people in the ministry of justice. We're working
with the Supreme Court to make sure they
change the jury system. We're trying to get bet-
ter judges. Judges are protected, quite rightly. I
can't fire them. So we are trying to get them bet-
ter training, better pay, better facilities to pro-
vide an incentive to do better.
There's a lot of talk about corruption. That's ex-
actly what we want, because we want to expose
it. The only way to solve it is to take it from under
the carpet and deal with it. After exposure comes
solution, and that solution is to begin to punish
people in the courts.
We are taking a lot of heat. That is unavoidable
when you are trying to change the very culture of
130
Liberian fisherman
a certain way of life. But I'm convinced we're
moving in the right direction and that, in a few
years, we'll solve this problem.
Many Liberians say their paramount concern
is the absence of national identity and cohe-
sion. In our recent interview with President
[Jakaya] Kikwete [of Tanzania], he talked
about reinstituting national service, which
helped forge cohesion by sending Tanzanians
to regions different from their own. What can
be done to begin to overcome the deep divi-
sions that have characterized Liberia's history?
As you rightly said, the lack of a national iden-
tity has been longstanding in our national ex-
perience. We see the effects of the war,
which touched everybody from every group,
as perhaps the means whereby we can find a
common cause. If there is one thing that Libe-
rians from all walks of life now embrace, it is
peace. We want never to go back to war, be-
cause we know how devastating war has
been.
If promoting sustainable peace can be our uni-
fying force, then we have an opportunity to
talk about what brings us together as one peo-
ple with one destiny. We're still searching.
We're looking for what will capture all Liberi-
ans, that will bring out that feeling of a renais-
sance that we are looking for - rebirth, new life.
I hope we can find it.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency Liberia Can Achieve Self-Sufficiency in 10 Years
Would you describe the role of the Truth
and Reconciliation Commission in dealing
with the recent past and charting a way
forward?
The Truth and Reconciliation Commission
did a good job. They researched Liberia's
historical problems, the root causes of our
conflicts, and they've come up with several
recommendations that will promote the
healing process. Some of those recommen-
dations have been challenged on constitutional
grounds. We think we need to have expert law-
yers look at the constitutionality and give us
advice. That's what we have done.
In cases where a judgment has been passed
which would lead to the establishment of
courts, as a means of insuring justice, one
agrees with the principal of that. But timing and
sequencing are also important in a country that
is as fragile as ours, to make sure that whatever
we do, we do in such a way that it doesn't lead
us back to conflict.
We are moving on other recommendations -
ones that have to do with the healing process,
with restorative justice. the Palava Hut con-
cept [a traditional method for resolving dis-
putes], [and] reparations in places where com-
munities were victimized.
We are working with a Geneva-based organi-
zation, Centre for Humanitarian Dialogue,
who's been holding meetings with representa-
tives of our civil society organizations, to read
the report [and] come up with a road map on
its implementation. We're trying to organize a
group in Monrovia to do the same thing.
Anyone who says that the report is being
trashed or is being thrown away is absolutely
wrong. We want to implement in a timely and
appropriate way and ensure that whatever we
do, Liberia's peace must be maintained to en-
able us to carry out the development agenda
that is unifying and healing the nation.
131
Liberian girls in the Sande Bush (traditional adult initiation
training for adolescent females)
You've expressed frustrations about aspects of
media coverage. Do you think that media train-
ing can help address this?
The training of journalists to make sure they are
responsible as they exercise their freedoms,
which they should, is important. The tendency
toward sensationalism, because it sells the
newspaper in an environment where resources
are scarce and the reader public is limited - so
all the bad news stories get the attention - that's
fine, but in the long run doesn't help. We need
trained journalists who can conduct investiga-
tions, who can expose, but can expose on the
basis of truth, on the basis of their own proper
analysis of the situation - not on the basis of
rumors. And when international media pick up
the rumors that we all know in the country to be
untruths, it really hurts our country.
That's just not fair.
Are you concerned that next year's election
might reopen old wounds and prove divisive for
the nation?
Any election will have its tensions and divisive-
ness. Our responsibility, our challenge is to mini-
mize that. What we need to do - those of us who
are political leaders - is make sure we keep send-
ing the right message. Competition is a good
thing. The door should be open for competitive
politics. The process should be free and fair, and
we should make sure that the institutions manag-
ing the process have the capability to carry it out
-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Presidency Liberia Can Achieve Self-Sufficiency in 10 Years

in a peaceful manner. Let's all approach it in that

spirit.

The next election in Liberia will be a defining

event. If those elections come off free and fair
and the Liberian peoples' choices prevail and are
respected, then Liberia will be on the path to
consolidate its peace and to get its development
agenda on an irreversible path. Any good-willed
Liberian, any responsible politician must work for
the achievement of that goal, because that is
what will make Liberia the country that we can
be proud of.

At the moment, election preparations are being

stalled until the National Legislature passes a
"Threshold Bill" to determine the allocation of
representation, based on the national census.
When do you expect this to be resolved?

In any country, when you are dealing with popula-

tion shifts and allocation of legislative representa-
tion, there are always problems, because certain
areas lose seats and others gain. We are dealing
with that in our legislature - trying to establish a
threshold level that would minimize the loss of
seats for certain counties. That's causing a big
problem. We've got to overcome that. Once we
get past that - and we all know we are running out
of time - the election commission has the means
to start the campaigning. We should see this com-
ing to conclusion next week.
Why are you seeking a second term? Or perhaps
the question should be why you would subject
yourself to the rigors and challenges you have
faced since becoming president? And what do
you expect your opponents to say about you?
Atlantic Coast sunset, Cape Mount, Liberia
What drives me to run is that we have laid the
foundation, and we need a few more years to
ensure there is no reversal. We need continu-
ity so we can bring Liberia to the place where
it is on an irreversible path, where we have
restored the infrastructure, where we have
solved the problem of corruption by building
those institutions that are the pillars of integ-
rity, where our economy is booming and most
Liberians are getting an education, getting a
job. Then I will be able to walk away and say:
"The job is done. I've left the country better
than I found it." I look forward to that day.

When I read our papers and listen to the radio, I
sometimes ask myself - "do I really need this"! I
know they are going to be raising the same
charges - that we are not fighting corruption; you
said you would only run for one term, the Truth
and Reconciliation report. [The TRC recommended
that President Johnson Sirleaf be barred from pub-
lic office for being "associated with former warring
factions."]
132
I take my cue from what the Liberian people
want, because it's going to be their choice. I
know the Liberian people will make the right
decision. Whatever it is, accept it. I think they
know that I've brought them a long way.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Economy/ Foreign Investment
The Informer (Monrovia)
26 April 2010

China's Investment Reaches $9.9 Billion

T he Government of the People's Republic of
China has revealed that its investment in
Liberia has reached a total of US$9.9 billion dol-
lars.
The Vice Minister of Commerce of China,
Mr. FU Ziying, made the disclosure during the
signing ceremony of six agreements between
the Government of Liberia and China, which
took place at the Ministry of Foreign Affairs
over the weekend.
The agreements are intended to boost trade
between the two countries and peoples.
The six agreements are: Economic and Tech-
nical Cooperation between the Government of
the People's Republic of China and the Govern-
ment of Liberia; exchange of letter-zero tariff
treatment with import of 60% of commodities
originated from Liberia to China shall be totally
exempted; exchange of letters-on Technical Co-
operation Project with the Liberia Broadcasting
System.
Other agreement entered into include ex-
Liberia’s Foreign Minister Madam Olubanke King-Akerele
change of letters-for the provision of 10 million
RMB (Yuan) by the Chinese Government for addi- all we can to help the people of Liberia. T o
tional medical materials to the Tappita Hospital date, through the smooth cooperation be-
to support the operation of the hospital; ex- tween the people of Liberia and China, my
change of letter for the provision of RMB3 Mil- country has invested 9.9 billion dollars in your
lion medical equipment to the China-Liberia Ma- economy," Fu Ziying noted.
laria Prevention and Treatment Center by the Additionally, the stalled China-Union
Chinese Government and exchange of letter-for Bong Mines Project was also lunched. The
the provision of three (3) Million Yuan malaria project is expected to provide job and invest-
medicines to the Liberian Government by the ment opportunities in Liberia and boost the
Chinese Government. country's economy.
The Minister of Foreign Affairs, Olubanke The head of the 42 member delegation
King-Akerele signed for the Government of Li- comprised of government officials and busi-
beria while the Vice Minister of Commerce of ness executives as well as journalists said the
China, Mr. Fu Ziying signed on behalf of his signing of the agreements symbolizes the long
country. standing bilateral relations between the two
Madam Akerele welcomed the delegation countries.
and said their visit to Liberia shows that China Mr. Fiying said it is hoped that upon the
has lots of interests in Liberia. She added that completion of the projects undertaken by his
the agreements will promote Liberia's develop- government, Liberians will make good use of
ment programs and build the country's econ- the facilities because the Chinese government
omy. attaches great importance to the development
The Vice Minister of Commerce of China of Liberia.
thanked the Liberian Government and people for
the warm welcome received, adding, "We will do
133 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Liberia/ Economy/ Foreign Investment
The Informer (Monrovia)
26 April 2010
China's Investment Reaches U.S $9.9 Billion

Unveiled China Union Investment Liberia Bong Mine Project: President Sirleaf, Speaker Tyler and Chinese Vice
Minister of Commerce, Mr. Fu take a close look (photo: Foreign Ministry)

The University of Liberia Fendell new

campus and the Tappita Hospital in Nimba
County are among projects he said his govern-
ment has undertaken in Liberia. He also
pledged his government’s support to health
care, agriculture, tourism and noted that China
is committed to working with Liberia in its de-
velopment drive.
Following the unveiling of the nameplate
of the China Union Investment (Liberia) Bong
Mines Co. Ltd, President Ellen Johnson Sirleaf
praised all those who have worked in ensuring
that the Bong Mines project becomes a reality.
She also praised the effort of Chinese Presi- UN envoy Ms Margrthe Løj inspecting the Chinese peacekeep-
dent Hu Jintao. ing contingent in Liberia (below) Chinese teacher Li Peng
President Sirleaf called on all partners and teaches a Mandarin class in Liberia
the business community to support the invest-
ment and help transform the country. She also
wants Liberian businesses to take advantage of
the project and begin to identify areas of pos-
sible investment.
The 2.5 billion dollar China Union Bong
Mines Project is seen as the biggest project in
Liberia.

Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010 134

 Africa/Mali/Millennium Development Goals

May 4, 2010

Senior UN Official Lauds Mali’s Development Initiatives

The head of the United Nations Development
Programme (UNDP) today concluded a visit to
the West African nation of Mali, lauding the ef-
forts the country was making as its strives to al-
leviate poverty and provide basic social services
to the people.
Helen Clark said Mali was committed to de-
mocratic governance and was making progress
towards achieving the Millennium Development
Goals (MDGs), a blueprint agreed to by all the
world's countries aiming to reduce extreme pov-
erty and other problems by half by 2015.
Mali had also managed to reduce national
HIV/AIDS prevalence from 1.7 per cent in 2001
to 1.3 per cent in 2006, and has dramatically ex-
panded universal access to treatments and other
services intended to halt the spread of the dis-
ease.
Miss Clark, the Administrator of UNDP, vis-
ited the historic mosques in the legendary city of
Timbuktu and toured the library that houses its
mediaeval manuscripts.
On the outskirts of Bamako, the capital,
Miss Clark visited an all-women mango coopera-
tive striving to give female farmers the right skills
to grow and treat their produce for export. Each
of the farmers in this UNDP-supported project,
aimed at poverty alleviation, handled about 35
tons of mangoes for the export market. The pro-
ject has enabled Mali's mango exports to rise
sharply, from 2,915 tons in 2005 to 12,676 tons In addition to agriculture textiles have long a major product of
in 2008. Mali’s town economies. (Top) Mali textile designer showing off a
"These types of aid for trade initiatives help tie-dye fabric she made (below) Bamako tailor making women’s
empower women, boost family income, and even attire. Mali’s indigenous textiles and fashions are carried by
help ensure their children got to school. Everyone traders to other parts of Africa and overseas. Families and com-
gains," she said. "Mali truly has the opportunity to munities typically work in this enterprise, from the dying of the
become the breadbasket for the region," she fabric and sewing of the garment to the marketing.
added.
Miss Clark praised Mali's respect of democ- and participation in decision-making" are key
ratic principles in discussions with President steps towards achieving women's empower-
Amadou Toumani Touré, Prime Minister Modibo ment, she said.
Sidibé, Foreign Minister Moctar Ouane and other UNDP and the Global Environment Facility
senior Government officials. plan to develop a $2.3 million project in Mali to
She discussed a range of additional develop- bolster the resilience of the country's agriculture
ment issues with the President, including the key in the face of climate change.
role of agriculture for Mali, the importance of During her mission to Africa Miss Clark was
tackling climate change, and the importance of scheduled to travel from Mali to Burkina Faso,
improving the status of women. Tanzania and finally South Africa.
"Economic empowerment [of women], ac-
cess to legal rights, including inheritance rights
135 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Nigeria/Economy Nigeria Stock Exchange

Nigeria Stock Exchange

Market Data as of June 30,2010

All Shares Index Naira Capitalization $U.S. Capitalization

25,384.14 N6,174,417,873,229.25 $41,832,099,412.12

136 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/Nigeria/Economy/Downstream Petroleum
Nigeria, China Sign $23 Billion
Oil Refinery MOU
Nigeria Union of Journalists Abuja
N igeria National Petroleum Corporation
(NNPC) and China State Construction Engi-
neering Corporation Ltd. on May 15th signed a
Protest Over Murdered Journalists
$23 billion Memorandum of Understanding for
construction of three petroleum refineries and a
fuel complex, though the exact locations of the
facilities has not yet been announced.
Noting that Nigeria currently spends about
$10 billion annually importing refined petroleum
products, Shehu Laden, NNPC’s managing direc-
tor at the time of the signing, said, "Over the next
decade, NNPC desires to eliminate completely
the current flood of imported petroleum prod-
ucts into Nigeria's domestic consumption."
Laden said signing the MOU deepened the
technical and commercial relationship between
Nigeria and China.
President Jonathan dismisses
Shehu Laden as NNPC boss–
orders audit
O n May 17, President Goodluck Jonathan
dismissed Nigeria National Petroleum
Corporation managing director Shehu Laden
and directed Finance Minister Olusegun Aganga
to engage a world-class accounting firm to audit
the parastatal’s accounts.
Shehu Ladan was appointed Nigerian Na-
tional Petroleum Corporation (NNPC) managing
director on April 6, 2010, replacing Mohammed
Sanusi Barkindo, who was in office for just over
a year. Laden who served as NNPC boss for only
41 days was replaced by Austin Oniwon, the
firm’s executive director in charge of refineries
and petrochemicals, presidential spokesman
Ima Niboro said in an official statement.
Laden had retired from NNPC in April 2009
as Group Executive Director, Commercial and
Investments. The Presidency statement did not
give any reason for Laden’s removal.
The new NNCP boss, 59 year old Austin
Oniwon, an engineer who hails from Okene,
Kogi State, began his career with the company
in 1977 and rose through the ranks, serving
from 2003 to 2009 as managing director of
Eleme Petrochemicals Company Limited.
137
Information Media
Members of the Nigeria Union of Journalists
(NUJ) Abuja Council Saturday carried placards to
protest the killings of journalists and insistent
threats to their lives.
The journalists, who joined other workers to
mark the May Day celebrations at Eagle Square
Abuja, held placards that read 'Stop the killings of
journalist', 'Journalists need to be protected' and
'FOI bill is for every one'.
The chairman stated that a council member,
Chuks Okocha of This Day, sent him a text he re-
ceived that read thus: "Gbenga Aruleba (AIT),
Yusuf Ali (The Nation), Olusola Fabiyi (PUNCH),
Chuks Okocha (This Day). U all have no hiding
place. U must be happy now dat Prof. Maurice
Iwu has been sacked due to ur bad stories and
reports. We will deal wit u soon. Remember Dele
Giwa, Bayo Ohu and Edo Ubagwu? Gud luck".
The council chairman expressed worry over
the development and called on the FCT police
boss to provide 24-hour security for the affected
journalists and others as well as leave nothing to
chance in bringing to book all those that are re-
sponsible for the senseless killing of journalists in
the country.
"By this protest letter, we are handing over
these journalists to your protective custody and
hope that no harm will come to either of them or
members of their families," the petition read.
City News further learnt that several at-
tempts to locate the GSM number 08063623794,
where the threat came from yielded no result as
the service provider kept saying the number was
out of service.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Nigeria/Entertainment
World Bank to Create 100,000 Jobs
from Nigerian Entertainment
Daniel Gumm
27 May 2010
For three days, early this month - Tuesday, May
4, Thursday, May 6, and Monday, May 10 - the
Nigerian Export Promotion Council (NEPC), World
Bank, National Film & Video Censors Board
(NFVCB), Nigerian Film Corporation (NFC), and
Nigerian Copyright Commission (NCC) in a col-
laboration came together for the purpose of ex-
porting Nigerian entertainment to global audi-
ence, and Vanguard, which was part of the vari-
ous workshops spoke to a World Bank Finance
and Private Sector specialist, Chioma Nwagboso.
Excerpts:
On what brings about the World Bank's interven-
tion in "Harnessing the Nigerian Entertainment
Industry for Formal Export," at this time, Chioma
Nwagboso said: "The World Bank is interested in
supporting the Nigerian Entertainment industry
because of its huge potential in terms of job
creation and value creation."
According to her, the industry "started with-
out government aid, intervention or assistance.
Instead, talented individuals with a passion and
drive grew it from scratch and today it is worth
about $250 million, employs at least 500,000 Ni-
gerians directly and about the same indirectly
and has demand worldwide.
According to a new United Nations Educa-
tional, Scientific and Cultural Organisation
(UNESCO) report released in May 2009, the Nige-
rian film industry has overtaken Hollywood and
closed the gap on India to be the global leader in
the number of movies produced each year.
It is the third largest movie industry in the
world by value after Hollywood and Bollywood
(India's film industry). Most of those employed in
the industry are graduates or school leavers who
are the main target group for our support within
this particular project.
"In terms of exports, these movies are pur-
chased and watched across the world in other
138
African countries, Europe, America and the Carib-
bean and almost all the exports are pirated cop-
ies. There is no recognized or utilized legal chan-
nel for these movies to be exported which means
there is no return to the owners and creators
behind the movies and no revenue to the Nigeria
government. That's why we are excited about
collaborating with NEPC, NCC and NFVCB among
other stakeholders to ensure we make this a
fruitful export for the country and its citizens."
On how did the World bank arrive at the
sum of $20 million intervention fund, and in
what sectors of the entertainment industry
would the fund be utilized, she explained that
the $20 million is just a starting figure, "We hope
to achieve some quick wins and then scale it up
to a larger amount during implementation."
On GEMS, and what is the focus of the pro-
ject? "GEMS stands for Growth and Employment
in States Project. It is a Federal Government Pro-
ject that will support key industry clusters includ-
ing the entertainment industry. The World Bank
and DFID are providing financial support to the
project which seeks to reduce poverty in Nigeria.
The project aims to create thousands of new jobs
in selected states and diversify the economy
thereby ending our dependence on oil.
"GEMS is focusing on six industries that we
believe have the ability to contribute towards the
growth of the Nigerian economy while providing
employment to the millions of unemployed youths
out there. The six industries are Construction,
Meat ad Leather, Wholesale and Retail, ICT, Hospi-
tality and Entertainment."
On what the GEMS project is supposed to
achieve, and the likely in-built mechanism to en-
sure its success, the World Bank expert said the
programme would deliver three outputs, viz:
• An improved business environment that re-
duces the cost and risk of doing business, pro
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Nigeria/Entertainment WB to Create 100,000 Jobs from Nigerian Entertainment

viding greater incentive to invest;

• Increased competitiveness of strategic
clusters in selected non-oil industries, im-
proving the return to investment in terms
of growth and jobs;
• Effective monitoring and evaluation to
provide valuable lessons which, through
communication and peer learning, help to
leverage programme impacts.
On how prepared is the World Bank to tackle
the issue of piracy in the Nigerian entertain-
ment industry, Nwagboso said "piracy is the
scourge of the Nigerian entertainment indus-
try. On set at a Nollywood production
Pirates have hijacked and robbed the in-
our foreign exchange revenue from oil. In each
dustry of all of its professionals. With little in-
case this will be achieved by working on some
put they often reap many times more than the
of the market failures, organizing the private
genuine investors in the industry. The pirate is
sector players and reviewing and making
not interested in the creativity, time, work and
changes to inappropriate regulatory or legal
effort; he waits for the completed work, gets a
frameworks and policies that govern each sec-
copy, mass dubs it and rushes to the market
tor."
before the authorized marketer or distributor
And on how do the World Bank hopes to
to sell it at a price often less than the produc-
reduce the cost of doing business in Nigeria,
tion cost price."
she said the "World Bank has a unit that looks
We have held meetings with the Nigerian
at the business environment and publishes a
Copyright Commission and the National Film
league table of all the countries in the world,
and Video Censors Board to understand what
each year entitled: "Doing Business." In Nige-
their challenges and constraints are and how
ria, this analysis is undertaken within the In-
we can be of assistance. We are particularly
vestment Climate Project which supports state
interested in the anti-piracy product known as
governments in improving their business envi-
source identification code been heralded by
ronments.
the NCC and the NFVCB's Digital Nollywood
Together with DFID we have provided
Project which is aimed at creating a digital dis-
grant funding and technical expertise to states
tribution platform for Nigerian films through
interested in undertaking reform pilots to im-
the connected video clubs and retail outlets
prove their business climates."
that would be signed up to retail and rent digi-
These efforts will be scaled under the pro-
tally secured content through proprietary digi-
posed GEMS project, where we will focus in
tal media computers.
more detail on land and tax reforms and reduc-
We also collaborated with the Nigerian
ing the number of days it takes to get permits to
Export Promotion Council on its conference on
start a business. The World Bank strongly be-
"Harnessing the Nigerian Film Industry through
lieves that an improved business environment
formal non-oil export." We believe that this
reduces the costs of doing business and en-
will create national awareness in the huge po-
hances opportunities for both domestic and
tential Nigerian films has in contributing to-
foreign investors. This is needed to create jobs
wards the generation of foreign exchange to
and provide opportunities for all but especially
the country."
for young Nigerians.
On how the World Bank will create jobs in
the non-oil sector of the economy, Nwagboso
noted that the overall aim of "this project is to
create over 100,000 new jobs in these growing
industries. We intend to support and to reduce
139 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Nigeria/ Political Economy
Daily Independent, Lagos
Editorial, June 30,
Calling Shell's $40 Billion Bluff
Royal Dutch Shell, the dominant multinational oil
corporation operating in Nigeria, reportedly warned
the Federal Government last Thursday that $40 bil-
lion of planned investments in the country would be
put off if the National Assembly passes the Petro-
leum Industry Bill (PIB). The company's spokesman
disclosed that the investments were in offshore oil
sites the company was planning to explore in the
future.
As proof of its seriousness, Shell also an-
nounced that it was putting the projects on hold
pending the final decision on the PIB, implying that
it would only proceed full steam when the National
Assembly kills the bill. To ensure that the Federal
Government was left in no doubt about the serious-
ness of its intention, Shell also hinted that it could
no longer depend on Nigeria as a profit-maker, de-
spite being the dominant player in the field.
We condemn this threat by Shell - the latest in
its well-orchestrated vocal campaign against the
PIB. While we concur with Shell's position that the
primary objective of being in business is to earn a
profit stream commensurate with attendant risks,
we are fully persuaded that the PIB does not in any
way hamper the capacity of oil industry operators
to realize normal profits from their activities. Shell
is well within its rights to mull over whether or not
to continue making further investments in oil explo-
ration, from a strictly business perspective. But one
thing is clear: this nation has reached a stage where
its economic lifeline can no longer be held hostage
by the antics of one or more whining players in the
oil sector.
In a way, Shell's threat did not surprise us. Truth
be told, no party enjoying lopsided advantages in a
trading partnership likes to easily give up the bene-
fits that have been built into the process over time. It
is a fact that African nations have traditionally been
providers of primary products for over 200 years for
the booming industries of Europe and America.
Worse still, the same raw materials are recycled to
Africa, culminating in a double whammy: the prices
they earn on their raw materials are not competitive
because they are determined by the industrialized
nations; then they pay through the nose for the fin-
ished imports!
This pattern has been in vogue since oil was
discovered at Oloibiri more than 50 years ago by
Shell. Billions of barrels of crude oil have been
140
exported - and continue to be exported - while bil-
lions of cubic metres of natural gas have been un-
productively flared - and continue to be flared - in
the absence of an industrial complex that would
have enabled the nation to maximize the synergis-
tic potentials of a plethora of linkages.
We aver that the PIB is a long overdue bold
attempt to holistically overhaul the petroleum in-
dustry in order not only to correct the skewed dis-
tribution of oil revenues and profits that favour the
multinational oil companies (MOCs), but also to
give oil-producing areas a greater stake in the in-
dustry.
We call on the National Assembly to speedily
pass the PIB without much ado. The legislators
should be clearly told that the nation is watching.
There have been strong rumours that some MOCs
are sponsoring key legislative committee members
to conferences and workshops in places like Ghana.
If these reports are factual, we ask the legislators
to put the nation's overall interests above every
other consideration, by abiding by the patriotic
oath of office they swore to uphold, and refusing to
be used to shortchange the nation and its citizens.
Given the dearth of patriotic leadership and
the ubiquity of graft in all facets of national life, it is
irrational to expect that the mere passage of the
PIB will turn things around overnight. But just like
Rome was not built in a day, its passage would
guarantee the evolution of a workable framework
for changing the form and content of the oil sector
in the years ahead. Happily, the historic exposures
of serving and retired public officials named in
bribe-for-contracts scams involving Halliburton and
Siemens, among others, has shown that there is no
longer any hiding place for corrupt government
functionaries. No amount of short-term illicit gains
is worth the shame and disgrace attendant on an
exposure - long after the bribes have been col-
lected and spent.
The Jonathan administration and the National
Assembly should call the bluff of multinational
firms like Shell, and send a clear message to others
waiting in the wings, that this nation will not suc-
cumb to cheap blackmail from any quarter.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Nigeria/Executive Arm

Jonathan to new cabinet: “We must hit the ground running”

N igeria’s Acting President, in inaugurating

his new cabinet on April 6th was emphatic
about focus on improving the quality of Nigeri-
the Minister of Defence, and will be assisted by
the son of late vice head of state Shehu Musa
Yar'Adua, Alhaji Murtala Shehu Yar'Adua.
ans’ lives in the coming months, using blue prints
already prepared and in accordance with the pol-
icy objectives laid out by the Yar’adua admini-
stration when it came to office in 2007. Assert-
ing his appreciation of the vital importance of
improving power supply throughout Nigeria, Act-
ing President Jonathan himself took the Ministry
of Power portfolio and said he would work in
collaboration with the Prof. Bartholomew Nnaji
chaired Independent Power Producers Associa-
tion. Prof. Nnaji, apart from being a world lead-
ing expert in Computer Aided Design (CAD) and
Robot Technology is also a world renowned
power supply consultant.
The Acting President stressed, "Our efforts
in governance must be manifested in the revamp
of decaying infrastructure including steady
power supply and good roads; provision of sound
and quality education; the good health of our
people; provision of jobs for our unemployed
youths, security of life and property, commit-
ment to free and fair elections and the very strict
adherence to the rule of law".
Acting President Jonathan has reduced the
load on some ministries by splitting them. Water
Resources is now independent from Agriculture.
The former Ministry of Works, Lands, Housing &
Urban Development has been split into two.
Following Senate approval of his cabinet
candidates, Acting President Jonathan allocated
Minister and Minister of State (deputy ministers)
portfolios. The ministers were sworn in on April
6th. Acting President Jonathan said at the occa-
sion: "While we continue to pray for the speedy
recovery of the President, permit me to empha-
size the policy continuum of governance and to
insist on the imperative of this team to roll up its
sleeves, and to redouble effort so as to meet the
expectations of our people who are yearning for
good governance".
Finance Minister, former Goldman Sachs
United Kingdom Managing Director Mr. Olusegun Information & Communications Minister Prof. Dora Akunyili
Olutoyin Aganga shall also chair the National Eco- (top) and National Planning Commission Minister Dr. Sham-
nomic Team. sudeen Usman (bottom) retained their posts
The outgoing Attorney-General of the Fed-
eration, Chief Adetokunbo Kayode, SAN, is now

141 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/Nigeria/Executive Arm
Ministry
Agriculture & Water Resources
Aviation
Commerce & Industry
Culture & Tourism
Defense
Education
Environment
Federal Capital Territory
Finance
Foreign Affairs
Health
Information & Communications
Interior
Justice/Attorney General
Labor & Productivity
Lands & Urban Development
Mines & Steel Development
National Planning Commission
National Sports Commission
Niger Delta Affairs
Petroleum Resources
Police Affairs
Power
Science & Technology
Special Duties
Transport
Women Affairs
Works
Youth Development
“We must hit the ground running”
Minister State Minister
Prof. Sheikh Ahmed Abdullah Mr. Awodele Najeem Adewale
Mrs. Fidelia Njeze
Sen. Jibril Martins Kuye Mrs. Josephine Tapgun
Abubakar Sadiq A. Mohammed
Chief Adetokunbo Kayode, SAN Murtala Shehu Yar'Adua
Prof. (Mrs) Ruqayyatu A. Rufa'i
Mr. John Ogar Odey
Senator Bala Muhammed
Mr. Olusegun Olutoyin Aganga Mr. Aderemi W. Babalola
Mr. Henry Odein Ajumogobia, SAN Dr. Aliyu Idi Hong
Prof. C.O. Onyebuchi Chukwu Alhaji Suleiman Bello
Prof. Dora Akunyili Mr. Labaran Maku
Capt. Emmanuel Iheanacho Mr. Humphrey Enemakwu Abah
Mohammed Bello Adoke, SAN
Chukwuemeka Ngozichineke Wogu
Hon. Nduese Essien
Arc. Musa Mohammed Sada
Dr. Shamsudeen Usman
Hon. Ibrahim Isa Bio
Elder Peter Godsday Orubebe Hon. Samuel Ode
Mrs. Dieziani Alison-Madueke
Alhaji Adamu Waziri
Ag. President Goodluck Jonathan Arc. Nuhu SomoWya
Prof. Muhammed K. Abubakar
Navy Capt. Earnest Olubolade (Rtd)
Yusuf Sulaiman
Mrs. Josephine Anenih
Sen. Sanusi M. Dagash Chris Ogiemwonyi
Sen. Akinlabi Olasunkanmi
142 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Nigeria/Information Media
Editorial
Killing of Journalists
Lagos — THE recent gruesome murder of three
Nigerian journalists, in two different attacks,
have, again, exposed the increasing state of inse-
curity in the country and suggests that journalists
may have truly become endangered species.
The chilling accounts of how the assassina-
tions were carried out, in Lagos and Jos, show the
general poor rating of human life in the country.
At about 6.30pm on Saturday, April 24,
2010, yet-to-be identified gunmen, invaded the
Shasha, Lagos residence of Mr. Edo Sule-
Ugbagwu, a judiciary correspondent of The Na-
tion newspaper and shot and killed him.
Mr. Okloho, Edu's younger brother, who wit-
nessed the killing, said the assassins first con-
fronted him and asked him to bring 'the money.'
But as he tried to explain that he had no money to
give, Edu, his elder brother came in to meet them
and the gunmen shot and killed him and walked
away without stealing anything from the house.
Edu's wife, who was waiting for her husband
opposite their house at the time of the incident,
revealed that she was going out with Edu, when
somebody called his mobile phone. Edu, report-
edly gave the caller direction to their house and
requested his wife to wait for him outside as he
wanted to receive some visitors. But as he got
back to his flat, Edu was shot and left to die in the
pool of his blood.
Two other journalists, Mr. Nathan S. Debak,
the Deputy Editor, Sunday and Mr. Gyang Bwede,
a reporter, both of who worked with The Light
Bearer newspaper, a publication of the Church of
Christ in Nigeria, COCIN, headquarters, Jos, were
also willfully killed in very chilling circumstances;
this time in Plateau state..
The two reporters were on an assignment in
the Nasarawa Gwom area of Jos North Local Gov-
ernment when they ran into rioters at Dutse Uku.
According to reports, after pleading with the
armed rioters and explaining that they were jour-
nalists on assignment, the killers stabbed them
mercilessly and abandoned them to die at the
scene of the incident.
Coming not long after several other journal-
ists in Nigeria, like AIT's Efenji Efenji, Guardian's
Bayo Ohu, and Thisday's duo of Abayomi Ogundeji
April 29, 2010
and Godwin Agbroko, were killed in questionable
circumstances and when their killers are yet to
be tracked down and prosecuted by the police,
Nigerians are worried whether the murderers of
these latest three will ever be found.
This worry is fuelled by the general concern
over the increasing cases of unresolved murders
in the country , including the parcel bombing of
ace journalist Dele Giwa and the brutal killings of
political leaders and elders like Bola Ige, Harry
Marshall and Alfred Rewane, to mention but a
few.
While condemning the killings, we insist that
the police must not treat this case like the other
unresolved high profile murders.
The image of the police in particular and of
Nigeria in general has continued to suffer great
blows as a result of the piling cases of unresolved
high and low profile murders and this must be
reversed through resolution of these puzzles.
The task of resolving murders or other
crimes should not, however, be left to the police
alone. The public has very important roles to
play, especially in the area of provision of infor-
mation. .
Many citizens in Nigeria, however, still shy
away from playing this vital role, primarily be-
cause of lack of confidence in the police. This has
affected negatively the effectiveness of investiga-
tors, who, thus, have little or no clues to work
with.
Sadly, the reality suggests that the country is
one big jungle where gunmen walk casually into
people's homes in broad daylight, shoot their vic-
tims point blank and stroll away, unchallenged,
unidentified and unidentifiable because nobody is
ready to volunteer information. This must stop.
We, therefore, call on the acting President
Goodluck Jonathan-led Federal Government to
ensure that the killers of these three journalists
are immediately caught and prosecuted. Also, if
Nigeria wants to be taken seriously, time has
come when the killers of similar murders must be
fished out to face the law.
143 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Nigeria/Presidency

Acting President Jonathan talks to CNN

While in Washington participating in the White
House hosted Nuclear Security Summit, Nigeria’s Act-
ing President Goodluck Jonathan chose to give this
first interview to none other than Cable News Net-
work International (CNN). The not to brief encounter
with CNN’s Christine Amanpour gave the world a
view of his relaxed, earnest style, his sense of realism
and determination to optimally perform and deliver
during the few months remaining before Nigerians
shift into campaign gear for next year’s general elec-
tions.

Amanpour:
Thank you very much, indeed, for joining us on this
programme.

Jonathan:
Thank you for finding time to discuss with me.

Amanpour:
Can I ask you first what an extraordinary name. How
did “Goodluck” come to be your name?
medical absence in Saudi Arabia?
Jonathan:
I don’t know. I have to ask my father. Jonathan:
No, I have not seen him.
Amanpour:
Have you had good luck? And do you think you’ll Amanpour:
need more than good luck to face down the incredi- Why not?
ble array of challenges that’s on your plate?
Jonathan:
Jonathan: The thinking of the family is that they should iso-
Well, the issue of good luck, I don’t really believe late him from most of the key actors in govern-
that the good luck is an issue. But at the present, I’ve ment. I have not seen him. The Senate president
been facing a lot of challenges. What some people has not seen him … and at every single government
will attribute to good luck could have been disastrous function, I have not seen him.
under some circumstances.
Amanpour
Amanpour: Doesn’t that cause anxiety amongst the people?
Well, let me ask you this. You are now acting presi-
dent, because the president, Mr. Yar’Adua, is unwell. Jonathan:
Yes, it does. It does. Obviously, it does, but we can-
Jonathan: not influence his family’s thinking.
Yes.
Amanpour
Amanpour:: Would you prefer that the family allowed you to
Have you seen him since he has come back from his visit him?

144 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/Nigeria/Presidency
Jonathan:
Yes, of course. But I will not want to force.
Amanpour:
What is his actual state of health? This also is a
mystery.
Jonathan:
I can’t say exactly. Only the medical doctors can.
Amanpour:
Have they told you?
Jonathan:
No, they haven’t.
Amanpour:
Have they made any public statements?
Jonathan:
Not quite. Not now. At the beginning, yes, but
(Someone’s name – unclear) left for Saudi Arabia, I
think in the second week or so, within the first
week, we were told that acute pericarditis. After
that, no other statement has been issued.
Amanpour:
So if he can receive religious leaders, why can he
not receive at least the acting president who’s act-
ing in his name?
Jonathan:
Well, religious leaders are there for (inaudible)
blessings. Probably that is why they asked the reli-
gious leaders to go and pray for him. We are a
very, very religious society.
Amanpour:
Do you believe that those around him are trying to
undermine you or your new cabinet?
Jonathan:
I wouldn’t say they are trying to undermine me,
because the laws of the land are very clear. And,
of course, that is why in the first place [the] consti-
tution is designed for two people to be in charge
of government at every time, one superior and
one inferior.
Amanpour:
Do you think he will ever come back to govern-
ment?
145
Acting President Jonathan talks to CNN
Jonathan:
I can’t say that. It’s difficult for any of us as mortals
to say so.
Amanpour:
So you are now acting president, and you have
essentially a year, because elections will be held
this time 2011.
Jonathan:
Yes.
Amanpour:
What is your most pressing issue?
Jonathan:
The most pressing issue for Nigerian now, in terms
of basic infrastructure, is power.
Amanpour:
You mean electricity?
Jonathan:
Electricity. Outside that, what is central to the
minds of Nigerians now is an election that their
votes will count, free and fair elections because
we’ve been accused of as a country that our elec-
tions somehow are questioned. And I promise Ni-
gerians that they will surely get that and I’ve done
some experiments.
The next thing that Nigerians worry about is issues
of corruption. You know we’ve been accused of as
people who are in a privileged position in govern-
ment amassing wealth at the expense of society.
So they expect us to take these two issues seri-
ously.
Amanpour:
So what can you do to take those issues seriously?
Obviously, the issue of good governance, of free
elections, free of corruption is central, and you
heard the United States has also said just now that
you must remove the head of the election com-
mission, Maurice Iwu. Will you do that?
Jonathan:
You see, the issue of the – the electoral body – in
fact, I even told the audience I addressed this
morning, the issue is whether the present elec-
toral body can conduct free and fair election or
not. And I told them that, yes, they can, because I
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Nigeria/Presidency Acting President Jonathan talks to CNN
have done it with the same people.

On [the] issue of the people at INEC, I told them

that, look, between now and ending of June,
most of the officials at the national level –
they’re called commissioners – their tenure will
end, and we’re going to review them on individ-
ual merit.

Within this period that I have been acting presi-

dent, I have conducted three elections. They
were conducted by INEC and it was free and
fair. Only on Saturday, we conducted local
council elections in the Federal Capital Territory
and all the information is that, apart from one
very Iwu, I’m not trying to argue for him. The
or two that had some few discrepancies, they
Iwu we are talking about has conducted free
have been very peaceful, very credible… So that
elections these past three elections that I’ve
is the issue. So the issue is beyond one person.
made reference to that are credible. So the is-
sue is beyond Iwu because we must set up an
Amanpour:
electoral system and our regulations and laws
But let me just ask you…
that will make sure that anybody who is ap-
pointed to that office should be able to conduct
Jonathan: acceptable elections. And that is my focus.
I’m not defending the chairman.
Amanpour:
Amanpour: OK. Will you run in 2011? Will you present your-
Do you think he will stay or will he be removed? self as a presidential candidate?

Jonathan:
All of them we’ll review. And any one of them
that we feel is not competent definitely…
Amanpour:
Do you feel that Mr. Iwu is competent?
Jonathan:
(Laughs) No, no, no, no. I know that this ques-
tion continues to come up.
What I’ve said is… the issue is beyond Mr. Iwu.
Amanpour:
I know. But I’m specifically talking about him,
because it’s come up in your meetings with U.S.
officials.
Jonathan:
For now, I don’t want to think about it, because
the circumstances of the day are quite worri-
some.
I came in as the vice president to run with Presi-
dent Yar’Adua; of course, getting close to [the]
period of election he took ill. And I had to take
over under somewhat controversial circum-
stances. Only last week, I reconsidered the cabi-
net. So let us see how Nigeria will move forward
first. I had a similar experience when I was gov-
ernor of my state.

Jonathan:
Yes, I agree that within the period that is
(inaudible) there are quite a number of contro-
versies. I agree. There are quite a number of
concerns. There are quite a number of contro-
versies. So I know what I’m telling you; that this
146 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Nigeria/Presidency
Acting President Gets Attention
Jim Lobe, April 13, 2010
U.S. President Barack Obama welcoming Nigeria’s Acting President Goodluck Jonathan
at Washington’s Nuclear Security Summit
Washington — Among the almost four dozen
heads of state who have gathered here for this
week's Nuclear Security Summit, Nigeria's acting
president, Goodluck Jonathan, has been receiving
a disproportionate share of high-level attention.
With a one-on-one with President Barack
Obama Sunday and a Monday morning standing-
room-only conference at the prestigious Council
on Foreign Relations (CFR), Jonathan, who took
over from long-ailing President Umaru Yar'Adua in
February and has less than a year to serve out his
term, is nonetheless considered a key figure by
Washington's influential.
As Africa's most populous nation, West Af-
rica's biggest economy by far, and the fifth most-
important supplier of foreign oil consumed in the
United States, Nigeria's stability has long been
considered a priority by U.S. policy-makers.
In Jonathan, they see an opportunity not only
to reverse the dangerous sense of drift that re-
sulted from Yar'Adua's nearly three-month ab-
sence from the country for medical treatment in
Saudi Arabia, but also to advance long-stalled re-
forms on a variety of fronts.
Those include setting the stage for credible
elections currently scheduled for January, waging
a more aggressive campaign against the per-
147
vasive corruption that has long afflicted Nigeria,
laying the foundation for reforms in the country's
ailing power sector, and, perhaps most urgently,
shoring up an eight-month ceasefire with militants
in part by jump-starting economic development in
the oil-rich but poverty-stricken Niger Delta.
Both in his meeting with Obama, which he
described as "warm and friendly", and at his CFR
presentation, the fedora-hatted Jonathan said he
did not see his job as simply that of a caretaker
until the January elections.
Indeed, his decision last month to replace
Yar'Adua's cabinet with his own appointees was
widely viewed by Nigeria specialists here as both
surprisingly bold and potentially very promising in
terms of pursuing a reform agenda. The decision
was also popular; his approval ratings shot up to
some 80 percent, according to public-opinion
polls.
"...(We) are committed to ensuring that the
remaining period of the administration is not a
transitional period but one which we hope will one
day be viewed as a watershed, a transition for Ni-
ger Delta and the rest of the country, and standing
strong on our resolve against corruption," he said.
Jonathan's visit, his first trip outside Nigeria
since becoming acting president, came just days
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Nigeria/Presidency
after Secretary of State Hillary Clinton, who visited
Nigeria last August, and Foreign Secretary Yayale
Ahmed inaugurated a U.S.-Nigeria Bi-national
Commission, a forum designed to "strengthen and
deepen the partnership" between the two nations.
The commission is to focus on four "key ar-
eas," Clinton said at the signing Apr. 6: good gov-
ernance and transparency; regional cooperation
and development, notably in the Niger Delta; pro-
moting reform and investment in the energy sec-
tor in ways that could help the poorest sectors in
the population; and food security and agricultural
development.
Of the four, good governance, particularly in
ensuring the integrity of next year's elections, and
consolidating the fragile ceasefire in the Niger
Delta will be "first out of the box", according to
David Goldwyn, coordinator for international en-
ergy affairs at the State Department.
Washington has publicly urged Jonathan not
to reappoint the current head of Nigeria's Inde-
pendent National Electoral Commission (INEC),
Maurice Iwu, when his term ends in June.
Although Jonathan noted in his remarks to
the Council that the perception that the Commis-
sion as presently constituted cannot conduct clean
elections was "more psychological than real", he
added that "before the 2011 elections, there will
be a lot of changes in INEC (and) not just the chair-
man".
U.S. officials, including Goldwyn, have been
particularly concerned about the situation in the
Niger Delta, the source of Nigeria's oil for the
more than half a century. The petroleum pumped
from the Delta currently constitutes as much as 40
percent of Nigeria's gross domestic product (GDP)
and about 75 percent of the government's income.
The endemic poverty and corruption of the
region, whose physical environment has also been
devastated by oil leaks and gas flaring, have cre-
ated widespread discontent among the minority
groups who live there.
That discontent, which is compounded by the
lack of jobs or economic opportunity in the region,
has spurred sometimes violent protests that in
recent years have taken the form of attacks -
mostly by militants associated with the Movement
for the Emancipation of the Niger Delta (MEND) -
on pipelines and other oil facilities, as well as the
abduction of employees of foreign oil companies,
such as Royal Dutch Shell, Chevron, and Total, that
have long been active there.
148
Acting President Gets Attention
An early ceasefire agreement worked out in
2005 between the government of former Presi-
dent Olusegun Obasanjo and MEND broke down
after just over a year. The result has been reduc-
tions in oil production – and the loss of billions of
dollars in revenue to the government, as well as
growing concern in Washington, which is highly
dependent on foreign oil imports - in each of the
years that followed.
Last year, Yar'Adua proposed a programme
for militants that would offer them three-staged
amnesty that included promises of cash, training
and eventually jobs for militants who turned in
their arms.
While the programme got off to a strong start
in October, it bogged down after the president left
for Saudi Arabia. By February, MEND announced it
was ending the ceasefire and last month MEND
claimed responsibility for two bombings in Warri.
Still, most analysts believe the amnesty re-
mains salvageable, but that the government has to
act quickly to get it back on track.
"Re-integration needs to be expedited," Di-
mieari Von Kemedi, a key official in Bayelsa State
who has worked on conflict mediation in the Delta
since 1997, said Tuesday at a presentation at the
Centre for Strategic and International Studies
(CSIS) here. He added that the next 18 months –
longer than Jonathan will remain in office – will be
critical in determining the amnesty's success or
failure.
Jonathan, who grew up in the Delta and is a
member of the same Ijaw ethnic group that domi-
nates MEND, has endorsed the programme and
stressed that follow-through by his government is
a top priority.
"We have restructured the (programme's)
management," he said Monday, "and we're trying
to start...training (former militants) this month."
But, he added, "It takes a lot of time to train
them, even for them to be in position to make a
living... So it's not something you can say you can
even complete in a four-year administration. But I
can assure you that we've set up a solid base, and I
have a clear focus on the programme, with time-
lines, (so) you'll see that we are progressing."
Jim Lobe's blog on U.S. foreign policy can be read
at http://www.ips.org/blog/jimlobe/.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Nigeria/Presidency

Analysis
Umaru Musa Yar'Adua 1951-2010 − the Last Trip Home

7 May 2010

H e was an unlikely choice

for president when he
was elected in 2007 to lead Af-
rica's most populous nation;
when he died last Wednesday
night, three months shy of his
59th birthday, Alhaji Umaru
Musa Yar'adua, had become
Nigeria's unlikely hero. In-
between both milestones, the
country vacillated from periods
of uncertainty to anxious hopes
for national stability.
Yar'adua made it clear from the day he took The late President Yar’Adua pictured at his inauguration in
2007 (NAN photo)
office in May 2007 that his was going to be a rule-
of-law administration. He elevated the due process
Committee, which made wide-ranging recommen-
principle to a national mantra. He not only pledged
dations, including changes in the process of ap-
to live by the principle, he led by example. He de-
pointing the head of the Independent National
clared his assets as required by law but went a step
Electoral Commission (INEC). The committee's re-
further to make it public, the first and only Nige-
port is currently before the National Assembly,
rian president to have done so.
which is debating it, along with proposed amend-
Yar'adua was aware of the infrastructure defi-
ments to the 1999 constitution of Nigeria.
cit that faced the country. His concerns were en-
Systematically, Yar'adua began to stamp his
capsulated in his administration's 7-point agenda
authority, beginning with election cases. Because
by which he said the nation would be transformed
he was able to create the environment for rule of
from its present status to one of the twenty lead-
law to prevail, unexpected upsets in the guberna-
ing economies by the year 2020. He was also
torial make up of some states were recorded. In
acutely aware that attaining that objective would
both Ondo and Edo states, where members of
be an uphill task, given the simmering militancy in
Yar'adua's own ruling Peoples Democratic Party
the Niger Delta region that was severely constrain-
(PDP) were governors, election petition tribunal's
ing crude oil production which is the country's
verdict upturning their elections were respected
main source of revenues.
and opposition candidates in the 2007 elections,
Governance issues were also a problem, with
were declared winners by the tribunal and sworn
electoral frauds at various level of the polity.
in as governors.
The challenges are daunting even for the
Under his presidency, extensive banking re-
healthiest of men yet the late President bore his
forms were introduced. In these reforms, spear-
duties and frail health with dignity. Acknowledging
headed by the Central Bank of Nigeria, the rot in
that even his own election as president was
the industry became apparent. Big and powerful
through a process that was flawed, Yar'adua
names in the industry found to have abused cus-
pledged to introduce reforms in the electoral sys-
tomer confidence and misused depositors' funds
tem to make it more transparent as to inspire con-
were axed; most of them are today being prose-
fidence in the process and outcome of elections. cuted for their role in various alleged scams of the
He made a brave attempt by setting up the industry.
Justice Muhammadu Lawal Uwais Electoral Reform
149 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Nigeria/Presidency
Sept. 24, 2007, Nigerian President Umaru Yar'Adua addresses the U.N. Climate Summit, at
United Nations headquarters, New York (Mary Altaffer / AP)
President Yar'adua took a bold step in approv-
ing a long-standing government plan to dredge the
River Niger. A significant project with huge eco-
nomic potentials for the country, the plan to ex-
pand the river had been on the drawing boards of
successive administrations since independence,
but no concrete steps were taken to advance it
forward.
Perhaps the most important legacy that
Yar'adua would be remembered by is his painstak-
ing, dogged effort, despite numerous provocative
acts to sway him from his course, to bring peace to
the restive Niger Delta region. His dramatic an-
nouncement offering government amnesty to all
militants who surrendered their arms and re-
nounced violence looked like straw-grabbing.
Indeed, with so many of the region's militants'
leaders talking at cross-purposes, it looked like the
amnesty deal was in danger of unravelling even
before the amnesty window closed. Mercifully, it
has held. As a result, Nigeria's oil exports have in-
creased and the country currently attains the out-
put quota allotted to it by the Organisation of Pe-
troleum Exporting Countries (OPEC).
It is a mark of the success of that programme
that various groups that formally operated under
the Movement for the Emancipation of the Niger
Delta (MEND), have issued statements expressing
their regret at Yar'adua's demise and condolences
to the government and members of Yar'adaua's
family.
There were also disappointments. While the
150
administration was emphasizing the rule of law,
and no sacred cows in punishing those found to be
corrupt, several members of his government were
in fact involved in shady deals and evaded prosecu-
tion because of their perceived closeness to his
presidency.
The failure of his administration to deliver on
a pledge to increase the electricity generation to
6000mw was particularly disappointing. After he
promised to declare a state of emergency in the
power sector during his presidential electioneering
campaigns, the 6000mw pledge by the end of De-
cember 2009 was perhaps one of the most eagerly
awaited developments by virtually every segment
of the Nigerian society.
In the end, it was his deputy, the Vice Presi-
dent Goodluck Jonathan, who had to apologise to
Nigerians for the failure to deliver on that. That
was because the previous month, November 2009,
Yar'adua was suddenly flown to Saudi Arabia. Offi-
cials later announced that he suffered from acute
pericarditis, a heart condition. He was never seen
in public until his death on Wednesday.
He won the presidential election in 2007 and
died about 3 weeks to the Third anniversary of his
Presidency. It may well be that history may con-
sider the late President as one of those leaders
who in spite of limiting circumstances did their
best for their countries. For now we can only pray
for the repose of his soul.
Daily Trust
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/Nigeria/ Presidency

President Yar’Adua Photo Gallery

President Yar’Adua and First Lady Dr. Turai with Indian Prime
Minister Manmohan Singh and wife Gursharan Kaur

Photo by George Osodi, / AP)

People’s Democratic Party presidential candidate Umaru Musa Yar’Adua

and his vice presidential running mate Goodluck Jonathan on the cam-
paign trail in 2007.

Top: Obasanjo, Jonathan and Yar’Adua; un-

NAN photos der: Nigerian military guard carrying late
president in state ceremony.

151 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/Nigeria/ Presidency
Two Nice Guys
Goodluck Jonathan and Umaru Musa Yar’Adua
Goodluck Jonathan: “I have lost not only a great boss, but also a true friend and a loving brother."
O utside, Nigeria is no doubt one of the most
misunderstood countries in the world; but
the historical fact that Nigerians have preferred
modest gentleman leaders provides a clue to the
dominate character of Nigeria as a nation-society.
Whatever our human failings, Nigerians idolize
good character and that is not only why Nigerians
are typically religious but also leads us to favor
leaders who embody integrity, simplicity and no-
bleness. Abubaker Tafewa Belewa, Shehu Shagari,
Umaru Musa Yar’Adua and Goodluck Jonathan, all
democratic leaders in a country that has mostly
been ruled by soldiers, were trusted to lead by Ni-
gerians because they possessed the qualities of
character that we are inclined to idolize.
Yar’Adua throughout his active presidency and
Jonathan from the time he was given the reins of
power as acting president, both projected a fine
image of Nigeria’s leadership to the international
community. Yar’Adua had been invited as special
guest at the January 21, 2009 inauguration of U.S.
President Barack Obama, and Goodluck Jonathan
as Acting President representing Nigeria in the 47
nation Washington Summit on Nuclear Security
was invited for private talks by the U.S. President.
Historically, beginning with Sir Abubaker Ta-
fewa Belewa, all of Nigeria’s democratically elected
leaders have enjoyed a wealth of goodwill and at-
tention internationally and have followed the na-
tions coveted tradition of sober and congenial rep-
152
resentation of Nigerian national and African conti-
nental geostrategic interests.
Yar’Adua and Jonathan, like Balewa and Sha-
gari before them, were soft spoken yet deliberate
leaders who projected Nigeria as a friendly, wise
and proactive nation.
Canadian Prime Minister Stephen Harper in
eulogizing the late Yar’Adua described him as a
man of peace, predicting that his role in advancing
regional peace and security and his contribution to
advancing Nigeria’s leadership role in the interna-
tional community would be remembered. U.S. Sec-
retary of State Hilary Clinton accredited Yar’Adua
with having labored to build strong democratic
institutions in Nigeria. Russian President Medvedev
said of the late Nigerian leader, "I knew President
Yar'Adua as a great friend of Russia, a staunch sup-
porter of cooperation between our nations, who
did his best for broadening and deepening the Ni-
gerian-Russian ties."
German President Horst Köhler noted,
"President Yar'Adua always sought ways to fulfill
his responsibility for peace and security in his
country and in the African continent." "This com-
mitment became apparent particularly during the
fourth Africa Forum held in Abuja in November
2008, which we both co-chaired. In Yar'Adua's
death, Germany has lost a partner who showed
distinct interest in relation with the European na-
tion," Koehler added.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Nigeria/Presidency

Kaduna Governor Namadi Sambo new VP

Report

Nigeria's Vice President Namadi Sambo (R) takes the oath of office in the presence of the chief justice of the
federation, Katsina Alu, at the presidential villa in the capital Abuja May 19, 2010. With his swearing in Nige-
ria's Kaduna state Governor Sambo filled the last major federal vacancy since President Goodluck Jonathan suc-
ceeded the late President Umaru Musa Yar’Adua two weeks earlier. Picture taken May 19 by Reuters

N igerian President Goodluck Jonathan on

May 13 announced his choice of Kaduna
State Governor Namadi Sambo as his vice presi-
dent. Jonathan, a former governor of Bayelsa
State, had been asked by the governors in a
meeting to choose one of them and he affirmed
that is what he had in mind. The governors then
met among themselves and returned to him pre-
senting Kaduna’s Governor Sambo as their
choice, which the President accepted. It can be
recalled that the late President Yar’Adua and
Jonathan as his vice presidential candidate for
People’s Democratic Party benefitted from for-
mer President Olusegun Obasanjo’s idea that the
next president should be the most outstanding of
Nigeria’s 36 governors.
Namadi Sambo, born in 1952, is a 1976 ar-
chitecture graduate from Ahmadu Bello Univer-
sity, Zaria, and was awarded a M. Sc. in 1978. His
National Youth Service Corp assignment was at
Oyo State’s Ministry of Works & Housing.
153
Apart from the period 1988 to 1990 when he
was Kaduna State Commissioner for Works, Trans-
port & Housing, Vice President Sambo maintained
a private sector architecture practice, becoming
one of Nigeria’s most prominent architects. He
also owns three companies.
He became Kaduna State Governor in May
2007 with an 11 point socio-economic develop-
ment agenda that included empowerment of
youth and women. According to the BBC May 18
report on VP Sambo he had not yet succeeded in
implementing his agenda in health and education
facilities, water supply and roads. However, he
was credited with having significantly improved
security in Kaduna. His Operation Yaki task force
brought together the police, military and other
security entities to combat crime.
Vice President Sambo is now holding his first
national political post, after only two years as Ka-
duna’s executive governor, his first political office
at state level.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Nigeria/Voice from the People
WxtÜ _xtwxÜá Éy a|zxÜ|t
By Nosarieme Garrick
Dear leaders of Nigeria,
I am a citizen of Nigeria holding a green card in
the US. I left in 1998, after the death of Nige-
rian Dictator Sani Abacha, along with several
others. After growing up in Nigeria, and watch-
ing others leave to pursue an education, it just
seemed like the thing to do if you could afford
it. Some entire families relocated to the UK,
the US and other countries; other families sent
their kids alone to foreign school, for a chance
at a better education. It’s now 2010, and some
of us are itching to come back. I don’t think any
of us were ever comfortable with the idea of
abandoning our country.
I'm not sure how much longer I want to
live abroad. After all, I would like my future
kids to know where their mother's from, even
possibly go to school there. However, all the
brouhaha that has been stirred up in the news
these past few months makes the country
seem even more unappealing, than it was
when it sent us in droves to foreign lands. I've
kept in contact with some of the children in the
Diaspora, and we've all discussed coming back
home, but you keep giving us reasons to stay
where we are. I hear you would like us to come
back, but you've lost our faith, we don't be-
lieve in our government. Fear not, we are will-
ing to work it out, it is our home, and so we’re
ready to help you help us come back. Here are
some suggestions of ways for you to make us
consider the idea.
Our obvious reason for leaving was to get
a better education, which is unfortunate be-
cause at Nigeria's independence we had the
highest number of university graduates in Af-
rica. The crumbling education system has con-
tributed to the increased crime rate; being that
our brothers and sisters back home, have very
limited options. Maybe you could reconsider
the budget cuts you made on education, and
look into the proper training for teachers, in
order for them to provide proper education for
154
your children. This could prepare them for a uni-
versity education, or vocational training– not
everyone needs or wants to go to university.
Overseas we're taught that you can't get any-
where without a bachelor's degree, a lot of peo-
ple have been the exception to the rule, but I'm
glad I had the option to get a bachelor’s. Maybe
we could provide that option for people back
home by putting more money into the university
system. Once we start to believe in our educa-
tion in Nigeria, I doubt that people will feel the
need to send their kids to the UK or the US for
school.
You should think about consulting once
more with Dr. Ngozi Okonjo-Iweala. Remember,
she used to be your former Minister of Finance?
She’s now the Managing Director of the World
Bank. According to The Punch Nigeria, she made
this statement at the Institute of Directors con-
ference in Lagos: ”One of the untapped growth
drivers is Nigeria‘s youth. The time has come for
us to focus on them and reap enormous devel-
opment benefits or ignore them to the nation‘s
peril.” See, she believes in our potential, don't
let another country make use of us. Even Can-
ada has been trying to lure us to their schools,
they value our billions of dollars that we are
ready to pay for a proper education. That
money could go to Nigeria.
Nosarieme Garrick, 25 year old daughter of
former Nigerian government employees.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/South Africa/Economy

Strategic Plan Update 2010-2013

Report

n April 14th the Standing Finance Commit-

O tee of South Africa’s National Treasury,
which is part of the Ministry of Finance, pre-
sented its Strategic Plan update covering the pe-
riod 2010-2013. While the presentation gave no
more than a very generalized overview and duly
conveyed the sobriety of South Africa’s national
planning establishment, the low growth pro-
jected and concern about wage pressures in-
creasing the anticipated well contained budget
deficit indicate that poverty reduction progress
will at best be modest.
Assurance was given in the presentation that
the National Treasury would work within the
identified priorities in delivering its mandate,
which first and foremost is to promote fiscal pol-
icy framework and coordinate macroeconomic
policy.
Factors revised to warrant this update were
identified as:
• Planning
• Outcomes
• Monitoring
• Integrated service delivery
Government priorities identified therein were:
• Improving the quality of education
• Enhancing the health of our people
• Making our communities safer
• Fostering rural development
• Creating jobs; and
• Investing in local government and human set-
tlements
Key microeconomic reforms to support growth
• Support labour-intensive industries through
industrial policy
• Investment in and improved maintenance of
network industries
• Raising productivity and competitiveness by
reducing regulatory hurdles and red tape
155
South Africa’s Finance Minister Pravin Gordhan, formerly
chairperson of the World Customs Organization and chair-
person of the Organization for Economic Development
(OECD) Forum on Tax Administration
• Increasing access for private investment and par-
ticipation in critical input markets
• Raising savings and investment through respon-
sible fiscal management
Targets, Objectives and Facilitating Factors:
• Economy expected to grow by 2.3% this year
rising to 3.2% in 2011
• Better inflation outcomes in line with the target
range
• Global demand and trade volumes picking up
• More stable employment and sectoral growth
outcomes
• Current account deficit has moderated… ex-
pected 4.9% of GDP in 2010 compared to 7.1% in
2008
• Sterling efforts of SARS resulted in an out-
standing target overshoot of R8 billion – bringing
down the budget deficit to 6.8% of GDP
• Sustained public infrastructure investment over
the MTEF of R845 billion
• Agreement in government regarding job creation
and the need to transform the economy
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/South Africa/ Banking & Finance

South African banking confidence recovers

Sapa, April 14, 2010

S outh African banking confidence rose

strongly in the first quarter of 2010 as the
country's banks experienced a turnaround in
their financial fundamentals and an easing of
their profit contraction, according to a survey by
Ernst & Young.
The survey, published on Monday (April
12), found that although banking profits contin-
ued to fall in the first quarter of 2010, they had
recovered considerably from their low levels of
2009, and that banking confidence had im-
proved from 24 index points in the fourth quar-
ter to 45 currently.
"Banks have undoubtedly recovered from
the global liquidity crisis," said Emilio Pera, lead
banking and capital markets director at Ernst &
Young. "Although their profits continue to
shrink, there is nevertheless a turnaround in
their financial fundamentals."
In addition, the rate of profit contraction
had abated, particularly for investment banks.

Impairment losses recede

Pera said that firstly, trends in credit losses and
credit impairments had gradually improved af-
ter peaking in the second quarter of 2009.
"Both retail and investment banks are ex-
periencing lower levels of impairments on their
balance sheets, and this follows through to the
income statement."
During the recent banking results reporting
season, individual banks mostly spoke of a year
of two halves - where essentially the first half
was characterized by shrinking credit demand
and rising impairments.
"This changed considerably in the second
half, with impairment losses starting to recede
from peak levels, thereby generating relief to
operating cost growth," Pera said.
Overall, the slower impairment ratios were
supporting easier credit standards.
Retail banks particularly had eased their
credit lending criteria, supported by lower inter-
est rates and slowly improving household in-
debtedness levels, he said.
South African Reserve Bank Building, Pretoria
Revenue recovering
Secondly, both interest and non-interest reve-
nue was gradually recovering from a very weak
2009.
Investment banks were particularly chal-
lenged in the fourth quarter of 2009, with inter-
est and non-interest revenue shrinking, he said.
"The global liquidity crisis resulted in
sharply reduced capital availability across global
financial markets. As a result, there was sub-
stantially slower activity across most areas of
investment banking," Pera said.
All of private equity; corporate finance;
project finance, and specialised finance experi-
enced considerably slower volumes through
2009, and into the first quarter of this year.
Retail banks, on the other hand, experienced
sharply reduced fee income growth only in the
last quarter of 2009, although it subsequently
recovered in the first quarter of 2010.

156 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/South Africa/ Banking & Finance
"To a large extent, retail banks relied on price
adjustments to offset weaker volumes of transac-
tions and declining fees stemming from lower lev-
els of new credit agreements," Pera said.
"This kept fee income relatively strong
through most of 2009, but by the fourth quarter,
non-interest revenue growth was feeling the strain
of indebted households," he said.
Expectations of a turnaround
Retail banks expectations of a turnaround in the
second quarter of 2010 were supported by the
recently released consumer confidence surveys,
which indicated rising consumer confidence.
In addition, retail sales trends continued to im-
prove, albeit still negative, down 1.7 percent year-
on-year in January, from -6.6 percent in November
2009.
Other survey findings included that retail
banks continued to shed jobs, as they right-sized
their organizations in an era of slower credit de-
mand.
Investment banks, by contrast, continued hir-
ing through the second half of 2009, despite lower
business volumes and weaker profits.
It was also found that banks' confidence lev-
els remained significantly below the long-term
average level of 80 index points.
Pera said investment income was slowly re-
covering from a weak 2009, and was expected to
return to positive territory for both retail and in-
vestment banks in the second quarter of 2010.
"Expectations are that income levels will re-
cover sharply in the second quarter of 2010 ...
both retail and investment banks expect rising
credit demand to feed into positive net interest
income growth, a situation they have not experi-
enced since the second half of 2008."
This in turn, was likely to lead to a gradual
revival in profits growth, with investment banking
profits starting to rise again, while the rate of re-
tail banking profit contraction improved.
"Failing another globally influenced crisis,
banks are poised to benefit from a lower interest
rate environment, which will further stimulate a
turnaround in credit demand."
He said local banks had sufficient capital re-
serves to favourably respond to growing credit
needs, given their improving impairment ratios,
and profit prospects.
Sapa
157
SA banking confidence recovers
JSE All Shares Index as of June 30, 2010
27148.91
JSE Capitalization as of July 2, 2010:
R5,641.7bn
Approximately $740.380 billion
Source JSE Equity Market Statistics
JSE off worst on bargain
hunting
June 30, 2010
Johannesburg - Cheerier European markets and
hopes that the US will follow suit later in the day
have ushered local counters well off their worst
levels of the day on Wednesday.
At 12:02 local time the JSE all share index had
pulled off early morning losses of close to 100
points to a loss of 23 points, or -0.09%.
Gold miners were up 0.88% and platinum
counters by 1.04%. The resources index lost
0.05%, while banks were unchanged and financials
off by 0.05%. Industrials were down by 0.19%.
The rand was bid at R7.61 to the dollar, from
R7.62 at the JSE's last close. Gold was quoted at
$1 244.80 a troy ounce from $1 234.90/oz at the
JSE's previous close, while platinum was at
$1,543.00/oz from $1 543.50/oz at the JSE's last
close.
A local equities dealer said that while the pic-
ture remained a little mixed, with Dow futures
trying to gain ground, but Asia and the Dow down,
there were signs of interest emerging.
A decidedly negative global backdrop had led
to local counters free-falling close to 600 points on
Tuesday. The Dow Jones Industrial Average posted
its second-lowest close this year and its biggest
one-day drop since June 4. The Nasdaq Composite
recorded its lowest close since February 8 and its
biggest one-day drop since May 20, and the Stan-
dard & Poor's 500 saw its lowest close since Octo-
ber 30.
But Simon Denham at Capital Spreads told
Dow Jones Newswires on Wednesday that London
equities were nudging a tad higher with the bulls
looking to pick up cheaper stocks after Tuesday's
slump. The FTSE was last up 37 points at 4,951.
A couple of SA stocks reflected this trend as
they managed to turn around on Wednesday.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/South Africa
Eugene Terreblanche
1941-2010
E ugene Terreblanche, co-founder and
leader of the Afrikaner Weerstands-
beweging (AWB), which seeks to have an all
white republic in South Africa, died on April 13th
from a bludgeon beating. A 28 year old man and
a 15 year old boy were arrested in connection
with the killing. According to attorney Puno
Moroko his client Chris Mahlangu, 28, worked
for Terreblanche who had treated him badly
and once throttled him. Attorney Moroko said
he would not in his defense use claims that
there was a physical relationship between Mah-
langu and Terreblanche and AWB secretary gen-
eral Andre Visagie said he would not comment
on claims that Terreblanche died in a drunken
sex session because they were absurd. Accord-
ing to police, it appeared a wage dispute led to
the fatal assault on Terreblanche by the two
fellows who were charged with murder.
The 15 year old boy’s mother told AP tele-
vision that when she spoke to her son at the
Ventersdorp police station he admitted striking
Terreblanche with an iron rod and killing him.
She said her son was provoked by Terre-
blanche’s refusal to pay him for work done.
Under South African law a minor involved in a
criminal case should not have either his name or
picture released to the public.
Visagie called Terreblanche’s murder a dec-
laration of war by South Africa’s Black commu-
nity against its White community and vowed to
avenge the death, despite the two suspects hav-
ing been arrested and charged. Visagie urged
football teams to stay away from the World Cup
scheduled to open in South Africa on June 11th,
saying the country would not be safe. He
claimed to have received hundreds of phone
calls from White South Africans wishing to join
AWB in the wake of Terreblanche’s murder.
President Jacob Zuma called for calm and
asked that people refrain from making inflam-
matory political statements. President Zuma
also gave his condolences to Terreblanche’s kin,
but Visagie responded with a rebuke: “My mes-
sage to Jacob Zuma is, ‘Why Mr. President, do
158
Eugene Terreblanche founded and led the movement to
establish a separate white state within South Africa’s terri-
tory
you offer your condolences to us when you
could’ve repudiated Mr. Malema and prevented
the death of Mr. Terreblanche?’”
ANC Youth League leader Juluis Malema
was drawn into the matter because he has re-
fused to adhere to the South African High Court
ban on singing an anti-apartheid era song that
contains an exhortation to kill the Boer (White
South Africans of Dutch descent) farmers. Presi-
dent Zuma stepped into the controversy sur-
rounding Malema in the premises by ordering
that the High Court ban on the song in question
should be respected.
Lawrence Schlemmer, vice president of the
Institute for Race Relations, said he believes
Terreblanche’s murder was a personal matter
and would have little political impact. “Eugene
Terreblanche has become an increasingly mar-
ginal figure,” he said, adding, “I think it’s a per-
sonal tragedy more than anything else. I don’t
think there’s any political significance, although
I suppose there will be a measure of sympathy
because of the individual circumstances. He had
a rough life and this is a rough ending.”
Eugene Terreblanche’s brother Andries,
speaking to AP, gave the world a view of the
AWB lot’s self perception: “We are not racists,
we just believe in race purity.”
Literally Terreblanche means white earth,
or short slogan form for the white man’s earth.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/South Africa

Terreblanche, Malema and

South Africa’s Dilemma
By Muhammed Kamil
Perspective

I n a world where those in the job market can

access a list of the best and worst companies to
work for, being so disadvantaged that one has to
rely on the likes of Eugene Terreblanche for em-
ployment reminds the world that the legacy of
apartheid, the most inhumane socio-political sys-
tem in modern times, is still very much with us.
Employees on a farm that doesn’t have an adminis-
trative and financial management system, who go
directly to the proprietor for their wages, are for all
intents and purposes domestic servants. The
scenes of the farm, the house, the room and the
police described setting (a half naked corpse with
seaman on his private parts) where white suprema-
cist leader Eugene Terreblanche lost his life at the
hands of employees said by their attorney to have
been seeking their wages raises in our minds a host
of questions about South Africa and why it has yet
to achieve sustained double digit Gross Domestic
Product growth, like the much less endowed Asian
tigers did in the 1990s– despite the great potential
of the country often referred to as Africa’s eco-
nomic powerhouse.
When we talk of poverty eradication we must
have in mind that the lowest economic class in so-
ciety will be the lower middle class. Farmers in
South Africa, whether black or white, whose work-
ers are in their conditions of employment domestic
servants cannot contribute to realization of this
goal. This is true for all of Africa and no doubt for
the entire Global South. Yet, given its technological
assets, infrastructure, first class financial sector and
model socio-political aspirations– the achievement
of a non-racial rainbow, equitable society − which
have been enshrined into law and promoted by the
country’s institutions, South Africa is expected to
be an exception. The legacy of apartheid wherein
the majority of the country’s population suffers in
dire poverty is in this situation supposed to inspire
new thinking, daring approaches, revolutionary
innovations. No doubt, if South Africa is to achieve
its lofty socio-political vision, it must modernize its
economy second to none on the planet.
That 20 years after the official demise of
apartheid a 15 year old boy who should be in
159
Nelson Mandela upon becoming South Africa’s president
in 1994 introduced the non-racial rainbow society phi-
losophy, launching the most ambitious social revolution
in modern times
school honing ambition to become a world class
professional or global business tycoon is left in a
social situation where he has to work for pittances
on the farm of a notorious white supremacist is an
imposing challenge to South Africa’s leadership in
all categories−political, entrepreneurial, academic ,
technological and scientific, social scientists and
what have we. It is loudly ringing an alarm that
South Africa must take this incident as an immedi-
ate challenge to advance from Black economic em-
powerment mode and make “all in the middle class
or above by 2020” the national call to action. South
Africa’s current governing coalition having a Com-
munist background, should be able to appreciate
the concept of equity capitalism. In a big business
society like South Africa banks should have stock
purchase financing programs accessible to wage
and salary earners.
I advise President Zuma to start sensitizing his
compatriots to the necessity of taking up the chal-
lenge of making South Africa a country built on a
middle class base and to promote the idea of a na-
tional vision and planning exercise to come up with
a bold strategy to reach this arduous but vital
goal….if South Africa is to stay on coarse in building
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/South Africa Terreblanche, Malema and South Africa’s Dilemma
a non-racial society and not get thrown into chaos
by those radicalizing the popular discontent. Giv-
ing a country where mining and commercial farm-
ing are major economic activities and employers a
lower middle class base is a tremendous challenge,
but the Terreblanche syndrome and its sordid so-
cial consequences is only one of the clear indica-
tors that South Africa’s economy needs to more
substantially modernize and attain and sustain eq-
uitably spread double digit GDP growth if poverty
is to be eradicated by 2020.
ANC Youth League leader Julius Malema
comes immediately to mind here. Malema is both
the right and the wrong man in the right and
wrong place at the same time. It is unimaginable
that there wouldn’t be a Julius Malema in South
Africa at this time; he is a natural political product
of the society. The danger he represents is that of
leaving so many Black South Africans below the
middle class; and in that he is a realistic barometer
of the risk of failure South Africa faces in endeavor-
ing a model society. If those who at his last birth-
day party were calling for him to be South Africa’s
next president get their wish South Africa one can
imagine would be where Malema’s apparent hero
Robert Mugabe has brought Zimbabwe; and if pov-
erty eradication in South Africa is not dramatically
accelerated in short order, no one should be sur-
prised if Malema’s uncouth radicalism continues to
propel his political fortunes. We might not believe
someone with Malema’s style will ever lead South
Africa. Nonetheless, it is a political logic proposi-
tion that radicalism invariably has its roots in socio-
economic and, or political conditions; and for any
polity to keep its balance it must be effectively at-
tentive to removing the root causes of radicalism.
Indeed, from what we know of ANC political
culture and from what President Zuma has said,
Malema is outside the box, but like that 15 year old
boy accused of murdering Eugene Terreblanche he
is a victim of circumstances that he was perforce
acculturated into, which he had no part in bringing
about. Malema was a child not yet ten years old
when Nelson Mandela finally left Robin Island; he
represents the first generation of post-apartheid
South African youth to reach adulthood and signifi-
cantly he is the youth league leader of a party that
not only exemplified African political maturity and
sophistication during the years of anti-apartheid
struggle, but has set for itself the highest ideals to
ever be introduced into modern civilization. The
ideological and style gap between ANC with its
sensitivity to South Africa’s markets and invest-
160
ment profile, in the conciliatory sphere, and its
heedless Youth League under Julius Malema, in
the radical camp, cannot be simply attributed to
the common impulsiveness of the youth com-
pared to their elders. In this digital information
age when the younger generation elite are typi-
cally better informed and better understand the
workings of global markets and technological
possibilities than their elders, Malema and the
ANC Youth League he leads appear like agitation
oriented political dinosaurs from the 1960s.
The ANC Youth League is world known for
the vital role it played in getting Jacob Zuma in
the president’s seat; but under the circum-
stances the question arises: morally, where does
Zuma’s debt lie, to support them politically or to
invest in the development of the Youth League’s
human resource and institutional development?
We should, I believe, all agree with UN Under-
secretary General and Executive Director for UN-
Habitat Prof. Anna Tibaijuka’s advice to the early
May World Economic Forum on Africa that the
best way to invest in young people is to provide
them with proper education and skills, but we
don’t see the leader of ANC’s Youth League re-
flecting this. The intellectual capacity gap be-
tween the ANC Youth League and the South Afri-
can Congress of Trade Unions (COSATU), an-
other member of the ANC governing, alliance is
glaring. COSATU challenges Zuma and his cabi-
net with studies and reports developed in-
house. Malema has been advocating nationaliza-
tion of South Africa’s mines, but despite the
wealth of experience Africa has had in nationali-
zation and privatization of mines, we don’t see
Malema waving and quoting from an ANC Youth
League study on the matter. From all appear-
ances the depth of Malema’s intellectual arsenal
is old fashion agitation. That is not fitting for a
complex country with complex issues like South
Africa.
Looking at Malema from the perspective of
the generation that dominates the higher ranks
of ANC, this young unpolished politician is for
better or worse our son, no less than that 15
year old boy accused of killing Eugene Terre-
blanche, no less than the entire youth of South
Africa and the continent at large. We cannot
leave them to be victims of the digital divide.
The only realistic, progressive and humane
vision for Africa is a continent with a middle
class socio-economic base and South Africa is
obviously best positioned to lead the way in this
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/South Africa Terreblanche, Malema and South Africa’s Dilemma
continental quest. Julius Malema boasts that by
living in Sandton he exemplifies the aspirations of
South Africa’s youth but being middle class is not
simply having the qualifying material resources at
one’s disposal; besides the economics, there is a
social dimension that entails good education,
skilled or professional talent and contribution to
the socio-economic development of society, in tan-
dem with refined socialization.
With a population of 50 million and
[purchasing power parity] per capita income of
$10,000, South Africa ranks as a middle income
country, but it is also known to be one of the
world’s most unequal societies. Endeavoring to
create an equitable society is not a matter of tak-
Johannesburg’s Park Station train terminal (above) and other
ing from the rich and giving to the poor, but rather
infrastructure reflect South Africa’s middle income nation
increasing the wealth of the rich in a sustainable status, but this is contrasted by some of the world’s most de-
way by establishing a middle class purchasing grading living conditions
power and socialization base for the country. This
does of course mean that the income of the lower $3.13m in loans for youth
classes must increase more rapidly than that of the development
upper class, which is the only way sustained double
14 May 2010
digit national income growth can be achieved.
South Africa is already one of the newly industrial-
South African's National Youth Development
izing countries (NIC); it has a world class financial
Agency disbursed 7,500 micro-loans to the value
sector and is also a world class player in certain
of R23-million in its first year of existence, Moni-
technology fields. Yet South Africa’s persistent sub-
toring and Evaluation Minister Collins Chabane
6% GDP growth does not admit it into the ranks of
said on Wednesday.
dynamic economies.
Addressing the National Assembly in Cape
President Zuma has expressed dissatisfaction
Town, Chabane said the agency had disbursed a
at the rate socio-economic progress is being made
further R3-million in loans to small and medium
in his country and no doubt he realizes that conser-
enterprises, and had issued 4 244 business consul-
vatism of the comfortable upper class is slowing
tancy vouchers worth more than R33-million.
the country’s pace. The last thing this type of situa-
Chabane said the agency needed more
tion needs is Malema’s brand of racial agitation,
money, but had begun to supplement its govern-
because that only provokes conservative and re-
ment funding of R369.9-million for the 2010/11
gressive backlash; rather, what is required is a na-
fiscal year via partnerships with other organiza-
tional campaign rationalizing the advantages that
tions.
manifold increase in the national purchasing power
"The budget allocated to the NYDA is inade-
and consumption capacity, in tandem with middle
quate," Chabane said. "If this institution has to
class socialization, will have for everyone.
fulfill its mandate, more resources need to be al-
In a nutshell, the most promising socio- eco-
located to it.
nomic progress route for South Africa is one where
"However, the NYDA recognizes that not all
both the rich and poor get richer, though in the
its funding should come from the government. As
medium term when poverty is being eradicated the
such, the organization has made strides by enter-
poor leap forward dramatically. Once a solid mid-
ing into partnerships with some of the country's
dle class socio-economic base is established and
smallest and biggest organizations, both public
there is a fair opportunity field, talent and capabil-
and private, for youth development purposes."
ity invariably result in competitive creativity and
The National Youth Development Agency was
innovation, upward mobility and extension of
formed in 2009 from the merger of the former
South African capital and talent into other African
National Youth Commission and Umsobomvu
and global markets.
Fund.
161 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/South Africa/Social Development

South Africa to spend $2.15bn on housing

23 April 2010
The government is to spend R16-billion on building
new houses and sustainable human settlements
for poor South Africans in 2010/11, says Human
Settlements Minister Tokyo Sexwale, noting that
South Africa's housing delivery record is second
only to that of China.
"The bulk of this funding will go to the provi-
sion of housing subsidies to the bottom-most end
of the market - the poorest of the poor, who earn
[up to] R3,500 a month," Human Settlements Min-
ister Tokyo Sexwale said during his budget vote
speech to Parliament in Cape Town this week. Cape Town township new houses (right) and old dwellings
"A large percentage of this is allocated to (left) From 2007 through 2009 South Africa’s Department
provinces in the form of Housing Development of Human Settlements delivered 488,383 new housing
grants," he added. units
Sexwale pointed out that there were currently
8 ,000 human settlement projects underway across factory and office workers.
the country, and that 219, 000 housing units had "We emphasized to the institutions that in
been built by the government in the last financial putting the floor under their operations in this gap
year. market, financial prudency should remain para-
"Irrespective of what sceptics may say, the mount. In no way can there be recklessness in
record of this government on housing delivery lending practices which may lead to flippant calls
speaks for itself. Since 1994, more than 2.3-million upon the Guarantee Fund."
housing units have been made available for nearly Sexwale also advised potential beneficiaries of
11-million people. The scale of government hous- the fund to "exercise responsibility" by adhering to
ing delivery is second only to China." the terms and conditions of their credit agree-
ments.
Government Guarantee Fund
Sexwale met with the financial sector earlier this Monitoring complaince
week to discuss ways of increasing funding to both Sexwale also pointed out that he had raised con-
the low-cost and affordable housing markets, cerns with the financial institutions over their com-
which could increase the number of houses built pliance with the Home Loans and Mortgage Disclo-
by government and private sector. sure Act (HLAMDA), which requires banks to report
At that meeting, the Banking Association of on their lending patterns.
South Africa cited the fact that the success of the "The ministry will play an activist role in moni-
government's low-cost housing programme was toring this activity by the banks, in the interests of
"unparalleled". regulating the homeowners’ property market,
"We came away satisfied at the positive out- whilst being alive to the complexity and sensitivity
comes, and agreed to form a joint working team to of the operations of financial institutions," he said.
look into various aspects of housing finance - nota-
bly how to generate innovative ideas around the Source: BuaNews
R1-billion Government Guarantee Fund that is be-
ing set up to assist the 'gap market'," Sexwale said.
"Those who stand to benefit from such a fi-
nancial platform include inter alia nurses, teachers,
police, prison warders, government officials, cer-
tain categories of management, and blue collar
162 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/South Africa /Presidency
President Zuma’s India Visit
Report
W hen South Africa's then Deputy
President Phumzile Mlambo-
Ngcuka was in India at the head of a
trade delegation during September
2006, she remarked that the bond be-
tween the two countries’ was like that
of cousins. The June (2-4) 2010 timing
of President Zuma’s first visit to India
coincided with the 150th anniversary
of Indians’ arrival of in South Africa,
home to the largest Indian Diaspora. Nearly 1.5
million persons of Indian origin constitute two and
a half per cent of the South African population. In
addition to Finance Minister and veteran ANC stal-
wart Pravin Gordhan, there are 3 deputy ministers
of Indian origin, as well as 25 Indian descent mem-
bers in South Africa’s 400-seat Parliament.
President Zuma, making the official visit with
8 cabinet ministers, set the tone of solidarity with
Indians by staying in Mumbai’s recently reopened
Taj Mahal Palace and Tower Hotel that was
wrecked by terrorists on November 26, 2008. Sig-
nificantly, Taj Mahal opened a luxury hotel in Cape
Town earlier this year.
Beyond the statistics, symbolism and ges-
tures, the Indians were quite happy with President
Zuma. Indian commentator Vikram Doctor wrote
that Indians could not help but be charmed by the
warm greetings and the flattering way he talked
about the long standing ties between South Africa
and India. Vikram also noted that South Africa was
the new favorite vacation place for India’s Bolly-
wood stars.
Romanticizing the relationship between the
two countries was sweetener for bilateral coop-
eration events and talks. With a host of top South
Africa CEO’s accompanying him President Zuma
together with India’s Commerce Minister Anand
Sharma re-launched the India-South Africa Chief
Executives Forum, now to be co-chaired by Afri-
canRainbow Minerals Chairman Patrice Motsepe
(left to right) India’s Prime Minister Manmohan Singh, Presi-
dent Jacob Zuma and his wife Nompumelelo Ntuli Zuma and
the Prime Minister’s wife Gursharan Kaur, in Delhi.
and Tata Group boss Ratan Tata. Apart from en-
thusiasm for expanding two way investment flows,
the vision from both sides is to push two-way
trade up from $7.5 billion in 2008-2009 to $12 bil-
lion in 2012. In 2002 South Africa-India bilateral
trade was $2.5 billion. The first substantive meet-
ing of the CEO Forum is scheduled for August this
year in South Africa, during which time an Indian
businesses exhibit is also scheduled.
South Africa, which has become the largest
external investor in Africa, has about $77 million
worth of investments in India. SABmiller, one of
the world’s largest brewers, has around a third of
the Indian beer market after it bought India’s Na-
rang breweries in 2000. Airports Company SA
(Acsa) and Bidvest group were part of a consor-
tium led by Indian infrastructure company GVK
that won the contract to modernize Mumbai Inter-
national Airport in 2006. South Africa’s 200 strong
business delegation accompanying Zuma was
composed of diverse sectors, including mining,
energy, health, pharmaceuticals, information tech-
nology, hospitality and financial services. South
Africa’s News Café, a chain of premium cocktail
bars, plans to invest over $20 million in India in
the next five years to open 20 outlets. Its first
overseas bar is inside a mall on a Mumbai road
named after Nelson Mandela.
163 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/South Africa /Presidency
South Africa’s $276 billion GDP
($3,764 nominal per capita/$10,119
PPP per capita) is less than a quarter of
India’s $1.217 trillion GDP ($718 per
capita/$2,946 PPP per capita) and the
disparity is well reflected in India’s
substantial investment in South Africa.
Vishnu Prakash, spokesperson for In-
dia’s ministry of external affairs said
ahead of Zuma’s visit that the largest
Indian companies operating in South
Africa are in the process of investing
around $3.5 billion in diverse sectors.
The Tata and Mahindra groups already
have a presence in the automobile sec-
tor in Africa’s biggest economy. Nearly
100 Indian companies have set up shop in South
Africa. “South Africa is seen by Indian compa-
nies as a spring board into the African conti-
nent. Our two-way trade with Africa is witness-
ing an exponential growth,” said an official with
the Confederation of Indian Industry (CII).
Anant Singh, a South Africa of Indian roots
who was in the delegation led by President
Zuma to India was upbeat about the prospects
for telecommunications, media and film indus-
try collaboration between South Africa and In-
dia, saying, "There is a great deal of interest in
the ICT (information and communication tech-
nology), media and entertainment sectors from
Indian companies. It is promising that they have
displayed a keen interest to work in South Af-
rica." Indian film production companies have
indicated that they would like to shoot at the
new Cape Town Film Studios scheduled to open
in October this year. Singh's company VideoVi-
sion has a major stake in the new studios, which
are also expected to further motivate Bolly-
wood producers who have taken the coastal city
as a popular shooting venue in recent years.
Singh anticipates collaboration in high-tech ani-
mation films, features and documentaries.
President Zuma’s talks with Prime Minister
Manmohan Singh at Hyderabad House in New
Delhi covered a wide range of issues. They dis-
cussed trade and investment and stressed bilat-
eral cooperation within the framework of the
Joint Ministerial Commission. The leaders reaf-
firmed the importance of strengthening rela-
tions under the aegis of the India-South Africa
Joint Ministerial Commission (JMC) which af-
fords both sides an opportunity to address a
range of bilateral, as well as multilateral political
164
President Zuma’s India Visit
Co-Chairs of the India-South Africa CEOs Forum Patrice Mot-
sepe chairman of African Rainbow Minerals and Ratam Tata
CEO of India’s premiere auto industry company Tata Motors
at the forum’s re-launching on June 2nd in Mumbai
and economic issues. They confirmed that the
8th Session of the JMC will take place in Delhi
before the end of 2010, by which time both
sides are expected to evaluate the implementa-
tion of bilateral agreements and decisions taken
during the State Visit.
Regarding economic cooperation, the lead-
ers underlined the need to utilize their respec-
tive strengths to mutual advantage through
greater cooperation between their business
entities in sectors such as infrastructure and
manufacturing, energy, mines and minerals, oil
and natural gas, banking and financial services,
tourism, pharmaceuticals, automobiles and
auto components, textiles and garments, fertil-
izers, information technology, small and me-
dium enterprises and forestry-based produce.
Coming to geopolitics, the two leaders
agreed on the need for United Nations struc-
tural reform, specifically stressing expansion of
both permanent and non-permanent Security
Council member states. They were of the same
mind regarding the obsolescence of the UN
power structure adopted in the 1940s. This mat-
ter was also taken up in Brasilia during April at
the India-Brazil-South Africa (IBSA) Summit
when Zuma and Singh met with President Lula
Da Silva.
In the regional context, President Zuma
affirmed the importance of India as a partner
ofthe African Union in the consolidation of
peace and stability in the continent, through its
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/South Africa /Presidency President Zuma’s India Visit
contributions to peacekeeping, and as a
partner in the development of Africa through its
support for the objectives of the New Partner-
ship for Africa's Development (NEPAD).
In recalling the defining documents of the
South Africa–India relationship, the Red Fort
Declaration of 1996, the Joint Declaration of
2003 and the Tshwane Declaration of 2006, and
expressing satisfaction with the progress that
had taken place, the two leaders welcomed the
continued interaction between India and South
Africa at the highest political levels. The two
sides in Delhi signed an Air Services Agreement,
a memorandum of understanding (MOU) on
cooperation in the field of agriculture and allied
sectors and a MOU between the Diplomatic
Academy of International Relations & Coopera-
tion of South Africa and the Foreign Service In-
stitute of India.
Expressing satisfaction with the increasing
cultural exchanges between the two countries,
Messrs. Zuma and Singh agreed to further pro-
mote educational exchanges, including Univer-
sity-to-University linkages. Mr. Zuma and Dr.
Singh agreed that a more extensive and active
network of cooperation in Science & Technol-
ogy would be promoted by the concerned de-
partments, which would focus on cooperation
between designated agencies and specialised
institutions. In this connection, the two leaders
noted that the MOU for cooperation in the field
of Communications & Information Technologies
expired in September 2009 and thus called for
its early renewal and a meeting of the Joint
Working Group to identify projects for joint co-
operation in the ICT sector.
The South African President was also re-
ceived by India’s President Pratibha Patil and
Vice-President M. Hamid Ansari. Those who
called on him included ruling United Progressive
Alliance (UPA) Chairperson Sonia Gandhi and
Leader of the Opposition Sushma Swaraj. Sonia
Gandhi was invited by President Zuma to the
World Cup that would commence on the 11th
instant. He also invited her to attend the 2012
100th anniversary of the African National Con-
gress founding.
From top to Bottom: India’s Commerce Minister with the
South Africa President in Mumbai; South African Foreign
Minister Ms Maite Nkoane Mashabane greeting President
Zuma upon his arrival in Mumbai and the President and wife
Nompumelelo Ntuli Zuma laying a reef at the Mahatma Gan-
dhi memorial at Rajghat in New Delhi

165 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Africa/South Africa/Urban Transport
Report
Gauteng Premier Nomvula Mokonyane alongside Gautrain
G auteng Province’s Gautrain, designed for
100,000 passenger trips daily travelling at
160km per hour along an 80 km route, linking OR
Tambo International Airport with Johannesburg
and Pretoria, came on stream June 8th, just in
time for World Cup South Africa 2010. Gautrain
materialized through a partnership between
South Africa’s richest province, Gauteng, which
boasts being Africa’s 5th largest economy, and
with local and international entrepreneurs; an
arrangement said to be the biggest public-private
partnership in Africa. It is 50% owned by its inter-
national partners and 50% by Murray & Roberts
and the Strategic Partners Group, the consor-
tium's black economic empowerment compo-
nent.
Construction started in February 2006 after
then Minister of Finance Trevor Manuel allocated
R7.1 billion (about $1 billion), creating over
90,000 direct, indirect and induced jobs before
opening for service in June 2010. The project
attracted investment in shopping malls, enter-
tainment centers, office blocks, residential devel-
oping and petty trading along its network. An es-
timated 3,000 jobs per year will be created during
Gautrain’s operation. As of June 2010 R26 billion
(about $3.2bn) had been spent on the project.
166
The Gautrain network consist of 19 trains,
each with 4 passenger cars. Only the OR Tambo
International Airport-Sandton link, which included
the Rhodesfield and Marlboro stations, came on
stream June 8th. The rest of the network is ex-
pected to be completed next year.
The Gautrain network is connected to the
Metrorail public train system and using a single
ticket commuters can change between Metrorail
and Gautrain. Also included in the network are 125
Gautrain luxury buses that operate within a 15 km
radius of the train stations.
Travelling at 160km per hour Gautrain takes
40 minutes from Pretoria to Johannesburg and 15
minutes from Sandton to OR Tambo International
Airport. The initially announced Johannesburg-
Pretoria fare is R29 (about $3.75), but the shortest
destination fare along that route is R13. Gautrain
bus link fares are to vary between R4 and R11.
Critics of the project have described Gautrain
as transport for the rich and it was opposed by
COSATU, but the intention of the project was to
reduce road congestion along the Ben Schoeman
Highway, which it is expected to do by 20%.
Gautrain runs on South Africa’s coal gener-
ated electricity and the environmental impact as-
sessment rated the project environmentally neu-
tral.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Sudan/Elections
Al Bashir Wins Sudan’s Presidential Election
Report
D espite facing war crimes and crimes
against humanity charges at the Interna-
tional Criminal Court (ICC), in connection with
civilian casualties in the 7 year old war between
government and rebels in Darfur, Omar Al Bashir
who came to power in a 1989 military coup
d’état, won 68% of the presidential vote in gen-
eral elections held from April 11 to 15. Yasir Ar-
man, candidate for the main opposition party,
Sudan People’s Liberation Movement (SPLM),
came second with 22% of the vote despite having
withdrawn from the race several weeks earlier.
Over 90% of Arman’s votes came from the
autonomous South Sudan region which is sched-
uled to vote in a referendum on separation or
unity next January.
SPLM, the party that fought for Southern
Sudan’s right to autonomous government, power
and wealth sharing and the right to a referendum
on independence, withdrew all its candidates for
post in Northern Sudan. The move indicates a
prevailing pre-disposition towards a vote for in-
dependence in the scheduled referendum. Ab-
dallah Deng, the only Southerner in the race and
candidate for the Hassan Al Turabi led Popular
Congress Party, was on the ballot but finished
third with only 4% of the vote. That was enough
for the 78 year old Turabi to threaten court ac-
tion to challenge the elections’ validity:"We will
go to court. If the judges do not rule in our fa-
vour, we will employ other alternatives to ad-
dress the election problems." PCP is a splinter
party from Al Bashir’s National Congress Party;
both rooted in the officially defunct National Is-
lamic Front. Democratic Union Party (DUP) can-
didate Hatim El Sir, though on the ballot received
only 2% of the vote, while Ummah Party candi-
date twice former Prime Minister Sadiq El Mahdi
received 1% of the vote after withdrawing from
the ballot.
SPLM’s Yasir Arman and Ummah Party’s
Sadiq El Mahdi withdrew from the race at the
167
end of March complaining of unequal media ac-
cess and alleging that the ruling NCP was plotting
a rigged election. However, several Sudanese po-
litical analysts saw their withdrawal as a strategy
to try and deny the results credibility after realiz-
ing they would be roundly defeated. Some sur-
veys conducted by foreign NGOs before the elec-
tion revealed support for Al Bashir running as
high as 80%; on the other hand online voting con-
ducted by Sudan Tribune.Com gave victory to
Sadiq El Mahdi with 48% of the vote, followed by
Yasir Aram with 37% and Al Bashir 6%. Many Su-
danese initially disposed to Arman complained
that he destroyed his own campaign with insensi-
tive criticism of popular Islamic values. Arman, a
Northern Muslim who fought on the side of
SPLM, has a political history of association with
the Sudanese Communist Party. Northern conser-
vatives hold Arman’s siding with SPLM against
him, but quite a number of Northerners from all
strata of society support SPLM. Many had worked
hard on Arman’s campaign before he withdrew.
Sudan’s crises are largely rooted in constitu-
tional inadequacies that allow a Northern oligar-
chy centered domestic colonialism to pertain in
relation to marginalized hinterland regions−
Southern Sudan, Darfur, Nuba Mountains, South-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Sudan/Elections Al Bashir Wins Sudan’s Presidential Election
ern Blue Nile and Eastern Sudan. However, no
candidate stressed the fundamental need to re-
write or amend the constitution, which is crucial
to sparing the country from protracted crisis and
disintegration.
In the South incumbent Government of
Southern Sudan President Salva Kiir Mayardit
won on the SPLM ticket with 93% of the vote.
Former foreign minister, SPLM defector, Dr. Lam
Akol, won the remaining 7% as candidate for
SPLM-Democratic Change. Lam rejected the re-
sults, accusing his former party of rigging. "The
elections were rigged and the percentage of the
votes obtained by the president of South Sudan
shows this," said the SPLM-DC leader in a press
conference held in Khartoum with other leaders
of Southern Sudan opposition parties, including
Bona Malual and Joseph Lago. Dr. Lam was
backed by an 8 party opposition alliance that in-
cluded his SPLM-DC founded last year. Other par-
ties in the South Sudan Political Party Alliance
(SSPPA) were Sudan African National Union
(SANU), United Democratic Salvation Front
(UDSF), United Democratic Party, Sudan National
Labor Party, USAP-2, South Sudan Democratic
Forum and South-Sudan Democratic Front. Link-
ing his rejection to the outcome of the election
with prospects for next January’s referendum, Dr.
Lam Akol averred, "I think the rigging will have a
negative impact on the referendum. If people
remain silent in the face of this cheating, the ref-
erendum itself will be rigged." Presidential ad-
viser, Bona Maluwal, who is also the South Sudan
Democratic Forum (SSDF) leader and Joseph Lago
former vice president and UDSF leader echoed
Akol’s accusation of fraud and lack of democratic
atmosphere in the South.
Following announcement of the election re-
sults South Sudan Presidential Political Affairs
Advisor Lieutenant General Lual Diing Wol, who is
also a SPLM Political Bureau member, disclosed
his intention to decline appointment in the up-
coming government, expressing his discontent
with the conduct of the elections. According to
him, "The results announced by the National Elec-
tions Commission and accepted by the SPLM did
not in any way meet any of the items of the SPLM
vision, instead it has violated constitution and
vision of the SPLM." He added, “I have seen that
this upcoming government will not be the gov-
ernment of the people by the people and for the
people." He was speaking to Sudan Tribune.Com
in Nairobi.
Former Sudanese Foreign Minister Dr. Lam Akol (above)
backed by an 8 party opposition front received only 7% of the
Government of South Sudan presidential vote and alleged the
election had been rigged.
European Union and Carter Center observer
teams rated the entire election below interna-
tional standards, but Al Bashir praised the peace-
ful and incident free manner in which Sudanese
went to the polls, noting "the civilized and re-
spectful conduct during these elections, which
saw no clashes or friction." Former US President
Jimmy Carter said he believed the international
community would recognize the winners despite
the irregularities. Spokesman Kunle Adeyemi for
the African Union observer mission in Sudan
chaired by former Ghanaian president John
Kufuor, said, "What happened in Sudan was a
historical event and a great achievement for Su-
danese people." Arab League observer mission
head Salah Halima said, "We cannot say that the
Sudanese elections have met international stan-
dards, but that does not reduce what has hap-
pened, which is an important transition."
Sadiq El Mahdi accused the United States of
imposing NCP on the country as part of a conspir-
acy to disintegrate Sudan. However, indications
from the UN, the United States and Europe are
that there is serious concern that an independent
South Sudan, which would join the comity of na-
tions with the dubious distinction of being the
world’s least developed country and with its his-
tory of communal violence and corruption since
gaining autonomy under the 2005 Comprehen-
sive Peace Agreement could become a liability on
the international community.
When African Union Commission Chairper-
son Jean Ping and UN Secretary General, speak-
ing at last January’s AU Summit in Addis Ababa,
called on the international community to do all
possible to preserve Sudan’s unity, Salva Kiir
168 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Sudan/Elections Al Bashir Wins Sudan’s Presidential Election
retorted with a reminder that the choice of
unity or independence was left entirely
with the Southern Sudanese and outsiders
had no right to advocate either way in the
matter.
Al Bashir said after being declared the
winner that he would respect the results of
next January’s referendum in the South,
but immediately after the elections violent
clashes broke out along the Darfur-
Southern Sudan border, leaving 55 people
dead. The conflict along the yet un-
demarcated border between the North
and South from all reports appears to have
been between Southern soldiers and the
notorious Janjaweed militia associated
with Al Bashir’s ruling party and the main Government of Southern Sudan President Salva Kiir Ma-
perpetrators of the atrocities that led to his in- yardit, seen here with President Hu Jintao while on an
dictment by the ICC. According to official reports, official visit to China, said at his inauguration on May
the clashes began over grazing rights for cattle. 20th that as the ruling National Congress Parry had not
Although the Janjaweed have been given the im- made unity attractive, as agreed in the Comprehensive
age of being synonymous with Darfur’s Arabs, Peace Agreement signed in January 2005 ending the 22
intellectuals from Arab nomad communities in year North-South Civil War, the proposition of unity was
the region describe them as a “bunch of no longer in consideration and Southerners should look
forward to an independent South Sudan following next
[ethnically) assorted bandits”. Specialist on Dar-
January’s referendum. The Government of Southern Su-
fur tribal affairs El Fatih Abdulaziz El Nabi, concur- dan now receives 49% of the income from oil it produces,
ring with this view, maintains that there is no out of which the oil producing states in the region receive
pure African or Arab tribe in Darfur and that 2%. Jonglei State, bordering Ethiopia, which has reserves
tribes have become like associations people join estimated at 3 to 5 billion barrels has opposed exploita-
to advance personal and clique agendas. Commu- tion of its oil on these terms, pointing out that the returns
nity leaders in Darfur have described the conflict did not compensate for the inevitable environmental
in the region as artificial and fueled by leaders in damage.
Khartoum to avoid constitutional and political
reforms. NCP control of the economy and government
Perennial Sudan affairs commentator Eric organs have led to gross political naiveté and gul-
Reeves predicts that with his newly won man- libility.
date, Al Bashir will escalate violence against the Although the NCP regime is notoriously cor-
people of Darfur. “There has already been a sharp rupt it has brought unprecedented socio-
increase in military activity by the Khartoum re- economic progress to Sudan, providing low cost
gime and its Janjaweed militia allies over the past health care through the National Health Insur-
four months, particularly in the Jebel Marra and ance scheme, in addition to stable electricity and
Jebel Moon regions, where rebel presence is water supply and a world class telecommunica-
most significant. All signs since the elections sug- tions network. Real estate and infrastructural
gest an even greater increase in violence,” development in Khartoum, such as bridges across
Reeves wrote in a May 9th article entitled, “Sudan the Nile and new roads, have been phenomenal
elections augur more violence in Darfur.” while Sudan’s currency has been fairly stable for
Presidential Advisor Nafie Ali Nafie had said the past ten years, despite fluctuating somewhat
before the vote that an Al Bashir victory would with the rise and fall of petroleum prices.
prove that ICC allegations against him were false,
but beside the misinformation diet fed Sudanese
on what is happening in Darfur and other parts of
the country geographically remote from North
Central Sudan, 21 years of media censoring and
169 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Sudan/Referendum
May 20, 2010
Sudan’s Key Post-Referendum Issues
ANALYSIS
Juba — Southern Sudan will in early 2011 hold a
referendum to determine whether to remain part
of a united Sudan or become a separate state.
The referendum was a core component of the
2005 Comprehensive Peace Agreement (CPA)
that ended decades of conflict between the
Southern Sudan People's Liberation Movement
(SPLM) and the Khartoum government.
Should the south choose to separate, the two
sides will have to negotiate over various key is-
sues:
Borders - Five major border areas are in dispute.
The first, and perhaps most potentially explosive,
is around the oil-producing region of Abyei. The
region will decide in a separate referendum also
in January whether to join the south or the
north. The borders were outlined in a July 2009
ruling by the Permanent Court of Arbitration at
The Hague, but demarcation has stalled. At the
same time, the northern Misseriya community,
largely drawn out of Abyei under the new bor-
ders, has denounced the ruling.
According to SPLM secretary-general, Pagan
Amum, four other areas are in dispute: the north-
ern-most border separating Renk county in Upper
Nile from the north's White Nile state, the border-
line running north-south between the south's
Unity state and the north's Southern Kordofan
(this will determine who controls the Heglig oil
field), whether the Bahr al-Arab river forms the
exact border between the south's Bahr el-Ghazal
and Darfur in the north, and which river forms the
exact western-most dividing line between West-
ern Bahr el-Ghazal and Southern Darfur.
Oil - An estimated 82-95 percent of the oil fields
are in the south (depending on where the border
is drawn). Oil revenue accounts for 98 percent of
Southern Sudan's government revenue, and 60
percent of the national budget (according to 2008
figures). The sole export route for the landlocked
south is a pipeline running to the north to Port
Sudan on the Red Sea.
170
Under the CPA, the two sides divide proceeds
from oil pumped in the south. They will have to
negotiate how to share oil revenue, as well as
any user fees levied against the south for using
the pipeline and refineries. The two parties
must also negotiate how to honour current oil
contracts.
Water - Under a 1929 agreement between
Egypt (which had control over Sudan) and Brit-
ain, and a 1959 agreement between Egypt and
Sudan, they control up to 90 percent of the
water. Will Southern Sudan recognize these
old treaties, or will it work with Nile basin
countries in eastern Africa to work towards a
"fair" accord? If it honours the colonial pacts,
as it has indicated to the Egyptians, the south
must then negotiate with Khartoum over what
percentage of the 18.5 cubic metres of water
designated to Sudan it can claim.
Nationality - The fate of southerners living in
the north and northerners living in the south
has to be negotiated. Questions of citizenship
and rights will have to be addressed, as well as
ease of travel between the two. Egypt and Su-
dan have signed a "Four Freedoms" agree-
ment, granting Egyptians and Sudanese free
movement, residence, work, and ownership in
either of the two countries. Could something
similar be decided between the north and
south?
Debts and Assets - The south's share of Sudan's
sizeable national debt - estimated by the Inter-
national Monetary Fund in 2008 at US$34 billion
- will be another issue. Analysts say the north
will want a seceding south to take on a portion
of its public debt burden. SPLM officials have
rejected such suggestions, often accusing the
north of using that borrowed money to wage
war against southerners. There is also the ques-
tion of national assets and the properties of
state-owned companies in the south.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Sudan/Referendum
Currency - After the CPA, Sudan's official cur-
rency, the dinar, was replaced with the Suda-
nese pound. If the south secedes, will the
north and south continue under the pound? A
newly independent south could choose to cre-
ate its own currency, or switch for a period to
an established foreign currency such as the US
dollar. Analysts say a decision to maintain the
Sudanese pound on both sides could bond the
two economies together.
International agreements - A state enters
pacts every year with other countries on a va-
riety of matters. Southern Sudan would have
June 9, 2010
Oil Consortium Behind Sudan War Crimes - Aid Agencies
Frank Mulder — The entry of a Swedish-led oil
consortium into Southern Sudan in 1997 trig-
gered civil war and crimes against humanity,
claims a European coalition of aid agencies.
The European Coalition on Oil in Sudan
(ECOS) has called on the Swedish, Austrian and
Malaysian governments to investigate into the
possible complicity of the consortium in war
crimes and crimes against humanity.
When the Swedish company Lundin Oil
formed a consortium with Petronas Carigali
Overseas from Malaysia, OMV (Sudan) Explo-
ration from Austria and Sudapet from Sudan in
1997, they signed a contract with Khartoum to
drill for oil in Block 5A in Unity State, southern
Sudan.
At this time, however, the area was not
fully under government control. This set off a
spiral of violence, according to a new report by
ECOS, called 'Unpaid Debt', that covers the
period until 2003.
Although the actual perpetrators were
government forces and armed groups allied to
government forces or their opponents, their
purpose was to clear the ground for the oil
companies.
"The oil exploration played a crucial role in
the atrocities," Egbert Wesselink, coordinator of
ECOS, told IPS.
Based on comprehensive evidence, Wes-
171
Oil Consortium Behind War Crimes
to decide whether to honour international
agreements reached by Sudan, or whether to
transfer or scrap some.
Security - The two parties must agree on what
happens to key aspects of national security.
They will have to decide how to demobilize the
Joint Integrated Units and what would happen
to the southern portion of Sudan's national
intelligence apparatus.
[ This report does not necessarily reflect the
views of the United Nations ]
selink's report estimates that 12,000 people
were killed or died from hunger or war-related
diseases. Many were raped and tortured, half
a million cattle was lost and almost 200,000
people were violently displaced.
"The companies should have been aware
of the abuses, but they continued to work with
the government and its army," Wesselink said.
Wesselink now calls on the respective govern-
ments to investigate whether the companies
were complicit in the commission of war
crimes and crimes against humanity by others.
"We specifically bring this case to the
Swedish and Austrian governments, as these
have acknowledged their commitment to the
Comprehensive Peace Agreement in Sudan,"
said Wesselink. This agreement created the
right to compensation for injustices resulting
from oil exploitation. "This promise remains
unfulfilled to date."
"First they started with an aerial bom-
bardment, which lasted several days," recalled
Rev. James Koung Ninrew, general secretary of
the peace council in the region. The inhabi-
tants of his town, Koch, in Unity State, died or
fled. "Secondly, ground troops came to check
the situation, killing the remaining population
and setting the villages on fire. Finally they
declared the area safe and the oil companies
came in."
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Africa/Sudan/Referendum Oil Consortium Behind War Crimes

The consortium was not directly involved in the

atrocities, Ninrew explained to IPS.
"But it was the consortium that demanded a
safe area for its operations," Ninrew said.
"Moreover, without the contracts the govern-
ment wouldn't have had money to buy gunships
and ammunition. As soon as the troops secured
the area, they moved to the next, systematically,
and the companies followed, until the whole
area of Block 5A was brought under control. The
companies could see the villages still burning."
Throughout the war in Block 5A the consor- Southern Sudanese child victim of civil war
tium worked alongside the perpetrators of inter-
national crimes, the report states. Their infrastruc-
ture even enabled the commission of crimes. For
example, an important bridge and a road ex-
panded the geographic reach of armed groups and
enabled year-round access to communities that
were formerly isolated in this huge, swampy, flat
area on the west bank of the White Nile.
Lundin Oil's spokesperson was not available
to IPS. However, in an open letter to sharehold-
ers, written this week, Ian Lundin, chairman of
the board, writes that ECOS "reiterates infer-
ences, insinuations and false allegations based on
partisan and misleading information which were
refuted [years before]." Beneficiaries of the World Food Program rations for those in
"Lundin contributed to peace and stability in Disarmament, Demobilization & Reintegration program for
former civil war combatants scrambling over foodstuffs
the region", and was "actively engaged with
brought to them at Lauro Village, Budy County, Eastern Equa-
stakeholders," the letter claims. toria State, South Sudan (Below) Southern Sudanese IDP
According to Wesselink, Lundin Oil made an watching TV in Khartoum
extremely biased selection of stakeholders for
their dialogue. "Their stakeholders consisted of
two of the political leaders in the region. But when
these leaders turned against the consortium, they
chose other stakeholders".
The Swedish foreign affairs ministry has re-
fused to react to the report. "We don't comment
on individual companies and we don't investigate
them," spokeswoman Irena Busic told IPS. "The
prosecutor will do that."
The ministry is hiding behind the possibility ECOS estimates the necessary compensa-
of a criminal prosecution, holds Wesselink. "They tion at 300 million US dollars.
miss our point. There are good reasons for crimi- "The local people now are very bitter,"
nal punishment, but that's not our objective. explained Ninrew. "They want the company to
That's not what the people of southern Sudan acknowledge they made mistakes. That also
are waiting for. We want the governments to means compensation, to the people who suf-
ensure appropriate compensation for all persons fered damages."
whose rights have been violated, and the compa- "Lundin thinks this storm will go over,"
nies have to pay their fair share." Wesselink said. "We think this time it won't."

172 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

173
 Asia/Afghanistan/Geological Survey

Afghanistan’s trillions in mineral wealth

Report

P resident Hamid Karzai’s spokesman

announced in mid June that the
United States Geological Survey under con-
tract from the Afghan government released
a report confirming the country has vast
mineral wealth. "The result of the survey ...
has shown that Afghanistan has mineral
resources worth $1 trillion," said Omar.
"This is not an overall survey of all minerals
in Afghanistan. Whatever has been found in
this survey is worth $1 trillion."
President Karzai at a May 13 event
with U.S. Secretary of State Hilary Clinton at
the U.S. Institute of Peace in Washington
Afghan President Hamid Karzai mandated to pursue peace
said discovery of the mineral resources brings a
with Taliban, which is essential for full exploitation of mineral
“massive opportunity.” Karzai said his country’s resources.
mineral wealth could possibly be worth as much
as $3 trillion.
noted that many deposits are in Taliban territory
The New York Times reported senior Ameri-
which is too dangerous for commercial mining
can officials saying the mineral wealth found by
operations.
the geological survey was enough to fundamen-
Geologists have long known that Afghani-
tally alter the Afghan economy and possibly the
stan was mineral rich but production of the re-
war as well. Minerals discovered include iron,
sources had not been developed because of
copper, cobalt, gold and lithium, an important
years of armed conflict and political instability. It
mineral used in the manufacture of batteries for
has also been reported that Afghanistan scien-
cell phones and laptop computers. The Times
tists have since the early 1950s known of their
quoted a Pentagon memorandum saying Afghani-
country’s mineral wealth but kept it secret out of
stan could become the Saudi Arabia of lithium.
concern that the political situation was not right
Mining analyst Charles Kernot at Evolution Securi-
for reaping Afghanistan’s people optimal benefit.
ties Ltd. in London, said it typically takes three to
The Soviets during their occupation of Afghani-
five years to get a lithium mine operating and
stan in the 1980s had mining experts survey the
electrical power and other infrastructures are
country’s mineral resources and the U.S. Geologi-
necessary. Although the lithium market is com-
cal Survey made use of their data in its initial ae-
petitive the prospects for electric cars suggest a
rial survey in 2006.
an upbeat future.
On June 4th Afghanistan’s religious and po-
Niobium, a soft metal used in producing
litical leaders, at the conclusion of a three day
semiconducting steel, was also found plentiful.
peace jirga gave President Karzai a mandate to
The Times quoted General Petraeus saying,
start a peace process to end conflict with the
"There is stunning potential here," adding, "There
Taliban.
are a lot of ifs, of course, but I think potentially it
is hugely significant." The U.S. Geological report
174 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China
China leads global economic recovery
Despite China’s double digit growth in the first half of 2010,
and a 55.1% first quarter industrial production increase,
Shanghai Stock Exchange (building pictured above), usually
the world’s fastest growing, lost 18.09% of it capitalization
value in the second quarter. Hong Kong’s Hang Seng, China’s
highest capitalized stock market also declined, though
slightly, during the second quarter.
W hile major economies are tenuously out of
recession, China is pushing ahead, sustain-
ing double digit growth. With revised 2009 GDP
figures showing that it has officially passed Japan
as the world’s second largest economy, China
posted an incredible 11.9% growth in the first
quarter followed by 10.3% in the second. China’s
nominal GDP at the end of 2009 was $5.296 tril-
lion, according to China’s National Bureau of Sta-
tistics after having revised last year’s growth from
8.7% up to 9.1%. On the International Monetary
Fund’s purchasing power parity (PPP) GDP list
China at the end of 2009 more than doubled Ja-
pan at $8.765 trillion to $4.159 trillion.
The United States of America’s $14.093 tril-
lion economy by comparison grew 2.7% in the first
quarter of 2010 but the unemployment rate was a
worrisome 9.5%, while inflation was contained at
1.1% Having posted its highest growth rate in six
years for the last quarter of 2009, 5.6%, the USA
economic recovery is not looking in the least
bleak, but pulling down unemployment and reduc-
ing the national debt will require sustaining
growth above 5%, which is not happening. More-
over, the trend to budget cutting in the face of
highly risky sovereign debt to GDP rations could
175
Report
send the U.S. and marginally growing economies
into double dip recession.
Japan, now the world’s third largest econ-
omy with GDP at $5.085 trillion kept pace posting
5.5% expansion in last year’s 4th quarter and hold-
ing up with 5% growth for the first quarter of
2010. Japanese unemployment was high by his-
torical comparisons at 5.2%, while deflation set in
at -.9%.
Sheng Laiyun, a spokesman at China’s statis-
tics bureau reported China's consumer price in-
dex rose 2.9% in June, down from May's 3.1% rise
and significantly below economists' expectations
of a 3.3% rise. CPI fell 0.6% in June from May,
mainly due to lower vegetable and fruit prices.
The producer price index rose 6.4% in June, lower
than May's 7.1% rise and economists' forecast of
a 6.8% increase.
China’s industrial production rose 13.7% in
June, down from May's 16.5% increase and
economists' expectations of a 14.9% rise. Fixed-
asset investment in urban areas rose 25.5% in the
January-June period, down from a growth rate of
25.9% in the January-May period. Economists had
expected a 25.2% rise.
China’s Ministry of Commerce reported that
$12.5 billion worth of foreign direct investment
came in during June, up 39.6% from a year earlier
and an improvement on May's 27.48% rise.
Pointing out that China had managed to
achieve high economic growth, high employment
and low inflation" in the first half, Sheng Laiyun
reiterated that Beijing would keep its macroeco-
nomic policies stable and flexible to cope with
any changes in the domestic and global economic
situation. He also pointed out that the growth
rate for the period was in line with historic aver-
ages.
Analyst Liu Li predicts that in the coming
months China's exports may begin to feel the
impact of the euro zone's debt crisis. Also, ac-
cording to Li most analysts think the govern-
ment's controls on home buying will lead to a
further slowdown in construction, which has
been an important driver of China's growth.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China/Cross Strait Relations
Beijing-Taipei Trade & Investment Pact
Report
W ith mainland China’s trade representative
Chen Yunlin hailing the agreement as based
on “equal consultation and mutual benefits”, Bei-
jing and Taipei on June 29th took a major step to-
wards integration of their economies, signing the
historic Economic Cooperation Framework Agree-
ment (ECFA) in Chongqing, the city Chaing Kai-shek
made his provisional capital during the 1937-1945
war to repel Japan’s invasion of China.
China’s state news agency Xinhua reported
that The People’s Republic of China and Taiwan
agreed in the 16 part pact to “gradually reduce and
remove trade and investment barriers and create a
fair environment.” In April 2009 Chiang Pin-kung of
the Straits Exchange Foundation and Chen Yunlin of
China’s Association for Relations Across the Taiwan
Straits signed on behalf of their organizations an
agreement to “realize the normalization of cross-
strait economic ties,” paving the way for the June
29, 2010 ECFA.
The April 2009 agreement was the third in a
series following Ma Ying-jeou’s election as presi-
dent of Taiwan. He campaigned for Taiwan’s presi-
dency promising to improve relations with
mainland China. Prior to last year’s agreement, Tai-
wan based investors were active in China but
mainland Chinese companies needed permission
from the government in Taipei to invest in Taiwan.
Four days after the April 26, 2009 agreement, state
owned China Mobile announced it would buy a 12%
stake in Far East Tone, one of Taiwan’s three larg-
est telecommunications operators, for $529 million.
Immediately following the announcement $997
million in foreign investment poured into Taiwan’s
capital market.
The ruling Chinese Communist Party has con-
sidered Taiwan a renegade province sequel to
Chaing Kai-shek having established a government
there in 1949 upon losing the civil war fought
against Mao-Zedong’s CCP. The issue of relations
with CCP governed Beijing has become increasingly
contentious in Taiwan as China grows wealthier and
176
China’s President Hu Jintao prior to signing of the ECFA
pledged more business opportunities on the mainland for
Taiwanese investors
increasingly influential in world affairs.
Analyzing motives behind the historic June 2010
development, Kao Huei of the National Kinmen Insti-
tute of Technology in Taiwan, averred: "For Taiwan,
this is purely an economic deal, while for China, this is
a political move. Mainland China now sees cross-strait
relations at a stage of peaceful development and the
signing of ECFA fits into that narrative. In the long
term, what China wants to achieve with peaceful de-
velopment is peaceful unification with Taiwan."
On June 4th, looking forward to signing the ECFA,
Taiwan’s President Ma Ying-jeou put Beijing on notice
that it should not try to prevent Taipei signing free
trade agreements with other countries.
As of June 30, 2010, Taiwan private investment in
China totaled $5.74 billion. During the first half of the
year Taiwan’s Ministry of Economic Affairs approved
217 investment projects slated for China.
Members of the opposition Democratic Progres-
sive Party criticized Ma Ying-jeou’s government for not
allowing more public debate on the pact. Thousands
of Taiwanese demonstrated in the streets against it,
maintaining that it would open the island to a flood of
cheaper Chinese goods, putting Taiwanese out of jobs.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China/Health & Welfare
Chinese president calls for universal basic health care
May 31, 2010
C hinese President Hu Jintao has asked gov-
ernments at different levels to endeavor to
ensure all urban and rural residents to be cov-
ered by basic health care service, a key livelihood
issue in the country.
Hu, also General Secretary of the Communist
Party of China (CPC) Central Committee, made
the call at a group study of the members of the
Political Bureau of the CPC Central Committee on
Friday afternoon, said a statement issued on Sat-
urday.
The political bureau members held discussions
with two research fellows - Rao Keqin from the
Ministry of Health and Ge Yanfeng from the State
Council's Development Research Center - who
made speeches on the issues of China's heath
care reform and global health care development.
Hu said the reform must realize the goal of basic
health care for everyone and it was a major task
to speed up the building of a basic health care
system that covers both rural and urban resi-
dents.
177
China’s President
Hu Jintao
China launched its massive health care reform last
year, which seeks to provide adequate and afford-
able health care services to all. The State Council, or
Cabinet, issued a circular last month detailing spe-
cific goals and steps for future reforms.
Hu pledged more government involvement in and
funding for health care services, which he said must
be public-oriented.
He said ensuring people's rights to health must be a
top priority for governments and CPC committees of
all levels and urged them to resolutely work to
achieve the reform's success.
In his speech, Hu also called for more efforts to es-
tablish a national system of essential medicines,
enhance health care service at grassroots level, and
advance the pilot reform of state-owned hospitals.
Source: Xinhua
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China/International Relations
Chinese VP's four-nation tour promotes friendship, mutual
trust– official
BEIJING, June 24 (Xinhua) -- Chinese Vice President Xi
Jinping's visits to Bangladesh, Laos, New Zealand and
Australia has contributed to promoting friendship,
mutual trust and cooperation between China and
these countries, a senior Chinese official said Thurs-
day.
Xi paid official visits to the four nations between
June 14 and June 24, meeting with leaders and ex-
changing views on a wide range of issues, witnessing
the signing of a series of bilateral cooperation agree-
ments, addressing business forums and attending cul-
tural activities.
"The visits boasted great achievements. It was a
successful trip of friendship and substantial coopera-
tion," said China's Vice Foreign Minister Zhang Zhijun,
who accompanied Xi on the tour.
During the 11-days of visits, Xi visited seven cities
in four nations and attended more than 50 official
activities, which were reported abundantly and posi-
tively by the media of the host countries and interna-
tional community, Zhang said.
CLOSER FRIENDSHIP, MUTUAL TRUST
Senior officials and the public, especially the business
world, warmly welcomed Xi's visits. The leaders
reached important agreements in consolidating and
enhancing bilateral relations, Zhang said.
It was widely believed the tour had great signifi-
cance for promoting friendship and mutual trust and
expanding pragmatic cooperation, he said.
Zhang noted large-scale economic and trade ac-
tivities held during Xi's visits aroused widespread in-
terests in these countries.
Xi pledged to establish a closer comprehensive
partnership of cooperation between China and Bang-
ladesh and to strengthen the comprehensive strategic
cooperative partnership with Laos.
In New Zealand, Xi urged both sides to develop
the potential for economic cooperation while making
full use of the China-New Zealand Free Trade Agree-
ment (FTA), and to make trade and investment more
balanced, smooth and comprehensive.
In his visit to Australia, Xi said China was willing
to promote bilateral political and strategic mutual
trust, and dedicate to a long-term stable and compre-
hensive cooperative partnership.
Xi also introduced China's views on climate
change, the Korean peninsula situation, and regional
peace, stability and cooperation.
"His introduction has increased all sides' under-
standing of China's stance on the key issues," Zhang
said.
178
COOPERATION FOR
COLLABORATIVE DE-
VELOPMENT
An important theme of
Xi's trip was strengthen-
ing wide, mutually
beneficial and prag-
matic cooperation. He
sent a clear message to
the world that China
was ready to develop
economic and trade ties
with other countries,
Zhang said.
"Through meetings and talks on various occa-
sions, the vice president set the directions and priori-
ties of cooperation, thus strengthening the willingness
of the four countries to cooperate with China."
Xi promised China would continue to provide
Bangladesh with adequate assistance, encouraging
more Chinese enterprises to invest there. He also
raised specific suggestions on promoting the trade
between China and Laos.
When talking about Xi's speeches on economic
and trade cooperation in New Zealand and Australia,
Zhang said Xi's ideas gained close attention and a
warm response in the two countries and the interna-
tional community.
While attending the opening ceremony of the
China-New Zealand FTA Seminar, Xi put forward a four
-point proposal to promote comprehensive coopera-
tion in trade and investment.
Speaking to a business luncheon, Xi said Australia
and China should boost strategic cooperation on en-
ergy and resources, push for a free trade agreement
and oppose protectionism in trade and investment.
WIDER HUMANITARIAN EXCHANGES
The Chinese vice president called for more exten-
sive cultural communications, citing the Shanghai
World Expo as an ideal opportunity for strengthening
mutual understanding between the peoples.
Xi met those dedicated to promoting Bangladesh-
China friendship and Laotians who studied in Beijing in
the 1960s. In New Zealand and Australia, he attended
various ceremonies at Confucius institutes and re-
search centers cooperating with Chinese scholars.
All these showed the importance the Chinese leader
has attached to the humanitarian exchanges, Zhang
said.
After a 30,000 km tour, Xi and his delegation ar-
rived in Beijing Thursday afternoon.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China/International Relations
France’s Sarkozy in China
Report
F rance’s President Nicolas Sarkozy was in China
for a three day official visit beginning April 29.
It was his fourth visit to China as president, but the
first since relations between Paris and Beijing
chilled in 2008 over the French president’s meeting
with Tibet’s exiled Dalai Lama. Beijing reacted with
cancelation of the Sino-European Summit. Prior to
Sarkozy meeting the Dalai Lama, accused by Beijing
of seeking separation of Tibet from China, relations
between the two countries soured when Free Tibet
activists dogged the Beijing Olympic torch relay
passing through Paris. At the time Chinese called
for boycott of French goods; then Chinese Premier
Wen Jiabao bypassed France on his late 2008 confi-
dence building tour of Europe. The prelude to this
April’s visit was the meeting China’s President Hu
Jintao and President Sarkozy had on the sidelines of
the China-European Union Summit in Prague during
April 2009. Following that meeting a joint state-
ment was issued in which France committed to ad-
here to the one China policy, acknowledged that
Tibet was an inseparable part of China’s territory
and promised not to support any activities calling
for an independent Tibet.
China’s $7.7 billion trade deficit with France in
the first quarter of this year highlights the benefit
of having this nation of 1.3 billion people as a trad-
ing partner and during his visit Sarkozy pressed for
more sales to China, urging President Hu Jintao to
purchase French nuclear technology and equip-
ment. Although Sarkozy, travelling with 20 French
transnational corporation executives, didn’t come
away from this fence mending visit to China with
any mention of big contracts, he is looking forward
to signing an agreement on civilian nuclear power
with China during Hu Jintao’s visit to France sched-
uled for August.
Coming to geopolitics, Sarkozy sought China’s
support for new UN sanctions against Iran; some-
thing China which imports 12% of its oil from the
Islamic Republic would prefer avoiding. The French
president however showed sensitivity to the Chi-
179
China’s President Hu Jintao and French President Nicolas
Sarkozy in Beijing at the start of Mr. Sarkozy’s end of April
official visit. President Sarkozy was President Hu Jintao’s
guest at the opening of the World Expo 2010 in Shanghai
nese position, telling his counterpart that he com-
pletely understands China’s preference for dialogue
but in the event dialogue is failing sanctions would
be the only option. Cautious not to press for a con-
clusive Chinese position on the issue Mr. Sarkozy
concluded discussion of the matter saying, “….we
are willing to discuss this problem together at an
appropriate time.”
Like the Americans, the French contend that
China’s currency, the renminbi, is undervalued, but
Sarkozy did not press the devaluation demand dur-
ing his discussion with Hu on global monetary re-
form. “France’s belief is that it is totally unproduc-
tive to make accusations against one another,” Mr.
Sarkozy said, according to Global Times. “It is far
more intelligent to prepare the necessary evolution
of the monetary system in the 21st century.” Wash-
ington complains that keeping the renminbi under-
valued reduces the cost of Chinese production and
gives the country an unfair trade advantage in the
global market, but American investors in China see
Washington’s position in this inadvertently aimed at
cutting returns on their investments.
Jian Junbo, an assistant professor at the Fu-
dan’s University’s Institute of International Studies
in Shanghai summarized President Sarkozy’s stance
during the visit as at once conciliatory and prag-
matic, extending a hand of cooperation to China on
the big issues of the 21st century.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China/News Briefs
Chinese president, Canadian PM
talk on bilateral ties
Visiting Chinese President Hu Jintao (L) holds talks with Canadian Prime Minister Stephen Harper in Ottawa, Can-
ada, June 24, 2010. (Xinhua/Fan Rujun)
OTTAWA, June 24 (Xinhua) -- Visiting Chinese
President Hu Jintao met Canadian Prime Minis-
ter Stephen Harper on Thursday for talks on the
development of China-Canada ties.
The two leaders are also expected to ex-
change views on major global and regional is-
sues of common concern, said Chinese diplo-
mats.
According to the schedule, Hu and Harper
will attend a signing ceremony of cooperation
documents following their talks.
Hu flew into Ottawa on Wednesday for a
state visit to Canada.
This year marks the 40th anniversary of the
establishment of diplomatic relations between
China and Canada.
180
Air China to buy 20 Boeing
planes for $13.98bn
HONG KONG, June 25 (Xinhua) -- Air China,
China's leading carrier listed in Hong Kong, said
late Friday that it would pay 13.98 billion U.S.
dollars to buy 20 Boeing 737-800 planes.
In a statement filed to the HK stock ex-
change, the carrier said the cost would be
"payable by cash in installments" and it would "
take delivery of the Boeing Aircraft in stages
from 2013 to 2015".
The transaction will be funded through
cash generated from Air China's business opera-
tions, commercial bank loans and other financ-
ing instruments of Air China, said the statement.
Editor: Zhang Xiang
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China/News Briefs
Boeing CEO says China to continue to be
U.S. major market, partner
by Jing Zhao Cesarone
CHICAGO, May 26 (Xinhua) -- China will con-
tinue to be both a major market and partner to
the United States, supporting thousands of U.S.
jobs and contributing significantly to the U.S.
balance of trade, said CEO of a Fortune 100
company in Chicago on Wednesday.
James McNerney Jr., chairman, president
and CEO of the Boeing company, made the
statement at a luncheon organized by The Chi-
cago Council On Global Affairs as part of its Cor-
porate Program: Focus on China.
McNerney started his speech by commend-
ing Secretary of State Hilary Clinton and Treas-
ury Secretary Tim Geithner for the progress
their teams made this week at the Sino-U.S.
Strategic and Economic Dialogue in Beijing.
"It is vitally important that U.S. leaders are
engaged in supporting U.S. trade relationships.
Expanded engagement in international markets,
combined with the recovery of our financial ser-
vice markets, is critical to accelerating our over-
all economic recovery," he said.
In 1972, then President Richard Nixon
landed in Beijing aboard Air Force One - a Boe-
ing 707 - marking the first visit of a U.S. presi-
dent to China. Boeing has been one of the few
American companies present in China since dip-
181
Air China Boeing in flight
lomatic and economic channels were reopened.
"That Boeing 707 is truly the game-
changing airplane of its time. China ordered ten
Boeing 707 jetliners soon after the visit, setting
in motion a tremendously productive relation-
ship between a company (Boeing) and a country
(China) – a relationship that continues today
and in many ways has become symbolic of the
four decades of cooperation between our two
nations," McNerney said.
When talking about the significant changes
in China, McNerney said, "One of the most im-
portant changes in China that I have witnessed
– the rapid growth in personal incomes. A grow-
ing middle class in China is dramatically reshap-
ing the country' s domestic economy and has
global economic impact too."
Regarding Boeing's growing business with
China, the CEO exclaimed, "China has bought
more than any country in the world (except the
U.S.). It has a total of 1,560 airplanes (almost 53
percent of them are Boeing airplanes), and the
average age of these planes is just six and a half
years - meaning that China also has one of the
youngest fleets in the region."
Commenting on the relationship between
China and the United States, he noted, "I be-
lieve the U.S and China are already interde-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China/News Briefs China to continue to be U.S. major market, partner
China plans bio-fuels industry
with Boeing and Honeywell
Boeing chairman, president and
CEO James McNerney Jr.,
pendent and growing more so every day. In fact,
our interdependence with China is key to the U.S.
achieving President Obama' s goal of doubling
America's exports over the next five years – an
increase projected to support two million Ameri-
can jobs at a time when we really need them."
"I expect that the U.S.-China relationship will
always be complex, but that global interdepend-
ence in business will help keep both nations moti-
vated to work out their differences construc-
tively," he added.
McNerney gave an example to illustrate his
point. "Despite ongoing debates on a number of
issues, the two nations have worked very closely
and effectively to navigate through the global fi-
nancial crisis."
"The important concept here is maintaining
dialogue between the two nations as well as be-
tween industry and the respective governments,
not only to address issues of concern but also to
expand existing partnerships and create new
ones," he added.
"The more we work with out counterparts in
Chinese business and government, the more we
will develop mutual understanding and influ-
ence."
McNerney has been chairman of the board,
president and CEO of Boeing since July 2005. He
has served as a member of the company's board
since 2001. McNerney oversees the strategic di-
rection of the 68.3-billion-dollar aerospace com-
pany.
With nearly 160,000 employees, Boeing is
the largest manufacturer of commercial jetliners
182
and military aircraft, with capabilities in rotor-
craft, electronic and defense systems, missiles,
satellites, and advanced information and com-
munications systems.
Editor: An
Culled from Air Cargo World
Boeing, PetroChina and Air China have begun to
evaluate setting up a sustainable aviation bio-
fuels industry in China. Other US participants in-
clude AECOM, Honeywell's UOP and United Tech-
nologies.
Air China, PetroChina, Boeing and Honeywell’s
UOP will conduct an inaugural flight using sustain-
able bio-fuels derived from biomass grown and
processed in China. PetroChina will provide the
biomass, which be processed into jet fuel by UOP.
The internal China flight will highlight the viability
of the entire supply chain– from seed to flight.
The project will look at all phases of sustain-
able aviation bio-fuel development including
agronomy, energy inputs and outputs, life cycle
emissions analysis, infrastructure and government
policy support.
Potential plant sources being considered are
only ones that don't distort the global food-chain,
compete with fresh water resources or lead to
unintended land use change.
Boeing China president David Wang com-
mented: "Sustainable bio-fuels can help reduce
carbon emissions while offering the potential to
lessen aviation's dependence on fossil fuels."
In a related move, Boeing Research & Tech-
nology and the Chinese Academy of Science's
Qingdao Institute of Bio-energy and Bioprocess
Technology have agreed to include other research
institutions and aviation supply chain participants
as part of their efforts in algae-based aviation bio-
fuel development.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/China
Shanghai Expo
Report
Shanghai Expo grounds’ south gate entrance; at 5.28sq. km it is the largest fair site ever
E xpo 2010 Shanghai China opened for its 6
month run on May 1, scheduled to close Oc-
tober 31. More than 190 countries and 50 interna-
tional organizations registered to participate. Be-
tween 70 to 100 million visitors are expected,
mostly Chinese. By the end of June there had al-
ready been over 20 million visitors, including
French President Nicolas Sarkozy.
A number of Chinese companies have pavil-
ions and Cocoa Cola has one of the few foreign
corporate pavilions. Most pavilions are country
representative.
Expo spokesman Xu Wei says, "It is a big plat-
form, a big event for cultural exchanges. We are
bringing the whole world – different countries,
different peoples – to this area, so it's a good op-
portunity for Chinese people to have 'face to face'
contact with international society."
China won the vote to host the World Expo
2010 at the 132nd meeting of the International
Exhibitions Bureau held on December 3, 2002 in
the Prince of Monaco Palace in Monte Carlo, pre-
vailing against Yeosu, South Korea which won the
2012 World Expo and Moscow.
Before closing at the end of October Shanghai
Expos is scheduled to have had 20,000 perform-
ances, many of them by popular Chinese singers.
Jackie Chan wrote City, the Expo’s official theme
song, which he performed at the opening cere-
mony.
183
African Union Chairman President Bingu wa
Mutharika of Malawi was at the opening cere-
mony with Chinese President Hu Jintao who con-
ducted the formal opening.
Mutharika expressed satisfaction with the
green energy theme of the African pavilion. In
addition to the AU Pavilion 44 Africa countries
have national pavilions at the Expo.
The Caribbean is represented by 8 national
pavilions in addition to the Caribbean Community
Pavilion.
Shanghai spent at least $45 billion on hosting
World Expo 2010, substantially improving the
city’s infrastructure, including a new mass transit
train system.
Shanghai is China’s largest city and has been
the mainland’s commercial center since the mid-
dle of the 19th century, largely owing to its har-
bor which made it the country’s principal port for
foreign trade. Like New York it is not only a
coastal city but sits at the mouth of a river– the
Yangtze.
As of 2005 Shanghai with a population of
19.2 million and a per capita income of $11,500,
about double that national per capita, became
the world’s busiest seaport. Shanghai Stock Ex-
change is the world’s fastest growing . In line with
its own current focus, the theme of the Shanghai
Expo 2010 is “Better City– Better Life”.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Asia/China Shanghai Expo

South Africa’s Expo Pavilion adopted the theme, Rise

of a Modern Economy
Artists’ perception of exterior of African Union Pavilion
projecting the theme: Great benefits of clean energy on
Africa’s urban management

Liberian Pavilion on the theme: A safe city is a peaceful

city

Botswana Expo Pavilion sporting the theme, A Heritage of

Peace

Ethiopian Pavilion theme: Blended legacy of cities;

the Ethiopian experience

Egypt’s fantastic Expo Pavilion with the theme: Cairo, Below is the Caribbean Community Pavilion asserting
Mother of the World, a city that keeps reinventing itself the theme: Many islands; different experiences

184 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China Shanghai Expo

Woman posing in front of a work of art at the African Union Pavilion at World Expo 2010 Shanghai

Ghanaian Pavilion themed “Garden Cities”

Sierra Leone Pavilion themed Growth and more urban
growth

Côte d’Ivoire Pavilion themed “Cohabitation of diverse cul-

tures in the city”
Kenya’s Pavilion themed “Cities of discovery and
harmony”

Zimbabwe’s Pavilion (right) themed ‘Transforming our

cities for a better life”

185 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China Shanghai Expo

Clockwise from top: (1) Canadian Pavilion (2) Singapore

Pavilion (3) German; (4) Swedish (5) Norwegian (6) Dan-
ish Pavilion (7) American Pavilion (8) Spanish Pavilion (9)
French Pavilion (10) and Taiwan Pavilion

186 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China Shanghai Expo

Polish Pavilion Italian Pavilion interior

Mermaid sculpture Outside Danish Pavilion Seeds Cathedral inside British Pavilion

Expo Opening Night Fireworks

North Korea Pavilion Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
187
 Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show

Auto China 2010

Report

A Beijing Auto Show fashion model accompanies Chana EV Concept, a plug in, charge and drive electric two-seater
produced by China’s Changan Automotive Group; below right is the Chana EV driving compartment with iPod.

A uto China 2010, the Beijing International

Automotive Exhibition, held from April 23 to
May 2, with the first 2 days reserved for the press,
the following two for trade talks and deals; then
public viewing began on the 27th. With exotic mus-
cle cars such as Lamborghini (accompanied by the
company’s CEO) on display companies showcased
their latest energy saving technologies, highlight-
ing the official focus of the exhibit on green tech-
nology. Themed “Imagining the Green Future,”
Auto China 2010 featured 65 concept vehicles and
89 debut models among 990 exhibits from 16
countries.
China, now the world’s largest automobile
group’s strategy would be focus on “G-Living”,
market in number of vehicles purchased, con-
referring to “green, growth and global”.
sumed 13.64 million vehicles in 2009 and pro-
The biennial Beijing Auto Show is one of
duced 13.79 million. China’s home brands Cherry
three in China, along with the Shanghai and
Automobile and BYD Auto displayed their latest
Guangzhou shows. The show’s organizers ac-
electric cars and Shanghai Automotive Industry
knowledge having improved it since the maiden
(SAIC) showcased its new electric concept car, the
edition in 1990 and many industry executives
E1. Changan Automotive Group brought 6 electric
now rank it one of the best shows on the global
cars and 4 hybrid models to Beijing Auto Show.
auto exhibition calendar. More than 80,000 peo-
CAG’s CEO told the press that going forward the
ple visited Beijing’s Auto China 2010.
188 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show

From Britain & Germany

Bentley’s flagship, the £220,000 Mulsanne (above) and Bentley Continental Flying Spur Speed (below) were on dis-
play at the Beijing Auto Show along with the Bentley Continental GT. The Mulsanne, powered by a 6.8 litre, 505hp
V8 attains a top speed of 184mph and has a 8 speed automatic transmission. The Continental Flying Spur comes in
552hp and 600hp V-12 versions, the latter attaining a top speed of 200mph. .Prices for 2010 ranged from $185,000
to $210, 000. Bentley is now owned by Germany’s Volkswagen but assembled in England, though only the Mulsanne
body is made in England.

189 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From China

China’s Red Flag Limousine is the model used by President Hu Jintao

190 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From China

Geely GL Eagle GS

191 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From Germany

Audi R8 5.2 Quattro Convertible (top) and Coupe (bottom); prices range from $115,000 for the 4.2 litre V8 420hp
version to $155,000 for the 5.2 litre V10 525hp engine convertible version, which delivers 13-20mpg

192 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From Germany

Audi unveiled this long wheelbase version of its A8 (L W12) at the Beijing Auto Show

193 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From Germany

BMW Grand Coupé concept car seen here during a road test was on display at the Beijing Auto Show

194 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show

From Germany

The world’s largest manufacturer of luxury cars chose the Beijing Auto Show for the
World Premiere of its all new BMW 535Li (long wheelbase)

195 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From Germany

BMW Vision Efficient Dynamics

Bugatti Veyron Convertible,

Bugatti Veyron, flagship of Volkswagen’s new super luxury car stable, prices start at $1.7 million; the car has
1001 horsepower that delivers top speed above 250mph

196 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From Germany

Mercedes Benz E350 convertible, 268hp, 130mph for about $60,000

Mercedes-Benz SLS AMG 2 seat sports car

197 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show

From Italy

Ferrari 599 GTO at the Beijing Auto Show; with a 661 horsepower V12 engine it cost £300,000 ($460,000) and only
599 cars of this model are scheduled for production

198 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show

From Italy

Ferrari 599 GTO accelerates from start to 62 mph in just 3.35 seconds and boasts a top speed of 208 mph. Fuel
consumption range is 11-15 mpg

199 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From Italy

Lamborghini CEO Stephan Winkelmann (L) sits on the Murcielago LP 670-4 Super Veloce China Limited Edition
during a special media opening of the Beijing Auto Show on April 23, 2010

200 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From U.S.A.

From one of America’s leading luxury car brands the Cadillac Converj concept car at Beijing’s
Auto China 2010

201 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Asia/China/Beijing International Auto Show
From U.S.A.

Ford Start concept car with a 3 cylinder 1 litre Eco Boost engine debuted at Beijing’s Auto China 2010. The
engine is likely to be in the 2012 Ford Fiesta production model

202 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Asia/Japan/Politics

Prime Minister Yukio Hatoyama resigns

Report

J apan’s traditional premium placed on self-

critical integrity proved alive and well at the
apex of Japanese society as Prime Minister Yukio
Hatoyama resigned on May 31st after only 8
months in office, citing failure to make good his
campaign promise to move the United States Ma-
rine Air Station Futenma off the southern island
of Okinawa. His decision to step down was
backed by pressure from his Democratic Party of
Japan as his approval ratings fell. In announcing
his resignation, the 63 year old grandson of for-
mer Japanese prime minister Ichiro Hatoyama
told his compatriots in front of the world, “Since
last year’s elections I tried to change politics so
that the people of Japan would be the main ac-
tors,” conceding that because of his failings ef- Yukio Hatoyama Prime Minister of Japan from September
forts to that end fell short. 16, 2009 to June 8, 2010
Besides failure to move the American marine
security pact to the fore of public policy, but he
base off Okinawa, the outgoing prime minister
nonetheless accepted blame for not closing
cited the political funding scandal in which two of
Futenma as promised.
his aides were convicted of falsifying contribution
Hatoyama who hold’s a Ph. D. in industrial
reports and given suspended prison sentences.
engineering from California’s prestigious Stanford
Hatoyama urged his party’s secretary general
University was first elected to Japan’s lower house
Ichiro Ozawa, who faced a separate political fund-
of parliament in 1986. He became president of the
ing scandal, to also step down to make way for
Democratic Party of Japan, the country’s main op-
the DPJ’s renewal. “Our party must break with
position party, in May 2009 and went on to lead
money,” he said. “We must become completely
DPJ to a historic victory in last September’s parlia-
clean in order to revitalize our society.”
mentary elections, ending decades of uninter-
Although Hatoyama had promised during his
rupted Liberal Democratic Party governance.
campaign last year to remove the American ma-
Prior to entering Parliament Hatoyama was Associ-
rine base from Okinawa, increasing North Korean
ate Professor at Japan’s Senshu University.
belligerence in the Asia Pacific region prompted
Apart from Yukio Hatoyama’s grandfather,
him to disappoint popular expectations that his
who served as Japan’s prime minister after World
promise would be fulfilled. A week prior to his
War II, having been a founder of the Liberal De-
resignation he agreed to a 2006 proposal to move
mocratic Party, his father was once Japan’s foreign
the base which has 47,000 United States military
minister and his great grandfather was parliamen-
personnel to a northern part of Okinawa. This
tary speaker in the 19th century.
concession was reported to have infuriated Oki-
nawa’s residents who wanted the base off their
island. Hatoyama explained to his compatriots
that recent tensions on the Korean Peninsula had
brought the importance of the Japan-America
203 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Japan/Politics

Naoto Kan elected new Prime Minister

Report

N aoto Kan, 63, the same age as his outgoing

predecessor Yukio Hatoyama, was elected
Japan’s Prime Minister Friday, June 4th, by the
country’s Parliament, moving him up from the
Economy & Fiscal Policy portfolio he had held
since the Democratic Party of Japan took over
government in the September 2009 elections.
"My task is to rebuild this nation," Kan pro-
claimed after being chosen ruling party chief. He
pledged to confront problems linking "money and
politics," and stressed the need to spur economic
growth.
Kan received 313 out of 477 lower house
parliamentary votes to put him in Japan’s top po-
litical office. Liberal Democratic Party leader Sa-
dakazu Tanigaki was second with 116 votes. Par-
liament’s upper house approved Kan’s election Prime Minister Naoto Kan speaking following his election
immediately thereafter. Prior to Friday’s full Par-
liament vote, the DJP met in the morning and He pledged to resume fiscal reforms and work
elected Kan its new leader. towards sustainable finances, including possible
In his acceptance speech following the vote tax hikes, to ensure a strong social security system
Kan, vowed, "We will work together as one in the for Japan's aging population. Addressing concerns
about financial scandals, he vowed to keep politics
face of the tough political situation and the up-
clean and tighten campaign financing laws, accord-
coming upper house election and fight together
unified," noting, "Our first priority is to regain the ing to China’s People’s Daily Online.
trust of the people." That was in reference to the Acknowledging his plebian background com-
DPJ government’s declining popularity under his pared to recent aristocratic Japanese prime minis-
predecessor; and perhaps also an acknowledge- ters, Kan who entered Parliament in 1980, said on
ment of the governance crisis implications of him Thursday, the day before being chosen, "I grew up
being Japan’s fourth prime minister in four years. in a typical Japanese salaryman's family… I've had
Kan referred to the U.S.-Japanese alliance as no special connections. If I can take on a major
the cornerstone of his country’s foreign policy role starting from such an ordinary background,
while stressing the importance of Japan’s ties that would be a very positive thing for Japanese
politics." Actually, his father was an industrial ex-
with its regional neighbors. "With the U.S.-Japan
alliance the cornerstone of our diplomacy, we ecutive.
must also work for the prosperity of the Asian Kan an outspoken populist, who while Minis-
region," Kan said ahead of the ruling party vote. ter of Health in 1996 exposed a government cover
In a written statement issued prior to voting up of HIV tainted blood products that caused thou-
Kan said, "I will tackle and pull Japan out of defla- sands of hemophilia patients to contract the virus
tion through comprehensive measures from the that causes AIDS, is known for standing up to Ja-
government and the Bank of Japan," indicating he pan’s powerful bureaucracy.
intended working closely with the central bank. Naoto Kan is a 1970 graduate of the Tokyo
Institute of Technology specializing in patents.
204 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Kyrgyzstan/Politics
Kyrgyzstan climbs democracy ladder
Perspective
M ountainous former Soviet Republic Kyr-
gyzstan with a nominal per capita income
of only $851 ($2,253ppp per capita), 40% of its
population below the poverty line and 18% un-
employment, is one of the poorest countries in
the world, though per capita income has halved
since the collapse of the Soviet Union; but among
the country’s population of 5.5 million aspirations
for democracy have remained strong despite dis-
appointment from successive leaders, including
political undermining of constitutional reform
efforts.
Kyrgyzstan under the leadership of President
Askar A. Akayev significantly preceded Russia,
then led by the late Boris Yeltsen, in resisting the
attempt by hard-line communist to stage a coup
d’état against the reformist government of Mik-
hail Gorbachev in August 1991. Akayev, a physi-
cist, had earlier in 1991 been elected president of
the Kirgiz Soviet Socialist Republic within the Un-
ion of Soviet Socialist Republics by Parliament. He
was chosen during the Gorbachev reform era as a
liberal academic who had been a Communist
Party member for only ten years, during which his
distinguishing role was as a member of the USSR
Academy of Sciences and President of the Kirgiz
Academy of Sciences. He severed his ties with the
Communist Party in the wake of the August 1991
coup attempt and as Kyrgyzstan prepared to join
other Soviet Republics in declaring independence
the country’s electorate placed their hopes for
democracy development in Askar Akayev, elect-
ing him president by direct universal adult suf-
frage in October ’91.
Akayev set about transforming the commu-
nist economy into a free market one, in the proc-
ess making Kyrgyzstan the first former Soviet re-
public to introduce its own currency, som. He
also established economic ties with the United
States and other Western nations, while Kyr-
gyzstan joined the Commonwealth of Independ-
ent States (CIS) comprised of Russia and other
205
Kyrgyzstan’s Transitional Government
President Roza Otunbayeva
former Soviet Republics. International develop-
ment assistance flowed into Kyrgyzstan in respect
of Akayev initiated reforms.
A new constitution in 1993 created a parlia-
mentary system in which head of government
functions were transferred from the President to
the Prime Minister. Despite opposition in parlia-
ment to President Akayev’s reform policies voters
endorsed his economic policies in a 1994 referen-
dum. Akayev again called for a referendum in
1996, after being re-elected the previous year, on
constitutional amendments to transfer certain
powers from Parliament to the president, arguing
that this was necessary for continuation of eco-
nomic restructuring. Akayev won the referendum
overwhelmingly but as living standards fell owing
to the loss of communist era employment and so-
cial service guarantees opposition mounted, to
which Akayev became increasingly intolerant.
Critical politicians were imprisoned and newspa-
pers closed.
Nevertheless, Akayev was re-elected in 2000
with 74.5% of the vote. In 2002, political unrest
erupted in the most economically suppressed and
politically marginalized Southern region of Kyr-
gyzstan, following arrest of an opposition politician
from the region, Azimbek Beknazarov. Several pro-
testers were killed and dozens wounded when po-
lice fired on a crowd in Aksy. More demonstration
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Kyrgyzstan/Politics Kyrgyzstan climbs democracy ladder
flared up demanding those responsible for the
casualties be brought to justice. Several regional
prosecutors and police were subsequently sen-
tenced to prison over the attack on demonstra-
tors, but critics insisted that senior officials who
authorized the use of force should have faced
trial. In February 2003, amidst mounting opposi-
tion, President Akayev held another referendum;
this time on whether he should resign or serve
out his term through 2005 and also on a package
of constitutional amendments, including an
amendment guaranteeing former presidents im-
munity from prosecution for actions while in of-
fice. According to official results, Akayev once
again won an overwhelming referendum victory.
Local and international observers maintained
there were numerous voting irregularities.
The approved amendments left Kyrgyzstan
with a single chamber 75 member Parliament
(officially known as Jogorku Kenesh) and the sys-
tem of proportional representation was replaced Above Kyrgyzstan’s second president (2005-2010), Kurmanbek
by “first past the pole”, provoking accusations Bakiyev and below first president (1991-2005) Askar A. Akayev
that they were part of Akayev’s strategy to
strengthen his position ahead of his mandate’s
expiration at the end of December 2005.
Ahead of the February 2005 parliamentary
elections many politicians were disqualified from
contesting, sparking mass protests that continued
into March when protesters stormed government
buildings in the capital, Bishkek. Akayev’s party
had won an overwhelming majority in the elec-
tions but with election observers as well as the
opposition rating them seriously flawed President
Akayev became the focal point of unrelenting
demonstrations. Akayev fled the country, seeking
refuge in Russia, and formally resigned on April 4,
2005.
The newly elected Parliament accepted his
resignation on April 11 and scheduled presiden-
tial elections for July. The main leader of the
“Tulip Revolution” protest that brought Akayev
down, opposition leader Kurmanbek Bakiyev won
a landslide victory with 89% of the vote, becom-
ing post-Soviet Kyrgyzstan’s second president.
The elections were rated free and fair by the Or-
ganization for Security & Cooperation in Europe
(OSCE), which had discredited the March parlia- 2006 demanding his resignation. That very month
mentary elections. President Bakiyev approved a new constitution
Once in office President Bakiyev resisted that limited presidential powers and increased the
making the democratic reforms that had been a power of Parliament. However, before the consti-
principal demand of the uprising he led. Dissatis- tution went into effect in January 2007 Bakiyev
faction with his administration grew until demon- had written in changes returning many key powers
strations in Bishkek broke out during November to the president.
206 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Kyrgyzstan/Politics Kyrgyzstan climbs democracy ladder
Kyrgyzstan’s Constitutional Court ruled in
September 2007 that the new constitution was
invalid because it had not been approved by ref-
erendum. The Court thereby restored the 2003
constitution. Bakiyev had a new constitution pre-
pared and put to the electorate in a referendum
during October 2007; it won overwhelming en-
dorsement along with a new electoral law. Baki-
yev emerged with power to dismiss the govern-
ment and directly appoint judges and local ad-
ministrators. Independent elections observers
were not uncritical of the way voting was con-
ducted.
Bakiyev took advantage of his newly af-
firmed constitutional powers to immediately dis-
solve the Jogorku Kenesh and call early parlia- Top, Referendum ballots; below, Uzbek man in Southern Kyr-
mentary elections. Parliamentarians under the gyzstan holds his head in grief after his house was burned in
new constitution would be chosen from central ethnic riots. Tens of thousands of Uzbeks sought refuge across
the border in Uzbekistan.
party lists through a system of proportional rep-
resentation, rather than by direct vote as before.
Elections were held in December 2007; Bakiyev’s
new political party, Ak Zhol (Bright Path), won an
overwhelming majority in the legislature. The
opposition faired badly under the new electoral
law requiring parties to receive more than 5 per-
cent of the national vote as well as a certain num-
ber of votes in each region. International moni-
tors rated the election flawed.
The public increasingly complained of nepo-
tism and corruption within President Kurmanbek
Bakiyev’s administration. His brother Janysh Baki-
yev headed the presidential guard, brother Marat
Bakiyev was Kyrgyzstan’s ambassador to Ger- offer to resign provided he was given safe passage
many, another brother Adyl Bakiyev was advisor out of the country along with him family, as a
to the country’s ambassador to China and the popular outcry that he be brought to justice for
president’s son Maksim was responsible for sup- the lives lost under fire from the police could not
plying fuel to Manas International Airport, which easily be ignored by the transition government
hosts a U.S. airbase. The president was also ac- that took over on April 8. Finally, on April 15 Kur-
cused of transferring $35 million from a $300 mil- manbek Bakiyev flew to neighboring Kazakhstan
lion loan received from Russia into his own ac- along with his wife and two children, having signed
count. a formal letter of resignation prior to his depar-
Civil unrest broke out on April 6, 2010 in Ta- ture. Kazakhstan, in its capacity as the rotating
las, 116 miles southwest of Bishkek to where it chair of the Organization for Security and Coopera-
spread the following day. Bakkiyev announced a tion in Europe, announced that its president, along
state of emergency and unleashed police on the with the presidents of the United States and Russia
protestors, who nonetheless attacked the radio helped arrange for Bakiyev to leave the country,
and television stations as well as President Baki- calling it "an important step toward ... the preven-
yev’s office, prompting him to flee to his home- tion of a civil war in Kyrgyzstan."
town Jalal Abad, about 30 miles north of Osh, Head of Social Democratic Party of Kyrgyzstan
Kyrgyzstan’s second most populous city, in the parliamentary caucus Roza Otunbayeva, who had
southwestern quarter of the country. According been a key leader behind Bakiyev in the Tulip
to reports at least 80 people died in clashes with Revolution, was selected by opposition parliamen-
police, which complicated Bakiyev’s April 13th
207 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Kyrgyzstan/Politics
tarians to head the interim government. Roza, a
university philosophy don and former commu-
nist, had served as acting foreign minister in the
interim period prior to Bakyiev’s election as presi-
dent in July 2006.
Kyrgyzstan’s security agency accused exiled
Bakiyev of collaborating with Islamic extremists
to instigate ethnic riots in the southern part of
the country that left an estimated 2,000 people
dead and 400,000 ethnic Uzbeks homeless. The
ethnic conflagration in which majority Kyrgyz bru-
tally turned on minority Uzbeks was said to be
ignited by gunmen Bakiye’s kinsmen hired to
shoot at people from both ethnic communities.
Uzbeks accused the security forces of shooting
them.
Explaining how the former president was
culpable, the security agency alleged that two of
Bakiyev’s relatives met with Taliban representa-
tives, leaders of the Islamic Movement of Uzbeki-
stan (IMU) and Tajik militants in Afghanistan dur-
ing May to discuss plans to trigger unrest in Kyr-
gyzstan. The Kyrgyzstan security alleged that IMU
were offered $30 million by Bakiyev who had
moved from Kazakhstan to Belarus. The security
also accused Bakiyev of trafficking heroin from
Afghanistan through Southern Kyrgyzstan where
the rioting started on June 10th– about 20 metric
tones a year.
According to Associated Press, “Since the
1991 Soviet collapse the densely populated, im-
poverished and conservative Fergana Valley that
Kyrgyzstan shares with Tajikistan and Uzbekistan
has become a breeding ground for fundamental-
ist Islamic groups, including the al Qaida-linked
IMU.”
On June 14th the former president’s son
Maksim Bakiyev was arrested when he flew into
the United Kingdom’s Farnborough Airport in
Hampshire in a privately hired jet. Kyrgyzstan’s
transition government demanded his extradition.
Referendum on a new constitution was held
on June 27, 2010. The proposed constitution de-
creased presidential powers and would make Kyr-
gyzstan Central Asia’s first country where a Prime
Minister elected from Parliament would be head
of government business. At night on the 27th
interim president Roza Otunbayeva announced
that the constitution had won the electorate’s
endorsement. She was thereby scheduled to be
sworn in as full president in mid July but would
be ineligible to stand in the presidential election
scheduled for late 2011. Parliamentary elections
Kyrgyzstan’s climbs democracy ladder
Maksim Bakiyev, born October 27, 1977, youngest son of ex-
president Kurmanbek Bakiyev, law graduate and businessman,
was widely believed to be Kyrgyzstan’s richest fellow. Following
the ouster of his father he was charged by the interim govern-
ment with embezzlement and abuse of power. Prosecutors al-
leged that companies he owns owed almost $80 million in
taxes on aviation fuel sales income.
Maksim was reportedly on his way to Washington for a
series of meetings when the uprisings that deposed his father
occurred but he never kept his appointments and is believed to
have diverted to and held up in Latvia. In May Interpol posted
Maksim as wanted on its website. Also in May, an audio re-
cording was posted anonymously on YouTubue website with a
caption that the voices were those of Maksim and his uncle
Janish Bakiyev. The two were discussing plans to arm groups to
spread chaos across Southern Kyrgyzstan sometimes during
June.
Kyrgyz deputy prime minister Almazbek Atambayeev al-
leges that the Bakiyev fellows financed the riots from their
pockets.
would be held soon, she said.
While Washington commended Kyrgyzstan
for the step forward Russian President Dmitry
Medvedev expressed skepticism that the former
Soviet Republic could manage the European style
parliamentary system it had voted to adopt, saying
it could lead to a "collapse of the state" as
"eventually, won't it enable the political parties,
which have extremist direction, to receive the
power?" This view was dismissed by interim gov-
ernment deputy leader Omurbek Tekebayev who
suggested the Russia leader was mislead by his
intelligence operatives in Kyrgyzstan who had long
been in cahoots with the oligarchs.
208 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Korea/Geopolitics
Perspective
North Korea dares
the world
North Korea “Eternal Leader” Kim Il-Jong visiting the September General Iron Enterprise in his country’s North
Phyongan Province
T he crisis over the March 26 sinking of the
1,200 ton South Korean warship
“Cheonan” corvette heightened as an interna-
tional investigation team citing North Korean
marks on the torpedo that destroyed the ship
pointed the finger of blame at Pyongyang.
South Korea referred the matter to the United
Nations Security Council on June 4th with sup-
port from the United States. However, both
South Korean President Lee Myung-bak and
United States President Obama refrained from
engaging North Korea in its threat that fresh
sanctions or other retaliation would trigger "all-
out war." The impression is clearly given that
while South Korea, its principal ally, the U.S., and
the international community are intent on con-
taining the crisis within the limits of condemna-
tions and sanctions that further isolate North
Korea, the militarist Workers’ Party regime in
Pyongyang has rushed to raise the stakes to in-
vasion of the immensely more prosperous
South.
Following the investigation conclusion that
a North Korean torpedo had sunk the Cheonan,
Seoul targeted the North’s economic vulnerabil-
209
ity, halting trade with DPRK, banning its mer-
chant ships from entering South Korean waters
and suspending humanitarian aid for DPRK chil-
dren. North Korea’s economy is already hurt by
UN sanctions aimed at getting Pyongyang to
abandon its nuclear weapons program. Pyongy-
ang threatened to withdraw from its non-
aggression pact with the South if Seoul contin-
ued its allegations that North Korea sunk the
Cheonan. Pyongyang also threatened to prevent
South Korean access to the industrial zone
jointly operated by the two countries six miles
north of the Korean Demilitarized Zone separat-
ing the economically weak North from the well
industrialized South, immediately expelling 8
South Korean government officials from Kae-
song Industrial Park. One hundred and twenty
one South Korean companies own factories in
Korea Industrial Park (KIP).
A May 21st statement from the North Ko-
rean Ministry of Peaceful Unification said:
"North Korea will react harshly and mercilessly,
including by the freezing of inter-Korean rela-
tions, complete annulment of the nonaggression
pact and comprehensive winding up of work on
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Korea/Geopolitics
South Korea’s President Lee Myung-bak called for wisdom in dealing with Pyongyang’s provocations
inter-Korean cooperation."
United Nations Secretary General Ban Ki-
moon, formerly South Korea’s foreign minister,
expressed hope that the Security Council would
take prompt actions against Pyongyang in the
wake of the investigation team conclusion that
North Korea had sunk the Cheonan. "I am confi-
dent that the council, in fulfilling its responsibil-
ity for the maintenance of international peace
and security, will take measures appropriate to
the gravity of the situation," Ban said at a May
24th news conference in New York. Ban main-
tained that prompt Security Council action
would also contribute to the early resumption of
the six-party talks [involving Russia, Japan,
China, the United States and the two Koreas] "to
address [Pyongyang's] nuclear issues and other
outstanding concerns."
In his initial response to the investigation
team’s report South Korean President Lee
Myung-bak vowed "stern action" against the
North, but apparently upon reflection he
stressed wisdom in dealing with the situation.
U.S. Joint Chiefs of Staff Chairman Admiral Mike
Mullen during the third week of May said that
his country’s 28,000 troops stationed in South
Korea would not be put on high alert. Interna-
tional forces under the auspices of the United
Nations and led by the United States came to
South Korea’s rescue in 1950 when it was in-
vaded by the communist North led by Kim Il
Sung, the late father of current leader Kim Jong-
210
North Korea dares the world
Il. The fighting halted in 1953 with a truce but 57
years later there has yet to be a peace agree-
ment.
United States Defense Secretary Robert
Gates when badgered by journalists as to what
the U.S. reaction would be declined from com-
mitment but stressed that he accepted South
Korea’s conclusion that the North was responsi-
ble for sinking the Cheonan, killing 46 members
of its crew. The remaining 48 were rescued.
A few Republican congressmen in Washing-
ton suggested the Obama Administration’s re-
sponse should be tougher.
While the United States, Europe and Japan
were profuse in their criticism of North Korea,
China and Russia, neither of whom were on the
investigation team that after 6 weeks of work
concluded Pyongyang’s culpability, were re-
served in their responses. On May 20th Chinese
officials appealed for calm. Vice Foreign Minister
Cui Tiankai called the sinking "unfortunate,"
stressing the need to maintain peace on the Ko-
rean Peninsula while declining to join the posi-
tion that Pyongyang was culpable. Foreign Min-
istry spokesman Ma Zhaoxu told a separate
briefing later on May 20th, "The parties involved
should stay calm and exercise restraint ... to
avoid escalation of the situation." Regarding
South Korea’s investigation, Ma said China was
still assessing its results.
Senate Armed Services Committee top Re-
publican Sen. John McCain of Arizona said the
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Korea/Geopolitics
U.S. response "must be serious
and immediate" and urged China
to "work more responsibly than it
has thus far for the security and
stability of East Asia."
Secretary of State Hilary Clin-
ton labeling the Cheonan sinking
an "act of aggression that is one
more instance of North Korea's
unacceptable behavior and defi-
ance of international law," ostensi-
bly did not satisfy some Congress-
men. Senator James Inhofe, an
Oklahoma Republican, apparently
alluding to the cautious response
of the Obama Administration, said,
“We cannot continue to dismiss actions by North
Korea as 'more of the same.”
In dismissing the conclusion of the Seoul
commissioned investigation team, Pyongyang
faulted its composition. In its first press briefing
on the Cheonan sinking, held of May 28, Pak Rim
Su, head of the Policy Bureau of the Democratic
People's Republic of Korea (DPRK) maintained
that since the United States is still in "a state of
war" with the DPRK, and that Britain and Austra-
lia had taken part in the Korean War, results of
the investigation could not be creditable.
The investigation team was comprised of 24
experts from America, Australia, Britain and
Sweden.
DPRK spokesman Pak alleged that civilian
members on the investigation team had limited
access to the main work of the investigation and
also that some investigators who had divergent
opinions were driven out of the team. In arguing
that there were contradictions in South Korean
claims about the time, spot and witnesses of the
incident, Pak went so far as to accuse Seoul of
faking the investigation results to serve multiple
objectives, including validation of its anti-DPRK
policy, justifying continued presence of U.S.
forces in South Korea and diverting responsibil-
ity for sinking of the warship. Pyongyang on May
20 in rejecting Seoul’s charge that it was culpa-
ble in the Cheonan sinking proposed sending a
team to South Korea to assess material evi-
dence. Seoul flatly rejected the proposition.
During a May 3rd to 7th visit to China,
North Korean leader Kim Jong-Il told Chinese
President Hu Jintao that he is committed to de-
nuclearization of the Korean Peninsula, accord-
ing to China’s Xinhua news agency. The Xinhua
211
North Korea dares the world
Cheonan wreckage salvaged from the seabed
release on the matter read:
"Hu and Kim exchanged views on the inter-
national situation, the situation in Northeast
Asia and the six-party talks on the Korean Penin-
sula nuclear issue. The two leaders said that
peace, stability and prosperity on the Korean
Peninsula is in line with common interests of
China, the DPRK and the Northeast Asian coun-
tries and expressed their readiness to make joint
efforts for denuclearization on the Korean Penin-
sula."
Kim also promised to cooperate with Hu
Jintao to resume the six party talks. However,
the Chinese and Korean leaders said, "the rele-
vant parties in the six-party talks should demon-
strate sincerity and make positive efforts for
pushing forward the six-party talks." This insinu-
ated that harsh moves against Pyongyang by any
of the other parties could jeopardize the pros-
pects of talks’ resumption.
Kim’s cooperative talk in Beijing contra-
dicted an April 21 statement from his country’s
foreign ministry declaring, "We will produce as
many nuclear weapons as we think necessary,
but we will neither participate in the nuclear
arms race nor produce them in excess."
North Korea conducted nuclear tests in
2006 and 2009, but its payload delivery capabil-
ity is still questioned by the United States.
John Sudworth writing “How South Korean
ship was sunk” for BBC News, explained that
given the strategic stealth of submarine warfare,
“It is entirely plausible that a ship, on routine
patrol in its own shallow waters, would not pick
up any signs of an enemy sub, or even a torpedo
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/North Korea/Geopolitics
fired from one, on its sonar system.” Sudworth
noted that absence of evidence on the Cheo-
nan’s monitors that it had been fired on with a
torpedo necessitated piecing together evidence
from the wreckage; although it had been deter-
mined early on that the Cheonan had been sunk
by an explosion.
Most torpedoes fired from submarines are
designed to explode near the target, so that
there is no contact but the explosion is strong
enough to destroy it. Sudworth points out that
sea mines are designed to explode in a similar
way, computer detonated when a ship is in close
enough proximity to be destroyed. Eventually
the investigating team found the propellers, a
propulsion motor and a steering section of a tor-
pedo that they determined were a perfect
match for a model known to be manufactured
and exported by North Korea. The markings, in
Korean script, were assessed by the investiga-
tors to be consistent with those on a previously
obtained model. The evidence was put on dis-
play at a May 20 news conference and said to
represent proof that a 1.7 ton torpedo with a
net explosive weight of 250kg sunk the Cheo-
nan.
Other evidence cited in the 24 member in-
vestigation team’s report is that a number of
small submarines escorted by a support ship left
a North Korean naval base in the Yellow Sea a
few days before the Cheonan was sunk and re-
turned a few days afterwards.
Considering the possible motive for North
Korea to launch such a crisis laden attack, Sud-
worth points out that over the past decade
there have been several sea clashes between
South and North Korean vessels in their dis-
puted sea boundary and in one such incident
last November a North Korean vessel was left in
flames with causalities among its crew.
On June 3rd Russia announced that it had
sent experts to South Korea to examine the sal-
vaged Cheonan wreckage and the torpedo found
in the vicinity of the sinking. The Russian deci-
sion was praised by the U.S. China was also in-
vited to send examining experts but declined to
do so. In late April as tension over the Cheonan
sinking heightened Moscow urged quick re-
sumption of the 6 party talks.
Chinese foreign ministry spokesman Qin
Gang had said following the May 26 investiga-
tion team report concluding Pyongyang was the
culprit responsible for the Cheonan’s sinking
North Korea dares the world
North Korean Eternal Leader Kim Il-Jong and Chinese President
Hu Jintao during Kim’s early May visit to China
that China had no first-hand information" to
blame the maritime incident on the North and
will draw its own conclusion after carefully
studying all information provided by the par-
ties involved. Two of the five Security Council
permanent members, Russia and China, whose
support or abstention is required to impose
sanctions, stressed restraint in responding to
the incident and the investigation report with-
out mentioning Pyongyang’s alarming threats.
With Moscow and Pyongyang’s principal
ally Beijing calling for restraint and six party
talks resumption, and South Korean President
Lee Myung-bak left with no politically tenable
option other than referring the evidence impli-
cating North Korea in the Cheonan sinking to
the UN Security Council, Kim Jong-il’s regime
persisted in belligerent talk that constituted an
affront to the entire international community.
If China’s realpolitik in the premises entails
accommodation of the Pyongyang regimes
wackiness, it seems too much to ask the rest of
the world to equally pamper the nuclear
armed sabre rattling North Koreans. We are all
left wondering whether Beijing has sufficient
influence over Pyongyang to prevent it from
executing its violent threats.
Ultimately, South Korea has to affirm a
vision towards Korean unification and employ
policies to that end. That Pyongyang has a Min-
istry of Peaceful Unification indicates it is not
adverse to reunification, but as the South is a
prominent country in the global mainstream, is
wealthy and rapidly progressing, only it can sit
in the driver’s seat in a reunification quest, just
as it was West Germany that spearheaded Ger-
man unification. Interestingly, 20 years hence
an East German, Angela Merkel, leads the uni-
fied country. Indeed, post communist East
212 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Korea/Geopolitics
South Korea’s capital Seoul is one of the world’s top 10 financial centres
Germany was anxious to leave the communist
past behind and willing to reunite, but it was
West Germany that would have to bear the
costs and sacrifices involved, the immediate de-
cline in national per capita income and finance
alleviation of the wealth disparity between West
and East. The per capita income disparity in Ger-
many was 3:1 ($25,000 for West, about $8.500
for East); in Korea it’s 15:1 ($27,500 for South;
$1,800 for North). Moreover, East Germany’s
population was only a third that of the West (17
million to 60 million) whereas North Korea’s
population is half that of the South (22.7 million
to 48.6 million). Germany was divided for 44
years, whereas Korea has been divided for 60
years and the North is far more isolated from
contact with and information about the rest of
the world than was East Germany under Com-
munism.
The process towards Korean unification was
put in motion by the North-South Joint Declara-
tion in 2000 wherein the two countries agreed
to work towards peaceful future unification.
Several weeks later a United Nations General
Assembly resolution sponsored by 150 countries
endorsed the unification intention declaration.
Advocacy of North-South unification has become
known in the South as the “Sunshine Policy”.
- 213
North Korea dares the world
Supporters of the ‘Sunshine Policy” argue
that sanctions and threats from Washington
and Seoul have harmed, rather than im-
proved, prospects for reunification. They ar-
gue that if the North Korean government does
not feel threatened by South Korea or the
United States, it will have nothing to lose and
everything to gain from dialogue and engage-
ment with the outside world, and will have no
reason to build weapons of mass destruction.
Many argue that the only alternative to dia-
logue is an unacceptable military outcome.
The Sunshine Policy was introduced by the
Millennium Democratic Party under President
Kim Dae-jung, (1998-2003) and was continued
by President Roh Mu-hyun (2003-2008).
South Korea's Hyundai company, where cur-
rent South Korean president Myung-bak was
formerly CEO, played a major role in pioneer-
ing commercial links with the North.
South Korean Unification Church mem-
bers in 2003 launched "The Party for God,
Peace, Unification, and Home," declaring it
would focus on preparing for the reunification
of South and North Korea by educating the
public about God and peace. About 62% of
North Koreans are Buddhist. Nonetheless, in
1988 the Pyongyang regime held the Interna-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/North Korea/Geopolitics
What used to be South Korea’s Cheonan Warship
tional Seminar of Christians of the North and
South for the Peace and Reunification of Korea
in Switzerland.
President Lee Myung-bak said prior to the
Cheonan crisis that he planed to visit Pyongyang
sometime during 2010. Departing from his
Grand National Party’s traditional hard-line
against North Korea, he proposed seeking a Ko-
rea economic community agreement. The
United States is apparently supportive of Koran
unification under a democratic system as a
counterweight to China in the Asian Pacific. Ja-
pan appears to have a similar view. Russia under
Putin tended to favour maintaining the status
quo as a united democratic Korea would pre-
sumably be a close ally to the United States.
China might also see nothing to gain from a
united democratic Korea and prefer the status
quo.
Opponents of the Sunshine Policy argue
that the North has no real interest in reunifica-
tion and that cooperation with Pyongyang has
only served to prop up its corrupt, totalitarian
regime. They point out that South Korea has
received neither economic nor political benefit
from all the money it has pumped into the
North. For now President Lee Myung-bak’s
Grand National Party is a base of the opponents
of the Sunshine Policy and the Cheonan sinking
has vindicated their position.
Actually, North Korea’s regime is more in-
214
North Korea dares the world
terested in a confederation arrangement
wherein North and South retain their current
governments and systems. This indicates the
Pyongyang regime’s desire to reap economic
and international political advantages from the
South without giving up its militarist monarchi-
cal political culture. In North Korea’s 2009 con-
stitution no mention is made of Communism.
The state ideology now is Juche, which the late
Kim Il Sung conceptualized as man’s mastery of
the universe and in North Korean context strict
self-reliance and independence from outside
interference or influence. This is at sharp vari-
ance with the substantial globalization orienta-
tion of South Korea.
Militancy is a central feature of North Ko-
rea’s Juche ideology and all aspects of life are
infused with military spirit and methods. School
leavers are reported to serve unusually long
compulsory military service. This has informed
North Korea’s bellicosity. In 1998 Kim Jong-Il
abolished the post of president and in assuming
the post Chairman of the National Defence Com-
mission affirmed it as the highest office of state
authority. The Supreme People’s Assembly is-
sued the confirming decrees. North Korea is
thus a militarist society ever ready, if not anx-
ious for war; ostensibly most especially with the
prosperous “bourgeois South”, against whom it
no doubt measures the validity of its ideology.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Korea/Geopolitics North Korea dares the world
(Top right) Pyongyang skyline; (center) a Pyongyang
street; (bottom) Bong Su Church in Pyongyang

Pyongyang is an inland city in the southwestern part

of North Korea and has a population of about 3.5
million within an area of 3,194 sq.km (1,233 sq.
miles). .

Various reports lead us to believe that Kim

Il-Jong’s youngest son, Kim Jong-Un, born in the
early 1980s has been designated the heir appar-
ent and that his birthday is now a national holi-
day. He is said to have schooled in Switzerland
before doing his studies at Kim Il-Sung University
and to speak English, German and French. His
former Japanese chef describes him as athletic
and indomitable. Former sushi chef Kenji Fuji-
moto in a memoir wrote the youngest son of
Kim Il-Jong is a "chip off the old block, a spitting
image of his father in terms of face, body shape
and personality''. However, more recent reports
claim he is now overweight and diabetic, though
still in his late 20s. The only photo of Kim Jong-
Un in circulation is one of him at 11 while at-
tending school in Bern, Switzerland in the iden-
tity disguise of a North Korean diplomat’s son.
As a virtually absolute monarch Kim Jong-
Un may prove no easier to deal with than his
father, but as a man of the 21st century he could
conceivably realize the Sunshine Policy will lead
Korea to a higher place in the world, probably
super power status that neither North nor South
Korea separated are on the road to attaining. If
he’s objectively intelligent he will also realize
that South Korea is already among the world’s
leading nations while isolated and poor North
Korea will continue losing ground in the race of
nations through the coming decades. Alterna-
tively, the next Eternal Leader could end up de-
posed in a revolt or coup d’état.

215 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Asia/Pakistan/ Constitutional Reform
Monday April 19, 2010
President Zardari signs 18th Amendment Bill into law
Pakistan’s President Asif Ali Zadari signed constitutional reform bill transferring governing powers from his
office to that of the Prime Minister
ISLAMABAD: President Asif Ali Zardari on Monday
signed the 18th Constitutional Amendment Bill to
make it part of the Constitution in what is billed
as a smooth ‘political transition’ of power from
the Presidency to the Prime Minister’s House.
The law ensures provincial autonomy and re-
stores the 1973 Constitution by cleansing it of all
the dictatorial amendments that stained it for
decades.
President Asif Ali Zardari gave his assent to
the amendment amidst slogans of “Jeay
Bhutto” (long live Bhutto) at a historic and im-
pressive grand ceremony at the Aiwan-e-Sadr on
Monday which was attended by all the top politi-
cal leadership of the country, including Prime
Minister Syed Yousuf Raza Gilani, PML-N Quaid
Nawaz Sharif, ANP President Asfandyar Wali, Op-
position Leader in the Senate Wasim Sajjad, Sen-
ate Chairman Farooq H. Naek, Speaker National
Assembly Dr. Fehmida Mirza, governors and chief
ministers of the four provinces, the president and
the prime minister of the AJK government, mem-
bers of the federal cabinet and parliamentarians.
However, the top leadership of the PML-Q did
216
not attend the ceremony.
Minister for Law, Justice and Parliamentary
Affairs Dr. Babar Awan conducted the proceed-
ings at the ceremony. Though opposition leader
in the Senate Wasim Sajjad was present, his party
leadership was absent while Opposition Leader in
the National Assembly Chaudhry Nisar Ali Khan
was also missing from the ceremony but his top
leadership led by Mian Nawaz Sharif was present.
With the assent accorded by President Asif
Ali Zardari to the 18th Amendment, the 1973
Constitution, which was passed under the leader-
ship of Zulfikar Ali Bhutto has been restored ac-
cording to its true spirit i.e. promotion of democ-
racy and federalism.
“It is indeed a great honour for me to have
signed into law this bill that seeks to undo the
undemocratic clauses introduced in the Constitu-
tion by undemocratic rulers. The doors of dicta-
torship have been closed forever,” said President
Asif Ali Zardari while addressing the ceremony
after according assent to the amendment.
“Now, when we have successfully restored
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Pakistan/ Constitutional Reform
President Zardari signs 18th Amendment Bill into law
Prime Minister Yusuf Raza Gilani
the democratic roadmap, it is time to work with
renewed vigour and enthusiasm to address those
challenges which are confronting the common
man,” said Prime Minister Syed Yousuf Raza Gi-
lani while addressing the ceremony.
“The 18th Constitutional Amendment is
unique because for the first time the incumbent
president is giving his powers willingly to parlia-
ment and the prime minister,” said Chairman Par-
liamentary Committee on Constitutional Reforms
Mian Raza Rabbani in his address.
Addressing the ceremony after giving assent
to the bill, President Asif Ali Zardari said his head
bows in gratitude before Allah for giving him the
opportunity to sign the 18th Constitutional
Amendment Bill. “It is indeed a great honour for
me to have signed into law this bill that seeks to
undo the undemocratic clauses introduced in the
Constitution by undemocratic rulers,” he said.
The president said the constitutional reforms
bill that he signed into law is the first major con-
stitutional reform package during the last more
than 30 years. “It is fundamentally different from
piecemeal constitutional amendments that have
been made from time to time in the past,” he
added.
217
President Zardari said the piecemeal amend-
ments were forced upon the nation through ex-
ecutive orders by un-elected rulers only to legiti-
mize their rule. “Those amendments were not
introduced for the benefit of the people or the
cause of democracy. Credit for the first major
constitutional overhaul goes to the democratic
process and the policy of national reconciliation,”
he added.
He said it is a moment of great satisfaction
— indeed of pride — that the Constitution has
been made truly democratic and federal in char-
acter, and provincial rights and parliamentary
sovereignty have been restored. “I am particu-
larly delighted that the 17th Amendment has
been repealed. I am very happy that the people
of Pakhtunkhwa have finally got their identity —
an identity that eluded them for the past many
decades — as their province is renamed as Khy-
ber-Pakhtunkhwa,” he added.
He said the ceremony here and the gather-
ing of the leaders and parliamentarians of all po-
litical parties is a demonstration of the glory of
democracy and power of reconciliation. “It shows
that democracy and reconciliation can work won-
ders,” he added.
He said the Constitution that was first given
to the people in 1973 had the backing of all politi-
cal parties and provinces while the first major
constitutional reforms package after more than
30 years also is backed by all the provinces and
political parties. “Just as the nation made great
progress after the adoption of the unanimous
Constitution in 1973, we hope that it will make
similar progress after the adoption of the consti-
tutional amendments,” he added.
The president paid tribute to Chairman Par-
liamentary Committee on Constitutional Reforms
Mian Raza Rabbani and other members of the
team, saying he wishes to congratulate all mem-
bers of the constitutional reform committee and
its chairman Senator Mian Raza Rabbani for ac-
complishing this task. “I congratulate all the po-
litical parties and their leaders for rising above
party politics and agreeing to constitutional re-
forms based on consensus amendments.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Philippines/Presidential Election
Filipinos choose another
President Aquino
Perspective
O utgoing Philippine President Gloria
Macapagal-Arroyo and incoming Presi-
dent Noynoy Aquino are both children of for-
mer presidents. They are not political allies,
although their parties, Lakas (Christian-Muslim
Democrats) to which Arroyo belongs, and
Aquino’s Liberal Party are both centrist. Inter-
estingly, Gloria’s father Diosdado Macapagal
was president as a Liberal Party leader. That
was when she was a teenager and Noynoy a
small child. Today, Noynoy Aquino as president
of Philippines is expected to clean up the cor-
ruption and power abuse that flourished under
Gloria Macapagal, while the newly retired
president sits in Congress as the elected repre-
sentative of the 2nd District of Pampanga,
where the international airport is named after
her father. Apart from the challenges of shoul-
dering the country’s $150 billion external debt,
reducing the budget deficit which is over 50%
of GDP and alleviating poverty which grips
about 40% of the country’s 92 million people,
the new Philippine president is confronted
with a political system where patronage and
political opportunism are forces stronger than
law. Although Noynoy sponsored a number of
important bills while a Senator, he has none-
theless been accused of not distinguishing him-
self as a lawmaker. When asked why as Sena-
tor he did not author an impressive volume of
legislation, Noynoy replied that the Philippines
had good laws but the problem was in the im-
plementation gap.
Perhaps the greatest dilemma stemming
from the Filipino economy is that despite the
official low unemployment rate of 7.6%, 40%
of the population is said to live in poverty. A
June 2005 Asian Development Bank report on
poverty, vulnerability and family size in Philip-
pines identifies the country’s 3.5 fertility rate
as a factor stagnating per-capita income
growth. The minimum wage of P89 (about $2)
Noynoy Aquino stepped into the presidency on June 30th with
a bullet lodged in his neck during a 1988 assassination at-
tempt which principally targeted his mother President Corazon
Aquino. His 2 to 3 pack a day cigarette habit, which he attrib-
utes to stress, has people wondering if he has the nerves to
cope with the difficulties he’s bound to encounter as he en-
deavors to fulfill the popular expectations behind his election.
a day which has not been adjusted since 1989
is insufficient to support a typical Filipino fam-
ily. The incidence of poverty among 4 member
families in 2000 was 23.8% and for families
with 9 members or more 57.3%, whereas in
1985 poverty incidence for families of these
size was 10% and 23% respectively. For a fam-
ily of 6 the poverty incidence in 2000 was
40.5%, all these statistics implying in light of
the sub-ten percent unemployment rate that
most impoverished households in the Philip-
pines have job derived income, whether as an
employee or self-employment.
Philippines has the highest fertility rate in
the Asia-Pacific region and trails Korea, Indone-
sia and Thailand in savings as a percentage of
GDP, but the incoming administration should
avoid the error of focusing on family size as a
hindrance to per capita income growth without
equally addressing the issues of low wages,
inequitable national wealth distribution and
corruption, which not only aggravates eco-
nomic inequity but also stunts infrastructure
and public service development.
218 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Philippines/Presidential Election Filipinos choose another President Aquino
Philippines on course to met water supply
Millennium Development Goals
The water supply and sanitation systems in Philip-
pines suffer from low investment, resulting in
increasing water pollution. Only 4% of the popu-
lation is connected to the sewage system. Septic
tanks account for 75% of the sewage facilities. In
metropolitan Manila alone there are about 75
companies providing desludging services. In the
urban area 58% of the houses are connected to
pipe borne water; in the rural areas only 23%,
though when community water pipelines are
taken into consideration 87% of the urban popu-
lation and 82% of rural dwellers have access to
pipe borne water. Philippines is therefore on
course to attain the 2015 Millennium Develop-
ment Goals minimum of 86.6% access, with the
National Water Resources Board targeting 96%
access by the end of 2010. Sanitation service cov-
erage is up to 72% but disposal management in
congested areas needs improvement. The World
Bank multi-donor Water & Sanitation Program
partners with the Filipino in aiming to attain
benchmarks. However, the system water is de-
centralized to the extent that a 2005 World Bank
study identified 5,000 water service providers
operating in the 161,000 square mile
(300,000sq.km) country with population density
of 571 per sq. m/306 per sq.km.

NIC
The Philippines is now classified as one of the
Newly Industrialized Countries (NIC). Industriali-
zation began in the Philippines upon independ-
ence from the United States of America in 1949,
with the manufacturing sector subsequently ex-
periencing periods of ascendency and decline.
When Corazon Aquino became president in 1986
50% of the industrial output was concentrated in
metropolitan Manila and 20% in adjoining areas;
capacity utilization was down to 40%, owing to
decline during the presidency of Ferdinand Mar-
cos. By the middle of 1988 industries were again
working at full capacity and local content laws
had brought about an extent of inter-linkage ex-
ceptional for a country at Philippines stage of de-
velopment. Industrial minerals mined in Philip- Ariel and ground views of the Philippines capital, Manila, one
of the 16 municipalities comprising the 21 million inhabitant
pines include limestone, gypsum, iron ore, mar-
Manila Metropolitan Area. The bottom photo is of Roxas
ble, sulfate, salt and sulfur. Philippines ranks 6th
Boulevard in the heart of Manila Municipality..
among the world’s chromium producers, 9th in
gold and 10th in copper production.

219 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Asia/Philippines/Presidential Election Filipinos choose another President Aquino
Economic revival occurred under Corazon
Aquino’s administration, with the Philippines at-
taining Gross Domestic Product (GDP) growth of
6.7% in 1988. However the trade and govern-
ment budget deficits brought growth down to 3%
by 1990.
Historically, Philippines was one of the first
Global South countries where the manufacturing
sector overtook agriculture in contribution to
GDP. This occurred during the post-colonial in-
dustrialization drive in the 1950s. Over the first
decade of the 21st century industry’s contribution
to GDP hovered around 30%, more than twice
that of agriculture which has been slightly under
15%, while services have contributed in the vicin-
ity of 55%. For 2009, agriculture contributed New Texas Instruments analogue and embedded processing
14.9% to GDP, industry 29.9% and services 55.2%. chips plant in Philippines
Yet, the agriculture sector remained the second
mer capital, is the world’s most voluminous pro-
largest employer at 34% (2009), behind services
ducer of Digital Signal Processor (DSP) chips, as
at 51%, but ahead of industry’s 15% contribution
well as all the chips used in Nokia cell phones and
to employment. Unemployment in July 2009 was
80% of those used in Ericsson cell phones world
officially 7.6%.
wide. Texas Instruments in April 2009 launched
Pushing ahead with the $6 billion industrial
production at its new $1 billion plant in the Clark
investment program adopted by Marcos in 1979,
Freeport Zone at Pampanga.
the Corazon Aquino administration established
As industrial technology is continually im-
an operational copper smelter-refinery, coco-
proving the new administration is faced with the
chemical manufacturing and phosphate fertilizer
challenge of assuring sufficient financing capacity
projects, while rehabilitating and expanding the
for Filipino industries to keep modernizing and
cement industry. The Board of Investments in
stay competitive. For 2009 the Philippines trade
1990 approved manufacturing projects valued at
deficit was $8.6bn, informed by exports of
$1.48 billion. Industrial establishments gradually
$37.2bn offset by imports of $45.8bn.
became more evenly spread throughout the
According to former Arroyo economic advi-
country during the Aquino and Ramos admini-
sor Joey Salceda surveys showed as early as April
strations and small and medium scale industries
2010 that if Noynoy Aquino became president
became more numerous– producing handicrafts,
the rate of foreign and domestic investment in
furniture, electronics, garments, footwear, and
Philippines would increase from the current 15%
canned goods. Although small and medium scale
of GDP owing to confidence that the new leader
industries accounted for only a quarter of manu-
would better manage the economy than his
facturing value added (MVA), they provided 80%
predecessor. Salceda predicted 682,000 jobs
of the country’s manufacturing employment. In
would be created in the first 18 months of
heavy industry the rise of conglomerates proved
Noynoy Aquino’s presidency.
inevitable. A Senate inquiry in 1990 determined
Both Salceda and Noynoy were outgoing
that 8 of the county’s 17 cement manufacturing
president Gloria Arroyo’s economics students at
companies were under the control of a single
Ateneo de Manila University.
company.
Salceda stressed the importance of efficient
Automobiles produced in the Philippines
tax administration for the economy to optimally
include BMW, Toyota, Volvo, Ford, Mitsubishi
improve. Liwayway Vinzons-Chato, a former Bu-
and Nissan, as well as ABS used in Mercedes-
reau of Internal Revenue chief under the Ramos
Benz. Intel has been in the Philippines for 28
administration, said in April that the high public
years, now producing state of the art Pentium
trust in Aquino will translate to better tax collec-
processors. The 20 year old Texas Instruments
tion.
plant in Baguio, a city originally established by the
American colonial regime as the country’s sum-
220 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Philippines/Presidency

Benigno Aquino III’s Inauguration

Report
t his June 30th inauguration Phil-
A ippines new president Benigno
Aquino III promised to lead his coun-
try to prosperity, peace and progress,
saying this was the legacy he was
blessed to have received from his par-
ents, the late President Corazon
Aquino and his father, assassinated
opposition activist Senator Benigno
Aquino II. Speaking plainly the 50 year
old former legislator declared, “No
more cheating, no more patronage
politics, no more stealing. It’s time to
help one another.”
The new president in his inaugu-
ral speech promised to bring peace to Benigno Aquino III taking the oath of office as the Philip-
Southern Philippines where Muslim militants pines 15th president; in the background are his two sisters,
have long waged an armed rebellion and to es- Kris (left) and Pinky (right)
tablish an independent Truth Commission to
investigate the administration of outgoing presi-
dent Gloria Macapagal-Arroyo.
Aquino refused to have his oath of office
administered by the recently appointed Su-
preme Court Chief Justice, maintaining that he
was one of the corrupt unacceptable appointees
of the outgoing administration.
Although the inauguration was held at the
presidential palace, Aquino said he would reside
at a simpler house nearby.
About half a million people attended the
inauguration, including former Filipino presi-
dents Fidel Ramos and Joseph Estrada. Outgoing
president Arroyo left after her final protocol ex-
ercises.

The bachelor president entertaining guests at his inaugura-

tion party, singing a song. Noynoy as he is affectionately
called habitually moves freely among crowds.
Aquino’s cabinet appointees, announced the day be-
fore his inauguration, have been widely commended by po-
litical analysts.

Aquino’s supporters at the inauguration

221 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Asia/Thailand/Political Crisis

Thailand: The Cost of Foresight Paucity

By Muhammed Kamil

Perspective

P olitical tension has troubled Thailand since

billionaire Prime Minister Thaksin Shi-
nawatra was overthrown by the military while
out of the country in 2005. Chamlong Srimuang,
who in 1994 as leader of the Palang Dharma
Party brought Thaksin into the political arena,
expressed regret in the wake of the coup that he
had got "such a corrupt person" into politics.
Thaksin, while using the power of office to aug-
ment the wealth he had earned as a telecommu-
nications entrepreneur became highly popular
owing to policies he introduced to alleviate rural
poverty. In four years under Thaksin rural poverty
was reduced by half, as he became the first Thai
Prime Minister ever to serve a full term and win
re-election, with the highest voter turnout in the
country’s history no less, running under the ban-
ner of Thai Rak Thai which he founded in 1998.
Thaksin was accused of "policy corruption,"
whereby his infrastructure developments and
liberalization policies aided companies that were
owned by his family members. Officials at the
National Institute of Development Administration
maintained that Thaksin’s projects as Prime Min-
ister ran 30% over cost, costing the state an addi-
tional 400 billion baht (about $8.9 billion). The
coup had been bloodless and Thaksin was subse-
quently convicted in abstentia for conflict of in-
terests. He sought political asylum in the United
Kingdom but after his conviction by the Thai
court $4.2 billion of his assets were reported to
have been frozen by the U.K. The government in
London neither confirmed nor denied this report
which appeared in a late 2008 edition of Arabian From top: Red Shirt protestors besieged Bangkok’s Com-
Business magazine, but the British Home Office mercial Center demanding early elections and the resigna-
did revoke his visa and the British Embassy in tion of interim Prime Minister Abhisit Vejjajiva; (middle)
Bangkok sent e-mails to airlines that he should police were eventually brought in to dislodge the Red
not be allowed to board any flight headed for the Shirts, resulting in deaths among both the security forces
U.K. He now has Montenegrin citizenship. and protestors. (Below) Protestors at first resisted police
Thaksin’s supporters regrouped and won the but fled as the police assault intensified. The Thai authori-
December 2007 elections as the People Power ties maintained that cashes of weapons were found left
behind by the fleeing Red Shirts. TIME/CNN photos
Party. The victory provoked demonstrations by
222 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Thailand/Political Crisis Thailand: The Cost of Foresight Paucity
anti-Thaksin activists styled the “Yellow Shirts”.
The protests continued for several months, dur-
ing which time the Yellow Shirts occupied two
airports causing flight cancellations that stranded
thousands of passengers. In December 2008, a
month after the airport siege, Thailand’s Consti-
tutional Court ruled that the People Power Party
was guilty of electoral fraud. The court dissolved
the party and Parliament chose Abhisit Vejjajiva
as the country's new prime minister while Thak-
sin’s red clad supporters protested outside. The
United Front for Democracy Against Dictatorship
(UDD), commonly known as Red Shirts, mounted
pressure on Abhisit to call early elections, but he
continually rationalized that conditions were not
yet suitable.
Ahead of the court ruling on whether former
Prime Minister Thaksin Shinawatra’s wealth
would be seized sequel to a corrupt earnings con-
viction, the world expected the worst if the ruling
went against the popular exiled billionaire politi-
cian. Verily, on February 10, 2010, the Supreme
Court found Thaksin guilty of having gained ab-
normal wealth from abuse of power and ordered
45 billion baht (a little over $1 billion) of his as-
sets froze. Thaksin accused the court of having
been infiltrated by his enemies. The Red Shirts,
supporters of Thaksin poured into the streets de-
manding new elections, calling attention to Prime
Minister Abhisit Vejjajiva not having been elected
by popular suffrage. Abhisit unflaggingly insisted
that conditions were not right for elections. To
demonstrate the passion behind their demands
the Red Shirts splattered government buildings
and the Prime Minister’s residence with blood
they had collected during a blood donation cam-
paign.
It was clear that Prime Minister Abhisit Ve-
jjajiva had no choice but to concede Red Shirt
demands for early elections or the crisis would
escalate and continue indefinitely. In April two
people were killed and 135 injured during a clash
between Red Shirts and government supporters.
Abhisit knew it was better to avoid violence and
he allowed the Red Shirts to carry on their largely
peaceful demonstration. Also, he had met with
them on March 28, but no agreement was
reached. The Red Shirts were demanding immedi-
ate resignation of Abhisit’s government, to be
followed by parliamentary elections. On May 3,
2010, after a series of grenade attacks and sev-
eral deaths, including 2 police officers and a sol-
TIME/CNN photos
dier, Abhisit offered to hold elections in Novem-
223 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Thailand/Political Crisis
ber if the Red Shirts ended their blockade of
Bangkok’s commercial center. By then the bitter-
ness on both sides was flaming in tune with the
violence. The Red Shirts who had earlier indicated
that they would compromise if elections were
scheduled before the end of this year now de-
manded that Abhisit not only leave office imme-
diately but get out of Thailand. Abhisit reacted
withdrawing the offer of November elections.
That former Prime Minister Thaksin Shi-
nawatra is seen by Thailand’s rural poor as their
hope for a better future, despite having been
smeared in corruption by investigations and court
rulings is a serious dilemma for the country; one
that needs a well intended and thought out strat-
egy to restore and sustain stability while uphold-
ing the constitutional processes that have found
Thaksin unfit for public office.
Paul Quaglia, a former CIA officer and head
of PSA Asia, a Bangkok-based security firm told
CNN that the divide in the country is not simply
about former Prime Minister Thaksin Shinawatra,
"It's becoming more about why 2 percent of the
population gains 80 percent of the GDP." Bang-
kok’s Governor Sukhumbhand Paribatra, while
maintaining that upward mobility is one of the
strengths of Thai society, acknowledges that class
barriers and differences are now at the heart of
the conflict. Access to mobile phones and inter-
net has greatly increased the exposure and aspi-
rations of the rural poor. Quaglia points out in
this regard, "It's impossible to overstate how im-
portant the ability of the rural poor to communi-
cate beyond government censors has been in this
protest," adding, "Everyone has cell phones, eve-
ryone has access to the Internet, to Twitter; the
community radio stations in rural areas have
been very active."
In a conflict with wealth distribution a root
cause Thailand’s economy suffered from the cri-
sis. Initially, the impact was limited because the
demonstrations were confined to the center of
Bangkok’s commercial district while business
went on as usual elsewhere, but as the standoff
between Prime Minister Abhisit Vejjajiva’s gov-
ernment and the Red Shirts spiraled out of con-
trol, sell offs of Thai stocks by foreign investors
increased. However, Finance Minister Korn said
that he was more worried about the political and
social division than the economic impact.
"Thailand is an open economy ... we will re-
cover from this," he said, lamenting that govern-
ment had done a poor job of communicating all it
Thailand: The Cost of Foresight Paucity
Mourners in front of photo of renegade Thai army Major Gen-
eral Khattiya Sawasdiphol, also known as Seh Daeng (Red
Commandeer) who was shot in the head while talking to jour-
nalist. TIME/CNN photo
has done to subsidize rural farmers, bolster educa-
tion and improve the social safety net for aging
citizens. "This message has not been received suf-
ficiently at the rural level – the perception is that
we haven't done enough for the rural poor, al-
though the reality is something different," Korn
said.
When soldiers moved against them the Red
Shirts could not withstand the pressure and had to
flee. The man believed to be their principal strate-
gist, renegade Maj. Gen. Khattiya Sawasdiphol –
better known as Seh Daeng, which means Red
Commander, was shot in the head while talking to
reporters and died a few days later. This appar-
ently had a demoralizing effect on the Red Shirts
and all the vows they had made about giving up
their lives before abandoning their protest base
went unfulfilled as Thai soldiers, armed with tanks,
demolished their barricades and sent them fleeing.
The way forward for Thailand appears difficult
at this point. Prime Minister Abhisit Vejjajiva must
have realized by now that he badly managed the
situation. Had he offered early elections much
sooner the debate would have been over the date
and his political position would have been stronger
nationwide and internationally. Elections in No-
vember 2010 constituted a good offer but it came
too late.
224 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Thailand/Political Crisis Thailand: The Cost of Foresight Paucity
Thaksin Shinawatra whose great-great grandfather
migrated to Thailand from China was born into an
entrepreneurial family on July 26, 1949. By that time
the extended family, which was based in Thailand’s
rural north, had become wealthy and at 16 Thaksin
began working in one of his father’s cinemas. Thaksin
graduated from the 10th class of Thailand’s Armed
Forces Academy Preparatory School, after which he
was admitted to the Thai Police Cadet Academy.
From 1973 he made his career in the Royal Thai Po-
lice Department, meanwhile earning a Master’s De-
gree in Criminal Justice from Eastern Kentucky Uni-
versity in the United States and a doctorate in the
same field from Sam Houston State University in
Texas, U.S.A. He resigned from the police in 1988 as
a lieutenant-colonel and Deputy Superintendent of
the Policy and Planning Sub-division, General Staff
Division, Metropolitan Police Bureau.
He and his wife Potjaman Damapong, the
daughter of a police general, made numerous unsuc-
cessful attempts in business until the telecommuni-
cations boom when he seized the opportunity to es-
tablish a GSM network that eventually led to his To-
tal Access Communications becoming Thailand’s larg-
est mobile phone operator. In 1990 Thaksin founded
Shinawatra Satellite which developed and operated
four Thaicom communications satellites. In 1999 the
Shinawatra family spent some 1 billion baht (about
$22.25 million) establishing Shinawatra University in
Pathum Thani, offering international programs in
engineering, architecture and business management.
Thaksin was divorced from Potjaman Damapong in
2008. They have one son and two daughters.
Following the Red Shirts disturbances in
Bangkok Thailand’s government charged Thaksin Shi-
nawatra with terrorism and issued an arrest warrant
for him while he was in Montenegro.
225
Prime Minister Abhisit Vejjajiva, 46, is leader of the
Democratic Party. He is still under investigation for
allegedly covering up illegal donations to his party by
the failed petrochemicals company TPI Polene. An
Attorney-General's Office fact-finding panel found
that the Democrat Party he leads bribed other par-
ties to boycott the 2006 elections to force a constitu-
tional crisis, and recommended dissolving the De-
mocrats. The new Constitutional Court acquitted
Abhisit and the Democrats of the vote bribery
charges, while banning Thaksin's Thai Rak Thai party
for the same charges. Nonetheless, Abhisit’s Democ-
ratic Party lost the 2007 elections to the People
Power Party formed by the exiled Thaksin’s support-
ers. Members of Abhisit’s Democratic Party were
involved in the disruptions and sieges that created
the crisis preceding banning of the People Power
Party. Following the ban of the pro-Thaksin PPP Par-
liament elected Abhisit Prime Minister. On June 2,
2010 he survived a no-confidence vote in Parliament
by 246 to 186, initiated by MPs accusing him of
badly managing the Red Shirt crisis.
Born in New Castle, England, and educated at
Eaton and Oxford, where he studied philosophy,
politics and economics, Abhisit is the son of a physi-
cian who in his career also served as President of
Thailand’s Mahidol University and Deputy Public
Health Minister. The Vejjajiva are a prominent ethnic
Chinese Thai family that has maintained good rela-
tions with the Thai ruling elite since the late 18th cen-
tury.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Middle East/Israel-Palestine
Holding Peace Hostage in the Middle East
Perspective
H amas, which governs the Gaza Strip
and the Israeli right, led by Likud
Party, which holds a majority in Israel’s
Knesset, constitute the main obstacle to
peace in the Middle East, as neither is will-
ing to make the compromises necessary for
an end to the nearly 100 year old crisis to
become achievable. Hamas wants an end to
the Jewish state, which implies its annihilation and
in this outrageous pursuit it has the backing of Iran
and Lebanon’s Hezbollah (Party of God). Likud and
the Israeli right, backed by the majority of the Is-
raeli electorate as well as Israel’s principal lobby
arm in the United States, American-Israeli Public
Affairs Committee (AIPAC), are adamant that lands
captured during the 1967 war with Egypt and Syria
should not be given back as the United Nations
Security Council and General Assembly have re-
solved and also in defiance of UN demands have
refused to give up Israel’s claim to Arab East Jeru-
salem, which Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu
told the world at the UN General Assembly last
year is not occupied territory but Israel’s capital. In
the past Israel has provoked war with the Arabs,
banking on winning and capturing Arab lands to
annex to the Jewish state and despite reports that
Iran has managed to arm Hezbollah with missiles
that could damage Israeli cities, Likud and its far
right allies seem willing to risk another war rather
than make the compromises necessary for peace.
While the international community would like
to resolve the crisis with a Palestinian and Israeli
two sovereign states solution, Hamas and its allies,
on the Palestinian side, and Likud and its political
base on the Zionist side, are focused on virtual ab-
solutes. Netanyahu’s foreign minister Avigdor Lie-
berman has openly dismissed peace in the Middle
East as an illusion, which implies that he would like
to provoke another war so that Israel can take
more Arab land and thereby assert moral justifica-
tion for not giving back to the Palestinians and Syri-
ans lands previously seized in combat. In that
Addressing the Washington think tank Brookings Institute on
June 10, Palestinian Authority President Mahmoud Abbas (seen
above with President Obama on June 9th in the White House
Oval Office) said: "I would like to express some concern that the
situation is extremely difficult....The hope for a two-state solu-
tion, Palestine... living side-by-side in peace with the state of
Israel, this concept is starting to erode and I fear that the world
is starting to distrust that we are able to reach this solution."
President Obama after meeting with President Abbas said
the situation in Gaza is "unsustainable" and promised $400m in
new aid for the territory. (AP Photo/Charles Dharapak)
frame of mind the Israeli right has no interest in
coming to terms with the Al Fatah led government
in the West Bank, which in accord with the United
Nations and thereby the mainstream of the inter-
national community, simply wants Palestinian and
Israeli states, based on the pre-1967 War borders,
living as peaceful neighbors in a peaceful, stable
and prospering Middle East. On the other hand,
Israel’s far right talks and behaves as if it is militar-
ily focused on confronting Hezbollah and Hamas in
final combat to once and for all bash them to their
knees and seize sufficient Arab lands to constitute
the Jewish state they envisage. How large is that?
For now focus is on keeping the occupied territo-
ries. Beyond that would be difficult given the anti-
imperialist mood our 21st century has ushered in.
Significantly, both the Jews and Middle East Mus-
lims have their own calendars, neither of which
recognizes the dawn of the 21st century that for
the rest of us significantly correlates to a surge in
possibilities for decent, modern living for people
everywhere. It is unimaginable that this could be
true for all Jews or all Middle East Muslims, but we
226 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Asia/Middle East/Israel-Palestine
can certainly see in the political perspectives of
the extremists that their thinking is informed by
archaic values and notions; to wit the apartheid
notions of the Netanyahu-Lieberman camp and
the annihilation illusions of the Shi’ites (Hamas,
Hezbollah and Iran).
The blockade of Gaza imposed by Israel and
Egypt presumably in an attempt to cause the Pal-
estinians there to turn against Hamas is unfortu-
nately inevitable. The G-20 declaring that it is un-
sustainable in the wake of the Flotila debacle is
true in the broader sense that the status quo in
the Israeli-Palestinian relationship is volatile, but
it is not simply a matter of Israel lifting its block-
ade of Hamas led Gaza, which we must recognize
is not reasonable for Israel as long as Hamas ad-
vocates its destruction. Both peace and progress
are hostage here to hard-line radicals: the Israeli
right which has always maintained that they
don’t acknowledge Palestine and that the Arabs
states with all their land and relatively small
populations should absorb the Palestinian popu-
lation, on the one hand, and the Shi’ite coalition
of Hamas, Hezbollah and Iran, with tactical sup-
port from Syria’s Shi’ite leadership, which doesn’t
want Israel to exist, on the other. From the Is-
raelis – both right and center-left in fact–we get
such absurd propositions that if there is a Pales-
tinian state, Palestinian refugees should not be
allowed to return, while the right wants Palestine
to be an ever diminishing autonomous territory
within the State of Israel, which is essentially
apartheid with implications of ethnic cleansing.
The frustrations faced by the Obama admini-
stration trying to get the Palestinians and Israelis
back to the negotiating table, with Washington’s
envoy George Mitchell making visit after visit to
the principals in the region with no tangible re-
sults, occurs in the face of a massive arms build
up by Hezbollah, which has now secured through
democratic process a prominent place in Leba-
non’s coalition government. Talk of eventual war
has displaced peace talks. The Obama administra-
tion does not want war in the Middle East, the
European Union does not want war in the Middle
East, Japan does not want war there and neither
Russia nor China has particular interest in war
there. With the possible exception of Sudan
where the ruling National Congress Party un-
apologetically supports Hamas and Syria which
above all wants back its Golan Heights lost in the
1967 war, the Arab countries don’t want war in
the Middle East. Above all, the Palestinian Au-
Holding Peace Hostage in the Middle East
The prospect of Kadima leader Tzipi Livni (pictured above at
Davos in 2008) becoming Israel’s Prime Minister raised hopes
that peace was in sight, but despite her party winning more
seats than any other in the March 2009 elections, right wing
parties won more than the center left and a coalition of far
right and outright extremists formed the Israeli government.
thority led by Al Fatah does not want war. Yet all
of these war opposing countries and array of non
-state forces cannot come together to deal
squarely with Israel and the Shi’ite alliance?
The world knows the solution. Obama was
quoted during his campaign for office saying that
the Israelis would be crazy not to accept the
Saudi King Abdullah Plan which calls for a Pales-
tinian state with East Jerusalem as its capital and
Israeli withdrawal from all occupied territories, in
exchange for which all Arab states would recog-
nize Israel. Then Israeli foreign minister Tzipi Livni
was reported to agree with Obama on the Abdul-
lah Plan in principle and she went on to lead her
Kadima Party to more parliamentary seats than
any other in Israel’s 2009 elections, but the right
won more seats than the left with Likud trailing
Kadima by just one seat, making it reasonable for
Netanyahu to get the nod from President Simon
Peres to form the government. Now instead of
wrapping up a peace deal as we hoped for with
the center left, we are watching a build up to
war. The moral authority to press Iran to trans-
parency and cooperation with the United Nations
Security Council on its nuclear energy program is
compromised by Israel with its officially unde-
clared nuclear arsenal keeping aloof from nuclear
disarmament forums and institutions, while Is-
raeli’s hawks keep hinting to the world that if
Iran’s nuclear program is not stopped it could
launch an attack on the Persian giant’s nuclear
installations. Meanwhile, more immediately
alarming is Hezbollah seems itching for battle.
227 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Middle East/Israel-Palestine Holding Peace Hostage in the Middle East
Do we wait for war to break out between
Hezbollah and Israel and run the risk of Israel using
tactical nuclear weapons against Lebanon and
then going after Iran aiming to make sure Tehran
never has the capacity to retaliate?
China soft pedals on North Korea, Iran and
Sudan [over atrocities in Darfur]; Washington soft
pedals on Israel; the Arabs need to get tougher on
Hamas and come down harder with criticism of
Iran; but unless there is a common understanding
that it is in humanity’s common interest to rid the
world of pariahs so that we focus on universal hu-
man potential fulfillment, the 21st century will con-
tinue being held hostage by the age of imperialism
and Zionism that we wish to transcend. The conse-
quence will invariably be increasing terrorism,
which is liable to provoke racist, ethnic and sectar-
ian backlashes that would put our global civiliza-
tion at risk of being ransacked by misused technol-
ogy.
In spite of the democratic institutions and
processes we respect that has affirmed radicalism Hezbollah’s charismatic leader Hassan Nasrallah has
as the popular will, however well we understand already provoked one war with Israel (2006) from his
the circumstances out of which radicalism in the party’s base in Southern Lebanon that led to Israel’s
Middle East grew, no matter the extent to which bombardment of Beirut, which he has vowed to re-
historical experiences have informed the charac- venge by striking Tel Aviv.
ters and self esteem that make the actors in the choice is available. It is clear however that Israel
Middle East crisis what they are, we cannot leave and Hamas are locked in a syndrome of conflict
the future to remain hostage of the past. This is from which there is no way out, unless the inter-
the creed with which the international community national community from the United Nations Secu-
must face the Middle East, knowing that a sub- rity Council level resolves to enforce the establish-
stantial portion of the population there already ment of two states, Jewish and Palestinian, living
agrees with this and with rational resolve that the side by side with full respect for each other’s sov-
majority will be convinced by our even handed ereignty.
goodwill. The Flotilla chapter to this conflict that dates
back to the early part of the 20th century highlights
The Flotilla Chapter the contradictions between our era’s rising sense
Israeli soldiers’ middle of night landing on the of human solidarity and humanitarian activism and
Turkish passenger ship, Mavi Marmara, accompa- old order power politics. It highlights the need for
nying the aid to Gaza vessels on May 31 resulting the broadest possible multilateral power politics to
in at least 10 deaths and dozens injured was not a deal with stale situations, proven intractable, and
surprising climax of the face off between the Flo- most especially the Middle East crisis which is ar-
tilla people determined to bring humanitarian aid guably the most troublesome of all.
to Gaza and the Israeli government that warned Imposing a peace solution on the Middle East
them not to attempt breaking its Gaza blockade. in accordance with existing international law and
Israel and the Hamas government in Gaza are mu- standing UN resolutions is a hard sell, tough
tually hostile and while Israel has an ongoing his- proposition, but unconfirmed reports say some-
tory of disregard for the humanity of Palestinians, thing like this is already being considered both in
Hamas’s politics cast Gaza’s people in the role of Washington and the European Union. That at least
canon fodder. It is not clear to what extent the means the thought is not anathema to the main-
people of Gaza accept the role Hamas has placed stream.
them in or simply resign to it feeling no other
228 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Middle East/Israel-Lebanon
Hizballah, Israel Prepare for a War
That Neither Wants
By NICHOLAS BLANFORD / JEZZINE, SOUTH LEBANON Nicholas Blanford / Jezzine,
South Lebanon – Tue May 11, 5:20 am ET
Hizballah’s Mahdi Scouts/photo by Bryan Denton
W ith a startled shout from the outcrop
above, the Hizballah fighter bounded
down the rocky slope and cocked his AK-47 rifle
in a dramatic flourish as he drew near. "What are
you doing here?" he demanded, his face a mix of
anger and astonishment. "This is a military zone.
You should not be here."
It turned out that the youthful militant had
been guarding a small outpost created by Shi'ite
militia on a remote mountaintop in south Leba-
non. The location was well chosen, offering the
Hizballah men commanding views over the hills
and valleys of the southern Bekaa Valley, a likely
battlefront if a widely anticipated - and feared -
war breaks out between the Iran-backed group
and Israel.
Whether these rugged hills will see yet an-
other war depends less on the likely combatants
than on the U.S. and Iran. Hizballah is viewed as
one component of Iran's deterrence against a
possible attack on its nuclear sites, should diplo-
matic efforts fail to resolve the standoff with the
West over its enrichment of uranium. And recent
conversations with Hizballah fighters reveal an
organization at the peak of its military powers,
with an army of well-trained, disciplined and
highly motivated combatants wielding advanced
229
weaponry, cultivating new tactics and brim-
ming with confidence.
"The next war is coming, 100%, but we
don't know when," says Ali, a thickly mus-
cled university student. "We have big plans
for it. God willing, you will see the end of
Israel."
Like all Hizballah fighters interviewed
for this article, Ali requested anonymity, as
he was not authorized to talk to the press.
Although Hizballah and Israel both insist
they do not want another war, neither side
has disguised its preparations for that possi-
bility. Since the end of its latest bout with
the Israeli military, in July and August 2006,
Hizballah has built new defensive lines and firing
positions, the fighters say, in the hills flanking the
Bekaa and along the rugged, mountainous spine
running up the middle of southern Lebanon.
One such position was the observation post
near the town of Jezzine onto which a TIME re-
porter stumbled. It consisted of a couple of bun-
kers sunk into the hillside, an open fireplace with a
soot-blackened cooking pot and bags of onions
and potatoes. Local residents say at night they can
hear the sounds of explosions and gunfire echoing
through the valleys as Hizballah trains. Israel vows
it will use far greater force in the next war and will
treat the Lebanese state - in whose government
Hizballah has a major role - as the enemy, rather
than just the Shi'ite militia, a prospect that fright-
ens many Lebanese. But the resolve of the Hizbal-
lah combatants remains unshaken by Israeli
threats.
"Israel is living in a state of confusion because
it perceives that any aggression it would launch
against Lebanon would be lost," boasted Hizballah
deputy leader Sheik Naim Qassem this week, add-
ing that he did not believe a new war with Israel
was on the horizon. Perhaps not, but the look in
the eyes of Hizballah's combatants suggest that
not only are they fully prepared to fight one, they
actually look forward to it.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Asia/Middle East/Israel-Lebanon
"It doesn't matter. We can
always rebuild. Our dignity is
more important than roofs over our heads," says
Haj Rida, a square-jawed unit commander. Such
sangfroid illustrates the single-minded determi-
nation of the Hizballah combatant, nurtured by
years of relentless religious instruction and mili-
tary training. Ali, for example, was raised in an
environment of Islamic piety and dedication to
the cause, joining the party's youth program at
the age of 12. He eschews parties and listening to
music, saying he has dedicated his life to "walking
the path of the Prophet Muhammad."
"I have my studies at university and my fam-
ily, but I also have the life of jihad and prepara-
tions for the coming war," he says. "I consider my
jihad duties as something joyful. You cannot un-
derstand the joy of jihad unless you are in Hizbal-
lah."
Acting on an internal assessment of its mili-
tary performance in the 2006 war, Hizballah is
seeking to improve its capabilities by developing
new tactics and acquiring new weapons. It is plac-
ing particular emphasis on improved air-defense
systems to challenge Israel's aerial superiority.
Reports over the past year suggest that Hiz-
ballah has received advanced Russian shoulder-
fired antiaircraft missiles, and some fighters have
been trained in Syria on larger truck-mounted
missile systems. U.S. and Israeli intelligence
sources say Hizballah has also augmented its ar-
senal with larger, longer-range rockets with guid-
ance capabilities. Many analysts believe that in
the event of another war, Hizballah plans to
strike strategic targets deep inside Israel. In Feb-
ruary, movement leader Sheik Hassan Nasrallah
hinted that Hizballah now had the ability to strike
targets in Tel Aviv.
Although last month's Israeli claims that
Syria transferred Scud ballistic missiles to Hizbal-
lah remain unsubstantiated - and some military
analysts are skeptical, given the rocket's size and
cumbersome logistical requirements - the group
is believed to have acquired Syrian-manufactured
M-600 guided rockets. The M-600, a copy of an
Iranian rocket, can carry a 1,100-lb. (500 kg) war-
head a distance of 155 miles (250 km), and its
guidance system allows Hizballah to target Is-
rael's Defense Ministry in Tel Aviv from hidden
bases in the northern Bekaa Valley.
Hizballah's possession of the M-600 is "just
the tip of the iceberg," Brigadier General Yossi
Baidatz, Israel's top military intelligence analyst,
230
War Neither Wants
Israeli 2006 bombardment of Beirut
told a Knesset committee on Tuesday, May 4.
“Hizballah currently has an arsenal of thousands of
rockets of all kinds and ranges, including solid-
fueled rockets, with a longer range and more accu-
rate," he said.
Besides seeking new weapons systems, the
Shi'ite militia is also finding innovative ways to util-
ize older armaments, such as the guerrilla-
standard RPG-7 grenade launcher and the recoil-
less rifle, a near obsolete antitank weapon.
"The RPG-7 is old but still a good weapon,"
says Ali. "It's how you use them that counts. We
are always studying new combat techniques."
Israel's heavily armored tanks are to receive a
newly developed defense system that fires mini-
interceptors to destroy incoming antitank missiles.
Hizballah fighters, without revealing details, say
they are training to overcome such sophisticated
defenses by "swarming" Israeli tanks with low-tech
antitank weapons.
Hizballah's battle plans may also include hav-
ing fighters infiltrate Israel to carry out raids and
sabotage missions - a move that would be un-
precedented in the Arab-Israeli conflict. Israeli
doctrine is to fight its wars in the territory of its
enemies rather than on its home front. Says Ali:
"God willing, we will go into Palestine next time."
Despite the mounting tension, Israel's pledge
- and vast capability - to inflict catastrophic dam-
age on Lebanon and the scale of Hizballah's arms
buildup functions as a kind of mutual deterrence
that has brought the usually volatile frontier its
longest period of calm in 40 years.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Australia’s Governor General Quentin Bryce swearing in Julia Gillard as the coun-
try’s first female Prime Minister on June 24th, after Prime Minister Kevin Rudd
withdrew from his Labor Party’s leadership vote. Gillard, was Rudd’s Deputy Prime
Minister.

231
 Australia/Politics
Australia’s Labor Party Dumps Rudd
Report
K evin Rudd holds the contradicting distinc-
tions of having been Australia’s most
popular Prime Minister ever, winning the 2007
election with a record 7.53% voter shift in his
Labor Party’s favor and attaining a 74% approval
rating in March 2009, but ironically he was the
first Australian Labor Party Prime Minister to be
ousted as his party’s leader before the end of his
first term. Rudd, 52, son of British convict stock
exiled to Australia in the early 19th century, an
orphan who spent his childhood in humiliating
poverty, joined the Australian Labor Party at 15
and as Prime Minister became the persona of
the new Australia. He steered Australia away
from the 2008-2009 global recession, took the
initiative to make the National Apology to the
Stolen Generations (mixed raced Aborigine chil-
dren forcefully taken from their mothers by
churches from 1869 to 1969) and initiated the
April 2008 2020 Summit aimed at shaping a
strategy for Australia’s long term future. The
array of topics comprising the summit agenda
included indigenous Australians, sustainability
and climate change, the digital economy and
science and innovation, among others. Promi-
nent among Rudd’s labor policies were the phas-
ing out of individual agreements between em-
ployers and employees, known as Australian
Workplace Agreements, establishment of a
safety net, restoration of unfair dismissal laws
for employers with less than 100 employees and
planning establishment of Fair Work Australia
intended to bring all labor matters under a sin-
gle government agency. Although Rudd’s cam-
paign promise of a computer on the desk of
every upper secondary school student proved
financially infeasible his government allocated
$2 billion for classroom computers.
Like Obama, Medvedev and Harper, Rudd
represented the first generation of 21st century
leaders born after 1955, bearing the lofty vision
to the future but pragmatic in realizing that so-
232
Australian Prime Minister Kevin Rudd arrives to an-
nounce the leadership ballot at a news conference at
the Federal Palace in Canberra on June 23, 2010
cio-political progression through democratic
process in a pluralistic political culture occurs in
stages, unlike the notion of revolution which is
destruction of the old order and laying a new
foundation. Like his friend Obama he seized on
the evident failures of the past to advocate re-
form. Analytically commenting on the global
financial crisis as it peaked in early 2009, Rudd
stated, "….the great neo-liberal experiment of
the past 30 years has failed", and that "Neo-
liberalism and the free-market fundamentalism
it has produced has been revealed as little more
than personal greed dressed up as an economic
philosophy. And, ironically, it now falls to social
democracy to prevent liberal capitalism from
cannibalizing itself." Rudd called for a new era of
"social capitalism" spearheaded by social de-
mocrats such as himself and U.S. President
Barack Obama to "support a global financial sys-
tem that properly balances private incentive
with public responsibility."
No doubt Rudd’s soaring popularity only
made the opposition more determined to bring
him down.
Faced with opposition from both the Lib-
eral Party and the Greens, Rudd provoked dis-
satisfaction from his support base by his deci-
sion to put on ice until 2012 the carbon trading
scheme that Australia’s Labor Party had champi-
oned since its last election campaign. One of
Rudd’s first acts as Prime Minister was signing
the Kyoto Protocol and he has said that an emis-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Australia/Politics
sions trading scheme was a “great moral and
economic challenge of our time”, threatening a
double dissolution of parliament should legisla-
tion become bogged down in the opposition-
dominated Senate. The Liberals were improving
their poll ratings by portraying the carbon trade
scheme as a "great big new tax", while Greens
sided with the Liberals because they considered
the emissions reduction targets too small.
Also, Rudd was in the midst of confronta-
tion with the mining industry over his push for a
40% tax on super-profits. New Prime Minister
Julia Gillard asked the mining companies to
cease their advertorial campaign against the tax
and invited them for a meeting.
On 23 June 2010, in the face of declining
performance approval ratings, Rudd announced
at a press conference that there would be a
leadership ballot for the Australian Labor Party
the following day between himself and Deputy
Prime Minister Julia Gillard within the Federal
Labor caucus, following days of speculation.
Facing up to the reality that he had lost the sup-
port of key factions required to win the vote,
Kevin Rudd stepped down as leader of the Labor
Party on 24 June ahead of the contest. However,
he said he would re-contest his Griffith constitu-
ency parliamentary seat in the next election.
That would make him the first former Prime
Minister to re-contest his seat since William
McMahon in 1980.
Rudd’s former Deputy Prime Minister Julia
Gillard upon taking over the Labor Party leader-
ship in a period of diminishing performance ap-
proval ratings was emphatic that her motive was
to save the government from defeat in the next
election so that Australians would continue to
benefit from the social progress it has brought.
That was the Labor Party telling Rudd: ‘You have
done a good job but have now veered off course
and we are not going to let you carry our party
government with you.’
The Australian Labor Party dumping of
Rudd highlights the ideological and policy strug-
gle going on between conservatives and reform-
ers, not only in Australia but in so many other
parts of the world. It was a personal blow to
him, which was quit obvious during his resigna-
tion speech, but for new Prime Minister Julia
Gillard who had long been Rudd’s ally it ap-
peared a taking of the baton in a relay race. As
an attractive and single first female prime minis-
ter of Australia who appears in public with her
Australia’s Labor Party Dumps Rudd
Julia Gillard, lawyer, born in Barry, Vale of Glamorgan, Wales,
United Kingdom 49 years ago, on June 24, 2010 not only be-
came Australia’s first female prime minister but also the first
who had never married. Her moving to Australia at the age of
5 was occasioned by her suffering bronchopneumonia and
doctors’ advice to her parents that recovery had better chance
in a warmer climate.
Julia was a student activist at the University of Mel-
bourne from where she graduated with bachelor of arts and
bachelor of law degrees in 1986. She joined the Australia La-
bor Party club while a university student and became actively
involved in a campaign against state education budget cuts.
She was also secretary a supporter of Socialist Forum which
lobbied for a super tax on the rich and making Leningrad a
sister city of Melbourne. Before graduating she became the
first female leader of the Australian Union of Students.
After graduation she joined Melbourne law firm Slater &
Gordon in 1986, where she worked in industrial law. Four years
later at the age of 29 she was admitted as one of the firms first
female partners.
In 1996 she started a 2 year stint as chief of staff in the
office of Labor Party politician John Brumby, where she was
responsible for drafting the affirmative action rules within the
Labor Party in Victoria that set the target of preselecting
women for 35 per cent of winnable seats within a decade.
In 1998 Julia was elected to the Australian Parliament.
With Labor in opposition from 2001 to 2003, she was a mem-
ber of the shadow cabinet with the portfolios of population
and immigration, reconciliation and indigenous affairs. Specu-
lation of her becoming Labor Party leader started as early as
2004, but she stayed out of leadership contests. When Labor
led by Kevin Rudd won the 2007 federal elections she became
Australia’s first female Deputy Prime Minister. She also held
the portfolio, Minister of Education, Employment & Workplace
Relations.
boyfriend and with whom one opposition leader
declined to -deny having a flirtatious relation-
ship, Julia Gillard brings a fresh, committed, ex-
perienced and intriguing leadership personality
ahead of next years elections, but she has chose
to retain Rudd’s cabinet, without Rudd of
course.
233 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Haiti

234
 Caribbean & Central America/Haiti
The Challenge of Haiti
Perspective
ollowing the March 31st donors
F conference at United Nations
headquarters in New York in which
$5.3 billion was raised for Haiti’s re-
construction over the next two years
and another $4.6bn for the following
three years and beyond to 2020, the
Interim Haiti Recovery Commission
was on June 18th launched in Port au
Prince, Haiti, chaired by United Na-
tions Special Envoy to Haiti, former
U.S. president, Bill Clinton. Clinton
vowed to devote the next three years
of his life to Haiti. Putting the recov-
ery commission in motion came amidst mount-
ing media, observer and Haitian public com-
mentaries that despite the resources at the dis-
posal of the Haitian government it seems inca-
pable of managing the humanitarian crisis and
reconstruction challenges.
No doubt the willingness of the interna-
tional community to commit so much money to
Haiti is that it is a small country (10,714 sq.
miles/10 million people) that could be devel-
oped with affordable donations, making it not
only a model of international solidarity in the
wake of a devastating natural disaster but also
a maiden 21st century case of seriously address-
ing the wrongs of the imperialist epoch– actu-
ally a sort of reparations. The urbane and integ-
rity confidence inspiring personalities of Haiti’s
President René Préval and Prime Minister Jean-
Max Bellerve have no doubt also been factors
in the prevailing international willingness to
finance Haiti out of the doldrums, even though
from the time the earthquake struck on January
12th there has been no let up of criticism of
their ability to competently manage the situa-
tion; and Préval is constitutionally ineligible to
contest next year’s presidential election.
As rescue efforts were globally mobilized
and the Port au Prince airport runway became
Right to left: Presidents Réne Préval, George W. Bush and Bill
Clinton
overcrowded causing relief flight diversions,
while the government was conspicuously invisi-
ble apart from President Péval’s makeshift of-
fice and residence at the airport (as the quake
had wrecked the presidential palace) and Prime
Minister Bellerve’s constant interaction with
the media, it became obvious that the sheer
magnitude and multifariousness of the disaster
were solution defiant. As for reconstruction, no
government on earth today, with the possible
exception of China, has experience in the
measure of rapid massive socio-economic
transformation that is now expected of Haiti.
The country’s leaders did not run for office
with an idea or promise to handle $10 billion in
development funds, while rescuing the popula-
tion of Port au Prince from an earthquake that
killed over two hundred thousand people and
left another 2 million homeless, not to mention
injured survivors. While it is fine to envisage
turning the entire reconstruction challenge
over to Haiti’s government after two years,
what is no doubt needed from beginning to
end is final decision making by Haiti while col-
laborating with international experts on plan
design and implementation.
235 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Caribbean & Central America/Haiti
Doubts have been raised about the pros-
pects for realizing appropriate local community
involvement in reconstruction work, consider-
ing the country’s highly centralized system of
governance. The complications of resettling
people from land earmarked for development
projects have already manifested replete with
crisis politicization and face-offs between com-
munities and the police.
It is important that the world have pa-
tience with Haiti, despite inevitability of the
media making news out of and disparaging the
rate of progress and capability of Haiti’s leader-
ship. Already there is agitation for former presi-
dent Jean-Bertrand Aristide to return from exile
in South Africa, as well as demonstrations de-
manding that President René Péval and Prime
Minister Jean-Max Bellerve resign, and with
Haiti scheduled to have elections while recon-
struction is in motion, the international com-
munity would best serve their investments in
Haiti by engaging the Haitians to encourage
peaceful, free and fair elections without an ac-
rimonious aftermath. Aristide who accuses the
George W. Bush administration of having sup-
ported the coup d’état that removed him from
the presidency he won through democratic
mandate needs to be engaged by his hosts in
South Africa and African Union leaders to look
forward and not carry grudges for past wrongs
in case he decides to return to Haiti’s political
arena. In his first news conference after being
elected in 2006, President René Préval, a for-
mer Aristide ally, was emphatic that Aristide
had the constitutional right to return home and
if he chose enter politics. In all democracies an
elected government is subject to massively lose
popularity and that is why those in Europe that
can afford to have early elections do so. The
important things for Haitians with so much in-
ternational goodwill hanging in the balance is
to stay within constitutional processes and the
legislative regime.
The Interim Haiti Recovery Commission
launched on June 18th signaled the official be-
ginning of reconstruction fund utilization. IHRC
has a mandate to oversee the utilization of all
reconstruction funds over the coming year.
“The prime minister and I have made a commit-
ment to the people of Haiti and the people of
the world to make this process both transpar-
ent and accountable,” UN Special Envoy to Haiti
Bill Clinton told reporters before the commis-
The Challenge of Haiti
Haiti’s Prime Minister Jean-Max Bellerve with Canada’s Interna-
tional Cooperation Minister Bey Oda
sion’s June 18th meeting.
Prior to the June 17th meeting of the Haiti
Reconstruction Fund, at which its Operational
Manual and administrative budget were dis-
cussed, only Brazil had fully paid its initial
pledge, $55 million. On June 17th Australia and
Norway joined the Fund, putting in $8.64 mil-
lion and $31.2 million respectively, which
brought the Fund’s cash account up to $95 mil-
lion. Norway will join Brazil and Haiti on the
Fund’s steering committee. Also on the 17th the
United States announced its initial contribution
of $30bn. At that maiden meeting the Fund
allocated $30 million to the Haitian govern-
ment to augment the $30 million in budget
support grants provided by the World Bank.
At the Haitian government’s request the Inter-
national Development Association (IDA) of the
World Bank Group is serving as the Fund’s
Trustee and fiscal agent. The Fund’s other part-
ner entities are the Inter-American Develop-
ment Bank and UNDP.
The Fund is a partnership between Haiti
and the international community chaired by
Haiti’s finance minister, while the Commission
sets the priorities. The Fund is mandated to
finance technical cooperation (including capac-
ity building), provide investment grants and
budgetary support. All activities funded by the
HRF will support the four priorities laid out by
the government of Haiti in the Action Plan: ter-
ritorial rebuilding, economic re-foundation,
institutional strengthening and social and cul-
236 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Caribbean & Central America/Haiti The Challenge of Haiti
tural development. Offices of the
Fund and the Commission will be
at the same location.
The media has been making
an issue of the slow pace of
pledge payment but apart from
delayed pledge fulfillment being
a historical global phenomenon,
donors are purposefully paying
the Fund in installments. In this
vein Norway’s Special Envoy to
Haiti Halvor Sætre said upon
making his country’s initial in-
stallment, “We hope that the
Haiti Reconstruction Fund will
become the most important tool
to ensure flexible and coordi-
nated funding to the Govern- UN Special Envoy to Haiti Bill Clinton launching the Interim Haiti
ment’s recovery plan. If the Fund performs well, Recovery Commission in Port au Prince on June 18th with his co
we intend to provide additional support later this -chairman Haiti’s Prime Minister Jean-Max Bellerve (right)
year or next year.”

Haiti’s women demand role in reconstruction

NEW YORK, 1 April 2010 (IRIN) - Women's civil
society groups were noticeable by their absence
from the landmark Haiti donor conference on 31
March, which secured pledges of US$5.3 billion
over the next two years to support the country’s
post-quake recovery.
Their lack of a presence at the meeting was
indicative of a broader missing voice in Haiti’s
long-term reconstruction prospects, gender activ-
ists argued.
“Why are we not there right now, where are
the women at this conference?” questioned
Marie St. Cyr, a Haitian human rights advocate.
“We still don’t have full participation and we cer-
tainly don’t have full inclusion. Haitian women are
still being raped…they are supporting more than
half of the households, and yet they are not being
heard.”
More than 20 women’s groups attended an
alternative conference hosted by MADRE, a New
York-based rights organization. St. Cyr said she
had lobbied for the past month to join the donor
meeting, but had not received a response from
any of the various co-hosts, including the United
Nations, the Haitian and the US governments.
Haitian-born Massachusetts State Representative
Marie St. Fleur, who represented the Diaspora
community at the main conference, said she was
237
not surprised to look across the room and s e e
few other female faces. The text of the Haitian
government’s Post-Disaster Needs Assessment
(PDNA), a blueprint plan for recovery, offered a
similar lack of gender diversity, she explained.
“There needs to be a bolder vision for recon-
struction, and right now, there isn’t a very clear
place for women within that,” St. Fleur told IRIN.
“But I think we make a mistake when we say that
we have to have a place for women, because they
must not placed in a corner like that. Women and
girls must be integrated throughout this plan. And
that doesn’t exist, right now.”
The PDNA report divides reconstruction into
eight main themes, including governance, infra-
structure sectors, and environmental and disaster
risk development. Women gain inclusion only in
the “cross-cutting sector,” which also addresses
youth and culture.
The Haiti Gender Equality Collaborative, a
coalition of civil society organizations, placed its
own spin on the document, issuing a modified
“gender shadow report” at the MADRE confer-
ence, hosted across the street from the United
Nation Secretariat. It highlights the gender con-
cerns absent from Haiti’s PDNA, and offers recom-
mendations for gender-sensitive plans of action.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Caribbean & Central America/Haiti/Humanitarian Crisis

Haiti’s Most Vulnerable:

Women and Girls
Perspective

A lthough UN Police deny there is rape in

Haiti’s IDP camps the stories from women
and teenage girls, often in cases where both
mother and daughter have been victims, give a
grisly picture of daily merciless sexual assaults at
gunpoint. The female UN Police from Bangla-
desh cannot speak French so there is a commu-
nications gap between them and the women
they are supposed to protect, while UN force
commanders and officials appear more inter-
ested in protecting their images and jobs than
Haiti’s most vulnerable earthquake victims. The
general picture is that of UN force detachment
from the population and indeed they maintain
they are under instructions not to personally
interact with IDPs.
Women and teenage girls normally do not
fabricate stories of being raped, nor do they fake
tears of traumatizing memories. The female vic-
tims say that when they report rapes to the Hai-
tian police the tough guys in uniform with law
enforcement badges on their chests retort that
it is not their business.
Looking at the TV scenes of the rough man-
ner in which Haiti’s police behaved with the local
population in the wake of last January 12th’s
earthquake one has no difficulty believing that
they are hardly a sympathetic lot. Moreover, it
sounds very suspicious for police officers not to
be interested in investigating rape at gunpoint;
even if they care less about sexual assaults on
women and girls, gun toting criminals are a
threat to their personal security. Or are they?
It is vital that none of us loose sight of the
fact that people are the essential instruments
and objects of socio-economic development and
it stands to reason that the more they are handi-
capped by demoralization and trauma, not to
mention physical disability, the more we com- (Top to bottom) 1.Haitain women and girls praying after a trau-
promise society’s prospects for achieving its matizing event in their Port au Prince IDP camp; 2. Port au
socio-economic development goals. Prince boys, one of whom carries a rifle; 3 all female Bangladesh
Police unit arriving Haiti June 1, 2010

238 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Caribbean & Central America/Jamaica
Dimensions of Jamaica
Perspective
Jamaica’s coastal capital, business and cultural center, Kingston has a population of about 700,000, making it
the largest Anglophone city in the Americas south of the United States
H istorically Jamaica has perhaps been best
known as a nice place to vacation; but its
music, from calypso to reggae, especially legend
Bob Marley has brought the Caribbean island na-
tion into the lives of people all over the world
who would never be able to afford vacationing
there. In sports, Jamaica has long produced good
runners, with son of the soil Arthur Wint winning
the 400 meters at the 1948 Summer Olympics in
London, but the current crop led by Usain Bolt,
Veronica Campbell-Brown, Shelly-Ann Fraser and
Asafa Powell has catapulted the 11,100 sq. km (4,
444 sq. mile) Caribbean Island nation with a
population of only 3 million to the very top of the
Athletics world. Jamaica is also one of the com-
peting countries in the International Cricket
Council Test Match circuit.
That Jamaica was in the news during the sec-
ond quarter of this year in connection with a high
profile racketeer does not come as a surprise, nor
239
did Prime Minister Bruce Golding’s acknowledge-
ment that its capital Kingston was known as one
of the world’s murder capitals, because besides
from news stories about crime and corruption
appearing from time to time, Jamaica’s Reggae
music conveys the message and image of a com-
plex ghetto culture. It was interesting but not
surprising to learn that Dudus Christopher Coke
who was in the headlines for defying arrest to be
deported to the United States for drug traffick-
ing, gun running and racketeering inherited the
vice empire from his father, because Jamaica has
been known for such things just as it is respected
for the number of successful businessmen and
other personalities in North America that were
either born in Jamaica or trace their roots there.
They are far too numerous to begin naming, but
suffice it to point out that former U.S. Military
Joint Chiefs of Staff Chairman Colin Powell, who
also became Secretary of State is of Jamaican
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Caribbean & Central America/Jamaica Dimensions of Jamaica
parentage. Remittances from Jamaicans living
abroad contribute 20% to Jamaica’s GDP.
According to Malcolm X (El Hajj Malik Sha-
bazz) in one of his authoritative narrations on
African American history, Jamaica and Cuba
were slave breaking ports in the trans-Atlantic
slave trade, where shackled Africans surviving
the horrendous journey from their homelands to
the Americas were offloaded to have what re-
mained of their resistance spirit broken. Those
who were nonetheless defiant after the torture
according to Malcolm were left in Jamaica and
Cuba to work on the big plantations as they
would not be suitable for the American slave
market where many slave buyers were small
farmers. Hence, neither is it surprising that Ja-
maicans have a reputation for being a tough lot,
whether in the business world or in the under Bob Marley Museum, housed in the residence/recording studio
of the late music legend, is Kingston’s most popular tourist at-
bellies of Kingston and London.
traction. An hour long tour cost about $10 (Below) Songwriter,
singer, musician Bob Marley ((February 6, 1945 – May 11, 1981)
Historical Brief circa 1979
While the Jamaican National Heritage Trust is
endeavoring to build up documentation on evi-
dence of the Taino/Arawaks, historian Glenn
Woodley maintains that when Christopher Co-
lumbus landed in Jamaica during 1494 he met
about 200 villages populated by indigenous
Americans, namely the Arawak and Tiano ethnic
communities who she says moved there from
the South American mainland during the period
4000 to 1000 BC. This has been accepted as
probable as it is documented that Columbus met
people in Jamaica and by that time Africans,
whose descendants now constitute 97% of the
country’s population, had not yet begun arriv-
ing. Columbus claimed Jamaica for Spain but by
the middle of the 16th century the British had
started incursions on Span’s Jamaican domain,
eventually taking full possession of the island, by
1655. At that time Jamaica’s population con-
sisted of about 4,500 Europeans and 1,500 Afri-
cans. However, during the 1670s Africans be-
came the majority, an occurrence partly owing
to the Spanish fleeing after the British takeover.
To avoid being re-enslaved by the British,
Africans took to the mountains, joining those
who had already escaped from the Spanish to
live with the Tianos. These Africans were
dubbed the Maroons and it was they who
fought the British during the 18th century.
Despite enslavement of Africans on the
lowland plantations which eventually made Ja-
maica a major sugar exporter, the Maroons
240 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Caribbean & Central America/Jamaica Dimensions of Jamaica
maintained independent communities in the
mountains throughout the 200 years of British
rule. After the British outlawed slave trading in
the early 19th century they brought indentured
servants to Jamaica from China and other Asian
countries under their dominion. When slavery
was finally abolished in Jamaica during 1834, the
population mix was assessed to be 311, 070 Afri-
can slaves, 5,000 free blacks, 40,000 mixed
raced people referred to as coloreds and 15,000
whites.
Jamaica became independent from Great
Britain in 1962 as a parliamentary democracy
with the national motto: “Out of Many, One Views of Sunset Beach Resort at Montego Bay (top and below)
People.” Over the first ten years of independ-
ence GDP growth averaged 6% per annum,
driven by investment in the island’s vast bauxite
reserves, as well as tourism, manufacturing and
to a lesser extent agriculture. However, the
wealth gap grew and manufacturing invest-
ments contributed to increased numbers of ur-
ban poor. During the 1970s the country slipped
into recession with GDP by 1980 being 25%
lower than in 1972. Urban crime increased with
the economic meltdown and UN statistics
showed Jamaica having one of the world’s high-
est murder rates. In 2003 an estimated 15% of
Jamaicans lived below the poverty line, despite a
nominal per capita GDP of $4,100 ($8,777 PPP).
Crime has not deterred tourists flocking to
Jamaica at an annual rate of about 1.3 million.
Tourism brings in over half of Jamaica’s foreign
exchange earnings and provides about a quarter
of the country’s jobs. Warm climate, year round
sunshine and beautiful white sand beaches, as
well as picturesque landscape have since the
latter part of the 19th century made Jamaica a
popular tourist island, especially for Americans
and Brits. Montego Bay and Port Antonio have
since then been the island’s most famous tourist
locations, offering along with Ocho Rios fine ho-
tels, restaurants and shopping.
Economic reforms, including privatization of
parastatals, removal of restrictions on foreign
investments and market driven exchange rate Drug baron Christopher Coke in New York police custody
for the Jamaican dollar led to sustained GDP government bailout of the financial and other ail-
growth over the period 1985 to 1995, after ing sectors of the economy in the mid to late
which financial sector problems and drought 1990s. Debt servicing now consumes nearly half
brought recession in 1996 and ’97. Jamaica was of government spending.
not able to elude impact of the global economic Nonetheless, Jamaicans are resilient people
recession, suffering a 4.2% decline in GDP over who have maintained their parliamentary democ-
2009. The country has a debt burden amounting racy with leaders apt to change on election day.
to 130% of GDP, which is largely attributable to
241 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Caribbean & Central America/Jamaica Stock Exchange

JSE market capitalization gained $1.5b in June

Jamaica Stock Exchange Building, Kingston
JSE general manager, Marlene Street-
Forrest previously blamed the 2008 market de-
cline on the global meltdown, high interest rates
and its crippling spill-over effect on company
earnings in 2008. In 2009, however, stocks were
cheap relative to their improved earnings.
The two-day unrest in May sparked by the
confrontation between the security forces and
gunmen loyal to Christopher 'Dudus' Coke, re-
sulted in 73 civilian deaths and over $100 million
in losses to manufacturing businesses in down-
town Kingston, Jamaica Manufacturers' Associa-
tion head, Omar Azan revealed two weeks ago.
The JSE's office despite being closed to the pub-
lic allowed brokers to trade electronically

I n June, the Jamaica Stock Exchange's (JSE)

market capitalization gained $1.5 billion over
the 30-day period to close at $565.9 billion fol-
(outside the JSE), which enabled trading.

lowing the first full month after the security

force operations in west Kingston disrupted
business in the corporate area.
Guardian Holding's stock was the top gainer
in the month up 25.7% to $220; followed by Sal-
ada Foods, up 7.4% to $10.75 and Seprod, up
6.7% to $23. It indicated that the top advancing
stock gains were small. Comparatively, top de-
clining stocks were Mayberry, down 30.5% to
$2.01; Montego Freeport, down 18.3% to $1.65;
and Cable & Wireless, down 15.2% to $0.39.
The JSE index stood at 86,333.6 points at
June 30, 2010 which was up 0.37 per cent and Jamaica Stock Exchange General Manager
6.7 per cent when compared with the previous Marlene Street-Forrest
month and same period last year respectively.
Jamaica Stock Exchange was incorporated as a
Market capitalization, although up slightly
private limited liability company in August 1968
in the month, is still below the $602.1 billion
and commenced operations on Monday, Febru-
recorded June 30, 2009 based on JSE statistics
ary 3, 1969. The exchange is governed by a
analyzed by the Business Observer. The JSE In-
Board of Directors that includes the Governor of
dex is recovering from its worst decline in 14
the Central Bank or his nominee and a represen-
years, from the 2008 high of 112,100 points in
tative of Jamaica’s Ministry of Finance.
May. The June 2010 market capitalization when
Stock trading is restricted to broker-
compared with March 2008 of$873 billion,
members who trade both as brokers and as prin-
represents a decline equivalent to more than
cipals. In the latter capacity certain restrictions
twice the US$1.27 billion Government received
apply to transactions between a broker and his
as a Stand-by-Arrangement from the IMF this
own clients.
year.

242 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

As public debt in Greece in other European countries soars above prescribed levels the Euro Zone
faces its first major season of crisis

243
 Europe/Economy

Helping Greece, Saving the Euro

Report

T he Greek debt crisis, as the first with poten-

tial to economically destabilize the 16 coun-
try Euro Zone, has become a major political trial
for Europe. Giving the details of their March 25th
pledge to support Greece’s efforts to get out of
its debt crisis, Euro Zone finance ministers in a
video conference on April 10th agreed on a €30
billion lifeline for the troubled country over the
course of 2010. The terms are stiff: Greece can
only ask for access to the EU funds on offer if it
can’t borrow any other way and if all the 15 other
Euro Zone governments agree. Any loans would
be bilateral but coordinated. The International
Monetary Fund put another €10 billion at
Greece’s disposal.
The dilemma the Greek government, the EU
and IMF are facing in the premises is popular un-
willingness, expressed in street demonstrations,
to the austerity regime attached to the loans. IMF
Managing Director Dominique Strauss Khan in a
broadcast told the Greeks that the world was try-
ing to help Greece get out of its financial crisis.
Working class Greeks were complaining that they
had not benefitted from government’s over-
spending and should not be expected to suffer
the consequences.
Greece has continued for years on end to
over spend, allowing its annual budget deficits to
rise to 13 to 14% of GDP. To make matters worse
the government’s practice of statistic dishonesty
weakened market confidence and sent interest
rates for Greece rising. The Socialist government
plans to cut the budget deficit this year to 8.7% of
GDP in tandem with austerity measures worth
€8.4 billion that include cutting public sector sala-
ries, freezing pensions and raising taxes. The ag-
gregate sovereign debt is between 115% and
120% of GDP. Greece’s Socialist government
came to power at the height of the debt crisis in
October 2009.
Greek unions say they want the country to
default on its debt so that the banks would have
to pay. The popular cry from the demonstrators
244
German Chancellor Angela Merkal has been criticized for
delaying decisive action on the Greek debt crisis, while her
electorate’s opposition to bailing out Greece cost her coa-
lition loss of its majority in Parliament’s upper house
on the streets was that the rich who benefitted
from the over speeding should pay the country’s
debts, not the poor.
With €54 billion in debts due this year
Greece still has a huge budget deficit. The popu-
lar discontent has bond holders jittery and they
are dumping the country’s bonds which in turn
instigates higher interest rates for Greece. At the
time of agreement on the bailout commercial
lending rates for Greece had soared above 7%.
The €30 billion EU lifeline was offered at 5%. Ger-
man Chancellor Angela Merkel and European
Central Bank President Jean-Claude Trichet had
insisted that Greece should not be lent to at less
than commercial rates because that would
amount to a subsidy for its bad behavior. “This is
certainly no subsidy,” European Commissioner
for Economic & Money Affairs Olli Rehn told a
news conference. At 5% Greece will be paying
more than twice what Germany pays for loans.
The fear is that the high interest rate will nullify
the benefit of budget cuts and leave Greece still
sinking.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Economy Helping Greece, Saving the Euro
Robert Welaard, Associate Press writer,
commented, “A Greek default would be a serious
blow to the Euro, rattle markets and inflict losses
on European banks that have Greek government
bonds.”
European Commission President José
Manuel Barosso commenting on the EU decision
to help Greece said, “It shows that the Euro area
is serious to do what is necessary to ensure finan-
cial stability,” adding, “I am convinced that it will
help Greece to continue vigorously correct public
finances imbalances and to deliver the necessary
structural reforms.”
While Barosso sought to calm markets and France's President Nicolas Sarkozy (L) breakfasts with Italy's
inspire confidence in the Euro, some Germans Prime Minister Silvio Berlusconi (R) during a Euro Zone leaders
advocated Greece expulsion from the Euro Zone. summit in Brussels, May 7, 2010.
Greeks are commonly perceived by Germans as
billion ($147 billion) in emergency EU/IMF loans
carefree, non-tax paying, good time loving peo-
to Greece over three years to help it over its
ple. By June Greek comedians were entertaining
budget crisis in exchange for the austerity
the public with satire about the deficiencies in
measures which have already caused violent
the Greek public service, such as unfit policeman
protests.
and bribe taking doctors.
British finance minister at the time, Alistair
Observing that political backlash had nar-
Darling stressed the need to stabilize the mar-
rowed the Greek government’s budget cutting
kets, while ministers from France, Spain,
options, Standard & Poors on April 25th down-
Finland and other euro zone states said they
graded the country’s sovereign debt rating to
would defend their currency. Referring to the
junk status. The S & P announcement sent the
markets’ adverse reaction to the Greek crisis,
Euro and British Pound falling against the US dol-
causing continuous devaluation of the Euro,
lar and capital markets losing value in the U.S.,
Swedish finance minister Anders Borg told re-
Europe and Asia. Europe’s President Herman van
porters on arrival for the meeting, "We now
Rompuy, responding to the S & P downgrading
see ... wolf-pack behaviors, and if we will not
from Brussels, said the down grading would not
stop these packs, even if it is self-inflicted weak-
affect debt restructuring plans for Greece.
ness, they will tear the weaker countries apart,”
Howard Werded of BBC Partners blamed
adding, "We ... need resources to stop the mar-
the slow pace of action on Greece’s debt crisis as
ket turmoil. If this goes on for more than a cou-
largely responsible for the downgrading; pointing
ple of days it will be very, very problematic for
out that the EU mechanism for Greece to access
the recovery."
funds was complicated and uncertain. He said
"We are going to defend the euro... we
that scheduling the EU Summit on May 10th when
have to give more stability to our guarantee,"
it should have been before the end of April aggra-
Spanish Economy Minister Elena Salgado said
vated the confidence situation and was another
before the emergency meeting held on Sunday,
instance of moving too slow.
May 9th. Economists estimate that if Portugal,
On May 7th France’s President Nicolas
Ireland and Spain eventually come to require
Sarkozy, Germany’s Chancellor Angela Merkel
similar three-year bailouts, the total cost could
and Italy’s Prime Minister Silvio Berlusconi joined
be some €500 billion.
European finance ministers in Brussels to work on
The proposed mechanism could be used
a proposal for a stabilization mechanism intended
on the basis of an EU law that if a member of
to provide a multi-billion euro safety net for
the EU is in difficulties caused by circumstances
other euro zone countries with bloated public
beyond its control, EU ministers may, under
finances such as Portugal, Spain and Ireland.
certain conditions, grant it financial assistance;
However before addressing the need to improve
but voters in Germany are blaming the Greeks
debt crisis management in the 15 nation Euro
for living above their means. In an important
Zone, leaders at the EU Summit approved €110
245 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Economy Helping Greece, Saving the Euro
th
regional election on May 9 Angela Merkel’s gov-
erning coalition lost its majority in the Upper
House of Parliament, which will make it difficult
for her to push bills through. The main opposition
Social Democrats supports bailing out Greece to
rescue the Euro, but accuse Merkel of acting too
slowly and indecisively when the crisis emerged
and thus giving the markets the chance to aggra-
vate the situations with negative reactions.

EU Commissioner Olli Rehn: "We shall defend

the euro whatever it takes."
When the Brussels Summit ended May 9th, the EU
had approved a €750 emergency fund to protect Two women look at the burned-out branch of Marfin Bank, in
the Euro from market pressures in crisis times. central Athens, Monday, May 10, 2010. Employees at the
Putting an end to speculation as to whether it branch died of asphyxiation Wednesday
would enter the bond market, the ECB an-
that kept prices low, increased unemployment
nounced that it is ready to buy debt from the eu-
and stagnated growth.
rozone — EU nations that use the euro — to
The €750 billion deal struck by European
shore up liquidity in "dysfunctional" markets.
leaders in Brussels May 9th calls for the European
Immediately the euro appreciated to
Commission — the EU's governing body — to
$1.2963 from a 14th month low of $1.2523. Cen-
make €60 billion ($75 billion) available under a
tral banks around the world responded with coor-
three year plan, while countries from the 16-
dinated effort to prop up the euro and prevent
nation Euro Zone would promise backing for
Europe's debt crisis from derailing the global eco-
€440 billion ($570 billion). The IMF would con-
nomic recovery. The U.S. Federal Reserve re-
tribute an additional sum of at least half of the
opened a currency "swap" program to ship bil-
EU's total contribution, or €250 billion.
lions of U.S. dollars overseas in a bid to pump
Markets generally responded positively. Ja-
more short-term cash into the financial system
pan's Nikkei 225 stock average rose 1.3 percent
and ensure banks have the dollars they need.
to 10,499.25 and Hong Kong's Hang Seng index
The U.S. Federal Reserve Bank said action is being
climbed 0.8 percent to 20,080.18. Futures sug-
taken "in response to the reemergence of strains
gested Wall Street would welcome the euro de-
in U.S. dollar short-term funding markets in
fense. Dow futures jumped 233 points, or 2.3
Europe" and to "prevent the spread of strains to
percent, to 10,568, and S&P and Nasdaq futures
other markets and financial centers." The so-
were both up more than 2.7 percent.
called "swap" line with the Bank of Canada pro-
With the dust settling on the EU’s condi-
vides up to $30 billion. Figures weren't provided
tional guarantee of Greece’s debts, the country’s
for the other central banks involved. They include
excessive defense spending, which at 3.6% of
the Bank of England, the European Central Bank,
GDP [in 2008] was second to none in Europe, be-
the Swiss National Bank, and the Bank of Japan.
came a subject of media focus. Excessive spend-
Skepticism about the future of the Euro
ing on defense has been attributed to tensions
nonetheless contrasted with the vow of the Euro-
with Turkey over their Aegean Sea border. Tur-
pean leaders to save their common currency at
key’s Foreign Minister Ahmet Davutoglu in April
all costs. Song Seng Wun, an economist with
criticized the defense spending of the two coun-
CIMB-GK Research in Singapore, saw the move as
tries, saying that instead of investing so much in
simply “postponing the inevitable” demise of the
armaments they should be spending their money
Euro. Irish economist and journalist David
“on future generations, on education.” Following
McWilliams responding to questions on BBC’s
May’s EU bailout summit Turkish Prime Minister
Hard Talk not only expressed similar views but
Recep Tayyip Erdoğan visited Athens with 10 of
maintained that the Euro was not really a com-
his cabinet ministers.
mon currency but merely a common exchange
rate which hampered the economic progress of
Ireland by attracting loads of German investment
246 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Belgium/Politics

Belgium’s Terminal Schism?

Perspective

I t may seem the ultimate paradox that the host

country of the European Union institutions is on
the verge of splitting into two along its ethnic divide,
but in a Europe that is virtually a confederation
would it really make a substantive difference? After
all, if Belgium divides into two countries both would
nonetheless be under the laws passed by the Euro-
pean Parliament which is composed of blocs that are
mainly ideological, not national. They would still pre-
sumably continue using the Euro and be subject to
the interest rates, directives and oversight of the
European Central Bank. The two countries would be
represented in global affairs by the EU’s foreign min-
ister and would continue to look up to the same EU
president, who happens to now be former Belgium
Prime Minister Herman van Rompuy. Above all, they
would both be part of the European Common Mar-
ket, which allows free movement of citizens as well
as goods and capital. In the final analysis would divi-
sion of Belgium be any weightier than the division of
Nigeria’s Borno State into Borno and Yobe?
Belgium’s 6.5 million Flemish Dutch speakers New Flemish Alliance leader Bart de Wever
and 4 million Wallonia French speakers are not only lution of powers from the federal government to
divided geographically, north and south of the coun- the regions that would include much less money
try, respectively, but the Flemish are much better off given to Brussels for handing over to the Franco-
economically than the Wallonia, and they congre- phone south. “Don’t be afraid, reform of the state
gate in separate political blocs. When Prime Minis- will be good for all of us,” he told French-language
ter Yves Leterme’s 5 party coalition fell apart on television viewers. “If Belgium is to disappear, it
April 26, it appeared the historically quarrelsome should be the result of a gradual evolution.”
relationship between Belgium’s two language com- De Wever, a historian whose father was a
munities had reached breaking point. That prospect sympathizer of the Flemish National Union (which
appeared all the more certain as Flemish separatist professed an ideology akin to Nazism), once per-
leader 39 year old Bart de Wever was projected to formed a stunt of driving a truck through the
win the June 13 elections and he did, but while his streets filled with fake money to dramatize the
New Flemish Alliance (NVA) won 28% of the Dutch massive cash transfers from Belgium’s prosperous
speaking vote he needed to include Francophone Flemish region to the poorer Francophone region.
parties, all of which are opposed to separation, in a Though located within the Flemish region,
governing coalition. From past experience it could Brussels, the de facto capital of Europe, is a sepa-
take several months to form a new government. It rate region and considered the capital for both
took nine months to form a government after the Flemish and Francophone Belgians. Muslims,
2007 elections; and that was without a leading party mostly of Arab and Turkish descent, constitute
bent on breaking up the country. The least De 25% of Brussels’ population.
Wever, said to have become increasingly pragmatic
since becoming NVA leader in 2004, wants is a devo-
247 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Diplomacy/Greco-Turk Relations
Greece and Turkey: Mending Fences
Report
A head of Prime Minister Er-
doğan’s visit to Greece, Turkey’s
foreign minister Ahmet Davutoglu
stressed his country’s desire to open
a new and ever better chapter in rela-
tions with his country’s western
neighbor, anticipating the rapproche-
ment trip would not only improve co-
operation but "surmount the psycho-
logical threshold" that has long di-
vided them. "We are trying to change the percep-
tion that the two countries are in competition
with each other," said Davutoglu ahead of the
two-day talks. "The visit is in a sense a revolution
… we have to minimize tensions, but also maxi-
mize areas of co-operation so the notion of
'tension' is eradicated from the minds of the par-
ties."
Today both NATO members, Greece and Tur-
key have a history of rough relations dating back
centuries that has not subsided. They were thrice
on the brink of war since the 1970s. Deadlock
over the war-divided island of Cyprus – invaded
by Turkish troops in 1974 after an Athens-
inspired attempt to annex it to Greece and persis-
tent tensions over territorial disputes in the Ae-
gean Sea have kept the two at loggerheads. Peri-
odic accusations over treatment of each others’
ethnic minorities, the legacy of the 1923 popula-
tion exchange, are another source of tension.
Following Greece’s loss of the 1919-’22 war it
launched against Turkey with support from the
Triple Entente (Britain, France and Russia), the
Treaty of Lausanne included a population ex-
change between the two countries.
Tensions between the two neighbors have
led to both having astronomical defense budgets,
with Greece spending a larger portion of its GDP
on armaments than any other country in the
European Union. Both want to reduce defense
spending, and especially Greece which is in se-
vere economic crisis. This perhaps is the essence
248
Greek Prime Minister George Papandreou, 58, leader of the
Panhellenic Socialist Movement, and Turkish Prime Minister
Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, 56, founder and leader of the Justice
and Development Party, greet in Athens, May 15, 2010 at
the start of the latter’s 2 day visit to Greece, during which a
joint cabinet meeting of the two governments was held.
of the pragmatism informing rapprochement.
"Both countries have huge defense ex-
penses, and they will achieve a lot of savings
this way," Erdoğan told Greek state television. "I
believe this visit will be the start of putting
Greek-Turkish relations on a better foundation."
Prior to arrival in Greece, Erdoğan stressed shift-
ing money from defense to socio-economic de-
velopment.
George Glynos, an economy analyst with
the Hellenic Foundation for European and For-
eign Policy in Athens pointed out regarding the
wisdom of Greek-Turkish rapprochement with a
view to reducing defense spending, "Turkey has
a lot of problems — Iraq, Iran — but we have
only Turkey; so if we can lower defense spend-
ing, it's very important."
Meanwhile, the European Union which had
just approved a $138 billion economic rescue
package for Greece is pushing Athens to cut de-
fense spending. Significantly, Greece does most
of its defense shopping in Germany, France,
Britain and the United Sates, but all appear to
agree that getting Greece out of its interna-
tional financial market shaking debt crisis is a
priority.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Diplomacy/Greco-Turk Relations
Although the Turkish govern-
ment’s issues with the minority
Kurds invariably spill over into Iraq’s
Kurd region, Turkey’s foreign minis-
ter Prof. Ahmet Davutoglu is deter-
minately pushing a good neighbor
policy. Turkish businesses have been
increasing investment in Kurdish re-
gions in Iraq, and Turkey recently
opened the border with Syria.
Prime Minister Erdoğan landed
in Athens at the head of a 380 mem-
ber delegation, including 80 Turkish
investors. Turkish foreign investment
is growing in pace with its economy,
which even during the 2009 financial crisis ex-
panded more than 5%. Erdoğan said he wanted
to see bilateral trade with Greece increase to
$6.25 billion. Last year trade between the two
countries totaled$2.6 billion, down from $3.4
billion in 2008. “Such figures do not befit us,”
Erdoğan said. “Our target should be 5 billion
euros ($6.25 billion). Can we? Yes, we can. Do
we have the investors? Yes. We have no choice
but to advance in that direction.”
The climax of the visit was an unprece-
dented joint cabinet meeting, with the 10 minis-
ters accompanying Prime Minister Erdoğan in
attendance, during which 22 agreements were
signed on issues ranging from energy coopera-
tion, protecting forests and combating illegal
immigration, to promoting Greece and Turkey
as joint destinations for Chinese tourists and
advancing a gas pipeline dubbed ITGI that links
Turkey, Greece and Italy.
“The number and the depth of the agree-
ments that we just signed is an indication, if not
proof, of the historic nature of this visit,” Papan-
dreou stated. Referring to a soft spot in rela-
tions between the two countries, which is
equally a key demand of the European Union to
strengthen Ankara’s bid for membership Prime
Minister Erdoğan said he was optimistic Turkey
would reopen a Greek Orthodox seminary. The
Halki Theological School on Heybeliada Island,
near Istanbul, was closed to new students in
1971 under a law that put religious and military
training under state control. The school closed
its doors in 1985, when the last five students
graduated.
Erdoğan in turn urged Greece to enhance
freedoms for its Muslim minority in Thrace and
restore a crumbling mosque in Athens currently
Greece and Turkey: Mending Fences
Greek and Turkish flags fly at the Tomb of the Unknown Soldier in
Athens ahead of a visit by Turkish Prime Minister Recep Tayyip
Erdoğan. Photograph: Nikolas Giakoumidis/AP
used to store archaeological finds.
During a press conference Erdoğan said he
personally had no objection to restoring the
“ecumenical title” of Fener Greek Patriarch Bar-
tholomew since his Ottoman ancestors had no
problem with it, though he couldn’t affirm that
other people in Turkey wouldn’t object. When
asked why Bartholomew was not included in his
delegation Erdoğan said he had wanted him to
accompany the Minister of Religious affairs but
unfortunately the minister was committed else-
where.
“I am optimistic that the groundbreaking
and courageous step we are taking today can
bring results, precisely because the will exists,”
Greek Prime Minister George Papandreou said
late on Friday, May 17, during a joint news con-
ference with his Turkish counterpart. However
realism was clearly on the table. “We, with our
many islands and the experience of Cyprus, defi-
nitely have a fear,” he said. “Could Turkey at
some point decide to take over a Greek island?
Don’t laugh, such a fear exists, unfortunately.
But maybe Turkey also is afraid Greece will at-
tack.” Papandreou urged Ankara to provide
flight plans for its military planes using Aegean
airspace, to avoid their being intercepted by
armed Greek fighters. “It’s that simple,” he said.
That is to say, openness as well as goodwill
is essential going forward.
249 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Poland/Tragedy
Polish President, First Lady and entire entourage die in jet crash
The late Polish President Lech Kaczynski and late wife Maria
P oles were shocked into tears as news broke
that President Lech Kaczynski, his wife
Maria and Army Chief of Staff General Fran-
ciszek Gągor were the most notable of 96 (89
passengers and 7 crew) people who died when
the Polish presidential Tupolev Tu-154 crashed
in thick fog on Saturday, April 10, near the west-
ern Russian city Smolensk. President Lech Kac-
zynski was leading a delegation to a memorial
service marking the 70th anniversary of the
World War II massacre at Katyn. According to
the Polish foreign ministry, also on board were
the national bank president, deputy foreign min-
ister, army chaplain, head of the National Secu-
rity Office, deputy parliament speaker, Olympic
Committee head, civil rights commissioner and
at least two presidential aides and three law-
makers.
250
While the investigation commissioned
by Russian President Dmitry Medvedev and
headed by Prime Minister Vladimir Putin is
still underway, initial reports indicated
ground based flight engineers told the pilot
to land at another location because attempt-
ing to land at Smolensk would be too danger-
ous, but the pilot did not heed the advice.
Tapes from the last minutes of discussion
inside the plane have not indicated that there
was passenger interference in the pilot deci-
sion to try landing at Smolensk despite warn-
ings not to. Russia's Interfax news agency
quoted a source close to the investigation as
saying Russian investigators found no evi-
dence that "any of the high-ranking passen-
gers forced the pilots to land in Smolensk."
However, the Prosecutor General of Russia
Investigation Committee started a criminal
case citing "violation of the safety rules" of
the Russian Criminal Code. Interfax news
agency also reported an official close to the
investigation saying, “An analysis of the evi-
dence, including the first results from the de-
coding of the black boxes, shows that an er-
ror in piloting led to the disaster."
According to the official it appeared that
on its final attempt, the plane tried to land by
leveling out its oblique descent approach to a
horizontal angle in a bid to compensate for
the bad weather, noting that a "particularity of
the plane is that if its speed of descent is more
that six meters per second, when the plane
equalizes and goes into a horizontal flight it
loses altitude."
After listening to the plane’s black box re-
cordings, Poland's chief prosecutor Andrzej
Seremet told commercial radio, "The crew was
aware of the inevitability of the coming catas-
trophe, if only due to the plane shaking after the
wings hit the trees -- which we are certain hap-
pened." Preliminary data indicated the plane hit
the treetops as it was approaching the airport in
poor visibility.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Poland/Politics

“The Two Who Stole the Moon,”

Lech Kacynski Jaroslaw Kacynski

Death of Polish President Leaves

His Party Bereft, Too
By JUDY DEMPSEY, Published: April 11, 2010

BERLIN — They were practically inseparable.

umbrella a motley collection of traditionalist Ro-
From the time they were born on June 18, 1949,
man Catholic and populist movements.
until Saturday, when Lech Kaczynski died in a
Lech was the more popular political figure,
plane crash in western Russia, the identical twin
just as nationalist but more accommodating, will-
brothers, Jaroslaw and Lech, did almost every-
ing to make compromises. He even signed the
thing together.
Lisbon Treaty, intended to give the European Un-
Eye-catching with their blond hair and an-
ion certain powers at the expense of its national
gelic smiles and distinguishable only by the mole
governments, something that some of his more
on Lech’s cheek, the twins became famous in
nationalist supporters resented.
Poland by starring at age 12 in a film version of
“Law and Justice is in big trouble,” said
“The Two Who Stole the Moon,” a popular Pol-
Eugeniusz Smolar, senior fellow at the Center for
ish children’s story. Lech went on to become
International Relations in Warsaw. “The party has
president, Jaroslaw to become prime minister.
no obvious candidate to stand for the presidency.
Jaroslaw has said little since the death of
And after the death of Lech, Jaroslaw will be very,
his brother as he ponders the deep sense of loss
very distraught.”
of a twin brother with whom he shared so much.
But just as they shared a particular view of Po-
Publisher’s Note. Jarolaw Kacynski contested Po-
land based on patriotism and Roman Catholic
land’s June 20th president election, coming sec-
values, they had differences in temperament.
ond behind former Parliament Speaker and acting
Jaroslaw was the driving force in 2002 in
president Bronislaw Komorowaski’. The run off is
creating their nationalist, conservative party,
scheduled for July 4th.
Law and Justice, bringing together under one
251 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/United Kingdom/Parliamentary Elections
Generation Gang-up in Britain
Perspective
A fter no party won a majority in Brit-
ain’s May 6th election the center left
Liberal Democrats, led by 43 year old Nick
Clegg, shunned its natural ideological ally,
the ruling center left Labour Party led by 59
year of Prime Minister Gordon Brown and
sought an alliance, which after a week of
negotiations materialized with the right of
center Conservative Party whose 43 year
old boss David Cameron is now Britain’s
youngest Prime Minister in 200 years. The
Conservatives who last governed 13 years
ago, gained 96 seats upping their total
number of Parliament Members to 305, 21 short
of the 326 needed to claim a majority in the U.K.
House of Commons. Labour lost 91 seats reducing
its MPs to 258, while the Liberal Democrats lost 6
seats, leaving them with only 57 MPs. Apart from
the generation factor, the politics of arithmetic
made it easier for a government to be formed
from a coalition between the Conservatives and
the Liberal Democrats who combined put to-
gether a 362 seat majority.
On May 12th, Prime Minister Cameron, who
had categorically opposed the prospect of a coali-
tion government prior to the election, announced
that his Conservatives would now govern in coali-
tion with the Liberal Democrats, whose policy
perspective, especially regarding the European
Union, is the farthest left in the British main-
stream, and Nick Clegg would be his Deputy
Prime Minister. Political commentator David Oak-
ley, speaking to Richard Quest on CNN, observed
that the British public is excited about having
these two young leaders from opposite ends of
the political spectrum collaborating to govern the
country. A Sunday Telegraph/ICM polls showed
that two thirds of U.K.’s voters backed the new
coalition, including 87% of those who voted Tory
and 77% of Lib. Dem. Voters.
During the campaign Nick Clegg had stated
252
Conservative Party leader David Cameron was on May
11th appointed Prime Minister by Queen Elizabeth II and
moved into 10 Downing Street with his wife Samantha.
emphatically that he would not support Gordon
Brown for Prime Minister if Labour came third in
the elections, but with the Prime Minister’s party
far outdoing the Liberal Democrats, with four and
a half times more seats and Gordon Brown’s en-
ticing offer to step down as Labour Party leader,
the stage appeared reasonably set for a center-
left coalition. It was not to be. Tory leader David
Cameron proved determined not to let the
chance of becoming Prime Minister slip away and
despite major ideological differences with the
Liberal Democrats he kept them engaged in ne-
gotiations until a deal was struck.
The highest risk bearing difference between
the Liberal Democrats and Conservatives is on
the pragmatic question of how to move forward
on the economy. With a global consensus urging
caution in pulling back on stimulus money lest we
provoke a double dip recession like Great Depres-
sion U.S. President Franklin D. Roosevelt did lis-
tening to a conservative Treasury Secretary dur-
ing his second term, David Cameron in deference
to concerns about the U.K.’s spiraling budget
deficit was saying during the campaign that he
would slash the budget by £6 billion, while both
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/United Kingdom/Parliamentary Elections Generation Gang-up in Britain
Labour and the Liberal Democrats
were in line with the prevailing
global consensus that the recovery
was still too tenuous for budget
cutting. Political analysts were pre-
dicting that with the Liberal De-
mocrat leader standing besides him
as Deputy Prime Minister Mr. Cam-
eron would probably introduce to
Parliament an emergency budget
with £3bn to £4bn in cuts when
new Chancellor of the Exchequer
George Osborne affirmed on May
19 that the budget would be
slashed by the £6bn the Conserva-
tives promised voters during the
campaign. In any event, if the new
coalition is able to cut the budget
without sending the British econ-
omy back into recession it would
take the wind out of the prevailing
conventional wisdom that it’s too
soon to start budget cutting and
also give conservatives in the
Conservative Party leader David Cameron and his Liberal
United States more traction in their attacks on
Democrat Deputy PM Nick Clegg.
Obama’s deficit increasing spending spree. Last
year Britain’s economy shrunk by 3.2% and only eventually.” The post election Sunday Telegraph/
climbed out of recession in the fourth quarter ICM poll had Liberal Democrat support falling 3
with 0.1% in growth. points one week after the lection, to 21%, while
David Roberts of Tollesbury, Essex, com- Labour support increased 3 points to 33%, sug-
menting on the new coalition’s budget cutting gesting that Lib. Dem. supporters unhappy with
financial outlook raises the question of how it their party aligning with the Tories switched their
expects to bring about growth and reduce unem- support to Labour.
ployment without deficit raising unfunded bor- Meanwhile, the public was being astonished
rowing. “I fear this coalition is going to suffer by the buoyant manner and joking of Cameron
from their well-known tendency to avoid the and Clegg as they appeared side by side to ad-
hardest choices even when they are crucially im- dress not only the challenges of the economy but
portant,” he concludes. of keeping their coalition cohesive. Richard Harris
Old guard party faithful from both sides of Watlington, Oxfordshire raised hopes that the
seemed unsuspecting of a generation gang up coalition might be able to moderate the conser-
and berated the merger of the right and left. Da- vative excesses of the Tories. Says he: “Lib Dems
mien Welfare wondered how Britain’s most Euro- are moderating a rightwing regime and might just
skeptic party could join forces with its most pro- nudge them away from the worst aspirations of
EU party when Tory European Members of Parlia- their right wing. A disaster, maybe, but it might
ment had aligned with the far right anti-EU Parlia- just be the start of a new, radical, better politics.”
mentarians because the center right EMPs were This no doubt is the most positive way to look at
too Europhilia for them. George Talbot of Wat- it as long as unfolding events don’t prove other-
ford, Hertfordshire, who says he has been a lib- wise.
eral leaning voter since 1962 wrote in the Guard- The Sunday Telegraph/ICM poll showed 75%
ian: “I could just about, by holding my nose and of voters happy with the Liberal Democrats influ-
closing my eyes, stomach the coalition, while ac- ence on new tax policy, which scraped the inheri-
cepting that in reality the fly has walked into the tance tax cut Cameron advocated on the cam-
spider's parlour and will almost certainly perish paign trail and increased capital gains tax in favor
253 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/United Kingdom/Parliamentary Elections
of tax relief for the lowest in-
come earners. Although it will hit
upper-middle income house-
holds, the liberal policy enjoyed
88% support from Tory voters
polled and 85% from Lib Dems.
Once in office the Tory-
Liberal coalition discovered an
unsavory note written on elec-
tion-day by the outgoing Treas-
ury Chief Secretary Liam Byrne. It
read: “Dear chief secretary, I'm
afraid to tell you there's no
money left'”. The Guardian’s
Larry Elliot and Nicolas Watt in
their May 18th article, Coalition
to review all Labour’s recent spending decisions,
said the letter “was reminiscent of the parting
shot of Reginald Maudling, the Tory chancellor
between 1962-64. “Sorry to leave it in such a
mess, old cock,” Maudling said to his Labour suc-
cessor, James Callaghan. David Laws, the Liberal
Democrat new Chief Secretary to the Treasury
and Conservative Party Chancellor of the Excheq-
uer George Osborne maintained that public fi-
nances were in worst shape than they had
thought and announced that the former govern-
ment’s spending spree in the first quarter of 2010
would be examined to determine whether pilot
schemes introduced were affordable, offered
value for money and remained priorities for gov-
ernment.
Liam Byrne had upon taking over the Treas-
ury blamed outgoing Chancellor of the Exchequer
Gordon Brown, who had just succeeded Tony
Blair as Prime Minister for “bleeding the coun-
try’s coffers dry”. Alistair Darling who succeeded
Brown as Chancellor is said to have joked in pri-
vate about trying to find out where Gordon
Brown “had hidden all the money”. Britain was
spending £80 million a month on the United Na-
tions opposed Iraq War.
On May 20th The Telegraph reported on a
report released by U.S. investment bank Morgan
Stanley that warned Britain could be the first of
the world’s 10 major economies to risk capital
flight in tandem with a full blown deficit crisis.
Morgan Stanley said there is danger Britain’s
toxic mix of debts could come to a head as early
as next year.
“In an extreme situation a fiscal crisis could
lead to some domestic capital flight, severe
pound weakness and a sell-off in UK government
Generation Gang-up in Britain
Chancellor George Osborne (right), 38, the youngest person to
hold the post in 125 years, and Treasury Secretary David Laws
sit together during a press conference at the Treasury. Photo-
graph: 103805+0000Andrew Winning/PA
bonds. The Bank of England may feel forced to
hike rates to shore up confidence in monetary
policy and stabilize the currency, threatening the
fragile economic recovery,” the report compiled
by the bank’s European investment team of
Ronan Carr, Teun Draaisma, and Graham Secker
said. Morgan Stanley said that such a chain of
events could drive up yields on 10-year UK gilts
by 150 basis points, which would raise borrowing
costs to well over 5pc - the sort of level now con-
fronting Greece, and far higher than costs for It-
aly, Mexico, or Brazil. High-grade debt from com-
panies such as BP, GSK, or Tesco might command
a lower risk premium than UK sovereign debt,
once an unthinkable state of affairs, Morgan
Stanley admonished. The report coincided with
the latest estimates indicating that Britain’s econ-
omy shrank by 0.3% in the first quarter of 2010,
making it the only G20 country still in recession.
As of October last year the U.K’s aggregate
sovereign debt was estimated to be between 90-
100% of GDP. In the vicinity of 9% of GDP, Brit-
ain’s running annual budget deficit is the highest
among the world’s 10 largest economies.
As soon as Osborne confirmed the budget
cuts more than 1,000 Commercial and Public Ser-
vices unions vowed resistance. If the budget cuts
don’t pull Britain out of recession and bring down
unemployment early elections could be com-
pelled by popular protests. Meanwhile the coali-
tion of the late 1960s and thereafter born gen-
eration walks a tightrope.
254 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/United Kingdom/Politics

Polls show David Miliband leading the race

to succeed Gordon Brown as Labour Leader

Challenged by his younger brother, the affable 40 year old Ed (left in photos above), former
Foreign & Commonwealth Affairs Secretary 44 year old David Miliband (right in photo above)
is favored to be Labour’s next leader, following the resignation of Gordon Brown. A Sunday
Telegraph/ICM Research poll had the older Miliband enjoying 32% support of all voters to
lead Labor Party, while interim Labour Leader Harriet Harman had 11% backing, Ed Miliband
9%, Ed Balls 8% and Jon Cruddas and Andy Burnham 2% each. Ed. Miliband was Energy Secre-
tary in Gordon’s Brown’s government. Both David and Ed, sons of a Marxist theorist, studied
Philosophy and Economics. Ed is said to be ideologically on Labour’s far left.
The Telegraph’s Cassandra Jardine wrote on this latest in world stage sibling rivalry.

David and Ed Miliband - brothers in arms or brothers at war?

As David and Ed Miliband announce they are both standing for the leadership of the Labour
Party, how do successful siblings keep rivalry at bay?
Published: 7:00AM BST 18 May 2010

L ast week the Miliband brothers, David and Ed,

were mostly interesting for their looks. Both
dark and handsome, with slightly close together
eyes, the talk at the water cooler was whether
David, 44, with that dot of white hair on top of
his head, was more handsome than friendly-
looking Ed, 40, who had never made the tactical
mistake of being photographed waving a banana.
Now, with Ed’s decision to stand against his
brother for the leadership of the Labour party,
they have a new and more dramatic appeal - as
their party’s Cain and Abel. The Milibands have
become politics’ answer to the tennis playing Wil-
liams sisters; friends off court, but deadly rivals
when it comes to a match. The relationship could
255
go one of two ways; they could not speak for
years like novelists A. S. Byatt and Margaret
Drabble. Or they could keep up the mutual sup-
port in the spirit of the singing sisters, Kylie and
Danni Minogue.
The Miliboys had always both been potential
leadership candidates, but in March, when
Gordon Brown’s successor was being discussed, it
was assumed that there would be a Granita-style
pact between them. David would take the Blair
role, and have first pop at leading the party;
then, after a few years or electoral defeats, it
would be Ed’s turn. Instead they have chosen to
go head to head against one another, and a light-
bulb joke is circulating. How many Milibands
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/United Kingdom/Politics
does it take to change a light-bulb? Only one, but
two will show up anyway.
It could be collusion. Their joint aim may be
to shut out other contenders on the principle that
it is best to keep these things in the family. If so,
they will very likely succeed because the Biblical
double act is taking all attention away from non-
Miliband rivals.
Ed’s candidacy could have been cooked up
as a publicity stunt to draw attention to them as
individuals rather than, as David puts it, “clones”.
If so, again, it has worked instantly and brilliantly.
Until this week, the respective achievements of
the former Foreign Secretary and Energy Secre-
tary were of little interest. Now we all know that
Ed, 40, did much better in his A-levels than big
brother David, 44. When, however, they both
went on to Balliol College Oxford to read Politics
Philosophy and Economics, it was David who got
the first, and Ed who had to settle for a 2:1.
Their views, it also turns out, are similar, but
not inter-changeable. David, whose background is
as Tony Blair’s aide, is more wedded to the New
Labour project than Ed, who is further to the left,
more in the Next labour camp. Ed Miliband has
said that he will not be “mis-characterizing” his
brother in this battle for the leadership. The im-
plication of that is that they will fight in a digni-
fied manner on policy alone, but there is a strong
possibility that the plot will not work out as
planned. If so, David’s statement that “family is
more important than politics” will be tested to
the limit.
The dynamics of sibling rivalry are simple
and inexorable. “Siblings can’t avoid rivalry,” says
psychologist Dorthony Rowe, author of My Dear-
est Enemy, My Dearest Friend, a study of sibling
rivalry. “The oldest is an only child until the sec-
ond child is born. Though parents can help them
to get over it.”
Younger siblings start off admiring their
older sibling who can do all the things that they
aspire to do. Rivalry is good in that it makes both
sides try harder: younger siblings want to catch
up, older ones wish to stay ahead. The psychol-
ogy patterns are well established, and the Mili-
bands conform to type; older siblings are more
conventional, younger ones more rebellious.
With that greater tendency to free-think, in times
where change rather than leadership are needed,
there often comes an agonizing moment when
the younger brother pulls ahead.
Rivalry can be minimized by parents who
256
Labour Party Leadership Race
don’t compare children, or label them” the clever
one” or “the pretty one.” The Miliband parents
appear to have done a good job. Until now, David
and Ed have appeared the best of friends who
lived in next door flats throughout the years
when, as young single men, they worked respec-
tively for Blair and Brown. Their shared back-
ground and commitment to Labour politics
helped them through. Ed was no doubt sincere
when he told the BBC: “I love my brother, he’s
my best friend in life and it has been one of the
hardest decisions I’ve made in my life to stand
against him.”
And yet psychologist Oliver James, author of
“They f... you up” believes that there may be ten-
sion under the surface. How much depends on
whether there was an obvious parental favourite,
but even if both were equally loved and admired,
there can be strife. “I would assume that on a
deep level, they are rivals,” he says. “They both
genuinely believe that they would be happy if the
other one was chosen but they must both be fan-
tastically ambitious to get as far as they have
done. They must be looking out for Number 1,
but not acknowledge it.”
What has bound them together until now
has been the strongly ideological background
that they shared. Their father, Ralph Miliband,
was a Jewish refugee and Marxist intellectual.
Their mother, Marion, was one of his former pu-
pils. It was a home in which politics was the only
game in town which left the Miliband brothers
with little choice of career if they were to please
their parents.
“Siblings cannot help but compare them-
selves with one another more than with anyone
else. It is their main battle,” says Georgia Col-
eridge, co-author of a new book on Sibling Ri-
valry. However well established they are, the ri-
valries of childhood are all-consuming, especially
when a parent has an obvious favourite. The
Pankhurst sisters started out united behind their
suffragette mother, Emmeline, but ended up
deeply divided. The Bush brothers will probably
never be close again since younger brother Jeb
always wanted to be president but it was his ex-
alcoholic brother, George W. who made it. “In
some ways that’s a sign of a healthy family,” says
Coleridge’s co-author, Karen Doherty “In many
families children feel they have to go off in differ-
ent directions.”
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/United Kingdom/Politics
Jon Cruddas, 48, who lost out to Harriet Har-
man in their 2007 contest for Deputy Labour
Party Leader announced that he was not in-
terested in contending for party leadership in
the wake of Gordon Brown’s resignation, but
would rather focus on influencing party policy
At present it looks as if David will win the
leadership, but support is gathering behind less
nerdy Ed. If the younger brother were to win,
David would find it hard to forgive his brother
for taking the job he had been pitching for
since his teens. And Ed would be hard put not
to crow, having had to put up with 40 years so
far of being the little brother, following in
David’s protective footsteps. “Don’t patronise
me,” he hissed when big brother praised a key-
note speech that he made recently.
The Milibands may be the first brothers in
British politics to become rivals. But they may
not be the last. A similar battle may be brewing
within the Johnson family where father Stanley
made a point of honing his children’s competi-
tiveness by pitting them against one another at
every opportunity, whether on blondness or
running speed. Boris Johnson has overshad-
owed his younger siblings but now his younger
brother Jo (who got a first at Oxford while Bo-
ris got a 2.1) has entered Parliament, sparks
could fly. Boris Johnson’s own website says
that Stanley recently described Jo as “taller
and blonder than Boris.” It may soon cease to
be a family joke.
And then, years down the line when a
new generation looks to take on the Labour
leadership, we could have a fight to the death
between the young Brownites, John and Fra-
ser.
257
Labour Party Leadership Race
Deputy Labour Party Leader under Gordon Brown, Har-
riet Harman is now interim Labour leader and came sec-
ond to David Miliband in the Sunday Telegraph/ICM poll
on who the next party leader should be. As Legal Council
for the National Council for Civil Liberties, Harman suc-
cessfully challenged a British court rulings in a human
rights issue case by appealing to the European Court of
Human Rights which overturned the ruling to her favor.
Harman has been a supporter of affirmative action
that would enable employers to give preferential consid-
eration to job candidates from historically disadvan-
taged communities without facing legal action. She com-
missioned a report on allowing political parties to draw
up all-black shortlists designed to increase the number
of black MPs in Westminster; and has insisted that men
should not be allowed to rule without women deputies.
However, as Labour Party Deputy leader she was not
given the post of Deputy Prime Minister to Gordon
Brown, to whom she has been a reliable ally.
Harriet Harman had sought to exclude [most] Par-
liamentarians private expenses from the Freedom of
Information act, which would mean that journalists
would no longer have access to the expense account
records of MPs, but she withdraw the motion when the
Conservatives vowed to vote against it and an online
campaign was waged against the proposal by MySo-
ciety.
Harman annoyed British legal professionals in 2009
when she declared that regardless of the legality of the
£650,000 a year pension given to the retired CEO of gov-
ernment bailed out Royal Bank of Scotland, Sir Fred
Goodwin would not receive it, raising concerns that La-
bour would attempt a retroactive law to allow govern-
ment claim part of the pension.
.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/United Kingdom/Politics
Ed Balls on February 10, 2010, while Education Minister,
launching free laptop and broadband internet access
scheme.
'David Cameron standing grinning outside No 10
is something I never wanted to see.
'And then on Monday, I watched George
Osborne on TV struggling to contain his glee as he
announced that the Tories, now backed by the
Liberal Democrats, were going to cut £6billion
from public services this year and put the school-
building programme on hold.
That was a sight I never wanted to see ei-
ther.
But it has happened. And we have to under-
stand why.
I am very proud of what Labour achieved in
government. Labour's legacy is every child who is
sitting in a brand new school... Every pensioner
who is not afraid to stick the heating on in the
winter thanks to the winter fuel payment... Our
new hospitals, our Sure Start children's centres,
tax credits, the national minimum wage.
So this is my first pledge to Mirror readers - I
will fight with every ounce of my spirit and every
258
Labour Party Leadership Race
Labour Party leadership aspirant,
former education minister Ed Balls
says why he never wanted the To-
ries back at the helm of the
Queen’s government.
one of my MP colleagues in Parliament to make
sure that this legacy is not destroyed by David
Cameron and his new best friend, Nick Clegg.
But we in the Labour party have also got to
face some hard facts.
Too many people – ordinary, hard working
people who want to get on in life and get a better
deal for their families – thought that they could-
n't support us this time.
They thought we had lost our way and,
frankly, lost touch.
Knocking on doors in my constituency in
Yorkshire was hard-going. On immigration, peo-
ple thought we didn't understand their anxieties.
On tax and benefits, they didn't always think
that we were on the side of people who wanted
to work.
On tuition fees and student loans, they
asked why we were making it harder for their
teenage children to go to university.
I want Labour to win again, for the sake of
millions of children, working people and pension-
ers in our country.
That's why I am standing to be leader.
To win again we need to win people back,
we must speak the language of ordinary people
and not the language of politicians.
We must win people's trust and not seem
like we take their support for granted.
And we need to show why we are in politics
and whose side we are on.
All the opportunities my family and I have
had in life were only made possible by the
achievements of the Labour Party in government.
My grandfather, a lorry driver, died from
cancer soon after the war, when my father, the
youngest of three boys, was only 10.
My father, from a widowed family in a work-
ing-class community in Norwich, was able to stay
on at school at 16 and get a scholarship to uni-
versity.
All the opportunities that he and we have
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/United Kingdom/Politics Labour Party Leadership Race
been able to enjoy were only made possible
because of the welfare state the Labour Gov- Farewell Gordon Brown
ernment created in 1945, reflecting our core By Muhammed Kamil
belief that opportunity should be available for
all, not just for the privileged few.
And the reason I am Labour is because I
want these same chances for every one of my
constituents and every family in our country.
Because whether your son or daughter
gets extra one-to-one tuition in school if they
fall behind should not depend on whether you
can afford to pay for it. That is the Tory way.
As much as I'd like to think so, I don't be-
lieve the Tory-Lib Dem coalition will necessarily
fall apart in a matter of weeks. The Tories think
they are born to rule - and they're already try-
ing to rig Parliament to make it harder to re-
move them.
And the Lib Dems have sold whatever
principles they had to get their hands on minis-
terial positions.
So we must be both a responsible Opposi-
tion and a strong and effective fighting force in
Parliament.
Because if we do not speak up for working I ’ve liked Gordon Brown since I heard him speak
at the 2009 Davos World Economic Forum. Sud-
denly I became interested in him. Who is this British
people when their public services are threat-
ened and their children's futures are put at leader dismissing the age of imperialism as expired
risk, then no one will. and standing by a vision of the 21st century world as
So we must stand together and stand up one where the old order of rich and poor, haves and
to the Tories and the Lib Dems. haves not would neither be welcomed nor possible?
I believe Labour's secret weapon will be I discovered that he was a university history don,
our ability and willingness to listen. something I never expected since he first came to
In my constituency, the Tories threw the the world’s attention as the United Kingdom’s Chan-
kitchen sink at their campaign and spent a for- cellor of the Exchequer.
tune of Lord Ashcroft's money. In articulating the English language, in political
We hit back in the best way possible - vision and substance, Brown as he came across to
with hard work and some hard listening. me had no peer among Western leaders– not even
We organised public meetings on the recently inaugurated U.S. President Barack Obama.
economy, crime and immigration, and took the I observed that he was not the ideal color tele-
BNP head-on. vision age politician and gradually, as I began paying
This is the way to build a new coalition of closer attention to him, I also observed that he was
our own. not politically as savvy as Mr. Obama.
Throughout the debate about the Labour During the Parliamentarians expense account
leadership, I have argued for a proper contest, scandal I observed that Opposition Leader David
not a coronation. Cameron had a charisma advantage over the Prime
A battle about ideas not a beauty contest. Minister and that Gordon Brown was not so profi-
Labour must win again. It is going to be a hard cient at political wrangling as lecturing.
slog. Perhaps he would make a good U.N. Secretary
There are no quick fixes or easy solutions. General; but then I think that would also be the best
But it has to start with listening to you, the job for Barack Obama. Given the fondness with
people.' which his European Union colleagues regarded him,
Gordon Brown I would imagine at least has a future
in the EU.
259 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Society & Law

Veiling Common Sense

By Muhammed Kamil

Perspective

A few months ago I raised the issue of Presi-

dent Sarkozy’s call for a ban on Muslim
women in France covering their faces with a
French journalist working for the renowned pro-
gressive daily Le Monde. I had assumed that all
modern civilized countries had bans on people
going into the streets with their faces covered;
thus I wondered why Mr. Sarkozy was making an
issue of Muslim women. I was astonished to hear
from my colleague that France had no such law. I
think they should. I don’t see any reason why
people would be allowed to walk about in the
street, especially in crime prone urban areas,
with face covered, concealing one’s identity. It’s
unfortunate that with all our concerns about
crime control and security countries all over the
world have not instituted legislation requiring
everyone’s face to be open to view in public
places.
Nonetheless, French Foreign Minister Ber-
nard Kouchner made his country’s position very
clear when he said that banning the burqa was
Afghan Women Shrouded in Burqas These Afghan women in
consistent with the country’s important women’s
Herāt, northwestern Afghanistan, are wearing full-length
liberation movement; which I might add has been veils called burkas. Wearing the burka is part of the ancient
in motion in most Western countries at least custom of purdah, which requires the concealment of women
since the end of the Second World War. I am well from men. Purdah was revived in recent times by Islamic fun-
aware how much the French pride themselves for damentalist movements such as the Taliban, which held
progress in pursuing gender equality. However, it power in Afghanistan from 1996 until late 2001.
appears to me that women wearing the burqa in
Europe are typically expressing indoctrination, and the United States the overwhelming majority
not acting upon pressure or orders from any man. of Muslims identify with their country’s main-
The European assumption that wearing the burqa stream values; and in fact, in the United Sates
is a woman’s rights issue is illusory. How many statistics show that most immigrant Muslims are
cases are on record in Europe of woman com- middle class, many of them small business opera-
plaining they have been forced to wear the tors and happy to be part of their adopted coun-
burqa? Quite to the contrary, as the Belgium Par- try. Newsweek’s Fareed Zakaria, who has be-
liament prepared in April to outlaw face covering come the highest profile voice for immigrant
in public, burqa wearers were insisting they Muslims in the United States, is full of praise for
would defy the law. the country to which he emigrated as a teenager
The question of whether or not Muslims liv- as well as the patriotism and mainstream contri-
ing in Europe should adopt European values is butions of America’s immigrant Muslims. The
debatable; but statistics show that in Britain prevailing consensus, from what I have heard,
260 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Society & Law
among Muslim and non-Muslim Europeans is that
in countries like Britain and France being a Mus-
lim is not an issue, but political Islam is. In fact,
Senegalese and other West African Muslims have
been conspicuously established in France as pro-
fessionals and businessmen at least as far back as
the 1970s.
We have to look at the question of values
adoption differently for the children of Muslim
emigrants born in Western countries and are
American or European citizens. Some of them
become radicalized and as citizens feel they have
the right to confront Western society with radical
Islam. The French reacted to this by banning reli-
gious symbols in schools. In West Africa where
the level of Christian-Muslim cohabitation is the
highest in the world, Ghana does not allow chil-
dren, even in private Islamic schools, to deviate
from the national standard of schoolchildren
dress. Traditionally in West Africa only married
women are expected to cover their heads and in
urban areas this is often the norm for all women
irrespective of religion. Only Northern Nigeria,
where little schoolgirls can be seen in hijab, is the
general exception to this; no doubt owing to
greater Middle Eastern cultural influence than
pertains in the rest of West Africa.
Middle East Islamic culture has spread to
some African American Muslims, many of whom
wear headscarves and smocks. In retrospect it
seems that the Western media and political es-
tablishments contributed to politicization of the
headscarf and the resurgence of traditional Is-
lamic values generally by making such a big issue
out of it, as if it was an affront to Western civiliza-
tion. In Sudan public policy installed 21 years ago
requiring females to cover their heads in public
has led to a new fashion culture wherein the
head covering is an essential part of the colorful
daily outfit in a social environment where being
smartly dressed is an important part of one’s per-
sona. I had long been wondering why Western
designers did not steal the show from the jour-
nalists and politicians by moving into the Muslim
world with designer headscarves, smocks and
long dresses.
What is now happening between the Muslim
world and Europe is a tit for tat. Western women
in Iran and Saudi Arabia are expected to forego
their mini skirts; while Muslim women in Europe
are now having their burqa outlawed.
Tit for tat is not where we should be going
and there is no need for it. Lucas Chattel, French
261
Veiling Common Sense
Dancing at a wedding party in El Obeid, Sudan, where
colorful Islamic fashion is normative
Government Spokesman on April 21st said
that the ban on covering the face in public was
general and not meant to stigmatize anyone.
This is the common sense argument we have
been waiting for and is more befitting of
Europe’s global status. Frankly, the way Mr.
Sarkozy has stressed women’s dignity and rights
in advocating ban of the burqa seems rather
obsessive cultural chauvinism.
Sarkozy sparing with lunatics makes us
wonder about his sanity. When a Muslim emi-
grant applies for French nationality and insist
that he cannot allow his wife to go outdoors
without her face covered, one wonders why he
and other such people don’t either stay in their
country of origin or migrant to wealthy Muslim
countries like Saudi Arabia or Libya. It seems
hypocritical, if not utterly ridiculous, for Muslims
to take advantage of the humanitarian offerings
of European countries and then disdain adop-
tion of their simplest social norms. After all, they
are not being forced to drink wine or wear hot
pants.
In Saudi Arabia covered female faces may
be normative and not in the least associated
with public security problems or defacement;
but in Nigeria and South Africa I think it is a dan-
gerous practice that has the potential to under-
mine crime control efforts, if this is not already
the case to some extent.
In West Africa, for the most part, we are no
less opposed to and concerned about the
spread of radical Islam than Europeans. Histori-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Europe/Society & Law
cally, Wahabia movements, some of which en-
join women covering the face, object to music
and restrict the roles of females in society, have
been controversial and disruptive in West Africa;
though Wahabism has had greater success in
Northern Nigeria than anywhere else in the re-
gion. Radical or medieval interpretations of Islam
are no doubt more abhorred by educated Mus-
lims in most parts of Africa than by Europeans.
Europeans are also generally opposed to radical
expressions of Christianity and I can remember
when Jimmy Carter was running for president of
the United States public concern was raised
about his being a Baptist, which many Americans
thought to be a fundamentalist denomination;
and when Bill Clinton was president an article
once appeared in TIME Magazine by Charles
Krauthammer accusing his administration of em-
ployment discrimination against people seen as
too religious. The Christian Coalition is part of the
Republican Party’s right wing; America’s Democ-
ratic Party is ideologically strictly secular. The
point I am making is that the mainstream of mod-
ern Western civilization, and also of modern Af-
rica, is leery of religious extremism, or radicalism;
but in Saudi Arabia practices that seem extreme
to us are normative. It would therefore be more
rational for migrating burqa syndrome Muslims
to try going to Saudi than Europe.
As for prejudice against Islam, I wouldn’t say
it doesn’t exist in the West, but from what I have
observed over the years Christianity is far more
often subject to ridicule and criticism by intellec-
tuals, artists and the media in Europe and Amer-
ica than Islam. Secondly, I’m old and well trav-
elled enough to remember that Islam was in
Western intellectuals circles often more re-
spected than Christianity until the abrasive and
threatening Ayatollah Khomeini revolution in Iran
gave a terrifying picture of what might be the
future style of Islam in our world.
The question has also been raised as to
whether Islam has now become a European relig-
ion. Those who would argue “yes it has” are rely-
ing on population statistics; those who say, “No it
hasn’t”, point to contrasting values between
Muslims and Europeans. It seems to me that no
matter how many Muslims are in Europe, Islam in
Europe would have to become substantially Euro-
peanized for it to be regarded by indigenous
Europeans as not necessarily alien. While it is
commonly known that Islam is the religion of
most Arabs, evidentially Islam which is adhered
262
Veiling Common Sense
to by people in virtually every part of this world
cannot rightly be regarded strictly an Arab relig-
ion; and as such not all Muslims have assimi-
lated or are inclined to assimilate the culture of
medieval Arabia, or even its basic precepts in
achieving a modern Muslim society and identity.
The burqa is an ethnic or geographical cul-
ture specific invention consistent with the social
philosophy in some Muslim societies, particu-
larly those subscribing to radical Wahabism. For
those of us worldly wise to know that not every
woman wearing a mini skirt is a prostitute but
many prostitutes wear the burqa to conceal
their identity, Islamic moral issues in the 21st
century are too complex to be treated with me-
dieval dogma; but this does not mean we
shouldn’t respect Wahabia culture in the lands
where it is normative.
Invariably there is some measure of corre-
lation between norms, cherished values and
social stability. Chauvinism is when we disregard
the values and what is normative in foreign
lands and seek to impose our own values and
norms on them. This works both ways; common
sense should tell a European or American
woman that it is not reasonable to go prancing
about in Jeddah with a mini skirt and Muslims in
France should be sensitive enough to French
values to borrow the modest but aesthetically
amiable Islamic fashions common in Damascus,
Beirut and Khartoum and other parts of Africa,
rather than attire that looks spooky in the Euro-
pean social environment.
The Danish court has ruled against banning
the burqa on the grounds that it violates the
freedom of religious practice guarantee of the
country’s constitution. That is fair enough as
long as there is no general ban on people going
outdoors with face covered; but in the final
analysis it still seems inconsistent with the pub-
lic safety and security imperative of contempo-
rary global society and also ethically dishonest
for open societies to allow going about in public
with the face covered.
For the record, Prophet Muhammed in 7th
century Arabia, according to documented trans-
mission of his oral statements (Haddith), when
asked about covering women in public pointed
to the face and hands as the two parts of her
body to be left in full view.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
U. S. President Barack Obama (left) and Mexico’s President Felipe Calderon (right)
at the White on May 20, 2010

263
North America/Mexico/Presidency
Calderon addresses U.S. Congress,
wades into U.S. legal debates
President Felipe Calderon addresses a joint session of the United States Congress in Washington, May 20,
2010, as U.S. Vice President Joe Biden and House of Representatives Speaker Nancy Pelosi look on
M exico’s President Felipe Calderon, while
steeped in his war on drug cartels, paid a
state visit to the United States from May 20 to 21,
during which he appealed to a joint session of the
U.S. Congress to reinstate the ban on assault
weapons that expired in 2004 after 10 years dura-
tion and urged comprehensive immigration re-
form. An estimated 5.7 million Mexicans reside in
the U.S. illegally, constituting about 57% of the
country’s illegal immigrants. According to the U.S.
Department of Homeland Security in 2005 over
1.5 million illegal Mexican immigrants were ap-
prehended by the U.S. Border Patrol. Nonethe-
less, annually between 400,000 and 1 million
Mexicans manage to enter the United States ille-
gally.
The opportunities gap between the two
neighbors is indicated by the disparity in per-
capita income– over $30,000 in the U.S. com-
pared to less than $4,000 in Mexico. Predicting 4%
GDP growth this year, President Calderon in his
address to the U.S. Congress said his government
was trying to improve the living conditions of
Mexicans so that they would not feel the need to
leave their country in order to succeed.
Maintaining that following the 2004 expiry
264
Report
of the assault weapons ban there has been an in-
crease in violence in his country which has a 3,169
km (1,969 miles) long border with its northern
neighbor, President Calderon told Congress,
"There is one issue where Mexico needs your co-
operation. And that is stopping the flow of assault
weapons and other deadly arms across the bor-
der." Calderon’s request received a standing ova-
tion from mainly Democratic Party lawmakers, but
Republicans faulted him for interfering in the do-
main of U.S. domestic laws.
"It was inappropriate for President Calderon
to lecture Americans on our own state and federal
laws," said Senator John Cornyn, a member of the
Republican leadership. "Moreover, the Second
Amendment (which gives Americans the right to
bear arms) is not a subject open for diplomatic
negotiation, with Mexico or any other nation."
On June 28, 2010, the United States Supreme
Court, in a 5-4 decision ruled that the second
amendment of the U.S. Constitution guaranteeing
the right of citizens to bear arms applies to state
and local gun control laws. The ruling cast doubt
over prospects for an effective assault rifle ban.
Calderon told the U.S. Congress that 80% of the
75,000 guns and assault weapons his government
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/Mexico/Presidency
seized in the last three years came from the
United States and noted that there were more
than 7,000 gun shops along the border.
Presidents Calderon and Obama agreed in
their opposition to Arizona governor Jan Brewer’s
new law allowing state law enforcement officers
to check people for immigration status. Obama
wants the Federal Government to sue the Arizona
governor for assuming authority in its domain [of
immigration affairs]. The Arizona law, said to sim-
ply legitimize a practice that has been in force for
some time, is another issue of contention between
the Obama led Democrats who argue along with
Mexican American citizens that it is a license for
racial profiling, while conservatives are mostly op-
Calderon’s fight to prevent Mexico becoming a narco-state
W ith the U.S. failing to curb cocaine con-
sumption and the unlikelihood of an as-
sault rifle ban that would reduce arms supplies to
Mexico’s drug cartels, Calderon must find consola-
tion in the $1.4 billion financial support from
Washington and security operations cooperation.
U.S. Secretary of State Hilary Clinton while in Mex-
ico during March this year underscored the shared
responsibility for combating drug related violence
in Mexico. Income from Mexico’s drug exports is
estimated at $25 billion annually.
In late March 2010 the Mexican authorities
arrested José Antonio Medina, known as Mexico’s
“King of Heroin” who is said to have run a smug-
gling operation out of Tijuana that monthly carried
200 kilograms of heroin from Mexico into the U.S.
An indication that the U.S. heroin market is ex-
panding is the increase in Mexico’s heroin produc-
tion from 17 toms in 2007 to 38 tons in 2008. The
increased production has reduced heroin prices
for U.S. addicts and simultaneously resulted in
more deaths from overdoses.
Statistics show that cocaine users in the U.S.
peaked at about 5.7 million in 1985 and have since
leveled off to about 3.6 million, while heroin users
number between 750,000 and 1,000,000.
Nearly 17,000 people have died in drug re-
lated violence since Calderon launched his war on
cartels after taking office in 2006, bringing him
much criticism and fatiguing the population with
his unrelenting efforts to prevent Mexico from
becoming a narco-state. Not only do the drug car-
tels battle each other for control, they kill journal-
ists reporting on their activities, as well as com-
mercial vehicle drives and all others who have
265
Calderon addresses U.S. Congress
posed to Obama’s idea that Mexicans residing in
the U.S. illegally be given the opportunity to legiti-
mize themselves by passing a criminal background
check, paying a fine, paying back taxes and learn-
ing English. However, Obama agrees with conser-
vatives’ insistence on tougher measures to control
cross border illegal immigration.
Arizona’s Attorney General Terry Goddard
announced on June 18 that he would not defend
his state in the Federal Government law suit over
its stepping into the immigration domain. God-
dard, a Democrat who is running for governor of
Arizona supports Obama’s immigration reform
plan.
been forced in one way or another to cooperate
with rival car-tels. The cartels also kidnap and
murder mayors and police officers, stage prison
escapes, demand protection fees from businesses
and in every other way they can defy the authority
of the state to enforce the law on them.
Although marijuana is not the major drug of
concern in President’s Calderon’s war on drug
trafficking the liberalization of state laws in the
U.S. could either increase demand for illegal ex-
ports from Mexico or reduce demand in favor of
industrial marijuana produced in the U.S. Califor-
nia, which has already legalized medicinal mari-
juana, will in November vote on a proposition to
legalize marijuana for recreational purposes. If the
proposition passes Californians would be allowed
to plant marijuana gardens measuring up to 25
square feet. Marijuana users in California are esti-
mated at 1.6 million, according to advocacy group
CA NORML which anticipates industrial production
of marijuana and projects state revenues from
marijuana taxes could contribute $1.5 to $2.5 bil-
lion annually to state coffers, as well as industrial
income of $3.4bn. An April poll suggests a slim
majority of California voters are in favor of legaliz-
ing and taxing marijuana to increase state reve-
nues and reduce law enforcement cost associated
with it. Opponents consider marijuana a gateway
drug from which youth graduate to cocaine and
heroin. Aimee Hendle, spokeswoman for Califor-
nians for Drug Free Youth, told Associated Press,
"We are quite concerned that by legalizing mari-
juana, it will definitely lower the perception of
risk, and we will see youth use go through the
roof."
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/Economy/ Business
Rick Newman, On Tuesday June 1, 2010
10 Companies Back From the Brink
T he recession left behind a graveyard of corpo-
rate carcasses, from Circuit City to Linens n'
Things to Lehman Brothers. Thousands of smaller
businesses closed. AIG, Fannie Mae and Freddie
Mac are staggering along as wards of the state.
General Motors, Chrysler, Citigroup and several
other name-brand firms would probably be toast
too, if not for bailouts and forgiving consumers.
But other companies stared into the abyss--
and backed away from it on their own power. To
identify notable recession survivors, I analyzed
data provided by Capital IQ, a division of Standard
& Poor's, on hundreds of big and mid-sized com-
panies. I looked specifically at companies that
ranked near the bottom on two key metrics over
the last two years: S&P's long-term debt ratings,
which estimate a company's ability to pay back
what it has borrowed, and S&P's quality rankings,
which grade the prospects for long-term growth
and stability in a company's earnings. Then I
looked for companies whose debt or quality rat-
ings have improved recently, after bottoming out.
The improvers constitute a thin list, as you
might expect during a prolonged downturn. Out of
roughly 835 companies whose S&P quality rank-
ings were lower than average at some point over
the past two years, for example, only about 75--
less than 10 percent--have improved to average or
better. And of 323 companies with speculative or
"junk" credit ratings since 2008, only 91 have be-
come more creditworthy. The firms that made our
final list still face challenges, indicated in some
cases by their stock price performance over the
past two years. (For comparison, the S&P 500 in-
dex has fallen about 21 percent over the same pe-
riod.) But these 10 companies have begun to make
notable turnarounds:
Ford Motor Co. (Change in stock price over the
past two years: up 76 percent). Between 2006 and
2008, Ford lost $30 billion, limping alongside Gen-
eral Motors and Chrysler as a symbol of Detroit's
downfall. But Ford has now pulled ahead of its
cross-town rivals, which both declared bankruptcy
last year and got billions in government aid. Ford,
by contrast, worked through its own problems,
thanks to timely debt refinancing and popular new
models like the Fusion and Taurus sedans and the
266
Ford Moto Company CEO Alan Mulally, 65, an aeronautical
and astronautical engineer, was vice president of aviation
giant Boeing and CEO of Boeing Commercial Airplanes (BCA)
before taking on the task of rescuing Ford Motor Company
from bankruptcy in September 2006.
Flex crossover. Avoiding a bailout has helped Ford
grab customers from the other domestics, driving
market share up. Ford turned a $2.7 billion profit
in 2009 and CEO Alan Mulally says the company is
back in the black for good.
Sonic Automotive (down 47 percent). The double-
whammy of $4 gas in 2008 and an automotive de-
pression in 2009 trashed sales at this dealership
chain concentrated in the South and West. With
more than a dozen General Motors and Chrysler
franchises, Sonic had to close several dealerships
after the two automakers declared bankruptcy. A
long-term strategy of expanding by buying dealer-
ships in big cities went into reverse, as Sonic
downsized to conserve cash. But Sonic turned a
profit in 2009 after a big loss the year before, and
a stable of strong dealerships seem likely to bene-
fit as auto sales bounce back. And Sonic's S&P
credit rating has risen a notch.
E-Trade (down 63 percent). This high-flying online
brokerage slammed into a headwall in 2006, as
investments in subprime lending and other risky
ventures turned into a disaster. Three years of
steep losses followed. The company has been sell-
ing assets and aggressively restructuring, while
living off a $2.5 billion investment from a promi-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/Economy/ Business
nent hedge fund. The surgery seems to be work-
ing. The company's S&P credit rating has risen by
one level, and core brokerage operations are gath-
ering steam. The company could return to profit-
ability late this year or early in 2011, as revamped
international operations complete a turnaround.
10 Companies Back From the Brink
ment. New high-tech computer-controlled gaming
systems that allow frequent changes in the theme
or rules of a game could catch on as well, and the
company should benefit as the economy slowly
recovers and consumers go for the dice once
again.

Corning (down 38 percent). This technology com-
pany struggled after the dot-com bust, with a
quality rating of "C"--the lowest for solvent firms--
since 2002. Then came the recession that ham-
mered sales of many products that use Corning
components, like trucks and automobiles, TVs, and
telecommunications equipment. But Corning now
stands to profit from several trends, which has
lifted its quality ranking out of the basement. Sales
of LCD TVs, which Corning makes the glass for,
should recover handsomely. Tighter pollution laws
and the growing popularity of diesel automobiles
should aid the company's emission-control prod-
ucts. Telecom spending, which usually lags a re-
covery, should pick up eventually. And the firm's
durable "Gorilla Glass" is showing up on smart
phones, tablet PCs and television sets.
Alaska Air (up 135 percent). It's been a bumpy
decade for most airlines, with spikes in fuel prices
and a plunge in travel adding to a chronic overca-
pacity problem. Alaska Air took its lumps, with
losses in 2006 and 2008 and a quality rating that
slid to C. Unlike some rivals, however, this West
Coast carrier seems to have found a formula for
profitability that doesn't require a merger. Simpli-
fying its fleet to two kinds of aircraft--one for
mainline destinations and one for regional hops--
has helped cut costs, while new baggage fees
helped Alaska buck the trend and turn a profit in
2009. Several bigger airlines partner with Alaska to
get passengers to its appealing West Coast desti-
nations, and a merger remains possible.
Bally Technologies (down 6 percent). The house
always wins--except when a grim recession torpe-
does visits to Vegas and other gambling meccas, as
happened in 2008 and 2009. That sank the outlook
for Bally, which makes slot machines, casino sys-
tems, and other gambling equipment (and is not
related to the fitness company or the Swiss cloth-
ier.) But another trend could help Bally beat the
odds: the desperate need for state and local gov-
ernments to draw business and raise new reve-
nue, often through regional casinos. That's now
boosting sales of slot machines and other equip-
267
CMS Energy(down 6 percent). Utilities are usually
dull and predictable, but this Michigan power
company, whose main division is Consumers En-
ergy, has had a tumultuous decade. After ventur-
ing into overseas energy production and the trad-
ing of energy contracts (think Enron) it gradually
sold off those divisions to focus on its core opera-
tions in Michigan. But then came a statewide de-
pression and the bankruptcy of two big customers,
General Motors and Chrysler. Cutting costs and
focusing closer to home, however, has helped the
company stabilize its earnings, raise its dividend,
and invest in smart-grid systems and other futuris-
tic technologies. And its S&P quality ranking has
risen two notches over the past two years.
Interpublic Group (up 83 percent). The recession
hammered this sprawling advertising and market-
ing firm, as big clients like General Motors, Veri-
zon, Microsoft, and Intel slashed their ad budgets
to save money. That sent Interpublic's S&P quality
ranking to lowly C. Now, after streamlining and
cutting its own costs, Interpublic seems poised to
benefit as businesses regain confidence and beef
up their ad budgets. Despite a first-quarter loss
and turmoil at Chevrolet, a huge client, the firm's
quality rating has risen one notch, indicating that
the outlook for earnings is finally improving.
Norfolk Southern Corporation (down 15 percent).
Recessions are bad news for freight railroads,
which transport many of the products that busi-
nesses and consumers stop buying when money
gets scarce. Such worries about earnings drove
S&P's quality ranking for Norfolk Southern down
to a C. But after sharp declines in 2009, revenues
and sales are rebounding as the economy im-
proves, and S&P has raised its quality ranking for
the railroad by four notches--the biggest improve-
ment for any company monitored by S&P over the
past two years.
The 10th company Jon Ann Stores, is a leather
fabric retail chain that raised its quality rating a
notch above C by downsizing and cutting costs.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
The Obama Chronicle
President Obama serving lunch at a Washington D.C. charity
A s America’s unemployment rate hovered
around 10% and sluggish growth kept the
economy at risk of a double dip recession, Presi-
dent Obama and his economy team found them-
selves caught between the conservatives shouting
for budget deficit reduction and tax cuts for the
rich, on the right, and those like Nobel Prize win-
ning economist Paul Krugman who from the begin-
ning predicted that the $787 billion stimulus pack-
age passed by Congress would not be enough to
attain and sustain growth. The argument from the
right is that the $13.258 trillion United States pub-
lic debt (aggregate of public debt at $8.63 trillion
and intra-government obligations at $4.68 trillion,
which includes the Social Security Trust Fund),
amounting to 93% of GDP, is already a burden that
will be borne by at least two generations to come;
the liberals, reminding the conservatives that it
was right wing Republican President George W.
Bush that landed America in recession, insist that
without government stimulus the recession would
have become a full blown depression.
Obama has pointed out that when Great De-
pression era President Franklin Delano Roosevelt
yielded to conservative advice and pressure to
focus on budget deficit reduction before economic
recovery had stabilized a double dip recession oc-
curred. With public debt about 60% of GDP the
Democrats are banking on high Gross National
Product (GNP) growth to finance debt reduction.
New York Times economist Paul Krugman main-
268
Perspective
tained from the beginning of the recession that to
accomplish that the stimulus package needed to
be at least $1.5 trillion [on top of the $700 billion
bank bailout passed by the Bush administration in
October 2008], which was however politically un-
tenable for the Democrats. The $1.487 trillion dol-
lars in stimulus became a rally cry for America’s
conservatives to mobilize against the Obama ad-
ministration, despite the fact that Republican Bush
had given banks almost half that amount before
Obama was elected; while in such a crisis mass
support for policies is very important for good re-
sults. Significantly, as Senator Obama supported
Bush’s bank bailout, recognizing that to allow col-
lapse of the financial system would be national
suicide. Obama predicts he will cut the deficit in
half by the end of his term in 2013.
In any event, America has the third lowest
public debt to GDP ratio among G-8 countries,
though it is currently the largest the country has
had since the end of World War II and has in-
creased by 20 percentage points since 2008; but is
there a realistic alternative to economic stimulus
to revive the economy? Obama took office in a
historical position similar to that of Franklin De-
lano Roosevelt who has been widely acclaimed
both nationally and internationally as America’s
greatest 20th century president, but FDR’s legacy
continues, nonetheless, to have Republican de-
tractors. Burton W. Folsom Jr., Comparing the
Great Depression to the Great Recession (the free-
manonline.org, Jun 10, 2010), wrote:
Critics of Roosevelt and Obama insisted that it
was impossible to spend our way out of a re-
cession. During the New Deal, economics
writer Henry Hazlitt observed that public-
works spending destroyed as many jobs as it
created. “Every dollar of government spending
must be raised through a dollar of taxation,”
Hazlitt emphasized. If the Works Progress Ad-
ministration builds a $10 million bridge, for
example, “the bridge has to be paid for out of
taxes. . . . Therefore for every public job cre-
ated by the bridge project a private job has
been destroyed somewhere else.”
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
Nobel Laureate, Princeton University and London School
of Economics professor , as well as New York Times col-
umnist, Paul Krugman joined President Obama in caution-
ing leaders at the Toronto G-8 and G-20 Summits that
cutting stimulus in favor of debt reduction would reverse
the fragile global economic recovery
Eight decades later the Obama administration
included in its 2009 stimulus package the Ameri-
can Reinvestment and Recovery Act (ARRA) which
offered Build America Bonds to reduce the cost of
bond based borrowing for state and municipal
governments (the savings for a 10 year bond are
estimated to be 31 basis points and the savings for
a 30 year bond are estimated to be 112 basis
points versus traditional tax-exempt financing), to
enable them finance public works projects and
save jobs. States were at liberty to either accept
or reject the proposition and some conservative
governors, citing opposition to the stimulus, made
it clear they wanted no part of it. Significantly,
New Orleans, still trying to recover from the dev-
astation of Hurricane Katrina, signed up, issuing a
$40 million BABs offer. As of May 31, 2010 $106
billion in Build America Bonds had been issued
since the ARRA became law in April 2009. The larg-
est buyers were insurance companies, mutual
funds, foreign central banks and foreign commer-
cial banks. Controversy has surrounded the bonds
as Wall Street banks charge larger commissions
for selling Build America Bonds than for normal
269
The Obama Chronicle
municipal bonds, which increases the cost to the
states and cities. Prices of the bonds are also sub-
ject to increasing as investors turn them over. The
consequent uncertainty in the market prompted
Florida to withdraw from the Build America Bond
market after selling $1.6 billion worth. The Inter-
nal Revenue Service has been investigating the
Build America Bond market, but there is a lot of
talk in America about unscrupulous practices re-
lated to stimulus package programs that under-
mine its success. After earning hundreds of mil-
lions of dollars in fees from selling Build America
Bonds Wall Street banks started issuing reports
that the financial woes of the states may make the
bonds less attractive and some banks have been
accused of telling investors how to bet against
BABs. This practice of selling financial instruments
and then betting against them landed Goldman
Sachs before a Congressional investigation panel,
at which its CEO argued that the bank has no obli-
gation to protect the investments of their clients.
The rationalized greed culture prevailing in
America’s financial sector has not only irked Presi-
dent Obama who has harshly criticized the Wall
Street lot, but has given rise to contradictory posi-
tioning by the political right, with the extreme
right Tea Party within the Republican Party postur-
ing as a populous movement bent on taking over
government to benefit ordinary Americans, while
some Republican Congressmen have sided with
Wall Street in fighting Obama’s efforts to legislate
financial market reforms aimed at preventing an-
other crisis.
Historically consumerism driven economies
tend to cycles of prosperity and bust, the latter
befalling in the wake of excesses in the former.
Militarism has also led countries into financial cri-
sis, which happened during the Nixon era, though
he was intent on and did in fact end the Vietnam
War he inherited from the Democrats’ Kennedy/
Johnson administration. Nixon, moreover, re-
duced costly global tensions by detente with the
Soviet Union and rapprochement with China. The
Great Depression that occurred during the Hoover
presidency was the consequence of unbridled ex-
cesses during the Harding and Coolidge years,
which led to the disparity between stock prices
and underlying asset values that burst the pros-
perity bubble. Some historians have placed much
blame on the Robber Barons syndrome wherein
wealth was amassed by unethical and even crimi-
nal means and capitalism construed to be compe-
tition in a Darwinian jungle, where the strongest
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency The Obama Chronicle
predators prevailed.
By the 21st century, financial transactions in-
come far exceeded that in the real economy and
financial product innovation was out of systemic
control; and with no reigning in of excesses the
market self-destructed. George W. Bush era mili-
tarism, in which opportunities from contract cor-
ruption were as much motivation as illusions of an
American hegemonic lock on the world, accompa-
nied financial and commodity market exploitive
dealing to run the American economy into a ditch,
as President Obama is wont to put it, involving the
rest of an interdependent world in a bumper to
bumper wreck. The deregulation of the Clinton
era, which removed constraints imposed on the
financial sector by President Roosevelt in rectifying
causes of the Great Depression, opened the way
for multifunction financial conglomerates whose
failure would send the global economy into a tail-
spin. As Obama with support from leading busi-
nessmen and economists vowed on the campaign
trail, he has sought to rectify the situation. Despite
his cautious and moderate approach vested inter-
ests and conservative ideologues maneuver Andrew Mellon (1855-1937), banker, industrialist, phi-
against reform. The stakes in this contest between lanthropist, art collector, was at the age of 17 set up in
conservatives and reformers remain high and the lumber and coal business by his banker/judge father
and made good at it. At 19 he joined his father’s bank,
Obama’s firmness of purpose has given rise to
T. Mellon & Sons, taking ownership of the bank at age
nonsensical claims from the far right hat he has
27. Mellon became U.S. Treasury Secretary in 1921,
become a dictator. serving in that capacity until 1932, during which time he
Predatory competition was in the late 19th was credited with greatly improving fiscal manage-
century given philosophical elaboration and sup- ment; but he was seen by detractors as the epitome of
posed legitimacy as Social Darwinism, euphemized the Robber Barons– men who had become massively
by British philosopher Herbert Spencer as syn- wealthy through unethical practices and joined govern-
thetic philosophy. It is a brutal concept; and while ment to use the system to their advantage. Significantly
neo-conservatives and other contemporary Social to Mellon’s credit is his prediction that substantial de-
Darwinists typically avoid use of the term and duction in income tax rates would result in dramatically
increased gross tax revenue proved true.
George W. Bush sought to mitigate its brutal impli-
cations with the notion of “compassionate conser- fairness in dealing with the Middle East crisis. She
vatism”, Social Darwinism assumed a global he- had the audacity to accuse the Bush administra-
gemony dimension during the Bush-Cheney- tion of complicity in 9/11 on the Congressional
Rumsfeld reign, Washington daring to impose its floor. Doubtlessly Obama would have never been
will and designs on the entire planet, while the neo the Democratic Party’s candidate in 2008 if he
-con clique assumed divine right to milk America as were such a hard core reformist. As Green Party
if it were their private dairy farm. While on the candidate, Cynthia McKinney ran against Obama
campaign trail Obama bluntly called Bush a Social in November 2008, getting only 161,603 votes
Darwinist, but an inevitable shortcoming of his ad- nationwide, which considering that in Congress
ministration is that he would not dare bring the McKinney had been bolder than Obama in con-
Bush boys to book for crimes they committed. fronting America’s faults indicates America is not
Imagine if he had like Van Jones signed the petition at this moment prepared to depart from its hu-
calling for congressional investigation into Bush bristic past and rise to the challenge of global
team complicity in the Al Qaeda assault on Amer- leadership at a time in history when an ever in-
ica, or like former Congresswoman Cynthia McKin- creasing number of people see through false
ney stand on the Congressional floor and advocate claims of transparency and disdain double stan-
270 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency The Obama Chronicle
dards. While lip service is being paid to egalitari-
anism and transparent justice, the man elected to
lead the country that is supposed to lead the world
is held back from properly rising to the challenge
not only by white racists, conservatives, block-
heads and what have we, he must be careful not
to turn his party leaders, cabinet members and
White House staff against him and squander his
mainstream political capital by commitment to full
circle change. That unfortunately has been a his-
torical contradiction of the Democrats; they rarely
if ever live up to the liberality they profess,
whereas the Republicans once in power often tend
to be not as racist and imperialistic as when they
campaigned for the presidency.
It was Richard Nixon, the infamously staunch
anti-communist who achieved détente with Mos-
cow and rapprochement with Beijing, then ended
the Vietnam War. It was neo-conservative George
W. Bush who appointed the first two African
American secretaries of state, clearing the air for
the idea of an African American president. Still, the
principal conflict of our times is between conserva-
tives and progressives. Obama thought he would Former U.S. Congresswoman from Georgia, daughter of a
be able to build a bridge between Republicans and Georgia state legislator whom she eventually served concur-
Democrats, no doubt considering the historic pro- rently with in the Georgia State House of Assembly, Cynthia
gressive initiatives taken from time to time by Re- McKinney, now 55, ran for president on the Green Party ticket
publicans; but white backlash on the right in face in 2008 against Obama. She left the Democratic Party disen-
chanted after loosing the nomination primary and joined the
of a liberal African American president is obses-
Green Party which had attempted to recruit her in 2000 and
sive, revealing the very unfortunate impracticality 2004 as the vice president running mate to Ralph Nader. As
of his good-willed vision. Green Party presidential candidate she chose Afro-Puerto Ri-
Race and money are two of the most critical can community activist Rosa Clemente as running mate
factors in American social psychology and the for- As Congresswoman Cynthia was in 2002 one of the ini-
mer invariably comes into play whenever the latter tiators of the 9/11Truth Movement calling for Congressional
is at issue simply because African Americans are investigation into the Bush Administration role in not prevent-
collectively economically disadvantaged vis-à-vis ing the Al Qaeda attacks on New York and the Pentagon. In
whites. However, Obama has made it clear that 2006 she introduced articles of impeachment against Bush,
blacks are not the only lower-middle class and charging him with violating the constitution as well as abuse
of office and executive privilege. Specifically, she accused Bush
poor people in America and he is also cognizant of
of withholding and manipulating intelligence information on
the economic security threats facing the main mid- Iraq’s alleged weapons of mass destruction program, pressing
dle class; hence he has all along said he would not the CIA and other intelligence agencies to forge information
advance race specific policies but rather commit to prior to invading Iraq. Additionally, she accused him of ob-
bettering the lives of all Americans, especially the structing and hindering the work of Congressional investiga-
disadvantaged and economically threatened. Yet tion bodies in connection with his violations. The articles also
the race factor brings poor, poorly educated included charges against Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice
whites to the far right Tea Party movement cham- and Vice President Dick Cheney. While in Congress she also
pioned by John McCain’s former vice presidential advocated unsealing CIA records about the 1968 assassination
running mate Sarah Palin who tried to depict of Dr. Martin Luther King Jr., challenged America’s bias in han-
dling the Israeli-Palestinian crisis and excoriated Al Gore for
Obama as a Muslim terrorist. This manipulation of
failing to use his influence to protect the U’wa people of Co-
racial prejudices and conservative dogma that de- lumbia who were opposing oil exploration near their home-
monizes social welfare policies as communistic is a land. She moreover opposed weapons transfers to undemo-
disgusting perversion of democracy by unethical cratic governments.
political leaders, but unfortunately one that Amer-
271 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
Herbert Clark Hoover who had the historical misfortune of
being America’s president when the Great Depression struck
ica is intrinsically disposed to. The ethic of Social
Darwinism is intrinsically exploitative, whereby
those at the top of the socioeconomic and political
order are primarily class and status conscious. Karl
Marx, a scion of the European bourgeoisie in a vir-
tually all white society recognized that; hence he
categorized all types of discrimination as chauvin-
ism– racial chauvinism, male chauvinism, class
chauvinism and whatever.
The advice attributed to Treasury Secretary
Andrew Mellon (the third wealthiest man in Amer-
ica at the time) when Hoover consulted him on the
1929 stock market crash no doubt epitomizes the
political mindset of the Social Darwinist syndrome
of affluent conservatives: “[let the markets] liqui-
date labor, liquidate stocks, liquidate the farmers,
liquidate real estate… it will purge the rottenness
out of the system. High costs of living and high liv-
ing will come down. People will work harder, live a
more moral life. Values will be adjusted, and enter-
prising people will pick up from less competent
people." This Aristotelian attitude of Mellon,
whose wealth peaked during 1929 and 1930 at
between $300 and $400 million, included opposi-
tion to stimulus and refusal of bank bailouts, while
slashing public expenditures and balancing the
budget ; a frugality mix of such disastrous effect in
the midst of depression that articles of impeach-
ment were introduced against him in Congress.
After having served three U.S. presidents (Harding,
Coolidge and Hoover, all Republicans) as Treasury
Secretary, Mellon saved face accepting President
272
The Obama Chronicle
Hoover’s appointment as Ambassador to the
Court of St. James. Although he was largely re-
sponsible for the severity of the Great Depression,
his free market dogmatism was echoed by Repub-
licans in Congress and the media during the 2009
stimulus package debates.
President Herbert Clark Hoover, who rose
from a hard childhood as an exploited orphan to
become a multi-millionaire, according to Kevin
Baker [writing Barak Hoover Obama, Harper’s
Magazine, July 2009) had ideas to rescue the
American economy in the wake of the stock mar-
ket crash that were later employed by Roosevelt
and he sought as Obama did 80 years later to
enlist the support of all stakeholders to defy the
downward plunge of the markets; but despite
sending Andrew Mellon off to England as ambas-
sador the sophisticated president who had a dem-
onstrated compassion for the poor and suffering
was unable to get cooperation from the Republi-
can barons to take the requisite decisive action to
prevent the Great Depression. By the end of 1930
GNP had dropped 13%, unemployment was at 9%
and over 600 banks had closed, despite Hoover’s
bailout package. Hoover was not a career politi-
cian, but an engineer who had become rich in the
mining business before entering public service. His
biggest apparent mistake was choosing the Re-
publican Party when both Republicans and De-
mocrats were keen to enlist him.
An AP-GfK poll result released in mid May
indicated a 49% approval rating of the Obama
presidency; the lowest it has been since he took
office in January 2009 and considerably lower
than the 57.6% average approval Gallup calculated
for 2009. Only 35% of those polled said they be-
lieved the country was going in the right direction.
Obama was elected to lead a largely disillusioned
country. A 2008 Gallup Poll indicated only 7% of
Democrats and 29% of Republicans believed
America was headed aright as President George
W. Bush prepared to leave office. Significantly,
African American satisfaction with America
jumped from just 10% in mid 2008 to 47% in Octo-
ber 2009.
Indicating the weight of personal identity
with Obama in influencing public perception of his
performance is the 2009 Gallop Poll showing that
the president’s home state, Hawaii, gave him a
higher approval rating than any of the 49 others,
71%. However, Washington D.C., the nation’s
capital which has an African American majority
of over 60%, gave him an incredible 90.2% ap-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency The Obama Chronicle

President Obama with civil rights activist and radio talk show host Rev. Al Sharpton, described as a racial
arsonist by sociologist Orlando Patterson, but former New York Mayor Ed Koch says Sharpton, a quick
witted straight talker who is ready to take the frontline in any African American cause deserves the re-
spect he enjoys among his constituency. He is friendly with President Obama and has shown understand-
ing of the challenges and limitations he faces.

proval rating. Although his 88% approval rating
among African Americans by March 2010 was
down from 96% in August 2009, it is high enough
to nonetheless indicate that despite African Ameri-
cans being particularly hard hit by unemployment,
being aware of how hard it is to achieve their com-
munity aspirations in American society they are
reluctant to write him off and no doubt generally
recognize Obama as the only chance they will ever
have to improve their lot in America. Racism has
from all accounts accentuated since Obama en-
tered the White House, as the white backlash has
grown in intensity, month by month. The president
lost his African American green jobs guru, Green
for All founder Van Jones when he resigned under
pressure from certain quarters of America for al-
legedly having signed a petition calling for Con-
gressional investigation into the role Bush and his
Neo-Con clique played in Osama bin Laden suc-
cessfully attacking America. Those who were inter-
ested in the prospects for Jones to help the admin-
istration create new jobs urged him not to yield to
pressure from the quarter of America that had
already shamelessly vowed to work for Obama’s
failure; after all, if he did sign the petition it was
his constitutional right and fully within the law;
but Jones stepped down insisting he wanted to
avoid being used as a distracting crisis issue for
those out to weaken the new administration. One
is left to wonder how much of a difference this
green jobs expert would have made in reducing
unemployment while modernizing America’s
economy. Republican Party National Committee
chairman Michael Steele, the first African Ameri-
can to ever hold the post, lamented that the mar-
gin of error given to him and Obama was less than
that normally given to white leaders.
Only 51% of African Americans feel race rela-
tions have improved since Obama became presi-
dent, which probably reflects the positive atti-
tudes they find in those whites who voted for
Obama with expectation of improved race rela-

273 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 North America/United States/Presidency The Obama Chronicle
tions and want to see race relations improved in
America; but the Tea Party crowd “Take Our Coun-
try Back” rally cry is not just about liberal policies
conservatives see as socialistic or communistic, the
connotation of “Get that Nigger out of the White
House” in there when prominent talk show host
and Tea Party agitator Glenn Beck accuses Obama
of having “a deep seated hatred for white people
and white culture.”
Indicating that education and cosmopolitan
exposure play roles in how Americans perceive
Obama’s performance, the president got a 67.2%
approval rating from New Yorkers, arguably the
most sophisticated and cosmopolitan state lot in
the U.S.; better than the 65.2% from his adopted
state, Illinois, which he represented in the United
States Senate prior to becoming president.
Obama’s 41.6% approval rating in Wyoming, Amer-
ica’s least populous state, comprised largely of
mountainous terrain, is the lowest in the country;
by contrast, America’s most populous and also
quite cosmopolitan state, California, gave him a
63.7% approval rating.
Generally, the regional and ideological factors
have been important in perceptions of President
Obama’s performance, with Democrats giving him Mormon, conservative author , Fox New talk show host and
a 88% approval rating, compared to 23% for Re- Tea Party mobilizer Glenn Beck calling President Obama a
racist brings to mind the famous lines of insightful 20th cen-
publicans; and the East Coast states comprising 7
tury African American author James Baldwin: “What one
of the 10 states where he enjoys the highest rates
thinks of other people invariably reflects the laws of one’s
of approval; the others are his two home states, own personality, and it is one of those ironies of black white
Hawaii and Illinois, California and Washington D.C. relations that by virtue of what the white man thinks about
where American presidents reside. According to the black man, the black man is able to know who the white
Gallup, the 65 percentage point difference be- man is.”
tween Democrat approval of Obama on the upside
and Republicans on the downside is the largest poll results indicating 44% preferred a Republican
ever recorded for a first year president, substan- controlled Congress, to 41% preferring a Democ-
tially exceeding the previous high of 52 percentage rat majority. The poll results were based on cell
points for Democrat Bill Clinton during his first and landline telephone interviews with 1,002 ran-
year as president in 1993. domly chosen adults and carry a margin of sam-
No doubt Americans seeing their country los- pling error of plus or minus 4.3 percentage points.
ing ground to China in the economic sphere, its Associated Press writer Alan Fram noted fad-
troubles with the Muslim world, particularly the ing of the health care reform debate into the
lack of victory in Afghanistan after 9 years of mili- background and improvement in the economy as
tary engagement against Al Qaeda and the Taliban, factors no doubt contributing to the reversed
and many other internal and external difficulties preference; but as it appears many jobs have been
fuel a mood of dissatisfaction; though the gap be- deleted from the market, the pace at which new
tween Obama’s approval rating near 50% and be- jobs are created in tandem with a skills pool to fill
lief that the country is on the right track, 35%, may them will likely determine the fortunes of
be in part attributable to the president’s affability. Obama’s party and presidency in the months
The AP-GfK poll result released in mid May ahead. With a 254 to 177 majority in the House of
indicated 45% of Americans prefer Democrats con- Representatives and 59 out of the 100 Senate
trolling Congress as opposed to 40% preferring seats the Democrats have been able to override
Republican control, reversing April public opinion bitter Republican opposition to their agenda,
274 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency The Obama Chronicle
which conservatives have tried to portray as Politics of the BP Oil Spill
tainted with communism and socialism.
Not surprisingly, radical Republican opposi-
tion to reforms is hurting the opposition party in
a country where the mainstream is from center
A lthough the oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico
from a BP rig was found to be consequent
to unscrupulous cost saving by the company and
right to center left. "I want to be with a party
regulatory failure of the Department of Inte-
that's for something instead of against every-
rior’s Minerals Management Service, at which
thing," a 51 year old new Democrat in Baltimore
the personnel and modus operandi were carry-
gave as his reason for terminating his support of
overs from the Bush administration, President
the Republican Party.
Obama became the target of frustrations over
The right wing media led by Fox News that
the damage and livelihood losses caused. The
thrives off bashing and belittling Obama, is
president was accused of slow response follow-
loaded with charismatic, entertaining personali-
ing the April 20 explosion at the rig that killed 11
ties that exploit the vulnerability of Americans
workers and injured 20 others, with detractors
to emotional political thinking and behavior. In
making a case that is was similar to Bush’s slug-
an era of high unemployment and dissatisfac-
gish attitude towards New Orleans devastating
tion with the sight of an African American as
Hurricane Katrina. African Americans had ac-
president, the right wing media’s fortunes have
cused Bush of not being particularly concerned
soared appealing to the guttural objections to
about New Orleans because it was a “chocolate
Obama being in the White House in the first
city”.
place. Hence, making him unpopular is a re-
However, with an air of deliberation and
warding business, just as depicting Obama as a
evident indignation President Obama in a May
terrorist was somewhat useful to the McCain-
27th press conference stated that those accus-
Palin campaign for the presidency. It didn’t bring
ing him of inadequately responding to the Gulf
them victory but nonetheless ensured that out-
of Mexico oil spill “don’t know the facts.”
rageously fallacious negative impressions of
"The federal government is fully engaged,
Obama would be clung to by those prejudiced
and I'm fully engaged,” Obama assured, adding,
against him from the start.
"I take responsibility. It is my job to make sure
In the final analysis, Americans gain nothing
that everything is done to shut this down."
by working against their president, because if he
He said he received a daily briefing on the
succeeds the country will be better off and if
situation and was giving more attention to the
despite enjoying due goodwill he nonetheless
spill than anything else. He acknowledged hav-
fails they can vote him out of office in 2012. Af-
ing at first put too much faith in BP’s reports to
ter all, the American presidency is not a one
him about what they were doing to stop the
man show; Obama has San Francisco Congress-
massive oil leak, but pointed out that Coast
woman and Speaker of the House of Represen-
Guard Commandant Admiral Thad Allen was in
tatives Nancy Pelosi and her backers as his prin-
charge of all spill related operations in the gulf
cipal collaborators in Congress. He has arguably
as representative of the federal government.
the best team of economic brains ever assem-
Allen had in 2005 coordinated the govern-
bled by an American president working for him.
ment’s response to Katrina, including cleanup
Significantly, from the time Obama started his
and recovery efforts. Allen is also involved in off-
presidential nomination campaign to present
shore drilling issues with Minerals Management
there has not been a single crisis or major scan-
Service, which has come under fire for its lax
dal within his team.
regulation of the oil industry. The Coast Guard
In a country where presidents and their
offers input to MMS on licensing and permitting,
administrations have a history of serious scan-
focusing on safety, navigation, and security.
dals– Nixon’s Watergate, Reagan’s Iran Scam,
On June 10 Admiral Allen who is the U.S.
Clinton’s numerous sex scandals in addition to
National Incident Commander said in a CNN in-
his White Water property mess, Bush’s Hallibur-
terview the spill is "an insidious enemy that's
ton and Blackwater indulgence, Obama and his
attacking our shores" and "holding the Gulf hos-
household are world role models. Americans
tage."
should at least be appreciative of that.

275 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 North America/United States/Presidency
Daily News, May 25, 2010
Sub-Saharan Africa Leads World in U.S. Approval
Across 110 countries, median approval was 51%
by Cynthia English and Julie Ray
WASHINGTON, D.C. -- Across 110 countries Gallup
surveyed in 2009, median approval of U.S. leader-
ship was 51%, up from 34% in 2008. Approval dur-
ing President Barack Obama's first year in office
topped 75% in 20 sub-Saharan African countries,
with Kosovo, Ireland, and Albania joining them as
the countries or areas most approving.
276
The Obama Chronicle
These findings summarize all Gallup findings
regarding world citizens' views of U.S. leadership
collected in 2009. Prior stories have documented
results by region and by country, including
changes from 2008. With all surveying completed,
U.S. leadership approval remained highest in sub-
Saharan Africa, as it has been since Gallup began
measuring world
citizens' views of
U.S. leadership
in 2005.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
Daily News, May 25, 2010
Perceptions of U.S. Leadership Improve in
Nearly Every Region
Although approval remained relatively low in
the Middle East and North Africa as a region,
views of U.S. leadership improved in several
countries in the first year of the Obama presi-
dency. Still, less than half of respondents ap-
proved of the job performance of U.S. leader-
ship in most countries; the few notable excep-
tions were Israel (61%), Bahrain (55%), and Ku-
wait (52%). Approval was lowest in Syria (15%).
More than half of residents in the Americas and
Europe rated U.S. leadership positively. In the
Americas, approval ranged from 40% in Bolivia
to 68% in El Salvador. In Europe, approval was
highest in Kosovo (88%) and lowest in Serbia
(14%). The disparity in sentiment between these
two countries is likely attributable to U.S. sup-
port for Kosovo's independence from Serbia.
Many in Former Soviet Union Countries, Asia
Reserve Judgment
On average, respondents in former Soviet Union
countries were the least likely to express an
opinion about U.S. leadership. Forty-five percent
or more were uncertain in Kazakhstan (45%),
Belarus (46%), Russia (47%), and Ukraine (54%).
Approval within the region ranges from a high of
61% in Turkmenistan to a low of 20% in Russia.
277
The Obama Chronicle
A significant proportion of respondents in many
Asian countries also do not express an opinion
about U.S. leadership. More than half of respon-
dents in five Asian countries approved of U.S.
leadership: Singapore (68%), Japan (66%), Cam-
bodia (64%), Philippines (58%), and South Korea
(58%). Pakistan's 9% approval rating was the
lowest in the region and of all countries sur-
veyed; it was the sole country where approval
was in the single digits.
Survey Methods
Results are based on telephone and face-to-face
interviews with approximately 1,000 adults,
aged 15 and older, conducted in 2009 in 110
countries. For results based on the total sample
of national adults, one can say with 95% confi-
dence that the maximum margin of sampling
error ranged from a low of ±2.6 percentage
points in India to a high of ±5.7 percentage
points in Slovenia. The margin of error reflects
the influence of data weighting. In addition to
sampling error, question wording and practical
difficulties in conducting surveys can introduce
error or bias into the findings of public opinion
polls.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
African America and Obama
By Michael D. Patterson
President elect Barack Obama, November 26, 2008, greeting pupils at St. Columbanus Catholic School in
Chicago’s South Side
W hat is not always considered about Presi-
dent Obama’s African American constitu-
ency is its cultural diversity. While all African
Americans, apart from African emigrants and their
offspring, are descendants of the African Diaspora,
they are not all descendants of United States
slaves, and they do not always consider them-
selves African Americans. The group the govern-
ment regards as African Americans is comprised of
Africans from various countries, Caribbeans from
Jamaica, Trinidad, Haiti, The Dominican Republic
and US descendants of slaves. They may also in-
clude Brazilians, Columbians, Cubans, Panamani-
ans, Puerto Ricans, and Dutch East Indians, de-
pending on their own choice of identification, and
within which there is considerable intercultural
marriage. To gage their feelings about President
Obama and his influence on them one must con-
sider the political environment that attempts to
nullify his influence.
The biggest difference in how most of the
world sees events and how the United States does
278
Perspective
is historical world view. In a nutshell the US does
not have an historical world view. It is totally in
the moment. This is a convenient device for a
country that wants the rest of the world to disre-
gard its past indiscretions as much as it does itself.
Obama is making earnest attempts to heal those
wounds in the Caribbean, among its NATO allies,
in Russia and in Africa, admittedly a continuation
of Bush’s policies. He has also shown a willingness
to improve relations with North Korea, and Iran,
while attempting to negotiate a level of peace be-
tween the Israelis and the Palestinians. His intent
in Iraq and Afghanistan is no longer directed to
nation -building but to self-reliance. And for the
most part the world has responded positively to
his overtures of friendship. He also seems to live
up to the tenets of the Nobel Peace prize many
felt he received prematurely.
These are accomplishments African Ameri-
cans of all persuasions can be proud of. However,
President Obama has significant challenges to
overcome in spite of his success that mollify his
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
main supporters’ ability to loudly voice their
approval of those accomplishments. The first is
the condition of the economy and the fact that
regardless how bad unemployment figures are
for White Americans they are doubly worse for
African Americans, a significant portion of
which also identifies Muslim. And unemploy-
ment is even worse for African American males.
The most recent figures released by the Bureau
of Labor Statistics, demonstrates that unem-
ployment for African Americans in the United
States increased 700% more than for whites.
To state that clearly, unemployment among
African American males rose from 16.7% to
17.3% for the month of August, while unem-
ployment for White males rose from 8.8% to
8.9% during the same period. This cannot all be
contributed to disparities in education, ability
or willingness to work. Hence, It may actually
be time for Obama to deal with African Ameri-
can unemployment as a unique problem.
Whether Congress will allow such an interven-
tion is another story.
While as a people African Americans have
legitimate complaints about the genesis of their
plight, and initially hoped the election of an
African American president would signal a
change of national heart, hard-line opponents
have used his election to find new ways to con-
found the Democratic Party and African Ameri-
cans as a group. Still, Obama has also been sur-
prisingly outspoken about current events, most
notably on the incarceration of his respected
friend, professor and author Dr. Henry Louis
Gates. By saying the Boston policeman who
arrested Dr. Gates in his own house acted stu-
pidly, he gained the ire of white policemen
across the country. Still, he was able to defuse
the issue with his now famous Beer Summit.
He and Vice President Biden sat on the White
House Lawn drinking beer with Dr. Gates and
his arresting officer to allow each to present his
own justification for his own actions. When the
beer was gone they agreed to disagree, but the
event diffused the situation and allowed the
media to move on to the next story. For Afri-
can Americans the question lingers briefly as to
whether that same incident could happen to a
white person of comparable standing. Quickly
the answer becomes no.
Just recently Obama spoke in support of
the Muslim’s right to build their cultural center
two blocks from Ground Zero, though in a clari-
279
African America and Obama
White House Beer Summit, July 30, 2009: (l to r) Vice Presi-
dent Joe Biden, Chairman of Harvard University’s African
American Studies Department Prof. Henry Louis Gates, Police
Sergeant James Crowley and President Obama. Prof. Gates,
arguably the highest profile contemporary African American
scholar, returned to his Cambridge Massachusetts home
from a trip to China forgetting to collect his house key from
the estate manager. He then with the help of his taxi driver
entered the house through the rear. Sergeant Crowley re-
sponding to a complaint call from one of Gates’ neighbors
went to the house, finding Gates already settled inside, and
ordered him to come out. An indignant Gates, refused and
was not short on words in doing so; leading to his arrest.
fication a day later he opined while it is their
legal right to do so, it might not be the most
tactful position to take considering the mood of
the country. This ostensible retraction did not
sit well with many in the African American
community, with familial if not direct ties to
Islam, nor to many progressives. Interestingly,
research demonstrates that building mosques
in communities is actually a deterrent to anti-
capitalist ideological activities, and the prohib-
iting building of Mosques actually fuels discon-
tent to the point of becoming self-fulfilling
prophesies of terrorist activity. Like many other
controversial positions that Obama says he is
willing to tackle, the feeling is once more he
waffled. The promised repeal of don’t ask don’t
tell military policy that defines the social condi-
tions under which gays and lesbians can remain
in the military is now on the table and we await
the outcome. This is a controversial issue in
African American communities where Christian
churches are ideologically in line with white
Christian fundamentalism, while metro sexual
African American men explore homosexuality
on the “down-low”.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
It is undeniable that President Obama is
sensitive to the plight of African Americans.
While he could have chosen to be a Wall Street
millionaire, he instead chose to commit to com-
munity improvement organization among poor
African Americans on Chicago’s South Side.
Even so, he echoes a kinder, gentler message in
the vein of Dr. William H. (Bill) Cosby, by urging
African Americans to do their part to position
themselves as competitors for the American
Dream by properly educating themselves and
abiding by the laws of the land. To that end his
Race to the Top Education initiative, designed
to infuse new life into public education has its
controversial aspects as well, particularly in
predominantly African American inner city
neighborhoods. The responsibility lies within
state boards of education to develop curricu-
American college football great Mark Ingram Jr., one of the many
lum based on proven research and innovation,
African Americans to visit President Obama at the White House
to compete for federal funding of plans vali-
dated as successful by previous research. The
new initiative requires poorly performing
teachers to be phased out, which undoubtedly
will have a disproportionate effect in non-
affluent African American neighborhoods,
which more often have the least motivated and
effective teachers by design. At the same time,
however, Obama’s support for individual Char-
ter Schools is high, and many inner city
neighborhoods have developed very successful
ones, proving motivated African American stu-
dents can perform at the top of the class at the
same proportion as white students. Traditional
school districts must accept the challenge and
find a way to compete with what they consider
narrowly focused alternatives with minimal
overall impact. The reality may be that Charter
School programs can serve as curricular models
for struggling public schools, thereby exponen-
tially expanding that seemingly minimal impact.
The challenge will be to achieve this success
often without additional financial support from
the State or Federal government.
What really confounds African Americans
in their private conversations, however, is
Obama’s approach to governing. The question
of whether Obama is “Black enough” has been
offered for analysis by the more impatient of
the African American community. His priorities
have also been questioned by self-described
progressives. Their position is, since Republi-
cans are willing to do anything and everything
they can to make Obama’s a failed administra-
280
African America and Obama
tion, why does he not simply try to please his
base, African Americans and the progressives?
The truth is Obama barely has the backing of
his own party in the Senate to garner the 60
votes he needs to get any legislation passed.
Unfortunately, in his attempts to govern from
the center, he has done little to energize his
base to vote in the mid-term elections this fall,
and predictions are that Republicans, fueled by
Tea Party promoted candidates vowing to “take
their country back” will control both houses of
Congress.
A more profound slight Congress is hand-
ing African Americans is its obstinacy to abide
its legal obligation to pay over $1 billion to Afri-
can American farmers who the courts agree
proved well beyond reasonable doubt that the
Agriculture Department deliberately and mali-
ciously discriminated against providing them
farm subsidies as they did for white farmers in
similar circumstances.
Even with an African American President
with a sizeable majority of his party installed in
power, a Republican minority successfully
blocks legislation to allow those payments even
though the money to remunerate them is avail-
able and revenue neutral, negating Republican
claims to the contrary.
This leads to the real problem. The biggest
challenge for President Obama and his African
American constituency alike is navigating the
new racism that has infected a frenzied national
political dialog. It has manifested under the
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
Republicans’ declaration of a post-racial United
States. Under that cover racism has become a
political tactic. In politics every deceit and
smear is allowed under the guise of negative
campaigning. As a political weapon, racism,
despicable as it may be, is no more unaccept-
able than the Republicans falsifying videos of
Clinton throwing prostitutes out of airplanes, or
broadcasting false statements regarding the
veracity of Senator John Kerry’s military ex-
ploits. No one says the smears are the truth.
People can believe what they want. The object
is to win an election by any means necessary.
For Obama it’s the politics of race. If there are
still racists in a post-racial society, that’s not
the campaign managers’ faults. They are not
the racists. So the denials go.
Tactics confounding African American
opinion and activism regarding Obama’s ac-
complishment resounds from the Tea Party
movement made up of the Birther contingent
which revels in portraying Obama as an illegiti-
mate president, actually born in Kenya, not Ha-
waii. Another are claims he is a Muslim, which
causes controversy of another sort. Of the two,
the Birthers have less of a following. Still, many
Republican politicians refuse to let the Birther
issue die, including former Vice President Che-
ney’s daughter Liz. According to a Washington
Post/ABC poll released May 7th, 2010, slightly
more than 10% of Americans still believe Presi-
dent Obama was not born in the US, but that
number increases to 33% for self-identified Re-
publicans included in the poll. Because his mid-
dle name is Hussein, and his attendance at a
Muslim school in Indonesia is a matter of fact,
20% of the US population still believes him to
be Muslim. The problem however, is different.
Being a Muslim would not disqualify him from
running for President, and the Muslim commu-
nity in the US is offended by such a blatant dis-
criminatory slight at their religion. The reality is
nine-eleven has provoked White America to
close ranks around their security exactly the
way they did when the Japanese attacked Pearl
Harbor. The Muslim controversy also sparked a
major controversy regarding the use of
Obama’s middle name, Hussein, by other in a
deliberate and inflammatory way, as he is the
junior to his father, Barack Hussein Obama, Sr.,
who was in fact a Muslim. To be fair, it must be
noted Republicans used a similar strategy dur-
ing their own 2008 Primary season when candi-
281
African America and Obama
Lawyer, politician Orly Taitz has filed law suits contesting
Obama’s right to be president by alleging that he was born
in Kenya. Orly, a Russian born Jew immigrated to the
United States from Israel in 1987. She says: "I believe
[Obama] is the most dangerous thing one can imagine, in
that he represents radical communism and radical Islam:
He was born and raised in radical Islam, all of his associa-
tions are with radical Islam, and he was groomed in the
environment of the dirty Chicago mafia. Can there be any-
thing scarier than that?"
dates vying for approval from the fundamental-
ist Christian right colluded to depict Republican
candidate Mitt Romney as a threat to Christian-
ity because he is Mormon. It worked. Then
there is Orly Taitz, a Russian immigrant and
prominent figure in the Birther movement,
who attempted to use the Birther strategy she
directed against Obama, in her failed attempt
to be the Republican candidate for California
Secretary of State. And as long as Fox media
commentators and members of Congress like
Michelle Bachmann refuse to admit neither
accusation about Obama carries any merit,
those lies will fester.
The percent of Americans that believe
Obama to be a Muslim would probably be
higher were it not for another controversy
questioning his American allegiance. Ironically,
the main defense for Obama not being a Mus-
lim surrounds his spiritual advisor, the Rever-
end Jeremiah Wright. Through the Reverend
Wright, admittedly an uncooperative figure in
the controversies that followed Obama to the
presidency, and who Obama was forced to dis-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency
tance himself from, and the Southern Christian
Leadership Council which led the marches of
the sixties under Dr. King to struggle for Obama
to have an opportunity to be president, Obama
has been criticized for subscribing to the
preaching of what commentators like Glenn
Beck decry as Liberation Theology. In effect this
is a direct attack on the African American
Church. This theology defines whites as oppres-
sors and African Americans as victims of white
oppression, and is contrary to mainstream
American religious thought as well as being at
odds with a Vatican that reprimanded Latin
American Bishops for preaching it decades ear-
lier. This is a clever tactic because while oppo-
nents of Obama accuse him and the African
American Church of using their Christianity as a
political wedge, these same opponents are and
have for at least the past 160 years done the
same thing. The Ku Klux Klan is the best exam-
ple, wherein their theology may be character-
ized as anti-liberation since they were the op-
pressors. More to the point, fundamentalist
Christianity seeks to legally limit personal free-
doms based on their own interpretation of
what the Founding Fathers actually intended
when they added religious freedom as a right.
To expand, the same group suggests the four-
teenth amendment be rescinded in whole and
citizenship be redefined according to modern
interpretation, their interpretation, of who is a
natural born citizen.
Most recently, in this complex political
environment a prominent Tea Party member
succeeded in provoking an ill-advised response
from the NAACP to a speech by Shirley Sherrod
at one of its events. Though the misdirection
was quickly debunked and condemned, the
damage was done, to Obama’s administration
and the NAACP, both of which bear responsibil-
ity for their ill-conceived reactionary responses.
Through these tactics Republicans and the Tea
Party movement they court, have been suc-
cessful in neutralizing if not eliminating promi-
nent African American resources from the po-
litical arena. This movement started with de-
monization of ACORN (Association of Commu-
nity Organizations for Reform Now). One of
ACORN’s primary missions was voter registra-
tion in minority neighborhoods, and most of
those registrants were Democratic. After law-
fully reporting irregularities in registration au-
thentication by some of their workers in Las
African America and Obama
Rev. Jeremiah Wright, Pastor Emeritus of Trinity United Church of
Christ in Chicago where Barack Obama was one of the 8.500
members. He maintains that his statements on America which
whites find offensive are merely descriptive, not intended to be
divisive. Obama’s membership in the TUCC was cited by his
opponents on the campaign trail as evidence that he harbored
radical African American sentiments, while opponents branded
his wife and law practice mentor, Michelle, who was also part of
the TUCC congregation, “ungrateful” to America. .
Vegas, Nevada, the anti-Obama forces exagger-
ated the case to make it appear the entire or-
ganization was in the business of manufactur-
ing registrations. Deliberately false information
disseminated through the media regarding the
extent of the irregularities made it impossible
for the organization to function effectively.
The initial intent all along was to de-legitimize
any vote count that went to Obama in the na-
tional election proven to have been collected
by ACORN. While that failed, anti-Obama
forces were eventually able to pass a resolution
in Congress, with moderate Democratic acqui-
escence. The resolution prevented ACORN
from ever receiving federal funding for their
work. Unfortunately, there was incontroverti-
ble proof of wrongdoing, but it was perpe-
trated by low-level employees acting on their
own, not under instructions of ACORN’s district
office. Another campaign to discredit ACORN
depicted them as providing federal assistance
to pimps and their prostitutes. While that at-
tempt was largely discredited, it was the final
blow to ACORN’s effectiveness as a reformist
community organization, and today it ceases to
exist.
It is fact that African American institutions
have not reacted with poise to the provoca-
tions of their detractors. It also cannot be de-
nied that President Obama’s staff does not al-
282 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency African America and Obama
ways serve him well. It further cannot be de-
nied that there is deliberate baiting occurring
from Republicans and the Tea Party move-
ment they court to demoralize African
American organizations and Obama admini-
stration staff. To say both need to exercise
more vigilance to protect themselves from
future provocations is an understatement. In
the balance is the integrity of African Ameri-
can culture in the United States and its ability
to be acknowledged as not on the fringes of
mainstream American thought. The political
purpose is to silence Obama’s support. The
social ramifications of relegating those insti-
tutions as ineffective if not extinct must not
be realized. It will make election of the first
African American president the worst event
to date in African American history for years
to come. All civil rights advances gained over
the last 150 years could be reversed both
psychologically and socially through one lost
election.
The current Republican/Tea Party oppo-
sition strategy is working to limit both free
speech and other civil rights for non-white,
non-fundamentalist Christian constituencies U.S. Congresswoman Barbara Lee of California, chair of the en-
through deliberate misinformation cam- tirely Democrat 42 member Congressional Black Caucus, pre-
paigns focused on demonizing Obama, per- sumably President Obama’s most dedicated support base.
ceived champion for the down-trodden, as a Founded in 1969, CBC describes its goals as "positively influenc-
ing the course of events pertinent to African-Americans and oth-
Nazi, and a racist through use of their own
ers of similar experience and situation," and "achieving greater
free speech. Congressman Joe Wilson from equity for persons of African descent in the design and content of
South Carolina gained fame and support domestic and international programs and services."
from the neo-cons when he became the first In 1994 when Republicans attained a majority in the U.S.
Congressmen in history to interrupt the House of Representatives with Newt Gingrich as Speaker, they
President’s State of the Union message, by announced plans to cut off funding of CBC, along with 27 other
shouting “You Lie!” It cannot be denied that Congressional service organizations but the plan never went
American politics has nurtured a dark side through.
starting with the assassination of Alexander Representative Tom Tancredo, R-Co., on January 25, 2007,
Hamilton by Aaron Burr in what the history spoke out against the continued existence of the CBC as well as
the Democratic Congressional Hispanic Caucus and the Republi-
books call a duel because Hamilton did not
can Congressional Hispanic Conference saying, "It is utterly hypo-
support his bid to be President over Jeffer- critical for Congress to extol the virtues of a color-blind society
son. Andrew Jackson’s wife suffered such while officially sanctioning caucuses that are based solely on
indignities by Jackson’s adversaries that it race. If we are serious about achieving the goal of a colorblind
drove her to an early death. But this is the society, Congress should lead by example and end these divisive,
first time the President’s race has been an race-based caucuses."
issue, and it is being used generously and The Congressional Black Caucus has sustained its insistence
viciously in the name of political normalcy. that its membership is only open to Blacks and has over the years
But Republicans and Tea Party advocates demonstrated increasing sensitivity to the views of African
affirm these attacks cannot be racists be- Americans.
Initially, CBC did not support Obama’s nomination as the
cause we now live in a post-racial society.
Democratic Party’s candidate because they doubted he could
Yet according to Glenn Beck, the President is beat Hilary Clinton in the primaries until a string of victories con-
probably a racist. It is interesting that Afri- vinced theme he was a viable nominee.
can Americans have outwardly remained so
283 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Presidency African America and Obama
level-headed in the wake of these discourte- moment as being Black. Now in the real
sies. If they were of the same spirit as the world, as we face potential economic disas-
generation of the sixties, when freedom was ter the President is Black. In the movies there
the right for the taking, not waiting for it to is always a happy ending. Reality is not al-
be given, among Africans and African Ameri- ways that kind.
cans alike, the situation would be quite dif-
ferent. Whether African Americans are bet-
ter off for their restraint now is a question
for history.
In the most recent presidential approval
poll, conducted in Illinois, the President re-
ceives a 51% approval. Among African Ameri-
cans in that poll, his approval was 96%. The
question remains, however, whether African
American and progressive supporters will
find the energy to vote in the upcoming mid-
term elections. If they do not go to the polls
in large numbers, the Tea Party infused Re-
publicans will ascend to power in both Colorado U.S.A. based Michael Drew Patterson, apart
houses and nothing will probably be accom- from being a Pan Africa & World Review Associate
plished domestically over the final two years Editor, is a projects and initiatives consultant who has
devoted much of his career to developing databases
of Obama’s administration. Discussions of
concerning education programs for disadvantaged
him being a one-term presidency will over- students.
run the American Media. The full impact this
will have on African Americans is unknown, E-mail Address mpatterson.kgm@netzero.net
but it will undoubtedly make the road that
much more difficult for the next African
American candidate, which is their intention.
In the end, what African Americans ac-
knowledge, in spite of virtually not getting
what they want how they want it, is the
President they went to the polls for in record
numbers, was handed an historically com-
plex mess created by the outgoing admini-
stration. The mess consisted of two wars that
were not going well, a financial industry in so
much debt it threatened collapse of the
global economy through over leveraged
housing debt, potential bankruptcy of two of
the countries’ three major automobile manu-
facturers, a general recession that had been
disguised for over a year and trillions of dol-
lars of debt caused by unpaid tax breaks and
the expenses of war. Aware of the chal-
lenges set before their champion, African The Art of Universality
Americans have restrained themselves admi-
rably, giving Obama latitude to do his job the
way he feels is best and well enough to make
them proud, regardless of what his detrac-
tors may say about him or them. To para-
phrase comedian D.L. Hugley following
Obama’s election, American disaster movies
have begun depicting the president of the
284 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
North America/U.S.A./Presidency

Millionaire Obama
O n the campaign trail Barack Obama,
whose 2008 earnings, combined with
those of his wife who earned $253,000 a year
as a hospital chief executive, were about $3
million, made it clear that in proposing higher
taxes for the rich he was digging into his own
pockets. Now as president, book sales from
which he makes the largest portion of his
household income and his salary increase from
Senator to President sent his household in-
come for 2009 up to about$5.5 million, on
which he paid about one third in federal taxes,
amounting to nearly $1.8 million.
Obama arranged with the Nobel Commit-
tee for the entire $1.4 million Peace Prize he
was awarded last year to be divided among 10
charities. He never received the money; hence,
there was no reference in his tax return to the
recipient charities. Apart from donating the
Noble Peace Prize money to charities, the
Obamas gave $329,000 to charities in 2009, of
which $50,000 was given to the United Negro
College Fund and an equal amount to CARE.
Royalties on his books, Dreams From My
Father, a memoir first published in 1995, and
his political book Audacity of Hope published in above $372,950 were taxed at the top marginal
2006 earned him $4 million, while from his rate of 35%. He wants to increase the two top
$400,000 a year salary as president he received marginal rates, restoring the top marginal rate to
$374,460 because he was not paid for the first where it was during the Clinton era, 39.6%. Had
19 days of January when he had not yet taken the higher rates been in effect Obama would
office. In his tax return he reported paying have paid $200,000 more in federal taxes than
$471,022 in commissions and fees on his book he did.
sales to agents and promoters, plus $15, 722 in The 9,472 Bank of Hawaii shares valued at
legal fees and a modest $866 in office ex- $480,908 that Obama inherited from his grand-
penses. The books had made him a millionaire mother he sold at a loss, for $355,029. The Por-
before he joined the race for the U.S. presi- tuguese water dog, given to him as a gift by the
dency. late Senator Edward Kennedy he listed as a
In addition to his federal income tax pay- $1,600 income item.
ment, Obama paid $163,000 in Illinois state Vice President Joe Biden and wife Jill re-
taxes which the law allowed him to declare as ported household earnings of $333,182 for 2009.
an expense on his federal income tax return. They paid $71,147 in federal income taxes,
The total of items he deducted from his gross $12,420 in Delaware state income taxes and
income to arrive at his federal taxable income $1,477 in Virginia state income taxes. Jill Biden
was $514,819; including $52,195 in home works as a university professor in Virginia which
mortgage interest payments and $22,456 in borders Washington D.C. The Bidens gave $4,820
real estate taxes, in addition to his donations to charity in cash and kind donations. Their larg-
to charity and Illinois state income tax . est itemized deduction was $30,349 for home
Of Obama’s taxable income, earnings mortgage interest payments.
285 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Supreme Court

Justices Extend Firearm Rights in 5-to-4 Ruling

Members of the US Supreme Court pose for a group photograph at the Supreme Court building on September
29, 2009 in Washington, DC. Front row (L-R): Associate Justice Anthony M. Kennedy, Associate Justice John Paul
Stevens, Chief Justice John G. Roberts, Associate Justice Antonin Scalia, and Associate Justice Clarence Thomas.
Back Row (L-R), Associate Justice Samuel Alito Jr., Associate Justice Ruth Bader Ginsburg, Associate Justice
Stephen Breyer, and Associate Justice Sonia Sotomayor. Photo by Mark Wilson/Getty Images North America

W ASHINGTON (June 28, 2010) —The Second

Amendment’s guarantee of an individual
right to bear arms applies to state and local gun con-
trol laws, the Supreme Court ruled Monday in a 5-to-
4 decision.
The ruling came almost exactly two years after
the court first ruled that the Second Amendment
protects an individual right to own guns in District of
Columbia v. Heller, another 5-to-4 decision.
But the Heller case addressed only federal laws;
it left open the question of whether Second Amend-
ment rights protect gun owners from overreaching
by state and local governments.
Justice Samuel A. Alito Jr., writing for the major-
ity, said the right to self-defense protected by the
Second Amendment was fundamental to the Ameri-
can conception of ordered liberty. Like other provi-
sions of the Bill of Rights setting out such fundamen-
tal protections, he said, it must be applied to limit
not only federal power but also that of state and lo-
cal governments.
The ruling is an enormous symbolic victory for
supporters of gun rights, but its short-term practical
286
effect is unclear. As in the Heller decision, the jus-
tices left for another day just what kinds of gun con-
trol laws can be reconciled with Second Amendment
protection. The majority said little more than that
there is a right to keep handguns in the home for self
-defense.
Indeed, over the course of 200 pages of opin-
ions, the court did not even decide the constitution-
ality of the two gun control laws at issue in the case,
from Chicago and Oak Park, Ill. The justices returned
the case to the lower courts to decide whether those
exceptionally strict laws, which effectively banned
the possession of handguns, can be reconciled with
the Second Amendment.
In Chicago, Mayor Richard M. Daley said he was
disappointed by the ruling because it made the city’s
handgun ban “unenforceable.”
“Across the country, cities are struggling
with how to address this issue,” Mr. Daley said.
“Common sense tells you we need fewer guns
on the street, not more guns.”
Justice Alito, who was joined by Chief Jus-
tice John G. Roberts Jr. and Justices Antonin
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 North America/United States/Supreme Court
Justices Extend Firearm Rights in 5-to-4 Ruling
Scalia, Anthony M. Kennedy and, in large part, Cla-
rence Thomas, acknowledged that the decision
might “lead to extensive and costly litigation,” but
said that was the price of protecting constitutional
freedoms.
The majority offered the lower courts little
guidance about how much protection the Second
Amendment affords. In a part of his opinion that Jus-
tice Thomas declined to join, Justice Alito reiterated
the caveats in the Heller decision, saying the court
did not mean to cast doubt on laws prohibiting pos-
session of guns by felons and people who suffer from
mental illness, laws forbidding carrying guns in sensi-
tive places like schools and government buildings, or
laws regulating the commercial sale of firearms.
The important point was a broad one, Justice
Alito wrote: that the Second Amendment, like other
provisions of the Bill of Rights, must be applied to
the states under the 14th Amendment.
Justices John Paul Stevens, Ruth Bader Gins-
burg, Stephen G. Breyer and Sonia Sotomayor dis-
sented. They said the Heller decision remained incor-
rect and added that they would not have extended
its protections to state and local laws even had it
been correctly decided.
“Although the court’s decision in this case might
be seen as a mere adjunct to Heller,” Justice Stevens
wrote, “the consequences could prove far more de-
structive — quite literally — to our nation’s commu-
nities and to our constitutional structure.”
Though the majority agreed on the outcome, its
members differed about how to get there.
The Second Amendment, like the rest of the Bill
of Rights, originally restricted the power of only the
federal government. The Supreme Court later ruled
that most of the protections of the Bill of Rights ap-
plied to the states under the due process clause of
the 14th Amendment, one of the post-Civil War
amendments.
Many constitutional scholars had hoped that
the court would use Monday’s decision, McDonald v.
Chicago, No. 08-1521, to revise its approach to how
constitutional protections are applied to, or
“incorporated against,” the states.
They argued that the court should rely not on
the due process clause but on the 14th Amend-
ment’s “privileges or immunities” clause, which says
that “no state shall make or enforce any law which
shall abridge the privileges or immunities of citizens
of the United States.” There is evidence that the au-
thors of the clause specifically wanted it to apply to
allow freed slaves to have guns to defend them-
selves.
-
287
But only Justice Thomas signed on for that pro-
ject. Justice Scalia, in a concurrence, acknowledged
misgivings about using the due process clause to
apply Bill of Rights protections to the states but said
he would go along with the method here “since
straightforward application of settled doctrine suf-
fices to decide it.”
Five justices wrote opinions in the case, with
many pages examining the history of the Second and
14th Amendments. The justices in the majority said
that history supported both finding a fundamental
individual right and applying it to state and local
laws.
The dissenters drew different conclusions from
the historical evidence.
“The reasons that motivated the framers to
protect the ability of militiamen to keep muskets
available for military use when our nation was in its
infancy, or that motivated the Reconstruction Con-
gress to extend full citizenship to freedmen in the
wake of the Civil War, have only a limited bearing on
the question that confronts the homeowner in a
crime-infested metropolis today,” Justice Stevens
wrote in his final dissent before retiring.
He said the court should have proceeded more
cautiously in light of “the malleability and elusive-
ness of history” and because “firearms have a funda-
mentally ambivalent relationship to liberty.”
In a dissent joined by Justices Ginsburg and So-
tomayor, Justice Breyer said that history did not pro-
vide clear answers and that the empirical evidence
about the consequences of gun control laws are
mixed. But there was evidence, he said, that firearms
caused 60,000 deaths and injuries in the United
States each year and that Chicago’s handgun ban
had saved many hundreds of lives since it was en-
acted in 1982.
All of that, Justice Breyer wrote, counseled in
favor of deference to local elected officials in decid-
ing how to regulate guns.
Justice Alito responded that many constitu-
tional rights entail public safety costs, including ones
limiting the use of reliable evidence obtained
through police misconduct.
He also acknowledged that the majority deci-
sion limited the ability of states to address local is-
sues with tailored gun regulations. “But this is always
true,” he said, “when a Bill of Rights provision is in-
corporated.”
Emma Graves Fitzsimmons contributed reporting
from Chicago.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Casa de Narina, Bogota, Columbia, where Juan Manuel Santos will replace Alvaro Uribe as resident
president on August 7, 2010

288
 South America/Brazil/2010 Presidential Race
Dilma Rousseff pulls ahead in
Brazil’s pre-election polls
Workers Party candidate Dilma Rousseff aiming
to be Brazil’s first female president
F requently travelling with the popular outgo-
ing President Luca da Silva, Workers Party
candidate Dilma Rousseff had by mid-May pulled
ahead of Sao Paulo governor José Serra in Brazil’s
pre-election Vox Populi (Popular Voice) poll, 38%
to 35%. As her exposure increased Dilma gradu-
ally reduced the double digit lead he had over her
at the time President Lula got his Workers Party
to endorse her as his successor. Dilma, a former
revolutionary guerrilla fighter during the era of
military dictatorship, had been President’s Da
Siva’s chief of staff until her resignation on April
3rd in accordance with Brazil’s election law.
In April Serra’s lead had been reduced to
34% against 31%. The May poll showed that both
candidates gained ground over the second line
contenders. Green Party candidate Marina Silva
was third in the Vox Populi poll with 8%. The Vox
Populi survey polled 2,000 people between May
8 and 13 and has a margin of error of 2.2 percent-
age points.
By the end of June Dilma had increased her
lead on Serra to 40% against his 35%.
Serra who is stressing his experience as gov-
289
Report
ernor of Brazil’s wealthiest state as well as a for-
mer Sao Paulo city mayor, has vowed to continue
Lula’s economic policies, which have made Brazil
one of the world’s fastest growing economies.
Serra has also served as Minister of National
Planning, under Lula’s predecessor Fernando
Henrique Cardoso.
Brazil’s presidential elections are scheduled
for October 3rd. Lula who by June ending had a
75% approval rating has already served two suc-
cessive terms, which is the most allowed under
the country’s constitution. Alexandre Marinis, a
political consultant in São Paulo, notes that re-
cent Brazilian elections show a close correlation
between the outgoing president’s popularity and
his candidate’s success.
Da Silva’s success lies in combining social
welfare and poor friendly policies with unprece-
dented macro-economic growth. His Bolsa Fa-
milia program provides $111 monthly stipends to
12 million of Brazil’s poorest households pro-
vided they keep their children in school and carry
them for regular medical checkups. The number
of people living in poverty has fallen under Da
Silva, a self-educated former workers’ union
leader, from 49.5 million (28.5% of the popula-
tion) to 29 million (16% of the population), ac-
cording to calculations by Marcelo Neri, a social-
policy expert at the Fundaçao Getulio Vargas
(University). Using different criteria, Ricardo Paes
de Barros of the Institute for Applied Economic
Research, a government-linked body, finds that
the number of Brazilians too poor to feed them-
selves properly has fallen from 17% of the popu-
lation in 2003 to 8.8% in 2008.
Brazil’s harshly unequal distribution of in-
come is becoming a bit less so. The Gini coeffi-
cient, a standard statistical measure of inequal-
ity, has fallen steadily since 2001. Over the pe-
riod 2001 to 2008 the income of the poorest 10%
of the population grew at 8% a year, while that
of the richest tenth grew at only 1.5% a year,
according to Mr Paes de Barros.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 South America/Columbia/Politics
Columbia elects
rebel nemesis president
Report
S even police officers were killed by a road-
side bomb and three soldiers lost their lives
in a rebel ambush as voters went to the polls to
decide in a runoff who would be Columbia’s next
president. If the rebels had in mind intimidating
the electorate from voting for their nemesis for-
mer defense minister Juan Manuel Santos they
miscalculated the public’s disposition. Santos,
58, who as defense minister conducted the most
successful offensive thus far against Columbia’s
rural based rebels, won 69% of the vote.
Columbia’s infamous self-styled Revolution-
ary Armed Forces of Columbia, commonly
known as FARC, have their roots in a 1948 popu-
lar uprising against the assassination of Liberal
Party presidential candidate Jorge Eliécer
Gaitán, presumably by arch rival Conservatives.
The Liberal Party founded in 1948 and Conserva-
tive Party founded the following year remain
prominent players in Columbia’s political arena,
but their dominance has been eclipsed by outgo-
ing President Alvaro Uribe’s Social Party of Na-
tional Unity.
Originally a peasant guerrilla army, FARC’s
name and Marxist Leninist ideological orienta-
tion came under the influence of the Columbian
Communist Party which during 1964 sent one of
its activists, Jacobo Arenas (nom de guerre Louis
Morantes) to strategically organize and give po-
litical direction to the peasant rebels. Arenas,
who is said to have drawn inspiration from the
legendary Che Guevara, led the FARC insurgency
until his death in 1990. His son Francisco who
led the front column after his father’s death was
killed in combat during 2004. Alfonso Cano who
took over the ideological leadership of the FARC
after the senior Arenas’ death became its princi-
pal leader following the 2008 [natural causes]
death of FARC’s original guerrilla leader Manuel
Marulanda Vélez– nicknamed Tirofijo, Spanish
for sure-shot. Marulando died at the age of 77
with a $5 million reward placed on his head by
290
Juan Manuel Santos was born August 10, 1951
into the family that owned Columbia’s major
daily newspaper, El Tiempo. His father served as
editor of El Tiempo for 50 years. His grandfa-
ther’s brother who established El Tiempo was
president of Columbia from 1938 to 1942.
Juan attended expensive private schools
and is a graduate of Columbia’s prestigious Es-
cuela Naval de Cartagena (Catagena Navel
School). He holds a B. Sc. in Economics & Busi-
ness Administration from the University of Kan-
sas, in the U.S.A. and a master’s degree in Eco-
nomics, Economic Development and Public Ad-
ministration from the London School of Econom-
ics. He also earned a master’s in business and
journalism from Harvard University, U.S.A. and a
master’s in law and diplomacy from Tufts Uni-
versity’s Fletcher School of Law & Diplomacy,
also in Massachusetts, U.S.A. Apart from being
sub-director of El Tiempo, Juan was a columnist
for 14 other Columbian newspapers.
In government he previously served as Min-
ister of Foreign Trade, Chief Executive of the Co-
lombian Coffee Delegation to the International
Coffee Organization in London, Minister of Fi-
nance & Public Credit and Minister of National
Defense. In the international arena, Juan was in
1992 appointed President of the VII United Na-
tions Conference on Trade and Development for
a period of four years.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 South America/Columbia/Politics Columbia elects rebel nemesis president
the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration
and Department of Justice. In addition to kid-
napping ransoms, FARC derives its income
from taxing drug traffickers.
When Santos as defense minister first
announced the news of Marulando’s death he
noted that three bombing raids had targeted
the FARC leader, but a video released to TV
channel teleSUR by FARC confirmed Maru-
lando suffered heart failure.
Under outgoing President Alvaro Uribe,
whom new president Juan Manuel Santos
served as defense minister, two of the seven
members constituting FARC’s ruling secre-
tariat were killed and its most prized hostages
– former presidential candidate Ingrid Betan-
court and three American military contrac-
tors, along with 11 others– were rescued.
During Uribe’s presidency FARC’s ranks were
believed to have been significantly depleted
by defections. While Columbia’s government
says that FARC’s rebels now number between
6,000 and 8,000, political analyst and former
guerrilla León Valencia has estimated that
FARC's numbers have been reduced to around
11,000 from their 18,000 peak. The late FARC
commander Paul Reyes was in 2007 insisting
his movement still had a guerrilla force of
18,000. Reyes was in 2008 killed in a cross
border raid Santos as defense minister au-
thorized inside Ecuador where FARC had a
base and for which an Ecuador judge in May
2010 ordered the president elect’s arrest.
Santos dismissed the arrest order as ab-
surd and said not only would he visit Ecuador
if invited but would invite Venezuela’s Presi-
dent Hugo Chavez and his leftist allies to his
August 7th inauguration. “I want good rela-
tions with all our neighbors,” Santos said in
his June 20th victory speech. He also invited
defeated Green Party candidate, Bogota
Mayor Antanas Mockus to join the govern-
ment of national unity he plans assembling.
Irrespective of the FARC force strength
debate, up to 2008 the drug cartel linked in- Views of Urban Columbia (Top) aerial view of Columbia’s capital
Bogota (Middle) San Fernando Plaza, Medelin. (Bottom) Santiago
surgency movement controlled 40% of Colum-
de Cali Nearly 80% of Columbia’s population lives in cities. Bo-
bia’s 440,839 sq. miles (1,141,748 sq. km) ter- gota, more or less in the center of the country, with a population
ritory. Together, the drug cartels, insurgents of 7.5 million is Columbia’s largest city, followed by Medelin,
and militias assured that Columbia entered northwest of Bogota has a population of 2.25 million. Santiago de
the 21st century one of the world’s most vio- Cali is the third largest city with about 2.1 million inhabitants,
lent and unsafe countries. The militias over while the Pacific coast neighbor cities Barranquila and Carten-
the course of Alvaro Uribe 8 year presidency gena have 1.430 and 1.011 million inhabitants respectively

291 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 South America/Columbia/Politics Columbia elects rebel nemesis president
were demobilized and with support from the
United States a relentless military campaign was
undertaken by Uribe’s administration against
insurgents and drug cartels. Reported kidnap-
pings reduced from 3,700 in 2000 to 172 in
2009, while intentional homicides were down to
15,817 in 2009 from 28, 837 in 2002. Uribe’s
administration has been accused by some quar-
ters of the UN and some NGOs of trampling on
human rights to combat the outlaws, while
some government officials have been variously
accused of having links to militias, but consider-
ing the sheer volume of killings in Columbia
President Uribe’s determination to conquer the
insurgents and narcotics traffickers won popular
acclaim. That Santos was his defense minister
and a key player in the campaign against the
insurgents and drug lords made him the predict-
able victor in this year’s presidential contest.
Paying tribute to the police and soldiers killed on
election-day, Santos in his victory speech de-
clared, “Time is up for the FARC,” vowing that
there would be no dialogue with the insurgents
as long as they engaged in kidnapping and nar-
cotics trafficking.
When Columbia attained independence Alvaro Uribe, born 1952, a lawyer, son of a wealthy cattle
from Spain in 1819, the culture of social stratifi- rancher, former Senator and mayor Columbia’s second larg-
cation based on family heritage and estate own- est city, Medelin, is leaving office with a 70% plus approval
ership introduced by the Spanish colonialists in rating. His combination of social welfare expansion and a
the mid 17th century had deeply entrenched oli- commitment to making Columbia a social democracy, stress
garchy; and lack of adequate reforms gave rise on community development and public safety fueled his
to populist movements and also fertilized the popularity. Decentralization and local empowerment was
also one of his presidency’s popular ideological points that he
ground for Marxist-Leninist influences as mani-
began implementing. .
fest by FARC. Despite a per capita income of In 2006 an amendment to the constitution allowed him
$9,100, 2 out of 5 Columbians still subsist on less to run for a second term but in February 2010 Columbia’s
than $750 a year, despite 77% of the country’s Constitutional Court rejected the law passed by Congress that
47 million people now residing in urban areas would have allowed him to run for a third one. His impact on
and a 95% national literacy rate. Columbia has been monumental, making him the icon of the
Gradually change has come. Today 58% of broad based political movement he initiated, now known as
the population is racially classified as Mestizo the Uribistas, or party of the “U”.
(mixed indigenous Amerindian and Spanish),
while Amerindians are only 1%. Afro-Columbians leadership, saying, "If we have come so far it's
(descendants of African slaves) and Whites each because we have been standing on the shoul-
comprise 20%. Uribe who spent most of his po- ders of giants." Uribe, he said, is "an excep-
litical career with the Liberal Party ran for presi- tional person who transformed our country."
dent in 2000 as an independent but in his sec- He promised to help the poor by expanding
ond term formed Social Party of National Unity, Uribe’s social welfare scheme and said the
which drawing members from both the Liberal great obsession of his government would be
and Conservative Parties has become Columbia’s job creation. Santos is the first president
largest political party . Santos, a grand-nephew elected on the ticket of the Social Party of Na-
of for Liberal Party President Eduardo Santos tional Unity, commonly called the “Party of
(1938-1942), whose family long ran Columbia’s the U”.
leading newspaper, El Tiempo, praised Uribe’s
292 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
South America/Columbia/Politics Columbia elects rebel nemesis president
Afro-Columbians Africans were brought to Colum-
bia by the Spanish as slaves beginning from the
first decade of the 16th century to replace the rap-
idly declining indigenous population. The Africans
were used as slave labor in gold mines, sugar plan-
tations, cattle ranches and as domestic servants in
large haciendas. When slavery was abolished in
1951 Afro-Columbians mostly sought refuge in
jungles to escape persecution and evade the gov-
ernment’s policy of forcing African women to have
children for Spaniards so as to whiten the African
population. .
Today Afro-Columbians number about 9.5
million, 75% of whom reside in urban areas along
the Pacific and Caribbean coasts. The 1991 Colom-
bian Constitution gave them the right to collective
ownership of traditional Pacific coastal lands and
special cultural development protections.
Right from top t bottom: a fruit vender in
Cartegena; Afro-Columbian children; traditional
African dancers from Basilio de Palenque, now
considered by UNESCO one of the Masterpieces of
the Oral and Intangible Heritage of Humanity.

Columbia’s Social Party of National Unity

stands on a platform of developing a welfare
state with the family as base of society. It ap-
proves globalization, emphasizing education,
science and technology as opportunities that can
help Colombia succeed in a global market. The
party supports decentralization and autonomy
of Columbia’s regions and has started this proc-
ess with the Caribbean Region which is the first
to obtain more autonomy. The party also main-
tains that assuring public safety and security is a
fundamental duty of the state. Given the preva-
lence of terror The “Uribistas” have conceptual-
ized a policy of Democratic Security, which is
addressing the security needs of the different
social groups, such as workers unions, minorities
and regional politicians, all of which have been
targets of terrorism.
The "Communitarian State" is a principal
ideological pillar of the “Uribistas”, which is es-
sentially development of communities in order
to bring stability and progress to the state as a
whole. In this pursuit the private sector is ex-
pected to play a role of expansion and global
competitiveness to create productivity and in-
come growth. Economic growth under the Uribe
administration was steady from 2002 to 2008,
reaching 4% in 2003 and exceeding 8% in 2007.
Growth fell to 2.5% in 2008 and in the face of
the global recession dipped to minus 0.1% in
2009.
293 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Ritual (1977) by South African artist Lucky Sibiya (1942 - 1999). Colour woodcut
on paper. Part of the South African Constitutional Court collection.

294
Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

South Africa’s Art Heritage Gallery

Ndebele artwork, Middleburg, Mpumalanga

Photo by Chris Marais, Copyright South African Tourism

Gerard Sekoto, self portrait (1947)

Washerwoman, Bokaap (1933), Gregoire Boonzaier (1909-2005)

295 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

Three Musicians (1970) by George Pemba (1912 - 2001)

Ballet Dancers (1943) by Irma Stern (1894 - 1966)

296 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

Brenda Fassie (2006) by Angus Taylor (1970 -). Bronze. At left is Fassie's son Bongani Fassie.
Photo by Lucille Davie of the City of Johannesburg website.

Gossips by Marjorie Wallace

(1925-2005)

297 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

The Shebeen (2003) by Sam Nhlengethwa (1955 -). Hand-print

Harvesting the Crop by Maggie Laubser (1886-1973)

298 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

Images of South African History No 3 (1998) by Sipho Ndlovu (1968 -). Acrylic on canvas.
Part of the Constitutional Court collection.

San rock art, part of the art collection of the Constitutional Court
299 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

98 Figures, 98 Years (2004) by Carl Becker (1956 -). Oil on canvas.

Huddle by Joseph Ndlovu. Tapestry. Part of the Constitutional Court collection.

300 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

A Few South Africans: Virginia Mngoma (1984) by Sue Williamson (1941 -). Photo etching
and silkscreen on paper

A Smiling Man
by Gerard Bhengu (1910-1990).
Watercolour.

301 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

Profile Figure (1963) by Alexis Preller (1911 - 1975)

Downtown, Johannesburg (2004) by Pat Mautloa (1952 -). Acrylic on canvas

302 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Africa/South Africa/Art Gallery

Children on the March with a Donkey by Adriaan Boshoff (1935 -).

No to War (2004) by Willie Bester (1956 -). Assemblage.

303 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Bugatti 16C Galibier

304
 Automobiles/Daimler-Benz
Daimler Charged $185 Million Over Bribery Scandal
By Viknesh Vijayenthiran
Editor, Motor Authority
D aimler, the parent company of Mercedes-
Benz, has been charged $185 million by a
U.S. court because of several violations to brib-
ery laws spanning the past decade. Daimler was
essentially offering gifts, including luxury cars, to
foreign officials in an effort to secure business
deals.
The $185 million charge is the cost of set-
tling the case in the U.S., though Daimler’s Ger-
man and Russian divisions may end up pleading
guilty to the charges.
Prosecutors in the U.S. claim Daimler was
engaging "in a long-standing practice of paying
bribes" to secure deals in Russia, China, Turkey,
Egypt, Nigeria, Iraq and at least 16 other coun-
tries between 1998 and early 2008, according to
a criminal information filed in a U.S. court.
Some of the bribes include an armored car,
worth hundreds of thousands of dollars, given to
an official in Turkmenistan and another to a Li-
berian official to secure government contracts.
The bribery actions were discovered during
a probe by the SEC, which began in 2004 follow-
ing a whistle blow from an auditor who was fired
because he complained about secret bank ac-
counts used to pay the foreign officials.
305
Editorial Board article of April 21, 2010
adapted for Pan Africa & World Review
Implication of former Nigerian government offi-
cials in the Mercedes-Benz bribery scandal has
become an issue in Africa’s most populous coun-
try with the press citing it as an indication that
anti-graft campaigns have been no more than a
façade.
T he United States government identified
some top Nigerian government officials,
some officers of the Nigeria Police, the Ministry
of Industry and a former Nigerian diplomat in
Brazil, among others, as culprits in the deal,”
that involved a contract signed by a Presidency
official on behalf of the Nigerian government
with Anambra Motor Manufacturing Company
as beneficiary. AMMC is a German company
producing Mercedes-Benz motor vehicles in Ni-
geria, as well as importing. The U.S. Securities &
Exchange Commission discovered the criminal
acts during a probe following the alarm raised
by the auditor.
Daimler-Benz in connivance with some Ni-
gerian officials inflated invoices by 21% for vehi-
cles and parts supplied, making £1,427,242 in
improper commissions, which were transferred
from third party accounts to Nigerian officials to
secure the State House contract in 1998 while
the military was still ruling Nigeria. Also, in May
1999, apparently just before the military handed
over to civilian elected government on May 26,
Daimler wired 800,000 deutsche marks from its
account in Germany to a coded Swiss bank ac-
count of a Nigerian official. A bribe of
DM150,000 offered to the Police on June 17 and
another of DM50,000 paid as late as October 20,
2000 were also traced.
Mr. Rudi Kornmayer who worked for Daim-
ler in Nigeria committed suicide after being
questioned by American authorities.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Automobiles/New York Auto Show

New York International Auto Show

Jacob Javits Center
April 2 to 11, 2010

Hyundai Equus Sedan (above) Kia Ray concept (below)

T he annual New York International Auto
Show opened at Jacob Javits Center April
2nd with over 1,000 vehicles on display that
would attract an audience in the vicinity of one
million before closing on April 11th.
Technology innovations abounded at the
show. All the major car makers introduced new
green vehicles. The new Hyundai Sonata Hybrid
which debuted in New York is the first produc-
tion car to store its electricity in lithium polymer
batteries and can drive up to 62 mph on electric
power alone.
Hyundai’s 2011 Equus is the Korean car-
maker’s new rival to Lexus L460 and Mercedes- Equus is powered by Hyundai’s 4.6-liter Tau
Benz S 550, but selling in the mid $50,000 range. V8 engine, delivering 385 horsepower and 333 lb
"We've applied the lessons in engineering -ft of torque (378 horsepower and 324 lb-ft us-
excellence we've learned with Genesis [which ing regular fuel). The V8 is driven by a ZF 6-
until now was Hyundai’s flagship] to the Equus, speed automatic transmission with SHIFTRONIC
while adding a new level of customer experience manual control. The performance result is zero
that will further differentiate our take on luxury to 60 miles per hour in 6.4 seconds.
from the traditional premium brands," said John Equus features an electronically-controlled
Krafcik, president and CEO, Hyundai Motor air suspension and Hyundai's Vehicle Stability
America. Management system (VSM) that optimally man-
At 203” the Equus is a big car and in Korea a ages Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the elec-
long wheelbase 215” (5,460mm) version, which tronic parking brake, smart cruise control and
is as long as a Rolls Royce, is being offered. the seatbelt tensioning system.
306 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Korea

Hyundai Sonata Hybrid

307 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Korea
Hyundai

Hyundai Equus Sedan

308 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Korea
Kia

Kia Forte 5 Door

Kia Optima
2.4 litre, 200hp, fuel injection 4 cylinder engine, 6 speed manual or automatic transmission

309 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Japan

Nissan

2011 Infiniti Essence

Driven by electric motor and Turbo charged V6 with 592 horsepower combined, automated manual transmission and
22” wheels, priced at approximately $500,000

2011 Nissan Juke comes in 1.5 and 1.6 litre engine virgins with up to 187 hp
Prices range from £12,795 to £19,995
310 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Japan
Nissan

2010 Infiniti M57, 420hp, 5.6 litre V-8, 7 speed automatic transmission for about $80,000

311 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Japan
Acura

2011 Acura TSX Sport Wagon

312 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Acura

2011 Acura ZDX

3.7 litre, 300hp V6, 6 speed automatic transmission, from $44,000

Acura TL
3.5, 280hp or 3.7, 305hp V6; from $35,000

313 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Germany

BMW 335is
April 1, 2010 2:03 PM PDT
By: Wayne Cunningham
In coupe form, the 335is is a very good-looking car, showing a smooth silhouette. The 335is
gets a black grille and black door sills, contrasting well with the red model on display in New
York. Photo credit: Sarah Tew/CNET

314 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Germany

Mercedes-Benz

Designed for FIA GT3 racing, the SLS AMG GT3 was unveiled at the 2010 New York Auto Show.

Mercedes-Benz E350 4Matic Wagon

315 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show
Germany

Porsche

2010 Porsche Panamera

500hp V8 turbocharged V-8delivering 189mph top speed for $132,000

2011 Porsche Cayenne S Hybrid

316 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Germany
Volkswagen

2010 Volkswagen CC Gold Coast

3.6 litre, 280hp engine, 6 speed transmission; about $30,000

317 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

France/Germany

Bugatti 16C Galibier

Bugatti was founded in Molsheim, France, by Italian Ettore Bugatti as a manufacturer of high performance lux-
ury automobiles during the 1920s and early 1930s. Today the name is owned by Volkswagen AG who have re-
vived it as a builder of very limited production cars. Volkswagen AG now also owns Bentley and Lamborghini.

318 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show
France/Germany

Bugatti 16C Galibier

According to Bugatti CEO Franz-Josef Paefgen the objective behind the Galibier 16C is to be “the most ex-
clusive, elegant, and powerful four door automobile in the world." For now the prototype is being sent to
automobile shows around the world to assess prospective interests. If the manufacturer determines it can
sell between 300 to 400 Bugatti Galibier 16Cs priced at about $1.5 million it will go into production with a
800hp, V16 engine running on both ethanol and gasoline that can attain 240mph. The Galibier body is con-
structed of carbon fiber and aluminum.

319 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Germany/England

Rolls Royce

Rolls Royce Ghost

563hp turbo charged 6.6 litre V12, 155mph top speed for $245,000

320 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Rolls Royce

Rolls Royce Ghost is smaller and less expensive than the flagship Phantom line

Rolls Royce is now part of the BMW stable of luxury cars but still assembled in England

321 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Rolls Royce

Rolls Royce Phantom Drop-head Coupe

The Phantom convertible has a 6.8 litre, 453hp V12 engine and cost $448,000

322 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Sweden

2011 Volvo S60

2011 Saab 9-5

323 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Scion

2011 Scion iQ

Scion points out that there is very little room behind the driver's seat, but the front passenger
seat is set forward a bit to make the back seat on that side useful.

Photo credit: Sarah Tew/CNET

324 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

USA
Lincoln

Ford Rolls Out MKZ
Hybrid at NYC Auto
Show in Luxury Style
By Jeffrey Paulsen on April 3, 2010, 7:16 am Posted
in Business News
The phrase environmentally friendly luxury car does
not roll of the tongue. Few people would put the
two together in any way. Almost all luxury cars on
the market are seen as large cars with powerful
engines that do not get very good gas mileage.
Lexus, a division of Toyota (NYSE:TM) offers the
only other hybrid luxury car model that gets nearly
as good gas mileage. Ford (NYSE:F) decided to re-
lease a luxury car hybrid that got even better gas
mileage than the Lexus hybrid achieves. Ford un-
veiled the 2011 Lincoln MKZ at the 2010 New York
auto show.
ed the price of the new hybrid luxury model yet. If
a consumer purchases a Lincoln MKZ with all the
options available, Money Watch estimates it will
cost him about $40,000.
Production Problems
The MKZ may encounter some production prob-
lems before it becomes readily available on the
market. The competition for hybrid luxury cars is
not stiff, but Ford Motor Company has limited
capabilities to make additional drive trains. The
company must lower the production rate of the
Ford Fusion and the Mercury Milan to make the
hybrid MKZ models. Ford hopes that the higher
profits from the sale of the luxury car will offset
production costs.

The Price Of The Lincoln MKZ

Luxury cars may not be known for the fuel effi-
ciency, but they are also not known for their low
price tags. Brand mew luxury cars may cost half the
price of a new home in some of the cheaper areas
of the country. Ford Motor company has not releas-
325 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

The MKZ sits at the bottom of Lincoln's line-up, and shares its platform with the Ford Fusion and
Mercury Milan, though the latter is to be discontinued. In its last update, the MKZ acquired Lin-
coln's now standard winged grille. Stylistically, the MKZ Hybrid varies little from its convention-
ally engine counterpart.

326 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

USA

Buick

Buick Regal 2011

327 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

USA

Buick

2011Buick La Crosse 14
$26,495 - $33,265

328 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

USA

Cadillac

Cadillac DTS

329 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/

USA

Chevrolet Cruze Eco and RS

Alongside the Cruze Eco, Chevy launched the Cruze RS. A sport version of the Cruze, the RS package
only consists of a body kit and some interior accents.

Photo credit: Sarah Tew/CNET

330 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Automobiles/New York International Auto Show
India/England From Concept to Reality: Jaguar XK
The XK series of 'grand tourer' is a successor to Jag-
uar's original XK sports cars. Resurrected in 1996,
the XK replaced the aged XJS luxury coupe with a
car more fitting of the XK nameplate: a pretty
coupe or convertible with (optional) big engines
driving the rear wheels.
Ten years after its revival, Jaguar brought fans of
the XK8 and XKR a new, high-tech take on the XK,
proving that they can keep a good thing going.
Debut (Concept): 2005 North American Interna-
tional Auto Show (Jaguar Advanced Lightweight
Coupe)
Debut (Production): 2005 Frankfurt Motor Show
(2006 Model Year coupe) ; 2006 North American
International Auto Show (2006 MY convertible)
Lost in translation: Unfortunately, consumers lost
the stand-out center-mounted exhaust, LED mirror
-mounted turn signals, and the designer front air
intakes.
But we got to keep: The concept's lightweight alu-
minum construction, a "minimalist" interior, the
cutesy Baby-J shifter. The production model even
retained that out-of-its-price-range cool hatch and
trunk's floor rails.
331
Designer: Ian Callum and his team
Fun fact: Jag's latest XK is the first Jaguar to have
wheel-mounted shift paddles, which have become
an industry-wide option.
Did you know?: The new XK also debuted a world-
first: its Pedestrian Deployable Bonnet System
(PDBS). The system uses explosive charges to lift
the car's hood away from the engine block if the
vehicle senses someone's been hit. "The hood's
sheet metal cushions the impact better than the
solid engine block." I'll take their word for it.
Changing the game: For 2011, Jaguar improved its
street credibility when it comes to high-performing
GTs with its XKR-based Speed Pack and Black Pack.
The Speed Pack raises top speed to 174 mph (280
km/h), and the Black Pack provides blacked-out
trim and side tape. Decals on a Jag? Why not.
Where is it now? The XK has been updated with
nothing less than a third-generation, 385 horse-
power direct-injection 5.0 liter AJ-V8 under the
hood, while the range-topping XKR received a su-
percharged version of the same engine with 510
ponies. - By Phil Alex
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

German/English Bentley Continental Super Sports Coupe runs 200mph on 600hp

Germany’s 2011 BMW Z4

Japan’s Nissan GT-R did better than one would imagine in a race against the Bugatti Veyron. It took
an early lead but eventually the Bugatti caught and left it behind

332 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Automobiles/New York International Auto Show

Italy’s $1.2 million Lamborghini Reventón runs 224mph driven by a 641hp V-12 and 6 speed transmission

England’s Aston Martin V8 Vantage Coupe

USA’s Chevrolet Corvette priced from $48,000 up to $106,000 for the 505hp, 205mph Z06 version

333 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Automobiles/New York International Auto Show
Porsche and Lincoln rated most dependable brands,
Cadillac DTS is model with least problems
J.D. Power & Associates' latest vehicle depend-
ability study says most cars are getting better. In
fact, J.D. Power tests showed that 25 of 36
brands (69%) improved their long-term durabil-
ity. Reported problems decreased from an in-
dustry average of 167 per 100 vehicles last year
to the current 155 (+7% in reliability).
The study, which measures problems ex-
perienced by original owners of three-year-old
(2007 model year) vehicles, said that Porsche
was the highest-ranking brand with 110 prob-
lems per 100 vehicles followed by Lincoln (114
problems) and Buick (115 problems).
The Cadillac DTS is the model with the few-
est problems in the industry, with just 76 issues
per 100 vehicles. This marks the first time in
more than a decade that a model from an
American automaker has achieved the lowest
PP100 score in the Vehicle Dependability Study.
334
Both Lincoln and Porsche have
been on the world’s 7 best made
cars list since the early 1960s.
For many years, before the as-
cendancy of the Japanese
brands, Lincoln was the only
American car in a class domi-
nated by European marques.
Interestingly, seven of the 10 models with
the lowest incidence of problems in the industry
are from Ford and General Motors, including
the 2007 model-year Buick Lacrosse, Buick Lu-
cerne, Cadillac DTS, Ford Five Hundred, Lincoln
MKZ, Mercury Milan, and Mercury Montego.
The biggest losers in terms of increases in
problems per 100 vehicles are: Land Rover
(+27), Audi (+25), Mitsubishi (+20).
The brands with the most problems per
100 vehicles in the industry are: Volkswagen
(225), Suzuki (253) and Land Rover (255).
Significantly, with the exception of Por-
sche, the most dependable brands are in the
middle price ranges globally; though Lincoln and
Cadillac, followed by Buick are the most expen-
sive cars produced by American companies.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
The University of Ghana, Legon, founded in 1948, is one of West Africa’s most prestigious institutions
of higher education. The clock tower in the above picture sits atop the university’s famous Common-
wealth Hall, located at the rear end of the campus on the outskirts of Accra

335
 Education/African Leadership Academy

African Leadership Academy

Motivating African Renaissance

A frican Leadership Academy identifies its

mission as transformation of Africa by de-
veloping and supporting future generations of
African leaders. Located in Johannesburg, South
Africa, the ambitious secondary school admitted
its first students between the ages of 15 and 18
in September 2008. In June 2010 ALA proudly
celebrated its first graduating class, 93 students,
all of whom had been admitted in either their
senior or junior years.
The institution’s recruitment policy is to
select outstanding, creative and innovative sec-
ondary students and award them scholarships to
complete their pre-university studies at the ALA
Johannesburg campus which is equipped with
boarding facilities. The campus is also equipped
with state of the art secondary school facilities
to offer students the best education opportunity
they could possibly get. Focused specifically on
African renaissance and development, particu-
larly in business, the creative students brought
to ALA from all over Africa are oriented not only
to optimally develop their already demonstrated
talent for innovation and creativity but to be
focused on playing a leadership role in Africa’s
private sector. This is not to say ALA discourages
students from interest in politics; quite to the
contrary, it encourages them to be focused on
being successful in the world of business as a
career foundation so that should one decide to
venture into politics he or she would already
have a background of success in the private sec-
tor, which through historical experience has be-
come commonly accepted as the principal en-
gine of the world economy’s growth and devel-
opment.
African Leadership Academy is supported
by the United States based African Leadership
Foundation. During June the Founders’ Wall,
wrapped around ALA’s front entrance, was un-
veiled, with the names of those who contributed
to its realization engraved in polished red bricks.
The inscription on the plaque identifying
the wall’s significance lauds the nearly 1,000
people who were through their financial contri-
butions and support instrumental in the vision of
African Leadership Academy campus, Johannesburg, South Africa
this unique institution materializing. It reads:
African Leadership Academy Founders' Wall
The names engraved upon the bricks of this wall
are those of the visionary people who made Afri-
can Leadership Academy's existence possible.
Taking their chance on a dream, these kind-
hearted souls have invested time, money and
energy in Africa's future. In doing so they have
modeled the very leadership that is taught at
ALA and their names are preserved here for fu-
ture generations to acknowledge.
The academic performances of ALA’s
maiden graduates have led to an impressive
number of entries into leading American univer-
sities. In March Michael Kayemba of Uganda
became the first African to win the prestigious
Morehead-Cain Scholarship at the University of
North Carolina and in April the first ALA student
was admitted to the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology. By the end of June many ALA gradu-
ates had been admitted at Ivy League universi-
ties in Eastern United States and in prestigious
West Coast schools, notably Stanford University
where former U.S. Secretary of State Condo-
leezza Rice had been provost. ALA graduates will
also be matriculating at the University of London
and other distinguished British universities.
336 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Education/African Leadership Academy

The setting at African Leadership Academy

ALA Classroom Campus Auditorium

Computer Lab Campus Dining Hall

Dormitory Rooms Large Seminar/Board Room

Campus Sports Field Walkway

337 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Education/University of Ghana

University of Ghana, Legon

T he University of Ghana is a charming grass
carpeted campus with white buildings
roofed in red, shaded by tall, long leafy branch
trees. Founded in 1948, until 1961 it was a
branch of the University of London, which super-
vised its degree programs. Located a dozen kilo-
meters northeast of Ghana’s capital Accra, the
University of Ghana at Legon is removed from
the distractions of the big city but not very iso-
lated from it. The university’s teaching hospital
at Korle-Bu is in a main population center and is
perhaps Ghana’s most important medical facil-
ity.
The University of Ghana’s College of Health
Sciences includes the Medical School, Dental
School, School of Allied Health Services, School
of Nursing and School of Pharmacy.
There are also a College of Agriculture &
Consumer Sciences and the University of Ghana
Business School.
Other faculties are Social Studies, Science,
Engineering Sciences and Law.
There are three institutes; namely, the In-
stitute of Statistical, Social & Economic Re-
search, Institute of Adult Education and the In-
stitute of African Studies.
The university’s 21 Research and Learning
Centres include the Centre for Social Policy
Analysis, Centre for Remote Sensing and Geo-
graphic Information Systems, Legon Centre for
International Affairs, International Centre for
African Music & Dance, Centre for Migration,
the Centre for Tropical Clinical Pharmacology &
Therapeutics and Centre for Biotechnology Re-
search.
Academic qualifications offered range from
2-year diplomas, certificates and Associate’s De-
grees to 4 year degrees and post-graduate de-
grees at master and doctorate levels. The Uni-
versity of Ghana is a member of the Association
of Commonwealth Universities and Association
of African Universities.
Current student enrollment is about
42,000. Tuitions vary according to area of study,
course level and campus location, but generally
annual undergraduate costs, exclusive of dormi-
tory and dining hall fees, can rise to $1,000 per
annum for local students or be nominal. Interna-
338
Chancellor of the University of Ghana Dr. Kofi Annan
tional students pay in the range of $1,000 and
$2,500.
The university’s courses are structured on
the semester system. Acceptance for admission
is based on secondary school scores and an en-
trance examination. On the average, about 40%
of the applicants gain admission.
The Institute of African Studies at Legon, an
interdisciplinary institute in the humanities and
social sciences, was initiated by Ghana’s first
post-colonial leader, Kwame Nkrumah in 1962.
It rose to international prominence largely
through the personal achievements distinction
of Dr. J. H. Kwabena Nketia, a University of
Ghana music don since 1952 who eventually
became music department director of the Insti-
tute of African Studies. Nketia, born in 1921,
now a University of Ghana professor emeritus,
drew attention to the University of Ghana’s In-
stitute of African Studies with his prolific writ-
ing, music compositions and contributions to
exposing and winning respect for African music
internationally; particularly in North America
and Europe. He was also a great motivating per-
sonality for the drama, dance and music stu-
dents at IAS. Nketia, now 89, is currently direc-
tor of the University of Ghana’s International
Center for African Music and Dance.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Education/University of Ghana

University of Ghana, Legon Campus

339 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Education/University of Ghana

University of Ghana, Legon Campus

340 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Education/University of Ghana

University of Ghana, Legon Campus

341 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Education/University of Ghana

University of Ghana, Legon Campus

342 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Education/University of Ghana

University of Ghana, Legon Campus

343 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Education/University of Ghana

University of Ghana, Legon Campus

344 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Education/University of Ghana

University of Ghana, Legon Campus

345 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Columbian singer, composer, instrumentalist and dancer, Shakira performing at the
opening ceremony of World Cup 2010 in Johannesburg. She composed the official
song of the tournament, Waka Waka

346
 Entertainment/World Cup 2010

World Cup 2010 Music Masters

(Photo above) South African trumpeter-vocalist

Hugh Masekela (l.) and Nigerian Afro-Beat singer and
saxophonist Femi Kuti performed with a legend of
drummers and dancers during the opening ceremony
of the 2010 FIFA World Cup on June 11, at Orlando
Stadium in Soweto, suburban Johannesburg
Masekela drew applause after a moment of
quiet disbelief when he dedicated a song to African
migrant workers in South Africa and urged his coun-
trymen not to mistreat them because they suffered to
find their way to South Africa and they are miserable
in the mines where they do grueling work for little
money. The song’s title, Stimela, is colloquial for the
steam engine trains migrants rode to South down-
hearted at leaving their loved ones behind.
Members of the audience at the Soweto concert Angelique Kidjo (above) performed the African classic song
waved their various national flags in the air as Somali "Malaika" Made famous by Miriam Makeba and Harry Bela-
hip-hop artist K’Naan sang his World Cup anthem, fonte and the 1970 Curtis Mayfield classic 'Move On Up' with
Wavin Flag. Visiting artists Amadou & Mariam, Vusi John Legend, all from her new album "Oyo." The album is about
Mahlasela, and Vieux Farka Touré also performed. her life growing up in Benin Republic.
South Africa’s Nobel Peace Prize laureate Angli- Broadway’s Fela Dancers joined Angelique on stage at
can Archbishop Desmond Tutu got into the act at Or- Soweto’s Orlando Stadium.
lando Stadium introducing a video featuring Nelson While in South Africa for the World Cup the veteran inter-
Mandela. He ignited the audience proclaiming, “We national star and UNICEF Goodwill Ambassador from Benin did
are all Africans!” not relent on her HIV/AIDS awareness campaign, as usual high-
Will.I.Am, Fergie, K'Naan, Shakira and others lighting the needs of vulnerable children. Like other visiting stars
joined African artists like Angelique Kidjo and Tinari- she spent time interacting with South Africans in their communi-
wen on stage to close the concert with Sly and the ties.
Family Stone’s Everyday People.
347 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Entertainment/World Cup 2010 World Cup 2010 Music Masters

Alicia Keys and Black Eye Peas

At World Cup 2010

Alicia Keys with Black Eye Peas in South Africa for World Cup 2010

F ollowing an address by FIFA president Sepp Blat-

ter and South African president Jacob Zuma, the
Black Eyed Peas rocked the stage. The Peas got the
party started with their feel-good hit "Where Is the
Love?" Fergie and Will.I.Am (who was decked out in
a snappy sequined jacket with rope detail reminis-
cent of Michael Jackson) then led the thousands of
concertgoers through "Pump It."
Alicia Keys didn't let her recently announced
pregnancy stop her from rocking the stage in sky-
high heels, as the singer came out to an amped-up
version of "You Don't Know My Name." She then
transitioned into "Try Sleeping With a Broken Heart"
before retreating to her grand piano for an upbeat,
syncopated rendition of "Fallin'." The singer put her
hometown on the world stage with her spare version
of the mammoth New York City anthem "Empire
State of Mind."
However, Keys switched it up for the occasion
at the end of the song, belting, "When you're in Af-
rica ...," and swapping out "New York" for "World
Cup." Then, backed by South African folk-punk group
Blk Jks, Keys launched into a heartfelt cover of "Too
Late for Mama" by the late South African pop star
Brenda Fassie.
Mawuse Ziegbe Alicia Keys on stage in Joburg
348 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Entertainment/World Cup 2010 World Cup 2010 Music Masters

Shakira
VIP Celebrity World Cup 2010
M ultiple award winning,
singer, dancer and in-
strumentalist Shakira had the
honor of being the official mu-
sic showgirl at the FIFA 2010
World Cup in South Africa. She
composed and thrilled World
Cup audiences with the tour-
naments official song Waka
Waka (It’s Time for Africa),
staring in opening ceremony
and kick-off concerts.
Teaming with African per-
formers the 33 year old star
from Columbia was simply fan-
tastic in her extravaganza role,
not only on stage but in the
humanist part with children in
the communities that is just as
big a part of her as music.
Commenting on what the
beautiful game did for her,
Shakira said, "I really never in
my life imagined that I would
go straight to the sports sec-
tion in the newspaper. I've be-
come a football fanatic."
She added: "This has been
one of the happiest months of
my life, and one of the most
exciting ones."
A sexy dancer since her
youth when she mastered Mid-
dle Eastern belly dancing (at
the age of 4), Shakira started
her career in Columbia singing
in Spanish and by 1995 be-
came a popular star through-
out Latin America. Her first
English hit Album, Laundry Ser-
vice, released in 2001, sold
more than 13 million copies.

349 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Entertainment/World Cup 2010 World Cup 2010 Music Masters

(Top left) Alicia Keys at Orlando Stadium in the Joburg suburb Soweto, (top right) Angelique Kidjo cool off stage (middle
left) Shikira and Alicia (middle center) Skakira with Soweto school children (middle right) Shakira and Angelique (bottom)
Shakira performing Waka Waka with African artists at Orlando Stadium kickoff concert

350 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Entertainment/World Cup 2010 World Cup 2010 Music Masters

Shakira performing and promoting education in South Africa

Top four photos are from the opening and kickoff ceremony concerts; the two bottoms ones are Sharika with Soweto
school children

351 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Entertainment/Obituary
Queen Lena... Goodnight
Lena Horne (June 30, 1917—May 9, 2010) in the early 1940s
Adapted in some parts from Associated Press Writer VERENA
DOBNIK’s May 9, 2010 article “Legendary singer Lena Horne dies”
W henever the late African American co-
median Redd Foxx (1922-1991) cited his
ultimate living doll he would proclaim, “The
Horne.” For many other African Americans dur-
ing the 1940s, ‘50s and into the early ‘60s, Lena
Horne was a Queen of Diamonds, riding or her
talent and beauty in America’s celebrity strato-
sphere. Performing into the 1980s, her 1981
one woman Broadway show, “Lena Horne: the
Lady and her Music” ran for 300 weeks and won
a Tony Award. Her longevity and sassiness, to-
gether with her beauty, charm and talent had
by then made her a legend .
A great-granddaughter of African slaves,
Lena was born June 30, 1917 in Brooklyn, New
York, into what was then referred to as a “black
bourgeoisie” family. Her father was an illegal
gambling kingpin who left the family behind in
352
Brooklyn when Lena was three and moved to
the upper middle class Hill District in Pittsburg,
Pennsylvania. Her mother Edna Scottron,
daughter of inventor Samuel R. Scottron, was
an extensively travelled actress with a black
theater troupe. Lena travelled with her mother
for several years but she was mainly raised by
her grandparents Cora Calhoun and Edwin
Horne. She also lived for a period (1927-1929)
with her paternal uncle Frank S. Horne, who
was dean of students at Fort Valley Junior In-
dustrial Institute in Fort Valley, Georgia.
Lena’s daughter, Gail Lumet Buckley,
wrote in her 1986 book "The Hornes: An Ameri-
can Family" that among their relatives was an
advisor to President Franklin Delano Roosevelt.
Nonetheless, with the Great Depression falling
on the world when Lena was just 12 years old
like most families of that era the Hornes en-
dured a share of the hard times. Lena had to
drop out of school at 16 to work and support
her ailing mother.
She joined the chorus girls at Harlem’s
Cotton Club in 1933, then no doubt the world’s
most famous venue for high class black enter-
tainment. All the entertainers were black, but
the clientele mainly white. Lena left the club in
1935 to tour with Noble Sissle's orchestra. She
disliked being on the road and left the band to
work at New York’s Café Society. She was then
using her full name, Helena Horne, but upon
joining Charlie’s Barnet’s otherwise all white
orchestra in 1940 she had it shortened to the
enduring “Lena”. She was one of the first black
women to sing with a white band, which
brought her on stage at New York’s most pres-
tigious night club, the Copacabana. Producer
John Hammond discovered Lena and arranged
a solo performance for her at New York City’s
premiere concert venue, Carnegie Hall.
Lena played in her first film in 1938, a low
budget musical entitled The Duke is Tops, later
released as The Bronze Venus with her name
above the title. In 1941 she appeared in a two-
reel short subject, Boogie Woogie Dream, fea-
turing pianists Pete Johnson and Albert Am-
mons. Horne's songs from Boogie Woogie
Dream were later released individually.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Entertainment/Obituary
In 1942 Lena moved to Los Angeles, Cali-
fornia, where while headlining a show at the
Little Troc nightclub with the Katherine Dunham
dancers in 1942 Hollywood talent scouts began
approaching her. She chose Metro Goldwyn
Mayer (MGM), becoming the first black per-
former to sign a long term contract with a Holly-
wood studio. At MGM, she debuted in Panama
Hattie before starring in the all-black Cabin in
the Sky, in 1943, but in most of her other mov-
ies she appeared only in musical numbers that
could be cut in the racially prejudiced South
without affecting the story. These included "I
Dood It," a Red Skelton comedy, "Thousands
Cheer" and "Swing Fever," all in 1943;
"Broadway Rhythm" in 1944. It was then illegal
in many American states for films to be shown
with African American performers.
In 1946 she performed in MGM’s famed
"Ziegfeld Follies", in which she sang the song
Love by composers Hugh Martin and Ralph
Blane– Love can be a summer shower, Love can
be the sun, Love can be two hearts that flower
as one. The film based on the famed Broadway
production of the same name was loaded with
MGM stars including Fred Astaire, Lucille Ball,
Lucille Bremer, Judy Garland, Kathryn Grayson,
Gene Kelly, James Melton, Victor Moore, Wil-
liam Powell, Red Skelton, and Esther Williams.
In 1945 and ‘46 she sang with the orches-
tra of popular African American male vocalist
Billy Eckstein and also played a large speaking
role along with her singling in a popular radio
drama series, Suspense, about a fictional night-
club singer.
20th Century Fox had borrowed Lena from
MGM in 1943 to play the role of Salina Rogers
in the all-black movie musical "Stormy
Weather." In those years when radio was king
her warm voice singing, “Don't know why,
there's no sun up in the sky...Stormy weather,
since my man and I ain't together... Keeps rain-
ing all the time,” became a hit and despite Ethel
Waters having introduced the song in 1933 at
the Cotton Club and other great singers like Bil-
lie Holiday and Ella Fitzgerald also making hits
out it, Lena’s Stormy Weather remained her
signature piece. Lena recorded Stormy Weather
at least 5 times throughout her career; first in
1941, and in 2000 her version was inducted into
the Grammy Hall of Fame.
By the 1950s Lena’s disenchantment with
Hollywood had grown to the point where she
353
Queen Lena... Goodnight
Lena Horne in 1947 as featured in the book, The 50
Most Unforgettable Actresses of the Studio Era
increasingly concentrated on her nightclub
singing career. Meet Me in Las Vegas and Duch-
ess of Idaho were the only two films she per-
formed in during the 1950s. Back in New York,
her first featured appearance on Broadway
that year in “Jamaica” won the 1958 New York
City Drama Critics Award. Critic Richard Watts
Jr. reviewing Lena’s staring role in Jamaica,
called her "one of the incomparable perform-
ers of our time." Songwriter Buddy de Sylva
dubbed her "the best female singer of songs."
Lena had In 1957 recorded her long time
best selling album Lena Horne at the Waldorf
Astoria. Other popular albums Lena recorded
from the 1950s through the ‘70s included Give
the Lady What She Wants (1958), Porgy and
Bess with Harry Belafonte (1959), Lena on the
Blue Side (1962) Lena…,Lovely and Alive (1963)
and It’s Love, Lena: A New Album (1976).
She returned to Hollywood in the late
1960s, playing Claire Quintana in Death of a
Gunfighter (1969) and in 1978 she played the
good witch Glinda in the Whiz.
Despite her success on Broadway and in
Hollywood, Lena was perpetually humiliated in
public by racism, but she was never shy to
speak out against it. "I was always battling the
system to try to get to be with my people. Fi-
nally, I wouldn't work for places that kept us
out ... it was a damn fight everywhere I was,
every place I worked, in New York, in Holly-
wood, all over the world," she said in Brian
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Entertainment/Obituary
Lanker's book I Dream a World: Portraits of
Black Women Who Changed America.
John Kobal wrote in his 1973 book Gotta
Sing, Gotta Dance: A Pictorial History of Film
Musicals, that she refused to go along with the
studio's efforts to portray her as an exotic Latin
American. "I don't have to be an imitation of a
white woman that Hollywood sort of hoped I'd
become," Horne once said. "I'm me, and I'm like
nobody else." When she started speaking out
against racism many blacks who were assuming
she used her light complexion to pass for white
embraced her as a heroine. Eventually her fans
would come to know Lena had been raised in a
family that stood up for racial equality. When
she was only 4 years old, her grandmother, a
prominent member of both the Urban League
and National Association for the Advancement
of Colored People (NAACP) enrolled her in the
latter. She avoided activism until 1945 when
she was in Germany entertaining at an army
base and saw German prisoners of war sitting
up front while African American soldiers were
consigned to the back rows. After that she be-
came actively involved in various social and po-
litical organizations. Her friendship with the leg-
endary African American opera actor and vocal-
ist Paul Robeson got her name onto the foreign
enemy agents list during the Communist hunt-
ing McCarty era following the Second World
War. Robeson, like quite a number of other
prominent African American intellectuals at the
time was an unapologetic Communist sup-
porter. That was during the 1950s and being
associated with the Communist scare got Lena
Horne blacklisted in Hollywood.
During the 1960s Lena was one of the most
visible celebrities in the civil rights movement.
She was with Rev. Dr. Martin Luther King at his
1963 250,000 person march on Washington to
demand an end to racial discrimination in the
United States of America.
Ironically, in 1947 while in Paris she mar-
ried conductor, arranger, MGM music director
Lennie Hayton, following her first overseas en-
gagements in France and England. In her 2009
biography "Stormy Weather," author James
Gavin recounts that when Horne was asked by a
lover why she'd married a white man, she re-
plied: "To get even with him." In a 1980 Ebony
magazine interview she admitted having mar-
ried Hayton, a Jewish American, to advance her
career and cross the “color line” in show busi-
Queen Lena... Goodnight
Lena (center) With Ginny Mancini (left), wife of the late legendary
music composer Henry Mancini, and singer/actress Liza Minnelli
(right), in 1997
ness but had learned to love him in a way. Her
first marriage to Louis J. Jones, ended in di-
vorce after producing two children, son Edwin
Jones and daughter Gail who became a best
selling author. The death of her husband, from
who she had been separated since the early
1960s, son and father in the period 1971-’72
left her terribly depressed and reclusive. Close
friend comedian Alan King eventually con-
vinced her to come out of the closet and she
started performing again. "I looked out and
saw a family of brothers and sisters," she said.
"It was a long time, but when it came I truly
began to live." Lena was then in her early 50s.
Critic, John Simon, wrote that she was
"ageless. ... tempered like steel, baked like clay,
annealed like glass; life has chiseled, burnished,
refined her." The same could also be said of the
America that she lived through 92 years;
though even with an African American presi-
dent the Ku Klux Klan syndrome, while sophisti-
cated to the point of feigning refinement, is still
very much alive.
Like many African Americans of her time,
she grew out of the bitterness as the humiliat-
ing segregation laws and practices became his-
tory but she acknowledged that living through
it was for her a defining experience. "I wouldn't
trade my life for anything," she said, "because
being black made me understand."
354 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Oil polluted waves in the Gulf of Mexico resulting from the BP oil rig explosion

355
 Environment/Volcanoes
Iceland Volcano Stops Europe’s Air Traffic
Report
I celand's glacier-covered Ey-
jafjallajokull volcano, dor-
mant since 1821, erupted in the
nocturnal hours of Wednesday,
April 14, causing glacier melting
that necessitated residents in
the surrounding farm communi-
ties to abandon theirs abodes to
escape floodwaters. Iceland Civil
Defence Authority had started
calling residents of the areas to be affected as
early as 2am. The Eyjafjallajokull volcano came in
a sequence of volcanic events that began on
March 20, 2010, though the first phase, prior to
April 14, was an effusive eruption that did little
damage.
Hanna Lara Andrews, a half-English, half-
Icelandic farmer residing at the foot of the
mountain was one of those alerted around 2am
that they had to vacate the area. Warned that
she had only 20 minutes to get away, Hanna later
on while in a safe house a few kilometers away
from her farm told Reuters, "I had a bag ready
because of the recent earthquakes in the area
and grabbed a few things we might need for a
couple of days and we went as quickly as possi-
ble," adding, "It is a huge shock to us all and it
doesn't seem real at all." About 700 people were
evacuated from the area.
The red hot explosive eruptions burst
through the 200 meter think glacier covering the
mountain, sending flood water pouring off in
torrents, washing away roads and drenching
homes. The explosive eruption produced a high
evaporation cloud about 6 kilometers above
ground. An easterly wind carried the ash cloud
away from Iceland’s capital Reykjavik, turning
day into night as it moved towards the British
Isles and Europe, attaining elevation of 9km. In
Iceland east of Reykjavik residents of Kirk-
jubaerklaustur, about 100 kilometers east of the
eruption, saw ash falling thick and dark, making
it difficult to see more than a few meters ahead.
356
Volcanic lava erupts from Iceland’s Eyjafjallajokull volcano,
bursting through the 200 meter thick glacier covering the
mountain
While the ash cloud decreased visibility to
the extent that road traffic halted in Iceland, air
traffic throughout Europe succumbed to ash
clouds, based on experience that volcanic ash
could disrupt the operation of jet plane turbines
and cause crashes. In 1982, British Airways Flight
9 flew through volcanic ash of Mount Galung-
gung, Java, Indonesia, causing all 4 engines to
shut down. Fortunately, the pilot was able to re-
start all but one of the engines and land safely.
Subsequently, there was an addition to the op-
erations manuals, describing how to deal with
volcanic ash. Prior to the volcanic events of April
2010, aircraft engine manufacturers had not de-
fined specific particle levels above which engines
were considered to be at risk. The general ap-
proach taken by airspace regulators was that if
the ash concentration rose above zero the air-
space was considered unsafe and consequently
closed.
Within 24 hours after the eruption began
volcanic activity was still intensifying, according
to Icelandic volcanologists. The plume had risen
11 kilometers into the sky and had blown across
the Norwegian Sea to Scandinavia, and south
east across the Shetland Isles, as far as the north
coast of Scotland. The Met Office in Exeter pro-
duced diagrams showing the plume doubling
again and again in size as it stretched to cover an
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Volcanoes Iceland Volcano Stops Europe’s Air Traffic
area close to the size of Western Europe. Strong Dust particles
in the air was the sulphurous smell of rotten eggs. suspended in
Away from Iceland people were at first con- the atmosphere
fused about the source of the odor. Jane Mat- scatter light
from the set-
thews, living in Scotland’s Shetland Archipelago,
ting sun, gener-
recalled, "It smelt strongly like rotten eggs, but I ating 'volcanic
didn't put two and two together realizing it was lavenders' like
coming from Iceland; initially, I thought maybe it's this one over
something to do with my young daughter, or the the flight path
animals in the field." Air traffic controllers in Aber- of Leeds-Bradford Airport in England during the aviation shut-
deen, Scotland, had seen the plume coming. By down
noon April 14 they had predicted that local air-
(VAAC). On the basis of the VAA the authorities
space could be closed for a few hours, but by eve-
made decisions about when and where airspace
ning it was clear the situation was more serious
should be closed in respect of safety issues. Their
than that.
decisions resulted in the cancellations of flights
Aberdeen airport's duty manager was alerted
at airports across the world, not only in those
by Nats, the air navigation service, that its local
countries where airspace was restricted. On 16
north-east airspace would be closed. At 1am April
April 2010, 16,000 of Europe's usual 28,000 daily
15, the closure order was confirmed, affecting
scheduled passenger flights were cancelled and
more than 100 commercial flights during the day.
on 17 April, 16,000 of the usual 22,000 flights
By 3am, all Scotland became a no- fly zone. Before
were cancelled. By 21 April 95,000 flights had
daybreak Scotland’s civil emergency resilience
been cancelled.
unit was activated.
The cold water from the melting ice had
By 9.30am air traffic control charts showed
quickly chilled the lava, causing it to fragment
that planes were only taking off and landing
into very small particles of glass (silica) and ash
across southern England, while in the northern
that were carried into the eruption plume. Owing
part of the country skies were empty. At 11am
to the extremely fine nature of the ash particles
Gatwick's busy tarmac apron was at a standstill as
and the large volume of steam produced from
airport managers prepared to shutdown British
the glacial melt-water, an ash plume hazardous
airspace at noon. Before the day was over air
to aircraft rapidly ascended high into the upper
travel was shutdown throughout Europe and did
atmosphere. The ash then floated over Europe
not resume again until April 23, causing millions of
compelling closure of airspace. The International
passengers to be stranded and making it the larg-
Air Transport Association (IATA) estimated that
est air traffic shutdown since World War II. All
the airline industry worldwide lost €148 million
flights to Europe from other parts of the world
($200 million, £130 million) a day during the dis-
were accordingly cancelled. Airspace was closed
ruption.
intermittently in different parts of Europe during
Ultimately the airplane engine manufactur-
the following weeks. As late as May 4th and 5th ash
ers had to make an authoritative technical con-
clouding prompted closure of airspace in Ireland,
tribution by answering the question of just how
Northern Ireland and Scotland. Spain, Portugal,
much atmospheric ash a jet engine could ingest
Austria, northern Italy and southern Germany
without damage. On 21 April, the Civil Aviation
closed airspace on May 9; and on May 16 Irish and
Authority in conjunction with engine manufac-
UK airspace closed for the day.
turers issued new guidelines which allowed air-
Airlines complained about the loss of busi-
craft to fly when there are levels of volcanic ash
ness and faulted European Union leaders for their
between 200 and 2,000 micrograms of ash per
decision to halt air traffic, as if unmindful of the
cubic meter. These levels were declared by gov-
fact that only one airliner crash under the circum-
ernments, aircraft manufacturers and airlines not
stances would certainly provoke world-wide
to have safety implications if appropriate mainte-
blame of both the authorities and airlines. Provid-
nance and ash inspection procedures were fol-
ing information about the ash plume to the rele-
lowed. Authorities in volcano prone Iceland had
vant civil aviation authorities in the form of Vol-
for several years been urging airlines to deter-
canic Ash Advisories (VAA) was the responsibility
mine the density of ash safe for jet engines.
of the London Volcanic Ash Advisory Centre
357 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Volcanoes
Global Volcanism Program
Global Volcanic Activity 2010
June 2010: June 2... Cleveland volcano in the Aleu-
tian Islands in southwest Alaska is showing signs of
unrest. The Alaska Volcano Observatory says there
was a small ash emission from Cleveland Volcano
on Sunday evening and satellite images received
Monday, May 31, indicated flows coming from the
volcano's upper flanks. The volcano 939 miles from
Anchorage is on an uninhabited island. Short-lived
explosions with ash clouds or plumes exceeding
20,000 feet above sea level are frequent on Cleve-
land, which last showed signs of unrest in the fall of
2009.
June 7… Eurasia's highest volcano on the Kam-
chatka Peninsula in Russia's Far East has shown
again signs of intensified activity, throwing clouds
of smoke and ash into the air to a height of 2.5 kilo-
meters. The Klyuchevskoy, which lies 220 miles
north of Petropavlovsk-Kamchatsky, is one of the
largest active volcanoes in the world. It erupts
about every 2-3 years.
June 8… Two volcanoes in Vanuatu, Gaua and Am-
brym, emitted simultaneous plumes on Sunday,
June 6. Gaua emitted a thick tan plume that blew
southwest. The plume’s color indicates the pres-
ence of volcanic ash. Ambrym emitted a faint
plume that blew south and appears blue-gray,
probably because the blue of the ocean shows
through the nearly transparent plume. This plume’s
pale color suggests water vapor. Two red hotspots
on Ambrym are associated with high surface tem-
peratures, and almost certainly result from volcanic
activity.
June 9… The Philippine Institute of Volcanology
and Seismology raised the alert level status of Taal
Volcano from alert level 1 to alert level 2 as it is
showing signs of possible eruption. On its website,
Phivolcs said it has noticed “anomalous change”
since the last week of April. Among its observations
were increased and intensifying volcanic earth-
quakes, including a low frequency type volcanic
earthquake detected on June 2; raised temperature
in the main crater lake; raised ground tempera-
tures; intensified steaming of the main crater; and
inflating of the volcano. “The recorded high fre-
quency volcanic earthquakes could be the result of
active rock fracturing associated with magma intru-
sion beneath the volcano. The fractures served as
358
passageways through which hot gases from the
intruding magma could escape into the main cra-
ter-lake."
June 12… Gorely Volcano - In the Russian Far
East, Kamchatka’s Gorely volcano is spewing
steam and ash again after decades in dormancy.
The plume has stretched to over a hundred kilo-
meters, compromising regional air travel and
threatening disruption at a local geothermal
power plant. Mount Gorely rises to about two
kilometers above sea level. There are 11 craters
on it, one with a lake. The volcano’s average dor-
mancy interval is close to 20 years.
June 14… Sarychev Volcano - Almost a year after
it spectacularly erupted, Sarychev Volcano
showed more modest signs of activity on June
11. Satellite images show apparent water vapor
filling Sarychev’s summit crater, forming an al-
most perfect circle of white. A much fainter,
barely discernible plume blows away from the
summit toward the east. Sarychev Peak is a stra-
tovolcano and reaches a height of 4,908 feet. It
forms the highest point on Matua Island. This
volcano ranks among the most active in the Kuril
Islands, which extend southwestward from the
Kamchatka Peninsula.
June 15... Mount Ulawun Volcano - Disaster
officials are on alert as one of the country's high-
est active volcanoes shows signs of an eruption.
PNG's Mount Ulawun volcano in West New Brit-
ain province has been emitting vapor over the
last few weeks.
June 21... An explosive eruption at Mt. Sakura-
jima in Kagoshima Prefecture on Sunday after-
noon was the 549th this year, a new annual re-
cord. A second explosive eruption occurred later
in the day, the 550th this year.
June 24-28… The Shiveluch volcano on the Rus-
sian Kamchatka Peninsula has erupted, produc-
ing an ash plume of 6.5 kilometers. The north-
ernmost active volcano on Kamchatka Peninsula
is spewing plumes of ash at a height of more
than 6 kilometers. Mt. Shiveluch has been erupt-
ing for many days now with 80 underground
temblors registered in the past 24 hours alone.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Volcanoes Global Volcanism Program (GVP)
Global Volcanic Activity in 2010
May 2010: May 25... Mountain Baekdu, a dormant
volcano on the border between North Korea and
China, is showing signs of a possible eruption in the
near future. "Baekdu could erupt anytime soon. A
variety of indicators are backing this scenario. It's
clear it's imminent." Major activity in the 1960s cre-
ated a caldera on its peak. Volcanic ash from this
eruption has been found as far away as the south-
ern part of Hokkaido, Japan. Small-scale eruptions
were recorded roughly on a centurial basis − in
1413, 1597, 1668 and 1702. The latest volcanic
eruption recorded at the mountain was back in
1903. The mountain has stayed inactive since then,
leaving it categorized by scientists as dormant. Yet,
"UNUSUAL SIGNS," including minor trembling
among others, began to emerge in June 2002 and a
7.3-magnitude earthquake rattled areas in the vi-
cinity of Baekdu. The frequency of the quakes has
notably increased since then. "It seems that a
shockwave from the quake reactivated magma ap-
proximately 30 kilometers beneath the mountain.
The more frequent these are, the higher the possi-
bility of an eruption." Minor quakes which are too
weak to be felt by human beings take place nearly
100 times per day. "We saw the number steeply
increase in recent years." Among other indicators
backing the scenario of a future eruption is the
height of Baekdu, which has grown nearly 10 centi-
meters since 2002. Experts say bloated magma, a
precondition of eruption, is gradually pushing up
the height of the mountain as well as the tempera-
ture on the surface. On October 1, 2006, a Russian
satellite found the surface temperature of the
mountain notably higher than before. The finding
came just days after North Korea conducted an un-
derground nuclear bomb test in its northern region,
indicating the test was a catalyst reactivating the
magma, analysts said. The increase in the number
of withered evergreen trees on the mountain may
be another indicator. If the eruption is major in
scale, it would bring about massive consequences
to the two Koreas as well as the surrounding states,
including China, Japan and Russia. "The amount of
volcanic ash from the most violent eruption nearly
1,000 years ago was enough to cover the entire
Korean peninsula to a height of 1.2 meters.
Baekdu's caldera contains nearly two billion tons of
water. If it evaporates into the air all of a sudden
mixed with volcanic ash of a major eruption, it
would be blown to the east and consequently en-
gulf Vladivostok in Russia and Hokkaido in northern
359
Japan.
May 27...Guatemala's Pacaya volcano started
erupting lava and rocks, blanketing the country's
capital with ash and forcing the closure of the
international airport.
May 29...Strong explosions rocked Ecuador's
Tungurahua volcano, prompting evacuations of
hundreds of people from nearby villages. Hot
volcanic material blasted down the slopes and
ash plumes soared 6 miles above its crater.
May 30...A giant plume of volcanic ash erupted
over the South Pacific. The cloud billowing from
Vanuatu's Mount Yasur volcano rose about 6,000
feet. The previous week there was a very high
activity for the volcano with hot lava, hot rocks
falling from the volcano.
May 31... A submarine volcanic eruption is un-
derway near the uninhabited Sarigan Island in
the Northern Mariana Islands, 3,800 miles south-
west of Hawaii, in the Pacific Ocean.
April 2010: The swarm of small, shallow earth-
quakes that began Monday, April 5 at Alaska’s
Redoubt Volcano has greatly decreased over the
past several days, and is approaching background
levels of activity. A gas measurement and obser-
vation flight on Thursday, April 8 showed no dis-
ruption of the lava dome and measured gas lev-
els were consistent with a passively degassing
and cooling dome. It appears less likely that this
current episode of unrest will lead to resumed
eruptive activity. Although the volcano remains
somewhat restless, we would expect a greater
degree of seismic activity, significantly elevated
gas emissions, and melting of snow and ice on
the lava dome if conditions were escalating to-
ward eruption.
The Institute of Earth Sciences reported that on 7
April the eruption from Eyjafjöll ceased from the
original eruption craters and was limited to the
fissure that had opened on 31 March. Lava flows
covered an estimated area of 1.3 square kilome-
ters and were on average 10-20m thick. The larg-
est scoria cone was 82m high. After minor
changes in deformation rates during the erup-
tion, on 9 April deformation returned to pre-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Volcanoes Global Volcanism Program (GVP)
Global Volcanic Activity in 2010
eruption levels. Eruptive activity was observed
on 11 April, but tremor decreased to baseline the
next day. Also on 12 April, according to a new
article, the Icelandic Civil Protection Department
decided to lower the preparedness level by one
point, from emergency to danger because of the
decreasing activity. Another article stated that a
pilot saw no active lava flows, only steam
plumes, during an over flight on 13 April.
At 2300 on 13 April, a seismic swarm was
detected below the central part of Eyjafjöll, W. of
the previous eruption fissures. About an hour
later, the onset of seismic tremor heralded an
eruption from a new vent on the S. rim of the
central caldera, capped by Eyjafjallajökull glacier.
The eruption was visually confirmed early in the
morning on 14 April; an eruption plume rose at
least 8 km above the glacier. Meltwater flowed
to the N. and S. News outlets reported that a
circular ice-free area about 200m in diameter
was seen near the summit. Scientists conducting
an over flight saw a new 2-km-long,N-S-trending
fissure, and ash fall to the E. About 700 people
were ordered to evacuate the area, and certain
flights were banned from flying N. and E. of the
eruption area. Flooding increased throughout
the day, causing road closures and some struc-
tural damage.
March 2010: COSTA RICA - The Irazú volcano
sent a panic chill in the neighboring communities
Monday night, March 2, as residents reported at
least 9 tremors from the volcano during a 30
minute period. Residents say the volcano, lo-
cated north of Cartago, began acting up after
7pm. None of the tremors felt were above 3 on
the Richter scale. There was panic among the
residents who envisioned the fresh television
and newspaper images of the death and destruc-
tion of the 8.8 earthquake in Chile. The Irazú is
located next to the Turrialba volcano that has
been actively spewing ash and gases for the last
several months. Also fresh in the minds of Irazú
residents is the death and destruction of Cin-
chona last January8, 2009, that is located near
the Poás volcano, a short distance from Irazú.
The Irazú has recorded 23 eruptions during its
history, with its first recorded eruption in 1723.
The latest explosions by the colossus were in
1965 and 1963.
360
ICELAND – The seismic activity in the area
around Eyjafjallajökull glacier in south Iceland,
which covers an active volcano, increased again
Tuesday night, April14, with a series of smaller
earthquakes measured between 3:40 and 5:20
am. The largest quake was 2.6 on the Richter
scale. The night-time tremors were stronger than
those measured Tuesday morning. The series of
quakes was similar in character and lasted for
approximately one hour. Magma flow seems to
be at full speed inside the volcano and the series
of earthquakes probably indicates a magma in-
trusion. It is not known how volcanic eruptions
begin in Eyjafjallajökull - it last erupted in 1821 -
and magma movements might continue for a few
weeks.
INDONESIA –During June 2010 17 of 18 volca-
noes in Indonesia are on alert status and emit-
ting toxic gas. The alert status is the second level
of a three-level system of warning. The Ibu vol-
cano in West Halmahera is the only one of the 18
volcanoes at the lower No. 3 standby level.
Mount Talang in Sumatra and Mount Karange-
tang in Sulawesi are the most recent volcanoes
to have their status raised to alert. Other Indone-
sian volcanoes on alert include Krakatoa, Bromo,
Kaba, Anak, Slametand Lokon. In 1883, Krakatoa
erupted in an explosion equivalent to 200 mega-
tons of TNT, about 13,000 times the force of the
U.S. bomb that devastated Hiroshima, Japan,
during World War II.
RUSSIA - A belching of ash to the altitude of
seven kilometers above sea level has been regis-
tered over the crater of the Shiveluch, Kam-
chatka’s northernmost active volcano. The exud-
ing of ash does not pose any risks for nearby
population centers, as no data on the fallout of
volcanic dust there has been reported. The
belching was not seen visually and scientists
drew a conclusion that it had taken place on the
basis of information from seismic observation
stations located in the vicinity of the volcano.
They registered “a surface seismic event at the
volcano” having a four minutes’ duration. At this
moment, the volcano displays weak or moderate
eruption periods lasting from several months to
two to three years. The periods of its activation
were registered in 1980 to 1981 and 1993 to
1995. The last eruption ranking among disasters
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Volcanoes Global Volcanism Program (GVP)
Global Volcanic Activity in 2010
occurred in November 1964. The
Shiveluch activated again in 2001,
with a growth of the extrusive cu-
pola – a towering of viscose lava --
evidenced in its crater. Geophysi-
cal services and agencies keep the
giant under permanent watch.
Klyuchevskaya volcano continues
to be active- emitting steam, ash,
and lava in early 2010.

MONTSERRAT - Passengers on a
jet flying over the Caribbean have
received a lose-up look at a mas-
sive volcanic eruption sending ash
and dust higher than the plane
itself. The 737 jet was flying to the
holiday destination of St Lucia when it passed the Ecuador Tungurahua volcano commonly known as
Soufriere Hills volcano on the island of Monser- Throat of Fire
rat midway through its eruption [which started
Residents close to the 5,020-meter (16,500
January 8, 2010]. Passengers rushed to the win-
feet) volcano were evacuated from Cusua and
dows to see the explosion and subsequent mush-
Juive Grande villages, the president's office said
room cloud. The volcano sent a plume of ash as
in a statement.
high as 12,000 metres, prompting other flight
Officials in the area said hundreds of fami-
delays after fears the dust would get into the
lies had been moved, while Ecuador's aviation
engines. The partial collapse of the volcano's lava
authorities closed the airport in coastal
dome is believed to be responsible for the ash
Guayaquil and altered the routes of some flights
cloud.
to avoid the ash cloud.
"The eruptive column is some 10 km (33,000
February 2010: ECUADOR – Activity at Tungura-
feet) high," Hugo Yepes, director of Ecuador's
hua volcano is increasing. It hasn't really made it
Geophysical Institute, told reporters.
to much of the English-speaking news, but the
Tungurahua has been classed as active since
current eruptive activity at Tungurahua appears
1999 and had a strong eruption in 2008. It is one
to be on the up-tick. The Geophysical Institute of
of eight active volcanoes in the country.
Ecuador suggests that a larger eruption is not out
Yepes said ash plumes could "easily" reach
of the question, but right now the activity is con-
the 35,000 to 40,000 feet at which long distance
fined to explosions and ash fall around the re-
flights operate. "As such there should be at least
gion. Tungurahua volcano has been erupting pe-
a diversion for international routes," he said.
riodically over the past 10 years.
Ash particles can cause serious damage if
sucked into airplane engines. An Icelandic vol-
Ecuador, Saturday 29 (Reuters) Ecuadorean vil-
cano caused widespread disruption and major
lagers fled their homes after the Andean nation's
losses for airlines after flights were grounded for
"Throat of Fire" volcano erupted on Friday,
days in Europe in mid-April.
spewing ash that forced officials to reroute some
The authorities temporarily closed the air-
flights and close an airport, authorities said.
port in Guayaquil, where the runway was cov-
In the second volcanic eruption in Latin
ered in ash, and diverted planes heading there to
America on Friday, loud explosions shook the
Quito and Manta.
ground and rattled windows near the volcano
Officials also altered some flight routes to
known as Tungurahua in the indigenous Quechua
avoid the plume, including Lima-Quito and do-
language, 130 km (81 miles) southeast of Quito,
mestic routes between the capital and Guayaquil
officials said.
361 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Volcanoes Global Volcanism Program (GVP)
Global Volcanic Activity in 2010

Mt. Nyiragongo Volcano Trek, Goma, Democratic Republic of Congo, April 5, 2010;
commonly known as “Mountain of Fire”

and the Andean city of Cuenca.
The national director of civil aviation, Fer-
nando Guerrero, told Reuters that the Guayaquil
airport would reopen later once the runway had
been cleared.
The authorities have moved to safety about
500 families in five communities close to Tungura-
hua, officials said, while an unknown number of
people left the area of their own accord.
"At the moment we are keeping a yellow alert
in effect for the area," said Fausto Chunata, mayor
of the nearby town of Penipe, adding that they
might order more evacuations later.
Banos, a town popular with foreign and local
tourists, was among the places evacuated voluntar-
ily, officials said.
In Guatemala, another geologically volatile
Latin American country, villagers fled and the inter-
national airport was closed after the Pacaya vol-
cano erupted close to its capital.
PAKISTAN - A volcano has started spewing lava in
Ziarat District of Balochistan, some 75 kilometres
away from Quetta. The volcanic activity occurred in
362
Jhari area of Ziarat at Torghar Mountain on Mon-
day night. Residents of the nearby area claimed the
fire fumes at top of the mountain in the night were
witnessed for the last few days, while on Monday
night, February 1, 2010, the mountain started
spewing lava. Jhari area is located near Waam,
which was badly affected in October 29, 2008,
when a severe earthquake hit Ziarat.
HAWAII – January 22, 2010 Lava from Kílauea vol-
cano once again has oozed through the mostly
abandoned Royal Gardens subdivision, covering
portions of the small open area sun touched by
previous flows. The volcano has been erupting
since 1983 and over the years has destroyed an
estimated 66 homes or other structures in Royal
Gardens. Lava from the "2007 Thanksgiving Eve
Breakout" vent was flowing through the upper 2
miles of the lava-tube system above the subdivision
and feeding surface flows that were advancing
slowly down the pali and across the coastal plain. A
half-dozen channelized flows meandered down a
steep portion of the pali last week, burning vegeta-
tion in the western part of Royal Gardens. Lava has
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Volcanoes Global Volcanism Program (GVP)
Global Volcanic Activity in 2010
lagira, erupted on 2 January, spewing lava
not been flowing into the ocean for at least a
10kmaway and threatening the town of Sake and
month.
the Sake-Goma road. Sake is a major source of
Goma's fresh food. That eruption was Nyamula-
CHILE – March 5-22, 2010 Steam seen from Llaima
gira's 35th since 1882. Little damage occurred
Volcano. Video surveillance confirms volcano is
because the lava mainly flowed into Virunga Na-
producing steam, sometimes gas and could be set
tional Park. Two days later, the lava movement
to erupt, experts say. Llaima Volcano, one of the
increased, flowing 500m within 24hours.
largest and most active volcanoes in Chile, is lo-
cated 663kilometers southeast of Santiago. The
JAPAN -Sakurajima volcano erupted more than
volcanic alert level has been raised to Yellow Alert
400 times during 2009 and activity is increasing.
Level 3, with ongoing monitoring of the volcano
Ash fall is a regular occurrence at the daikon and
for 24 hours a day. A report indicated there was
mandarin farms surrounding the volcano, as well
fluid within the ducts of the volcano and intense
as the nearby cities of Kagoshima and Kirishima.
volcanic activity, which could indicate Llaima Vol-
cano, is approaching a state of imbalance. The last
January 2010: YELLOW STONE NATIONAL PARK
major eruption occurred in 1994, but an eruption
was rattled by 270 earthquakes in the last two
in January 2008 forced hundreds of villagers to
days (as of 3pmMonday) following a period of 11
evacuate the area with ash falling as far as Argen-
months of quiet seismic activity in the park. The
tina.
quakes have been gaining strength, with a 3.1
tremor recorded at 11:03 a.m. Monday. The
CHILE - Chaiten volcano has been placed under
quakes are occurring in an area about 5 miles
red alert due to an increase in seismic activity for
from where the largest swarm of quakes ever
three weeks. The volcano in southern Chile be-
was recorded in October 1985. One of the lead-
came active in May 2008 after being dormant for
ing experts on earthquake and volcanic activity
more than 9,000 years. Volcanic activity was on
at Yellowstone said that the activity is a "notable
the decline in the past few months until picking
swarm." The swarm is located about 10 miles
back up January 21, 2010. The red alert, which
northwest of Old Faithful, Wyoming, and nine
indicates activity is above normal levels and an
miles southeast of West Yellowstone, Montana.
eruption could be imminent, was enacted in large
Such swarms are "relatively common." Today's
part to protect tourists in the area. Underground
tremors seem to be normal tectonic activity, and
seismic rumblings 1.2 to 5 miles (2 to 8 kilome-
are "not an indication" that some sort of volcanic
ters) deep in the area around the volcano and
activity will occur. Since 1995 there have been 80
constant gas eruptions in the dome indicate "a
swarms, including the one that started Sunday.
high grade of instability".
In late December 2008 and early January
2009, Yellowstone National park experienced the
DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC OF CONGO - Perched on
second largest earthquake swarm in Yellow-
a hillside, the volcano observatory in Goma com-
stone's recorded seismic history. The swarm un-
mands a great view of nearby Nyiragongo Moun-
der the north end of Yellowstone Lake consisted
tain. "Goma faces the highest risk any city in the
of 813 earthquakes with magnitudes ranging up
world could face. We don't just have volcanoes;
to 3.9. The eventual 'big one' will likely occur
we have gas emissions, acid rain, polluted water
along one of the 45 faults that line two belts −
and endemic fluorosis. People are asphyxiated in
one stretching from Yellowstone National Park
this region every year, because there are fractures
up to Helena, Montana, and a second one along
emitting carbon dioxide all over the rift. It is diffi-
the Montana-Idaho border. The Yellowstone Pla-
cult to estimate the number of people who are
teau is one of the largest super-volcanoes in the
dying. People who live around here know where
world and has gone through three volcanic cycles
the gas is, so they avoid it. But there were more
spanning two million years, which included some
deaths when IDPs [internally displaced people]
of the world's largest known eruptions. There is
came to this region because they did not know
absolutely no connection between what is occur-
where the gas is." Nyiragongo is one of the two
ring in Yellowstone and the magnitude 7.0 earth-
active volcanoes in North Kivu. The other, Nyamu-
363 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Volcanoes Global Volcanism Program (GVP)
Global Volcanic Activity in 2010
The northeastern part of Yellowstone Caldera, with the Yellowstone River flowing through Hayden Valley and the
volcanic caldera rim in the distance, sometimes known as the Yellowstone Supervolcano, at Yellowstone National
Park, Wyoming, U.S.A.
quake in Haiti. They are completely different
systems. They are not related."
1,033Yellowstone quakes were recorded in
one week. The Volcano Alert Level at Yellow-
stone National Park remained at “normal” Friday,
despite a swarm of earthquakes large enough to
trigger seismographs in the Flathead Valley and
cause chatter on Twitter. Working around the
clock, scientists with the U.S. Geological Survey’s
Yellowstone Volcano Observatory had recorded
more than1,033 earthquakes since Monday, in-
cluding at least eight events over magnitude
three. That’s more than half the total annual av-
erage in the park, which is 1,600 a year. Despite
the flurry of activity, however, many Yellowstone
locals haven’t felt a thing, and scientists are call-
ing the swarm of quakes typical for the seismi-
cally prone region that is home to one of the
world’s larger volcanoes. “This is a big swarm.
These things don’t happen very often. They may
have a deep volcanic connection, but right now,
it seems to be related to tectonics.” There was a
similar swarm in 2009. The swarm is on par with
an event in 1985 in which scientist recorded
364
more than 3,000 quakes. “It’s interesting, with
swarms, the earthquakes can start up small.
There’s no one big earthquake, there are just a
bunch of smaller quakes that can increase in in-
tensity and go back down.”Scientists have no
way of knowing how long the swarm will last,
though the one in 1985 went on for months.
Over eight days, more than 1,270 mostly tiny
earthquakes have struck between Old Faithful
and West Yellowstone. The strongest dozen or so
have ranged between magnitudes 3.0and 3.8.
The largest quakes in the current swarm have
included two of magnitude 3.1 and one of magni-
tude 3.0 late Sunday and early Monday. Rela-
tively mundane fault slippage is believed to be
causing the latest quakes. [Other quakes Monday
- 2.9, 2.9, 2.8, 2.6 /Tuesday - 2.6 / this morning
2.7, 2.8, 3.1]
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Environment/Petroleum Industry

BP’s Gulf Oil Spill

Report

T he Deepwater Horizon Oil Spill, commonly

known as the BP Gulf Oil Spill, is the largest
accidental marine oil spill in the history of the pe-
troleum industry. On April 20 Deepwater Horizon
drilling rig, constructed by Korea’s Hyundai Heavy
Industries Corporation and leased to BP by owner
Transocean, exploded, causing a deep water oil
gusher (uncontrolled release of hydrocarbons re-
sulting from a blowout) and killing 11 people,
while 17 others suffered injuries. Initial oil spill
volume is estimated at 63,000 barrels a day, di- Lingering oil slick off the Mississippi Delta illuminated by
minishing over time to 53,000 barrels as the reser- sunlight, May 24, 2010
voir of hydrocarbons feeding the gusher gradually
the standards in design and construction of the
depleted. As of June 30, 2010 BP had not suc-
production casing, the latter of which was done
ceeded in stopping the spill which had caused ex-
by Halliburton Energy Services, one of the world’s
tensive damage to marine and wildlife habitats, as
leading petroleum industry service companies.
well as the U.S. Gulf coast’s fishing and tourism
However, Halliburton is on record as advising BP
industries.
that its designs and procedures were risky.
Skimmer ships, floating containment booms,
Halliburton staff completed cementation of
anchored barriers, and sand-filled barricades along
the final production well 20 hours prior to the
shorelines were used in an attempt to protect
Deepwater Horizon drilling rig explosion, but had
hundreds of miles of beaches, wetlands and estu-
not yet set the final cement plug. Halliburton ad-
aries from the spreading oil. Scientists also re-
vised BP to install numerous devices to make sure
ported immense underwater plumes of dissolved
the pipe was centered in the well before pumping
oil not visible at the surface.] The U.S. Government
cement; otherwise, the cement might develop
held BP fully responsible for the disaster and in-
small channels that gas could squeeze through. In
sisted the company pay for all cleanup costs, as
an April 18 report to BP, Halliburton warned that
well as the tens of billions of dollars in damage
if BP didn't use more centering devices, the well
and loss of livelihood caused by the spill.
would likely have "a SEVERE gas flow problem."
U.S. President Barrack Obama blamed the
Other petroleum companies operating in the
Department of the Interior’s Bureau of Ocean En-
region rated the production casing design and
ergy Management, Regulation and Enforcement
construction as sub-standard, noting the blowout
(BOEMRE), personnel for chumminess and collabo-
under the circumstances was predictable.
ration with oil companies in granting permits
Incidentally, President Bush’s Vice President
rather than professional scrutiny. Significantly
Dick Cheney was CEO of Halliburton from 1995 to
BOEMRE receives most of its revenue from leasing
2000, retiring with a $36 million severance pack-
federal lands and waters to oil and natural gas
age to become America’s second in command and
companies with a profit margin of 98%, making it
the company has been the topic of documentaries
one of the largest revenue sources to the federal
as well as federal investigations concerning its
government after the income tax collecting Inter-
preferential treatment in getting and executing
nal Revenue Service (IRS).
contracts related to the U.S. 2003 Iraq War.
The Obama administration and U.S. Congress
obtained information indicating BP had not met
365 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
African Vibes Magazine presented ‘I Wear African” fashion show in Los Angeles,
California, U.S.A. on May 17, 2010

366
 TyÜ|vtÇ i|uxá `tzté|Çx cÜxáxÇàá
: \ jxtÜ TyÜ|vtÇ:
By Qianna Smith
on May 17th 2010 2:43PM

The event was hosted by actress and filmmaker Tangi Miller. Miller is best
known for the role of the smart, spirited and stylish Elena Tyler on the J.J.
Abrams hit show 'Felicity.' Celebrity hairstylist and makeup artist Roberta
"Robbie" Rogers from the Ken Paves Salon Beverly Hills was on the scene
prepping Miller for the runway show whose look was inspired by Diana
Ross in 'Mahogany.'

367 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 TyÜ|vtÇ i|uxá `tzté|Çx cÜxáxÇàá
: \ jxtÜ TyÜ|vtÇ:
By Qianna Smith
on May 17th 2010 2:43PM

The "I Wear African" fashion show brought a new, fresh, contemporary
African style through the interpretive work of some of Africa's hottest
and talented designers. The magazine honored Liberian-born fashion de-
signer and 'Project Runway' alum Korto Momolu with a Diamond Award
for uplifting her African heritage through fashion. Momolu has a signa-
ture handbag and jewelry line exclusively designed for Dillard's Depart-
ment Stores and Dillards.com.

368 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 TyÜ|vtÇ i|uxá `tzté|Çx cÜxáxÇàá
: \ jxtÜ TyÜ|vtÇ:
By Qianna Smith
on May 17th 2010 2:43PM

The designers who participated included Mekdes Tefera Taye (Ethiopia);

Sheila Denanyoh (Ghana) of Ill-la-la Designs; Arthlene Legair (Dominica, West
Indies) of the Legair Brand; Kahindo Mateene (Democratic Republic of Congo-
DRC) of Modahnik; Maryanne E. Mokoko and Stephanie T. Mouapi
(Cameroon) of Côté Minou; jewelry designer Monalisa Okojie (Nigeria) of
NEHITA; and Christiane King (Ivory Coast), who is a contestant on this season's
'Project Runway.'

A portion of the proceeds from the event will go toward supporting the
African Vibes' "1,000 Africans for Haiti" initiative to help the earthquake
victims of Haiti.

369 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows
Ayaan and Idyl Mohallim

Mataano Collection
For Spring 2010

They’ve Got the Look

By Jessica Dufresne
Photography by Christian Lantry
Double Dose of Style
Ayaan and Idyl Mohallim are generating major
buzz with their women’s clothing line,
Mataano. And the success is that much sweeter
given their backstory: The Somali-born twins
lived in their home country until age 9 before
fleeing with their family to escape an escalating
civil war. They settled in northern Virginia, a
place that according to Ayaan was “far away
from anything remotely fashionable.”
No phantom CEOs here; the twins sketch and
select the fabrics for all of Mataano’s frocks. Idyl
describes their collection as “simple yet elegant
dresses that are well made and designed to flat-
ter a range of shapes.” The inspiration for the
clothes comes from the rich colors of Somalia
and the myriad silhouettes of American design—
essentially an embrace of the twins’ cultural
heritages. The sisters want the brand to become
a household name. “We’ve been pleased with
everyone’s reaction, and we intend to deliver on
those expectations,” Idyl adds. “We’re cau-
tiously optimistic.”
mataano.com

Fashion Forward
Since moving to New York in 2003, the two have
earned their stripes in the clothing industry:
Ayaan did stints at Jill Stuart and TSE, while Idyl
cut her teeth at Betsey Johnson and served as an
assistant fashion editor for BlackBook. But by
last November, they became their own bosses
and jump-started Mataano (which means
“twins” in Somali). Their inaugural line featured
ultrafeminine spring dresses, while the fall 2009
collection includes modern pieces infused with
1920s flair.

The Oprah Effect

A few weeks after launching their brand, the
women appeared on Oprah, where they re-
ceived business advice from Mary-Kate and Ash-
ley Olsen. “When people hear that [we were on
the show], it gives us instant credibility,” Idyl
says. “It has definitely opened a lot of doors.”

370 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Mataano Collection

371 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Mataano Collection

372 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Mataano Collection

373 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Mataano Collection

374 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Mataano Collection

Identical twins Ayaan and Idyl Mohallim, Somalia

born New Yorkers, sport fashions from their
Mataano line

375 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Abuja Style

Singer Dunni Ologo Olanrewaju

376 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Abuja Style

Dunni

377 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Abuja Style

Dunni

378 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Abuja Style

Singer Dunni Ologo Olanrewaju

379 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Abuja Style

Prof. Dora Akunyili, Nigeria’s Federal Minister of Information & Communication

380 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Abuja Style

Prof. Dora Akunyili

381 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Abuja Style

Omotola Jolade Ekeeinde

382 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Accra Style
Designs by Ghanaian fashion designer Grace Shannan

2007 Screen Awards host Josiee D’Arby wearing Grace Shannan’s design

383 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Johannesburg Style

A frican Designers from across the conti-

nent and from across the Diaspora are given the
opportunity to display their African Designs at the
The online boutique is set to launch in June on
the eve of the Africa Fashion Week itself, this site
will be a permanent online shop specializing in
second annual Africa Fashion Week. Event set to African designs from around the globe.
hold in Johannesburg, South Africa with:
Event is said to be held at: Sandton Convention
• 33 designers collections shown over 4 Centre, Johannesburg.
days,
• On the 5th of July, a Fashion awards has been set
• 2 day fashion seminar aside to take place and this is aimed at appreciat-
• ing and acknowledging the hard work of the lead-
• Africa Fashion Awards ing ‘Fashion People’ within the industry and of
• African descent.
• The launch of the African Fashion Interna-
tional Boutique. The main aim of this Fashion Week is to Reveal
• Africa’s Soul to the world.
The collections of 33 designers will be featured in
19 runway shows from 30 June – 3 July, before an For More information please visit:
influential audience of buyers, the press, World
Cup guests, VIPs and celebrities. www.africanfashioninternational.com

The displayed designs won’t be restricted to the

runway alone, they’ll be added onto the AFI online
Fashion Boutique (First ever of its kind) which will
feature Ready-to-wear designs from the fashion
show.

384 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Khartoum Style

Inaam Abdallah Abu Zayed, wife of Pan Africa & World Review Publisher Muhammed Kamil, wearing
a sheer tobe, popular in Sudan, Chad, Niger and Mauritania

385 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Khartoum Style

Inaam dancing in a colorful tobe

386 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Paris Style

Rachida Dati, French European Parliament member and Mayor of Paris’ 7th arron-
dissement, sporting her signature leather slacks

387 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Paris Style

Rachida Dati

388 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Paris Style

Rachida Dati (left) and Carla Bruni (right) France’s First Lady

389 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Washington Style

Michelle and Barack Obama

390 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Spheres Fashion Shows

Washington Style

First Lady and President

391 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

World Health Organization headquarters, Geneva, Switzerland

392
 Health & Medicine
Countering Counterfeit Medicine
Report
A t the June 2009 Conference on the Impact
of Fake Medicine held by the American En-
terprise Institute in Washington, the magnitude
of the problem was highlighted by the World
Health Organization (WHO) estimate that 30% of
drugs in some areas of Africa and Asia are coun-
terfeit or substandard. Malaria medicines have
been found to be the most commonly counter-
feited.
In Pakistan thousands of charlatans operate
in the market, distributing leaflets and making a
fortune on a largely uneducated and impover-
ished population.
That fake drugs prevalence, according to
WHO, in developed countries is by contrast about
1% moreover highlights the particular vulnerabil-
ity of the world’s most socio-economic disadvan-
taged communities; though the problem in
Europe and affluent Asia Pacific nations is grow-
ing. Global prevalence of counterfeit medicine is
estimated by WHO at 8%, valued at about $32
billion. An estimated 700,000 people are killed
every year because of counterfeit malaria and
tuberculosis drugs.
The counterfeit medicine trade in Europe
mostly thrives on purchase of prescription drugs
without a prescription, which enables buying
cheaper black market brands rather than genuine
ones. A 2009 survey in Great Britain revealed that
15% of Brits bypassed the established prescrip-
tion procedures and to save money sought drugs
on the black market. Seventy-eight percent of
Britain’s doctors surveyed agreed that this car-
ried the risk of getting fake medicine that endan-
gers health. Research commissioned by Pfizer
estimate the current annual counterfeit medicine
market in Europe at €10.5 billion. According to
the study, 38% in Germany and 37% in Italy
bought prescription medicine without a doctor’s
prescription. Weight lost (45%) flu (35%) and
male impotency medicines (25%) were the most
commonly bought without doctor’s prescription.
393
Professor Dora Akunyilli, while head of Nigeria’s National
Agency for Food and Drug Administration and Control
(NAFDAC) escaped several assassination attempts by Ni-
geria’s fake drugs merchants but continued her deter-
mined campaign to crack down on the criminal practice of
counterfeiting drugs
In December last year European industry commis-
sioner Gunter Verheugen said the European Union
had seized 34 million fake tablets in just two
months, a figure which he said "exceeded our
worst fears."
Children are dying as a direct result of poison-
ous fake drugs besides the millions of incidences
of patients paying for drugs with the expectation
of efficacious action when thy are not really taking
medicine at all. Diluted medication gives rise to
mutant strains of diseases that are resistant to
existing genuine drugs. As recently as the 1990s,
hateful businessmen were ordering poisonous
cough syrup from factories abroad for sale in the
Nigeria market, causing many child deaths. In Kan-
sas, U.S.A., pharmacist Robert Courtney is serving
30 years in prison for diluting cancer drugs in order
to increase his profits.
The menace of counterfeit male impotence
drug sildenafil, commonly known by the brand
name Viagra, is rivaling malaria drug counterfeit-
ing . An indication of the global trade scale can be
drawn by the South Korean Tax Service discovery
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Health & Medicine Countering Counterfeit Medicine
Social Entrepreneur Bright Simons’ mPedigree innovation
which has won acclaim as an effective and cost free con-
sumer handy way of countering counterfeit medicine sales.
is being trial run in Nigeria, his native Ghana and other
African countries
During 2009 Bright Simons was named one of 15
Tech Awards Laureates by the Tech Museum for Innova-
tion for applying technology to improve the condition of
humanity and his mPedigree placed first in the emerging
markets category of Nokia Innovations contest. mPedigree
also won an award in the WAS e-Health and Environment
category.
of $77 million worth of counterfeit sildenafil during
the first half of 2010, which came mostly from
China and according to medical investigators
lacked efficacy. In value terms, supposed impo-
tence cures accounted for 99% of all fake medicine
discovered by the Korean Tax Service in the first
half of this year.
Association for Asia Research statistics re-
vealed that 192,000 Chinese died from fake medi-
cine in 2001 and that counterfeit medicine was
being exported from China to Laos, Cambodia,
Burma, Vietnam and Thailand. In June 2010 India’s
Drug Controller General announced that it would
be more vigilant in inspecting cheap active phar-
maceutical ingredients (APIs) imported from China
after discovering substandard products, but noted
that China does produce standard quality APIs.
China’s authorities have been arresting and prose-
cuting those caught in illicit drug production and
trade.
At the June 2009 conference Patrick Ford, di-
rector of corporate global security at Pfizer,
warned that in countries where counterfeiting
does not affect citizens directly, governments of-
ten have "less interest in investigating it." He
394
noted in this regard that tracking fake drugs in de-
veloping countries is difficult and companies see
no commercial incentives to combat the problem
in all places. For example, of Pfizer's 11.1 million
product seizures in 2008, few occurred in African
countries outside of South Africa and Nigeria, ow-
ing to problematic investigative environments.
WHO's Drug Prequalification Program can
help procurers identify drugs that have passed
regulatory muster, but the process is costly and
time-intensive, and not all companies producing
high-quality drugs register. According to Sonali
Korde, senior technical malaria adviser at USAID,
the U.S. President's Malaria Initiative assesses the
hundreds of millions of dollars in products it pro-
cures and distributes on a case-by-case basis and
other major procurers like IDA Mission Pharma
and UNICEF do likewise.
Nonetheless, counterfeiters have managed to
get hold of medicine consignments shipped to Af-
rica by UN agencies and replace the contents with
their fake stuff. Last year, malaria medicines dis-
patched to Ghana by the Global Fund mysteriously
went missing. Once the drugs arrived in the coun-
try, they were replaced by counterfeits, leading
Ghanaian authorities to investigate allegations a
cartel was replacing real drugs with fake ones.
Outside the public sector, there is little qual-
ity control. According to Richard Tren, founder of
Africa Fighting Malaria, 50–70% of people buy
medicine through the private sector because they
lack access to public facilities that stock appropri-
ate therapies, and more independent quality as-
sessment is needed.
New technology--including holograms, radio
frequency identification (RFID), electromagnetic
identification (EMID), scratch panels, and compre-
hensive e-pedigrees--offer regulators and firms
several anti-counterfeiting options. A less expen-
sive but efficient way of detecting fake drugs is
mobile labs that perform thin layer chromatogra-
phy or hand-held Raman spectrometers; better
public awareness, spurred by media attention,
would also help.
Nigeria is one success story. A decade ago,
WHO and Nigeria's drug regulatory authority Nige-
ria's National Agency for Food and Drug Admini-
stration and Control (NAFDAC) estimated that 41–
70 percent of drugs circulating in the country were
substandard. The agency improved its policing and
prosecution, working closely with WHO and the
FDA, and the number of poor-quality products fell
to less than 20%.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Health & Medicine Countering Counterfeit Medicine
"Nigeria is no longer a dumping ground for fake
products," said NAFDAC director-general Paul
Orhii.
Ashoka– Innovators for the Public in its
commentary on Bright Simons awarding winning
mPedigree wrote: “Bright has created a system
for consumers of pharmaceuticals to enable
them to confirm the source and quality of drugs
they purchase. By simply sending a code em-
bossed on the body of the product in a regular
SMS to a dedicated access number, purchasers
receive a real time response authenticating the
product. His system provides a live, dynamic link
between the consumer and the manufacturer.
This idea is set to make communication be-
tween the buyer and manufacturer a point of
purchase routine. The implications for quality
assurance, advertising, consumer relations, and
customer service are ground-breaking.”
Given the high mobile phone ownership
prevalence in Africa and familiarity with use of
mobile phones for financial transactions, Bright
Simons’ innovation is likely play a substantial
role in countering counterfeit medicine. mPedi-
gree technology and security structure is now
being provided by Hewlett Packard. Bright’s
platform uses a national four-digit number that
is easy to memorize and recognize. Pharmaceu-
tical giant Pfizer is paying the service costs and
in return has a partner in its efforts to curb drug
counterfeiting, not to mention the market value
of the goodwill and adverting opportunities sup-
port for mPedigree generates.
Customers at the point of purchase get an
OK reply if the code submitted for verification is
registered and if it is not, "No. Please recheck
code," is the automatic reply. If the reply is OK
the caller is also given the drug manufacturer’s
name and the expiry date.
Nigeria is planning to adopt mPedigree to
enable customers verify the genuineness of all
pharmaceutical products sold in the country,
not just malaria medicine which has up to now
been the main focus of the campaign to counter
medicine counterfeiting. "Consumers can now
take the war (against counterfeit drugs) into
their own hands," said NAFDAC’s Dr. Orhii. Hith-
erto, consumers have been passive victims of From top to bottom: Counterfeit drug manufacturing lab
drug counterfeiting; mPedigree is bringing about in Columbia; fake drugs confiscated in Tanzania; fake
a revolution justifying the Laureate distinction drugs manufacturing facility in China
Ghana’s young Bright Simons has been accorded
by Tech Museum for Innovation.

395 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

396
 Information Media/ Media Politics

Right Wing Media Blitz

By Muhammed Kamil

Perspective

C ontemporary radical right wing political ac-

tivism has been variously referred to as the
Neo-Conservatism, Neo-Fascism and militarism,
and while the radical right is not a homogenous
movement the common thread of unabashed,
dogmatic conservatism defines it as a force that
militates against socio-economic and political
progress. The radical right to this day maintains
its tradition of opposition to, or at best skepti-
cism about environmental protection agendas;
the Israeli radical right’s vision of apartheid in the
21st century is frustrating international efforts to
resolve the Middle East crisis; the American radi-
cal right stands against health care reform and
financial market reform; and an end to immigra-
tion from the Global South. Although the radical
right elite are patrician oriented they exploit the
frustrations of the lower classes by encouraging
continual racialism and imaginary association of
social democracy with communism. As one poor
American put it concerning the Democrats’
proposition of health care reform, ‘I’d rather die
from sickness as a free man than be treated and
cured under socialism’. That Cuba offers free
medical care from birth to death impresses no-
body here.
The most extreme right wing nuisance ele-
ments however are not in the West but in the
Muslim world. I am certainly not a fan of penulti-
mate U.S. President George W. Bush, and as
much as I saw his neo-con regime as a Western
camp of the “Axis of Evil” he talked about, I fully
appreciate his introduction of the term “Islamic
Fascism” into our lexicon, given that the tactics of
Taliban, Al Qaeda and others of their ilk make
those of Hitler, Mussolini and Franco look banally
satanic by comparison. Fortunately, since the fall
of Afghanistan’s Taliban regime, only in Iran Is-
lamic fascism remains mainstream state ideology.
In discussing the right wing media blitz our
attention is mainly drawn to the West because it
is there that privately owned elements in the
397
Media czar Rupert Murdoch at the 2007 World
Economic Forum in Davos, Switzerland
contemporary press sustain a tradition of repre-
senting vested interests; whereas fascist styled
media are typically state owned or in the case of
movements like Al Qaeda and Taliban use social
networks such as the internet, mosques, study
groups and religious schools to advance their
agendas. The Taliban, for example, originated as
students of Mullah Omar. The audio cassette was
a principal message conveying device used by the
supporters of exiled Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini
in their quest to oust the Iranian monarchy.
These are subterranean phenomenon outside the
modern democratic mainstream and as such are
not core media establishment issues. The main-
stream right wing establishment media by con-
trast is a major player in setting the global news
agenda, operating on high budgets, recruiting the
best professional talent and capturing the atten-
tion of people all over the world via satellite TV,
newspapers, internet and radio. The right is half
of the political equation that gives democracy its
balance, but somewhere between right of center
and the extreme right where we arrive at fascism
there is the syndrome of oligarchs which has his-
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Information Media/ Media Politics
torically included media moguls as socio-political
and cultural advocates.
The press, dubbed the Fourth Estate no
doubt because it was a bourgeoisie defense
mechanism against the powers of the Lords Spiri-
tual– the clergy, Lords Temporal– monarchs and
the landed aristocracy, in feudal Europe, has a
neo-conservative tradition rooted in the social
position of the European bourgeoisie vis-à-vis the
three estates above them in socio-political
power, which the press challenged, and the ple-
beians below whom the press grew accustomed
to manipulating to serve bourgeois purposes.
Rupert Murdoch, born in 1931 in Mel-
bourne, Australia, inherited a successful newspa-
per business from his father. His career story is
one of continuity and expansion of a family busi-
ness dedicated to becoming a media empire. His
father sent him to Oxford to study philosophy,
politics and economics, a combination of subjects
that would afford him appropriate intellectual
formation as a media Chief Executive Officer. His
father died while he was at Oxford; hence, Rupert
returned home to take over the family newspa-
per. While in England he became a Labour Party
supporter, but years later as owner of a right
wing global media empire his number one selling
British daily, The Sun, would irreverently carry a
front page headline that read: “Squatter Holed
Up in #10 Downing Street. Man, 59, refuses to
leave.” These words surrounded a photo of Brit-
ish Prime Minister Gordon Brown, who according
to the country’s constitutional law was still the
Queen’s First Minister and was duty bound to
remain so until such moment as a majority parlia-
mentary coalition against him emerged.
A rebel on the right, Murdoch who owns
Britain’s Sky News wants to turn it into an Eastern
Atlantic version of his America based staunchly
right wing Fox News, but while British law allows
newspapers to be biased or partisan, broadcast
stations are required to be neutral and balanced.
Murdoch is moreover campaigning against the
continued ownership of British Broadcasting Cor-
poration (BBC) by the government, on the
grounds that it is an instance of unfair competi-
tion, as well as government interference in a do-
main that should be strictly private enterprise.
The counterargument is that the BBC is a public
service broadcaster, as said in its charter, but
whatever the ideological basis, it is the world’s
largest media conglomerate, denying that title to
Rupert Murdoch’s News Corp. Murdoch in assert-
Right Wing Media Blitz
BBC World News’ intellectually versatile and charming Martine
Dennis says her career goal is to improve the attitude of BBC to
covering international news
ing his rebellious inclination, reflects the Social
Darwinist Herbert Spencer philosophy of the
bourgeoisie as the chosen class of history; to wit,
the opportunity is seized by journalists in his em-
ploy to belittle the Labour Party Prime Minister
as a squatter and the BBC and British laws that
stand in the way of his News Corp ruling the
global media scene in oligarch style are branded
obstructions to the traditionally bourgeoisie
championed freedoms of speech and enterprise.
The fact is that the government owned, autono-
mously managed BBC is far more impartial than
all the subsidiaries in Murdoch’s conglomerate.
The jewel in King Rupert’s media crown, Fox
News, according to some statistics attracts a lar-
ger audience than all other major American net-
works, including CNN, combined. This is a phe-
nomenon of contemporary American democracy:
in one of the world’s freest media environments,
dominated by private conglomerates, Fox, which
also produces motion pictures, emerges as the
most popular network, despite its irreverent right
wing push. Or is it because of this irreverent right
wing profiling?
The environment is perfect for capitalizing
off socio-psychological dissatisfaction. High un-
employment, massive scale of home foreclo-
sures, reduced purchasing power, apprehensions
about individual and societal future, pervasive
ignorance about the causes and remedies of the
situation all play into the manipulative powers of
the oligarch media, more easily for worse than
for better. The radical conservative position in
such situations is typically simpler, open to con-
veyance with satire and ironically hope bearing
because it advocates removal of the liberal De-
398 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Information Media/ Media Politics
mocrat African American led government from
office, promoting a white backlash reminiscent of
post-Civil War Reconstruction in 19th century
America’s former slave states.
Yet it is not only in bad times that the sim-
plistic conservative agenda enjoys popular ap-
peal. Stay cool with Coolidge (the election cam-
paign slogan of America’s 30th President, Republi-
can Calvin Coolidge), don’t argue with success
and leave well enough alone are all conservative
platitudes commonly accepted as conventional
wisdom in better times.
The question is raised by the antics of the
right wing media, which include outright lies and
deceit as well as manipulative misrepresentation
of facts: is democracy being served or perverted
in the premises? With all the new issues, ever
increasing complexity of the world we live in, is it
in the interest of democratic development, of
democracy’s future, to opportunistically and
manipulatively platitudinize the masses’ mental-
ity? When oligarch serving laws occupy the moral
space where ethics are appropriate and needed,
do we not reduce democratic culture to a contest
between advocates as opposed to a quest for
universal human elevation and enlightenment?
But of course, the Darwinian jungle is about
dominance of the fittest by any means possible
and the its media arm purports to maintain peace
and tranquility in the premises by psychologically
manipulating, if not brainwashing the vulnerable
under classes.
399
Right Wing Media Blitz
Riz Khan who came into the spotlight while presenting BBC
World News and later for CNN International currently host
his own shows at Al Jazeera English, One on One and Riz
Khan. His polite and friendly style of getting interviewees to
talk openly and freely contrasts sharply with the interrogat-
ing approach of most other major news media interviewers.
Like CNN’s Larry King, who has a friendly style and has
been in the business long enough to cultivate a vast array of
celebrity friendships, Riz Khan is the star of the network he
works for. He thrives on interactive interviews in which his
guess can interact with viewers who pose questions by tele-
phone.
Riz Khan, a Muslim who grew up in London, though
born in Yemen of mixed Kashmir and Pakistani roots, has
come under attack by the conservative American media ana-
lyst L. Brent Bozell III for refusing to pass judgment on
whether Hamas and Hezbollah are terrorist organizations.
Khan’s style as a media celebrity is to promote understand-
ing and to avoid platitudes. He is joined in this approach by
Al Jazeera colleague David Frost (photo upper left column),
once a celebrity satirist but now in his early 70s has also
adopted the polite, friendly style that prevails at Al Jazeera,
though the Doha, Qatar based network has its share of inter-
rogative journalists. Frost interviews a number of personali-
ties in succession on his weekly Al Jazeera program, Frost
Over the World.
Sir David Frost, whose interviews with U.S. President
Richard Nixon inspired a play performed both in London and
on New York’s Broadway and eventually informed a motion
picture, is also known for That Was the Week that Was,
Breakfast with Frost and Frost on Sunday, all on BBC.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Information Media/Essay

Operating System Designing

as a Political Function:
Constitutional and
Essay State Institutional Theory
By Muhammed Kamil
Introduction

I n approaching this compound subject, Operat-

ing System Designing as a Political Function:
Constitutional and State Institutional Theory, we
need first acknowledge the art/science duality of
politics. Aristotle called politics the master art, cit-
ing that its influences pervade every aspect of so-
cietal life. Politics has been described as the art of
the possible, which could either mean accurately
determining what can realistically be done or
achieved; or what the factor manipulation artist
can ultimately manage to do with power of mind
and will, not to mention power of the state. In any
event, politics has been played in a variety of con-
texts, including democracy, political dictatorship,
military rule, monarchy and theocracy. Democracy
is no doubt the most complex and advanced con-
text for politics, because of the deference it sub-
scribes for the popular will and pleasure.
Yet, democracy is no monolith and a political
system may imbibe democratic principles without
being conventionally democratic; that is to say,
there are discernable, even significant, elements of
Spheres publisher and editor-in-chief Muhammed Kamil
democracy in Iran, China and Cuba, for example,
but these countries do not purport to be democra-
to the highest levels, are more democratic than the
cies in the conventional sense that South Africa,
United States despite their non-subscription to
Ghana, Nigeria, Honduras, Brazil, Chile, Japan,
partisan politics. The socialist countries had always
South Korea, Germany and the United States do.
referred to themselves as “popular and democratic
Nevertheless, being democratic has become virtu-
republics”, despite operating essentially one party,
ally a universal ideal and countries that do not pur-
politically totalitarian systems. I should note here
port to be democracies in the conventional liberal
that Qhadaffi’s renowned Green Book focuses es-
sense that upholds multiparty competitive politics,
sentially on what he terms “the problem of
the right to oppose and dissent, uncensored me-
[achieving] democracy” and with dedication to that
dia, balance of powers and independence of the
he elaborates a non-partisan model of governance
judiciary, often claim to be substantially more de-
that he considers outdoing the conventional parti-
mocratic than states where the political arena is
san politics democracies for democratic purity.
open and competitive.
The contemporary Islamic theocrats in Iran
To the ideologues in Castro’s Cuba or Qha-
and elsewhere know that the Quran which they
daffi’s Libya, their countries, which offer free medi-
place above the popular will and pleasure with re
cal care from cradle to grave and free education up
400 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Information Media/Essay Constitutional & State Institutional Theory
spect to the limits of human liberty orders conduct
of affairs by “mutual consultation”; so they are
concerned with the optimum limits of democratic
will and pleasure in respect to immutable theologi-
cal precepts. However, the institution of a supreme
theocrat that holds office for life compromises de-
mocratic practice, as we saw during the political
crisis following the mid 2009 elections.

Democratic Collaboration
Inasmuch as the game of politics has proved to be
an all consuming endeavor for those in its arena,
invariably compromising the politicians objectivity
and reflection, intellectual observers have given
rise to the academic disciplines of political science
and political economy, to afford expansive system- Political Styles: George W. Bush, the U.S.A.’s 43rd president,
atic study of and reflection upon politics. Some boasted that he was not a text book player but trusted his gut
political scientists have gone so far in this vein as reactions; his contemporary British Prime Minister Tony Blair
to propose quantitative analysis as an empirical was distinguished by the combined force of his lawyer’s intellect
tool for optimum refinement of political theory; and imposing theatrical style.
but the prevailing school of thought continues to
emphasize the essentially artistic nature of real
politics. The statement of U.S. president George W.
Bush to Washington Post journalist Bob Wood-
ward, “I’m not a textbook player, I’m a gut player,”
alerts us to the fact that at the pinnacles of hege-
monic power political actors, though not indiffer-
ent to statistics and scientifically formulated data,
still see politics in terms of what they believe they
can possibly achieve as personalities against the
factors of resistance.
Perhaps nothing satisfies an ambitious politi-
cian more than beating the odds and causing the
textbooks to be re-written. Therefore, the political
scientist, to be effective, must appreciate the sheer
artistry, the driving psychology and the intriguing
interplay of staccato and legato dynamics in the
political arena. Hence, the first in our compaction
of theories is the Democratic Collaboration Theory, Libya’s Colonel Qaddafi who overthrew his country’s monarchy
whereupon we seek the broadest possible collabo- in 1969 argues that his popular congresses system optimizes
ration from the population towards high level actu- democracy but there is no provision in Libya for systematic
alization of democracy. At the elite level this col- change of leadership.
laboration is among political actors and thinkers,
working in league to progressively perfect the art/ think tanks present themselves under the label,
science of politics. Such collaboration is already policy consultants, which distinguishes them from
conventional in the more dynamic occidental de- the policy institutes sustained by government; and
mocracies and in some African countries, particu- most of the academic communities on Nigeria’s
larly Nigeria and South Africa. Both countries have university campuses operate consultancy units that
already begun developing the private think tank offer intellectual services on a contractual or com-
culture and have a number of semi-autonomous mercial basis.
institutions for political scientists to study and de- At the plebeian level Democratic Collabora-
velop theories and discussions concerning policy tion pertains to optimal political education of the
and constitutional questions. In Abuja the private population, principally through the educational
401 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Information Media/Essay Constitutional & State Institutional Theory
system where students would be given a basic un-
derstanding of politics that would at least enable
them to know enough to have a good idea about
the extent of what they don’t know; so that they
ask probing questions and make perceptive obser-
vations. Secondly, through the news and public
information media the public and the world should
ideally be afforded objective understanding of is-
sues. This of course hardly pertains in reality, but in
some African countries journalist associations have
from time to time been concerned with profes-
sional ethics and in fact have ethics committees.
Arriving at consensus on ethical issues is often not
easy but in free and open information regime so-
cieties competition invariably gives rise to media
houses whose stock in trade is objectivity and fair-
ness, as well as those dealing in sensationalism and
bias. In the final analysis the open society’s public
preference and inclination determines whether the
ethically conscious or mercenary information dis-
semination approach holds more sway.
Equally in the final analysis, political maturity
and stability are enhanced not only by accurate
and balanced conveyance of information, but also
by deliberate intent of journalists to avoid anarchy
and destabilization, which in Africa can provoke
military intervention, and promote enlightened
understanding of the complex issues in tandem
with focus on policy, legislative and constitutional
solutions.
In recent years the term stakeholders has be-
come prominent in our political lexicon, no doubt
because it represents the idea of discussion, coop-
eration and collaboration of the various sectors of
society for the optimum good of the body politic. It
appears that the term is more used in developing
countries than in the Global North, but that just
goes to say that there is a greater consciousness in
Africa, for instance, to avoid destabilizing conflict
that usually results from exclusion; for even trans-
national corporations in Africa, when perceiving or
experiencing exclusion, such as nationalization,
have been wont to get involved in coup d’états and
insurgencies, not to mention sectors of the na-
tional citizenry.
Equity
In conjunction with Democratic Collaboration there
must be an Equity Principle. Democracy is not an
end in itself but a means towards optimum societal
potential fulfillment, which invariably necessitates
optimal individual self-realization.
Since individuals are multifarious in nature
Chile’s President Michelle Bachelet retired from the presidency
in January 2010 after serving one term in accordance with
Chile’s constitution. She like Brazil’s President Luca da Silva who
retires this year after two terms was very popular up until the
end of her tenure but never sought to exploit the favorable poll
numbers by proposing constitutional amendment to allow her to
continue in office. She is at liberty however to contest the presi-
dency again after sitting out one term. Da Silva has the same
option in Brazil.
One term presidency is a growing trend in Latin America,
now adopted by Honduras and Uruguay in addition to Chile.
and potential, democratic collaboration between
government and the population to which it is obli-
gated is supposed to be broad, encompassing as
the full spectrum of human life. Socio-economic
vision and modeling to the end of realizing an eco-
nomically viable society that reaps the benefits of
optimal human potential development are funda-
mental to achieving genuine democracy, which by
historical definition means rule by the plebeians;
but what we are now pursuing is middle class
based societies with social safety nets so that no
one is excluded from health and decency.
When we talk in terms of stakeholders we
should not presume fixed categories of them. Re-
cently there has been a rift between the Tanzanian
government and foreign companies operating in
the country that while listed on the stock ex-
changes in their home countries refuse to list on
Tanzanian’s stock exchange. These companies
want to remain purely foreign stakeholders in the
African economy but what we are saying is that
democratic collaboration, domestic wealth and
long term stability and viability of the African polity
402 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Information Media/Essay Constitutional & State Institutional Theory
are served and enhanced by integrating
stakeholder interests.
Development of leadership potential
is of essential importance to all societies,
if they are to have progressing futures.
Society needs leadership in all sectors,
whether business, politics, the arts, sci-
ence, technology, medicine, social sci-
ences, academia and civil society. We ob-
serve the African Leadership Academy in
Johannesburg which enrolls secondary
students from all over Africa that have
already established their innovation tal-
ents focuses on encouraging success in
the private sector as a preparation for
eventual public service in the political
arena. Some may argue that a solid back-
ground in law is necessary for political
leadership; or we see that the democratically
elected presidents in Tanzania, Botswana and
South Africa have military career backgrounds; but
in any case leadership potential development
should be broad and open to everyone. Moreover,
the spreading constitutional trend of limiting terms
of political office so that new public leadership
generations in due course emerge encourages
youth to look for to public leadership service as a
challenging opportunity, which in tandem with
continual constitutional reform and development
promises improving standards of governance.
Constitutional Inadequacy
Constitutional inadequacy refers to the deficiencies
in African constitutions that occasion political in-
stability and the multifarious adverse fallout
thereof. A primary political system problem from
time to time common in Africa is that governments
can ignore or violate constitutions with impunity,
even without challenge. This is not only a political
awareness deficiency, but inadequacy in the con-
stitutional design with respect to absence of an
ombudsman institution, as well as judicial inde-
pendence. Institutionalized ombudsman not only
implies public rights defense against abuses by
government, but if we offer the citizenry the op-
portunity to elect ombudsmen who are account-
able to them, we widen the sphere of legal debates
and public discourse in society, which I believe
would lesson both the need and inclination to
armed rebellion, civil disobedience and communal
clashes.
Litigation culture is no doubt vital to attenuat-
ing inclination to armed insurrection in Africa, be-
403
The Castro brothers (Fidel left and Raul right) have ruled
Cuba for 51 years and though Cuba provides universal
free health care from cradle to grave, free education
from primary 1 up to university degrees, the Communist
system’s restrictions on free enterprise has limited op-
portunities for individual and community potential de-
velopment. The state controlled economy has since the
Cuban revolution triumphed in 1959 been unable to sat-
isfy demand for basic consumer goods such as food and
clothes, to the extent that several generations of Cubans
have been acculturated into an economy of rations, of-
ten involving hours spent each standing in queues to buy
basic necessities.
On the other hand, Western capitalism has been
socially Darwinian and macro economic growth has con-
tinually expanded the wealth and income gaps between
rich and poor. Although the Western working class has
become largely middle class, elite greed and excesses
have created financial and management crises in which
many companies and financial institutions faced bank-
ruptcy and unemployment has become double digit.
Social Democratic parties in Europe created free
enterprise based welfare states but these often proved
unsustainable as high budget deficits prompted a shift
to the right of center parties, mostly styled Christian
Democrats, which today dominate Europe.
Remarkably, Brazil’s Workers Party led by Presi-
dent Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva and in Turkey Recep Tayyip
Erdoğan’s Justice & Development Party were able to at
once achieve unprecedented macro economic growth
while massively alleviating poverty and accomplishing
social development. How they managed to do this is
what all democracies, especially in Africa, should want
to study.
cause almost any issue legitimately broached by
insurrectionists or rebels can be entertained in
court. However, in the absence of independent
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Information Media/Essay Constitutional & State Institutional Theory
judiciaries there is not enough confidence in the
courts generally prevailing for judicial resolution of
political grievances to become universally norma-
tive. Moreover, absence of elected ombudsmen
accountable to the electorate and mandated to
defend their rights and pursue redress of their
grievances through litigation is a serious and no
doubt unsustainable limitation on public empower-
ment.
Largely owing to an independent judiciary,
more or less at the American standard, Nigeria has
not careened, despite its incessant political feuds
and crises. States individually and in collective ac-
tion sue the Federal Government in the Supreme
Court and various civil society organizations sue
the government in the public interest. Nigeria's
presidents appoint Supreme Court justices but are
not at liberty to dismiss them, which is the princi-
ple the American Constitution holds in this regard.
However, partisan association between the
dominant party at the national level and dominant
party in the state could compromise the interest
and demands of communities, such as in the Niger
Delta, making violent rebellion appear the only
realistic recourse. That is why institutionalizing the
ombudsman is essential to democratic collabora-
tion enhancement in Africa. The ombudsmen if
strictly non-partisan and accountable to the elec- Columbia’s retiring President Álvaro Uribe pursued imple-
torate would busy himself not only with complaints mentation of the idea of communities development as
of the people against government but also in rec- the basis of national development
onciling communities that are at loggerheads, as that we have ombudsmen representing different
well as mediating to prevent inter-community cri- local government facing off in court. In disputes
ses. between communities ombudsman, as I have said,
Ideally, it seems ombudsmen should come should play mediatory and reconciliation roles. It is
from the judiciary. I don’t think they should not be against the local government authority, the state
radical lawyers, but rather legal professionals who and national governments, as well as against offi-
have a vision towards enhancement of popular cers of these levels of government that the om-
civic education and empowerment as a means to budsmen would represent individuals and civil so-
enhancing the polity’s political maturity and long ciety.
term development. I think the ombudsmen offices What would be the ombudsmen’s role in con-
should be very much involved in civic education, in sumer protection? Consumer protection laws and
collaboration with civil society organizations. regulations and their enforcement should first of
Going forward, I see the ombudsmen as a con- all be the responsibility of government. Civil soci-
stitutionally enshrined fourth arm, or branch, if you ety organizations dedicated to consumer protec-
like, of government elected at the national, state tion are necessary and government is obligated to
and local government level, in Nigeria, for exam- have offices and facilities to handle consumer com-
ple; but in other countries depending on the politi- plaints. For example, that is what Nigeria’s Na-
cal structure. In Liberia, which is divided into coun- tional Agency for Food and Drug Administration
ties and chiefdoms, we would also have ombuds- and Control (NAFDAC) is mandated to do. The Om-
men at three tiers, which I think would be the case budsman would only get involved in a complaint if
throughout most of Africa. I don’t think that om- the government agency responsible is seen to not
budsmen should be mandated to represent com- be faithful to its mandate. In such a case the om-
munities in law suits against other communities so
404 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Information Media/Essay Constitutional & State Institutional Theory
budsman would not be concerned with the com-
mercial entity against which the complaint is
lodged but its case would be with the government
agency mandated to protect consumers.
Environmental protection is a major global
issue of our times and all modern governments
have agencies or ministries responsible for the en-
vironment, but even in highly developed countries,
as we have recently seen in the case of the BP oil
spill in the Gulf of Mexico corruption or compro-
mising relationships between authorities and big
companies can lead to environmental disasters or
at worst systemic disregard for environmental haz-
ards in communities. Here again, the ombuds-
man’s case would be against government as the
first offender, but I think in big cases involving cor-
porations it would be impractical for the company
not to be included in such suits as secondary of-
fender.
In summary, I would say the three branch–
executive, legislative and judiciary– structure of
democratic governance is anachronism, inade-
quate in this era of accentuated popular empower-
ment consciousness. Civil Society Organizations are
mainly advocacy oriented, for policies, legislation
and constitutional reform, but unlike the American
Civil Liberties Union, which to some extent plays an
ombudsman role in the U.S.A., African Civil Society
does not have the financial resources to sustain a
non-governmental organization like ACLU; yet, our
people must be empowered to hold government
and its office holders legally accountable for their
doings.
The State
The French notion of the government as the state
is a misconception and Herbert Spencer’s Social
Darwinist philosophy idea that the state exist to
protect the bourgeoisie from rebellion and crimi-
nality by the plebeians is sheer sophist barbarity. It
is what led to the Marxist philosophical reaction
that the state should be replaced by dictatorship of
the proletariat; and since it is an instrument of
their oppression the proletariat to liberate them-
selves must violently overthrow the state.
From a contemporary humanist perspective,
the state is supposed to be the organized institu-
tionalization of the nation, which is the people’s
domain. Proper government in this context is the
administrator of the people’s state; and of course,
those serving in government are equally part of the
people whose domain the state is. Yet, there ap-
pears need to distinguish the identity and funda-
405
mental institutions of the state from those of the
government elected to administer it; particularly
when government is comprised of partisan politi-
cians.
Governments in contemporary Africa are usu-
ally led by political parties and are of partisan char-
acter, though as our political arenas and societies
become ever more open, partisan excesses are
likely to be curbed by multiparty competition for
popular support. However, there are still glaring
instances of ruling party abuse of power and in
countries ascending in political maturity and so-
phistication, popular demand for better govern-
ance and grassroots empowerment is also growing.
Historically it was seen during Nigeria’s First Re-
public, for example, that the ruthless rivalry be-
tween political parties went so far that the ruling
party began using the police, armed forces and
election machinery to sustain its dominance; the
only neutral force representing the state, which
was the military, eventually intervened. This lesson
in history and others that followed, highlight the
need not only to distinguish between state and
government, but to clothe the former with suffi-
cient referee powers to regulate partisan politics
and curb partisan excesses. Moreover, our quest
for popular empowerment should logically lead us
to the conclusion that the people must assert pos-
session of the state as their domain and clarify that
governments are elected to administer the state
on behalf of the people. This idea vaguely pertains
in all countries that have a non-governing presi-
dent or monarch identified as head of state and a
prime minister as head of government business.
However, I think that to develop this concept for
better governance in Africa, the head of state
should be non-partisan and he should moreover
have power over the military and other security
forces, while judges should be nominated by the
Bar Association for appointment by the president.
This might imply that in a federation like Nige-
ria in addition to the Executive Governors each of
the 36 states has a vice president of the Federal
Republic who with the President of the Republic
constitutes the Federal Republic Council. They
have no governing powers, but possess the ulti-
mate referee powers, which should include moni-
toring and evaluation, issuance of reports on the
state of Republic, appointment and dismissal au-
thority over the Independent National Elections
Commission and command of the military. Ideally
all candidates contesting the presidential and vice
presidential elections should be independents.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Information Media/Essay Constitutional & State Institutional Theory
Actually, these are somewhat random ideas
and others may have better ones; however, what
I’m stressing in essence is enhancement of the
quality of democracy through greater popular em-
powerment to the end of optimal universal com-
munity and individual potential development. I
concur fully with Columbia’s Uribistas philosophy
of community development as the basis of national
development and in fact I’m rather impressed with
the advance of constitutional and political policy
thinking taking place in Latin America today. I
would therefore advise that African political scien-
tists and thinkers seek to formalize dialogue, per-
haps through universities, strategic studies insti-
tutes and think tanks with the Latin Americans.
System Designing as a Political Function
In this era of unprecedented business competitive-
ness, modern organization development revolves
around the themes of perpetual analysis for persis-
tent or periodic improvement and dynamism, to
optimally efficient ends. In many countries, par-
ticularly in the Global North, government minis-
tries and agencies also use system analysis and de-
signing as tools of efficiency optimization. The ex-
pensive question is however: how can system
analysis be introduced into constitutional and state
institutional designing to an effect analogous to
corporate and bureau management?
Constitutional drafting continues to be the
political delegate attended process that it was over
two-hundred years ago and this is of course consis-
tent with democratic principles. To stress the tech-
nocratic competence imperative in derogation of
the popular mechanisms of constitutional promul-
gation, such as the constituent assembly and refer-
endums, would steer us away from democratic
development towards dictation by elite presump-
tion. To avoid such a regression while giving due
respect to the political science nature of democ-
ratic processes of constitutional reform, re-writing,
amendment and development it is necessary for
the political scientist communities in Africa to im-
bibe and promote the idea of system analysis and
design as political functions and suggest precise
ways for experts in this art/science to technically
interact with and advise constituent assemblies
and voters in constitutional matters. It wouldn’t
hurt, if system designing was included in political
science curriculums with particular reference to
political system deign and management.
406
Prof. Ali Mazrui, perhaps the most famous and influen-
tial African political scientist of our time is the Director
of the Institute of Global Cultural Studies, State Univer-
sity of New York at Binghamton. Born 1933 in Mombasa,
Kenya Prof. Mazrui has published over 35 books and has
also made his points via documentary film. Currently he
holds 9 distinguished academics positions, including
Chancellor of the Jomo Kenyatta University of Agricul-
ture & Technology, Nairobi, Kenya, Albert Luthuli Profes-
sor at Large, University of Jos, Plateau State, Nigeria and
President of the Association of Muslim Social Scientists
of North America.
Stylistically, as a writer Muzrui employs anecdotes,
personal observations and historical facts to broaden
the scope of knowledge and understanding of his audi-
ence. He is very much a commentator but specializes in
distilling the complexities of human affairs into relevant
open questions and also analysis based conclusions and
recommendations. In all of this he is consistently main-
stream, but ironically because he has refused to enter-
tain prejudices he is often accused by those with a less
globalized perspective of being indebted to patrons here
and there. Mazrui is objectively mainstream, but his ori-
entation is global rather than national or parochial. Like
Nkrumah, he is at once a Pan Africanist and an interna-
tionalist; and one of the mentors of the current genera-
tion of cosmopolitan Africans.
One of his main theories, by which he often as-
sesses socio-cultural progress, is what he calls “creative
synthesis”; that is cultures eclectically and with creativ-
ity synthesizing ideas and practices that have contrib-
uted to social, economic and political progress else-
where into their own quest for progress.
Perhaps his most exposed work is the three part
documentary film he did with BBC in 1986, The Africans:
A Triple Heritage, in which he highlights the evolution of
Christian and Islamic influences upon Africa’s traditional
animism and the mutual influences among the three.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Apple sold 300,000 of its new iPad tablet computers
the week of it was introduced into the U.S. market on
April 3, prompting the company to delay its interna-
tional debut until May 28 owing to stock shortfall. As
seen in the two photos, the iPad can be used posi-
tioned either horizontally or vertically; moreover, both
vertical positions are right side up. It has an internal
touch-screen keyboard but can be used with an exter-
nal Apple keyboard.

407
 Science & Technology/Computers

Apple iPad
Report

T he long anticipated and already widely re-

viewed Apple iPad was launched in the
United States on April 3 with many customers hav-
ing taken advantage of Apple’s offer to ship free
all iPad’s pre-launch ordered. Well promoted by
Apple in the face of mixed reviews, the one and
half pound, half inch depth computer marketed as
a tablet computer platform for audio and visual
media such as books, periodicals, movies, music,
and games, as well as internet content, had sold 3
million units as of June 22nd.
The iPad works on the same operating system
as the earlier iPod Touch and iPhone, albeit a
slightly older version. Aside from its own applica-
tions the iPad can run those developed for the
iPhone. Without modification, it will only run pro-
grams approved by Apple and distributed via its
online store.
Like iPhone and iPod Touch, the iPad is con-
trolled by a multi-touch display — a break from
most previous tablet computers, which used a
pressure-triggered stylus. The iPad uses Wi-Fi or a
3G mobile data connection to browse the Internet,
load and stream media, and install software. The
device is managed and synced by iTunes on a per-
sonal computer via USB cable.
The iPad's touch-screen display is a 25 cm
(9.7 in) liquid crystal display (1024 × 768 pixels)
with fingerprint-resistant and scratch-resistant
glass. Like the iPhone, the iPad is designed to be
controlled by bare fingers; normal gloves and styli
that prevent electrical conductivity may not be
used, although there are special gloves and styli
designed for this use.
The display responds to two other sensors: an
ambient light sensor to adjust screen brightness
and a 3-axis accelerometer to sense iPad orienta-
tion and switch between portrait and landscape
modes. Unlike the iPhone and iPod touch built-in
applications, which work in three orientations
(portrait, landscape-left and landscape-right), the
iPad built-in applications support screen rotation
in all four orientations (the three aforementioned
ones along with upside-down), meaning that the
408
Priced from $500, Apple ipad tablet PC, 242.8mm
(9.56 inches) high; 189.7mm (7.47 inches) wide and
13.4mm (0.53 inch) depth weighs 680 grams (1.5
pounds)
device has no intrinsic "native" orientation; only
the position of the home button changes. Hence,
there is no turning it upside down; either way its
rights side up.
Yet, the iPad has a switch to lock out the
screen rotation function (reportedly to prevent
unintended rotation when the user is lying down).
There are a total of four physical switches, includ-
ing a home button below the display that returns
the user to the main menu, and three plastic
physical switches on the sides: wake/sleep and
volume up/down, along with the screen rotation
lock.
The iPad uses an internal rechargeable lith-
ium-ion polymer battery. Apple claims that the
iPad's battery can provide up to 10 hours of video,
140 hours of audio playback, or one month on
standby. Like any battery technology, the iPad's
LiPo battery loses capacity over time, but is not
designed to be user-replaceable. In a program
similar to the battery-replacement program for
the iPod and the original iPhone, Apple will re-
place an iPad that does not hold an electrical
charge with a refurbished iPad.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Science & Technology/Genetics
'Artificial life' breakthrough announced by scientists
By Victoria Gill, Science reporter BBC News

Scientists in the US have succeeded in developing the first living cell to be con-
trolled entirely by synthetic DNA.
The researchers constructed a bacterium's "genetic
software" and transplanted it into a host cell.
The resulting microbe then looked and be-
haved like the species "dictated" by the synthetic
DNA.
The advance, published in Science, has been
hailed as a scientific landmark, but critics say there
are dangers posed by synthetic organisms.
Some also suggest that the potential benefits of the
technology have been over-stated.
But the researchers hope eventually to design
bacterial cells that will produce medicines and fuels
and even absorb greenhouse gases.
The team was led by Dr. Craig Venter of the J. Craig
Venter Institute (JCVI) in Maryland and California.
He and his colleagues had previously made a
synthetic bacterial genome, and transplanted the
genome of one bacterium into another.
Now, the scientists have put both methods
together, to create what they call a "synthetic cell",
although only its genome is truly synthetic.
Dr. Venter likened the advance to making new
software for the cell. Dr. Craig Ventor
The researchers copied an existing bacterial
genome. They sequenced its genetic code and then The scientists "decoded" the chromosome of
used "synthesis machines" to chemically construct an existing bacterial cell - using a computer to read
a copy. each of the letters of genetic code.
How a synthetic cell
was created

They copied this code and chemically con-

structed a new synthetic chromosome, piecing to-
gether blocks of DNA.
409 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Science & Technology/Genetics
The team inserted this chromosome into a
bacterial cell which replicated itself. Synthetic bac-
teria might be used to make new fuels and drugs.
'New industrial revolution'
Dr. Venter and his colleagues hope eventually to
design and build new bacteria that will perform
useful functions.
"I think they're going to potentially create a
new industrial revolution," he said.
"If we can really get cells to do the production
that we want, they could help wean us off oil and
reverse some of the damage to the environment by
capturing carbon dioxide."
Dr. Venter and his colleagues are already col-
laborating with pharmaceutical and fuel companies
to design and develop chromosomes for bacteria
that would produce useful fuels and new vaccines.
But critics say that the potential benefits of
synthetic organisms have been overstated.
Dr. Helen Wallace from Genewatch UK, an or-
ganisation that monitors developments in genetic
technologies, told BBC News that synthetic bacteria
could be dangerous.
"If you release new organisms into the envi-
ronment, you can do more harm than good," she
said.
"By releasing them into areas of pollution,
[with the aim of cleaning it up], you're actually re-
leasing a new kind of pollution.
"We don't know how these organisms will be-
have in the environment." Dr Wallace accused Dr
Venter of playing down the potential drawbacks.
"He isn't God," she said, "he's actually being
very human; trying to get money invested in his
technology and avoid regulation that would restrict
its use."
410
But Dr. Venter said that he was "driving the
discussions" about the regulations governing this
relatively new scientific field and about the ethical
implications of the work.
He said: "In 2003, when we made the first syn-
thetic virus, it underwent an extensive ethical re-
view that went all the way up to the level of the
White House.
"And there have been extensive reviews in-
cluding from the National Academy of Sciences,
which has done a comprehensive report on this
new field.
"We think these are important issues and we
urge continued discussion that we want to take
part in."
Ethical discussions
Dr. Gos Micklem, a geneticist from the University
of Cambridge, said that the advance was
"undoubtedly a landmark" study.
But, he said, "There is already a wealth of sim-
ple, cheap, powerful and mature techniques for
genetically engineering a range of organisms.
Therefore, for the time being, this approach is
unlikely to supplant existing methods for genetic
engineering".
The ethical discussions surrounding the crea-
tion of synthetic or artificial life are set to continue.
Professor Julian Savulescu, from the Oxford
Uehiro Centre for Practical Ethics at the University
of Oxford, said the potential of this science was "in
the far future, but real and significant".
"But the risks are also unparalleled," he con-
tinued. "We need new standards of safety evalua-
tion for this kind of radical research and protec-
tions from military or terrorist misuse and abuse.
"These could be used in the future to make
the most powerful bio-weapons imaginable. The
challenge is to eat the fruit without the worm."
The advance did not pose a danger in the form of
bio-terrorism, Dr Venter said.
"That was reviewed extensively in the US in a
report from Massachusetts Institute of Technology
(MIT) and a Washington defence think tank, indi-
cating that there were very small new dangers
from this.
"Most people are in agreement that there is a
slight increase in the potential for harm. But there's
an exponential increase in the potential benefit to
society," he told BBC's Newsnight.
"The flu vaccine you'll get next year could be
developed by these processes," he added.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Science & Technology/Particle Physics
space.com – Tue May 18, 2010
SPACE.com Staff
Why We Exist: Matter Wins Battle Over Antimatter
T he seemingly inescapable fact that matter
and antimatter particles destroy each other
on contact has long puzzled physicists wonder-
ing how life, the universe or anything else can
exist at all. But new results from a particle accel-
erator experiment suggest that matter does
seem to win in the end.
The experiment has shown a small — but
significant — 1 percent difference between the
amount of matter and antimatter produced,
which could hint at how our matter-dominated
existence came about.
The current theory, known as the Standard
Model of particle physics, has predicted some
violation of matter-antimatter symmetry, but
not enough to explain how our universe arose
consisting mostly of matter with barely a trace
of antimatter.
But this latest experiment came up with an
unbalanced ratio of matter to antimatter that
goes beyond the imbalance predicted by the
Standard Model. Specifically, physicists discov-
ered a 1 percent difference between pairs of
muons and antimuons that arise from the decay
of particles known as B mesons.
The results, announced Tuesday, came
from analyzing eight years worth of data from
the Tevatron collider at the Department of En-
ergy's Fermi National Accelerator Laboratory in
Batavia, Ill.
"Many of us felt goose bumps when we
saw the result," said Stefan Soldner-Rembold, a
particle physicist at the University of Manches-
ter in the United Kingdom. "We knew we were
seeing something beyond what we have seen
before and beyond what current theories can
explain."
The Tevatron collider and its bigger cousin,
the Large Hadron Collider at CERN in Switzer-
land, can smash matter and antimatter particles
together to create energy, as well as new parti-
cles and antiparticles. Otherwise, antiparticles
only arise due to extreme events such as nu-
clear reactions or cosmic rays from dying stars.
Measurements made by the DZero collabo-
ration, a 500-member international group, are
still limited by the number of collisions recorded
411
so far. That means physicists will continue to
collect data and refine their analysis of the mat-
ter-antimatter struggle for dominance.
Researchers came up with their latest find-
ing by performing a so-called blind data analy-
sis, so that they would not bias their analyses
based on what they observed. They have sub-
mitted their results to the journal Physical Re-
view D.
What is antimatter?
By Life's Little Mysteries Staff
Antimatter particles are sub-atomic particles
with properties opposite those of normal mat-
ter particles. For example, a positron is the anti-
particle equivalent of the electron and has a
positive charge. When a particle and its antipar-
ticle meet, they annihilate, releasing massive
amounts of energy, according to Einstein's fa-
mous equation E=mc^2, where E is equal to en-
ergy, m is equal to mass, and c is the speed of
light.
Antimatter particles are created in ultra
high-speed collisions. In the first moments after
the Big Bang, only energy existed. As the uni-
verse cooled and expanded, particles of both
matter and antimatter were produced in equal
amounts.
But antimatter is rare in today's universe.
Scientists aren't sure why. One theory suggests
more normal matter was created than antimat-
ter in the beginning, so that even after mutual
annihilation there was enough normal matter
left to form stars, galaxies and us.
The phenomenon was first predicted in
1928 by English physicist Paul Dirac. He first
proposed the existence of antiparticles when he
derived equations which would work for an
electron with a negative charge and an electron
with a positive charge—an antiparticle. His pre-
dictions were confirmed with experiments in
1932 by American physicist Carl Anderson.
************************
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Science & Technology/Space Travel
AciBuff.com – Tue May 4, 2010/ Official NSA launch press release and photos
Atlantis launched on last flight into space
May 14, 2010 at 18:20:09 UTC, NASA successfully
launched the Space Shuttle Atlantis on its
32nd flight – the 34th shuttle mission to the Inter-
national Space Station (ISS). STS-132 is the final
scheduled flight for Atlantis. It is also the first US
spaceflight since STS-97 to only have veteran as-
tronauts (astronauts who have flown at least one
previous mission) on board. Six crew members of
STS-132, commanded by NASA astronaut and US
Navy captain Kenneth “Hock” Todd Ham (STS-
124), will stay in space 11 Days 18 Hours 23 Min-
utes and land at the Kennedy Space Center on
May 26 12:44 (UTC time). Mission Specialists
Garrett Reisman (STS-123, Expedition 16, Expedi-
tion 17, STS-124), Michael Good (STS-125) and
Steve Bowen (STS-126) will spend a total of 19.5
hours outside the station on flight days 4, 6 and 8.
Atlantis’ 12-day mission will deliver the Rus-
sian-built Mini Research Module-1 that will pro-
vide additional storage space and a new docking
port for Russian Soyuz and Progress spacecraft.
412
MRM-1, also known as Rassvet (dawn in Russian),
will be permanently attached to the bottom port
of the station’s Zarya module. MRM-1 will carry
important hardware on its exterior including a
radiator, airlock and a European robotic arm. At-
lantis also will deliver additional station hardware
stored inside a cargo carrier.
Three spacewalks are planned to stage spare
components outside the station. On flight day 4,
Reisman and Bowen will install a spare space-to-
ground Ku-band antenna on the station’s truss, or
backbone. Then they will install a new tool plat-
form on Dextre. The spacewalkers will break the
torque on bolts holding batteries in place on the
truss, in preparation for their removal and re-
placement on the second and third spacewalks.
Battery preparation work was deferred from STS-
131 to this flight.
On flight day 6, Bowen and Good will remove
and replace three of the six batteries on the port
truss to store electricity from the solar
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Science & Technology/Space Travel
Attired in training versions of their shuttle launch and entry suits, these six astronauts take a break from training to
pose for the STS-132 crew portrait. Pictured clockwise are NASA astronauts Ken Ham (bottom), commander; Garrett
Reisman and Michael Good, both mission specialists; Tony Antonelli, pilot; Piers Sellers and Steve Bowen both mission
specialists - Credit: NASA
arrays on that truss. The used batteries will be in-
stalled on the cargo carrier for return to Earth on
Atlantis. On flight day 8, Good and Reisman will
install the final three new batteries on the truss
and put the old batteries on the carrier.
Next, if time permits, they will retrieve a grap-ple
fixture from Atlantis’ payload bay and bring it in-
side the station for use as a spare.
A compact disk containing the digital copies
of all entries submitted to NASA’s Space Shuttle
Program Commemorative Patch Contest will be
flown on STS-132. The contest was held to mark
the end of the shuttle era. The winning patch was
designed by Blake Dumesnil of Hamilton Sund-
strand, Johnson Space Center. A panel of NASA
judges selected the winning patch from 85 entries
submitted by NASA employees and contractors.
During its 32 missions and more than 25 years
of service Space Shuttle Atlantis has carried more
than 200 astronauts and flown more than 100 mil-
lion miles. Atlantis lifted off on its maiden voyage
on October 3, 1985, on mission 51-J. Later mis-
sions included the launch of the Magellan probe to
Venus on STS-30 in May 1989, Galileo interplane-
Atlantis launched on last flight into space
tary probe to Jupiter on STS-34 in October 1989,
the first shuttle docking to the Mir Space Station
on STS-71 in June 1995 and the final Hubble ser-
vicing mission on STS-125 in May 2009.
Although STS-132 is the last scheduled flight
of Space Shuttle Atlantis, the orbiter will be pre-
pared for the possibility of a STS-335 Launch On
Need (LON) mission, in the unlikely event that STS-
134 suffers severe damage requiring a crew res-
cue. If LON is not required, Atlantis, her external
tank, and her two solid rocket boosters will have
been prepared to nearly flight-ready status but
will not be used for flight. The potential STS-135
would use this prepared and paid-for hardware to
fly a full operational mission. Mission planners
anticipate STS-135 would fly four crew members
and a Multi-Purpose Logistics Module to the Inter-
national Space Station (ISS). The launch could oc-
cur after STS-134, in early 2011. Because STS-135
would not have its own shuttle-based LON mis-
sion, two Russian Soyuz spacecraft would be used
in the event a crew rescue is needed.
*********************************
413 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Brazil's Luis Fabiano oversteps Chile’s goalkeeper to score his team's second goal during the World Cup
round of 16 soccer match between the two South American countries at Ellis Park Stadium in Johannesburg,
South Africa, Monday, June 28, 2010 Associated Press photograph

414
Sports/Basketball

Lakers Champions Again

Report

Elected finals Most Valuable Player, Los Angeles Lakers Kobe Bryant won his 5th championship ring, scoring
10 of his game leading 23 points in the final quarter of the last game. Game photos by Sports Illustrated

T he Cleveland Cavaliers led by “King”

Lebron James entered America’s National
Basketball Association (NBA) playoffs in April
with the best season record, winning 61 games,
415
but it was the reigning champions Los Angeles
Lakers that prevailed in the grueling 8 team tour-
nament. The Lakers’ Kobe Bryant proved once
again that while Lebron is popularly referred to
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Basketball Lakers Champions Again
as the king, he rules the court. Cleveland’s exit
after losing in the second round of the Eastern
Conference finals to the Boston Celtics, 2 games to
4, was a shocker and critics poured blame on
Lebron, accusing him of lacking determination to
prevail despite poor accompaniment from his
teammates. It was the earliest exit for the top
seed since 2007 when Dallas Mavericks were
booted out in the first round by San Francisco’s
Golden Gate Warriors. Cleveland got consolation
in the first round, beating the Chicago Bulls for the
first time since 1989 when the legendary Michal
Jordon’s game winning shot just before the game
ending buzzer knocked the Cavaliers out in the
first round. The Cavaliers also entered the 2009
playoffs first seeded, only to be dismissed in the
third round by Orlando Magic.
Second seeded Orlando Magic finished sev-
enth seeded Charlotte Bobcats 4 games to none in Celtics Kevin Garnett scored 17 points, and blocked 4 shots in
the first round. Third seeded Atlanta Hawks, after game 7
winning the first game of the series against sixth
seeded Milwaukee Bucks came back from a 3-1
deficit to win the first round series 4-3. Fourth
seeded Boston Celtics knocked fifth seeded Miami
Heat out in the first round, taking the series 4
games to 1.
In the semifinals, Boston terminated first
seeded Cleveland’s championship ambitions,
eliminating Lebron James & Co. in a 4-2 series
sweep. Cleveland won two out of the first three
games, but the Celtics came back battering the
Cavaliers 97-87, 120-88 and 94-85.
Boston clinched the Eastern Conference
championship with a 4-2 series sweep of Orlando
Magic, coming back from a 113-92 loss to Magic in
the fifth game to complete the best of 7 with a 96-
84 trouncing of the Florida team at Boston’s TD
7’ tall power forward Paul Gasol scored 19 points in game 7
Garden with nearly 20,000 arena fans looking on.
Meanwhile, reigning champions, Western Confer-
ence first seed Los Angeles Lakers prevailed
against Oklahoma Thunder 4 games to 2 to ad-
vance to the semi-finals where they encountered
Utah Jazz. Fifth seeded Jazz had knocked out
fourth seeded Denver Nuggets in a 4-2 first round
series win.
The Lakers demolished Jazz, sweeping the
Western Conference semi-final 4 games to none.
Third seeded Phoenix Suns showed no mercy for
seventh seeded San Antonio Spurs, eliminating the
Texans in four games. However, the Suns bowed
to the champions, as the Lakers won the Western
Conference championship in a 4 games to 2 rout-
ing, setting up another NBA championship show- Celtics Rajon Rondo had 14 points, 10 assist and 8 rebounds
416 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Basketball Lakers Champions Again
down with the Boston Celtics.
The two greatest teams in NBA history dueled
to the last before the Lakers prevailed 83-79 in the
7th game. In the first game at Los Angles’ Staple
Center the Lakers came out on top 102-89, with
Kobe Bryant topping shooters with 30 points,
while Paul Pierce poured in 24 for Boston. Boston
came back in the second game at Staples Center,
quelling the Lakers `103-98. In the first game at
Boston’s TD Garden the Lakers went up 2-1 in the
series, shaming the home team 91-84. Boston
came back with a 96-89 win to even the series at
two games a piece; then came within one game of
being champions with a 92-86 victory in game five.
The play moved back to Los Angeles where a
visibly exhausted Kobe Bryant proved he is still
court boss, the champion of champions, leading
the Lakers to successive victories with 26 points in
a 89-67 battering of the Celtics in game 6 and 23
points as the Lakers captured the silverware edg-
Duel of the Aces: Celtics Paul Pierce and Lakers Kobe Bryant
ing out the Celtics 83-79 to end the 2009-2010
basketball season.
For Los Angels it was their 16th NBA title, clos-
ing the gap to 1 on the Celtics who are the all time
best NBA team with 17. However 16 of Boston’s
17 championships were won between 1957 and
1986, while the Lakers have won 11 titles since
1972. During the 1980s with Kareem Abdul Jabar,
Magic Johnson, James Worthy and coach Pat Riley
the Lakers won 5 NBA championship titles in 9
years. From 2000 to 2002 the Lakers won three
successive NBA titles with superstars Shaquille
O’Neal, Kobe Bryant and Hall of Fame coach Phil
Jackson.
The heydays of the Boston Celtics were the
era of high scoring guard Bob Cousy, rebound king
at center Bill Russell and forward Tommy Hein- Boston’s Glen Davis came of the bench to score 6 points and
sohn. The Celtics won a phenomenal 11 champion- make 9 rebounds
ships in 13 years with the amazing threesome.
Heinsohn who later coached the Celtics and is the
only man involved in one capacity or another in all
17 Celtic NBA titles, coached the team to champi-
onships in 1974 and 1976.

With appreciation to Sports Illustrated for photos

Kobe and Los Angeles fans savoring victory
417 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Boxing
Haye: Ruiz down, Klitschko to go
W orld Boxing Association heavyweight
champion David Haye, on April 3rd, in his
first title defense since outpointing Russian giant
Nikolay Valuev last November floored challenger
and twice world champion John Ruiz in the first
round, setting the stage for a TKO in the 9th.
Despite weighing in 9 pounds lighter than
the experienced 38 year old American, Britain’s
Haye, 29, dominated the fight throughout, win-
ning all but one round on the judges score cards.
Hit with a powerful right cross from the light-
footed, dancing and fast moving champion 30
seconds into round one, Ruiz flew backwards to
the canvas. He got up and fought back gallantly,
resisting Haye’s determination to finish him in
short order, though the champion with a barrage
of punches floored him a second time, for an
eight count, before the first round ended.
Haye, who would knock Ruiz down twice
more that night, continued the aggression in the
second round with quick jabs and three upper-
cuts. In the third he stiffened Ruiz’s legs with a
three punch combination.
Ruiz made his best showing in the fourth
round, landing left-right combinations. He came
into the fifth continuing the reversal of fortune
but two left-right combinations from the cham-
pion had his knees buckling and head swimming.
The bell saved him for round six.
Haye never let up and after the sixth round
Ruiz’s corner men were debating whether to let
him continue. The two time champion, seeking
418
to join legend Muhammed Ali, Evan-
der Holyfield, Lennox Lewis and Vitali
Klitschko as a three-time world heavy-
weight champion, refused to surren-
der. He boxed into the seventh taking
more punishment. The eighth was
more of the same. When the bell rang
for round nine Ruiz’s corner threw the
white towel over the top rope, signal-
ing he was through.
Haye, 6’3”, weighing in at 218lbs,
shocked the world last November
when he ducked, dogged and hard
punched his way to victory over then
reigning WBA champ, 7’1’’, 320lbs,
Nikolay Valuev. The fight went the distance with
Haye receiving few blows from the champ, land-
ing many, including penetrating through to Val-
uev’s head; dancing around with such swiftness
and agility that the Russian giant was visibly frus-
trated.
No sooner had Haye retained his title in
Manchester, England, unified IBF, WGO and IBO
heavyweight champ Wladmir Klitschko, 34 from
Ukraine, went on Facebook accusing the WBA
champion of running from him. Klitschko told
Haye pointedly that he will not be respected as
champ as long as the two have not dueled. Haye
went into the Manchester arena sporting a t-
shirt with the severed heads of the two Klitschko
brothers (Vitali Klitschko, 38, is WBC heavy-
weight champion); he was cornered by the chal-
lenge. According to his camp, Haye will fight one
of the Klitschko brothers in November.
Wladmir Kltschko is 6’7”, 4” taller than Haye
and in the 240 to 250lbs range is 25 to 30lbs
heavier, but has been labeled a strong and effi-
cient but dull fighter; in contrast to Haye’s classi-
ness in the ring. Sports writer Harry Reekie was
excited about Haye’s battering of Ruiz, calling it a
“top performance.” Considering the future of the
29 year old British fighter who says he will retire
when he’s 31, Reekie wrote: “I wonder if those
Ukrainian fellas will be interested in taking on
The Hayemaker in the future now?”
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Golf

Mickelson wins Masters, Woods still #1

Report

South Africa’s veteran golfer Ernie Els, (above) known as Big Easy for his 1.91m, 100kg frame and graceful swing,
and America’s Jim Furyk are the only PGA Tour players to win two tournaments in the first half of 2010.

As of June 30th, Els and American Jim Furyk

D espite failing to win a single tournament
this year Tiger Woods remains world num-
ber one ahead of Masters Tournament winner Phil
were the only players on the PGA tour to win two
tournaments this year.
Mickelson. Although Mickelson won the first ma- Els, who has finished second to Woods in tour-
jor of the year, the prestigious Masters in Georgia, naments more times than any other player, is at 40
U.S.A., marking the 38th PGA victory of his career, trying to climb back up in the rankings. He had in
he failed to win any of the regular tournaments 2007 worked out for himself a 3 year plan to catch
and still trails faltering Tiger Woods in PGA rank- Tiger Woods as World # 1, but he still has only 18
ings. Woods has not yet shown any indication that PGA Tour wins to his credit, compared to the 34
he will eventually regain his winning form after year old Woods’ 40.
revelations that he had more than a dozen para-
mours behind his wife’s back. Obviously the public
embarrassment and family disarray he has suf-
fered is affecting his game.
Graham McDonald won the U.S. Open Cham-
pionship on June 20th in California. South Africa’s
former World #1 Ernie Els, won the WGC-CA
Championship on March 14 in Florida and the Ar-
nold Palmer Invitational, also in Florida, on March
29. At the WGC-CA fellow South African Charl
Schwartzeel finished second, 4 strokes behind
compatriot Els. The biggest open question in golf: Will Woods ever
regain his winning ways?
419 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Soccer

World Cup 2010

Report
South Africa
F inally June came, kick off of the World Cup
was just 11 days away and the flow of air
traffic into South Africa was increasing day by day.
Entertainers flocked in along with fans. The air-
waves were loaded with World Cup 2010 South
Africa publicity. Players and sports officials were
media interview favorites. History was being
made; never before had Africa hosted such a co-
lossal sporting event. Despite earlier apprehen-
sions, the compliments of South African hospital-
ity, the warmth and friendliness and the world
class organization were profuse, while detractions
few.
Ironically, the first World Cup played in Africa
was troubled by sub-freezing weather, as the sum-
mer scheduled event found itself in the far sub-
equator zone winter. For a while during the tour-
nament Johannesburg was showered with snow.
Expectations for African teams were high in
South Africa. Upon arrival in Johannesburg, Brazil’s
Pele, no doubt the greatest footballer of the 20th
century, told the press he would like to an African
team win the tournament but with Africa’s highest World Footballer of the Year 2010 Lionel Meessi in World
ranked team, Egypt− ranked 12th, failing to make Cup 2010 action for the Argentina national squad
the finals, and the highest ranked competing
team, Cameroun, going into the tournament in coached South Americans 1-0. World Footballer of
19th place among national teams, the prospects of 2009/2010 Lionel Messi and his teammates shot
an African victor were far fetched. at Enyeama’s goal continuously but the seasoned
With the controversial vuvezela’s droning like 28 year old Hapoel Tel Aviv (Israel Premier
an invasion of a zillion bees at Johannesburg’s Soc- League) goalkeeper earned words of praise from
cer City Stadium, filled to the brim with 91,000 the legendary Maradona for preventing 4 Lionel
spectators, South Africa’s Siphiwe Tshabalala’s Messi blasts and two other sure goals from hitting
thrilled the home continent crowd scoring World the net. He was perhaps the best African per-
Cup 2010’s first goal in the 53rd minute against former of the tournament though his team left
Mexico, from 18 yards out. Mexico which con- the competition without wining a game, at best
trolled the ball most of the game 16 minutes after drawing 2-2 with South Korea.
going down 1-0 got the equalizer that ended the South Korea’s Manchester United midfielder
match in a 1-1 draw when Raphael Marquez fired Ji-Sung Park in wrapping up a 2-0 victory over
into the goal on a cross from substitute Andres Greece became the first English Premiere League
Guardado. player to score at World Cup 2010. South Korea’s
Nigeria’s classy goalkeeper Vincent Enyeama first goal came in the 7th minute of play when Ki-
put on a brilliant performance against Argentina Sung blasted the ball past Greece’s goalkeeper
that won him Man of the Match distinction de- and into the net. Ji-Sung Park’s goal put the icing
spite his side going down to the Diego Maradona on the cake in the 52nd minute.
420 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
421 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa
South African striker Siphiwe Tshabalala (#8) sends the ball past Mexico goalkeeper Oscar Perez (#1) for the
opening goal of World Cup 2010 at Johannesburg’s Soccer City, Friday, June 11, 2010. The two teams played
to a 1 all draw. Martin Meissner - AP Images
England’s goalkeeper headlines making blun-
der in his country’s opening game played against
the United States resulted in a 1-1 draw. Robert
Green let a tame shot by America’s Clint Dempsey
slow roll into the net.
England dominated the game and an early
goal, after just 4 minutes of play, by mis-marked
Steven Gerrard put them in front, only to be
brought to an equal end with the Americans fol-
lowing their goalkeeper’s blunder five minutes
before halftime.
England had opportunities to move ahead,
but both Heskey and Wayne Rooney failed to
shine; the former in front of the goal shot straight
at Howard with only the keeper to beat; the latter
shooting wide, while substitute Shaun Wright-
Phillips, on for the under-par Milner after only 30
minutes, saw his angled drive saved by Howard.
Wayne Rooney was subdued for most of the
game.
France in its opener on Friday June 11 played
Uruguay to a goalless draw.
Algeria played its first game on the 13th in-
stant, losing to Slovenia 1-0. Ghana beat Serbia 1-0
on a penalty kick by Asamoah Gyan. Germany
mauled Australia 4-0.
Netherlands in its first game on Monday, June
14th pinned Denmark 2-0. Japan shut out Camer-
oun 1-0. Reigning champs Italy played Paraguay to
a 1-1 draw in Cape Town.
422
Tuesday, June 15, favorite Brazil got in the
action, downing North Korea 2-1 at Johannes-
burg’s Ellis Park. Ivory Coast drew 0-0 with Portu-
gal at Nelson Mandela Bay Stadium, Port Eliza-
beth. New Zealand and Slovakia played to a 1 all
draw at Royal Bafokeng, Rustenburg.
Wednesday, June 16, Chile beat Honduras 1-
0. Switzerland shut out Spain 1– nil at Moses
Mabhida Stadium in Durban. Uruguay flogged
South Africa 3-0 before a disappointed vuvuzela
droning crowd at Loftus Versfeld stadium, Preto-
ria.
Thursday, June 17, Argentina trounced South
Korea 4-1 at Soccer City, Johannesburg. Greece
out scored Nigeria 2-1 at Free State Stadium,
Bloemfontein. Mexico silenced France 2-0 at Peter
Mokaba Stadium in Polokwane.
Friday, June 18, Serbia upset Germany 1-nil.
The United States played Slovenia to a 2-2 draw.
Neither England nor Algeria managed to score in
their encounter at Cape Town’s Green Point Sta-
dium.
Saturday, June 19, Netherlands eclipsed Ja-
pan 1-0 at Moses Mabhida Stadium, Durban.
Ghana held Australia to a 1 all draw at Rusten-
burg. Denmark finished Cameroun 2-1 in Pretoria.
Sunday, June 20, Brazil quelled Ivory Coat 3-1
at Soccer City. Italy and New Zealand broke even
1-1 at Mbombela Stadium, Nelspruit. Paraguay
laid Slovakia to rest 2-0 at Bloemfontein.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa
Robert Green of England misjudges the ball and lets in a goal during the 2010 FIFA World Cup South Africa Group C
match between England and USA. Martin Rose - Getty Images
Monday, Jun 21, Portugal annihilated North
Korea 7-0 in Cape Town. Chile’s lone goal was
enough to beat Switzerland at Port Elizabeth.
Spain won its first game, suppressing Honduras 2-
0 at Ellis Park, Johannesburg.
Tuesday, June 22, Mexico bowed to Uruguay
0-1 at Rustenburg. South Africa pleased the home
crowd with its first World Cup victory, humiliating
France 2-1 at Bloemfontein. Nigeria contended
with South Korea for a 2 all draw in Durban. Ar-
gentina scored 2 while Greece failed to touch the
back of the net at Polokwane.
Wednesday, June 23, England edged out Slo-
venia 1-0 at Port Elizabeth. U.S.A. had 1 to Alge-
ria’s 0 in Pretoria. Germany hushed Ghana 1-0 at
Soccer City. Australia managed to prevail against
Serbia 2-1 in Nelspruit.
Thursday, June 24, Slovakia finished Italy 3-2
at Ellis Park. Neither Paraguay nor New Zealand
could show a goal to the crowd at Peter Mokaba
Stadium, Polokwane. Japan tamed Denmark 3-1 in
Rustenburg. Cameroun took another bashing, this
time falling 2-1 to Netherlands at Cape Town.
Friday June 25th Brazil and Portugal disap-
pointed the world when neither could score in
Durban. Ivory Coast won its maiden World Cup
423
match, sending North Korea home with a 3-nil
drubbing at Nelspruit. Honduras and Switzerland
left their match goalless at Bloemfontein. Spain
edged out Chile 2-1 in Pretoria.
The knockout stage ended, the Round of 16
remaining teams in the 32 team tournament got
underway Saturday, Jun 26. Uruguay laid South
Korea to rest 2-1 in Port Elizabeth. Ghana earned a
place in the quarter finals prevailing against
U.S.A. 2-1 at Rustenburg.
The following day, Sunday, June 27, Germany
gave England its walking papers with a 4-1 bashing
at Bloemfontein in a controversial game in which
the two referees failed to see an England first half
goal that would have evened the score going into
the second half. Argentina was merciless, sending
Mexico home defeated 3-1 at Soccer City.
Netherlands retained their winning ways,
downing Slovakia 2-1 on Monday, June 28 at Dur-
ban. Also that day, Brazil made its way to the
quarter finals battering Chile 3-0 at Ellis Park, Jo-
hannesburg.
Tuesday, June 29 at Pretoria Japan and Para-
guay staged a goal drought. Spain nipped Portugal
1-0 at Green Point Stadium, Cape Town.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Knockout and Round of 16 Goal Shots at World Cup 2010

Ghana's striker Asamoah Gyan (R) blasts the opening goal past Serbia’s goalkeeper during the Group D first
round match .

Japan's midfielder Keisuke Honda (#18) shoots the ball past Cameroon's goalkeeper Souleymanou Hamidou (R)
during their Group E first round 2010 World Cup football match on June 14, 2010 at Free State Stadium in
Mangaung/Bloemfontein.

424 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Knockout and Round of 16 Goal Shots at World Cup 2010

Gelson Fernandes of Switzerland (#10) scores the first and only goal of the match during his team’s Group H
encounter with Spain, played Durban on June 16th. .Jasper Juinen - Getty Images

Gonzalo Higuain of Argentina heads in his third goal and his side's fourth during their 4-1 bashing of South
Korea in a June 17 Group B match at Soccer City Stadium, Johannesburg Clive Rose - Getty Images

425 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Knockout and Round of 16 Goal Shots at World Cup 2010

Cameroon's striker Samuel Eto'o (#9) overcomes Denmark's defender Daniel Agger (#4) and goalkeeper Tho-
mas Soerensen (R, back) to score during Cameroun’s 2– 1 Group E first round loss to the Danes in Pretoria,
Saturday, June 19 . PIERRE-PHILIPPE MARCOU/AFP - Getty Images

Ivory Coast's striker Didier Drogba (r) celebrates after scoring against Brazil at Soccer City

426 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Knockout and Round of 16 Goal Shots at World Cup 2010

Christiano Ronoldo scores the 7th and final goal of Portugal’s 7-0 battering of North Korea, June 21 in Cape Town

Shane Smeltz of New Zealand (#6) has stunned Italy’s goalkeeper Federico Marchetti (#12) and celebrates
scoring the opening goal during his team’s June 20th 1-1 draw with Italy at Nelspruit. David Cannon - Getty
Images
427 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Knockout and Round of 16 Goal Shots at World Cup 2010

South African striker Katlego Mphela (R) scores past France's goalkeeper Hugo Lloris (L) and France's defender
Gael Clichy during the Group A first round match at Free State Stadium, Mangaung/Bloemfontein,won by
South Africa 2-1. HOANG DINH NAM - Getty Images

Serbia's striker Marko Pantelic (L) scores past Australia's goalkeeper Mark Schwarzer during the Group D first
round encounter won by Australia 2-1 at Mbombela Stadium in Nelspruit. PIERRE-PHILIPPE MARCOU - Getty
Images

428 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Knockout and Round of 16 Goal Shots at World Cup 2010

England's striker Jermain Defoe (#19) scores the opening and only goal of the match past Slovenia's goal-
keeper Samir Handanovic (back, C) during the Group C first round on June 23, 2010 at Nelson Mandela Bay
stadium in Port Elizabeth. PATRICK HERTZOG - Getty Images
.

Robin Van Persie of the Netherlands scores the opening goal past Hamidou Souleymanou of Cameroon during
the Group E match at Cape Town’s Green Point Stadium on June 24, won by Netherlands 2-1
Jamie McDonald - Getty Images

429 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Sports/Soccer
How many people are watching World Cup 2010?
Spanish fans brandish a mock World
Cup trophy at the June 29th game
Report against Portugal in Cape Town
D espite concerns about empty seats in the
first games of the knockout round, by the
time the Round of 16 got underway towards the
end of June South Africa’s World Cup 2010 boss
Danny Jordaan was predicting that his country’s
tournament would beat the attendance tally of
Germany in 2006. Speaking as the Round of 16
ended, Jordaan said, “With the quarterfinals, semi-
finals and final being played at the biggest stadi-
ums in the country, it is possible we will top the
three million fan attendance mark after the final at
Soccer City on July 11. I reckon there is a big possi-
bility we will do it for the first time since the 1994
event in the United States”.
World Cup 2010 organizers blamed corporate
and government ticket holders that stayed away
for the noticeable number of empty seats at the
opening games. Only 4 of the first 11 games were
said to have been sell outs but not a single match
was played in a fully packed stadium. The knock-
out round matches between Algeria and Slovenia
in Polokwane, Japan and Cameroon in Bloemfon-
tein both had more than 10,000 vacant seats in
46,000 and 48,000 capacity stadiums respectively,
and attendance at the New Zealand versus Slova-
kia contest in Rustenburg was nearly 5,000 short
of the 42,000 capacity.
Ticket sales to the local population were said
to have been adversely affected by the gap be-
tween price and purchasing power. At R140 (about
$18.40) tickets were beyond the reach of a sub-
stantial portion of South Africa’s population, while
large screens were set up in neighborhoods ena-
bling television viewing.
Vendors of food and refreshments at Soccer
City interviewed by reporters during the first week
complained of sales below expectations.
A FIFA spokesman told Britain’s Daily Tele-
graph, "What we have realized in our investiga-
tions is that some ticket holders, including interna-
tional ticket holders, have not turned up. We
clearly recognize this [the empty seats] but you
have to recognize the bigger picture. It's not nice
to see empty seats in a stadium but the atten-
dances are good."
430
Soccer City has a capacity of 94,700; mostly
executive seats were empty but attendance at the
South Africa versus Mexico and the Holland- Den-
mark games were both assessed by FIFA to be
over 90,000 at half-time.
However, as the tournament progressed with
no batch of discouraging stories coming out of
South Africa about arrangements and safety,
there was a surge in fans flying in for the remain-
ing games; particularly from countries that sur-
vived the knockout round. By the end of the
Round of 16, stadium attendance had soured to
2.69 million and the number of foreign visitors
had exceeded the 300,000 expected.
Estimates indicated tourists had by the end of
the Round of 16 injected over R6 billion (about
$788.44 million) into the local economy and Jor-
daan was expecting the figure to reach R9 billion
by the time World Cup visitors had gone home.
ESPN paid FIFA $100 million for television
rights to the 2010 and 2014 World Cups, while
Univision spent $325 million. Indicating the impor-
tance of the American TV audience, viewer num-
bers tumbled after the U.S was eliminated, but
during the knockout round the global television
audience was 48% higher than it was during the
knockout round at Germany 2006 World Cup.
World Cup South Africa 2010 opened with the
prediction that it would be the most watched tele-
vision event in history.
Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Fans at World Cup 2010

.Brazilian fan blows vuvuzela above; dancing Brazil fans below

Getty Images

431 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Fans at World Cup 2010

Dutch ladies (top left & right) a Brazil fan kissing a Dutch fan before the start of the Brazil-Netherlands match
Getty Images
432 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Sports/Soccer World Cup 2010 South Africa

Fans at World Cup 2010

Brazil fan art at World Cup South Africa 2010

Getty Images

433 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

 Sports/Tennis

Nadal back on top

action in August at the
Report Rogers Cup in Montreal, but
a quarter-finals lost to Argen-
tina’s Juan Martin del Portro
sent him down to #3 in the
rankings, as Andy Murray
moved up to #2. However,
Murray’s poor showing at the
2009 U.S. Open allowed
Nadal to move back up to #2,
despite losing in the semi-
finals to eventual champion
Del Portro. He finished a tor-
tuous 2009 season losing all
three matches in the World
Tour Finals, though he won
the season’s Golden Bagel
Award for nine 6-0 sets. It
was his third time winning it.
World #1 ranked Rafael Nadal clutching French Open trophy, On the way to Roland Garros Nadal captured
June 5, 2010 the Monte-Carlo Rolex Masters in Monaco, on clay,
becoming the first player during the open era to

R afael Nadal, commonly known as the ‘King of

Clay” for his unbeatable form on clay courts,
climbed back to the world # 1 spot with his June
win a tournament 6 consecutive years. Compatriot
Fernando Verdasco was swept away by Nadal in the
finals 6-0 and 6-1. From Monaco Nadal made his
7th French Open victory at Roland Garros. It was way to the finals of the 2010 Mutua Madrilena Ma-
his 5th French Open title in 6 six years. Nadal had drid Open, where he revenged the previous year’s
previously been #1 from August 18, 2008 to July 5, defeat by Federer, quelling his Swiss rival, then still
2009, after a record 160 weeks in the #2 spot be- #1, in straight sets.
hind Roger Federer. After winning the French Open Nadal was
Nadal began 2010 winning Capitala World eliminated from the AEGON Championships in the
Tennis Championship in Abu Dhabi, United Arab quarter finals by compatriot Feliciano López. Rafa
Emirates, subduing Robin Söldeerling in straight ended June at Wimbledon winning his first two
sets to end the final. Next, in the ExxonMobile matches.
Open in Doha, Qatar, Nadal reached the final,
beating Italy’s Simone Bolelli and Pitito Starace
along the way, but lost to Nikolay Davydenko who
had already eliminated then first ranked Roger
Federer in the semi-finals.
The Australian Open also eluded Nadal, as the
24 year old Spaniard pulled out in the third round
complaining of knee trouble. His doctor prescribed
two weeks of rest to be followed by two weeks
rehabilitation. Nadal, following a fourth round loss
to Robin Söldeerling in the French Open, tempo-
rarily pulled out of the 2009 season with a doctor’s
diagnosis of tendinitis in both knees. Federer re-
placed Nadal as world # 1 on July 6 last year upon
capturing the Wimbledon title. Nadal returned to
434 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Track & Field

Diamond League
Report

T he 2010 outdoor Track & Field season shot

out of the blocks in Doha on May 10th with
Jamaica’s Asafa Powell blazing the 100 meters
trail in 9.81, after clocking 9.75 in his heat. World
100 and 200 meters record holder Jamaican
Usain Bolt was not in Doha for the season opener
of the 14 meet, $6.6 million prize pouch Dia-
mond League, but he had already set the 2010
world lead for 200 meters in his first race of the
year, at Kingston, Jamaica, back in February run-
ning 19.56. It was the fourth fastest 200m on
record.
Powell won the June 4th Oslo 100 meters
with a wind assisted 9.72 and prevailed again in
Rome on June 10th, clocking 9.82.
Bolt joined the Diamond League competi-
tion in the 200m at Shanghai on May 23rd, beat-
ing the field with a 19.76 sprint. American 400
meter hurdles Olympic gold medalist Aneglo Tay-
lor finished second, clocking 20.34. On May 18th
at the World Challenge Games in Daegu, South
Korea, Bolt won the 100m in 9.86, ahead of com-
patriot Michael Frater’s 10.15.
Tyson Gay’s May 16th 19.41 world best at
the Poerade Great City Games down a specially
constructed 200 meter straight track on a street
in Manchester, England, is classified separately
from the standard 200m in which the first half is
run around the curve and the finishing 100m
down the straight; but his 44.89 for the 400m on
April 17 in Gainesville, Florida distinguished him
as the first man in history to have in his career
run 100m under 10 seconds, 200m under 20 sec-
onds and 400m under 45 seconds.
Mexico Olympics (1968) 200m gold medalist Jamaica’s world record holder at 100m and 200m Usain Bolt
Tommie Smith who set the previous record of beats the filed in the 2010 Diamond League 200 meters at
19.5 on a cinder track in San Jose, California, Shanghai, China on May 23rd (top); America’s Carmelita
back in 1966 was in attendance at Manchester, Jeter beating Jamaica’s Veronica Campbell Brown at the
where he told BBC Sports, “It was a great race.” Daegu, South Korea, World Challenge Games on May 19th
Although Smith never competed in the 100 me- (middle) and Germany’s female pole vault ace Carolin Hingst
ters, his sub 20 second 200 meters around a clearing the bar with a winning 4.65 meters in Daegu.
curve affirms that he could cover the distance
435 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Track & Field Diamond League
under 10 seconds, while he ran numerous sub 45
second relay legs on the indomitable U.S. 4 x 400
team of his day.
With Bolt absent at both Rome, reportedly
owing to a minor injury, Olympic bronze medalist
William Dix decisively beat his American compatriot
Wallace Spearman with a stunning 19.86, ending
Michael Johnson’s meet record of 19.93. Spearman
unsuccessfully chased Dix, finishing the distance in
20.5.
None of the top three (Bolt– who withdrew
owing to injury, Gay and Powell) competed in the
Adidas Grand Prix edition of the Diamond League in
New York on June 12th , but 2008 Olympic silver
medalist Richard Thompson set the pace with a
wind aided 9.89 win in the 100m. Jamaican Yohan
Blake was second in 9.91, followed by Daniel Bai-
ley’s 9.92. Blake won the bronze medal in the 2006
junior world championships. Bailey won the 60 me-
ters bronze at the 2010 Indoor World Champion-
ships in Doha. Bailey had won the 200m in Daegu,
South Korea in 20.58.
World 110 meters high hurdles record holder
and Beijing (2008) Olympic champion Dayron
Robles of Cuba made his first Diamond League ap-
pearance of the season in Rome, beating the field in
13.14, ahead of Jamaican Dwight Thomas (13.31)
and Barbados’ world champion Ryan Braithwaite
(13.34). America’s David Oliver won in Shanghai
with 12.99, followed by China’s Dongpeng Shi in
second at 13.39 and Xiang Liu from whom Robles
snatched the world record in 2008 finishing third in
13.40. In Daegu, South Korea on May 19th Oliver
beat Robles, clocking 13.11. Robles finished second
clocking 13.26.
America’s Carmelita Jeter beat Jamaica’s Shelly
-Ann Fraser in Shanghai to win the women’s 100
meters in 11.09. Chandra Sturrup of Bahamas fin-
ished third, clocking 11.38 behind Fraser’s 11.29.
Before going to Shanghai Carmelita who finished
third behind Jamaica’s Veronica Campbell-Brown
and LaVerne Jones-Ferrette of the Virgin Islands in
the 60 meters dash at the Doha World Indoor
Championships in March, beat Veronica in the 100
meters at the Daegu, South Korea, World Challenge
Games on May 19th. Veronica won the women’s
200m at the Diamond League’s Adidas Grand Prix
edition in New York on June 12th, setting a meet (Top) Jamaica’s Asafa Powell at Doha where he opened the Dia-
record of 21.98. Three time world champion Ally- mond League wining the 100m in 9.81 (middle) Usain Bolt
son Felix was in hot pursuit of Veronica all the way crossing the finish line of the 4x100m relay at the Penn Relays in
but the two time Olympic gold medalist from Ja- a meet record time set by Jamaica of 37.9 with Bolt clocked at
maica poured on speed in the final 50 meters, leav- 8.74 for his anchor 100m; (bottom) America’s David Oliver beat-
ing Felix, who clocked 22.02, behind. America’s Na- ing Cuba’s world record holder Dayron Robles in Daegu.
436 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Track & Field Diamond League
tional Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA) record
holder Bianca Knight finished third, clocking 22.59.
Veronica’s time was the fastest for a woman on
U.S. soil in 10 years.
America’s Virginia Powell won the women’s
100m hurdles at Daegu, South Korea on May 19th,
clocking 12.77. America’s Lolo Jones came second.
Athens Olympics (2004) gold medalist Jeremy
Wariner captured the men’s 400 meters at Shangai
and again in Olso and Rome. In Rome the 26 year
old American ran a 2010 world best time of 44.73,
beating Olympic 400 meter hurdles gold medalist
Angelo Taylor, also of the U.S.A., by 100th of a sec-
ond. World Indoor Champion Chris Brown of the
Bahamas finished third, clocking 45.50.
Two time 400 meters hurdles world champion
Kerron Clement set an Adidas Grand Prix record in
New York on June 12th, clocking 47.86. Bershawn
Jackson finished a close second, timed at 47.94,
ahead of 2009 World Championships silver medalist
Javier Culson’s 48.47 seconds.
America’s Lashinda Demus captured the
women’s 400 meters hurdles in Shanghai, clocking
53.34. Natalya Antyukh of Russia trailed her, finish-
ing in 54.83, ahead of Poland’s Anna Jesien’s 55.12.
Botwana’s Amantle Monsho won the New
York Diamond League Adidas Grand Prix women’s
400 meters, clocking 50.79. Olympic silver medalist
Shericka Williams placed second with a 51.24 run,
while Jamaica’s Shereefa Lloyd came third, circling
the track in 51.64 seconds.
At the Diamond League season opener in
Doha, Kenya’s 21 year old African record holder
David Rudisha ran 50 second and 53 second laps to
beat compatriot Asbel Kiprop in the 800 meters.
Rudisha who ran 1:43.1 in Sydney back in March
arrived Doha as the world leader.
On June 4th in Oslo Rudisha broke the 31 year
old Bislett Stadium record beating principal rival
Abubaker Kaki of Sudan with a 1:42.0 performance.
(Top) America’s Virginia Powell wearing number 4 on the
Kaki’s 1:42.2 second place was the fastest non-
way to beating compatriot Lolo Jones in the women’s 100m
winning 800 meters in history. As former world
hurdles at Daegu. (Under) Veronica Campbell-Brown holding
champion and record holder Sebastian Coe looked the victors bouquet after winning the Addis Grand Prix
on from his stadium seat, both runners bested his women’s 200m in New York.
Bislett Games record of 1:42.33 set 9 years before
the two young runners were born. Grand Prix in New York on June 12th, South Africa’s
Coe who along with compatriot Steve Ovette Mbulaeni Mulaudzi, the 2009 World Champion,
dominated both 800 and 1500 meters in his era won the men’s 800m in a meet record 1:44.38.
told reporters he was not surprised at Rudisha’s America’s Nick Symmonds, a 2008 World Cham-
and Kaki’s performance, saying he was curious to pion, placed third in 1:45.46. Mulaudzi had earlier
see if one of these young fellows would eventually won the 800m at the May 19th Daegu Challenge
run the 800m under 100 seconds. Games, beating Kenyans Gilbert Kipchoge (1:46.01)
With Rudisha and Kaki absent at the Adidas and Abraham Kiplagat (1:46.02).
437 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Sports/Track & Field Diamond League
Two Lap Sprinting (Top) Kenya’s 21 year old African
800m record holder David Rudisha holds off Sudan’s
20 year old Abubaker Kaki in the 800m at Oslo on June
4; (below) South Africa’s Mbulaeni Mulaudzi raising
his arms in victory over 800 meters at the New York
Adidas Grand Prix on July 12th.

Kenya’s Janeth Jepkosgei won the Shanghai

woman’s 800 meters in 2:01.06, beating Ger-
many’s Jennifer Meadows who made it a close
race, clocking 2:01.34. Jamaica’s Kenia Sinclair
was only a few strides behind in third, stopping
the clock at 2:01.87.
At the Diamond League Adidas Grand Prix in
New York, Laura Januszewski, the 2009 NCAA
women’s runner up at 800m, beat all comers,
covering the two laps in 2:03.39. Two time NCAA
champion Green Gall was close behind at
2:03.83, while 2009 women’s mile champion
Sarah Bowman placed third with a time of
2:04.20.
Kenya’s Nancy Langat, the 2008 Olympics
gold medalist, ran a world leading and meet re-
cord 4:01.60 to win the women’s 1500 meters at
the New York Diamond League Adidas Grand
Prix. Olympic 5000m gold medalist (2004) Ethio-
pia’s Meserat Defar set the pace through the first
1200 meters, but finished second with a personal
best of 4:02. Ethiopia’s Gelete Burka, the 2008
world indoor champion, was third in 4:03.35.
Wurth Thomas, who took the lead at the gun and
led most of the way up to 1,200 meters, fell back
to seventh after trying to keep pace with the ac-
celeration of Langat and Defar over the last 300
meters.
In Shanghai East Africans swept the 1500
meters, with Kenyan Augustine Capron Chore
edging out compatriot Asbel Kiprop at the tape
by 2 hundredths of a second, 3:32.20 to 3:32.22.
Ethiopia’s Mekonnen Gebremedhin finished in
third place, clocking 3:33.35. The next seven
places were taken by Kenyans. Asbel Kiprop’s
turn for victory came in Oslo’s mile run, in which
he confidently strode past Ethiopia’s Mekonnen
Gebremedhin over the final 20 meters to win in a
respectable 3:49.56; though well off Moroccan
Hicham El Guerrouj’s 11 year old world record of
3:43.13. Gebremedhin also went below the 3:50
mark first breached by New Zealand’s John
Walker in 1975, running a personal best of
3:49.83. Kenyan Gideon Gathimba finished third
clocking 3:50.3, while his compatriot William Bi-
wott who set the world junior record in Oslo
438 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Track & Field Diamond League
last year and also won the 1500m at the World Ath-
letics Final last September was out of the medal
range in fourth place with a 3:50.75 mile.
At the New York Adidas Grand Prix Nicholas
Kemboi of Kenya took the lead during the bell lap
from Olympic silver medalist (1500m, 2004), two-
time world indoor champion (3,000m, 2004, ’10)
Bernard Lagat, who broke both the indoor and out-
door 5,000m American records this year. Kemboi,
fresh off a 1500m win on May 30 at the Cottbus
meet, broke the tape in 3:33.29, setting a meet re-
cord. Ethiopia’s Deresse Mekonnen, the two-time
world indoor champion, was second in 3:33.85; fol-
lowed by Leo Manzano, the USA indoor champion
in 1500m (3:33.92). Lagat, who acknowledged after
the race that his focus on the 5000m this year has
detracted a bit from his speed at the shorter dis-
tances, finished fifth in 3:34.36.
High school mile races for boys and girls were
included in the Adidas Grand Prix program in New
York. Dubbed the Jim Ryun High School Dream
Mile, after the Kansas high school student who set
the world record for the mile in 1965, the girls’ race
was won by sophomore Maddie Meyers from Seat-
tle, Washington, in 4:41.93. Shelby Hayes, a senior
from Winter Park, Florida, who dominated her
state’s High School Championships in 2010, was
second in 4:43. Kelsey Margey, a sophomore from
Greenlawn, NY, who was the runner-up in the
800m at the 2010 Nike Indoor Nationals, finished
third in 4:43.91.
Lukas Verzbicas, the 2009 Foot Locker Cross
Country champion, dominated the boys’ high
school mile, winning easily in 4:04.38. Jakob Hurysz,
this year’s national leader at 3200m, followed in
4:06.18, and Jim Rosa took third in 4:07.70. A favor-
ite leading into the race, Pat Schellberg, the reign-
ing champion of the Millrose Mile and the Penn (Top) Kenya’s Nicolas Kemboi crossing the 1500m finish line
Relays High School Boys Mile, did not finish the victorious at New York’s Diamond League Adidas Grand Prix
race. ( below ) 2008 Olympic women’s 1500m champion, Kenya’s
Nikki Hamblin of New Zealand won the Nancy Jebet Langot winning the event at the Addis Grand
women’s 1500 meters at Daegu, clocking 4:15.21, Prix
ahead of Australia’s Kaila McKnight and Kenya’s
Esther Chemtai, who ran 4:15.9 and 4:16.62, re- bronze medals in the women’s 3000 meters stee-
spectively. plechase. Jerotich covered the obstacle course in
The women’s 5000 meters at Shanghai was 9:16.82, well ahead of her compatriots Milcah
also virtually an all East African affair, with Ethio- Chemos, clocking 9:20.63 and Lydia Jebet Rotich in
pia’s Sentayehu Ejigu out pacing Kenya’s Linet 9:21.38.
Chepkwemoi Masai 14: 30.96 to 14: 31.14. Ethio- Ethiopians swept the women’s 5000 meters
pia’s Meselech Melkamu finished in third place, run at the New York Diamond League’s Adidas
clocking 14: 31.91. Kenyan and Ethiopian girls took Grand Prix with Tirunesh Dibaba victorious in
13 out of 16 finishing places. The Kenyans however, 15:11.34, followed by Sentayehu Ejugu in
led by Gladys Jerotich, won the gold, silver and 15:12.99and Sule Utura in 15:16.61.
439 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
Sports/Track & Field Diamond League
The men’s 3000m steeplechase at New
York’s Adidas Grand Prix was a Kenyan sweep.
Paul Kipsiele Koech, the 2004 Olympic bronze
medalist who ran the fastest steeplechase on
American soil at this meet in 2008, delivered once
again with a dominant 8:10.43. Fresh off a per-
sonal record of 8:09 at the Diamond League meet
in Doha, Patrick Langat took second in 8:15.52,
followed by 2008 Olympic gold medalist Brimin
Kipruto.
Poland’s Sylwester Bednarek, America’s
Jessie Williams and Sweden’s Linus Thönblad all
cleared the men’s high jump at 2.24m in Shang-
hai, but Bednarek got the victory on fewer misses.
At New York’s June 12th Addis Grand Prix Linus
Thornbald broke even with America’s Jessie Wil-
liams, both clearing the bar at 2.30 meters, but
this time Linus won on fewer misses.
Croatia’s two time women’s world champion
high jumper Blanka Vlasic cleared 2 meters for
the first time this year at Doha, going over the bar
at 2.01 on her first attempt and taking the gold
medal while upcoming challenger Chaunte How-
ard Lowe had to settle for silver after taking two
attempts to clear the bar at 2.01. Neither of the
two could clear 2.03, though Lowe had set the
U.S. record at 2.04 a few days earlier in the rain at
Cottbus, Germany on May 30th.
World Indoor Champion and record holder
20 year old Teddy Tamgho of France set a world
leading tripe jump at the Adidas Grand Prix in
New York on June 12th, defeating Olympic gold
medalist Christian Olsson as he did in Doha.
Germany’s Malte Mohr pole vaulted 5.70
meters in Shanghai to win the event by a 10cm
margin over 5.60 vaults by Russia’s Alaksandr
Gripich, Ukraine’s Maksym Mazuryk, Hendrik Gru-
ber also of Germany and China’s Yansheng Yang.
At Daegu Russia’s Yuliya Golubchikova won
the women’s pole vault, clearing the bar at 4.65.
Germany’s Carolin Hingst and Lacy Jansen of the
U.S.A. came second and third, respectively, both
clearing the bar at 4.50. At the Adidas Grand Prix
edition of the Diamond League in New York on
June 12, American national record-holder and
former United States Olympic team member
Jillian Schwartz vaulted 4.60m, beating Jenn
Suhr’s 4.50. Suhr, the 2008 Olympic silver medal- (Top) Ethiopia’s Sentayehu Ejigu crossing the women’s 5000m
finish line at the Shanghai Diamond League ahead of Kenya’s
ist who set an American record at this meet in
Linet Chepkwemoi Masai (bottom) 22 year old British born,
2007, competed for the first time this year.
newly naturalized New Zealander Nikki Hamblin won the
In the Adidas Grand Prix men’s pole vault women’s 1500 meters at the at Daegu, South Korea Chal-
Renaud Lavillenie, the 2009 World Championships lenge Games
bronze medalist, set a meet record with his 5.85m
440 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010
 Sports/Track & Field Diamond League
(Top Right) Croatia’s ace female high jumper Bianca Vlask
clearing the bar at the Doha Diamond League meet
(middle) Chaunte Howard Lowe, Bianca’s principal chal-
lenger in the high jump set a U.S. women’s record of 2.04
in Cottbus, Germany on May 30th; (Below) Usain Bolt wins
100m at Daegu, South Korea.

result. Steve Hooker, the 2008 Olympic gold medal-

ist, finished second and 2008 Olympian Przemyslaw
Czerwinski was third.
Sandra Perkovic, who was ranked 10th last
year, won the women’s discus in New York on June
12th with a hurl of 61.96m, ahead of two time Olym-
pian Aretha Hill Thurmond’s 61.19 meters.
At Rome Brianna Glenn won the women’s long
jump with a 6.789m leap, beating Ghanaian born
Canadian Ruky Abdulai’s 6.66m. America’s Funmi
Jimoh who contested in the 2008 Olympics finished
third, jumping 6.65m. Glenn again won the
women’s long jump at the Adidas Grand Prix in New
York, leaping 6.78m. Meet record-holder (6.74m/22
feet, 1.50 inches, 2009) Ruky Abdulai was second
with 6.66 and 2008 Olympian Funmi Jimoh was
third at 6.65m. Jimoh however won in Daegu, leap-
ing 6.68.
In her first competition in the U.S.A., Olympic,
World and Commonwealth Champion Valerie Vill
set a new meet record for the shot put– 19.93 me-
ters. Olympic silver medalist at Beijing (2008)and
2006 World Indoor Champion Natalya Khoroneko-
Mikhnevich placed second tossing the iron ball
18.99m.
Andreas Thorkildsen of Norway and Tero Pitka-
maki of Finland had met in the men’s javelin at
least 53 times in their careers—before the Adidas
Grand Prix in New York on June 12th, Thorkildsen
led the rivalry (27 to 26), and he added to that lead
on June 12th by throwing 87.02—a meet record.
Petr Frydrych, a 2009 World Championships team
member, had the second best throw (85.04), and
Pitkamaki came third with 82.57m.
Hyleas Fountain, the 2008 Olympic silver
medalist in the heptathlon, won the Adidas Grand
Prix multi-event challenge with 1815 points. Jessica
Ennis, 2010 World Indoor champion in the pentath-
lon and 2009 world champion in the heptathlon,
was the runner-up with 1778 points. Bettie Wade
was third with 1621 points.

441 Pan Africa & World Review 2nd Quarter 2010

Tours’
There is no more fantastic and
rewarding journey into
African history

♦ Nile Valley Odyssey is offered in 2 and

Etching of the legendary Queen Amanitore who rule as co-regent
to her husband King Natakamani in the first century A.D.
4 star value tours of 3, 5 and 10 days.
You will tour
♦ Kerma, the oldest of the Kushite King-
doms, dating back to 4000 B.C.
♦ Jebel Barkal, home of the Kushite Kings
that established Egypt’s 25th Dynasty
♦ The 224 pyramids in the Land of Kush
♦ Napata, where the last of the great
Kushite Kingdoms flourished from 300
B.C. to 550 A.D.
♦ The Royal City at Bejwraia
♦ The Sudan National Museum in Khar-
toum where statues of great Kushite
Kings, including Taharqa and Nataka-
mani are in tact.
♦ The grandiose temples at Musawarat
♦ The legendary Lion Temple
♦ Summer resort palaces of the kings at
Wad Banaga
♦ The ancient kiosk at Naga, the architec-
ture of which inspired that of Rome
centuries later
You will enjoy
♦ Travelling and sightseeing by road in a
Toyota Land Cruiser
♦ Food especially prepared by a chef ac-
companying the tour
♦ The rich picturesque literature on the
Kush Kingdoms available for purchase
♦ Recording all that you see with your
video camera or photo camera.
Contact
In Nigeria phone +234 80 23358777
E-Mail: spherespp@gmail.com

442
June 11 to July 11, 2010

443
 Africa the World and You
Quarterly Review of Global Africa and World History in the Making

The cornerstone for the new $150 million Africa Hall, Headquarters of the African Union, Addis Ababa,
Ethiopia, with 100 meter high office tower and 30 meter high conference center, offered by China as a gift to
Africa, was laid on July 9, 2007 in the presence of its Chinese architect Ren Lizhi

• Pan Africa & World Review is a picturesque book of quarterly articles commenting on and
condensing issues in the news. It is sectionalized by continent and also by feature sections
which include arts, automobiles, entertainment, environment, fashions, health, information
media, science & technology and sports. The International section contains commodity
and financial market data, in addition to global political economy, personalities and multi-
national corporation events and issues for the quarter

• Subscribers can write the publisher specifying particular events or issues they would like to
be featured.

444